Skip to main content

Full text of "International Legislation A Collection Of The Texts Of Multipartite International Instruments Of General Interest Voluem VI 1932 1934"

See other formats


(Etig 


This  Volume  Is  for 
REFERENCE  USE  ONLY 


Publications  of  the 
Carnegie  Endowment  for  International  Peace 

Division  of  International  Law 
Washington 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 

VOLUME  SIX 
1932-1934 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 

A  COLLECTION  OF  THE  TEXTS  OF 

MULTIPARTITE  INTERNATIONAL  INSTRUMENTS 

OF  GENERAL  INTEREST 


EDITED  BY 

MANLEY  0.  HUDSON 

WITH  THE  COLLABORATION  OF 

RUTH  E.  BACON 


VOLUME  VI  /  1932-1934 
NUMBERS  304-401 


WASHINGTON 

CARNEGIE  ENDOWMENT  FOR  INTERNATIONAL  PEACE 

700  JACKSON  PLACE,  N.  W. 

1937 


COPYRIGHT  1937 

BY  THE 
CARNEGIE  ENDOWMENT  FOR  INTERNATIONAL  PEACE 


PREFACE  TO  VOLUME  VI 

Four  volumes  of  this  series  on  International  Legislation,  for  the  ten  years 
from  June  28,  1919,  to  June  30,  1929,  were  published  in  1931;  and  a  fifth 
volume  for  the  period  from  July  I,  1929,  to  December  31,  1931,  was  pub- 
lished in  1936.  This  sixth  volume  covers  the  period  from  January  I,  1932, 
to  December  31,  1934.  Its  bulk  is  an  indication  of  the  unceasing  legislative 
activity  which  characterizes  the  current  development  of  international  law. 
So  many  international  agencies  now  exist,  so  many  changes  are  occurring  in 
international  life,  and  so  pressing  are  the  needs  for  further  organization  of  the 
international  community,  that  the  legislative  content  of  international  law 
is  being  extended  year  by  year;  the  year  1934  was  particularly  productive. 

In  this  volume  the  texts  of  some  150  instruments  are  reproduced.  In 
their  selection,  an  effort  has  been  made  to  include  all  multipartite  agreements 
which  were  signed  or  otherwise  brought  to  a  stage  admitting  of  definitive 
governments  during  the  period  of  three  years.  Mere  drafts  and 
inrtfyWcPdrafts  are  not  included;  but  this  does  not  apply  to  the  so-called 
"  draft  conventions  "  adopted  by  the  International  Labor  Conference,  which 
are  subject  to  ratification  though  not  signed.  Of  the  instruments  included, 
all  but  28  are  indicated  to  have  entered  into  force.  As  in  previous  volumes 
of  the  series,  the  line  has  not  been  drawn  to  exclude  signed  instruments  not 
brought  into  force;  they  may  have  an  important  place  in  the  history  of  legis- 
lation, and  some  of  them  may  yet  be  made  effective.  When  the  type  of  the 
volume  was  closed,  91  of  the  instruments  reproduced  had  been  registered 
with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations  in  accordance  with  the  provi- 
sions of  Article  18  of  the  Covenant,  and,  with  the  exception  of  the  labor  con- 
ventions, these  instruments  had  been  or  will  be  published  in  the  League  of 
Nations  Treaty  Series. 

The  variety  of  the  instruments,  with  respect  to  their  legal  character,  seems 
to  merit  special  attention.  To  some  extent  it  is  indicated  by  the  titles  given 
to  instruments — in  almost  all  cases  the  editor  has  endeavored  to  reproduce 
the  titles  assigned  by  the  negotiators.  This  volume  contains  43  so-called 
conventions,  30  protocols,  26  agreements,  21  sets  of  rules  or  regulations,  7 
declarations,  5  arrangements,  4  treaties,  2  acts  (including  final  acts  which  incor- 
porate agreements),  2  pacts,  2  proc&s-verbaux,  2  statutes.  Other  titles  em- 
ployed are  measures,  optional  clause,  provisions.  Why  was  one  of  these 
titles  used  instead  of  another?  Definite  lines  of  demarcation  cannot  be  laid 
down.  The  choice  is  sometimes  dictated  by  a  tradition  prevailing  in  a  par- 
ticular field  of  legislative  activity,  as  in  the  work  of  the  conferences  of  the 
Universal  Postal  Union  and  of  the  conferences  on  the  protection  of  industrial 
property;  some  of  the  titles  are  intended  to  indicate  the  subsidiary  character 
of  an  instrument,  as  in  the  use,  on  certain  occasions  but  not  on  others,  of  the 


Viii  PREFACE 

title  protocol;  some  of  the  titles  are  intended  to  indicate  informality;  in  some 
cases  the  title  used  may  have  a  bearing  on  the  competence  of  particular  na- 
tional agencies  to  effect  a  final  acceptance;  but  in  some  cases  the  choice  must 
be  put  down  to  caprice.  None  of  the  names  used  can  be  said  to  be  a  term  of 
art;  nor  is  any  legal  hierarchy  established  among  them.  In  a  current  pub- 
lication— the  Chronology  of  International  Treaties  and  Legislative  Measures, 
published  bimonthly  by  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations— a  distinc- 
tion is  drawn  between  conventions  and  treaties,  the  former  term  being  re- 
served for  multipartite  and  the  latter  for  bipartite  instruments;  this  volume 
shows  that  actual  usage  does  not  altogether  vindicate  that  distinction. 

The  international  agencies  employed  in  legislative  activity  vary  greatly. 
In  many  instances,  they  are  international  conferences  meeting  regularly 
at  more  or  less  fixed  intervals:  thus,  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations 
meeting  four  times  a  year;  the  International  Labor  Conference  meeting  an- 
nually or  oftener;  the  International  Conference  of  American  States  meeting 
every  five  years;  and  the  Universal  Postal  Conference  meeting  every  five 
years.  Many  of  the  international  conferences  are  convoked  ad  hoc,  how- 
ever, and  no  provision  is  made  for  their  reassembling.  In  a  few  iuta^ces, 
by  the  use  of  established  international  institutions,  instruments  l^rc'oeen 
drawn  up  and  opened  to  signature  without  the  intervention  of  any  con- 
ference. The  intervention  of  a  single  government,  undertaking  to  procure 
the  consent  of  other  governments — as  in  the  case  of  the  modification  of  the 
regulations  annexed  to  the  Convention  on  Safety  of  Life  at  Sea  (No.  323) — is 
perhaps  more  rare  than  in  former  times. 

A  striking  feature  of  the  international  relations  of  our  time  is  the  ease  with 
which  international  conferences  can  now  be  assembled  with  a  view  to  legis- 
lative action*  This  is  in  some  measure  due  to  the  influence  of  permanent 
administrative  agencies,  now  more  numerous  than  in  any  previous  period  of 
history.  It  is  due,  also,  to  a  change  in  the  attitude  of  governments  which 
has  come  about  during  the  past  seventy-five  years ;  with  a  few  exceptions 
the  governments  of  practically  all  states  now  appreciate  their  interest  in 
welding  the  international  community  by  the  continuance  of  legislative 
activity.  In  certain  fields,  traditions  have  come  to  exist,  and  many  are  the 
separate  leagues  of  nations  from  which  states  have  ceased  to  contemplate 
the  possibility  of  withdrawal. 

The  subject-matter  of  the  instruments  reproduced  in  this  volume  covers  a 
wide  range  of  interests.  In  some  instances,  it  may  clearly  be  said  to  be  of  a 
political  nature — as  for  example  the  Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente  (No.  364) ; 
in  others,  it  is  distinctly  technical — the  Agreement  concerning  Statistics  of 
Causes  of  Death  (No.  386)  is  an  example.  In  the  modern  world,  however, 
political  is  an  expansive  term,  and  not  infrequently  its  connotations  find  ex- 
pression in  formulas  of  a  highly  technical  nature — as  in  the  European  Broad- 
casting Convention  (No.  330).  The  field  of  communications  continues  to 
offer  the  most  numerous  opportunities  for  legislative  effort,  and  modern  in- 


PREFACE  IX 

ventions  in  that  field  have  had  great  influence  in  extending  the  bounds  of 
international  action,  as  is  indicated  by  the  agreements  on  the  use  of  radio 
beacons  (Nos.  341,  345,  378)  and  those  on  various  phases  of  aviation  (Nos. 
326,  328,  329).  Interest  in  social  well-being  creates  persistent  demands  for 
new  legislation,  also,  as  is  indicated  not  only  by  the  numerous  labor  conven- 
tions, but  also  by  the  conventions  on  traffic  in  women  (No.  348),  the  status 
of  refugees  (No.  350),  and  the  Equal  Rights  Treaty  (No.  363).  Health  and 
plagues  of  various  sorts  have  long  been  the  subject  of  international  action — 
this  volume  includes  a  Convention  on  Mutual  Protection  against  Dengue 
Fever  (No.  392),  an  Agreement  concerning  the  Campaign  against  Locusts 
(No.  398),  and  two  agreements  concerning  bills  of  health  (Nos.  399,  400). 
Current  efforts  to  order  the  world's  economy  with  respect  to  the  marketing 
of  commodities  are  manifest  in  such  instruments  as  the  Silver  Agreement 
(No.  343),  the  Final  Act  of  the  Conference  of  Wheat  Exporting  and  Im- 
porting Countries  (No.  344),  the  Agreement  for  the  International  Tin  Con- 
trol Scheme  (No.  349),  and  the  Agreement  for  the  Regulation  of  Production 
and  Export  of  Rubber  (No.  379).  In  a  few  cases,  however,  instruments  in 
this  volume  deal  with  subjects  rarely  encountered  in  international  legisla- 
tion— fof  instance,  the  Convention  concerning  the  Preservation  of  Fauna 
and  Flora  in  their  Natural  State  (No.  352). 

A  word  may  be  said  also  concerning  the  parties  to  instruments.  For  the 
purposes  of  this  series — as  explained  in  the  preface  to  Volume  I,  p.  xvi — a 
multipartite  instrument  is  one  to  which  more  than  two  states  are  parties. 
The  Declaration  by  the  Kingdom  of  Iraq  (No.  308)  and  the  so-called  Agree- 
ment on  Collaboration  in  Rumania  (No.  324),  may  seem  to  be  exceptions  to 
this  criterion,  as  they  were  signed  on  behalf  of  a  single  state:  but  in  both  in- 
stances, the  instrument  was  accepted  by  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Na- 
tions and  had  the  effect  of  creating  relations  between  the  signatory  and  the 
League  of  Nations  or  certain  of  its  members.  Nor  is  the  so-called  Ouchy 
Convention  (No.  313)  an  exception;  not  only  were  three  states  signatories, 
but  it  was  launched  in  an  effort  to  enlist  the  economic  cooperation  of  a  larger 
number  of  states.  A  few  instruments  are  included  to  which,  strictly  speak- 
ing, there  are  no  parties,  but  which  relate  to  the  functioning  of  international 
institutions — thus,  the  Rules  to  Facilitate  the  Settlement  of  Economic  Dis- 
putes (No.  304)  and  the  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Council  of  the  League  of 
Nations  (No.  327).  It  may  also  be  noted  that  all  of  the  parties  are  not  al- 
ways states  or  members  of  the  League  of  Nations;  in  some  cases  the  parties 
include  more  or  less  dependent  communities — as  in  the  case  of  the  Agree- 
ment for  the  Tin  Control  Scheme  (No.  349). 

The  number  of  parties  to  some  of  the  instruments  also  deserves  a  word  of 
comment.  Many  of  the  agreements  were  designed  for  universal,  or  approxi- 
mately universal,  acceptance.  Some  of  them  have  been  ratified  or  ac- 
ceded to  by  large  numbers  of  states — thus,  there  are  45  parties  to  the 
Telecommunication  Convention  (No.  316),  and  54  to  the  Universal  Postal 


X  PREFACE 

Convention  (No.  367).  Such  instruments  have  become,  in  a  very  true  sense, 
part  of  the  world's  statute  law.  On  the  other  hand,  some  of  the  instruments 
reproduced  are  local  in  character,  regulating  the  relations  of  states  which 
form  for  the  purpose  a  regional  community;  thus,  the  conventions  on  judg- 
ments (No.  305),  on  bankruptcy  (No.  351),  and  the  Central  American  extra- 
dition convention  (No.  376).  Such  instruments  may  have  more  than  a  local 
interest,  however,  and  in  some  cases  they  may  point  the  direction  for  general 
effort. 

To  a  considerable  extent,  the  tendency  appears  to  standardize  the  formal 
provisions  of  international  instruments,  dealing  with  such  topics  as  lan- 
guages, the  necessity  for  ratification,  the  deposit  of  ratifications,  the  date  of 
entry  into  force,  and  the  possibility  of  accession.  Yet  the  present  situation 
can  hardly  be  said  to  be  satisfactory  in  this  respect,  for  in  numerous  cases 
difficulty  will  be  encountered  in  determining  the  precise  status  of  an  instru- 
ment. 

In  most  cases,  the  texts  of  instruments  have  been  reproduced  in  toto  in 
two  of  the  original  languages,  or  in  the  original  language  and  an  English 
translation.  Some  exceptions  have  been  made  to  this  general  rule,  however. 
To  save  space  and  expense,  a  few  of  the  instruments  have  been  reproduced  in 
part  only:  thus,  the  labor  conventions  of  1933  (Nos.  334-338),  in  which  the 
formal  articles  and  some  of  the  substantive  articles  are  identical.  In  the 
Telecommunication  Convention  and  Regulations  (Nos.  316-321),  and  the 
Postal  Convention  and  Arrangements  (Nos.  367-373),  some  technical,  as 
distinguished  from  administrative,  provisions  have  been  omitted.  Where 
the  original  languages  include  English  and  French,  these  versions  have  been 
preferred  as  a  rule,  except  in  the  case  of  inter-American  instruments.  With 
respect  to  instruments  in  the  various  Scandinavian  languages,  translations 
have  been  preferred  to  the  original  versions.  Wherever  a  translation  is 
given,  it  is  always  taken  from  some  reliable  source,  which  is  indicated,  as 
the  editor  has  assumed  no  responsibility  for  translating. 

The  editor  has  had  the  valuable  collaboration  of  Miss  Ruth  Bacon  in  the 
preparation  of  this  volume.  A  grant  in  aid  for  such  assistance  was  made  by 
the  Bureau  of  International  Research  of  Harvard  University  and  Radcliffe 
College.  Grateful  acknowledgment  must  also  be  made  of  the  kindness  of 
numerous  friends  in  international  secretariats  and  in  the  foreign  offices  of  va- 
rious governments,  who  have  supplied  the  editor  both  with  texts  and  with 
information  concerning  them.  Finally  the  editor  must  express  appreciation 
of  the  editing  work  done  by  Miss  Ruth  E.  Stanton  of  the  Carnegie  Endow- 
ment for  International  Peace,  without  which  this  volume  would  be  far  less 
usable  in  form  and  attractive  in  appearance. 

MANLEY  O.  HUDSON 
CAMBRIDGE,  MASSACHUSETTS 
July  i,  1937 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

PREFACE vii 

NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS xiv 

CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS xxviii 

SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS xxxiv 

TEXTS  OF  INSTRUMENTS i 

SUBJECT  INDEX 973 


LISTS  OF  INSTRUMENTS 
IN  VOLUME  VI 


NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

1932 

No.  PAGE 

304.  Rules  of  Procedure  to  Facilitate  the  Peaceful  and  Rapid  Settlement  of  Economic 

Disputes.    Adopted  by  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations,  Geneva, 
January  28,  1932 I 

305.  Convention  concerning  the  Recognition  and  Enforcement  of  Judgments. 

Signed  at  Copenhagen,  March  16,  1932 6 

306.  Convention  concerning  the  Protection  against  Accidents  of  Workers  Employed 

in  Loading  and  Unloading  Ships  (Revised  1932).    Adopted  at  Geneva,  April 

27,  1932 12 

307.  Convention  concerning  the  Age  for  Admission  of  Children  to  Non-Industrial 

Employment.    Adopted  at  Geneva,  April  30,  1932 30 

308.  Declaration  by  the  Kingdom  of  Iraq.    Signed  at  Baghdad,  May  30,  1932 39 

309.  Agreement  concerning  the  Setting-Up  of  Special  Services  at  the  Iron  Gates. 

Signed  at  Semmering,  June  28,  1932 47 

309a.  Final  Protocol  to  the  Agreement  concerning  the  Setting-Up  of  Special 

Services  at  the  Iron  Gates.    Signed  at  Semmering,  June  28,  1932 71 

310.  Agreement  concerning  Non-German  Reparations.    Signed  at  Lausanne,  July  7, 

1932 72 

311.  Agreement  concerning  German  Reparations.    Opened  for  signature  at  Lau- 

sanne, July  9,  1932 73 

3lia.  Transitional   Measures   concerning  German   Reparations,    Signed   at 

Lausanne,  July  9,  1932 , 81 

3 lib.  Proems-verbal  relating  to  the  Ratification  of  the  Agreement  concerning 

German  Reparations.    Initialled  at  Lausanne,  July  2, 1932 83 

312.  Austrian  Protocol.    Opened  for  signature  at  Geneva,  July  15,  1932 84 

313.  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers,    Signed  at  Geneva,  July  18, 

1932 94 

3i3a.  Protocol  to  the  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers. 

Signed  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932 IOI 

3i3b.  Declaration  annexed  to  the  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic 

Barriers.    Signed  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932 104 

314.  Declaration  by  American  States.    Signed  at  Washington,  August  3,  1932 105 

315.  Additional  Act  to  the  Convention  of  October  23,  1924,  on  the  Transport  of 

Goods  by  Rail.    Opened  for  signature  at  Berne,  September  2,  1932 107 

316.  Telecommunication  Convention.    Signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932 109 

317.  General  Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Convention. 

Signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932 133 

3i7a.  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  International  Consultative  Committee  for 
Radiocommunkations  (C.C.I.R.).  Appendix  14  to  the  General  Radio 
Regulations  signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932 , 178 

3i7b.  Final  Protocol  to  the  General  Radio  Regulations.    Signed  at  Madrid, 

December  9,  1932 182 

xiv 


LISTE  NUMERIQUE  DES  INSTRUMENTS 

1932 

No.  PAGE 

304.  Reglement  de  procedure  pour  faciliter  la  solution  pacifique  et  rapide  des  dlffe- 

rends  d'ordre  economique.    Adopte  par  le  Conseil  de  la  Societe  des  Nations, 
Geneve,  28  Janvier  1932  .............................................        i 

305.  Convention  relative  a  la  reconnaissance  et  a  1'execution  des  jugements.    Signee 

a  Copenhague,  16  mars  1932  .........................................        6 

306.  Convention  concernant  la  protection  des  trayailleurs  occupes  au  chargement  et 

au  dechargement  des  bateaux  contre  les  accidents  (revis6e  en  1932).    Adoptee 

a  Geneve,  27  avril  1932  ..............................................       12 

307.  Convention  concernant  1'^.ge  d'admission  des  enfants  aux  travaux  non-indus- 

triels.    Adoptee  a  Geneve,  30  avril  1932  ...............................      30 

308.  Declaration  du  Royaume  de  Tlrak,    Signee  a  Bagdad,  30  roai  1932  ..........      39 

309.  Accord  relatif  a  la  constitution  des  services  speciaux  aux  Portes-de-Fer.    Signe 

au  Semmering,  28  juin  1932  ..........................................      47 

309a.  Protocole  final  a  1'Accord  relatif  a  la  constitution  des  services  spdciaux  aux 

Portes-de-Fer.    Signe  au  Semmering,  28  juin  1932  .................      71 

310.  Accord  relatif  aux  reparations  non-allemandes.    Signe  a  Lausanne,  7  juillet  1932      72 

311.  Accord  relatif  aux  reparations  allemandes.    Ouvert  a  la  signature  a  Lausanne, 

9  juillet  1932  .......................................................       73 

3iia.  Mesures  de  transition  relatives  aux  reparations  allemandes.    Signes  & 

Lausanne,  9  juillet  1932  ........................................       81 

31  ib.  Prices-verbal  concernant  la  ratification  de  F  Accord  relatif  aux  repara- 

tions allemandes.    Paraphe  a  Lausanne,  2  juillet  1932  .............       83 

312.  Protocole  autrichien.    Ouvert  a  la  signature  a  Geneve,  15  juillet  1932  ........       84 

313.  Convention  pour  Fabaissement  des  barrieres  economiques.    Signee  a  Geneve, 

18  juillet  1932  ......................................  .  ...............      94 

3i3a.  Protocole  de  la  Convention  pour  Tabaissement  des  barrieres  economiques. 

Signe  &  Geneve,  18  juillet  1932  ..................................     101 

3i3b.  Declaration  annex6e  a  la  Convention  pour  1'abaissement  des  barrieres 

economiques.    Signee  a  Geneve,  18  juillet  1932  ..................  .  .     104 

314.  Declaration  por  Estados  Americanos*    Firmada  en  Washington,  3  de  agosto  de 

1932  ...............................................................     105 

315.  Acte  additionnel  a  la  Convention  du  23  octobre  1924  concernant  le  transport  des 

marchandises  par  chemins  de  fer.    Ouvert  &  la  signature  a  Berne,  2  septembre 
1932  ...............................................................     107 

316.  Convention  des  telecommunications.    Sign6e  a  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932  ----     109 

317.  R&glement  g6neral  des  radiocommunications  annexe  a  la  Convention  des  tele- 

communications.   Signe  a  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932  .....................     133 

3i7a.  Reglement  interieur  du  Comite  Consultatif  International  des  Radio- 
communications  (C.C.I.R.).  Appendice  14  au  R&glement  general  des 
radiocommunications  signe  a  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932  .............  178 


3i7b.  Protocole  final  au  Reglement  general  des  radiocommunications. 

a  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932  .....................................     182 


xv 


XVI  NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  PAGE 

318.  Additional  Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Convention. 

Signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932 185 

319.  Additional  Protocol  (European)  to  the  Acts  of  the  International  Radiotelegraph 

Conference  of  Madrid.    Signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932 192 

320.  Telegraph  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Convention.    Signed 

at  Madrid,  December  10,  1932 200 

320a.  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  International  Telegraph  Consultative  Commit- 
tee (C.C.I.T.).  Annex  II  to  the  Telegraph  Regulations  signed  at 
Madrid,  December  10, 1932 250 

32ob.  Final  Protocol  of  the  Telegraph  Regulations.  Signed  at  Madrid,  Decem- 
ber 10,  1932 255 

32 1 .  Telephone  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Convention.    Signed 

at  Madrid,  December  10,  1932 257 

32 1 a.  Internal  Regulations  of  the  International  Telephone  Consultative  Com- 
mittee (C.C.I.F.).  Annex  to  the  Telephone  Regulations  signed  at 
Madrid,  December  10,  1932 274 

322.  Convention  concerning  the  Preservation  of  Plaice  In  the  Skagerak,  the  Kattegat 

and  Sound.    Signed  at  Stockholm,  December  31,  1932 277 

322a.  Final  Protocol  to  the  Convention  concerning  the  Preservation  of  Plaice. 

Signed  at  Stockholm,  December  31,  1932 280 

1933 

323.  Modification  of  the  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Convention  on  Safety  of  Life  at 

Sea.     Certified  at  London,  January  17, 1933 281 

324.  Agreement  establishing  an  Advisory  Technical  Collaboration  in  Rumania. 

Signed  at  Geneva,  January  28,  1933 282 

325.  Pact  of  Organization  of  the  Little  Entente.    Signed  at  Geneva,  February  16, 

1933 288 

326.  Sanitary  Convention  for  Aerial  Navigation.    Opened  for  signature  at  The 

Hague,  April  12,  1933 292 

327.  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations.    Adopted  at 

Geneva,  May  26,  1933 321 

328.  Convention  for  the  Unification  of  Certain  Rules  relating  to  the  Precautionary 

Attachment  of  Aircraft.    Opened  for  signature  at  Rome,  May  29, 1933 327 

329.  Convention  for  the  Unification  of  Certain  Rules  relating  to  Damages  Caused 

by  Aircraft  to  Third  Parties  on  the  Surface.    Opened  for  signature  at  Rome, 
May  29,  1933 334 

330.  European  Broadcasting  Convention.    Signed  at  Lucerne,  June  19,  1933 345 

33oa.  Final  Protocol  annexed  to  the  European  Broadcasting  Convention. 

Signed  at  Lucerne,  June  19, 1933 363 

331 .  Agreement  concerning  a  Modus  Vivendi  relating  to  the  Jurisdiction  of  the  Euro- 

pean Commission  of  the  Danube.    Signed  at  Semmering,  June  25,  1933 364 

33ia.  Declaration  annexed  to  the  Modus  Vivendi  relating  to  the  Jurisdiction  of  the 
European  Commission  of  the  Danube.  Signed  at  Semmering,  June  25, 
1933 367 

332.  Convention   concerning  Fee-Charging   Employment  Agencies.    Adopted   at 

Geneva,  June  29,  1933 368 

333.  Convention  concerning  Compulsory  Old-Age  Insurance  for  Persons  Employed 

in  Industrial  or  Commercial  Undertakings,  in  the  Liberal  Professions,  and  for 
Outworkers  and  Domestic  Servants.     Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  29,  1933. , .     374 


LISTE  NUMERIQUE  DES  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  PAGE 

318.  Reglement  additionnel  des  radiocommunications  annexe  a  la  Convention  des 

telecommunications.    Signe  £  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932 185 

319.  Prptocole  additionnel  (europeen)  aux  Actes  de  la  Conference  radiote!6graphique 

Internationale  de  Madrid.    Signe  £  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932 192 

320.  Reglement  te!6graphique  annexe  a  la  Convention  des  telecommunications, 

Signe  a  Madrid,  10  decembre  1932 200 

32oa.  Reglement  int6rieur  du  Comite  Consultatif  International  Telegraphique 
(C.C.I.T.).  Annexe  II  au  Reglement  telegraphique  signe  a  Madrid, 
10  decembre  1932 250 

32ob.  Protocole  final  du  Reglement  telegraphique.  Sign6  a  Madrid,  10  de- 
cembre 1932 255 

321.  Reglement  telephonique  annexe  a  la  Convention  des  telecommunications. 

Sign6  &  Madrid,  10  decembre  1932 257 

32 1  a,  Reglement  int£rieur  du  Comite  Consultatif  International  Telephonique 
(C.C.I.F.).  Annexe  au  Reglement  telephonique  signe  &  Madrid, 
10  decembre  1932 274 

322.  Convention  concernant  la  protection  de  la  plie  dans  le  Skagerak,  le  Cattegat  et 

le  Sund.    Signee  a  Stockholm,  31  decembre  1932 277 

322a.  Protocole  final  de  la  Convention  concernant  la  protection  de  la  plie. 

Signe  a  Stockholm,  31  d6cembre  1932 280 

1933 

323.  Modification  du  reglement  annexe  a  la  Convention  pour  la  sauvegarde  de  la  vie 

humaine  en  mer.     Certifiee  &  Londres,  17  Janvier  1933 281 

324.  Accord  instituant  une  collaboration  technique  consultative  en  Roumanie.    Sign6 

a  Geneve,  28  Janvier  1933 282 

325.  Pacte  df organisation  de  la  Petite  Entente.    Signe  a  Geneve,  16  fevrier  1933 ....     288 

326.  Convention  sanitaire  pour  la  navigation  aerienne.     Ouverte  &  la  signature  &  La 

Haye,  12  avril  1933 292 

327.  Reglement  interieur  du  Conseil  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations.    Adopte  &  Geneve, 

26  mai  1933 32* 

328.  Convention  pour  ['unification  de  certaines  regies  relatives  £  la  saisie  conserva- 

toire des  a6ronefs.     Ouverte  a  la  signature  a  Rome,  29  mai  1933 327 

329.  Convention  pour  ['unification  de  certaines  regies  relatives  aux  dommages  causes 

par  les  aeronefs  aux  tiers  a  la  surface.    Ouverte  &  la  signature  a  Rome,  29  mai 
1933 334 

330.  Convention  europeenne  de  radiodiffusion.    Signee  a  Lucerne,  19  juin  1933 —  .     345 

330a.  Protocole  final  annexe  ^  la  Convention  europ6enne  de  radiodiffusion. 

Sign6  &  Lucerne,  19  juin  1933 363 

331.  Accord  concernant  un  Modus  Vivendi  relatif  £  la  juridiction  de  la  Commission 

Europeenne  du  Danube,    Sign6  au  Semmering,  25  juin  1933 364 

33 1  a.  Declaration  annexee  au  Modus  Vivendi  relatif  a  la  juridiction  de  la  Com- 
mission Europeenne  du  Danube.  Signee  au  Semmering,  25  juin  1933 . .  367 

332.  Convention  concernant  les  bureaux  de  placement  payants.    Adoptee  &  Geneve, 

29  juin  1933 368 

333-  Convention  concernant  1'assurance-vieillesse  obligatoire  des  salaries  des  entre- 
prises  industrielles  et  commerciales,  des  professions  liberales,  ainsi  que  des 
travailleurs  a  domicile  et  des  gens  de  maison.  Adoptee  &  Greneve,  29  juin 
1933 * 374 


XViii  NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No. 

334.  Convention  concerning  Compulsory  Old- Age  Insurance  for  Persons  Employed  in 

Agricultural  Undertakings.    Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  29,  1933 385 

335.  Convention  concerning  Compulsory  Invalidity  Insurance  for  Persons  Employed 

in  Industrial  or  Commercial  Undertakings,  in  the  Liberal  Professions,  and  for 
Outworkers  and  Domestic  Servants.  Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  29,  1933. . .  387 

336.  Convention  concerning  Compulsory  Invalidity  Insurance  for  Persons  Employed 

'     in  Agricultural  Undertakings.    Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  29,  1933 392 

337.  Draft  Convention  concerning  Compulsory  Widows'  and  Orphans'  Insurance  for 

Persons  Employed  in  Industrial  or  Commercial  Undertakings,  in  the  Liberal 
Professions,  and  for  Outworkers  and  Domestic  Servants.  Adopted  at 
Geneva,  June  29,  1933 398 

338.  Draft  Convention  concerning  Compulsory  Widows'  and  Orphans'  Insurance  for 

Persons  Employed  in  Agricultural  Undertakings.    Adopted  at  Geneva,  June 

29,  1933 409 

339.  Convention  defining  Aggression.     Signed  at  London,  July  3,  1933 410 

339a.  Declaration  annexed  to  Article  3  of  the  Convention  defining  Aggression, 

Signed  at  London,  July  3,  1933 414 

339b.  Protocol  of  Signature  of  the  Convention  defining  Aggression.    Signed  at 

London,  July  3, 1933 4*5 

340.  Convention  defining  Aggression.    Signed  at  London,  July  4, 1933 416 

341.  Regional  Arrangement  concerning  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Signed  at  Paris, 

July  8, 1933 419 

342.  Agreement  of  Understanding  and  Cooperation.     Signed  at  Rome,  July  15, 1933     426 

343.  Memorandum  of  Heads  of  Agreement  between  Holders  of  Large  Stocks  or  Users 

of  Silver  and  Principal  Producers  of  Silver.     Signed  at  London,  July  22,  1933     430 

343a.  Undertakings  Supplementary  to  the  Silver  Agreement.    London,  July  24, 

26,  1933 435 

344.  Final  Act  of  the  Conference  of  Wheat  Exporting  and  Importing  Countries. 

Opened  for  signature  at  London,  August  25, 1933 437 

345.  Regional   Arrangement   concerning   Maritime    Radio    Beacons.     Stockholm, 

September  20, 1933 446 

346.  Anti-War  Treaty  of  Non-Aggression  and  Conciliation.     Signed  at  Rio  de 

Janeiro,  October  10,  1933 448 

347.  Convention  for  Facilitating  the  International  Circulation  of  Films  of  an  Educa- 

tional Character.    Opened  for  signature  at  Geneva,  October  II,  1933 456 

347a.  Proems-verbal  concerning  the  Deposit  of  Ratifications  of  or  Accessions  to 
the  Convention  for  Facilitating  the  International  Circulation  of  Films 
of  an  Educational  Character.  Done  at  Geneva,  October  17, 1934 468 

348.  Convention  for  the  Suppression  of  the  Traffic  in  Women  of  Full  Age.    Opened 

for  signature  at  Geneva,  October  II,  1933 , 469 

349.  Agreement  for  the  International  Tin  Control  Scheme.    Signed  at  London,  Octo- 

ber 27,  1933 47<5 

349a.  Supplementary  Agreement  to  the  Agreement  for  the  International  Tin 

Control  Scheme.    Signed  at  London,  October  27,  1933 480 

349b.  Agreement  for  the  Tin  Buffer  Stock  Scheme.    Signed  at  The  Hague,  July 

io>  1934 481 

350.  Convention  concerning  the  International  Status  of  Refugees.     Opened  for  sig- 

nature at  Geneva,  October  28,  1933 , 483 


LISTE  NUMERIQUE  DES  INSTRUMENTS  xix 

No.  PAGE 

334.  Convention  concernant  1'assurance-vieillesse  obligatoire  des  salaries  des  entre- 

prises  agricoles.     Adoptee  a  Geneve,  29  juin  1933 385 

335.  Convention  concernant  rassurance-invalidite  obligatoire  des  salaries  des  entre- 

prises  industrielles  et  commerciales,  des  professions  liberates,  ainsi  que  des 
travailleurs  a  domicile  et  des  gens  de  maison.     Adoptee  a  Geneve,  29  juin  1933     387 

336.  Convention  concernant  1'assurance-invalidite  obligatoire  des  salaries  des  entre- 

prises  agricoles.    Adopted  &  Geneve,  29  juin  1933 392 

337.  Projet  de  convention  concernant  Tassurance-deces  obligatoire  des  salaries  des  en- 

treprises  industrielles  et  commerciales,  des  professions  liberates,  ainsi  que  des 
travailleurs  a  domicile  et  des  gens  de  maison.     Adopte  a  Geneve,  29  juin  1933     398 

338.  Projet  de^  convention  concernant  I'assurance-de'ces  obligatoire  des  salaries  des 

entreprises  agricoles.     Adopte  a  Geneve,  29  juin  1933 409 

339.  Convention  de  definition  de  1'agression.     Signe"e  a  Londres,  3  juillet  1933 410 

339a,  Declaration  annexee  a  Tarticle  3  de  la  Convention  de  definition  de 

Tagression.     Signee  a  Londres,  3  juillet  1933 414 

339b.  Protocole  de  signature  de  la  Convention  de  definition  de  1'agression. 

Signe  a  Londres,  3  juillet  1933 415 

340.  Convention  de  definition  de  1'agression.     Signee  a  Londres,  4  juillet  1933. ....     416 

341.  Arrangement  regional  concernant  les  radiophares  maritimes.     Signe  a  Paris, 

8  juillet  1933 419 

342.  Pacte  d'entente  et  de  collaboration.     Signe  a  Rome,  15  juillet  1933 :  •     42^ 

343.  Accord  entre  les  pays  qui  detiennent  d'importants  stocks  d'argent  ou  qui  font 

usage  de  ce  metal  et  les  principaux  pays  producteurs  d'argent.    Signe  a 
Londres,  22  juillet  1933 430 

343a.  Engagements  supplementaires  &  F  Accord  relatif  a  1'argent.    Londres,  24, 

26  juillet  1933 435 

344.  Acte  final  de  la  Conference  des  pays  exportateurs  et  importateurs  de  bie.     Ouvert 

a  la  signature  a  Londres,  25  aoflt  1933 437 

345.  Arrangement   regional   concernant    les    radiophares    maritimes.     Stockholm, 

20  septembre  1933 446 

346.  Tratadp  antibeiico  de  no-agresi6n  y  de  conciliaci6n.    Firmado  en  Rio  de 

Janeiro,  10  de  octubre  de  1933 448 

347.  Convention  pour  faciliter  la  circulation  internationale  des  films  ayant  un  carac- 

tere  educatif.     Ouverte  a  la  signature  a  Geneve,  n  octobre  1933 456 

347a.  Proces-verbal  constatant  le  dep6t  des  ratifications  ou  adhesions  de  la  Con- 
vention pour  faciliter  la  circulation  internationale  des  films  ayant  un 
caractere  educatif.  Fait  a  Geneve,  17  octobre  1934 468 

348.  Convention  relative  a  la  repression  de  la  traite  des  femmes  majeures.     Ouverte 

a  la  signature  a  Geneve,  II  octobre  1933 469 

349.  Arrangement  concernant  le  projet  pour  le  contrdle  international  de  retain. 

Signe  a  Londres,  27  octobre  1933 476 

349a.  Arrangement  suppiementaire  a  TArrangement  concernant  le  projet  pour 

le  contrdle  international  de  1'etain.    Signe  a  Londres,  27  octobre  1933    480 

349b.  Arrangement  concernant  le  projet  dTun  fonds  de  reserve  detain.    Signe  a 

La  Haye,  10  juillet  1934 481 

350.  Convention  relative  au  statut  international  des  refugies.     Ouverte  a  la  signature 

a  Geneve,  28  octobre  1933 483 


XX  NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No. 

351.  Convention  on  Bankruptcy.    Signed  at  Copenhagen,  November  7,  1933 496 

352.  Convention  concerning  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and  Flora  in  Their  Natural 

State.    Opened  for  signature  at  London,  November  8,  1933 504 

352a.  Protocol  concerning  the  Holding  of  Future  Conferences  for  the  Preserva- 
tion of  Fauna  and  Flora  in  Their  Natural  State.  Opened  for  signature 
at  London,  November  8,  1933 52^ 

353.  Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail.    Opened  for  signature  at  Rome, 

November  23,  1933 527 

353a.  Regulations  concerning  the  Transport  of  Private  Cars.    Annex  VII  of  the 

Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail  of  November  23, 1933. .     563 

353b.  Regulations  concerning  the  Transport  of  Express  Parcels.  Annex  VIII 
of  the  Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail  of  November  23, 
1933 567 

354.  Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Passengers  and  Luggage  by  Rail.    Opened  for 

signature  at  Rome,  November  23,  1933 568 

355.  Convention  on  the  Nationality  of  Women.    Signed  at  Montevideo,  December 

26,  1933 589 

356.  Convention  on  Nationality.    Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26, 1933 593 

357.  Convention  on  Extradition.    Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26, 1933 597 

357a.  Optional  Clause  of  the  Convention  on  Extradition.     Opened  for  signature 

at  Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 607 

358*    Convention  on  Political  Asylum.    Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 . .     607 

359.  Convention  on  the  Teaching  of  History.     Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26, 

1933 612 

360.  Additional  Protocol  to  the  General  Convention  of  Inter- American  Conciliation. 

Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 618 

361.  Convention  on  Rights  and  Duties  of  States.    Signed  at  Montevideo,  December 

26,  1933 620 

36ia.  Additional  Protocol  relative  to  Non-intervention.     Signed  at  Buenos 

Aires,  December  23,  1936 „ 626 

362.  Declaration  concerning  the  Signature  of  Pacts  for  the  Settlement  of  Interna- 

tional Conflicts  by  Pacific  Means.    Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26, 1933    630 

363.  Equal  Rights  Treaty.     Signed  at  Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 632 


1934 
364.    Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Signed  at  Athens,  February  9,  1934 634 

364a.  Protocol-Annex  of  the  Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Signed  at  Athens, 

February  9,  1934 636 

364b.  Statute  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Signed  at  Ankara,  November  2, 1934. . .     639 

3640.  Statute  of  the  Economic  Advisory  Council  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Signed 

at  Ankara,  November  2,  1934 640 


LISTE  NUM&RIQUE  DBS  INSTRUMENTS  xxi 

No.  PAGE 

351.  Convention  relative  aux  faillites.    Signee  a  Copenhague,  7  novembre  1933 496 

352.  Convention  relative  a  la  conservation  de  la  faune  et  de  la  flore  a  l*6tat  naturel. 

Ouverte  a  la  signature  &  Londres,  8  novembre  1933 504 

352a.  Protocole  concernant  la  convocation  des  conferences  ulteVieures  pour  la 
conservation  de  la  faune  et  de  la  flore  a  1'etat  naturel.  Ouvert  £  la  sig- 
nature a  Londres,  8  novembre  1933 526 

353.  Convention  concernant  le  transport  des  marchandises  par  chemins  de  fer 

(C.I.M.).     Ouverte  a  la  signature  a  Rome,  23  novembre  1933 527 

353a.  R&glement  concernant  le  transport  des  wagons  de  particuliers.  Annexe 
VII  de  la  Convention  concernant  le  transport  des  marchandises  par 
chemins  de  fer  du  23  novembre  1933 563 

353b.  R&glement  concernant  le  transport  des  colis  express*  Annexe  VIII  de  la 
Convention  concernant  le  transport  des  marchandises  par  chemins  de 
fer  du  23  novembre  1933 567 

354.  Convention  concernant  le  transport  des  voyageurs  et  des  bagages  par  chemins 

de  fer  (C.I.V.).    Ouverte  a  la  signature  a  Rome,  23  novembre  1933 568 

355.  Convenci6n  sobre  nacionalidad  de  la  mujer.    Firmada  en  Montevideo,  26  de 

diciembre  de  1933 589 

356.  Convenci6n  sobre  nacionalidad.    Firmada  en  Montevideo,  26  de  diciembre  de 

1933 593 

357-    Convenci6n  sobre  extradici6n.    Firmada  en  Montevideo,  26  de  diciembre  de 

1933 597 

357a.  Clausula  opcipnal  de  la  Convenci6n  sobre  extradici6n.    Abierta  a  la  firma 

en  Montevideo,  26  de  diciembre  de  1933 607 

358.  Convention  sobre  asilo  politico.    Firmada  en  Montevideo,  26  de  diciembre  de 

1933 <5c-7 

359.  Convenci6n  sobre  la  ensenanza  de  la  historia.    Firmada  en  Montevideo,  26  de 

diciembre  de  1933 » 612 

360.  Protocol©  adicional  a  la  Convenci6n  general  de  conciliation  interamericana. 

Firmado  en  Montevideo,  26  de  diciembre  de  1933 618 

361.  Convention  sobre  derechos  y  deberes  de  los  Estados.    Firmada  en  Montevideo, 

26  de  diciembre  de  1933 620 

36ia.  Protocolo   adicional  relativo   a   no-intervenci6n.     Firmado  en  Buenos 

Aires,  23  de  diciembre  de  1936 626 

362.  Acta  declaratoria  relativa  a  la  firma  de  los  pactos  tendientes  a  la  soluci6n  por 

medios  pacificos  de  los  conflictos  internacionales.     Firmada  en  Montevideo, 

26  de  diciembre  de  1933 630 

363.  Tratado  sobre  derechos  iguales.    Firmado  en  Montevideo,  26  de  diciembre  de 

1933 632 

1934 

364.  Pacte  d'Entente  balkanique.    Sign6  a  Athenes,  9  feVrier  1934 634 

364a.  Protocole  annexe  du  Pacte  d'Entente  balkanique.    Signd  a  Ath&nes, 

9  fevrier  1934 636 

364b.  Statuts  de  1'organisation  de  TEntente  balkanique.    Signed  a  Ankara, 

2  novembre  1934 639 

3640.  Statuts  du  Conseil  economique  consultatif  de  1'Entente  balkanique. 

Signes  a  Ankara,  2  novembre  1934 640 


XXli  NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No. 

365.  Protocol  of  Good  Understanding  and  Collaboration.    Signed  at  Rome,  March 

iy»  1934 64* 

365a.  Protocols  Additional  to  the  Rome  Protocols  of  1934.    Signed  at  Rome, 

March  23,  1936 643 

366.  Protocol  for  the  Development  of  Economic  Relations,    Signed  at  Rome,  March 

17,  1934 644 

367.  Universal  Postal  Convention.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 646 

367a.  Final  Protocol  of  the  Universal  Postal  Convention.    Opened  for  signature 

at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 690 

367!).  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Universal  Postal  Convention. 

Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 695 

367c,  Provisions  concerning  the  Transport  of  Regular  Mails  by  Air.    Signed  at 

Cairo,  March  20,  1934 725 

367c(i).  Final  Protocol  of  the  Provisions  concerning  the  Transport  of  Reg- 
ular Mails  by  Air.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 742 

368.  Agreement  concerning  Letters  and  Boxes  of  Declared  Value.    Signed  at  Cairo, 

March  20,  1934 743 

368a.  Final  Protocol  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Letters  and  Boxes  of  De- 
clared Value.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 757 

368b.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Letters  and 

Boxes  of  Declared  Value.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 758 

369.  Agreement  concerning  Parcel  Post.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 758 

369a.  Final^  Protocol  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Parcel  Post.    Signed  at 

Cairo,  March  20, 1934 ...,»,,.     780 

369b.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Parcel  Post. 

Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 785 

3690.  Provisions  concerning  the  Transport  of  Parcel  Post  by  Air.    Signed  at 

Cairo,  March  20,  1934 791 

3690  (i).  Final  Protocol  of  the  Provisions  concerning  the  Transport  of 

Parcel  Post  by  Air.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 797 

370.  Agreement  concerning  Money  Orders.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20, 1934 797 

37oa.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Money 

Orders.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 806 

371.  Agreement  concerning  Postal  Checks.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 806 

37ia.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Postal  Checks. 

Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 8n 

372.  Agreement  concerning  Payments  on  Delivery.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20, 1934     8l  I 

372a.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Payments  on 

Delivery.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 814 

373.  Agreement  concerning  Subscriptions  to  Newspapers.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March 

20,  1934 815 

373a.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Subscriptions 

to  Newspapers.    Signed  at  Cairo,  March  20,  1934 817 


818 


374.  Agreement  concerning  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail  under  Way-Bill  to  Order. 

Signed  at  Rome,  March  31,  1934 

375.  Treaty  of  Central  American  Confraternity.    Signed  at  the  City  of  Guatemala 

April  12,  1934 824 


LISTE  NUMERIQUE  DES  INSTRUMENTS  xxiii 

No.  PAGE 

365.  Protocollo  d'intesa  cordiale  e  di  collaborazione.    Firmato  a  Roma,  il  17  marzo 

1934 641 

365a.  Protocolli  addizionali  ai  Protocolli  di  Roma  di  1934.    Firmati  a  Roma,  il 

23  marzo  1936 643 

366.  Protocollo  per  lo  sviluppo  dei  rapporti  economic*.    Firmato  a  Roma,  il  17  marzo 

1934 644 

367.  Convention  postale  universelle.     Sign6e  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 646 

367a.  Protocole  final  de  la  Convention  postale  universelle.    Ouvert  a  la  signa- 
ture au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 690 

367!}.  Reglement  d'execution  de  la  Convention  postale  universelle.     Signe"  au 

Caire,  20  mars  1934 695 

3670.  Dispositions  concernant  le  transport  de  la  poste  aux  lettres  par  voie 

aerienne.     Signers  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 725 

3670(1) .  Protocole  final  des  dispositions  concernant  le  transport  de  la  poste 

aux  lettres  par  voie  aerienne.     Signe  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934. .     742 

368.  Arrangement  concernant  les  lettres  et  les  boites  avec  valeur  declaree.    Sign6  au 

Caire,  20  mars  1934 743 

368a.  Protocole  final  de  1' Arrangement  concernant  les  lettres  et  les  boites  avec 

valeur  declaree.    Signe"  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 757 

368b.  Reglement  d'execution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  les  lettres  et  les 

boites  avec  valeur  declaree.    Sign6  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 758 

369.  Arrangement  concernant  les  colis  postaux.     Signe"  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 758 

369a.  Protocole  final  de  rArrangement  concernant  les  colis  postaux.    Signe"  au 

Caire,  20  mars  1934 780 

369b.  Reglement  d'execution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  les  colis  postaux. 

Signe  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 785 

3690.  Dispositions  concernant  le  transport  des  colis  postaux  par  voie  aerienne. 

Signees  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 791 

3690(1).  Protocole  final  des  Dispositions  concernant  le  transport  des  colis 

postaux  par  voie  aerienne.    Sign£  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934.  •  •  •     797 

370.  Arrangement  concernant  les  mandats  de  poste.    Signe  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934, .     797 

37oa.  Reglement  d'execution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  les  mandats  de  poste. 

Signe  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 , .' 806 

371.  Arrangement  concernant  les  virements  postaux.    Signe"  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934    806 

37ia.  Reglement  d'execution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  les  virements  pos- 
taux.   Signe  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 81 1 

372.  Arrangement  concernant  les  recouvrements.    Signe"  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934. . .     811 

372a.  Reglement  d'execution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  les  recouvrements. 

Sign6  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 814 

373.  Arrangement  concernant  les  abonnements  aux  journaux.    Sign6  au  Caire,  20 

mars  1934 815 

373a.  Reglement  d'exe"cution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  les  abonnements 

aux  journaux.     Signe  au  Caire,  20  mars  1934 817 

374.  Accord  concernant  le  transport  des  marchandises  par  chemins  de  f  er  avec  lettre 

de  voiture  a  ordre.     Signe  &  Rome,  31  mars  1934 818 

375.  Tratado  de  confraternidad  centroamericana.    Firmado  en  la  ciudad  de  Guate- 

mala, 12  de  abrii  de  1934 „ 824 


NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  *>AGE 

376.  Central  American  Convention  on  Extradition.    Signed  at  the  City  of  Guate- 

mala, April  12,  1934 &33 

377.  Convention  for  the  Unification  of  the  Methods  of  Sampling  and  Analysing 

Cheeses.    Signed  at  Rome,  April  26,  1934 840 

377a.  Protocol  of  Signature  of  the  Convention  for  the  Unification  of  the  Meth- 
ods of  Sampling  and  Analysing  Cheeses.  Signed  at  Rome,  April  26, 
1934 85<> 

378.  Regional  Arrangement  concerning  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Signed  at  Bor- 

deaux, April  28,  1934 851 

379.  Agreement  for  the  Regulation  of  Production  and  Export  of  Rubber.    Signed  at 

London,  May  7,  1934 856 

379a.  Protocol  Amending  the  Agreement  of  May  7,  1934.    Signed  at  London, 

June  27,  1935 865 

379b.  Protocol  Amending  the  Agreement  of  May  7,  1934.    Signed  at  London, 

May  22,  1936 866 

3790.  Protocol  Amending  the  Agreement  of  May  7,  1934.    Signed  at  London, 

February  5,  1937 867 

380.  Additional  Protocol  to  the  Convention  of  April  10, 1926,  concerning  the  Immu- 

nity of  State-Owned  Vessels.    Signed  at  Brussels,  May  24,  1934 868 

381.  Convention  of  the  Union  for  the  Protection  of  Industrial  Property.    Signed  at 

London,  June  2,  1934 870 

382.  Agreement  on  the  Suppression  of  False  Indications  of  Origin  of  Goods.     Signed 

at  London,  June  2,  1934 886 

383.  Agreement  concerning  the  International  Registration  of  Trade-Marks.    Signed 

at  London,  June  2,  1934 888 

3$3a.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  the  Interna- 
tional Registration  of  Trade-Marks.  Adopted  at  London,  June  2, 1934  890 

384.  Agreement  concerning  the  International  Registration  of  Industrial  Designs  or 

Models.    Signed  at  London,  June  2,  1934 894 

384a.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  the  Interna- 
tional Registration  of  Industrial  Designs  or  Models.  Adopted  at  Lon- 
don, June  2,  1934 895 

385.  Convention  concerning  the  Salvage  of  Torpedoes.    Signed  at  Paris,  June  12, 

1934 896 

386.  Agreement  concerning  Statistics  of  Causes  of  Death.    Signed  at  London,  June 

I9>  1934 899 

386a.  Protocol  of  Signature  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Statistics  of  Causes  of 

Death.    Signed  at  London,  June  19,  1934 904 

387.  Convention  concerning  the  Employment  of  Women  at  Night  (Revised  1934). 

Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  19,  1934 907 

388.  Convention  concerning  Workmen's  Compensation  for  Occupational  Diseases 

(Revised  1934).    Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  21, 1934 913 

389.  Convention  for  the  Regulation  of  Hours  of  Work  in  Automatic  Sheet-Glass 

Works.    Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  21,  1934 9*7 

390.  Convention  Ensuring  Benefit  or  Allowances  to  the  Involuntarily  Unemployed. 

Adopted  at  Geneva,  June  23, 1934 920 

391-  Agreement  for  the  Non-Application  of  the  Most-Favored-Nation  Clause  to 
Certain  Multilateral  Economic  Conventions.  Opened  for  signature  at  Wash- 
ington, July  15,  1934 927 


LISTE  NUM&RIQUE  DBS  INSTRUMENTS  XXV 

No.  PAGE 

376.  Convenci6n  centroamericana  de  extradici6n.    Firmada  en  la  ciudad  de  Guate- 

mala, 12  de  abril  de  1934 833 

377.  Convention  pour  Punification  des  m6thodes  de  pr61£vement  des  6chantillons  et 

d'analyse  des  fromages.     Signee  a  Rome,  26  avril  1934 840 

377a.  Protocole  de  signature  de  la  Convention  pour  I'unification  des  methodes 
de  prelevement  des  6chantillons  et  d'analyse  des  fromages.  Sign£  a 
Rome,  26  avril  1934 850 

378.  Arrangement  regional  concernant  les  radiophares  maritimes.     Sign£  &  B ordeaux, 

28  avril  1934 851 

379.  Arrangement  pour  la  reglementation  de  la  production  et  de  Pexportation  du 

caoutchouc.     Signe  a  Londres,  7  mai  1934 856 

379a.  Protocole  con  tenant  des  amendements  de  1' Arrangement  du  7  mai  1934. 

Signe  a  Londres,  27  juin  1935 865 

379b.  Protocole  contenant  des  amendements  de  1'Arrangement  du  7  mai  1934. 

Sign6  a  Londres,  22  mai  1936 866 

379C.  Protocole  contenant  des  amendements  de  TArrangement  du  7  mai  1934. 

Sign6  a  Londres,  5  fevrier  1937 867 

380.  Protocole  additionnel  a  la  Convention  du  10  avril  1926  concernant  les  immunites 

des  navires  d'Etat.    Signe  a  Bruxelles,  24  mai  1934 868 

381.  Convention  d'Union  pour  la  Protection  de  la  Propri£t6  Industrielle.    Sign6e  a 

Londres,  2  juin  1934 870 

382.  Arrangement  concernant  la  repression  des  fausses  indications  de  provenance  sur 

les  marchandises.    Signe  &  Londres,  2  juin  1934 886 

383.  Arrangement  concernant  1'enregistrement  des  marques  de  fabrique  ou  de  com- 

merce.   Signe  a  Londres,  2  juin  1934 888 

383a.  Reglement  pour  I'ex6cution  de  1'Arrangement  concernant  1'enregistrement 
international  ^ des  marques  de  fabrique  ou  de  commerce.  Adopte  a 
Londres,  2  juin  1934 890 

384.  Arrangement  concernant  le  d6p6t  international  des  dessins  ou  modeles  indus- 

triels.    Sign6  a  Londres,  2  juin  1934 894 

384a.  R&glement  pour  lf execution  de  TArrangement  concernant  le  dep6t  interna- 
tional des  dessins  ou  modeles  industriels.  Adopt6  a  Londres,  2  juin 
1934 895 

385.  Convention  concernant  les  regies  adoptees  en  matiere  de  sauvetage  de  torpilles 

automobiles.    Signee  a  Paris,  12  juin  1934 896 

386.  Arrangement  relatif  aux  statistiques  des  causes  de  d6c&s.    Sign6  a  Londres, 

19  juin  1934 899 

386a.  Protocole  de  signature  de  TArrangement  relatif  aux  statistiques  des  causes 

de  deces.    Signe  a  Londres,  19  juin  1934 904 

387.  Convention  concernant  le  travail  de  nuit  des  f emmes  (revisee  en  1934)  *    Adoptee 

a  Geneve,  19  juin  1934 907 

388.  Convention  concernant  la  reparation  des  maladies  professionnelles  (revis6e  en 

1934).    Adoptee  It  Gen&ve,  21  juin  1934 913 

389.  Convention  concernant  la^duree  du  travail  dans  les  verreries  a  vitres  automa- 

tiques.    Adoptee  a  Geneve,  21  juin  1934 917 

390.  Convention  assurant  aux  chdmeurs  involontaires  des  indemnites  ou  des  alloca- 

tions.   Adoptee  a  Geneve,  23  juin  1934 920 

391.  Convenio  para  no  aplicar  la  clausula  de  la  nacion  mas  favorecida  a  algunas  con- 

yenciones  economicas  multilaterales.    Abierto  a  la  fijrma  a  Washington,  15  de 
julio  de  1934 927 


XXvi  NUMERICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No,  PAGE 

392.  Convention  for  Mutual  Protection  against  Dengue  Fever.    Signed  at  Athens, 

July  25,  1934 930 

393 .  Treaty  of  Entente  and  Collaboration  between  the  Baltic  States.    Signed  at 

Geneva,  September  12,  1934 93$ 

393a.  Declaration  relating  to  the  Treaty  of  Entente  and  Collaboration  between 

the  Baltic  States.    Signed  at  Geneva,  September  12, 1934 940 

394.  Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to  Posts  and  Telecommunica- 

tions.   Signed  at  Belgrade,  September  24, 1934 940 

394a.  Amendment  to  the  Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to 

Posts  and  Telecommunications.    Signed  at  Prague,  February  20, 1935 .     943 

395.  Regional  Arrangement  concerning  Radiotelephone  Service  of  Ships  Operating 

in  the  North  Sea.    Signed  at  Lisbon,  October  8,  1934 943 

396.  Protocol  on  Monetary  Stability.    Signed  at  Brussels,  October  20, 1934 945 

397.  Convention  concerning  Inheritance  and  Succession.    Signed  at  Copenhagen, 

November  19,  1934 947 

397a.  Final  Protocol  of  the  Convention  concerning  Inheritance  and  Succession. 

Signed  at  Copenhagen,  November  19,  1934 953 

398.  Agreement  concerning  the  Campaign  against  Locusts.    Opened  for  signature  at 

Montevideo,  December  13,  1934 954 

399.  Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Bills  of  Health.    Signed  at  Paris,  December  22, 

1934 958 

400.  Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Consular  Visas  on  Bills  of  Health.    Signed  at 

Paris,  December  22,  1934 962 

401 .  Agreement  concerning  Postal  Exchanges.    Signed  at  Copenhagen,  Helsingfors, 

Reykjavik,  Oslo,  and  Stockholm,  December  31,  1934 ,.  „     965 

40 1  a.  Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Postal  Ex- 
changes. Signed  at  Copenhagen,  Helsingfors,  Reykjavik,  Oslo,  and 
Stockholm,  December  31,  1934 971 


LISTE  NUM&RIQUE  DBS  INSTRUMENTS  XXvii 

No.  PAGE 

392.  Convention  sur  la  protection  mutuelle  contre  la  fievre  dengue.     Sign£e  a 

Athenes,  25  juillet  1934 930 

393.  Traite  d'entente  et  de  collaboration  entre  les  Etats  baltiques.     Sign6  a  Geneve, 

12  septembre  1934 936 

393a.  Declaration  relative  au  Traite  d'entente  et  de  collaboration  entre  les 

Etats  baltiques.     Sign£e  a  Geneve,  12  septembre  1934 940 

394.  Arrangement  particulier  pour  la  cooperation  dans  le  domaine  des  postes  et 

telecommunications.     Sign6  a  Beograd,  24  septembre  1934 940 

394a.  Amendement  a  1'Arrangement  particulier  pour  la  cooperation  dans  le 
domaine  des  postes  et  telecommunications.  Signe  £  Praha,  20  fevrier 
1935 943 

395.  Arrangement  regional  relatif  au  service  radiote!6phonique  des  navires  op6rant 

dans  la  Mer  du  Nord.     Signe  £  Lisbonne,  8  octobre  1934 943 

396.  Protocole  concernant  la  politique  mon6taire.     Signe  a  Bruxelles,  20  octobre 

1934 945 

397.  Convention  relative  a  I'hSritage  et  a  la  succession.    Signe"e  a  Copenhague, 

19  novembre  1934 947 

397a.  Protocole  final  de  la  Convention  relative  a  I'heritage  et  a  la  succession. 

Sign6  &  Copenhague,  19  novembre  1934 953 

398.  Convenio  sobre  la  lucha  contra  la  langosta.    Abierto  a  la  firma  a  Montevideo, 

13  de  diciembre  de  1934 954 

399.  Arrangement  concernant  la  suppression  des  patentes  de  sante\     Sign6  a  Paris, 

22  decembre  1934 958 

400.  Arrangement  concernant  la  suppression  des  visas  consulaires  sur  les  patentes  de 

sant6.    Sign6  a  Paris,  22  decembre  1934 962 

401.  Arrangement  concernant  les  ^changes  postaux.    Signe  a  Copenhague,  Helsinki, 

Reikjavik,  Oslo,  et  Stockholm,  31  decembre  1934 965 

401  a.  Reglement  d'exScution  de  TArrangement  concernant  les  ^changes  postaux. 
Sign£  a  Copenhague,  Helsinki,  Reikjavik,  Oslo,  et  Stockholm, 
31  decembre  1934 971 


CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

[This  list  includes  all  of  the  instruments  reproduced  in  Volume  VI,  and  certain  subsidiary 
instruments  falling  within  the  period  from  January  I,  1932,  to  December  31,  1934,  which 
were  reproduced  in  Volume  V,] 

193* 

PAGE 

Jan.  21  Protocol  on  Suspension  of  Certain  Payments  by  Bulgaria.  London. 
(See  Volume  V,  p.  289.) 

Jan.  21  Protocol  on  Suspension  of  Certain  Payments  by  Hungary.  London. 
(See  Volume  V,  p.  431.) 

Jan.      28        Rules  of  Procedure  to  facilitate  the  Settlement  of  Economic  Disputes. 

Geneva I 

March  16        Convention  on  the  Recognition  and   Enforcement  of  Judgments. 

Copenhagen 6 

April    27        Convention  for  the  Protection  against  Accidents  of  Workers  Employed 

in  Loading  Ships  (Revised  1932).    Geneva 12 

April    30        Convention  on  the  Age  for  Admission  of  Children  to  Non-Industrial 

Employment.    Geneva 30 

May  1 8  Regulations  under  Article  4  of  the  Convention  of  September  26,  1931, 
to  Improve  the  Means  of  Preventing  War.  Geneva.  (See  Volume 
V,  p.  1098.) 

May     30        Declaration  by  the  Kingdom  of  Iraq.    Baghdad 39 

June  6  Supplementary  Protocol  on  Suspension  of  Payments  by  Germany. 
Berlin,  (See  Volume  V,  p.  259.) 

June     28        Agreement  for  the  Setting-Up  of  Special  Services  at  the  Iron  Gates. 

Semmering 47 

June     28       Final  Protocol  to  the  Agreement  for  the  Setting-Up  of  Special  Services 

at  the  Iron  Gates.    Semmering 71 

June  29  Supplementary  Protocol  on  Suspension  of  Payments  by  Czechoslovakia. 
Lausanne.  (See  Volume  V,  p.  302.) 

July       2        Proems-verbal  relating  to  the  Ratification  of  the  Agreement  concerning 

German  Reparations.    Lausanne 83 

July       7       Agreement  concerning  Non-German  Reparations.    Lausanne 72 

July  7  Supplementary  Protocol  on  Suspension  of  Payments  by  Bulgaria. 
Lausanne.  (See  Volume  V,  p.  294.) 

July       7        Supplementary  Protocol  on  Suspension  of  Payments  by  Hungary. 


upplementary  Protocol  on  Suspension  of 
Lausanne.    (See  Volume  V,  p.  434.) 


July       9       Agreement  concerning  German  Reparations.    Lausanne 73 

July       9        Transitional  Measures  concerning  German  Reparations.    Lausanne...  81 

July     15       Austrian  Protocol.    Geneva 84 

July      1 8        Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers*    Geneva 94 

July      1 8        Protocol  to  the  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers. 

Geneva 101 

July     1 8        Declaration  annexed  to  the  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic 

Barriers.    Geneva 104 

xxviii 


CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS  XXIX 

PAGE 

Aug.       3        Declaration  by  American  States.    Washington 105 

Sept.      2        Additional  Act  to  the  Convention  of  October  23, 1924,  on  the  Transport 

of  Goods  by  Rail.     Berne 107 

Dec.        9        Telecommunication  Convention.     Madrid 109 

Dec.        9        General  Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Conven- 
tion.   Madrid 133 

Dec.       9        Final  Protocol  to  the  General  Radio  Regulations.    Madrid 182 

Dec.       9        Additional  Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Con- 
vention.   Madrid 185 

Dec.       9        Additional  Protocol  (European)  to  the  Acts  of  the  International  Radio- 

telegraph  Conference.    Madrid 192 

Dec.      10        Telegraph  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Convention. 

Madrid 200 

Dec.      10        Final  Protocol  of  the  Telegraph  Regulations.    Madrid 255 

Dec.      10        Telephone  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication  Convention. 

Madrid 257 

Dec.      31         Convention  for  the  Preservation  of  Plaice  in  the  Skagerak,  the  Kattegat 

and  Sound.    Stockholm 277 

Dec.     31        Final  Protocol  to  the  Convention  for  the  Preservation  of  Plaice. 

Stockholm 280 

1933 

Jan.      17        Modification  of  the  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Convention  on  Safety 

of  Lifeat  Sea.    London 281 

Jan.      28        Agreement    establishing    an    Advisory    Technical    Collaboration    in 

Rumania.    Geneva 282 

Feb.      1 6        Pact  of  Organization  of  the  Little  Entente.    Geneva 288 

April     12        Sanitary  Convention  for  Aerial  Navigation.    The  Hague 292 

May     26        Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations.     Geneva.  321 

May     29        Convention  on  the  Precautionary  Attachment  of  Aircraft.    Rome. ...  327 

May     29        Convention  concerning  Damages  by  Aircraft  to  Third  Parties  on  the 

Surface.    Rome 334 

June     19        European  Broadcasting  Convention.    Lucerne 345 

June     19        Final  Protocol  annexed  to  the  European  Broadcasting  Convention. 

Lucerne 3^3 

June     25        Agreement  concerning  a  Modus  Vivendi  on  the  Jurisdiction  of  the  Euro- 
pean Commission  of  the  Danube.    Semmering 364 

June     25        Declaration  annexed  to  the  Modus  Vivendi  on  the  Jurisdiction  of  the 

European  Commission  of  the  Danube.    Semmering 367 

June     29        Convention  on  Fee-Charging  Employment  Agencies.    Geneva 368 

June     29        Convention  on  Old- Age  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).    Geneva 374 

June     29        Convention  on  Old- Age  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva 385 

June     29        Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).    Geneva 387 

June     29        Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Agriculture),    Geneva 392 


XXX  CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

1933  PAGE 

June     29        Draft  Convention  on  Survivors'  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).     Geneva. .  39^ 

June     29        Draft  Convention  on  Survivors*  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva. . .  409 

July        3        Convention  defining  Aggression.     London 410 

July        3        Protocol  of  Signature  of  the  Convention  denning  Aggression.     London  415 

July        4        Convention  defining  Aggression.     London 4l6 

July        8        Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.     Paris 4*9 

July      15        Agreement  of  Understanding  and  Cooperation.     Rome 42^ 

July      22        Agreement  between  Holders  of  Large  Stocks  or  Users  of  Silver  and 

Principal  Producers  of  Silver.     London 43° 

July      2i  }     Undertakings  Supplementary  to  the  Silver  Agreement.     London 435 

Aug.     25        Final  Act  of  the  Conference  of  Wheat  Exporting  and  Importing  Coun- 
tries.   London - 437 

Sept.     20        Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Stockholm 446 

Oct.       10        Anti-War  Treaty  of  Non-Aggression  and  Conciliation.     Rio  de  Janeiro  448 

Oct.      II        Convention  for  Facilitating  the  Circulation  of  Films  of  an  Educational 

Character.     Geneva 45° 

Oct.       ii        Convention  for  the  Suppression  of  the  Traffic  in  Women  of  Full  Age. 

Geneva 4&9 

Oct.      27        Agreement  for  the  International  Tin  Control  Scheme.    London 476 

Oct.      27        Supplementary  Agreement  to  the  Agreement  for  the  International  Tin 

Control  Scheme.    London 4&> 

Oct.      28        Convention  on  the  Status  of  Refugees.     Geneva 4^3 

Nov.       7        Convention  on  Bankruptcy.    Copenhagen 496 

Nov.       8        Convention  for  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and  Flora  in  Their  Natural 

State.    London 5°4 

Nov.       8        Protocol  on  Future  Conferences  for  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and 

Flora  in  Their  Natural  State.    London 5^6 

Nov.     23        Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail.    Rome 527 

Nov.     23        Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Passengers  and  Luggage  by  Rail. 

Rome 568 

Dec.      26        Convention  on  the  Nationality  of  Women.     Montevideo 589 

Dec.      26        Convention  on  Nationality.     Montevideo 593 

Dec.     26        Convention  on  Extradition.    Montevideo 597 

Dec.     26        Optional  Clause  of  the  Convention  on  Extradition.     Montevideo 607 

Dec.     26        Convention  on  Political  Asylum.     Montevideo 607 

Dec.     26        Convention  on  the  Teaching  of  History.     Montevideo 612 

Dec.     26        Additional  Protocol  to  the  General  Convention  of  Inter-American 

Conciliation.    Montevideo 618 

Dec.     26        Convention  on  Rights  and  Duties  of  States.     Montevideo 620 

Dec.      26        Declaration  concerning  Pacts  for  the  Settlement  of  International  Con- 
flicts by  Pacific  Means.     Montevideo 630 

Dec.     26        Equal  Rights  Treaty.     Montevideo 632 


CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 


XXXI 


1934  PAGE 

Feb.        9         Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Athens 634 

Feb.        9        Protocol- Annex  of  the  Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Athens 636 

March  17        Protocol  of  Good  Understanding  and  Collaboration.     Rome 641 

March  17         Protocol  on  Economic  Relations.     Rome . 644 

March  20        Universal  Postal  Convention.    Cairo 646 

March  20        Final  Protocol  of  the  Universal  Postal  Convention.    Cairo 690 

March  20        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Universal  Postal  Convention. 

Cairo 695 

March  20        Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Regular  Mails  by  Air.    Cairo 725 

March  20        Final  Protocol  of  the  Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Regular  Mails  by 

Air.     Cairo 742 

March  20        Agreement  on  Letters  and  Boxes  of  Declared  Value.     Cairo 743 

March  20        Final  Protocol  of  the  Agreement  on  Letters  and  Boxes  of  Declared 

Value.     Cairo 757 

March  20         Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  Letters  and  Boxes 

of  Declared  Value.     Cairo 758 

March  20        Agreement  on  Parcel  Post.     Cairo 758 

March  20        Final  Protocol  of  the  Agreement  on  Parcel  Post.     Cairo 780 

March  20        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  Parcel  Post.     Cairo  785 

March  20        Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Parcel  Post  by  Air.    Cairo 791 

March  20        Final  Protocol  of  the  Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Parcel  Post  by  Air. 

Cairo „ 797 

March  20        Agreement  on  Money  Orders.     Cairo 797 

March  20        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  Money  Orders. 

Cairo 806 

March  20        Agreement  on  Postal  Checks.     Cairo 806 

March  20        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  Postal  Checks. 

Cairo 811 

March  20        Agreement  concerning  Payments  on  Delivery.    Cairo 811 

March  20        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  concerning  Payments  on 

Delivery.     Cairo 814 

March  20        Agreement  on  Subscriptions  to  Newspapers.     Cairo 815 

March  20        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  Subscriptions  to 

Newspapers.     Cairo 817 

March  31        Agreement  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail  under  Way-Bill  to  Order. 

Rome 8x8 

April    12        Treaty  of  Central  American  Confraternity.    City  of  Guatemala 824 

April     12        Central  American  Convention  on  Extradition.    City  of  Guatemala. ..  833 

April    26        Convention  for  the  Unification  of  the  Methods  of  Sampling  and  Analys- 
ing Cheeses.     Rome , * 84° 

April    26        Protocol  of  Signature  of  the  Convention  for  the  Unification  of  the 

Methods  of  Sampling  and  Analysing  Cheeses.     Rome 850 


XXX11 


CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 


1934 

April  28 

May  7 

May  24 

June  2 

June  2 

June  2 

June  2 

June  2 

June  2 

June  12 

June  19 

June  19 

June  19 

June  21 

June  21 

June  23 

July  10 

July  15 

July  25 

Sept.  12 

Sept.  12 

Sept.  24 

Oct.  8 

Oct.  17 

Oct.  20 

Nov.  2 

Nov.  2 


PAGE 

Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Bordeaux 851 

Agreement  for  the  Regulation  of  Production  and  Export  of  Rubber. 
London 856 

Additional  Protocol  to  the  Convention  of  April  10,  1926,  on  the  Im- 
munity of  State-Owned  Vessels.    Brussels 868 

Convention  for  the.  Protection  of  Industrial  Property.    London 870 

Agreement  on  the  Suppression  of  False  Indications  of  Origin  of  Goods. 
London 886 

Agreement  on  the  International  Registration  of  Trade-Marks.    London     888 

Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  the  International 
Registration  of  Trade-Marks.    London 890 

Agreement  on  the  International  Registration  of  Industrial  Designs. 
London 894 

Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  the  International 
Registration  of  Industrial  Designs.    London 895 

Convention  on  the  Salvage  of  Torpedoes.    Paris 896 

Agreement  on  Statistics  of  Causes  of  Death.    London 899 

Protocol  of  Signature  of  the  Agreement  on  Statistics  of  Causes  of 
Death.    London 904 

Convention  on  the  Employment  of  Women  at  Night  (Revised  1934). 
Geneva 907 

Convention  on  Workmen's  Compensation  for  Occupational  Diseases 
(Revised  1934).    Geneva 913 

Convention  on   Hours  of  Work  in  Automatic  Sheet-Glass  Works. 
Geneva 917 

Convention  Ensuring  Benefit  or  Allowances  to  the  Involuntarily  Unem- 
ployed.   Geneva 920 

Agreement  for  the  Tin  Buffer  Stock  Scheme.    The  Hague 481 

Agreement  for  the    Non-Application   of  the   Most-Favored-Nation 
Clause  to  Multilateral  Economic  Conventions.    Washington 927 

Convention  for  Mutual  Protection  against  Dengue  Fever.    Athens. . .     930 

Treaty  of  Entente  and   Collaboration  between  the  Baltic  States. 
Geneva 


936 


Declaration  relating  to  the  Treaty  of  Entente  and  Collaboration. 
Geneva 940 

Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to  Posts  and  Tele- 
communications.   Belgrade 940 

Regional  Arrangement  on  Radiotelephone  Service  of  Ships  in  the 
North  Sea.    Lisbon 943 

Proems-verbal  concerning  Ratifications  of  the  Convention  on  the  Circula- 
tion of  Educational  Films.    Geneva 468 

Protocol  on  Monetary  Stability.    Brussels 945 

Statute  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Ankara 639 

Statute  of  the  Economic  Advisory  Council  of  the  Balkan  Entente. 
Ankara 640 


CHRONOLOGICAL  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS  XXX111 

PAGE 

Nov.     19        Convention  on  Inheritance  and  Succession.    Copenhagen 947 

Nov.     19        Final  Protocol  of  the  Convention  on  Inheritance  and  Succession. 

Copenhagen 953 

Dec.     13        Agreement  on  the  Campaign  against  Locusts.    Montevideo 954 

Dec.     22        Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Bills  of  Health.    Paris 958 

Dec.     22        Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Consular  Visas  on  Bills  of  Health. 

Paris 962 

Dec.     31        Agreement  on  Postal  Exchanges.    Copenhagen,  etc 965 

Dec.     31        Regulations  for  the  Execution  of  the  Agreement  on  Postal  Exchanges. 

Copenhagen,  etc 971 

I93S 

Feb.     20       Amendment  to  the  Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to 

Posts  and  Telecommunications.    Prague 943 

June     27       Protocol  Amending  the  Agreement  of  May  7,  1934,  on  the  Production 

and  Export  of  Rubber.    London 865 

1936 

March  23        Protocols  Additional  to  the  Rome  Protocols  of  March  17, 1934.    Rome    643 

May     22        Protocol  Amending  the  Agreement  of  May  7,  1934,  on  the  Production 

and  Export  of  Rubber.    London 866 

Dec.     23       Additional  Protocol  relative  to  Non-intervention.    Buenos  Aires 626 

1937 

Feb.       5       Protocol  Amending  the  Agreement  of  May  7,  1934,  on  the  Production 

and  Export  of  Rubber.    London 867 


SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  PAGE 

Aggression 

314.    Declaration  by  American  States.    Washington,  August  3,  1932 105 

339.  Convention  defining  Aggression.    London,  July  3,  1933 410 

340.  Convention  defining  Aggression.    London,  July  4,  1933 416 

346.    Anti-War  Treaty  of  Non-Aggression  and  Conciliation.     Rio  de  Janeiro, 

October  10,  1933 448 

Agriculture 

334.    Convention  on  Old-Age  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva,  June  29,  1933.     385 
336.     Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva,  June  29, 1933.    392 

338.  Draft  Convention  on  Survivors'  Insurance  (Agriculture).  Geneva,  June 

29,  1933 409 

344.  Final  Act  of  the  Conference  of  Wheat  Exporting  and  Importing  Countries. 

London,  August  25,  1933 437 

352.    Convention  for  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and  Flora  in  Their  Natural  State. 

London,  November  8,  1933 504 

352a.    Protocol  on  Future  Conferences  for  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and  Flora  in 

Their  Natural  State.    London,  November  8,  1933 526 

377.    Convention  on  the  Methods  of  Sampling  and  Analysing  Cheeses.    Rome, 

April  26,  1934 840 

379.    Agreement  for  the  Regulation  of  Production  and  Export  of  Rubber. 

London,  May  7,  1934 856 

398.    Agreement  on  the  Campaign  against  Locusts.    Montevideo,  December  13, 

1934 954 

Air  Transport 

326.    Sanitary  Convention  for  Aerial  Navigation.    The  Hague,  April  12,  1933. .     292 

328.  Convention  on  the  Precautionary  Attachment  of  Aircraft.    Rome,  May  29, 

1933 327 

329.  Convention  on  Damages  by  Aircraft  to  Third  Parties  on  the  Surface. 

Rome,  May  29,  1933 334 

3670.    Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Regular  Mails  by  Air.    Cairo,  March  20, 

1934 725 

3690.    Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Parcel  Post  by  Air.    Cairo,  March  20,  1934    791 

Arbitration  and  Conciliation 

304.    Rules  of  Procedure  for  the  Peaceful  Settlement  of  Economic  Disputes. 

Geneva,  January  28,  1932 I 

346.    Anti-War  Treaty  of  Non-Aggression  and  Conciliation.    Rio  de  Janeiro, 

October  10,  1933 448 

360.    Additional  Protocol  to  the  General  Convention  of  Inter-American  Concilia- 
tion.   Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 618 

362.    Declaration  concerning  Pacts  for  the  Settlement  of  International  Conflicts 

by  Pacific  Means.    Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 630 

xxxiv 


SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS  XXXV 

No.  PAGE 
Armaments 

385.     Convention  on  the  Salvage  of  Torpedoes.    Paris,  June  12,  1934 896 

Communications  and  Transit 

309.    Agreement  on  the  Setting-Up  of  Special  Services  at  the  Iron  Gates.     Sem- 

mering,  June  28,  1932 47 

315.  Additional  Act  to  the  Convention  of  October  23,  1924,  on  the  Transport  of 

Goods  by  Rail.     Berne,  September  2,  1932 107 

316.  Telecommunication  Convention.    Madrid,  December  9,  1932 109 

317.  General  Radio  Regulations.    Madrid,  December  9,  1932 133 

318.  Additional  Radio  Regulations.     Madrid,  December  9,  1932 185 

319.  Additional  Protocol  (European)  to  the  Acts  of  the  International  Radio- 

telegraph Conference  of  Madrid.    Madrid,  December  9,  1932 192 

320.  Telegraph  Regulations.    Madrid,  December  10,  1932 200 

321.  Telephone  Regulations.    Madrid,  December  10,  1932 257 

326.     Sanitary  Convention  for  Aerial  Navigation.    The  Hague,  April  12,  1933 . .  292 

328.  Convention  on  the  Precautionary  Attachment  of  Aircraft.     Rome,  May  29, 

1933 327 

329.  Convention  on  Damages  by  Aircraft  to  Third  Parties  on  the  Surface. 

Rome,  May  29,  1933 334 

330.  European  Broadcasting  Convention.    Lucerne,  June  19,  1933 345 

33 1 .  Agreement  concerning  a  Modus  Vivendi  on  the  Jurisdiction  of  the  European 

Commission  of  the  Danube.    Semmering,  June  25,  1933 364 

341.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.     Paris,  July  8,  1933 .  419 

345.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Stockholm,  Septem- 
ber 20,  1933 446 

347.     Convention  for  Facilitating  the  Circulation  of  Films  of  an  Educational 

Character.    Geneva,  October  1 1,  1933 456 

353-     Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail.    Rome,  November  23, 1933  527 

354.    Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Passengers  by  Rail.    Rome,  November  23, 

1933 568 

367.  Universal  Postal  Convention.    Cairo,  March  20,  1934 646 

3670.     Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Regular  Mails  by  Air.     Cairo,  March  20, 

1934 725 

368.  Agreement  on  Letters  and  Boxes  of  Declared  Value.     Cairo,  March  20, 1934  743 

369.  Agreement  on  Parcel  Post.     Cairo,  March  20,  1934 758 

3690.     Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Parcel  Post  by  Air.     Cairo,  March  20, 1934  791 

370.  Agreement  on  Money  Orders.     Cairo,  March  20,  1934 797 

371.  Agreement  on  Postal  Checks.    Cairo,  March  20,  1934 806 

372.  Agreement  concerning  Payments  on  Delivery.     Cairo,  March  20,  1934.  - .  8n 

373.  Arrangement  on  Subscriptions  to  Newspapers.    Cairo,  March  20,  1934. . .  815 

374.  Agreement  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail  under  Way-Bill  to  Order. 

Rome,  March  31,  1934 818 


XXXvi  SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  PAGE 

Communications  and  Transit — Continued 

378.  Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.     Bordeaux,  April  28, 

1934 85i 

394.  Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to  Posts  and  Telecom- 

munications.    Belgrade,  September  24, 1934 94° 

395.  Regional  Arrangement  on  Radiotelephone  Service  of  Ships  in  the  North 

Sea.     Lisbon,  October  8,  1934 943 

401.    Agreement  on  Postal  Exchanges.    Copenhagen,  etc.,  December  31,  1934. .     965 

Customs  and  Tariffs 

313.     Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers.     Geneva,  July  18,  1932      94 

347.     Convention  for  Facilitating  the  Circulation  of  Films  of  an  Educational 

Character.     Geneva,  October  n,  1933 456 

391.    Agreement  for  the  Non-Application  of  the  Most-Favored-Nation  Clause  to 

Multilateral  Economic  Conventions.    Washington,  July  15,  1934 927 

Economic  and  Financial  Relations 

304.     Rules  of  Procedure  for  the  Peaceful  Settlement  of  Economic  Disputes. 

Geneva,  January  28,  1932 I 

310.  Agreement  concerning  Non-German  Reparations.     Lausanne,  July  7,  1932  72 

311.  Agreement  concerning  German  Reparations.    Lausanne,  July  9,  1932 73 

312.  Austrian  Protocol.    Geneva,  July  15,  1932 84 

313.  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers.     Geneva,  July  18, 1932  94 

324.    Agreement  Establishing  an  Advisory  Technical  Collaboration  in  Rumania. 

Geneva,  January  28,  1933 , 282 

343.  Agreement  between  Holders  of  Large  Stocks  or  Users  of  Silver  and  Principal 

Producers  of  Silver.    London,  July  22,  1933 430 

344.  Final  Act  of  the  Conference  of  Wheat  Exporting  and  Importing  Countries. 

London,  August  25,  1933 ,  437 

349*    Agreement  for  the  International  Tin  Control  Scheme.    London,  October 

27,  1933 476 

349b.    Agreement  for  the  Tin  Buffer  Stock  Scheme.    The  Hague,  July  10,  1934. .     481 

351.     Convention  on  Bankruptcy.     Copenhagen,  November  7,  1933 496 

366.     Protocol  on  Economic  Relations.    Rome,  March  17,  1934 644 

379.  Agreement  for  the  Regulation  of  Production  and  Export  of  Rubber. 

London,  May  7,  1934 , 856 

391.    Agreement  for  the  Non- Application  of  the  Most-Favored-Nation  Clause  to 

Multilateral  Economic  Conventions.    Washington,  July  15,  1934 927 

396.  Protocol  on  Monetary  Stability.    Brussels,  October  20,  1934 945 

Education 

347.     Convention  for  Facilitating  the  Circulation  of  Films  of  an  Educational 

Character.     Geneva,  October  II,  1933 456 

359.     Convention  on  the  Teaching  of  History.     Montevideo,  December  26,  1933     612 


SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS  XXXVii 

No.  PAGE 

Extradition 

357.     Convention  on  Extradition.     Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 597 

376.  Central  American  Convention  on  Extradition.     City  of  Guatemala,  April 

12,  1934 833 

Fisheries 

322.     Convention  for  the  Preservation  of  Plaice  in  the  Skagerak,  the  Kattegat 

and  Sound.    Stockholm,  December  31,  1932 277 

Food 

344.     Final  Act  of  the  Conference  of  Wheat  Exporting  and  Importing  Countries. 

London,  August  25,  1933 437 

377.  Convention  for  the  Unification  of  the  Methods  of  Sampling  and  Analysing 

Cheeses.     Rome,  April  26,  1934 840 

Health 

326.     Sanitary  Convention  for  Aerial  Navigation.     The  Hague,  April  12,  1933. .     292 

386.     Agreement  concerning  Statistics  of  Causes  of  Death.     London,  June  19, 

1934 899 

392.     Convention  for  Mutual  Protection  against  Dengue  Fever.    Athens,  July 

25,  1934 930 

399.  Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Bills  of  Health.     Paris,  December  22, 1934    958 

400.  Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Consular  Visas  on  Bills  of  Health.     Paris, 

December  22,  1934 962 

Industrial  Property 

381.  Convention  for  Protection  of  Industrial  Property.    London,  June  2,  1934    870 

382.  Agreement  on  the  Suppression  of  False  Indications  of  Origin  of  Goods. 

London,  June  2,  1934 886 

383.  Agreement  on  the  International  Registration  of  Trade-Marks.    London, 

June  2,  1934 888 

384.  Agreement   on   the   International   Registration   of   Industrial   Designs. 

London,  June  2,  1934 894 

International  Organization 

304.     Rules  of  Procedure  for  the  Peaceful  Settlement  of  Economic  Disputes. 

Geneva,  January  28,  1932 I 

3i7a.     Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  International  Consultative  Committee  for 

Radiocommunications  (C.C.I. R.).    Madrid,  December  9, 1932 178 

32oa.     Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  International  Telegraph  Consultative  Committee 

(C.C.I.T.).     Madrid,  December  10, 1932 250 

32  la.     Internal  Regulations  of  the  International  Telephone  Consultative  Com- 
mittee (C.C.I.F.).     Madrid,  December  10, 1932 274 

324.  Agreement  Establishing  an  Advisory  Technical  Collaboration  in  Rumania. 

Geneva,  January  28,  1933 282 

325.  Pact  of  Organization  of  the  Little  Entente.     Geneva,  February  16, 1933 . , .     288 

327.     Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations.    Geneva, 

May  26,  1933 321 

364.  Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente.  Athens,  February  9, 1934 634 


XXXVU1  SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  PAGE 

International  Organization — Continued 

393.    Treaty  of  Entente  and  Collaboration  between  the  Baltic  States.     Geneva, 

September  12, 1934 936 

International  Rivers 

309.    Agreement  on  the  Setting-Up  of  Special  Services  at  the  Iron  Gates.    Sem- 

mering,  June  28,  1932 47 

33 1 .  Agreement  concerning  a  Modus  Vivendi  on  the  Jurisdiction  of  the  European 

Commission  of  the  Danube.    Semmering,  June  25,  1933 364 

Labor  Conventions 

306.  Convention  for  the  Protection  against  Accidents  of  Workers  Employed  in 

Loading  Ships  (Revised  1932).    Geneva,  April  27,  1932 12 

307.  Convention  on  the  Age  for  Admission  of  Children  to  Non-Industrial  Em- 

ployment.   Geneva,  April  30,  1932 30 

332.  Convention  on  Fee-Charging  Employment  Agencies.    Geneva,  June  29, 

1933 368 

333*     Convention  on  Old-Age  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).     Geneva,  June  29,  1933     374 
334.     Convention  on  Old-Age  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva,  June  29, 1933.     385 

335*    Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).    Geneva,  June  29, 

1933 387 

336.  Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva,  June  29, 1933    392 

337.  Draft  Convention  on  Survivors'  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).     Geneva,  June 

29,  1933 398 

338.  Draft  Convention  on  Survivors'  Insurance  (Agriculture).    Geneva,  June 

29,  1933 409 

387.  Convention  on  the  Employment  of  Women  at  Night  (Revised  1934). 

Geneva,  June  19,  1934 907 

388.  Convention   on   Workmen's    Compensation  for  Occupational    Diseases. 

Geneva,  June  21,  1934 913 

389.  Convention  on  Hours  of  Work  in  Automatic  Sheet-Glass  Works.    Geneva, 

June 21, 1934. 917 

390.  Convention  ensuring  Benefit  or  Allowances  to  the  Involuntarily  Unem- 

ployed.   Geneva,  June  23,  1934 920 

Legal  Relations  (Special) 

305.  Convention  on  the  Recognition  and  Enforcement  of  Judgments.     Copen- 

hagen, March  16,  1932 6 

351.    Convention  on  Bankruptcy.    Copenhagen,  November  7,  1933 496 

358.     Convention  on  Political  Asylum.    Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 607 

363.    Equal  Rights  Treaty.     Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 632 

397.    Convention  on  Inheritance  and  Succession.    Copenhagen,  November  19, 

1934 947 

Maritime  Law  and  Regulations 

306.  Convention  for  the  Protection  against  Accidents  of  Workers  Employed  in 

Loading  Ships  (Revised  1932).     Geneva,  April  27,  1932 12 

323.    Modification  of  the  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Convention  on  Safety  of 

Life  at  Sea.    London,  January  17,  1933 281 


SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS  XXxix 

No.  PAGE 

Maritime  Law  and  Regulations — Continued 

341.  Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Paris,  July  8,  1933. .     419 

345.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.    Stockholm,  Septem- 
ber 20,  1933 446 

378.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.     Bordeaux,  April  28, 

1934 851 

380.    Additional  Protocol  to  the  Convention  of  April  10,  1926,  on  the  Immunity 

of  State-Owned  Vessels.     Brussels,  May  24,  1934 868 

395.     Regional  Agreement  on  Radiotelephone  Service  of  Ships  in  the  North  Sea. 

Lisbon,  October  8,  1934 943 

Minorities 

308.     Declaration  by  the  Kingdom  of  Iraq.     Baghdad,  May  30,  1932 39 

Nationality 

355.  Convention  on  Nationality  of  Women.    Montevideo,  December  26,  1933    589 

356.  Convention  on  Nationality.     Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 593 

Political  Relations 

314.     Declaration  by  American  States.    Washington,  August  3, 1932 105 

325.     Pact  of  Organization  of  the  Little  Entente.     Geneva,  February  1 6,  1933. .  288 

342.  Agreement  of  Understanding  and  Cooperation.    Rome,  July  15,  1933 426 

361.    Convention  on  Rights  and  Duties  of  States.    Montevideo,  December  26, 

1933 * • 620 

36ia.     Additional  Protocol  relative  to  Non-intervention.     Buenos  Aires,  Decem- 
ber 23,  1936 626 

364.  Pact  of  the  Balkan  Entente.    Athens,  February  9, 1934 634 

365.  Protocol  of  Good  Understanding  and  Collaboration.     Rome,  March  1 7, 1934    641 

375.    Treaty  of  Central  American  Confraternity.    City  of  Guatemala,  April  12, 

1934 •  •  •     824 

393.    Treaty  of  Entente  and  Collaboration  between  the  Baltic  States.    Geneva, 

September  12,  1934 93^ 

Postal  Exchanges 

367.  Universal  Postal  Convention.    Cairo,  March  20, 1934. 646 

367c.     Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Regular  Mails  by  Air.    Cairo,  March  20, 

1934 725 

368.  Agreement  on  Letters  and  Boxes  of  Declared  Value.     Cairo,  March  20, 1934  743 

369.  Agreement  on  Parcel  Post.     Cairo,  March  20,  1934 75s 

369C.     Provisions  on  the  Transport  of  Parcel  Post  by  Air.     Cairo,  March  20, 1934  791 

"  370.    Agreement  on  Money  Orders.    Cairo,  March  20,  1934 797 

371.  Agreement  on  Postal  Checks.     Cairo,  March  20,  1934 806 

372.  Agreement  concerning  Payments  on  Delivery.     Cairo,  March  20, 1934 811 

373.  Agreement  on  Subscriptions  to  Newspapers.     Cairo,  March  20,  1934 815 


Xl  SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS 

No.  PAGE 

Postal  Exchanges — Continued 

394.    Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to  Posts  and  Telecom- 
munications.   Belgrade,  September  24,  1934 940 

401.  Agreement  on  Postal  Exchanges.     Copenhagen,  etc.,  December  31,  1934. .  965 
Radio 

316.  Telecommunication  Convention.     Madrid,  December  9,  1932 109 

317.  General  Radio  Regulations.     Madrid,  December  9, 1932 133 

318.  Additional  Radio  Regulations.     Madrid,  December  9,  1932 185 

319.  Additional  Protocol  (European)  to  the  Acts  of  the  International  Radio- 


telegraph Conference  of  Madrid.     Madrid,  December  9,  1932 192 

330.     European  Broadcasting  Convention.     Lucerne,  June  19,  1933 345 

341.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons,     Paris,  July  8,  1933. .     419 

345.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.     Stockholm,  Septem- 
ber 20,  1933 446 

378.     Regional  Arrangement  on  Maritime  Radio  Beacons.     Bordeaux,  April  28, 

1934 851 

394.  Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to  Posts  and  Telecom- 

munications.   Belgrade,  September  24,  1934 940 

395.  Regional  Agreement  on  Radiotelephone  Service  of  Ships  in  the  North  Sea. 

Lisbon,  October  8,  1934 943 

Railroads 

315.    Additional  Act  to  the  Convention  of  October  23,  1924,  on  the  Transport  of 

Goods  by  Rail.     Berne,  September  2,  1932 107 

3 53  -     Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail.     Rome,  November  23, 1 933    527 
354.    Convention  on  the  Transport  of  Passengers  by  Rail.    Rome,  November  23, 

1933 568 

374.    Agreement  on  the  Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail  under  Way-Bill  to  Order. 

Rome,  March  31,  1934 818 

Refugees 

350.     Convention  on  the  International  Status  of  Refugees.    Geneva,  October 

2  8,  1933 483 

Reparations  and  International  Payments 

310.  Agreement  concerning  Non-German  Reparations.     Lausanne,  July  7,  1932      72 

311.  Agreement  concerning  German  Reparations.    Lausanne,  July  9,  1932 73 

31  ib.    Proems-verbal  relating  to  the  Agreement  concerning  German  Reparations. 

Lausanne,  July  2,  1932 83 

Social  and  Humanitarian 

306.  Convention  for  the  Protection  against  Accidents  of  Workers  Employed  in 

Loading  Ships  (Revised  1932).     Geneva,  April  27,  1932 12 

307.  Convention  on  the  Age  for  Admission  of  Children  to  Non-Industrial  Em- 

ployment.   Geneva,  April  30,  1932 30 

323.     Modification  of  the  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Convention  on  Safety  of 

Life  at  Sea.    London,  January  17,  1933. 281 

326.    Sanitary  Convention  for  Aerial  Navigation.    The  Hague,  April  12,  1933, .     292 
332.     Convention  on  Fee-Charging  Employment  Agencies.     Geneva,  June  29, 

1933 368 


SUBJECT  LIST  OF  INSTRUMENTS  xll 

No.  PAGE 

333.  Convention  on  Old-Age  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).     Geneva,  June  29, 1933     374 

334.  Convention  on  Old- Age  Insurance  (Agriculture).     Geneva,  June  29,  1933     385 

335.  Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).     Geneva,  June  29, 

1933 387 

336.  Convention  on  Invalidity  Insurance  (Agriculture).     Geneva,  June  29, 1933     392 

337.  Draft  Convention  on  Survivors'  Insurance  (Industry,  etc.).     Geneva,  June 

29,  1933 398 

338.  Draft  Convention  on  Survivors'  Insurance  (Agriculture).     Geneva,  June 

29,  1933 409 

348.     Convention  for  the  Suppression  of  the  Traffic  in  Women  of  Full  Age. 

Geneva,  October  II,  1933 469 

350.     Convention  on  the  International  Status  of  Refugees.    Geneva,  October  28, 

1933 483 

352.     Convention  for  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and  Flora  in  Their  Natural  State. 

London,  November  8,  1933 504 

352a.     Protocol  on  Future  Conferences  for  the  Preservation  of  Fauna  and  Flora  in 

Their  Natural  State.    London,  November  8,  1933 526 

358.     Convention  on  Political  Asylum.     Montevideo,  December  26,  1933 607 

386.  Agreement  concerning  Statistics  of  Causes  of  Death.     London,  June  19, 

1934 899 

387.  Convention  on  the  Employment  of  Women  at  Night  (Revised  1934). 

Geneva,  June  19,  1934 907 

388.  Convention   on   Workmen's   Compensation   for   Occupational   Diseases. 

Geneva,  June  21, 1934 913 

389.  Convention  on  Hours  of  Work  in  Automatic  Sheet-Glass  Works.     Geneva, 

June  21,  1934 917 

390.  Convention  Ensuring  Benefit  or  Allowances  to  the  Involuntarily  Unem- 

ployed.    Geneva,  June  23, 1934 920 

392.     Convention  for  Mutual  Protection  against  Dengue  Fever.    Athens,  July  25, 

1934 -     930 

399.  Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Bills  of  Health.     Paris,  December  22,  1934    958 

400.  Agreement  for  Dispensing  with  Consular  Visas  on  Bills  of  Health.     Paris, 

December  22,  1934 962 

Telephone  and  Telegraph 

316.     Telecommunication  Convention.    Madrid,  December  9, 1932 109 

320.  Telegraph  Regulations.     Madrid,  December  10,  1932 200 

321.  Telephone  Regulations.     Madrid,  December  10,  1932 257 

394.  Special  Arrangement  for  Cooperation  with  regard  to  Posts  and  Telecom- 

munications.    Belgrade,  September  24,  1934 940 

395.  Regional  Arrangement  on  Radiotelephone  Service  of  Ships  in  the  North 

Sea.     Lisbon,  October  8,  1934 943 

War 

339.  Convention  defining  Aggression.     London,  July  3,  1933 4IQ 

340.  Convention  defining  Aggression.    London,  July  4,  1933 4*6 

346.     Anti-War  Treaty  of  Non- Aggression  and  Conciliation.     Rio  de  Janeiro, 

October  10,  1933 1 44$ 


No.  304 

RULES  OF  PROCEDURE  to  facilitate  the  Peaceful  and  Rapid  Set- 
tlement of  Economic  Disputes.  Adopted  by  the  Council  of  the 
League  of  Nations,  Geneva,  January  28,  1932. 

REGLEMENT  DE  PROCEDURE  pour  faciliter  la  solution  pacifique 
et  rapide  des  differends  d'ordre  economique*  Adopte  par  le 
Conseil  de  la  Societ6  des  Nations,  Geneve,  28  Janvier  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  These  rules  were  due  to  the  initiative  of  the  French  delegation  at  the 
Preliminary  Conference  with  a  View  to  Concerted  Economic  Action  in  1930.  The  Protocol 
concerning  the  Program  of  Future  Negotiations,  of  March  24, 1930  (No.  248!),  ante),  referred 
to  the  French  proposal  (Article  2,  paragraph  2).  By  a  resolution  of  October  2,  1930,  the 
Assembly  of  the  League  of  Nations  instructed  the  Economic  Committee  to  draw  up  concrete 
proposals  (Records  of  Eleventh  Assembly,  Plenary  Meetings,  p.  195) ;  and  these  rules  of  proce- 
dure were  the  result.  On  September  23,  1932,  the  Council  appointed  the  experts  provided 
for  in  Article  4  of  the  rules,  to  function  as  from  January  I,  1933.  League  of  Nations  Official 
Journal,  1932,  pp.  1718-19;  idem,  1933,  p.  194.  See  also  the  protocol  on  arbitration  clauses, 
of  September  24, 1923  (No.  98,  ante),  and  the  convention  on  the  execution  of  foreign  arbi- 
tral awards,  of  September  26,  1927  (No.  183,  ante).  The  explanatory  notes  to  the  text, 
reproduced  here,  were  drawn  up  by  the  Economic  Committee  of  the  League  of  Nations* 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  League  of  Nations  Document,  E.666  (1931);  Proceedings  of  the  Confer- 
ences with  a  View  to  Concerted  Economic  Action,  idem,  C.222.M.l09.i930.II;  C  149^48.1931. 
II.B;  C.269.M.I24.I93I.II.B.  The  text  of  the  rules  is  also  published  in  League  of  Nations 
Official  Journal,  1932,  p.  596. 

M.  0.  Hudson,  "The  Friendly  Settlement  of  Economic  Disputes  between  States/'  26 
Am.  Jour.  Int.  Law  (1932),  pp.  35$-"7« 

Text  from  League  of  Nations  Document,  C.57.M.32J932  JLB. 

CHAPTER  I  CHAPITRE  I 

JURISDICTION  COMPETENCE 

Article  i.1  Only  Members  of  the  Article  I.1  Seuls  les  Membres  de 
League  and  States  non-members  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations  et  les  Etats 
may  apply  to  the  Experts  for  the  non  membres  ont  qualit6  pour  re- 
peaceful  settlement  of  an  economic  courir  aux  experts  en  vue  du  r£gle- 
dispute  arising  between  them.  ment  pacifique  d'un  diflferend  d'ordre 

Economique  surgi  entre  eux. 

Art.  2.    A  dispute  can  only  be        Art.  2.    Les  experts  ne  sont  val- 
validly  brought  before  the  Experts     ablement  saisis  que  par  une  requite 
by   a   joint   application   from   the     commune  des  parties  en  cause. 
Parties  to  the  case. 

1  This  means  that  only  Governments  can  apply,  and  not  individuals. 

1  La  redaction  adopted  a  pour  but  d'indiquer  que  le  recours  a  la  procedure  envisaged  est 
reserve"  aux  gouvernements,  i  Texclusion  des  particuliers. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  304 


Art.  3.1  The  jurisdiction  of  the 
Experts  shall  extend  to  all  disputes 
concerned  with  matters  of  an  eco- 
nomic nature. 

CHAPTER  II 

APPOINTMENT  OF  THE  EXPERTS 

Art.  4.2  The  Experts,  to  the  num- 
ber of  fourteen,  shall  be  appointed  by 
the  Council  on  the  proposal  of  the 
Economic  Committee  of  the  League. 

The  Experts  must: 
(a)  Be  of  different  nationalities; 
(6)  Be  persons  enjoying  the  high- 
est esteem; 

(c)  Be  of  recognised  competence 
in  economic  questions  in  the  widest 
sense  of  the  term ; 

(d)  Be  familiar  with  the  problems 
involved  in  the  regulation  of  eco- 
nomic relations  between  countries, 
and    in    particular    with    matters 
usually  forming  the  subject  of  com- 
mercial treaties  and  other  economic 
agreements. 

Art,  5.  The  Experts  shall  be  ap- 
pointed for  a  period  of  five  years. 
Their  appointment  may  be  renewed. 


Art.  3.1  La  competence  des  ex- 
perts s'£tend  &  tous  les  differends 
portant  sur  des  matures  d'ordre 
6conornique. 

CHAPITRE  II 

NOMINATION  DES  EXPERTS 

Art.  4.2  Les  experts,  au  nombre 
de  quatorze,  sont  nomm6s  par  le 
Conseil,  sur  les  propositions  du 
Comit6  6conomique  de  la  Soci6te 
des  Nations. 

Les  experts  devront: 

a)  Etre  de  nationality  differente; 

&)  Jouir  de  la  plus  haute  con- 
sideration morale; 

c)  Poss6der  une  competence  no- 
toire  en  matiere  economique  au  sens 
le  plus  large; 

d)  Etre  familiarises  avec  les  pro- 
blemes  que  pose  1  'ajustement  des  rela- 
tions economiques  entre  les  pays  et 
en    particulier    avec    les    matieres 
faisant   habituellement   1'objet   des 
trait6s  de  commerce  et  autres  ac- 
cords economiques. 

Art.  5.  Les  experts  sont  nommes 
pour  une  periode  de  cinq  ans.  Leur 
mandat  peut  gtre  renouve!6. 


1  The  Experts  are  given  the  widest  jurisdiction,  as  their  consultation  is  optional. 

2  The  Economic  Committee  experienced  some  difficulty  in  deciding  the  number  of 
Experts. 

The  Experts  must  not  be  too  numerous,  so  that  there  may  be  a  sort  of  continuity  and  uni- 
formity in  their  doctrine. 

The  Economic  Committee  thought  that  the  case-law  built  up  by  the  Experts  might  be  a 
useful  guide  for  future  decisions,  recommendations  and  opinions,  though  it  would  not  neces- 
sarily form  a  precedent  in  the  legal  sense  given  to  the  term  "precedent"  in  Anglo-Saxon 
countries. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  Experts  must  not  be  too  few,  so  that  they  may  include  persons 
versed  in  the  economic  conditions  of  the  principal  countries  and  the  various  branches  of 
national  economy.  States,  too,  should  be  allowed  a  certain  latitude  of  choice. 

1  La  competence  des  experts  est  etablie  de  la  maniere  la  plus  large,  en  tenant  compte  du 
fait  que  le  recours  aux  experts  est  purement  facultatif . 

2  Le  Comit&  economique  a  eprouv&  quelques  difficultes  dans  la  determination  du  nombre 
d'experts  &  nommer. 

II  convenait  que  ce  nombre  ne  nit  pas  trop  grand,  afin  de  pouvoir  compter  sur  une  sorte  de 
continuite  et  d'uniformite  de  doctrine  de  la  part  de  ces  experts. 

Dans  la  pensee  du  Comite  economique,  la  jurisprudence  qu'ils  pourront,  par  leur  action, 
arriver  a  constituer,  pourra  servir  utilement  de  guide  pour  les  futures  d6cisions,  recomman- 
dations  et  avis,  sans  que  1'on  doive  toutefois  y  attacher  la  yaleur  d'un  precedent,  au  sens 
juridique  que  donnent  les  pays  anglo-saxons  a  cette  expression. 

D'autre  part,  le  nombre  de  ces  experts  ne  doit  pas  non  plus  etre  trpp  restfeint,  afin  cju'il 
puisse  comprendre  des  personnes  au  courant  des  conditions  economiques  des  pays  princi- 
paux,  ainsi  que  des  differentes  branches  de  Teconomie.  Enfin,  il  importe  que  les  Etats 
aient  une  certaine  latitude  pour  exercer  leur  choix. 


Jan.  28,  1932      PEACEFUL  SETTLEMENT  OF  ECONOMIC  DISPUTES 


They  shall  personally  perform 
their  duties. 

If  an  Expert  dies  or  resigns,  he 
shall  be  replaced  for  the  remainder 
of  his  term  of  office  by  a  person 
appointed  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  of  Article  4. 

On  the  expiry  of  their  term  of 
office,  the  Experts  shall  continue  to 
deal  with  any  cases  that  may  pre- 
viously have  been  submitted  to 
them  and  are  not  concluded. 

CHAPTER  III 
PROCEDURE 

Art.  6.  The  application  provided 
for  in  Article  2  above  shall  be  ad- 
dressed to  the  Secretary-General  of 
the  League  of  Nations. 

It  shall  be  drawn  up  by  common 
agreement  between  the  Parties  to 
the  case,  and  must  bear  their  signa- 
tures. 

The  application  shall  state : 

(a)  The  subject  of  the  dispute  and 
the  Parties  to  the  case ; 

(J)  The  number  of  Experts  to  be 
selected; 

(c)  The  nature  of  the  decision  the 
Expert  or  Experts  are  requested  to 
give  (advisory  opinion,  conciliation 
or  arbitration) ; 

(d)  The   names   of   the   Experts 
chosen  or  the  request  to  apply  Arti- 
cles 7  and  8. 

Art.  7.  If  the  Parties  have  chosen 
the  Experts  themselves,  the  Experts 
shall  in  turn  themselves  appoint 
their  President. 

Art.  8.  If  the  Parties  themselves 
have  not  chosen  the  Experts  in  their 
application,  the  choice  shall  be  made 
by  the  Chairman  of  the  Economic 
Committee.  For  this  purpose  the 
Secretary-General  shall  send  him  a 
copy  of  the  application. 

Art.  9.  Should  the  Chairman  of 
the  Economic  Committee  be  pre- 
vented from  making  a  choice,  or  be 
a  national  of  one  of  the  Parties,  the 


Us  doivent  exercer  personnelle- 
ment  leurs  fonctions. 

En  cas  de  d£c£s  ou  de  demission 
d'un  expert,  celui-ci  est,  pour  la 
dur6e  du  mandat  inachev6,  remplac£ 
par  une  personne  nomm6e  conform6- 
ment  aux  dispositions  de  Tarticle  4. 

A  Texpiration  de  leur  mandat,  les 
experts  continueront  &  singer  dans  les 
affaires  dont  ils  pourraient  £tre 
saisis. 


CHAPITRE  III 

PROCEDURE 

Art.  6.  La  requite  pr£vue  &  Far- 
ticle  2  ci-dessus  sera  adress6e  au 
Secretaire  g6n6ral  de  la  Soci6t6  des 
Nations. 

Elle  doit  §tre  r£dig6e  de  commun 
accord  entre  les  parties  en  cause  et 
porter  leur  signature. 

La  requite  doit  obligatoirement 
indiquer: 

a)  L'objet    du    difKrend    et    les 
parties  en  cause; 

b)  Le     nombre    des    experts    & 
choisir; 

c)  La  t&che  du  ou  des  experts 
(avis    consultatif,    conciliation    ou 
arbitrage)  ; 

d)  Les  noms  des  experts  choisis  ou 
la  demande  d'appliquer  les  articles  7 
et8. 

Art.  7.  Lorsque  les  parties  ont 
choisi  elles-m^mes  les  experts,  ceux- 
ci  d£signent  parmi  eux  leur  president. 

Art.  8.  Lorsque  les  parties  n'ont 
pas  elles-rn£mes  fait  choix  des  ex- 
perts dans  leur  requite,  ce  choix  est 
effectu6  par  le  president  du  Comit6 
6conomique.  A  cet  effet,  le  Secr6- 
taire  g£n£ral  adresse  &  ce  dernier 
copie  de  la  requite. 

Art.  9.  Lorsque  le  president  du 
Comit6  6conomique  est  enip£ch6  ou 
qu'il  est  ressortissant  de  Tune  des 
parties,  le  choix  sera  fait  par  son 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  304 


choice  shall  be  made  by  his  predeces- 
sor, provided  the  latter  is  still  a 
member  of  the  Committee. 

Should  the  predecessor  of  the 
Chairman  also  be  unable,  for  one  of 
the  above  reasons,  to  make  a  choice, 
the  choice  shall  be  made  by  the  oldest 
member  who  is  not  a  national  of  any 
Party  to  the  case. 

Art.  lo.1  The  person  called  upon 
to  make  the  choice  in  accordance 
with  Articles  7  and  8  shall  do  so 
within  15  days  after  receiving  the 
communication  from  the  Secretary- 
General  of  the  League  of  Nations. 
If  several  Experts  have  to  be  chosen, 
he  shall  also  appoint  their  President. 

The  choice  shall  be  made  exclu- 
sively from  among  the  persons  re- 
ferred to  in  Article  4. 

Moreover,  the  Experts  must  be  of 
a  different  nationality  from  that  of 
the  Parties. 

Art.  u.  Any  recourse  to  the  Ex- 
perts shall  imply  that  the  Parties 
accept  the  provisions  of  the  present 
Rules. 

If  the  Parties  have  requested  an 
arbitral  award,  that  fact  shall  in- 
volve the  obligation  on  their  part  to 
submit  to  the  award  to  be  given  and 
to  carry  it  out  in  good  faith. 

Art.  12.  The  Experts  shall  be 
entirely  free  to  follow  the  procedure 
they  deem  best  in  each  particular 
case. 

Art.  13.2  ^  The  Parties  shall  be 
informed  without  delay  of  the  re- 
sults of  the  Experts'  work. 

These  results  shall  be  published  by 
the  Secretary-General  of  the  League 
of  Nations,  if  the  Parties  consent. 


predecesseur,  pour  autant  que  ce 
dernier  soit  encore  membre  du 
Comite. 

Si  le  predecesseur  du  president  ne 
peut,  £  son  tour,  et  pour  Tun  de  ces 
motifs,  proceder  au  choix,  ce  soin 
incombera  au  membre  le  plus  &g6 
qui  n'est  ressortissant  d'aucune  par- 
tie  en  cause. 

Art.  lo.1  La  personne  appe!6e  & 
faire  le  choix,  conform6ment  aux 
articles  7  et  8,  devra  s'acquitter  de 
cette  t&che  dans  un  delai  de  quinze 
jours  apr£s  avoir  regu  la  communica- 
tion du  Secretaire  general  de  la  So- 
ciete  des  Nations.  Si  le  choix  doit 
porter  sur  plusieurs  experts,  elle 
designera  egalement  leur  president. 

Le  choix  doit  Itre  fait  exclusive- 
ment  parmi  les  personnes  vis£es  £ 
1'article  4. 

Les  experts  choisis  devront  £tre 
d'une  nationality  differente  de  celle 
des  parties. 

Art.  ii  Tout  recours  aux  ex- 
perts implique  Tacceptation  par  les 
parties  des  dispositions  du  present 
reglement. 

Le  fait  que  les  parties  ont  demand^ 
une  sentence  arbitrale  entratne  de 
leur  part  1'obligation  de  se  soumettre 
£  ladite  sentence  et  de  l'ex£cuter  de 
bonne  foi. 

Art.  12.  Les  experts  sont  enti&re- 
ment  libres  de  determiner  la  proce- 
dure qu'ils  estiment  la  mieux  ap- 
propriee  &  chaque  cas  particulier. 

Art.  13. 2  Les  r£sultats  des  tra- 
vaux  des  experts  seront  port6s  sans 
delai  £  la  connaissance  des  parties. 

Us  seront  publics  par  le  Secretaire 
general  de  la  Soci6te  des  Nations,  si 
les  parties  y  consentent. 


1  The  last  provision  of  Article  10  naturally  does  not  exclude  the  right  of  the  Parties  to  have 
themselves  represented  by  agents  instructed  to  defend  their  interests. 

2  In  principle,  the  Economic  Committee  favours  the  publication  of  such  results,  but  the 
results  can  only  be  published  when  the  Parties  agree,  because,  if  publication  were  compulsory 
in  every  instance,  Governments  might  hesitate  to  resort  to  the  proposed  procedure. 

*La  derniere  disposition  de  1'article  10  n'exclut  naturellement  pas  le  droit  des  parties  de 
se  faire  representer  par  des  agents  charges  de  d6fendre  leurs  interns. 

2  En  principe,  le  Comite"  economique  est  favorable  a  la  publication  des  r6sultats  des  tra- 
vaux  des  experts^  mais  cette  publication  ne  peut  etre  envisagee  que  lorsque  les  parties  y 
consentent,  car  si  elle  etait  obligatoire  dans  tous  les  cas,  les  gouvernements  pourraient 
hesiter  a  utiliser  la  procedure  prevue. 


Jan.  28,  1932      PEACEFUL  SETTLEMENT  OF  ECONOMIC  DISPUTES 


CHAPTER  IV 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS 

A. — Secretariat 

Art.  14.  The  Secretariat  shall  be 
provided  by  the  Secretary-General 
of  the  League  of  Nations. 

B. — Expenses 

Art  15.  Each  of  the  Parties  shall 
bear  its  own  expenses  for  procedure. 
The  joint  expenditure  decided  upon 
by  the  President  of  the  Experts  shall 
be  borne  by  the  Parties  in  equal 
parts. 

Art.  16.  The  expenses  referred  to 
in  the  above  article  shall  include 
remuneration  to  be  granted  to  the 
Experts,  witnesses  and  other  per- 
sons whose  co-operation  is  required. 

Art.  I7.1  At  the  beginning  of  the 
procedure  the  President  of  the  Ex- 
perts shall  fix  the  amount  to  be  ad- 
vanced by  each  of  the  Parties  in 
order  to  cover  the  above-mentioned 
expenses,  and  shall  draw  up  an  ac- 
count on  the  conclusion  of  the  work. 


C— Seat 

Art.  18.  In  principle,  the  Experts 
shall  sit  at  Geneva  in  the  Secretariat 
of  the  League  of  Nations.  Their 
President  may,  however,  decide  that 
they  shall  sit  elsewhere. 


CHAPITRE  IV 

DISPOSITIONS  GENERATES 

A. — Secretariat 

Art.  14.  Le  Secretariat  est  assur6 
par  le  Secretaire  general  de  la  So- 
ci£t6  des  Nations. 

R.— Frais 

Art,  15.  Chacune  des  parties  sup- 
porte  ses  propres  frais  de  procedure. 
Les  frais  communs  determines  par  le 
president  des  experts  sont,  en  parties 
egales,  supports  par  les  parties. 

Art.  16.  Dans  les  frais  communs 
dont  il  est  question  £  Particle  pre- 
cedent sont  comprises  les  indemnitfe 
£  allouer  aux  experts,  aux  t&noins  et 
autres  personnes  dont  la  collabora- 
tion serait  requise. 

Art.  I7.1  Au  debut  de  la  proc6- 
dure,  le  president  des  experts  d6- 
terminera  le  montant  de  la  somme 
dont  1'avance  devra  6tre  faite  par 
chacune  des  parties,  de  maniere  & 
couvrir  les  frais  ci-dessus  vises  et 
pour  lesquels  le  compte  sera  arrSte 
par  lui  &  la  conclusion  des  travaux. 

C.— Silge 

Art.  18.  Les  experts  si£gent  en 
principe  &  Geneve,  au  Secretariat  de 
la  Societe  des  Nations.  Leur  presi- 
dent peut  toutefois  decider  qu'ils 
siegeront  en  un  autre  lieu. 


1  This  rule  is  intended  to  ensure  that  the  League  shall  not  incur  expenditure  for  which  no 
provision  has  been  made  in  its  budget,  and  which  ought,  after  all,  to  be  borne  by  the  Parties. 
It  also  ensures  that  there  shall  be  no  delay  in  the  procedure. 

1  La  regie  posee  a  cet  article  a  pour  but  d'eviter  de  faire  engager  par  la  Societe  des  Nations 
des  depenses  qui  ne  seraient  pas  prevues  a  son  budget  et  qu'en  fin  de  compte  il  est  normal  de 
faire  supporter  par  les  parties.  Elle  permet  egalement  de  ne  pas  apporter  de  retard  a 
raccomplissement  des  difT6rents  actes  de  procedure. 


6  INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION  No.  305 

No.  305 

CONVENTION  concerning  the  Recognition  and  Enforcement  of 
Judgments.     Signed  at  Copenhagen,  March  16,  1932. 

CONVENTION  relative  £  la  reconnaissance  et  a  P  execution  des  jtige- 
ments.     Signee  a  Copenhague,  16  mars  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  A  draft  convention  on  this  subject  was  drawn  up  by  the  Conference  on 
Private  International  Law,  at  its  fifth  session  at  The  Hague,  October  12-November  7,  1925 
(Actes  de  la  Cinguieme  Session,  p.  344) ;  but  it  seems  to  have  exercised  little  influence  on  the 
drafting  of  this  convention.  See  also  the  convention  between  Norway  and  Sweden,  and 
Denmark,  of  April  25, 1861  (i  I  Sverges  Traktater  med  frammande  Magter  p.  396) ;  and  Articles 
423-437  of  the  Bustamante  Code  annexed  to  the  Habana  Convention  of  February  20,  1928 
(No.  i86a,  ante}.  The  text  of  this  convention  consists  of  versions  in  the  language  of  each  of 
the  five  states. 

RATIFICATIONS.  Ratifications  of  this  convention  were  deposited  by  all  the  signatories 
at  Copenhagen,  March.  18,  1933. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  The  text  of  this  convention  is  also  published  in  Lovtidende  for  Kongeriget 
Danmark,  1933,  p.  868;  the  Danish  and  Swedish  versions  are  published  in  27  Martens,  N.R.G. 
(3d  ser.),  p.  352. 

V.  Bentzon,  "Fern  Nordiske  Rets-Konventioner,"  47  Tidsskrift for  Rettsvidenskap  (1934), 
pp.  336-83;  Bentzon  and  K.  Hammerich,  "La  recente  Union  scandinave  de  droit  interna- 
tional prive/'  29  Revue  critique  de  droit  international  (1934),  pp.  855-72;  L.  Uddgren,  "  Die 
nordische  Konvention  iiber  Anerkennung  und  Vollstrechung  von  Urteilen/'  9  Zeitschrift  fur 
auslandisches  und  international  Privatrecht  (1935),  pp.  513-5. 

Entered  into  force  July  i,  IQ33.1 

Translations  from  139  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series,  p.  181. 

[Translation]  [Traduction] 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Denmark  Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  de  Danemark  et 
and  Iceland,  the  President  of  the  d'Islande,  le  President  de  la  Re- 
Republic  of  Finland,  His  Majesty  publique  de  Finlande,  Sa  Majest6 
the  King  of  Norway  and  His  Majesty  le  Roi  de  Norvege  et  sa  Majest6  le 
the  King  of  Sweden,  having  agreed  Roi  de  Su£de,  ayant  decid6  de  con- 
to  conclude  a  convention  relating  to  clure  une  convention  relative  a  la 
the  recognition  and  enforcement  of  reconnaissance  et  &  l'ex£cution  des 
judgments,  have  appointed  as  their  decisions  judiciaires,  ont  nomm6  pour 
Plenipotentiaries: 2  leurs  pl£nipotentiaires,  savoir: 2 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Denmark  Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  de  Danemark 

and  Iceland:  et  d'Islande: 

For  Denmark:  Peter  Rochegune  Pour  le  Danemark:  Peter  Roche- 
Munch  ;  gune  Munch  ; 

For   Iceland:   Sveinn    Bjdrnsson;  Pour  Tlslande:  Sveinn  Bjornsson; 

The  President  of  the  Republic  of  Le  President  de  la  Republique  de 

Finland :  Onni  Talas ;  Finlande :  Onni  Talas ; 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Norway:  Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  de  Norv&ge: 

Hans  Emil  Huitfeldt;  Hans  Emil  Huitfeldt; 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3209,  July  I,  1933. 

2  The  titles  of  plenipotentiaries  are  omitted. — ED. 


March  16,  1932 


RECOGNITION  OF  JUDGMENTS 


His  Majesty  the  King  of  Sweden : 
Oskar  Anton  Herman  Ewerlof; 

Who,  being  duly  authorised  for 
the  purpose,  have  agreed  on  the 
following  articles: 

Article  i.  Valid  judgments  ren- 
dered in  civil  matters  in  one  of  the 
Contracting  States  shall  have  bind- 
ing effect  also  in  the  other  States. 
The  same  shall  apply  to  judgments 
in  criminal  matters  in  so  far  as  they 
relate  to  compensation  or  damages 
for  injury  sustained. 


The  term  "judgment"  shall  be 
understood  to  mean  the  Court's  de- 
cision in  respect  of  the  claim  or  legal 
position  which  forms  the  subject  of 
the  case. 

Art.  2.  The  following  shall  be 
assimilated  to  valid  judgments  for 
the  purpose  of  the  present  Con- 
vention : 

(1)  Decisions  by  which  the  Over- 
exekutor  in  Finland  or  in  Sweden  has 
fixed  a  time-limit  for  payment  in 
actions   for   the   recovery  of  debt 
(lagsokningsm&l)  when  the  period  of 
appeal  (besvar)  against  the  decisions 
has  expired ; 

(2)  Compromises  reached  before 
a  conciliation  commission  or  a  court 
of  justice; 

(3)  Valid    decisions    reached    in 
civil  matters  either  by  means  of  the 
judgment  or  out  of  court  with  regard 
to  compensation  for  legal  costs  or 
payments  to  witnesses  or  experts. 


Art.  3.  Judgments  by  default 
rendered  in  Denmark,  Iceland  or 
Norway  in  first  instance  against  a 
defendant  and  judgments  by  default 
(Tredskodom)  or  other  judgments 
rendered  in  Finland  or  Sweden  in 
first  instance  against  a  defaulting 
defendant  shall  not  have  binding 
effect  in  the  other  States  unless: 


Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  de  Suede:  Oskar 
Anton  Herman  Ewerlof; 

Lesquels,  dfiment  habilites  a  cet 
effet,  sont  convenus  des  dispositions 
suivantes : 

Article  i.  Les  decisions  judiciaires 
ayant  Tautorite  de  la  chose  jug6e, 
qui  seront  rendues  en  mati&re  civile 
dans  Tun  des  Etats  contractants, 
auront  aussi  effet  obligatoire  dans 
les  autres  Etats.  II  en  sera  de  m£me 
pour  les  decisions  rendues  en  mati£re 
p&nale,  s'il  s'agit  de  dommages- 
inter^ts  ou  de  reparations  con- 
cernant  un  acte  prejudiciable. 

Le  terme  "decisions  judiciaires" 
s'entend  de  la  decision  par  laquelle 
le  tribunal  r&gle  la  demande  ou  la 
situation  de  droit  qui  forme  Fobjet 
de  Taffaire. 

Art.  2.  Aux  fins  de  la  pr6sente 
convention  sont  assimil£es  aux  d6- 
cisions  judiciaires  ayant  Tautorit6 
de  la  chose  jug6e : 

1°  Les  decisions  par  lesquelles 
I*  Over  exekutor,  en  Finlande  ou  en 
Su&de,  a  fix6  un  d61ai  de  paiement 
dans  les  actions  en  recouvrement  de 
cr6ances,  lorsque  le  d61ai  de  recours 
contre  la  decision  est  expir& ; 

2°  Les  transactions  conclues  de- 
vant  une  commission  de  conciliation 
ou  un  tribunal; 

3°  Les  decisions  ayant  force  de 
chose  jug£e  qui,  en  mati&re  civile, 
soit  par  la  voie  du  jugement,  soit  au 
cours  de  la  proc6dure  sont  inter- 
venues  au  sujet  du  remboursement 
des  d6pens  ou  de  Tindemnit^  vers£e 
&  des  t6moins  ou  experts. 

Art.  3.  Les  jugements  par  d£faut 
qui,  en  Danemark,  en  Islande  ou  en 
Norv£ge  auront  6t6  rendus  en  pre- 
mi&re  instance  contre  le  d£fendeur, 
ainsi  que  les  jugements  par  d6faut 
(Tredskodom)  et  les  autres  jugements 
qui,  en  Finlande  ou  en  Suede,  auront 
et6  rendus  en  premiere  instance 
contre  un  defendeur  d6faillant,  n'au- 
ront  pas  effet  obligatoire  dans  les 
autres  Etats,  sauf : 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  305 


(1)  The  defendant  at  the  time 
when  the  writ  or  the  summons  to  a 
conciliation  commission  or  to  the 
overexekutor  was  issued   had    his 
domicile  or  his  registered  business 
address  in  the  State  in  which  the 
judgment  was  rendered  or  unless 
the    Board    of    Directors    which 
represented  the  defendant  had  its 
seat  in  that  State  or  the  notice 
was    given    to    a    representative 
whom  the  defendant  was   com- 
pelled by  law  to  have  in   that 
State;  or 

(2)  A  binding   agreement  has 
been  reached  to  the  effect  that 
the  case  be  dealt  with  by  the 
Court  which  rendered  the  judg- 
ment; or 

(3)  The    judgment    relates    to 
compensation  or  damages  for  in- 
jury done  in  the  State  in  which  the 
judgment   is   rendered    and    the 
summons  has  been  notified  to  the 
defendant  personally  during  his 
stay  in  that  State. 

The  same  rules  shall  apply  to 
judgments  by  default  rendered  in 
appeal  cases  against  the  defendant 
when  the  judgment  in  the  first  in- 
stance, was  also  given  by  default. 

Art.  4.  Decisions  and  compro- 
mises which,  in  accordance  with 
Articles  I  to  3,  have  a  binding  effect 
outside  the  State  in  which  the  deci- 
sion has  been  rendered  or  the  com- 
promise has  been  entered  into  and  are 
enforceable  in  that  State,  shall,  on  de- 
mand, be  enforced  in  the  other  States. 

Art.  5.  The  request  for  enforce- 
ment shall  be  addressed: 

In  Denmark  and  Iceland,  to  the 
Sheriff  (Foged) ; 

In  Finland  and  Sweden,  to  the 
Overexekutor; 

In  Norway,  to  the  competent 
Court  for  enforcement  (Namsret). 

Art.  6.  The  request  for  enforce- 
ment of  a  decision  shall  be  accom- 
panied by: 


i°  Lorsque  le  defendeur,  au 
moment  OTJL  a  £t6  signifi£e  Tassig- 
nation,  la  citation  en  conciliation 
ou  la  citation  devant  I' Overexe- 
kutor, avait  son  domicile  ou  sa 
raison  sociale  declare  dans  1'Etat 
oft  a  6t6  rendu  le  jugement,  ou  bien 
lorsque  le  conseil  d 'administration 
qui  representait  le  d6fendeur  avait 
son  siege  dans  cet  Etat,  ou  encore 
lorsque  la  signification  a  6te  faite 
&  un  representant  que  le  defendeur 
6tait  tenu,  en  vertu  de  la  loi,  d 'avoir 
dans  cet  Etat ;  ou 

2°  Lorsqu'est  intervenu  un  ar- 
rangement obligatoire  par  lequel 
Taffaire  devait  £tre  port£e  devant 
le  tribunal  qui  a  rendu  le  juge- 
ment; ou 

3a  Lorsque  le  jugement  a  trait 
£  des  dommages-interSts  ou  £ 
des  reparations  concernant  un  acte 
pr£judiciable  commis  dans  1'Etat 
oil  il  a  £t6  rendu,  et  que  1'assigna- 
tion  a  6t6  signifi£e  personnellement 
au  defendeur,  pendant  son  sejour 
dans  cet  Etat. 

Les  m&nes  regies  sont  applicables 
aux  arrSts  par  defaut  rendus  en  appel 
contre  le  defendeur,  lorsque  le  juge- 
ment prononc6  en  premiere  instance 
1'avait  6galement  £t6  par  d6faut. 

Art.  4.  S'il  s'agit  de  decisions  ou 
de  transactions  qui,  en  vertu  des 
articles  1-3,  ont  effet  obligatoire  en 
dehors  de  1'Etat  ou  elles  sont  inter- 
venues,  et  qui  sont  susceptiblesd'ex6- 
cution  dans  cet  Etat,  Tex6cution 
pourra  en  gtre  demand6e  dans  les 
autres  Etats  contractants. 

Art.  5.  La  demande  d 'exequatur 
sera  adress6e: 

En  Danemark  et  en  Islande,  £ 
Thuissier  public  (Foged) ; 

En  Finlande  et  en  SuMe,  d 
V  Overexekutor; 

En  Norv&ge,  au  tribunal  comp£- 
tent  en  mati&re  d'ex6cution  (Nams- 
ref). 

Art.  6.  La  demande  d'ex6cution 
d'une  decision  devra  §tre  accom- 
pagn6e: 


March  16,  1932 


RECOGNITION  OF  JUDGMENTS 


(1)  The  decision  in  the  original 
or  a  copy  certified  correct  by  the 
competent  authority; 

(2)  A  certificate  to  the  effect 
that  the  decision  is  of  the  kind 
mentioned  in  Article  I  or  2  and 
that  it  has  acquired  force  of  law 
and  is  enforceable  in  the  State  in 
which  it  is  rendered ; 

(3)  In  the  case  of  judgments  of 
the  kind  mentioned  in  Article  3, 
a  certificate  to  the  effect  that  the 
judgment  is  valid  in  accordance 
with  that  article. 

The  request  for  enforcement  of  a 
compromise  shall  be  accompanied  by 
a  copy  of  the  text  of  the  compromise 
certified  correct  by  the  competent 
authority  and  a  certificate  to  the 
effect  that  the  compromise  has  been 
rendered  before  a  conciliation  com- 
mission or  a  court  of  justice  and  is 
enforceable  in  the  State  in  which  it 
has  been  reached. 

Documents  drawn  up  in  Finnish 
or  Icelandic  shall  be  accompanied  by 
a  certified  translation  into  Danish, 
Norwegian  or  Swedish. 

Art.  7.  The  certificates  men- 
tioned in  Article  6  shall  be  drawn  up : 

In  Denmark,  Finland  and  Iceland, 
by  the  Ministry  of  Justice; 

In  Norway,  by  the  Department  of 
Justice; 

In  Sweden,  by  the  Administration 
of  a  province. 

Art.  8.  The  decision  relating  to 
enforcement  under  the  present  Con- 
vention shall  be  taken  without 
consultation  of  the  other  Party. 
Nevertheless  in  special  circum- 
stances that  Party  may  be  allowed 
to  express  its  opinions. 

Art.  9.  The  enforcement  shall 
take  place  in  each  State  in  accord- 
ance with  the  laws  in  force  therein 
without  regard  to  any  coercive 
measures  which  may  be  provided  for 
in  the  decision  or  compromise. 


i°  De  I'original  de  la  decision 
ou  d'une  expedition  certifi6e  con- 
forme  par  I'autorit6  comp6tente; 

2°  D'une  piece  attestant  que  la 
decision  rentre  dans  la  cat6gorie 
mentionn£e  aux  articles  I  ou  2, 
qu'elle  a  l'autorit£  de  la  chose  j  ug6e, 
et  qu'elle  est  susceptible  d'ex<§cu- 
tion  dans  TEtatou  ellea6te  rendue ; 

3°  Pour  les  jugements  de  la 
cat£gorie  vis6e  &  Particle  3,  d'une 
pi£ce  attestant  que  le  jugement 
est  valide,  conformement  audit 
article. 

La  demande  d  'execution  visant 
une  transaction  devra  £tre  accom- 
pagnee  d'une  expedition  du  proces- 
verbal  de  transaction,  certifi6e  con- 
forme  par  Tautorite  competente,  et 
d'une  pi£ce  attestant  que  la  trans- 
action est  intervenue  devant  une 
commission  de  conciliation  ou  un 
tribunal,  et  qu'elle  est  susceptible 
d'ex£cution  dans  TEtat  ou  elle  est 
intervenue. 

Les  actes  redig£s  en  finnois  ou  en 
islandais  devront  6tre  accompagn6s 
d'une  traduction  danoise,  norvegi- 
enne  ou  su6doise,  certifi£e  conforme. 

Art.  7.  Les  attestations  mention- 
n£es  £  1'article  6  seront  <§tablies: 

En  Danemark,  en  Finlande  et  en 
Islande,  par  le  Minis t^re  de  la  Justice ; 

En  Norvege,  par  le  d&partement 
de  la  justice; 

En  Su&de,  par  une  prefecture. 

Art.  8.  La  decision  relative  & 
Tex^cution  d'une  decision,  conform6- 
ment  &  la  pr£sente  convention,  sera 
prise  sans  que  la  Partie  adverse  ait 
6t6  entendue;  dans  des  cas  sp&ciaux, 
cependant,  cette  Partie  aura  la 
possibility  de  d£poser. 

Art.  9.  L'ex6cution  s'effectuera, 
dans  chaque  Etat,  d'apres  la  16gis- 
lation  en  vigueur  dans  cet  Etat, 
quelles  que  soient  les  dispositions 
eventuellement  £nonc£es  dans  la 
decision  ou  dans  le  proems-verbal  de 
transaction,  au  sujet  de  mesures  de 
contrainte. 


10 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  305 


Art.  10.  The  provisions  of  the 
present  Convention  regarding  the 
binding  effect  of  judgments  shall  not 
affect  Article  22  of  the  Convention  of 
February  6,  1931,  containing  rules 
of  international  private  law  regard- 
ing marriage,  adoption  and  guardian- 
ship,1 nor  shall  they  have  the  effect 
of  rendering  a  decision  in  such  mat- 
ters valid  in  circumstances  other 
than  those  provided  for  in  that 
article.  The  enforcement  of  judg- 
ments which  are  valid  under  that 
article  may  be  demanded  under 
Articles  4-9  of  the  present  Conven- 
tion. 

If  a  judgment  has  been  given  in 
Denmark,  Iceland  or  Norway  in 
application  of  the  laws  regarding 
marriage  settlements,  the  present 
Convention  shall  not  apply  to  such 
judgment  in  Finland  or  Sweden  in 
cases  where  the  dispute  has  been 
judged  in  accordance  with  the  for- 
mer marriage  laws  of  the  country. 

Further,  the  present  Convention 
shall  not  apply  to  decisions  or  com- 
promises regarding  the  duty  of 
maintenance  in  accordance  with  the 
law  relating  to  families  and  shall  not 
affect  the  Convention  of  February 
10,  1931,  regarding  the  collection  of 
maintenance  contributions.2 

The  present  Convention  shall  also 
not  affect  the  provisions  contained 
in  other  conventions  regarding  the 
validity  or  enforcement  of  judg- 
ments or  other  decisions. 

Art.  ir.  The  present  Convention 
shall  not  apply  to  decisions  and 
compromises  relating  to: 

(i)  Relationship,  the  right  of 
succession,  the  responsibility  of 
heirs  for  debts,  death  settlements, 
bankruptcies,  compulsory  com- 
position without  bankruptcy 
(Tvangsakkord  tidenfor  Konkurs) 
or  the  invalidity  of  judicial  acts 
or  other  measures  in  case  of 
bankruptcy. 

1  No.  281,  ante. — ED. 


Art.  10.  Les  stipulations  de  la 
presente  convention  concernant  1'ef- 
fet  obligatoire  des  decisions  judi- 
ciaires  n'op£reront  pas  derogation  a 
1'article  22  de  la  Convention  du  6 
fevrier  1931  institnant  des  regies 
de  droit  international  prive  con- 
cernant le  manage,  1'adoption  et  la 
tutelle;1  elles  n'auront  pas  pour  effet 
de  rendre  une  decision  en  cette 
matiere  valable  dans  d 'autres  cas  que 
ceux  qui  sont  prevus  au  susdit  article. 
L 'execution  de  decisions  judiciaires 
valables  d'apres  ledit  article  pourra 
£tre  demandee,  en  vertu  des  articles 
4-9  de  la  presente  convention. 

Lorsqu'une  decision  judiciaire  aura 
et6  rendue  en  Danemark,  en  Islande 
ou  en  Norvege,  en  application  de  la 
legislation  sur  le  regime  des  biens 
matrimoniaux,  la  presente  conven- 
tion ne  sera  pas  applicable  a  cette 
decision  en  Finlande  ou  en  Su&de,  si, 
dans  ces  derniers  pays,  le  litige  efit  dft 
£tre  juge  d'apres  Tancienne  legisla- 
tion du  pays  sur  le  mariage. 

La  presente  convention  ne  s'ap- 
pliquera  pas  aux  decisions  ou  tran- 
sactions relatives  a  Tobligation  ali- 
mentaire  institute  par  le  droit  de 
famille  et  n'operera  pas  derogation  a 
la  Convention  du  10  fevrier  1931  sur 
le  recouvrement  des  pensions  ali- 
mentaires.2 

La  presente  convention  n'operera 
pas  non  plus  derogation  aux  dis- 
positions d'autres  conventions  con- 
cernant rautorite  ou  Texecution  de 
decisions  judiciaires  et  autres. 

Art.  ii.  La  presente  convention 
ne  sera  pas  applicable  aux  decisions 
et  transactions  concernant  les  ma- 
tieres  suivantes : 

i°  La  parente,  le  droit  de  suc- 
c6der,  la  responsabilit6  des  heri- 
tiers  a  l'6gard  des  dettes  du  de- 
funt,  la  devolution  des  successions, 
radministration  des  faillites,  le  con- 
cordat sans  faillite  (Tvangsakkord 
udenfor  Konkurs)  ou  Tin  validation 
d'actes  judiciaires  ou  d 'autres 
mesures,  en  cas  de  faillite. 
2  No.  282,  ante. — ED. 


March  16,  1932 


RECOGNITION  OF  JUDGMENTS 


II 


(2)  Property    rights    or    other 
rights  relating  to  immovable  prop- 
erty in  one  of  the  other  States,  the 
obligation  to  take  steps  relating 
to  such  rights  or  the  consequences 
of  neglecting  such  obligation; 

(3)  Taxes  or  dues  to  the  State 
or  commune  or  other  questions  of 
public  law,  even  if  the  decision 
has  been  rendered  in  the  forms 
applicable  to  civil  matters. 

The  Convention  shall  also  not 
apply  to  awards  of  the  special  courts 
for  labour  disputes. 

Art.  12.  The  Convention  shall 
not  involve  any  obligation  to  recog- 
nise or  enforce  a  decision  or  a 
compromise  which  would  manifestly 
be  incompatible  with  the  laws  of  the 
country. 

Art.  13.  The  Convention  shall 
not  apply  to  decisions  rendered  or 
compromises  reached  before  the 
coming  into  force  of  the  Convention. 

Art.  14.  The  Convention  shall  be 
ratified  and  the  instruments  of  ratifi- 
cation shall  be  deposited  in  the 
archives  of  the  Danish  Ministry  of 
Foreign  Affairs  as  soon  as  possible. 

The  Convention  shall  come  into 
force  between  the  ratifying  States  on 
January  ist  or  July  ist  following  the 
expiry  of  a  period  of  three  months 
after  at  least  three  of  the  States  have 
deposited  their  instruments  of  ratifi- 
cation. As  regards  States  deposit- 
ing their  ratifications  at  a  later  date, 
the  Convention  shall  come  into  force 
on  January  ist  or  on  July  ist  fol- 
lowing the  expiry  of  a  period  of 
three  months  after  the  deposit  of 
the  instrument  of  ratification. 

Any  of  the  States  may  denounce 
the  Convention  to  any  of  the  other 
States  at  one  year's  notice  terminat- 
ing on  January  ist  or  July  1st. 

IN  FAITH  WHEREOF  the  respective 
Plenipotentiaries  have  signed  the 


2°  Le  droit  de  propriete,  ou 
tout  autre  droit  sur  des  imnieubles 
dans  Tun  des  autres  Etats,  1'obli- 
gation  de  prendre  des  dispositions 
relatives  &  ces  droits,  ou  les  con- 
s£quences  resultant  de  la  n6gli- 
gence  de  cette  obligation ; 

3°  Les  impdts  ou  droits  pergus 
par  TEtat  ou  la  commune,  ou 
toutes  autres  questions  de  droit 
public,  lors  m£me  que  la  decision 
aurait  ete  rendue  dans  les  formes 
applicables  en  matiere  civile. 

La  convention  ne  sera  pas  appli- 
cable aux  decisions  rendues  par  les 
tribunaux  sp6ciaux  comp£tents  en 
matiere  de  confiits  du  travail. 

Art.  12.  La  convention  n'en- 
trainera  pas  Fobligation  de  recon- 
naitre  ou  d'ex£cuter  une  decision  ou 
une  transaction  qui  serait  6videm- 
ment  incompatible  avec  Tordre  pu- 
blic du  pays. 

Art.  13.  La  convention  ne  sera 
pas  applicable  aux  decisions  rendues 
ou  aux  transactions  intervenues 
avant  son  entr6e  en  vigueur. 

Art.  14.  La  convention  devra  £tre 
ratifiee  et  les  instruments  de  ratifica- 
tion seront  d£pos£s  aux  archives  du 
Ministere  des  Affaires  £trang6res 
danois  aussitdt  que  possible. 

La  convention  entrera  en  vigueur 
entre  les  Etats  qui  1'aurpnt  ratifiee  le 
ier  Janvier  ou  le  ier  juillet  qui  suivra 
Texpiration  d'un  d&lai  de  trois  mois 
&  partir  du  d£p6t  des  instruments  de 
ratification  par  trois  des  Etats,  au 
moins.  Pour  les  Etats  qui  la  rati- 
fieront  ulterieurement,  la  convention 
entrera  en  vigueur  le  ier  Janvier  ou 
le  ier  juillet  qui  suivra  1'expiration 
d'un  d£lai  de  trois  mois  &  partir  du 
d6p6t  de  Tinstrument  de  ratification. 

Chacun  des  Etats  pourra  d6- 
noncer  la  convention  avec  effet  pour 
chacun  des  autres  Etats,  moyennant 
pr6avis  d'un  an  prenant  fin  tin  IOT 
Janvier  ou  un  ier  juillet. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI  les  p!6nipoten- 
tiaires  des  divers  Etats  ont  sign6 


12  INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION  No.  306 

present  Convention  and  have  thereto  la    presente    convention    et    Font 

affixed  their  seals.  revltue  de  leurs  cachets. 

Done  at  Copenhagen  in  one  copy        Fait  &  Copenhague,  en  un  exem- 

in  each  of  the  following  languages:  plaire    r£dig£    dans    chacune    des 

Danish,    Finnish,    Icelandic,    Nor-  langues  suivantes:   danois,   finnois, 

wegian   and   Swedish,    there   being  islandais,  norvegien  et  su£dois,  avec 

two  texts  in  Swedish,  one  for  Finland  deux  textes  pour  la  langue  su&Ioise 

and  one  for  Sweden,  on  March  16,  dont  un  pour  la  Finlande  et  un  pour 

1932.  la  SuMe,  le  16  mars  1932. 

[Signed:]  P.  MUNCH,  ONNI  TALAS,  SVEINN  BJORNSSON,  EMIL  HUITFELDT, 
O.  EWERLOF  (Subject  to  the  ratification  of  His  Majesty  with  the  consent  of 
the  Riksdag). 


No.  306 

CONVENTION  concerning  the  Protection  against  Accidents  of 
Workers  Employed  in  Loading  and  Unloading  Ships  (Revised 
1932).  Adopted  at  Geneva,  April  27,  1932. 

CONVENTION  concernant  la  protection  des  travaiUeurs  occupes  au 
chargement  et  au  dechargement  des  bateaux  centre  les  acci- 
dents (revisee  en  1932).  Adoptee  H  Geneve,  27  avril  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  A  draft  convention  on  this  subject  was  adopted  at  Geneva,  June  21, 1929 
(No.  220,  ante),  and  came  into  force  as  a  convention,  April  I,  1932;  it  provided  (Article  23) 
that  it  might  be  superseded  by  a  revising  convention.  To  facilitate  action  by  Germany  and 
Great  Britain,  the  1929  convention  was  revised  by  this  convention  in  1932.  The  short  title 
of  this  convention  is  "  Protection  against  Accidents  (Dockers)  Convention  (Revised),  1932," 

RATIFICATIONS.  Ratifications  of  this  convention  were  communicated  to  the  Secretary- 
General  of  the  League  of  Nations  by  Uruguay,  June  6, 1933 ;  Italy,  October  30, 1933 ;  Mexico, 
May  12,  1934;  Spain,  July  28,  1934;  Great  Britain,  January  10,  1935;  Chile,  October  18, 
1935;  China,  November  30,  1935. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  International  Labour  Conference,  Sixteenth  Session,  Geneva,  1932,  Record 
of  Proceedings  (Geneva:  International  Labour  Office,  1932).  See  also  the  preparatory  docu- 
ments  of  the  sixteenth  session  of  the  conference. 

Anon.,  "The  Sixteenth  Session  of  the  International  Labour  Conference,"  26  Int.  Labour 
Rev.  (1932),  pp.  151-98. 

Entered  into  force  October  30,  I934-1 

Text  from  the  collection  of  authentic  texts  published  by  the  Secretariat  of  the 
League  of  Nations. 

The  General  Conference  of  the  In-  La  Conference  g£n£rale  de  TOr-. 
ternational  Labour  Organisation  of  ganisation  Internationale  du  Travail 
the  League  of  Nations,  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations, 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  in  a  separate  register  of  labor 
conventions,  October  30,  1934. 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


Having  been  convened  at  Ge- 
neva by  the  Governing  Body  of  the 
International  Labour  Office,  and 
having  met  in  its  Sixteenth  Ses- 
sion on  12  April  1932,  and 

Having  decided  upon  the  adop- 
tion of  certain  proposals  with 
regard  to  the  partial  revision  of  the 
Convention  concerning  the  protec- 
tion against  accidents  of  workers 
employed  in  loading  or  unloading 
ships  adopted  by  the  Conference 
at  its  Twelfth  Session,  which  is  the 
fourth  item  on  the  Agenda  of  the 
Session,  and 

<  Considering  that  these  proposals 
*V  must  take  the  form  of  a  Draft 
«L  International  Convention, 

adopts,  this  twenty-seventh  day  of 

O  April  of  the  year  one  thousand  nine 

^—hundred  and  thirty-two,  the  following 

^  Draft  Convention  for  ratification  by 

the  Members  of  the  International 

Labour  Organisation,  in  accordance 

with  the  provisions  of  Part  XIII  of 

the  Treaty  of  Versailles  and  of  the 

corresponding   Parts   of   the   other 

Treaties  of  Peace: 

V§      Article  i.    For  the  purpose  of  this 

*  Convention: 

V      (i)  the  term  "processes"  means 

and  includes  all  or  any  part  of  the 

work  performed  on  shore  or  on  board 

ship  of  loading  or  unloading  any 

COship  whether  engaged  in  maritime  or 

w\  inland  navigation,  excluding  ships  of 

^  war,  in,  on,  or  at  any  maritime  or 

^inland  port,  harbour,  dock,  wharf, 

quay  or  similar  place  at  which  such 

work  is  carried  on;  and 

(2)  the  term  "worker"  means  any 
person  employed  in  the  processes. 

*  Art.    2.    Any    regular    approach 
-pover  a  dock,  wharf,  quay  or  similar 
'sHpremises  which  workers  have  to  use 
My  for  going  to  or  from  a  working  place 

at  which  the  processes  are  carried  on 
and  every  such  working  place  on 


Convoquee  &  Geneve  par  le 
Conseil  d 'administration  du  Bu- 
reau international  du  Travail,  et 
s'y  6tant  reunie  le  12  avril  1932  en 
sa  seizieme  session, 

Apr£s  avoir  decide  d 'adopter 
diverses  propositions  relatives  & 
la  revision  partielle  de  la  conven- 
tion concernant  la  protection  des 
travailleurs  occupes  au  charge- 
ment  et  au  d£chargement  des 
bateaux  contre  les  accidents 
adopt6e  par  la  Conference  £  sa 
douzi&me  session,  question  qui 
constitue  le  quatrieme  point  de 
Fordre  du  jour  de  la  session,  et 

Consid£rant  que  ces  proposi- 
tions doivent  prendre  la  forme 
d'un  projet  de  convention  inter- 
nationale, 

adopte,  ce  vingt-septi£me  jour  d'a- 
vril  mil  neuf  cent  trente  deux,  le 
projet  de  convention  ci-apr£s,  &  rati- 
fier  par  les  Membres  de  {'Organisa- 
tion internationale  du  Travail,  con- 
formement  aux  dispositions  de  la 
Partie  XIII  du  Traite  de  Versailles 
et  des  Parties  correspondantes  des 
autres  Trait6s  de  Paix: 

Article  i.  Aux  fins  de  la  pr6sente 
convention: 

1)  le  terme  "operations"  signifie 
et   comprend    tout   ou    partie    du 
travail  effectu6,  £  terre  ou  &  bord, 
pour  le  chargement  ou  le  decharge- 
ment  de  tout  bateau  affecte  i  la 
navigation  maritime  ou  interieure, 
&  1'exclusion  des  bitiments  de  guerre, 
dans  tout  port  maritime  ou  interieur, 
sur  tout  dock,  wharf,  quai  ou  autre 
endroit  analogue  ou  ce  travail  est 
effectu6;  et 

2)  le   terme    "travailleur"   com- 
prend toute  personne  employee  aux 
dites  operations. 

Art.  2.  Toutes  voies  d'acc£s  r6- 
gulteres  passant  par  un  bassin,  wharf, 
quai  ou  autre  lieu  semblable  et  que 
les  travailleurs  ont  &  utiliser  pour  se 
rendre  £  Femplacement  de  travail 
oil  sont  effectu6es  les  operations  ou 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  306 


shore  shall  be  maintained  with  due 

regard  to  the  safety  of  the  workers 
using  them. 


In  particular, 

(1)  every  said  working  place  on 
shore  and  any  dangerous  parts  of  any 
said    approach    thereto    from    the 
nearest  highway  shall  be  safely  and 
efficiently  lighted; 

(2)  wharves  and  quays  shall  be 
kept  sufficiently  clear  of  goods  to 
maintain    a   clear   passage   to    the 
means  of  access  referred  to  in  Arti- 
cle 3  ; 

(3)  where  any  space  is  left  along 
the  edge  of  any  wharf  or  quay,  it 
shall  be  at  least  3  feet  (90  cm.)  wide 
and  clear  of  all  obstructions  other 
than  fixed  structures,  plant  and  ap- 
pliances in  use;  and 

(4)  so  far  as  is  practicable  having 
regard  to  the  traffic  and  working, 

(a)  all  dangerous  parts  of  the  said 
approaches  and  working  places  (e.g. 
dangerous  breaks,  corners  and  edges) 
shall   be   adequately   fenced    to   a 
height  of  not  less  than  2  feet  6  inches 
(75  cm.) ; 

(b)  dangerous      footways      over 
bridges,  caissons  and  dock  gates  shall 
be  fenced  to  a  height  of  not  less  than 
2  feet  6  inches  (75  cm.)  on  each  side, 
and  the  said  fencing  shall  be  con- 
tinued at  both  ends  to  a  sufficient 
distance  which  shall  not  be  required 
to  exceed  5  yards  (4  m.  50) . 

(5)  The     measurement     require- 
ments of  paragraph  (4)  of  this  Ar- 
ticle shall  be  deemed  to  be  complied 
with,  in  respect  of  appliances  in  use 
at  the  date  of  the  ratification  of  this 
Convention,  if  the  actual  measure- 
ments are  not  more  than  10  per  cent, 
less  than  the  measurements  specified 
in  the  said  paragraph  (4), 

Art  3. — (i)  When  a  ship  is  lying 


pour  en  revenir,  ainsi  que  tons  em- 
placements de  travail  situes  ;\  terre, 
devront  fitre  main  ten  us  clans  un 

6 tat  propre  &  assurer  la  securitr  dt\s 
travailleurs  qui  les  utilisent. 
En  par  lieu  Her, 

1)  tous  lieux  do  travail  &  terre  et 
toutes  parties  dangereuses  des  voitw 
d'acc&s    prtcitees    y    conduisunt    ft 
partir   du    cheinin    public    le    phis 
proche,  devront  fitre  pourvus  d'un 
6clairage  efficace  et  sans  danger; 

2)  les  wharfs  et  les  quab  seront 
suffisamment   d£barrass£s  de   mar- 
chandises  pour  maintenir  un   lihre 
passage    vers    les    moycns    d'accds 
vis&s  i  1'article  3; 

3)  lorsqu'un  passage  est  Iaiss6  le 
long  du  bard  du  quai  ou  du  wharf,  il 
devra  avoir  au  inoins  90  centimetres 
de  large  (3  pieds)  et  fitre  libre  de 
tous  obstacles  autres  que  les  con- 
structions fixes,  les  appareils  et  les 
engins  en  usage; 

4)  dans  la  mesure  o&  ce  sera  prati- 
cable,  eu  6gard  au  trafic  et  au  service, 

a)  toutes  parties  dangereuses  de 
ces  voies  d'aecte  et  lieux  de  travail 
(par  exemple:  ouvertures,  tournants 
et  bords  dangereux)   devront  ?tre 
munis    de    garde-corps    appropri^s 
d'une  hauteur  d'au  mo  ins  75  centi- 
metres  (2  pieds  6  pouces) ; 

b)  les  passages  dangereux  sur  les 
ponts,  caissons  et  vannes  de  bassist 
devront  6tre  munis  de  chaque  cAt6, 
jusqu'i  une  hauteur  d'au  moins  75 
centimetres  (2  pieds  6  pouces)  de 
garde-corps  continues  4  chaque  ex- 
trdmitfi,  sur  une  longueur  suffisante 
qui  n'aura  pas  £  d6passer  4  m.  50 
(5  yards). 

5)  Les  conditions  de  dimensions 
prlvues  par  le  paragraphe  4  du  pr  feetit 
article  seront  oonsid£r£es  commc  «i- 
tisfaites,  en  ce  qui  concerne  les  engins 
en  usage  4  la  date  de  la  ratification 
de^  la   prfeente  convention,  «I  les 
chiffres  des  mesures  effectivenient 
r6alis6es  ne  sont  pas  inftVIeurs  de 
plus  de  10  pour  cent  aux  chiffres 
mentionn^s  dans  ledit  paragraphe  4* 

Art.  3.— i)  Lorsqu*un  bateau  est 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


alongside  a  quay  or  some  other  ves- 
sel for  the  purpose  of  the  processes, 
there  shall  be  safe  means  of  access  for 
the  use  of  the  workers  at  such  times 
as  they  have  to  pass  to  or  from  the 
ship,  unless  the  conditions  are  such 
that  they  would  not  be  exposed  to 
undue  risk  if  no  special  appliance 
were  provided. 


(2)  The  said  means  of  access  shall 
be: 

(a)  where  reasonably  practicable, 
the  ship's  accommodation  ladder,  a 
gangway  or  a  similar  construction ; 

(b)  in  other  cases  a  ladder. 

(3)  The   appliances   specified   in 
paragraph    (2)    (a)  of    this  article 
shall  be  at  least  22  inches  (55  cm.) 
wide,  properly  secured  to  prevent 
their  displacement,  not  inclined  at 
too  steep  an  angle,  constructed  of 
materials  of  good  quality  and  in 
good  condition,  and  securely  fenced 
throughout  to  a  clear  height  of  not 
less  than  2  feet  9  inches  (82  cm.)  on 
both  sides,  or  in  the  case  of  the 
ship's    accommodation    ladder    se- 
curely fenced  to  the  same  height  on 
one  side,  provided  that  the  other 
side  is  properly  protected  by  the 
ship's  side. 


Provided  that  any  appliances  as 
aforesaid  in  use  at  the  date  of  the 
ratification  of  this  Convention  shall 
be  allowed  to  remain  in  use; 

(a)  until  the  fencing  is  renewed  if 
they  are  fenced  on  both  sides  to  a 
clear  height  of  at  least  2  feet  6  inches 
(80  cm*) ; 

(b)  for  two  years  from  the  date  of 

ratification  if  they  are  fenced  on  both 

sides  to  a  clear  height  of  at  least  2 
feet  6  inches  (75  cm.)- 


mouill£  pr&s  d'un  quai  on  d'un  autre 
b&timent  en  vue  des  operations  & 
effectuer,  des  moyens  d'acc£s  off  rant 
des  garanties  de  s6curit6  devront 
Ctre  &  la  disposition  des  travailleurs 
pour  se  rendre  sur  le  bateau  ou  en 
reyenir,  4  moins  que  les  circonstances 
soient  telles  qu'ils  puissent  le  faire, 
en  1'absence  de  dispositifs  sp^ciaux, 
sans  gtre  exposes  inutilement  &  des 
risques  d 'accidents. 

2)  Ces   moyens   d*acc£s   devront 
consister: 

a)  lorsque  ce  sera  raisonnablement 
praticable,  en  P6chelle  de  couple  du 
bateau,    en    une   passerelle   ou   un 
dispositif  analogue; 

b)  dans  les  autres  cas,  en  une  6chelle. 

3)  Les   dispositifs   sp6cifi6s   &   la 
lettre  a)  du  paragraphe  2)  du  present 
article  devront  avoir  une  largeur  d'au 
moins  55  centimetres  (22  pouces) ;  ils 
devront    8tre   solidement    fix£$   de 
fagon  &  ne  pouvoir  se  d&placer;  leur 
inclinaison  ne  devra  pas  8tre  trop 
forte  et  les  mat6riaux  employes  pour 
leur  construction  devront  Stre  de 
bonne  qualit6  et  en  bon  6tat;  ils 
devront  gtre  munis  des  deux  c6t6s 
sur  toute  leur  longueur  d'un  garde- 
corps  efficace  d'une  hauteur  nette 
d'au  moins  82  centimetres  (2  pieds 
9  pouces)  ou,  s'il  s'agit  de  l'6chelle 
de  couple,  munis  d'un  garde-corps 
efficace  de  la  m£me  hauteur  d'un 
seul  c6t6  &  la  condition  que  1 'autre 
cdt6  soit  efficacement  prot6g&  par  le 
flanc  du  bateau. 

Toutefois,  tous  dispositifs  de  cette 
nature  en  usage  4  la  date  de  la  ratifi- 
cation de  la  pr6sente  convention 
pourront  rester  en  service: 

a)  pour  ceux  qui  sont  munis  sur 
les  deux  c6t£s  de  garde-corps  d'une 
hauteur  nette  d'au  moins  80  centi- 
litres (2  pieds  8  pouces),  jusqu'& 
ce  que  ceux-ci  soient  renouve!6s ; 

6)  pour  ceux  qui  sont  munis  sur 
les  deux  cdt^s  de  garde-corps  d'une 
hauteur  nette  d'au  moins  75  centi- 
m&tres  (2  pieds  6  pouces),  pendant 
deux  anuses  &  dater  de  la  ratification 
de  la  pr6sente  convention. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No-  306 


(4)  The  ladders  specified  in  para- 
graph (2)  (6)  of  this  Article  shall  be 

of  adequate  length  and  strength,  and 
properly  secured. 

(5)  00  Exceptions  to  the  provi- 
sions of  this  Article  may  be  allowed 
by  the  competent  authorities  when 
they  are  satisfied  that  the  appliances 
specified  in  the  Article  are  not  re- 
quired for  the  safety  of  the  workers. 

(6)  The  provisions  of  this  Article 
shall  not  apply  to  cargo  stages  or 
cargo   gangways   when   exclusively 
used  for  the  processes. 

(6)  Workers  shall  not  use,  or  be 
required  to  use,  any  other  means  of 
access  than  the  means  specified  or 
allowed  by  this  Article. 

Art.  4.  When  the  workers  have  to 
proceed  to  or  from  a  ship  by  water 
for  the  processes,  appropriate  meas- 
ures shall  be  prescribed  to  ensure 
their  safe  transport,  including  the 
conditions  to  be  complied  with  by 
the  vessels  used  for  this  purpose. 


Art.  5.— (i)  When  the  workers 
have  to  carry  on  the  processes  in  a 
hold  the  depth  of  which  from  the 
level  of  the  deck  to  the  bottom  of  the 
hold  exceeds  5  feet  (i  m.  50),  there 
shall  be  safe  means  of  access  from  the 
deck  to  the  hold  for  their  use. 

(2)  The  said  means  of  access  shall 
ordinarily  be  by  ladder,  which  shall 
not  be  deemed  to  be  safe  unless  it 
complies  with  the  following  condi- 
tions : 

(a)  provides  foothold  of  a 
depth,  including  any  space  behind 
the  ladder,  of  not  less  than  4^ 
inches  (n^  cm.)  for  a  width  of 
not  less  than  10  inches  (25  cm.) 
and  a  firm  handhold; 

(V)  is  not  recessed  under  the 
deck  more  than  is  reasonably 


4)  Les    6chelles   sptcifii^es    A    la 
lettre  b)  du  paragraphe  2)  du  present 
article    seront    drune    longueur    et 
d'une   solklit6   suffisantes   et    con* 
venablement  assu jetties, 

5)  a)  Des   derogations   aux    dis- 
positions du  present  article  pourront 
Itre    accordtes    par    les    autoritfts 
comp6tentes    chaque    fois^  qu'elies 
estimeront  que  les  dispositifs  sp&~ 
cifife  ne  sont  pas  indispensables  & 
la  s^curite  des  travailleurs* 

b)  Les  dispositions  du  present 
article  ne  s'appliqueront  pas  aux 
plate-formes  ou  passerelles  de  manu- 
tentlon  lorsqu'elles  sont  exclusive- 
ment  employees  pour  les  operations. 

6)  Les    travailleurs    ne    dcvront 
pas  utiliser  et  ne  pourront  litre  ten  us 
d'utiliser  d'autres   moyens  d'acc&s 
que  ceux  qui  sont  specifics  ou  au- 
toris^s  par  le  present  article. 

Art.  4*  Pour  le  cas  ofi  les  travail- 
leurs doivent  se  rendre  par  eau  sur 
un  bateau  ou  en  revenir  &  Foccaslon 
des  operations,  des  mesures  ap- 
propriles  devront  fitre  pr6vues  pour 
assurer  la  s6curite  de  leur  tiransport 
y  compris  la  determination  des 
conditions  auxquelles  doivent  satis- 
faire  les  embarcations  utilis6es  pour 
ce  transport. 

Art,  5.— i)  Lorsque  les  travail- 
leurs ont  &  effectuer  les  operations 
dans  des  cales  dont  le  fond  est 
situ6  4  plus  de  l  m.  50  (5  pieds)  du 
niveau  du  pont,  des  moyens  d*accfes 
offrant  des  garanties  de  s^curit^ 
devront  6tre  mis  i  leur  disposition* 

2)  Ces  moyens  d*acc^s  consiste- 
ront  ordinairement  en  une  6chelle  et 
celle-ci  ne  sera  consid6r6e  comme 
pr6sentant  des  garanties  de  s6curit6 
que: 

a)  si  elle  offre  aux  pieds  un 
appui  dont  la  profondeur  augmen- 
tie  de  Tespace  derridre  F6chelle 
est  d'au  moins  n  cm*  }4  (4  pouces 
,K)  pour  une  largeur  d'au  moins 
25  cm.  (10  pouces)  et  aux  mains 
un  apjHii  solide; 

i)  si  elle  n*est  pas  plac^e  en 
retrait  sous  le  pont  plus  qu'il  n'est 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


necessary  to  keep  it  clear  of  the 
hatchway; 

(c)  is  continued  by  and  Is  in  line 
with  arrangements  for  secure 
handhold  and  foothold  on  the 

coamings  (e*g*  cleats  or  cups) ; 


(d)  the  said  arrangements  on 
the  coamings  provide  foothold  of  a 
depth,  including  any  space  behind 
the  said  arrangements,  of  not  less 
than  4}4  inches  (n^4  cm.)  for  a 
width  of  not  less  than  10  inches 
(25  cm.) ; 

(e)  if  separate  ladders  are  pro- 
vided between  the  lower  decks,  the 
said  ladders  are  as  far  as  prac- 
ticable in  line  with  the  ladder  from 
the  top  deck. 

Where,  however,  owing  to  the  con- 
struction of  the  ship,  the  provision 
of  a  ladder  would  not  be  reasonably 
practicable,  it  shall  be  open  to  the 
competent  authorities  to  allow  other 
means  of  access,  provided  that  they 
comply  with  the  conditions  laid 
down  in  this  Article  for  ladders  so 
far  as  they  are  applicable. 


In  the  case  of  ships  existing  at  the 
date  of  the  ratification  of  this  Con- 
vention the  measurement  require- 
ments of  subparagraphs  (a)  and  (d) 
of  this  paragraph  shall  be  deemed  to 
be  complied  withf  until  the  ladders 
and  arrangements  are  replaced,  if  the 
actual  measurements  are  not  more 
than  10  per  cent  less  than  the  meas- 
urements specified  in  the  said  sub- 
paragraphs  (a)  and  (d). 


(3)  Sufficient  free  passage  to  the 
means  of  access  shall  be  left  at  the 
coamings. 

(4)  Shaft  tunnels  shall  be  equipped 
with  adequate  handhold  and  foot- 
hold on  both  sides. 


raisonnablement  n6cessaire  pour 
qu'elle  n'empi^te  pas  sur  les 
&coutilles; 

c)  si  elle  est  continu^e  par  et 
est  dans  la  m8me  ligne  que  des 
dispositifs  offrant  un  appui  solide 
aux  pieds  et  aux  mains,  places  sur 
les   surbaux   des   6coutilles    (par 
exemple  des  taquets  ou  tasseaux) ; 

d)  si    les    dispositifs    vis^s    & 
Falin^a  pr£c6dent  off  rent  aux  pieds 
un    appui    dont    la    profondeur 
augment^e  de  Fespace  derri&re  ces 
dispositifs  est  d'au  moms  n  cm. 
}4  (4  pouces  >£)  pour  une  largeur 
d'au  moins  25  cm.  (10  pouces) ; 

e)  si,  au  cas  oft  il  existe  des 
6chelles  distinctes  entre  les  ponts 
inf^rieurs,  ces  6chelles  sont,  dans 
la  mesure  du  possible,   dans  la 
m6nie  ligne  que  F&chelle  partant 
du  pont  sup6rieur. 

Toutefois,  lorsqu'en  raison  de  la 
construction  du  bateau,  on  ne  pour- 
rait  raisonnablement  exiger  I'instal- 
lation  d'une  £chelle,  les  autorit6s 
comp^tentes  auront  la  facult6  d'au- 
toriser  d'autres  moyens  d'acc&s,  & 
la  condition  que  ces  moyens  d'acc&s 
remplissent,  dans  la  mesure  oft  elles 
sont  applicables,  les  conditions  pres- 
crites  pour  les  6chelles  par  le  present 
article. 

Dans  le  cas  des  bateaux  existant 
i  la  date  de  la  ratification  de  la 
pr6sente  convention  et  jusqu'au 
reinplacement  des  £chelles  et  dis- 
positifs, les  conditions  de  dimensions 
pr&vues  par  les  alin6as  a)  et  d)  du 
present  paragraphs  seront  consi- 
d6r6es  comine  satisfaites  si  les 
chiffres  des  mesures  effectivement 
r6alis6es  ne  sont  pas  inf^rieurs  de 
plus  de  10  pour  cent  aux  chiffres 
mentionn6s  dans  lesdits  alinfeas  a) 
etd). 

3)  Un  espace  suffisant  pour  per- 
mettre  d'atteindre  les  moyens  d'ac- 
cfes  devra  fetre  Iaiss6  libre  prfes  des 
surbaux  des  6coutilks. 

4)  Les  tunnels  des  arbres  devront 
Stre  munis  des  deux  c6t6s  de  poi- 
gntes  et  d^ppuie-pieds  appropri6s. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  306 


(5)  When  a  ladder  is  to  he  used  in 
the  hold  of  a  vessel  which  is  not 
decked  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the 
contractor    undertaking    the    proc- 
esses  to   provide  such   ladder.     It 
shall  be  equipped  at  the  top  with 
hooks  or  with  other  means  for  firmly 
securing  it. 

(6)  The  workers  shall  not  use,  or 
be  required  to  use,  other  means  of 
access  than  the  means  specified  or 
allowed  by  this  Article, 

(7)  Ships  existing  at  the  date  of 
ratification  of  this  Convention  shall 
be  exempt  from  compliance  with  the 
measurements  in  paragraph  (2)  (a) 
and  (d)  and  from  the  provisions  of 
paragraph  (4)  of  this  Article  for  a 
period  not  exceeding  four  years  from 
the    date    of    ratification    of    this 
Convention. 

Art.  6. — (i)  While  the  workers 
are  on  a  ship  for  the  purpose  of  the 
processes,  every  hatchway  of  a  cargo 
hold  accessible  to  the  workers  which 
exceeds  5  feet  (i  m.  50)  in  depth 
from  the  level  of  the  deck  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  hold,  and  which  is  not 
protected  to  a  clear  height  of  2  feet  6 
inches  (75  cm.)  by  the  coamings, 
shall,  when  not  in  use  for  the  passage 
of  goods,  coal  or  other  material, 
either  be  securely  fenced  to  a  height 
of  3  feet  (90  cm.)  or  be  securely  cov- 
ered. National  laws  or  regulations 
shall  determine  whether  the  require- 
ments of  this  paragraph  shall  be 
enforced  during  meal  times  and  other 
short  interruptions  of  work. 


(2)  Similar  measures  shall  be 
taken  when  necessary  to  protect  all 
other  openings  in  a  deck  which 
might  be  dangerous  to  the  workers. 

Art.  7-  When  the  processes  have 
to  be  carried  on  on  a  ship,  the  means 
of  access  thereto  and  all  places  on 


5)  Lorsqu'une  fechelle  devra  (ft re 

utilises  dans  la  cale  d'un  bateau  non 
pont6,  il  appartienclra  *\  1 'entre- 
preneur des  operations  de  fournir 
cette  6chelle.  Kile  devra  Stre  munie 
k  sa  partie  supferieure  de  crochets  <>u 
d'autres  dispositifs  permettant  de  la 
fixer  solidement. 

6)  Les   travailleurs   ne  pourront 
utiliser  ni  8tre  tenus  d'utiliser  des 
moyens  d'acc&s  autres  que  ceux  qui 
sont  sp6cifi6s  ou  autori$£s  dans  le 
present  article* 

7)  Les  bateaux  existant  4  la  date 
de  la  ratification  de  la  pr^sentc  con- 
vention seront  exempts  des  condi- 
tions de  dimensions  imposf es  par  les 
dispositions  du  paragraphs  2  (alintfas 
a   et   d)    et   des   prescriptions   du 
paragraphe   4   du    present   article, 
pendant   un    d61ai   n'excMant   pas 
quatre  ans  &  partir  de  la  date  de 
cette  ratification. 

Art*  6.' — i)  Pendant  que  les  tra- 
vailleurs sont  &  bord  du  bateau  pour 
effectuer  les  op6rations,  toute  6cou- 
tille  de  cale  de  marchandises  acces- 
sible aux  travailleurs,  dont  la  pro- 
fondeur,  mesurfie  depuis  le  niveau 
du  pent  jusqu'au  fond  de  la  cale, 
d^passe  i  m.  50  (5  pieds)  et  qui  n'est 
pas  prot6g£e  jusqu'ci  une  hauteur 
nette  d'au  moins  75  cm.  (2  pieds  6 
pouces)  par  les  surbaux,  devra, 
lorsqu'elle  n'est  pas  utilisfie  pour  le 
passage  de  marchandises,  de  charbon 
ou  d'autres  mat6riaux,  §tre  entour£e 
d'un  garde-corps  efficace  jusqu'4  une 
hauteur  de  90  cm.  (3  pieds)  pu  fitre 
efficacement  ferm6e.  La  legislation 
nationale  d^cidera  si  les  dispositions 
du  present  paragraphe  doivent  6tre 
appliqu^es  pendant  la  dur^e  des 
repas  et  d'autres  courtes  interrup- 
tions de  travail. 

2)  Des  mesures  semblables  seront 
prises  en  cas  de  besoin  pour  prot^ger 
toutes  autres  ouvertures  dans  le 
pont  qui  pourraient  presenter  un 
danger  pour  les  travailleurs. 

Art.  7.  Lorsque  les  op6rations 
doivent  gtre  effectives  k  bord  d'un 
bateau,  les  moyens  d'acc^s  k  ce 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


board  at  which  the  workers  are  em- 
ployed or  to  which  they  may  be  re- 
quired to  proceed  in  the  course  of 
their  employment  shall  be  efficiently 
lighted. 

The  means  of  lighting  shall  be 
such  as  not  to  endanger  the  safety  of 
the  workers  nor  to  interfere  with  the 
navigation  of  other  vessels, 

Art.  8*  In  order  to  ensure  the 
safety  of  the  workers  when  engaged 
in  removing  or  replacing  hatch  cov- 
erings and  beams  used  for  hatch 
coverings, 

(1)  hatch   coverings   and   beams 
used  for  hatch  coverings  shall  be 
maintained  in  good  condition; 

(2)  hatch  coverings  shall  be  fitted 
with  adequate  hand  grips,  having 
regard  to  their  size  and  weight,  un- 
less the  construction  of  the  hatch  or 
the  hatch  coverings  is  of  a  character 
rendering  the  provision  of  hand  grips 
unnecessary; 

(3)  beams  used  for  hatch  cover- 
ings shall  have  suitable  gear  for  re- 
moving and  replacing  them  of  such  a 
character  as  to  render  it  unnecessary 
for  workers  to  go  upon  them  for  the 
purpose  of  adjusting  such  gear; 


(4)  all  hatch  coverings  and  fore 
and  aft  and  thwart-ship  beams  shall, 
in  so  far  as  they  are  not  interchange- 
able, be  kept  plainly  marked  to  in- 
dicate the  deck  and  hatch  to  which 
they    belong    and    their    position 
therein ; 

(5)  hatch  coverings  shall  not  be 
used  in  the  construction  of  cargo 
stages   or  for   any  other   purpose 
which  may  expose  them  to  damage. 


Art.  9.  Appropriate  measures 
shall  be  prescribed  to  ensure  that  no 
hoisting  machine,  or  gear,  whether 
fixed  or  loose,  used  in  connection 
therewith,  is  employed  in  the  proc- 


bateau  ainsi  que  tous  les  endroits 
du  bord  oil  les  travailleurs  sont 
occup6s  ou  peuvent  6tre  appel^s  & 
se  rendre  au  cours  de  leur  occupation 
devront  gtre  efficacement  6clair6s. 

Les  moyens  d'^clairage  utilises 
devront  Stre  tels  qu'ils  ne  puissent 
mettre  en  danger  la  s<§curit6  des 
travailleurs,  ni  g^ner  la  navigation 
d'autres  bateaux. 

Art  8,  En  vue  d 'assurer  la  s6- 
curit6  des  travailleurs  lorsqu'ils  sont 
occup6s  &  en  lever  ou  &  mettre  en 
place  les  panneaux  d'&coutilles  ainsi 
que  les  barrots  et  galiotes  servant 
&  couvrir  les  6coutilles, 

1)  les  panneaux  d'<§coutilles  ainsi 
que  les  barrots  et  galiotes  servant  & 
couvrir  les  6coutilles  seront  entre- 
tenus  en  bon  &tat; 

2)  les   panneaux    d'£coutilles  se- 
ront munis  de  poign^es  appropri^es 
&  leur  dimension  et  &  leur  poids,  & 
moins  que  la  construction  de  T6cou- 
tille  ou  des  panneaux  d'6coutilles 
soit  telle  qu'elle  rende  des  poign6es 
inutiles; 

3)  les  barrots  et  galiotes  servant 
£  couvrir  les  6coutilles  seront  munis, 
pour  leur  enl&vement  et  remise  en 
place,    de   dispositifs   tels    que   les 
travailleurs  n'aient  pas  besoin  de 
monter  sur  ces  barrots  et  galiotes 
pour  y  fixer  les  dispositifs  dont  il 
s'agit; 

4)  tous  les  panneaux  d'6coutilles, 
barrots   et   galiotes   devront,   pour 
autant    qu'ils    ne    sont   pas   inter- 
changeables,    §tre    marques    claire- 
ment    pour    indiquer    le   pont   et 
Tteoutille  auxquels  ils  appartiennent 
ainsi  que  leur  position  sur  ceux-ci; 

5)  les   panneaux   d'6coutilles  ne 
pourront    Stre    employes    pour    la 
construction  de  plate-formes  servant 
i  la  manutention  de  la  cargaison, 
ni  pour  tout  autre  but  qui  les  ex- 
poserait  &  gtre  endommag^s. 

Art.  9.  Des  mesures  appropri&es 
seront  prises  pour  que  les  appareils 
de  levage  ainsi  que  tous  engins  ac- 
cessoires,  fixes  ou  mobiles,  ne  soient 
employes  pour  les  operations,  £  terre 


20 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  306 


esses  on  shore  or  on  board  ship  unless 
it  Is  in  a  safe  xvorking  condition. 

In  particular, 

(i)  before  being  taken  into  use, 
the  said  machines,  fixed  gear  on 
board  ship  accessory  thereto  as  de- 
fined by  national  laws  or  regulations, 
and  chains  and  wire  ropes  used  in 
connection  therewith,  shall  be  ade- 
quately examined  and  tested,  and 
the  safe  working  load  thereof  certi- 
fied, in  the  manner  prescribed  and  by 
a  competent  person  acceptable  to  the 
national  authorities; 


(2)  after  being  taken  into  use, 
every  hoisting  machine,  whether 
used  on  shore  or  on  board  ship,  and 
all  fixed  gear  on  board  ship  accessory 
thereto  as  defined  by  national  laws 
or  regulations  shall  be  thoroughly 
examined  or  inspected  as  follows: 

(a)  to  be  thoroughly  examined 
every  four  years  and  inspected 
every   twelve   months:   derricks, 
goose  necks,  mast  bands,  derrick 
bands,  eyebolts,  spans  and  any 
other  fixed  gear  the  dismantling  of 
which  is  specially  difficult; 

(b)  to  be  thoroughly  examined 
every  twelve  months:  all  hoisting 
machines  (e.g.  cranes,  winches), 
blocks,    shackles   and    all    other 
accessory  gear  not  included  in  (a). 

All  loose  gear  (e.g.  chains,  wire 
ropes,  rings,  hooks)  shall  be  inspected 
on  each  occasion  before  use  unless 
they  have  been  inspected  within  the 
previous  three  months. 


Chains  shall  not  be  shortened  by 
tying  knots  in  them  and  precautions 
shall  be  taken  to  prevent  injury  to 
them  from  sharp  edges. 

A  thimble  or  loop  splice  made  in 


ou  &  bord  d'un  bateau,  que  s'ils  se 
trouvent  en  fetat  de  fonctionner  sans 
danger. 

En  particulier, 

1)  avant   leur  mise   en   service, 
lesdits  appareils  et  les  engins  fixes  i 
bord  consid6r&s  comme  leurs  acces- 
soires par  les  legislations  nationales 
ainsi    que    les    chatnes    et    c&bles 
m6talliques  dont  1 'usage  est  H6  i 
leur  fonctionnement,  devront,  par 
les  spins  d'une  personne  compdtente 
admise  par  les  autorit6s  nationales 
et  dans   les  conditions  prescrites, 
litre  dftment  v6rifi6s  et  essayfo  et 
leur  maximum  de  charge  etre  attestC* 
par  un  certificat; 

2)  apr&s  sa  mise  en  service,  tout 
appareil  de  levage  utilisfi  i  terre  ou 
&  bord,  et  tous  engins  fixes  i  bord 
consid6r6s  comme  ses  accessoires  par 
les  legislations  nationales,  sera  ex- 
amin6  4  fond  ou  inspect!  dans  les 
conditions  suivantes: 

a)  seront  examin6s  &  fond>  tons 
les  quatre  ans  et  inspects  tous 
les    douze    mois:    les    mUts    de 
charge,  pivots  et  colliers  de  m&ts 
et  de  rn^ts  de  charge,   oeillets, 
pantoires,  et  tous  autres  engins 
fixes  dont  le  d^montage  est  par- 
ticuli&rement  difficile; 

b)  seront  examines  4  fond  tons 
les  douze  mois;  tous  appareils  de 
levage  (tels  que  les  grues,  treuils), 
moufles,  manilles  et  tous  autres 
engins  accessoires  qui  ne  seront 
pas  vis6s  sous  la  lettre  a). 

Tous  engins  mobiles  (par  exemple 
les  chaJnes,  cables  m6talliques»  an- 
neaux,  crochets)  feront  Fobjet  dfune 
inspection  pr6alable,  chaque  fois 
qu'ils  seront  mis  en  usage,— sauf 
dans  le  cas  oil  ils  auraient  4t6  in- 
spects depuis  moins  de  trois  rnois. 

Les  chafnes  ne  devront  pas  6tre 
raccourcies  au  moyen  de  noeuds,  et 
des  precautions  seront  prises  pour 
£viter  qu'elles  ne  soient  endom- 
mag^es  par  frottement  contre  des 
aretes  vives. 

Les  oeillets  ou  ^pissures  des  cables 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


21 


any  wire  rope  shall  have  at  least 
three  tucks  with  a  whole  strand  of 
rope  and  two  tucks  with  one  half  of 
the  wires  cut  out  of  each  strand; 
provided  that  this  requirement  shall 
not  operate  to  prevent  the  use  of 
another  form  of  splice  which  can  be 
shown  to  be  as  efficient  as  the  form 
hereby  prescribed. 

(3)  Chains  and  such  similar  gear 
as  is  specified  by  national  laws  or 
regulations  (e.g.  hooks,  rings,  shack- 
les, swivels)  shall,  unless  they  have 
been  subjected  to  such  other  suffi- 
cient treatment  as  may  be  pre- 
scribed by  national  laws  or  regula- 
tions, be  annealed  as  follows  under 
the  supervision  of  a  competent  per- 
son acceptable  to  the  national  au- 
thorities: 

(a)  In  the  case  of  chains  and  the 
said  gear  carried  on  board  ship: 

(i)  half  inch  (i2$4  mm.)  and 
smaller  chains  or  gear  in  general 
use  once  at  least  in  every  six 
months; 

(ii)  all  other  chains  or  gear 
(including  span  chains  but  exclud- 
ing bridle  chains  attached  to  der- 
ricks or  masts)  in  general  use  once 
at  least  in  every  twelve  months; 


Provided  that  in  the  case  of  such 
gear  used  solely  on  cranes  and  other 
hoisting  appliances  worked  by  hand, 
twelve  months  shall  be  substituted 
for  six  months  in  sub-paragraph  (i) 
and  two  years  for  twelve  months  in 
sub-paragraph  (ii); 

Provided  also  that,  if  the  compe- 
tent authority  is  of  opinion  that 
owing  to  the  size,  design,  material 
or  infrequency  of  use  of  any  of  the 
said  gear  the  requirements  of  this 
paragraph  as  to  annealing  are  not 
necessary  for  the  protection  of  the 
workers,  it  may,  by  certificate  in 
writing  (which  it  may  at  its  discre- 
tion revoke),  exempt  such  gear  from 


m<§talliques  devront  comporter  au 
moins  trois  tours  avec  un  toron 
entier  du  cable  et  deux  tours  avec 
la  moiti6  des  fils  coupes  dans  chaque 
toron,  Toutefois,  cette  prescription 
ne  devra  pas  avoir  pour  effet  d'em- 
p&cher  Tusage  d'une  autre  forme 
d'6pissure  d'une  efficacit6  aussi  6vi- 
dente  que  celle  qui  est  stipu!6e  par 
la  pr^sente  disposition. 

3)  Les  chaines  et  tels  engins  simi- 
laires  que  sp&ifient  les  legislations 
nationales  (par  exemple  les  crochets, 
anneaux,  boucles,  Imerillons)  de- 
vront, &  moins  qu'ils  n'aient  £t£ 
soumis  £  tel  autre  traitement  suffi- 
sant  que  peuvent  prescrire  ces  16gis- 
lations  nationales,  £tre  recuits  dans 
les  conditions  ci-apr&s,  sous  le  con- 
tr61e  d'une  personne  comp6tente 
admise  par  les  autorit6s  nationales: 

a)  Chaines  et  engins  pr6cit6s  qui 
sont  &  bord  du  bateau : 

1°  chaines  et  engins  r6guli&re- 
ment  utilises  de  12  millimetres  et 
demi  (un  demi-pouce)  ou  moins, 
une  f  ois  tous  les  six  mois ; 

2°  tous  autres  chafnes  et  engins 
(y  compris  les  chaines  de  pantoire, 
mais  &  Texclusion  des  chalnes- 
brides  attaches  aux  mlits  de 
charge  ou  aux  milts)  r6guli£re- 
ment  utilises,  une  fois  tous  les 
douze  mois; 

Toutefois,  dans  le  cas  des  engins 
de  cette  nature  utilises  exclusive- 
ment  sur  les  grues  et  autres  appareils 
de  levage  &  main,  Tintervalle  pr6vu 
au  sous-paragraphe  i°  sera  de  douze 
mois  au  lieu  de  six  et  I'intervalle 
pr6vu  au  sous-paragraphe  2°  sera  de 
deux  ans  au  lieu  de  douze  mois; 

De  m&rne,  dans  le  cas  oil  1'au- 
torit6  comp6tente  estime,  en  raison 
des  dimensions,  de  la  structure,  des 
mat£riaux  ou  de  la  raret6  d'utilisa- 
tion  de  tous  engins  pr6cit6s,  que 
1'observation  des  prescriptions  du 
present  paragraphe  concernant  les 
recuissons  n'est  pas  n6cessaire  pour 
la  protection  des  travailleurs,  cette 
autorit6  peut,  au  moyen  d'un  certi- 


22 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  306 


the  said  requirements  subject  to  such 
conditions  as  may  be  specified  in  the 

said  certificate* 


(6)  In  the  case  of  chains  and  the 
said  gear  not  carried  on  board  ship : 

Measures  shall  be  prescribed  to  se- 
cure the  annealing  of  the  said  chains 
and  gear. 

(c)  In  the  case  of  the  said  chains 
and  gear  whether  carried  on  board 
ship  or  not,  which  have  been  length- 
ened, altered  or  repaired  by  weld- 
ing, they  shall  thereupon  be  tested 
and  re-examined. 

(4)  Such  duly  authenticated  rec- 
ords as  will  provide  sufficient  prima 
facie  evidence  of  the  safe  condition 
of  the  machines  and  gear  concerned 
shall  be  kept,  on  shore  or  on  the  ship 
as  the  case  may  be,  specifying  the 
safe  working  load  and  the  dates  and 
results  of  the  tests  and  examinations 
referred  to  in  paragraphs  (i)  and  (2) 
of  this  Article  and  of  the  annealings 
or  other  treatment  referred  to  in 
paragraph  (3), 

Such  records  shall,  on  the  appli- 
cation of  any  person  authorised  for 
the  purpose,  be  produced  by  the 
person  in  charge  thereof. 

(5)  The  safe  working  load  shall 
be  kept  plainly  marked  on  all  cranes, 
derricks  and  chain  slings  and  on  any 
similar  hoisting  gear  used  on  board 
ship  as  specified  by  national  laws  or 
regulations,    The  safe  working  load 
marked  on  chain  slings  shall  either 
be  in  plain  figures  or  letters  upon  the 
chains  or  upon  a  tablet  or  ring  of 
durable  material  attached  securely 
thereto. 


(6)  All  motors,  cogwheels,  chain 
and  friction  gearing,  shafting,  live 
electric  conductors  and  steam  pipes 
shall  (unless  it  can  be  shown  that  by 
their  position  and  construction  they 
are  equally  safe  to  every  worker  em- 


ficat  ecrit  (qu'elle  peut  revoquer  & 
son  gr6),  exempter  ces  engins  de 
Tapplication  desdites^  prescriptions, 
sous  reserve  des  conditions  qui  peu- 
vent  &tre  fixfies  dans  le  certihcat. 

b)  Chaines  et  engins  pr6cit£s  qui 
ne  sont  pas  &  bord ; 

Des  mesures  seront  prtvues  pour 
assurer  la  recuisson  de  ces  chalnes 
et  engins. 

c)  Chaines  et  engins  prficitfs  qui 
sont  ou  non  £,  bord : 

Les  chafnes  et  engins  qui  auront 
6t6  rallongfis,  modifies  ou  rfiparfis  par 
soudure  devront  6tre  essay£s  et 
v6rifi6s  de  nouveau. 

4)  On  censer vera  &  terre  ou  4  bord , 
suivant  les  cas»  des  proc&s-verbaux 
ddment  authentiques  qui  constitu- 
eront    une    pr&somption    suffisante 
de  la  s6curit6  du  fonctionnement  des 
appareils  et  des  engins  dont  il  s'agit; 
ces  procds-verbaux  devront  indiquer 
le  maximum  de  charge  autoris6,  ainsi 
que  la  date  et  le  r&sultat  des  essais  et 
verifications  vis6s  aux  paragraphes 
i)  et  2)  du  present  article  et  des 
recuissons    ou    autres    traitements 
vis6s  au  paragraphe  3). 

Ces  proems- verbaux  devront  6tre 
pr6sent6s  par  la  personne  qui  en  est 
charg^e  &  la  demande  de  toute  per- 
sonne qualifi^e  &  cet  effet, 

5)  On  devra  marquer  et  maintenir 
sur  toutes  les  grues,  milts  de  charge 
et  chaines  d^lingues,  ainsi  que  sur 
tous  engins  de  levage  similaires  uti~ 
Iis6s  ^  bord,  tels  qu'ils  sont  sp€cij&6s 
par  les  legislations  nationales,  I'm* 
dication  distincte  du  maximum  de 
charge  autoris6,    Le  maximum  de 
charge  indiqu6  sur  les  chaines  df61in** 
gues  sera  marqu6  en  chiffres  ou  en 
lettres   apparents   sur   les   chalnes 
elles-mtotes  ou  bien  sur  une  plaque 
ou  anneau  en  mati&re  durable  solide- 
ment  attach6  ^  ces  dtialnes. 

6)  Tous  les  moteurs,  roues  den- 
t&es,   appareils  de   transmission    4 
chafne  ou  k  frottement,  conducteurs 
dectriques  sous  tension  et  tuyaujc  de 
vapeur  devront  (i  moins  quTil  ne 
soit  prouv6  que  par  leur  position  ou 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


ployed  as  they  would  be  if  securely 
fenced)  be  securely  fenced  so  far  as 
is  practicable  without  impeding  the 
safe  working  of  the  ship. 


(7)  Cranes  and  winches  shall  be 
provided  with  such  means  as  will 
reduce  to  a  minimum  the  risk  of  the 
accidental  descent  of  a  load  while  in 
process  of  being  lifted  or  lowered. 

(8)  Appropriate  measures  shall  be 
taken  to  prevent  exhaust  steam  from 
and,  so  far  as  practicable,  live  steam 
to  any  crane  or  winch  obscuring  any 
part  of  the  working  place  at  which  a 
worker  is  employed. 

(9)  Appropriate  measures  shall  be 
taken  to  prevent  the  foot  of  a  derrick 
being  accidentally  lifted  out  of  its 
socket  or  support, 

Art  10.  Only  sufficiently  com- 
petent and  reliable  persons  shall  be 
employed  to  operate  lifting  or  trans- 
porting machinery  whether  driven 
by  mechanical  power  or  otherwise, 
or  to  give  signals  to  a  driver  of  such 
machinery,  or  to  attend  to  cargo 
falls  on  winch  ends  or  winch  drums. 


Art  ii.— (i)  No  load  shall  be  left 
suspended  from  any  hoisting  ma- 
chine unless  there  is  a  competent 
person  actually  in  charge  of  the 
machine  while  the  load  is  so  left. 

(2)  Appropriate  measures  shall  be 
prescribed  to  provide  for  the  em- 
ployment of  a  signaller  where  this 
is  necessary  for  the  safety  of  the 
workers, 

(3)  Appropriate  measures  shall  be 
prescribed  with  the  object  of  pre- 
venting dangerous  methods  of  work- 
ing   in    the    stacking,    unstacking, 
stowing  and  unstowing  of  cargo,  or 
handling  in  connection  therewith. 


leur  construction  ils  presentent,  du 
point  de  vue  de  la  s£curite  de  tous 
les  travailieurs  employes,  les  mgmes 
garanties  que  s'ils  <§taient  efficace- 
ment  proteges)  etre  munis  de  dispo- 
sitifs  de  protection  dans  la  mesure 
oil  cela  est  pratiquement  realisable 
sans  nuire  &  la  securit6  de  la  ma- 
noeuvre du  bateau. 

7)  Les  grues  et  les  treuils  devront 
Stre  pourvus  de  moyens  propres  &  r£- 
duire  au  minimum  le  risque  de  la  chute 
accidentelle  de  la  charge  pendant 
qu'ils  Fenl&ventou  qu'ils  Tabaissent. 

8)  Des   mesures  appropriates  de- 
vront Stre  prises  pour  emp^cher  la 
vapeur  d'6chappement  et,  dans  la 
mesure  du  possible,  la  vapeur  vive 
de  tout  treuil  ou  grue  de  g&ner  la 
visibility  en  tout  lieu  de  travail  oil 
un  travailleur  est  occup6. 

9)  Des    mesures    appropri6s    de- 
vront 8tre  prises  pour  empgcher  Fen- 
l&vement  involontaire  du  pied  d'un 
melt  de  charge  de  son  support. 

Art.  10.  Seules  les  personnes 
suffisamment  comp^tentes  et  dignes 
de  confiance  devront  Stre  employees 
&  la  conduite  des  appareils  de  levage 
ou  de  transport,  qu'ils  soient  mus 
m^caniquement  ou  d'une  autre  fagon, 
ou  &  faire  des  signaux  aux  conduc- 
teurs  de  ces  appareils,  ou  encore  £ 
surveiller  le  cartahu  actionn6  par 
les  tambours  ou  poup^es  de  treuils. 

Art.  n. — i)  Aucune  charge  ne 
devra  rester  suspendue  &  un  appareil 
de  levage  si  la  marche  de  cet  appareil 
n'est  pas  sous  le  contrdle  effectif 
d'une  personne  comp&tente  pendant 
que  la  charge  est  ainsi  suspendue. 

2)  Des  mesures  appropri6es  de- 
vront Stre  pr^vues  pour  qu'une  per- 
sonne   soit    charg&e    de    faire    des 
signaux  si  sa  presence  est  n^cessaire 
&  la  s&curit&  des  travailieurs. 

3)  Des  mesures  appropri6es  de- 
vront 6tre  prfrvues  pour  6viter  qu'on 
emploie   des    m6thodes   de   travail 
dangereuses  dans  Tempilement  ou 
le  d^sentassement,  Farrimage  ou  le 
d6sarrimage  de  la  cargaison,  ou  la 
manutention  qui  s'y  rapporte. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  306 


(4)  Before  work  is  begun  at  a  hatch 
the  beams  thereof  shall  either  be 
removed  or  be  securely  fastened  to 
prevent  their  displacement. 

(5)  Precautions  shall  be  taken  to 
facilitate  the  escape  of  the  workers 
when  employed  in  a  hold  or  on  'tween 
decks  in  dealing  with  coal  or  other 
bulk  cargo. 


(6)  No  stage  shall  be  used  in  the 
processes  unless  it  is  substantially 
and  firmly  constructed,  adequately 
supported  and  where  necessary  se- 
curely fastened. 

No  truck  shall  be  used  for  carry- 
ing cargo  between  ship  and  shore 
on  a  stage  so  steep  as  to  be  unsafe. 


Stages  shall  where  necessary  be 
treated  with  suitable  material  to 
prevent  the  workers  slipping. 

(7)  When  the  working  space  in  a 
hold  is  confined  to  the  square  of  the 
hatch,  and  except  for  the  purpose  of 
breaking  out  or  making  up  slings. 


(a)  hooks  shall  not  be  made  fast 
in  the  bands  or  fastenings  of  bales  of 
cotton,  wool,  cork,  gunny-bags,  or 
other  similar  goods; 

(6)  can-hooks  shall  not  be  used  for 
raising  or  lowering  a  barrel  when, 
owing  to  the  construction  or  condi- 
tion of  the  barrel  or  of  the  hooks, 
their  use  is  likely  to  be  unsafe. 


(8)  No  gear  of  any  description 
shall  be  loaded  beyond  the  safe 
working  load  save  in  exceptional 
cases  and  then  only  in  so  far  as  may 
be  allowed  by  national  laws  or 
regulations. 


4)  Avan  t  de  mettre  en  usage  une 
£coutille,  on  devra  en  lever  tous  les 

barrots  et  galiotes  ou  les  assujettir 
solidement  pour  6viler  qu'ils  se 
tleplaeent. 

5)  Toutes    precautions    devront 
Ctre  prises  pour  que  les  travailleurs 
puissent  facilement  fivacuer  les  cales 
ou  les  entreponts  lorsqu'ils  y  sont 
occup6s  &  charger  ou  d6charger  du 
charbon  ou  d'autres  cargaisons  en 
vrac. 

6)  Aucune    plate-forme    ne    sera 
utilisfie  pour  les  operations  si  elle 
n'est  pas  fortement  et  solidement 
construite,   convenablement   $tayee 
et,  dans  les  cas  oft  c'est  n6cessaire, 
solidement  fixtfe. 

-Pour  le  transport  de  la  charge 
entre  le  navire  et  la  terre,  on  ne 
pourra  faire  usage  d'un  charriot  & 
bras  dans  le  cas  oft  la  plate-forme 
est  inclin£e  au  point  de  presenter  un 
clanger. 

Les  plate-formes  devront,  si  cela 
est  n6cessaire,  6tre  recouvertes  d'une 
mati&re  appropri£e  pour  empccher 
les  travailleurs  de  glisser. 

7)  Lorsque    Tespace    de    travail 
dans  une  cale  est  Iimit6  au  carr6  de 
l'6coutille,  on  ne  devra  pas,  sauf 
dans  le  but  d'amorcer  le  dfisarrimage 
ou  pour  rassembler  la  charge  dans 


a)  fixer  des  crochets  aux  liens  ou 
autres  attaches  entourant  les  balles 
de  coton,  laine,  U6ge,  sacs  de  jute  ou 
autres  marchandises  similaires; 

b)  employer  des  griffes  4  tonneaux 
lors  du  chargement  et  du  dteharge- 
ment  des  tonneaux,  It  moms  que  la 
construction  et  la  nature  des  ton- 
neaux ainsi  que  la  disposition  et 
1'fitat  des  griffes  permettent  de  le 
faire  sans  danger  probable. 

8)  Aucun  engin  de  levage  quel 
qu'il  soit  ne  devra  Stre  chargd  au 
deli  du  maximum  de  charge  autoris6, 
sauf  dans  des  cas  exceptionnels  et, 
dans  ces  cas,  seulement  dans  la 
mesure  autoris^e  par  la  16gislation 
nationale. 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


(9)  In  the  case  of  shore  cranes 
with  varying  capacity  (e.g.  raising 
and  lowering  jib  with  load  capacity 
varying  according  to  the  angle)  an 
automatic  indicator  or  a  table  show- 
ing the  safe  working  loads  at  the 
corresponding  inclinations  of  the  jib 
shall  be  provided  on  the  crane. 

Art  12.  National  laws  or  regula- 
tions shall  prescribe  such  precau- 
tions as  may  be  deemed  necessary 
to  ensure  the  proper  protection  of 
the  workers,  having  regard  to  the  cir- 
cumstances of  each  case,  when  they 
have  to  deal  with  or  work  in  proxim- 
ity to  goods  which  are  in  themselves 
dangerous  to  life  or  health  by  reason 
either  of  their  inherent  nature  or  of 
their  condition  at  the  time,  or  work 
where  such  goods  have  been  stowed. 


Art,  13.  At  docks,  wharves,  quays 
and  similar  places  which  are  in  fre- 
quent use  for  the  processes,  such 
facilities  as  having  regard  to  local 
circumstances  shall  be  prescribed 
by  national  laws  or  regulations  shall 
be  available  for  rapidly  securing  the 
rendering  of  first-aid  and  in  serious 
cases  of  accident  removal  to  the 
nearest  place  of  treatment.  Suffi- 
cient supplies  of  first-aid  equipment 
shall  be  kept  permanently  on  the 
premises  in  such  a  condition  and  in 
such  positions  as  to  be  fit  and  readily 
accessible  for  immediate  use  during 
working  hours.  The  said  supplies 
shall  be  in  charge  of  a  responsible 
person  or  persons,  who  shall  include 
one  or  more  persons  competent  to 
render  first-aid,  and  whose  services 
shall  also  be  readily  available  during 
working  hours. 


9)  Les  grues  utilises  &  terre  et  & 
puissance  variable  (par  exemple  par 
rel&vernent  ou  abaissement  de  la 
fl&che,  la  capacite  de  charge  variant 
suivant  Tangle)  devront  8tre  munies 
d'un  indicateur  automatique  ou  d'un 
tableau  indiquant  les  maximums  de 
charge  correspondant  aux  inclinai- 
sons  de  la  fl&che. 

Art.  12.  Les  legislations  natio- 
nales  devront  pr6voir  les  precautions 
consid6r6es  comme  indispensables 
pour  assurer  convenablement  la  pro- 
tection des  travailleurs,  en  tenant 
compte  des  circonstances  de  chaque 
cas  particulier,  quand  ils  ont  &  tra- 
vailler  au  contact  ou  &  proximit6  de 
mati&res  qui  sont  dangereuses  pour 
leur  vie  ou  leur  sant6,  soit  par  leur 
nature  m£me,  soit  £  cause  de  l'6tat 
dans  lequel  elles  se  trouvent  &  ce 
moment,  ou  quand  ils  ont  &  travailler 
dans  des  endroits  oil  de  telles  ma- 
ti&res  ont  s6journ6. 

Art.  13.  Sur  les  docks,  wharfs, 
quais  et  autres  lieux  semblables  fr6- 
quemment  utilises  pour  les  op6ra- 
tions,  les  moyens  de  secours  que 
les  legislations  nationales  devront 
pr6voir,  en  tenant  compte  des  cir- 
constances  locales,  seront  am6nag6s 
de  telle  fagon  que  les  premiers  soins 
puissent  Stre  rapidement  assures 
et  pour  que,  dans  les  cas  d'accident 
s6rieux,  rint6ress6  puisse  £tre  rapide- 
ment transport^  £  I'hdpital  le  plus 
proche.  Une  provision  suffisante  de 
materiel  de  premier  secours  devra 
£tre  conserve  en  permanence  sur 
les  lieux  dont  il  s'agit,  dans  un  6tat  et 
dans  des  endroits  tels  qu'elle  soit 
facilement  accessible  et  puisse  §tre 
utilis6e  imm&liatement  au  cours  des 
heures  de  travail  Ces  provisions  de 
mat6riel  de  premier  secours  devront 
Stre  plac6es  sous  la  surveillance 
d'une  ou  de  plusieurs  personnes  re- 
sponsables,  comprenant  une  ou  plu- 
sieurs personnes  aptes  &  donner  les 
premiers  soins  et  prStes  &  assurer 
imm6diatement  leur  service  pendant 
les  heures  de  travail. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  306 


At  such  docks,  wharves,  quays 
and  similar  places  as  aforesaid  ap- 
propriate provision  shall  also  be 
made  for  the  rescue  of  immersed 
workers  from  drowning. 

Art.  14.  An}?*  fencing,  gangway, 
gear,  ladder,  lifesaving  means  or 
appliance,  light,  mark,  stage  or  other 
thing  whatsoever  required  to  be 
provided  under  this  Convention  shall 
not  be  removed  or  interfered  with 
by  any  person  except  when  duly 
authorised  or  in  case  of  necessity, 
and  if  removed  shall  be  restored  at 
the  end  of  the  period  for  which  its 
removal  was  necessary. 


Art  15.  It  shall  be  open  to  each 
Member  to  grant  exemptions  from  or 
exceptions  to  the  provisions  of  this 
Convention  in  respect  of  any  dock, 
wharf,  quay  or  similar  place  at  which 
the  processes  are  only  occasionally 
carried  on  or  the  traffic  is  small  and 
confined  to  small  ships,  or  in  respect 
of  certain  special  ships  or  special 
classes  of  ships  or  ships  below  a 
certain  small  tonnage,  or  in  cases 
where  as  a  result  of  climatic  con- 
ditions it  would  be  impracticable  to 
require  the  provisions  of  this  Conven- 
tion to  be  carried  out. 


The  International  Labour  Office 
shall  be  kept  informed  of  the  provi- 
sions in  virtue  of  which  any  exemp- 
tions and  exceptions  as  aforesaid  are 
allowed. 

Art.  1 6.  Except  as  herein  other- 
wise provided,  the  provisions  of  this 
Convention  which  affect  the  con- 
struction or  permanent  equipment 
of  the  ship  shall  apply  to  ships  the 
building  of  which  is  commenced  after 
the  date  of  ratification  of  the  Con- 
vention, and  to  all  other  ships  within 
four  years  after  that  date,  provided 
that  in  the  meantime  the  said  provi- 
sions shall  be  applied  so  far  as  rea- 


Des  mesures  appropriates  dcvront 

£galement  6tre  prises  sur  les  docks, 
wharfs,  quais  et  autres  lieux  sem- 
blables,  ci-dessus  mentionn6s,  pour 
porter  secours  aux  travailleurs  qui 
tomberaient  *t  1'eau. 

Art.  14.  Aucune  personne  n'aura 
le  droit  d'enlever  ni  de  d£placer  des 
garde-corps,  passerelles,  dispositifs, 
6chelles,  appareils  ou  xnoyens  de 
sauvetage,  lumi&res,  inscriptions, 
plate-formes  ou  tous  autres  objets 
pr^vus  par  les  dispositions  de  la 
prfeente  convention,  sauf  si  elle  y 
est  dflment  autoris£e  ou  en  cas  de 
n6cessit6;  les  objets  dont  il  s'agit 
devront  etre  remis  en  place  &  Fex- 
piration  du  delai  pour  lequel  leur 
enlfcvement  a  et£  nficessaire. 

Art.  15,  Chaque  Membre  pourra 
accorder  des  derogations  to  tales  ou 
partielles  aux  dispositions  de  la 
prcisente  convention  en  ce  qui  con- 
cerne  tout  dock,  wharf,  quai  ou  autre 
lieu  semblable  oH  les  operations  nt 
sont  effectu6es  qu'occasionnellement, 
ou  dans  lequel  le  trafic  est  restraint 
et  Hmit6  &  de  petits  bateaux,  ou  bien 
en  ce  qui  concerne  certains  bateaux 
sp^ciaux  ou  certaines  categories  spfr- 
ciales  de  bateaux,  ou  les  bateaux 
n'atteignant  pas  un  certain  tonnage, 
de  mSme  que  dans  les  cas  oil,  par 
suite  des  conditions  climatiques,  on 
ne  pourrait  exiger  pratiquement 
Tobservation  des  dispositions  de  la 
pr&sente  convention. 

Le  Bureau  international  du  Tra- 
vail devra  &tre  informd  des  disposi- 
tions en  vertu  desqucllcs  les  d6roga* 
tions  totalcs  ou  partielles  mention- 
n6es  ci-dessus  seront  accord£es. 

Art.  16.  Sous  reserve  des  excep- 
tions stipules  dans  d'autres  articles, 
les  mesures  pr&vues  par  la  prfesente 
convention  qui  affectent  la  construc- 
tion ou  l^quipement  permanent  du 
bateau  devront  s'appliquer  sans 
d^lai  aux  bateaux  dont  la  construc- 
tion aura  6t6  commenc^e  apr^s  la 
date  de  la  ratification  de  la  prdsente 
convention  et  elles  devront  s'ap- 
pliquer 4  tous  les  autres  bateaux 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


sonable  and  practicable  to  such  other 
ships. 


Art.  17.  In  order  to  ensure  the 
due  enforcement  of  any  regulations 
prescribed  for  the  protection  of  the 

workers  against  accidents, 

(1)  The  regulations  shall  clearly 
define  the  persons  or  bodies  who  are 
to    be    responsible    for    compliance 

with  the  respective  regulations; 

(2)  Provision  shall  be  made  for  an 
efficient  system  of  inspection  and  for 
penalties  for  breaches  of  the  regula- 
tions; 

(3)  Copies  or  summaries  of  the 
regulations  shall   be  posted  up  in 
prominent      positions      at      docks, 
wharves,  quays  and  similar  places 
which  are  in  frequent  use  for  the 
processes. 

Art.  1 8,  Each  Member  under- 
takes to  enter  into  reciprocal  ar- 
rangements on  the  basis  of  this  Con- 
vention with  the  otJier  Members 
which  have  ratified  this  Convention, 
including  more  particularly  the  mu- 
tual recognition  of  the  arrangements 
made  in  their  respective  countries 
for  testing,  exaniining  and  annealing 
and  of  certificates  and  records  relat- 
ing thereto ; 

Provided  that,  as  regards  the  con- 
struction of  ships  and  as  regards 
plant  used  on  ships  and  the  records 
and  other  matters  to  be  observed  on 
board  under  the  terms  of  this  Con- 
vention, each  Member  is  satisfied 
that  the  arrangements  adopted  by 
the  other  Member  secure  a  general 
standard  of  safety  for  the  workers 
equally  effective  as  the  standard 
required  under  its  own  laws  and 
regulations  ; 


dans  un  d6Iai  de  quatre  ans  H  partir 
de  cette  date,  Toutefois,  avant 
Texpiration  de  ce  delai  les  dites 
mesures  devront  etre  appliqu£es 
&  ces  autres  bateaux  pour  autant 
que  cela  sera  raisonnable  et  pratique- 
ment  realisable. 

Art.  17.  Afin  d'assurer  Fapplica- 
tion  effective  de  tous  r&glements 
^tablis  en  vue  de  la  protection  des 
travailleurs  contre  les  accidents, 

1)  les    dits    rdglements    devront 
determiner  clairement  les  personnes 
ou    prganismes    auxquels    incombe 
Pobligation  d'en  observer  les  pre- 
scriptions; 

2)  des  dispositions  devront  gtre 
prises  pour  instituer  un  syst^me  d 'in- 
spection efficace  et  pour  fixer  les  sanc- 
tions applicables  en  cas  de  violation 
des  r^glements; 

3)  les  textes  ou  des  r6sum<§s  des 
r&glements  devront  £tre  affich^s  & 
des  endroits  bien  visibles  des  docks, 
wharfs,  quais  et  autres  lieux  sem- 
blables   fr^quernment  utilises  pour 
les  op6rations. 

Art.  18.  Chaque  Membre  s'en- 
gage  &  conclure  avec  les  autres 
Membres  ayant  ratifi6  la  pr&sente 
convention  des  accords  de  r6cipro- 
cit6  sur  la  base  de  cette  convention, 
en  comprenant  plus  particuli&rement 
dans  ces  accords  la  reconnaissance 
mutuelle  des  dispositions  prises  dans 
leurs  pays  respectifs  pour  les  essais, 
v6rifications  et  recuissons  et  la  re- 
connaissance mutuelle  des  certificats 
et  proc£s-verbaux  y  relatifs. 

Cet  engagement  est  pris  sous 
reserve  que,  pour  ce  qui  concerne  la 
construction  des  bateaux  et  Toutil- 
lage  utilis6  &  bord  et  pour  ce  qui 
concerne  les  proc^s-verbaux  ainsi 
que  les  diverses  prescriptions  qui 
doivent  6tre  observes  &  bord  aux 
termes  de  la  pr6sente  convention, 
chaque  Membre  soit  assur6  que  les 
dispositions  adoptees  par  Tautre 
Membre  garantissent,  pour  les  tra- 
vailleurs, un  niveau  g6n6ral  de  s6- 
curit€  d'une  efficacit&  £gale  au  niveau 
prescrit  par  sa  propre  legislation. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  306 


Provided  also  that  the  Govern- 
ments shall  have  due  regard  to  the 
obligations  of  paragraph  (n)  of 
Article  405  of  the  Treaty  of  Ver- 
sailles and  of  the  corresponding  Arti- 
cles of  the  other  Treaties  of  Peace. 

Art.  19.  The  formal  ratifications 
of  this  Convention  under  the  condi- 
tions set  forth  in  Part  XIII  of  the 
Treaty  of  Versailles  and  in  the  cor- 
responding Parts  of  the  other  Treaties 
of  Peace  shall  be  communicated  to 
the  Secretary-General  of  the  League 
of  Nations  for  registration. 

Art,  20.  This  Convention  shall 
be  binding  only  upon  those  Mem- 
bers whose  ratifications  have  been 
registered  with  the  Secretariat. 

It  shall  come  into  force  twelve 
months  after  the  date  on  which  the 
ratifications  of  two  Members  of  the 
International  Labour  Organisation 
have  been  registered  with  the  Secre- 
tary-General. 

Thereafter,  this  Convention  shall 
come  into  force  for  any  Member 
twelve  months  after  the  date  on  which 
its  ratification  has  been  registered. 

Art*  21.  As  soon  as  the  ratifica- 
tions of  two  Members  of  the  Inter- 
national Labour  Organisation  have 
been  registered  with  the  Secretariat, 
the  Secretary-General  of  the  League 
of  Nations  shall  so  notify  all  the 
Members  of  the  International  La- 
bour Organisation.  He  shall  like** 
wise  notify  them  of  the  registration 
of  ratifications  which  may  be  com* 
municated  subsequently  by  other 
Members  of  the  Organisation* 

Art.  22.  A  Member  which  has 
ratified  this  Convention  may  de- 
nounce it  after  the  expiration  of  ten 
years  from  the  date  on  which  the 
Convention  first  comes  into  force,  by 
an  act  communicated  to  the  Secre- 
tary-General of  the  League  of  Na- 
tions for  registration*  Such  denun- 
ciation shall  not  take  effect  until 
one  year  after  the  date  on  which  it 
is  registered  with  the  Secretariat. 

Each  Member  which  has  ratified 


En  outre,  les  Gouvernements  tien- 
dront  dflment  compte  cles  obliga- 
tions qui  rfsultent  du  paragraphs  1 1 
tie  Tarticle  405  du  Traite  cle  Ver- 
sailles et  des  articles  correspondants 
des  autres  Trait.es  cle  Puix. 

Art.  19.  Les  ratifications  oflicielles 
de  la  prfisente  convention  dans  les 
conditions  pr^vues  &  la  Partie  XIII 
du  Trait6  de  Versailles  et  aux  Parties 
correspondantes  des  autres  Trait6s 
de  Paix  seront  communiques  au 
Secretaire  g6n6ral  de  la  Soci6t6  des 
Nations  et  par  lui  enregistrtfes. 

Art,  20,  La  pr6sente  convention 
ne  Hera  que  les  Membres  de  TOr- 
ganisation  Internationale  du  Travail , 
dont  la  ratification  aura  £tfi  en- 
registrde  au  Secretariat. 

Elle  entrera  en  vigueur  douze  mois 
aprds  que  les  ratifications  de  deux 
Membres  auront  6t6  enregistrtfes  par 
le  Secr6taire 


Par  la  suite,  cette  convention  en- 
trera en  vigueur  pour  chaque  Mem- 
bra douze  mois  aprfes  la  date  oii  sa 
ratification  aura  6t6  enregistrte. 

Art.  21.  Aussitdt  que  les  ratifi- 
cations de  deux  Membres  de  1 'Or- 
ganisation Internationale  du  Travail 
auront  6t6  enregistr&es  au  Secr6* 
tariat,  le  Secretaire  g(m£ral  de  la 
Soci6t£  des  Nations  notifiera  ce  fait 
&  tous  les  Membres  de  reorganisation 
Internationale  du  Travail.  II  leur 
notifiera  6galement  Tenregistrement 
des  ratifications  qui  lui  seront  ult(> 
rieurement  communiques  par  tons 
autres  Membres  de  FOrganisation* 

Art  22*  Tout  Membre  ayant 
ratifi6  la  pr£aente  convention  pent 
la  ^d6noncer  4  Fexpiration  dfune 
pMode  de  dix  annte  aprds  la  date 
de  la  mise  en  vigueur  initiale  de  la 
convention,  par  un  acte  communique 
au  Secretaire  g6n6ral  de  la  Sociit6 
des  Nations,  et  par  lui  enregistrt* 
La  d6nonciation  ne  prendra  effet 
qu*une  ann6e  apr^s  avoir  6t6  en- 
registr6e  au  Secretariat. 

Tout    Membre   ayant    ratifi^    la 


April  27,  1932      PROTECTION  AGAINST  ACCIDENTS  TO  DOCKERS 


this  Convention  and  which  does  not, 
within  the  year  following  the  expira- 
tion of  the  period  of  ten  years  men- 
tioned in  the  preceding  paragraph, 
exercise  the  right  of  denunciation 
provided  for  in  this  Article,  will  be 
bound  for  another  period  of  five 
years  and,  thereafter,  may  denounce 
this  Convention  at  the  expiration  of 
each  period  of  five  years  under  the 
terms  provided  for  in  this  Article. 

Art.  23,  At  the  expiration  of  each 
period  of  ten  years  after  the  coming 
Into  force  of  this  Convention,  the 
Governing  Body  of  the  International 
Labour  Office  shall  present  to  the 
General  Conference  a  report  on  the 
working  of  this  Convention  and  shall 
consider  the  desirability  of  placing 
on  the  Agenda  of  the  Conference  the 
question  of  its  revision  in  whole  or 
in  part. 

Art.  24.  Should  the  Conference 
adopt  a  new  Convention  revising  this 
Convention  in  whole  or  in  part,  the 
ratification  by  a  Member  of  the  new 
revising  Convention  shall  ipso  jure 
involve  denunciation  of  this  Con- 
vention without  any  requirement  of 
delay ,  notwithstanding  the  provisions 
of  Article  22  above,  if  and  when  the 
new  revising  Convention  shall  have 
come  into  force. 


As  from  the  date  of  the  coming  into 
force  of  the  new  revising  Conven- 
tion, the  present  Convention  shall 
cease  to  be  open  to  ratification  by 
the  Members. 

Nevertheless,  this  Convention  shall 
remain  in  force  in  its  actual  form  and 
content  for  those  Members  which 
have  ratified  it  but  have  not  ratified 
the  revising  Convention. 

Art.  25.  The  French  and  English 
texts  of  this  Convention  shall  both 
be  authentic. 

The  foregoing  is  the  authentic 
text  of  the  Draft  Convention  duly 
adopted  by  the  General  Conference 


prfisente  convention  qui,  dans  le 
d£lai  d'une  ann&e  aprds  F  expiration 
de  la  p6riode  de  dix  ann<§es  me'n- 
tionn^e  au  paragraphs  pr6c6dent, 
ne  fera  pas  usage  de  la  facult<§  de 
d^nonciation  pr<§vue  par  le  present 
article,  sera  H6  pour  une  nouvelle 
p6riode  de  cinq  ann6es  et,  par  la  suite, 
pourra  ddnoncer  la  pr£sente  con- 
vention &  1'expiration  de  chaque 
p^riode  de  cinq  ann£es  dans  les  con- 
ditions pr6vues  au  present  article. 

Art.  23*  A  Texpiration  de  chaque 
p6riode  de  dix  ann£es  £  compter  de 
rentrfe  en  vigueur  de  la  pr<§sente 
convention,  le  Conseil  d'adminis- 
tration  du  Bureau  international  du 
Travail  devra  presenter  &  la  Conf6- 
rence  g6n6rale  un  rapport  sur  Tap- 
plication  de  la  pr&sente  convention  et 
d6cidera  s'il  y  a  lieu  d'inscrire  &  1'ordre 
du  jour  de  la  Conference  la  question 
de  sa  revision  totale  ou  partielle. 

Art.  24.  Au  cas  oft  la  Conference 
internationale  adopterait  une  nou- 
velle convention  portant  revision 
totale  ou  partielle  de  la  pr6sente 
convention,  la  ratification  par  un 
Membre  de  la  nouvelle  convention 
portant  revision  entratnerait  de  plein 
droit  d^nonciation  de  la  pr^sente 
convention  sans  condition  de  d61ai 
nonobstant  Particle  22  ci-dessus, 
sous  reserve  que  la  nouvelle  conven- 
tion portant  revision  soit  entree  en 
vigueur, 

A  partir  de  la  date  de  Tentr^e  en 
vigueur  de  la  nouvelle  convention 
portant  revision,  la  pr6sente  con- 
vention cesserait  d'etre  ouverte  & 
la  ratification  des  Membres. 

La  prfeente  convention  demeure- 
rait  toutefois  en  vigueur  dans  sa 
forme  et  teneur  pour  les  Membres 
qui  Tauraient  ratifi^e  et  qui  ne 
ratifieraient  pas  la  nouvelle  con- 
vention portant  revision. 

Art.  25.  Les  textes  frangais^et 
anglais  de  la  pr6sente  convention 
feront  foi  Tun  et  1'autre. 

Le  texte  qui  pr£c&de  est  le  texte 
authentique  du  projet  de  convention 
dftment  adopt6  par  la  Conf6rence 


30  INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION  No.  3C>7 

of  the  International  Labour  Organisa-  gtfnfrale  de  1  Organisation  intema- 

tion   during   its   Sixteenth   Session  tionale  du  Travail  dans  sa  seiz&mc 

which  was  held  at  Geneva  and  de-  session  qui  s'est  tenue  &  Genfeve  et 

clared  closed  the  joth  day  of  April  qui  a  6t6  d£clar6e  close  le  30  avril 

1932.  1932. 

IN  FAITH  WHEREOF  we  have  ap-         EN  FOI  DE  QUOI  ont  apposfi  leurs 

pended  our  signatures  this  fifth  clay     signatures,  le  cinq  mai  1932, 

of  May  1932. 

For  the  President  of  the  Conference,  Bo  HAMMARSKJOLD,  Vice-president 
The  Director  of  the  International  Labour  Office,  ALBERT  THOMAS 


No.  307 

CONVENTION  concerning  the  Age  for  Admission  of  Children  to 
Non-Industrial  Employment.  Adopted  at  Geneva,  April  30, 
1932. 

CONVENTION  concernant  Page  d'adrnission  des  enfants  atu; 
travatix  non-indtistriels.  Adoptee  a  Geneve,  30  avril  1932, 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  A  draft  convention  on  the  minimum  age  for  admission  of  children  to 
industrial  employment  was  adopted  by  the  International  Labor  Conference  at  Washington, 
November  28,  1919  (No.  14,  ante)*,  a  draft  convention  on  the  minimum  age  for  admission  of 
children  to  employment  at  sea  was  adopted  at  Genoa,  July  9,  1920  (No.  23,  ante)*,  and  a 
draft  convention  on  the  age  for  admission  of  children  to  employment  in  agriculture  was 
adopted  at  Geneva,  November  16,  1921  (No.  60,  ante).  This  convention  was  adopted  as  a 
draft  convention  by  the  International  Labor  Conference  at  its  sixteenth  session ;  its  short 
title  is  "Minimum  Age  (Non-Industrial  Employment)  Convention,  1932," 

RATIFICATIONS,  Ratifications  of  this  convention  were  communicated  to  the  Secretary- 
General  of  the  League  of  Nations  by  Uruguay,  June  6,  1933;  Belgium,  June  6,  1934;  Spain, 
June  22,  1934;  Netherlands,  July  12,  1935;  Cuba,  February  24,  1936;  Austria,  February 
26,  1936. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  International  Labour  Conference,  Fifteenth  Session,  Geneva,  zp^jr  ( Rec- 
ords) t  2  vols,  (Geneva:  International  Labour  Office,  1931);  idem,  sixteenth  session,  Geneva, 
1932  (1932).  See  also  the  preparatory  documents  of  the  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  sessions  of 
the  conference. 

Anon.,  "The  Fifteenth  Session  of  the  International  Labour  Conference,"  24  InL  Labour 
Rev,  (1931),  pp.  135-75;  "The  Sixteenth  Session  of  the  International  Labour  Conference/' 
26  idem  (1932),  pp.  151-98. 

Entered  into  force  June  6,  1935.* 

Text  from  the  collection  of  authentic  texts  published  by  the  Secretariat  of  the 

League  of  Nations, 

The  General  Conference  of  the  La  Conference  g6n^rale  de  rOr- 
International  Labour  Organisation  ganisation  Internationale  du  Travail 
of  the  League  of  Nations,  de  la  Society  des  Nations, 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  in  a  separate  register  of  labor 
conventions,  June  6,  1935. 


April  SO,  1932      MINIMUM  AGE  (NON-INDUSTRIAL  EMPLOYMENT) 


Having  been  convened  at  Ge- 
neva by  the  Governing  Body  of 
the  International  Labour  Office, 
and  having  met  in  its  Sixteenth 
Session  on  12  April  1932,  and 

Having  decided  upon  the  adop- 
tion of  certain  proposals  with  re- 
gard to  the  age  for  admission  of 
children  to  employment  in  non- 
industrial  occupations,  which  is 
the  third  item  on  the  Agenda  of 
the  Session,  and 

Having  determined  that  these 
proposals  shall  take  the  form  of  a 
draft  international  convention, 

adopts,  this  thirtieth  day  of  April 
of  the  year  one  thousand  nine 
hundred  and  thirty-two  the  follow- 
ing Draft  Convention  for  ratification 
by  the  Members  of  the  International 
Labour  Organisation,  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  Part  XIII 
of  the  Treaty  of  Versailles  and  of  the 
corresponding  Parts  of  the  other 
Treaties  of  Peace: 

Article  I.— (i)  This  Convention 
shall  apply  to  any  employment  not 
dealt  with  in  the  following  Con- 
ventions adopted  by  the  Interna- 
tional Labour  Conference  at  its  First, 
Second  and  Third  Sessions  respec- 
tively: 

Convention  fixing  the  minimum 
age  for  admission  of  children  to  in- 
dustrial employment  (Washington, 
1919); 

Convention  fixing  the  minimum 
age  for  admission  of  children  to  em- 
ployment at  sea  (Genoa,  1920) ; 

Convention  concerning  the  age  for 
admission  of  children  to  employment 
in  agriculture  (Geneva,  1921). 

The  competent  authority  in  each 
country  shall,  after  consultation 
with  the  principal  organisations  of 
employers  and  workers  concerned, 
define  the  line  of  division  which 
separates  the  employments  covered 
by  this  Convention  from  those  dealt 
with  in  the  three  aforesaid  Conven- 
tions, 


Convoqu6e  &  Geneve  par  le 
Conseil  d 'administration  du  Bu- 
reau international  du  Travail,  et 
s'y  6tant  r6unie  le  12  avril  1932, 
en  sa  seizi&me  session, 

Aprds  avoir  d6cid6  d 'adopter 
diverses  propositions  relatives  & 
I'&ge  d 'admission  des  enfants  au 
travail  dans  les  professions  non 
industrielles,  question  qui  con- 
stitue  le  troisifeme  point  de  1'ordre 
du  jour  de  la  session,  et 

Apr&s  avoir  d6cid6  que  ces 
propositions  prendraient  la  forme 
d'un  projet  de  convention  inter- 
nationale, 

adopte,  ce  trenti&me  jour  d'avril  mil 
neuf  cent  trente  deux,  le  projet  de 
convention  ci-apr&s  &  ratifier  par 
les  Membres  de  1 'Organisation  Inter- 
nationale du  Travail  conform6ment 
aux  dispositions  de  la  Partie  XIII 
du  Trait6  de  Versailles  et  des  Parties 
correspondantes  des  autres  Trait6s 
de  Paix: 

Article  i. — i)  La  pr6sente  con- 
vention s'applique  &  tout  travail  ne 
faisant  pas  1'objet  de  la  r6glementa- 
tion  pr^vue  par  les  conventions 
suivantes  adopt6es  respectivement 
par  la  Conf6rence  Internationale  du 
Travail  &  ses  premiere,  deuxi^me  et 
troisi&me  sessions : 

Convention  fixant  I'&ge  minimum 
d'admission  des  enfants  aux  travaux 
industriels  (Washington,  1919); 

Convention  fixant  I'&ge  minimum 
d'admission  des  enfants  au  travail 
maritime  (G6nes,  1920) ; 

Convention  concernant  F&ge  d'ad- 
mission des  enfants  au  travail  dans 
1'agriculture  (Gen&ve,  1921). 

Dans  chaque  pays,  l'autorit£  com- 
pos ten  te,  apr&s  consultation  des 
principales  organisations  patroriales 
et  ouvri&res  int<§ress£es,  dlterminera 
la  ligne  de  demarcation  entre  le 
champ  d'application  de  la  pr6sente 
convention  et  celui  des  trois  con- 
ventions susmentionn6es. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  307 


(2)  This    Convention    shall    not 
apply  to : 

(a)  employment  in  sea-fishing; 

(b)  work  clone  In  technical  and 
professional  schools,  provided  that 
such  work  is  essentially  of  an  educa- 
tive character,  is  not  intended  for 
commercial  profit,  and  is  restricted, 
approved  and  supervised  by  public 
authority, 

(3)  It  shall  be  open  to  the  com- 
petent authority  in  each  country  to 
exempt  from  the  application  of  this 
Convention : 

(a)  employment  in  establishments 
in  which  only  members  of  the  em- 
ployer's family  are  employed,  except 
employment  which  is  harmful,  preju- 
dicial or  dangerous  within  the 
meaning  of  Articles  3  and  5  of  this 
Convention ; 

(&)  domestic  work  in  the  family 
performed  by  members  of  that 
family. 

Art.  2.  Children  under  four- 
teen years  of  age,  or  children  over 
fourteen  years  who  are  still  required 
by  national  laws  or  regulations  to 
attend  primary  school,  shall  not  be 
employed  in  any  employment  to 
which  this  Convention  applies  except 
as  hereinafter  otherwise  provided. 

Art.  3. — (i)  Children  over  twelve 
years  of  age  may,  outside  the  hours 
fixed  for  school  attendance,  be  em- 
ployed on  light  work: 


(a)  which  is  not  harmful  to  their 
health  or  normal  development; 

(b)  which  is  not  such  as  to  preju- 
dice their  attendance  at  school  or 
their  capacity  to  benefit  from  the 
instruction  there  given ;  and 

(c)  the  duration  of  which  does  not 
exceed  two  hours  per  day  on  either 
school  days  or  holidays,  the  total 
number  of  hours  spent  at  school  and 
on  light  work  in  no  case  to  exceed 
seven  per  day. 

(2)  Light    work    shall    be    pro- 
hibited : 


2)  La    prfisente    convention    ne 
s'appliquera  pas : 

a)  <L  la  pfiche  maritime; 

b)  au  travail  dans  les  6coles  tech- 
niques    et     prof  essionnel  les,    &    la 
condition  qu'il  pr6sente  un  caractfrre 
essentiellement  fiducatif,   n'ait  pas 
pour  objet  un  bfinfifice  commercial 
et  qu'il  soit  Iimit6,  approuv6  et  con- 
tr616  par  I'autoritfi  publique, 

3)  Dans  chaque  pays,  Tautorit6 
comp£tente  aura  la  facult6  d'exclure 
de  1'application  de  la  pr6sente  con- 
vention ; 

a)  Temploi  dans  les  6tablissements 
o&  sont  seuls  occup6s  les  membres 
de  la  famille  de  Temployeur,  4  la 
condition  que  cet  emploi  ne  soit  pas 
nuisible,  pr^judiciable  ou  dangereux 
au  sens  des  articles  3  et  5  ci-dessous ; 

b)  le  travail  domestique  dans  la 
famille   par  les  membres  de  cette 
famille. 

Art.  2.  Les  enfants  de  moins  de 
quatorze  ans  ou  ceux  qui,  ayant 
depassfi  cet  Hge,  sont  encore  sounus 
&  1'obligation  scolaire  primaire  en 
vertu  de  la  legislation  nationale,  ne 
pourront  Stre  occup6s  &  aucun  des 
travaux  auxquels  s'applique  la  pr6- 
sente  convention,  sous  reserve  des 
dispositions  ci-apr&s. 

Art.  3.—!)  Les  enfants  igfe  de 
douze  ans  accomplis  pourront,  en 
dehors  des  heures  fix6es  pour  la 
fr^quentation  scolaire,  litre  occup^s 
&  des  travaux  16gers,  sous  reserve 
que  ces  travaux; 

a)  ne  soient  pas  nuisibles  JSi  leur 
sant6    ou    &    leur    d6veloppement 
normal ; 

b)  ne  soient  pas  de  nature  4  porter 
prejudice  ^t  leur  assiduit6  &,  1'^cole 
ou  &  leur  facult6  de  b6n6ficier  de 
Tinstruction  qui  y  est  donn^e; 

c)  n'excfedent  pas  deux  heures  par 
jour,  aussi  bien  les  jours  de  classe 
que  les  jours  de  vacances,  le  nombre 
total  quotidien  des  heures  consacr^es 
&  l'<§cole  et  aux  travaux  16gers  ne 
devant  en  aucun  cas  d6passer  sept, 

2)  Les  travaux  16gers  seront  pro- 
hib6s: 


April  30,  1932      MINIMUM  AGE  (NON-INDUSTRIAL  EMPLOYMENT) 


33 


(a)  on  Sundays  and  legal  public 
holidays ; 

(b)  during  the  night,   that  is  to 
say  during  a  period  of  at  least  twelve 
consecutive    hours    comprising    the 
interval  between  8  p.m.  and  8  a.m. 

(3)  After  the  principal  organisa- 
tions   of    employers    and    workers 
concerned  have  been  consulted,  na- 
tional laws  or  regulations  shall: 

(a)  specify  what  forms  of  employ- 
ment may  be  considered  to  be  light 
work  for  the  purpose  of  this  article; 

(b)  prescribe  the  preliminary  con- 
ditions to  be  complied  with  as  safe- 
guards before  children  may  be  em- 
ployed in  light  work. 

(4)  Subject  to  the  provisions  of 
sub-paragraph  (a)  of  paragraph  (i) 
above, 

(a)  national  laws  or  regulations 
may  determine  work  to  be  allowed 
and  the  number  of  hours  per  day  to 
be  worked  during  the  holiday  time 
of  children  referred  to  in  Article  2 
who  are  over  fourteen  years  of  age; 

(b)  in  countries  where  no  provi- 
sion exists  relating  to  compulsory 
school  attendance,  the  time  spent  on 
light  work  shall  not  exceed  four  and 
a  half  hours  per  day* 

Art.  4.  In  the  interests  of  art, 
science  or  education,  national  laws 
or  regulations  may,  by  permits 
granted  in  individual  cases,  allow 
exceptions  to  the  provisions  of  Arti- 
cles 2  and  3  of  this  Convention  in 
order  to  enable  children  to  appear  in 
any  public  entertainment  or  as 
actors  or  supernumeraries  in  the 
making  of  cinematographic  films; 


Provided  that: 

(a)  no  such  exception,  shall  be 
allowed  in  respect  of  employment 
which  is  dangerous  within  the  mean- 
ing of  Article  5,  such  as  employment 
in  circuses,  variety  shows  or  cab- 
arets ; 

(£>)  strict  safeguards  shall  be  pre- 


a)  les  dimanches  et  jours  de  ftte 
publique  16gale ; 

b)  pendant    la    nuit,    c'est~&-dire 
pendant  un  intervalle  d'au  moins 
douze  heures  cons£cutives  compre- 
nant  la  periode  entre  huit  heures  du 
soir  et  huit  heures  du  matin. 

3)  Apr&s   consultation    des   prin- 
cipales  organisations  patronales  et 
ouvri^res  int£ress6es,   la  legislation 
nationale: 

a)  determinera     quels     sont     les 
genres  de  travaux  qui  peuvent  £tre 
considers  comme  travaux  legers  au 
sens  du  present  article; 

b)  prescrira  les  garanties  preiimi- 
naires    £    remplir    avant    que    les 
enfants  ne  puissent  gtre  employes  & 
des  travaux  legers. 

4)  Sous  reserve  des  dispositions 
de  raiinea  a)  du  paragraphe  I  ci- 
dessus : 

a)  la  legislation  nationale  pourra 
determiner  les  travaux  permis  et 
leur  dur6e  journali&re,  pour  la  p6riode 
des  vacances  des  enfants  ayant 
depasse  quatorze  ans,  vises  &  Parti- 
cle 2; 

6)  dans  les  pays  ou  n'existe  au- 
cune  disposition  relative  £  la  fr6- 
quentation  scolaire  obligatoire,  la 
duree  des  travaux  lagers  ne  devra 
pas  depasser  quatre  heures  et  demie 
par  jour. 

Art.  4.  Dans  rint&rfit  de  Tart, 
de  la  science  ou  de  Fenseignement, 
la  legislation  nationale  pourra,  par 
le  moyen  d'autorisations  individu- 
elles,  accorder  des  derogations  aux 
dispositions  des  articles  2  et  3  de  la 
pr6sente  convention,  afin  de  per- 
mettre  4  des  enfants  de  paraitre  dans 
tous  spectacles  publics,  ainsi  que 
de  participer  comme  acteurs  ou 
figurants  dans  des  prises  de  vue 
cinematographiques. 

Toutefois, 

a)  aucune  derogation  ne  sera  ac- 
cord6e  dans  le  cas  d'un  emploi 
dangereux  au  sens  de  Tarticle  5  ci- 
dessous,  notamment  pour  des  spec-' 
tacles  de  cirque,  varietes  et  caba- 
rets; 

&)  des    garanties    strictes    seront 


34 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  307 


scribed  for  the  health,  physical 
development  and  morals  of  the 
children ,  for  ensuring  kind  treatment 
of  them,  adequate  rest,  and  the 

continuation  of  their  education ; 

(c)  children  to  whom  permits  are 
granted  in  accordance  with  this 
Article  shall  not  be  employed  after 
midnight* 

Art.  5.  A  higher  age  or  ages  than 
those  referred  to  in  Article  2  of  this 
Convention  shall  be  fixed  by  na- 
tional laws  or  regulations  for  admis- 
sion of  young  persons  and  adolescents 
to  any  employment  which,  by  its 
nature,  or  the  circumstances  in 
which  it  is  to  be  carried  on,  is 
dangerous  to  the  life,  health  or 
morals  of  the  persons  employed  in  it. 

Art.  6.  A  higher  age  or  ages  than 
those  referred  to  in  Article  2  of  this 
Convention  shall  be  fixed  by  national 
laws  or  regulations  for  admission  of 
young  persons  and  adolescents  to 
employment  for  purposes  of  itiner- 
ant trading  in  the  streets  or  in  places 
to  which  the  public  have  access,  to 
regular  employment  at  stalls  outside 
shops  or  to  employment  in  itinerant 
occupations,  in  cases  where  the  con- 
ditions of  such  employment  require 
that  a  higher  age  should  be  fixed. 

Art.  7.  In  order  to  ensure  the  due 
enforcement  of  the  provisions  of  this 
Convention,  national  laws  or  regu- 
lations shall : 

(a)  provide  for  an  adequate  sys- 
tem of  public  inspection  and  super- 
vision ; 

(&)  provide  suitable  means  for 
facilitating  the  identification  and 
supervision  of  persons  under  a 
specified  age  engaged  in  the  em- 
ployments and  occupations  covered 
by  Article  6 ; 

(s)  provide  penalties  for  breaches 
of  the  laws  or  regulations  by  which 
effect  is  given  to  the  provisions  of 
this  Convention. 

Art.  8.  There  shall  be  included  in 
the  annual  reports  to  be  submitted 


6tablies  en  vue  de  sauvegarder  la 
sant6,  le  d6veloppement  physique  et 

la  moralitfi  des  enfants,  de  leur  as- 
surer de  bons  traitements,  un  repos 
convenable  et  la  continuation  de  leur 
instruction ; 

c)  les  enfants  autorisfis  i  travailler 
dans  les  conditions  pr6vues  au  pre- 
sent article  ne  devront  pas  travailler 
aprds  minuit. 

Art.  5*  La  legislation  nationale 
fixera  un  &ge  ou  des  %es  sup6rieurs  & 
ceux  qui  sent  mentionnds  &  1 'article 
2  de  la  prfisente  convention  pour 
radmission  des  jeunes  gens  et  adoles- 
cents &  tout  emplpi  qui,  par  sa 
nature  ou  les  conditions  clans  les- 
quelles  il  est  rempli,  est  dangereux 
pour  la  vie,  la  sant6  ou  la  moralit6 
des  personnes  qui  y  sont  affect6es. 

Art.  6.  La  legislation  nationale 
fixera  un  &ge  ou  des  %es  superieurs 
4  ceux  qui  sont  mentionntfs  &  Particle 
2  de  la  prison te  convention  pour 
radmission  des  jeunes  gens  et  adoles- 
cents aux  emplois  dans  le  commerce 
ambulant  sur  la  voie  publique  ou 
dans  les  6tablissements  et  lieux 
publics,  aux  emplois  permanents  £ 
des  <§talages  ext6rieurs,  ou  aux  em- 
plois dans  les  professions  ambulantes, 
lorsque  ces  emplois  sont  exerc(xs  dans 
des  conditions  qui  justifient  qu'un 
&ge  plus  61ev6  soit  fix6. 

Art.  7.  En  vue  d 'assurer  1 'appli- 
cation effective  des  dispositions  de  la 
pr6sente  convention,  la  legislation 
nationale: 

a)  pr^voira  un  systfeme  appropri6 
d 'inspection  et  cle  contrOle  officials; 

6)  pr6voira  des  mesures  appro- 
prides  pour  faciliter  Tidentification 
et  le  contrdle  des  personnes  au- 
dessous  d'un  &ge  d6termin6  occupies 
dans  les  emplois  et  professions  visfes 
il'article6; 

c)  6tablira  des  p6nalit6s  pour  r6~ 
primer  les  infractions  &  la  16gislation 
donnant  effet  aux  dispositions  de  la 
pr<§sente  convention. 

Art  8,  Les  rapports  annuels  pr^- 
vus  par  Particle  408  du  Trait6  de 


April  30,  X932      MINIMUM  AGE  (NON-INDUSTRIAL  EMPLOYMENT) 


35 


under  Article  408  of  the  Treaty  of 
Versailles  and  the  corresponding 
Articles  of  the  other  Treaties  of  Peace 
full  information  concerning  all  laws 
and  regulations  by  which  effect  is 
given  to  the  provisions  of  this  Con- 
vention, including: 

(a)  a  list  of  the  forms  of  em- 
ployment which  national  laws  or 
regulations  specify  to  be  light  work 
for  the  purpose  of  Article  3 ; 

(&)  a  list  of  the  forms  of  em- 
ployment for  which,  in  accordance 
with  Articles  5  and  6,  national  laws 
or  regulations  have  fixed  ages  for 
admission  higher  than  those  laid 
down  in  Article  2 ; 

(c)  full  information  concerning  the 
circumstances  in  which  exceptions  to 
the  provisions  of  Articles  2  and  3 
are  permitted  in  accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  Article  4. 

Art,  9.  The  provisions  of  Articles 
2,  3,  4,  5,  6  and  7  of  this  Convention 
shall  not  apply  to  India,  but  in 
India: 

(1)  the  employment  of  children 
under  ten  shall  be  prohibited : 

Provided  that  in  the  interests  of 
art,  science  or  education,  national 
laws  or  regulations  may,  by  per- 
mits, granted  in  individual  cases, 
allow  exceptions  to  the  above 
provision  in  order  to  enable  chil- 
dren to  appear  in  any  public  enter- 
tainment or  as  actors  or  super- 
numeraries in  the  making  of 
cinematographic  films. 

Provided  also  that  should  the 
age  for  the  admission  of  children 
to  factories  not  using  power 
which  are  not  subject  to  the 
Indian  Factories  Act  be  fixed  by 
national  laws  or  regulations  at  an 
age  exceeding  ten,  the  age  so  pre- 
scribed for  admission  to  such 
factories  shall  be  substituted  for 
the  age  of  ten  for  the  purpose  of 
this  paragraph. 

(2)  Persons      under      fourteen 
years  of  age  shall  not  be  employed 


Versailles  et  les  articles  corres- 
pondants  des  autres  Traites  de  Paix 
donneront  des  renseignements  com- 
plets  sur  la  legislation  donnant 
effet  aux  dispositions  de  la  pr6sente 
convention.  Ces  renseignements 
contiendront  notamment : 

a)  une  liste  des  genres  d'emplois 
que  la  legislation  nationale  qualifie 
de  travaux  legers  au  sens  de  I1  article 

3; 

b)  une  liste  des  genres  d'emplois 
pour    lesquels,    conformement    aux 
articles  5  et  6,  la  legislation  nationale 
a    fix6    des    <iges   d 'admission    plus 
eieves  que  ceux  etablis  par  Particle 
2; 

c)  des    renseignements    complets 
sur  les  conditions  dans  lesquelles  les 
derogations  aux  articles  2  et  3sont 
autorisees  en  vertu  de  Tarticle  4. 

Art.  9.  Les  dispositions  des  arti- 
cles 2,  3,  4,  5,  6  et  7  de  la  pr6sente 
convention  ne  s'appliqueront  pas  £ 
I'lnde.  Mais  dans  1'Inde: 

1)  L'emploi     des     enfants    de 
moins  de  dix  ans  sera  interdit. 

Toutefois,  dans  I'int6r6t  de  Tart, 
de  la  science  ou  de  Tenseignement, 
la  legislation  nationale  pourra,  au 
moyen  d'autorisations  individu- 
elles,  accorder  des  derogations  £ 
la  disposition  ci-dessus,  afin  de  per- 
mettre  &  des  enfants  de  parattre 
dans  tous  spectacles  publics  ainsi 
que  de  participer  comme  acteurs 
ou  figurants  dans  des  prises  de  vue 
cinematographiques. 

En  outre,  au  cas  oil  I'Uge  d'ad- 
mission  des  enfants  dans  les  manu- 
factures n'employant  pas  de  force 
motrice  et  qui  ne  sont  pas  regies 
par  la  loi  indienne  sur  les  manu- 
factures viendrait  &  §tre  fixe  par  la 
legislation  nationale  au-dessus  de 
dix  ans,  I'&ge  ainsi  present  pour 
Tadrnission  au  travail  dans  ces 
manufactures  sera  substitue  £ 
rage  de  dix  ans  aux  fins  de  Tap- 
plication  du  present  paragraphs. 

2)  Les  personnes  de  moins  de 
quatorze   ans    ne   pourront   £tre 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No*  307 


In  any  non-industrial  employment 
which  the  competent  authority, 
after  consultation  with  the  prin- 
cipal organisations  of  employers 
and  workers  concerned,  may  de- 
clare to  involve  danger  to  life, 
health  or  morals, 

(3)  An  age  above  ten  shall  be 
fixed  by  national  laws  or  regula- 
tions for  admission  of  young  per- 
sons and  adolescents  to  employ- 
ment  for    purposes   of   itinerant 
trading  in  the  streets  or  in  places 
to  which  the  public  have  access, 
to  regular  employment  at  stalls 
outside  shops  or  to  employment 
m  itinerant  occupations,  in  cases 
where  the  conditions  of  such  em- 
ployment require  that  a  higher 
age  should  be  fixed. 

(4)  National  laws  or  regulations 
shall  provide  for  the  due  enforce- 
ment  of  the   provisions   of   this 
Article    and    in    particular    shall 
provide  penalties  for  breaches  of 
the  laws  or  regulations  by  which 
effect  is  given  to  the  provisions 
of  this  Article. 

(5)  The    competent    authority 
shall,  after  a  period  of  five  years 
from  the  date  of  passing  of  legisla- 
tion giving  effect  to  the  provisions 
of  this   Convention,   review   the 
whole   position  with   a  view   to 
Increasing  the  minimum  age  pre- 
scribed in  this  Convention*  such 
review  to  cover  the  whole  of  the 
provisions  of  this  Article* 

Should  legislation  be  enacted  in 
India  making  attendance  at  school 
compulsory  until  the  age  of  fourteen 
this  Article  shall  cease  to  apply,  and 
Articles  2,  3,  4,  5,  6  and  7  shall 
thenceforth  be  applicable  to  India. 

Art.  10.  The  formal  ratifications 
of  this  Convention  tinder  the  condi- 
tions set  forth  in  Part  XIII  of  the 
Treaty  of  Versailles  and  in  the  cor- 
responding Parts  of  the  other  Trea- 
ties of  Peace  shall  be  communicated 
to  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
League  of  Nations  for  registration. 


occupies  fit  aucun  des  travaux  non 
industriels  que  Fautorite  comp6- 
tente,  apris  consultation  des  prin- 
cipales  organisations  d'employeum 
et  de  travailleurs  interessees,  pour- 
rait  declarer  dangereux  pour  la 
vie,  la  sante  ou  la  morality* 

3)  La  legislation  rationale  fixe- 
ra  un  §ge  sup6rieur  4  dix  ans  pour 
{'admission    des   jeunes    gens   et 
adolescents  aux  emplois  dans  le 
commerce  ambulant  sur  la  voie 
publique  ou  dans  les  etablissements 
et  lieux  publics,  aux  emplois  per- 
manents  &  des  etalages  ext6rieurs, 
ou  aux  emplois  dans  les  profes- 
sions   ambulantes,     lorsque    ces 
emplois   sont    exerc6s    dans    des 
conditions    qui    justifient    qu'un 
§ge  plus  61ey6  soit  fixe. 

4)  La  legislation  nationale  pr6- 
voira  des  mesures  pour  1'applica- 
tion  des  dispositions  du  present 
article  et,  en  particulier,  etablira 
des  p6nalit6s  pour  r6primer  les 
infractions  &  la  legislation  donnant 
effet  aux  dispositions  du  present 
article. 

5)  L'autoritecompetentedevra, 
apr&s  une  periode  de  cinq  ans  & 
compter  de  la  promulgation  des  lois 
donnant  effet  aux  dispositions  de  la 
pr^sente   convention,   r£examiner 
complement  la  situation  en  vue 
de  relever  les  iges  minima  presents 
&  la  presents  convention,  nouvel 
examen  qui  s*appliquera  &  toutes 
les  dispositions  du  present  article. 

S'il  6tait  6tabli,  dans  1'Inde,  une 
legislation  rendant  la  fr^quentation 
scolaire  obligatoire  jusqu*&  1'Sge  de 
quatorze  ane,  le  present  article  ces* 
serait  d'etre  applicable  et  les  articles 
2»  3»  4»  5>  6  et  7  deviendraient  alors 
applicables  4  1'lAde* 

Att*  xo.  Les  ratifications  offi- 
cielles  de  la  prtsente  convention  dans 
les  conditions  prevues  It  la  Partie 
XIII  du  Traite  de  Versailles  et  aux 
Parties  correspondantes  des  autres 
Trait^s  de  Paix  seront  communiquees 
au  Secretaire  general  de  la  Soci6t6 
des  Nations  et  par  lui  enregistrees. 


April  30,  1932      MINIMUM  AGE  (NON-INDUSTRIAL  EMPLOYMENT) 


37 


Art.  n.  This  Convention  shall  be 
binding  only  upon  those  Members 

whose  ratifications  have  been  regis- 
tered with  the  Secretariat. 

It  shall  come  into  force  twelve 
months  after  the  date  on  which  the 
ratifications  of  two  Members  of  the 
International  Labour  Organisation 
have  been  registered  with  the  Secre- 
tary-General. 

Thereafter,  this  Convention  shall 
come  into  force  for  any  Member 
twelve  months  after  the  date  on 
which  its  ratification  has  been  regis- 
tered* 

Art.  12,  As  soon  as  the  ratifica- 
tions of  two  Members  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labour  Organisation  have 
been  registered  with  the  Secretariat, 
the  Secretary-General  of  the  League 
of  Nations  shall  so  notify  all  the 
Members  of  the  International  La- 
bour Organisation.  He  shall  like- 
wise notify  them  of  the  registration 
of  ratifications  which  may  be  com- 
municated subsequently  by  other 
Members  of  the  Organisation. 

Art*  13*  A  Member  which  has 
ratified  this  Convention  may  de- 
nounce it  after  the  expiration  of  ten 
years  from  the  date  on  which  the 
Convention  first  comes  into  force,  by 
an  act  communicated  to  the  Secre- 
tary-General of  the  League  of  Na- 
tions for  registration.  Such  denun- 
ciation shall  not  take  effect  until  one 
year  after  the  date  on  which  it  is 
registered  with  the  Secretariat, 

Each  Member  which  has  ratified 
this  Convention  and  which  does  not, 
within  the  year  following  the  expira- 
tion of  the  period  of  ten  years 
mentioned  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph, exercise  the  right  of  denunci- 
ation provided  for  in  this  Article, 
will  be  bound  for  another  period  of 
five  years  and,  thereafter,  may 
denounce  this  Convention  at  the 
expiration  of  each  period  of  five 
years  under  the  terms  provided  for  in 
this  Article, 


Art  ii.  La  presente  convention 
ne  Hera  que  les  Membres  de  TOr- 
ganisation  Internationale  du  Travail 
dont  la  ratification  aura  ete  en- 
registr£e  au  Secretariat* 

Elle  entrera  en  vigueur  douze  mois 
apr&s  que  les  ratifications  de  deux 
Membres  auront  ete  enregistr^es 
par  le  Secretaire  general. 

Par  la  suite,  cette  convention 
entrera  en  vigueur  pour  chaque 
Membre  douze  mois  apr&s  la  date 
oti  sa  ratification  aura  ete  enregistr^e. 

Art.  12.  Aussitdt  que  les  ratifi- 
cations de  deux  Membres  de  1'Or- 
ganisation  Internationale  du  Travail 
auront  ete  enregistr6es  au  Secretariat, 
le  Secretaire  general  de  la  Societe  des 
Nations  notifiera  ce  fait  &  tous  les 
Membres  de  TOrganisation  inter- 
nationale  du  Travail.  II  leur  noti- 
fiera egalement  Tenregistrement  des 
ratifications  qui  lui  seront  ult6- 
rieurernent  communiqu^es  par  tous 
les  autres  Membres  de  TOrganisa* 
tion. 

Art.  13.  Tout  Membre  ayant 
ratifie  la  presente  convention  peut 
la  denoncer  &  Texpiration  d'une 
periode  de  dix  annees  apr&s  la  date 
de  la  mise  en  vigueur  initiale  de  la 
convention,  par  un  acte  communique 
au  Secretaire  general  de  la  Societe 
des  Nations,  et  par  lui  enregistre. 
La  denonciation  ne  prendra  effet 
qu'une  annee  apr&s  avoir  ete  enre- 
gistree  au  Secretariat. 

Tout  Membre  ayant  ratifie  la 
pr6sente  convention  qui,  dans  le 
delai  d'une  ann6e  aprds  Texpiration 
de  la  periode  de  dix  annees  men- 
tionnee  au  paragraphe  precedent,  ne 
fera  pas  usage  de  la  faculte  de  denon- 
ciation prevue  par  le  present  article 
sera  lie  pour  une  nouvelle  periode  de 
cinq  annees,  et,  par  la  suite,  pourra 
denoncer  la  presente  convention  a 
Texpiration  de  chaque  period^  de 
cinq  annees  dans  les  conditions 
prevues  au  present  article. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  307 


Art.  14,  At  the  expiration  of  each 
period  of  ten  years  after  the  coming 
into  force  of  this  Convention,  the 
(Governing  Body  of  the  International 
Labour  Office  shall  present  to  the 
General  Conference  a  report  on  the 
working  of  this  Convention  and  shall 
consider  the  desirability  of  placing 
on  the  Agenda  of  the  Conference  the 
question  of  its  revision  in  whole  or 
in  part. 

Art.  15.  Should  the  Conference 
adopt  a  new  Convention  revising 
this  Convention  in  whole  or  in  part, 
the  ratification  by  a  Member  of  the 
new  revising  Convention  shall  ipso 
jure  involve  denunciation  of  this 
"Convention  without  any  require- 
ment of  delay,  notwithstanding  the 
provisions  of  Article  13  above  if  and 
when  the  new  revising  Convention 
shall  have  come  into  force. 

As  from  the  date  of  the  coming 
into  force  of  the  new  revising  Con- 
vention, the  present  Convention 
shall  cease  to  be  open  to  ratification 
by  the  Members. 

Nevertheless,  this  Convention 
shall  remain  in  force  in  its  actual 
form  and  content  for  those  Members 
which  have  ratified  it  but  have  not 
ratified  the  revising  Convention. 

Art.  16*  The  French  and  English 
texts  of  this  Convention  shall  both 
be  authentic. 

The  foregoing  is  the  authentic 
text  of  the  Draft  Convention  duly 
adopted  by  the  General  Conference 
of  the  International  Labour  Organi- 
sation during  its  Sixteenth  Session 
which  was  held  at  Geneva  and  de- 
clared closed  the  30 th  day  of  April 
1932. 

IN  FAITH  WHEREOF  we  have  ap- 
pended our  signatures  this  fifth  day 
of  May  1932. 


Art.  14*  A  Pexpiration  de  chaque 
p^riode  de  dix  anntes  It  compter  de 
Tentr6e  en  vigueur  de  la  prfeente 
convention,  le  Conseil  d*administra«* 
tion  du  Bureau  international  du 
Travail  devra  presenter  &  la  Conf6- 
rence  g6n6rale  un  rapport  sur  Fappli- 
cation  de  la  pr6sente  convention  et 
d<§cidera  s'il  y  a  lieu  d'inscrire  £ 
1'ordre  du  jour  de  la  Conference  la 
question  de  sa  revision  totale  ou 
partielle. 

Art.  15.  Au  cas  oft  la  Conference 
gfinfirale  adopterait  une  nouvelle 
convention  portant  revision  totale  ou 
partielle  de  la  pr6sente  convention, 
la  ratification  par  un  Membre  de  la 
nouvelle  convention  portant  revision 
entrainerait  de  plcin  droit  d6noncia- 
tion  de  la  prdsente  convention  sans 
condition  de  dfilai  nonobstant  Par- 
ticle 13  ci-dessus,  sous  r6serve  que  la 
nouvelle  convention  portant  revision 
soit  entr6e  en  vigueur. 

A  partir  de  la  date  de  I'entrfie  en 
vigueur  de  la  nouvelle  convention 
portant  revision,  la  pr6sente  conven- 
tion cesserait  d'fitre  ouverte  £  la 
ratification  des  Membres. 

La  pr6sente  convention  demeure- 
rait  toutefois  en  vigueur  dans  sa 
forme  et  teneur  pour  les  Membres 
qui  1'auraient  ratifife  et  qui  ne 
ratifieraient  pas  la  nouvelle  conven- 
tion portant  revision. 

Art,  1 6*  Les  textes  fran^ais  et 
anglais  de  la  pr6sente  convention 
feront  foi  Tun  et  I'autre. 

Le  texte  qui  prtcMe  est  le  texte 
authentique  du  projet  de  convention 
dflment  adopts  par  la  Conference 
g£n6rale  de  TOrganlsation  Interna- 
tionale du  Travail  dans  sa  seizidme 
session  qui  s'est  tenue  &  Geneve  et 
qui  a  6t6  d£clar£e  close  le  30  avril 
1932. 

EN  FOI  BE  QUOI  ont  appos6  leurs 
signatures,  le  cinq  mai  1932. 


For  the  President  of  the  Conference,  Bo  HAMMARSKjdLD,  Vice-president 
The  Director  of  the  International  Labour  Office,  ALBERT  THOMAS 


May  3D,  1932  DECLARATION  BY  IRAQ  39 

No.  308 

DECLARATION  by  the  Kingdom  of  Iraq.     Signed  at  Baghdad,  May 

30,  1932. 

DECLARATION  dti  Royaume  de  PIrak.     Signee  a  Bagdad,  30  mai 

1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  The  occasion  of  this  declaration  was  the  termination  of  the  mandatory 
r%ime  in  Iraq  (see  No.  ib  xv,  ante),  and  the  request  of  the  Kingdom  of  Iraq  for  admission  to 
membership  in  the  League  of  Nations.  On  January  28,  1932,  the  Council  of  the  League  of 
Nations  adopted  a  resolution  calling  for  such  a  declaration  as  a  condition  precedent  to  the 
termination  of  the  mandate  (League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1932,  p.  474);  and  on  May 
*9»  *93^»  it  approved  the  text  of  this  declaration  (idem,  pp.  1213,  1347).  Iraq  became  a 
member  of  the  League  of  Nations  on  October  3,  1932.  Though  it  is  a  unilateral  declaration, 
it  places  Iraq  under  various  "obligations  of  international  concern  "  vis-a-vis  the  members  of 
the  League  of  Nations,  Its  language  is  largely  borrowed  from  the  various  treaties  for  the 
protection  of  minorities  (Nos.  3,  4,  5,  16,  26,  ante),  and  its  form  follows  that  of  declarations 
previously  made  by  Albania  (No*  52,  ante),  and  Lithuania  (No.  73,  ante).  For  an  explana- 
tion of  its  terms,  see  the  report  of  the  committee  set  up  by  the  Council  of  the  League  of 
Nations,  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1932,  p.  1342.  The  Council  resolution  of  May 
19,  1932  recommended  the  renunciation  of  the  capitulations  in  Iraq,  and  such  action  was 
taken  by  various  states  in  1932.  Idem,  1932,  pp.  1850  ff. 

RATIFICATIONS.  The  ratification  of  this  declaration  by  Iraq  was  deposited  with  the  Secre- 
tariat of  the  League  of  Nations,  June  29,  1932. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  Permanent  Mandates  Commission,  Minutes  of  the  Twenty-first  Session, 
League  of  Nations  Document,  C. 830. M. 4 1 1. 193 1. VI;  Minutes  of  the  Sixty-sixth  and  Sixty- 
seventh  Sessions  of  the  Council,  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal ,  1932,  pp.  471—79,  606—10, 
1212-16,  1342-50. 

A.  H.  el  Gammal,  La  fin  des  mandats  internationaux  et  I1 experience  irakienne  (Dijon:  Berni- 
gand,  1932),  182  pp.;  E.  Main,  /rag;  From  Mandate  to  Independence  (London:  Allen  and 
Unwin,  1935),  Ch.  V;  W.  H.  Ritsher,  Criteria  of  Capacity  for  Independence  (Jerusalem: 
Syrian  Orphanage  Press,  1934),  152  pp.;  A.  J.  Toynbee  (Ed.)»  "The  Admission  of  the  King- 
dom of  Iraq  to  Membership  in  the  League  of  Nations,"  Survey  of  International  Affairs,  1934 
(London:  Humphrey  Milford),  pp.  194-211;  Anon.,  "Die  allgemeinen  Voraussetzungen  fur 
die  Aufhebung  der  Mandatsordnung  in  einem  Mandatsgebiet  und  die  Beendigung  des 
Mandats  tiber  Iraq,"  4  Zeitschrift  fUr  ausldndisches  offentliches  Recht  und  Volkerrecht  (1934), 
PP-  155-9* 

Entered  into  force  June  29,  1932^ 
Text  from  League  of  Nations  Document,  A.  17.  1932.  VII. 

CHAPTER  I  CHAPITRE  I 

Protection  of  Minorities  Protection  des  minority's 

Article  I.  The  stipulations  con-  Article  i.  Les  stipulations  con- 
tained in  the  present  chapter  are  tenues  dans  le  present  chapitre 
recognised  as  fundamental  laws  of  seront  reconnues  comme  lois  fon- 
Iraq,  and  no  law,  regulation  or  offi-  damentales  en  Irak.  Aucune  loi, 

1  Not  registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations.  (July  i,  1937)- 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  308 


da!  action  shall  conflict  or  interfere 

with    these   stipulations,    nor   shall 

any  law,  regulation  or  official  action 
now  or  in  the  future  prevail  over 
them. 


Art*  2*—  i.  Full  and  complete  pro- 
tection of  life  and  liberty  will  be 
assured  to  all  inhabitants  of  Iraq 
without  distinction  of  birth,  nation- 
ality, language,  race  or  religion. 

2.  All  inhabitants  of  Iraq  will  be 
entitled  to  the  free  exercise,  whether 
public  or  private,  of  any  creed,  reli- 
gion or  belief,  whose  practices  are  not 
inconsistent  with  public  order  or 
public  morals, 

Art,  3,  Ottoman  subjects  habitu- 
ally resident  in  the  territory  of  Iraq 
on  August  6th,  1924,  shall  be  deemed 
to  have  acquired  on  that  date  Iraqi 
nationality  to  the  exclusion  of  Otto- 
man nationality  in  accordance  with 
Article  30  of  the  Lausanne  Peace 
Treaty1  and  under  the  conditions  laid 
down  in  the  Iraqi  Nationality  Law 
of  October  9th,  1924.^ 

Art,  4.— i.  All  Iraqi  nationals 
shall  be  equal  before  the  law  and 
shall  enjoy  the  same  civil  and  politi- 
cal rights  without  distinction  as  to 
race,  language  or  religion, 

2.  The  electoral  system  shall  guar- 
antee  equitable    representation    to 
racial,  religious  and  linguistic  minor- 
ities in  Iraq. 

3.  Differences  of  race,  language  or 
religion  shall  not  prejudice  any  Iraqi 
national  in  matters  relating  to  the 
enjoyment  of  civil  or  political  rights, 
as,  for  instance,  admission  to  public 
employments,    functions   and   hon- 
ours, or  the  exercise  of  professions  or 
industries. 

4.  No  restriction  will  be  imposed 
on  the  free  use  by  any  Iraqi  national 
of  any  language,  in  private  inter- 
course, in  commerce,  in  religion,  in 


aucun  rdglement  ni  aucune  action 
officielle  ne  seront  en  contradiction 
ou  en  opposition  avec  ces  stipula- 
tions, et  aucune  loi,  aucun  rdglement 
ni  aucune  action  officielle  ne  pr6- 
vaudront  centre  elles,  ni  main  tenant 
ni  4  1'avenir. 

Art.  2.— i.  II  sera  accord^  &  tous 
les  ^  habitants  de  1'Irak  pleine  et 
entidre  protection  de  leur  vie  et  de 
leur  libert^,  sans  distinction  cle 
naissance,  cle  nationality,  de  langage, 
de  race  ou  de  religion- 

2.  Tous  les  habitants  de  1*1  rak 
auront  droit  au  libre  exercice,  taut 
public  que  priv6,  de  toute  foi,  religion 
ou  croyance,  dont  la  pratique  ne  sera 
pas  incompatible  avec  1'ordre  public 
et  les  bonnes  mceurs. 

Art.  3.  Les  ressortissants  otto- 
mans <§tablis  sur  le  territoire  de  1'Irak 
&  la  date  du  6  aoflt  1924  seront  con- 
sidfir6s  comme  ayant  acquis,  i  cette 
date,  la  nationality  irakierme,  4  Tex- 
elusion  de  la  nationalitfi  ottomane, 
sur  la  base  de  Particle  30  du  Traitfi  de 
paix  de  Lausanne,1  et  dans  les  condi- 
tions pr6vues  dans  la  loi  irakienne  du 
9  octobre  1924  sur  la  nationality.2 

Art.  4.— i.  Tous  les  ressortissants 
irakiens  seront  6gaux  devant  la  loi  et 
jouirpnt  des  mfimes  droits  civils  et 
politiques  sans  distinction  de  race,  de 
langue  ou  de  religion. 

2.  Le  syst&me  Electoral  assurera 
une    representation    Equitable    aux 
minoritfis  de  race,  de  religion  ou  de 
langue  en  Irak. 

3.  La  difference  de  race,  de  langue 
ou  de  religion  ne  devra  nuire  &  aucun 
ressortissant  irakien  en  ce  qui  con- 
cerne  la  jouissance  des  droits  civils 
et^  politiques,  notamment  pour  Tad- 
mission  aux  emplois  publics,  fonc- 
tions  et  honneurs,  et  pour  Texercke 
des  diff6rentes  professions  et  indus- 
tries. 

4.  II  ne  sera  6dict6  aucune  restric- 
tion au  libre  usage  par  tous  les  res- 
sortissants   irakiens    d'une    langue 


quelconque,  soit  dans  les  relations 

1  28  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series,  p.  it.— -ED. 

2  Flournoy  and  Hudson,  Nationality  Laws,  p.  348.— En. 


May  30,  1932 


DECLARATION  BY  IRAQ 


the  Press  or  in  publications  of  any 
kind,  or  at  public  meetings. 


5.  Notwithstanding  the  establish- 
ment by  the  Iraqi  Government  of 
Arabic  as  the  official  language,  and 
notwithstanding  the  special  arrange- 
ments to  be  made  by  the  Iraqi  Gov- 
ernment, under  Article  9  of  the 
present  Declaration,  regarding  the 
use  of  the  Kurdish  and  Turkish 
languages,  adequate  facilities  will  be 
given  to  all  Iraqi  nationals  whose 
mother  tongue  is  not  the  official 
language,  for  the  use  of  their  lan- 
guage, either  orally  or  in  writing,  be- 
fore the  courts, 

Art.  5.  Iraqi  nationals  who  be- 
long to  racial,  religious  or  linguistic 
minorities  will  enjoy  the  same  treat- 
ment and  security  in  law  and  in  fact 
as  other  Iraqi  nationals.  In  par- 
ticular, they  shall  have  an  equal 
right  to  maintain,  manage  and  con- 
trol at  their  own  expense,  or  to  estab- 
lish in  the  future,  charitable,  relig- 
ious and  social  institutions,  schools 
and  other  educational  establish- 
ments, with  the  right  to  use  their 
own  language  and  to  exercise  their 
religion  freely  therein. 

Art.  6.  The  Iraqi  Government 
undertakes  to  take,  as  regards  non- 
Moslem  minorities,  in  so  far  as  con- 
cerns their  family  law  and  personal 
status,  measures  permitting  the  set- 
tlement of  these  questions  in  accord- 
ance with  the  customs  and  usage  of 
the  communities  to  which  those 
minorities  belong* 

The  Iraqi  Government  will  com- 
municate to  the  Council  of  the 
League  of  Nations  information  re- 
garding the  manner  in  which  these 
measures  have  been  executed, 

Art.  7. — i.  The  Iraqi  Government 
undertakes  to  grant  full  protection, 
facilities  and  authorisation  to  the 
churches,  synagogues,  cemeteries  and 
other  religious  establishments,  char- 
itable works  and  pious  foundations 


privies  ou  de  commerce,  soit  en 
rnati&re  de  religion,  de  presse  ou  de 
publications  de  toute  nature,  soit 
dans  les  reunions  publiques* 

5,  Nonobstant  l^tablissement  par 
le  Gouvernement  irakien  de  la  langue 
arabe  comme  langue  officielle,  et 
nonobstant  les  dispositions  sp6ciales 
que  le  Gouvernement  irakien  prendra 
en  ce  qui  concerne  Pemploi  des 
langues  kurde  et  turque,  dispositions 
pr^vues  &  Particle  9  de  la  pr^sente 
Declaration,  des  facilit6s  appropri£es 
seront  donn6es  &  tous  les  ressortis- 
sants  irakiens  de  langue  autre  que  la 
langue  officielle,  pour  Fusage  de  leur 
langue,  soit  oralement,  soit  par 
6crit,  devant  les  tribunaux. 

Art.  5.  Les  ressortissants  irakiens 
appartenant  &  des  minorit6s  de  race, 
de  religion  ou  de  langue  jouiront  du 
m^rne  traitement  et  des  m6mes 
garanties  en  droit  et  en  fait  que  les 
autres  ressortissants  irakiens »  I  Is 
auront  notamment  un  droit  6gal  £ 
maintenir,  diriger  et  contrdler  & 
leurs  frais  ou  &  cr6er  £  Tavenir  des 
institutions  chari tables ,  religieuses 
ou  spciales,  des  6coles  et  autres 
^tablissements  d Education,  avec  le 
droit  d'y  faire  librement  usage  de 
leur  propre  langue  et  d'y  exercer 
librement  leur  religion. 

Art.  6.  Le  Gouvernement  irakien 
s'engage  &  prendre  &  T6gard  des 
minorit6s  non  musulmanes,  en  ce  qui 
concerne  leur  statut  familial  et  per- 
sonnel, toutes  dispositions  permet- 
tant  de  r&gler  ces  questions  selon  le 
droit  coutumier  des  communaut6s 
auxquelles  ces  minorit^s  appartien- 
nent. 

Le  Gouvernement  irakien  enverra 
au  Conseil  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations 
des  renseignertients  sur  la  fapon  dont 
ont  6t&  ex6cut6es  ces  dispositions. 

Art.  7*— I.  Le  Gouvernement 
irakien  s'engage  &  accorder  toutes 
protection,  facilit^s  et  autprisations 
aux  &glises,  synagogues,  cimeti&res, 
autres  <§tablissements  religieux, 
ceuvres  charitables  et  fondations 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  308 


of   minority   religious   communities 
existing  in  Iraq, 

2.  Each  of  these  communities 
shall  have  the  right  of  establishing 
councils,  in  important  administra- 
tive districts,  competent  to  adminis- 
ter pious  foundations  and  charitable 
bequests.  These  councils  shall  be 
competent  to  deal  with  the  collection 
of  income  derived  therefrom,  and  the 
expenditure  thereof  in  accordance 
with  the  wishes  of  the  donor  or  with 
the  custom  in  use  among  the  com- 
munity* These  communities  shall 
also  undertake  the  supervision  of 
the  property  of  orphans,  in  accord- 
ance with  law.  The  councils  re- 
ferred to  above  shall  be  under  the 
supervision  of  the  Government. 

3,  The  Iraqi  Government  will  not 
refuse,  for  the  formation  of  new  reli- 
gious or  charitable  institutions,  any 
of  the  necessary  facilities  which  may 
be  guaranteed  to  existing  institutions 
of  that  nature. 

Art.  8,— -i.  In  the  public  educa- 
tional system  in  towns  and  districts 
in  which  are  resident  a  considerable 
proportion  of  Iraqi  nationals  whose 
mother  tongue  is  not  the  official 
language,  the  Iraqi  Government  will 
make  provision  for  adequate  facili- 
ties for  ensuring  that  in  the  primary 
schools  instruction  shall  be  given 
to  the  children  of  such  nationals 
through  the  medium  of  their  own 
language;  it  being  understood  that 
this  provision  does  not  prevent  the 
Iraqi  Government  from  making  the 
teaching  of  Arabic  obligatory  in  the 
said  schools. 

2.  In  towns  and  districts  where 
there  is  a  considerable  proportion  of 
Iraqi  nationals  belonging  to  racial, 
religious  or  linguistic  minorities, 
these  minorities  will  be  assured  an 
equitable  share  in  the  enjoyment  and 
application  of  sums  which  may  be 
provided  out  of  public  funds  under 
the  State,  municipal  or  other  budgets 
for  educational,  religious  or  chari- 
table purposes. 


pieuses  des  communautte  religieuses 
des  minoritfe  existant  en  Irak. 

2.  Toutes  ces  communauttfs  au- 
ront   le  droit  de   constituer,   dans 
les  divisions  admin istratives  impor- 
tantes,  des  conseils  qui  auront  qualit6 
pour     administrer    les     fondations 
pieuses  ainsi  que  les  legs  charitables. 
Ces  conseils  auront  qualit6  pour  per- 
cevoir  les  revenue  produits  par  ces 
biens,  pour  les  utiliser  conform6ment 
aux  voeux  du  donateur  ou  £  1 'usage 
6tabli   dans   la   communautt.    Ces 
communaut6s    devront    £galement 
veiller  sur  les  biens  des  orphelins, 
conform6ment  4  la  loL    Les  conseils 
susmentionn6s  seront  places  sous  le 
contr61e  du  Gouvernement. 

3.  Le  Gouvernement  irakien  ne  re- 
fusera,  pour  la  creation  de  nouveaux 
6tablissements  religieux  ou  charita- 
bles, aucune  des  facilit6s  n6cessaires 
qui  seront  garanties  aux  6tablisse- 
ments  de  cette  nature  d&fa  existants. 

Art.  8.— i.  En  matidre  d 'en soigne- 
ment  public,  le  Gouvernement  irakien 
accordera,  dans  les  villes  et  dis- 
tricts Q&  reside  une  proportion  con- 
sid6rable  de  ressortissants  irakiens  de 
langue  autre  que  la  langue  officielle, 
des  facilitfis  appropriates  pour  assurer 
que  instruction  dans  les  £coles 
primaires  sera  donnC4ef  dans  leur 
propre  langue,  aux  enfants  de  ces  res- 
sortissants  irakiens.  Cette  stipula- 
tion n'empMiera  pas  le  Gouverne- 
ment irakien  de  rendre  obligatoire 
1'enseignement  de  la  langue  arabe 
dans  lesdites  6coles. 

2,  Dans  les  villes  et  districts  oii 
reside  une  proportion  consid6rable  de 
ressortissants  irakiens  appar tenant 
&  des  mmorit&s  de  race,  de  religion  ou 
de  langue,  ces  minorit6s  se  verront 
assurer  une  part  6quitable  dans  le 
b6n6fice  et  Taffectation  des  sommes 
qui  pourraient  Stre  attributes  sur  les 
fonds  publics  par  le  budget  de  1'Etat, 
les  budgets  municipaux  ou  autres, 
dans  un  but  d Education,  de  religion 
ou  de  charit^. 


May  30,  1932 


DECLARATION  BY  IRAQ 


43 


Art.  9. — I,  Iraq  undertakes  that 
in  the  liwas  of  Mosul,  Arbil,  Kirkuk 
and  Sulairnaniya,  the  official  lan- 
guage, side  by  side  with  Arabic,  shall 
be  Kurdish  in  the  qadhas  in  which 
the  population  is  predominantly  of 
Kurdish  race. 

In  the  qadhas  of  Kifri  and  Kirkuk, 
however,  in  the  liwa  of  Kirkuk, 
where  a  considerable  part  of  the  pop- 
ulation is  of  Turcoman  race,  the 
official  language,  side  by  side  with 
Arabic,  shall  be  either  Kurdish  or 
Turkish. 

2.  Iraq   undertakes   that   in   the 
said  qadhas  the  officials  shall,  subject 
to    justifiable    exceptions,    have    a 
competent  knowledge  of  Kurdish  or 
Turkish  as  the  case  may  be. 

3,  Although  in  these  qadhas  the 
criterion  for  the  choice  of  officials 
will    be,    as  in    the    rest  of   Iraq, 
efficiency    and    knowledge    of    the 
language,  rather  than  race,  Iraq  un- 
dertakes that  the  officials  shall,  as 
hitherto,    be    selected,    so    far    as 
possible,  from  among  Iraqis  from  one 
or  other  of  these  qadhas. 

Art.  10.  The  stipulations  of  the 
foregoing  articles  of  this  Declaration, 
so  far  as  they  affect  persons  belong- 
ing to  racial,  religious  or  linguistic 
minorities,  are  declared  to  constitute 
obligations  of  international  concern 
and  will  be  placed  under  the  guaran- 
tee of  the  League  of  Nations.  No 
modification  will  be  made  in  them 
without  the  assent  of  a  majority  of 
the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations. 

Any  Member  of  the  League  repre- 
sented on  the  Council  shall  have  the 
right  to  bring  to  the  attention  of  the 
Council  any  infraction  or  danger  of 
infraction  of  any  of  these  stipula- 
tions, and  the  Council  may  there- 
upon take  such  measures  and  give 
such  directions  as  it  may  deem  proper 
and  effective  in  the  circumstances. 

Any  difference  of  opinion  as  to 
questions  of  law  or  fact  arising  out  of 
these  articles  between  Iraq  and  any 


Art  9. — i.  L'Irak  s'engage,  en  ce 
qui  concerne  les  liwas  de  Mossoul, 
Arbil,  Kirkuk  et  Soulairnani6,  £  ce 
que  la  langue  officielle,  &  c6t6  de 
1'arabe,  soit  le  kurde  dans  les  qadhas 
oft  la  population  pr&dominante  est  de 
race  kurde. 

Toutefois,  dans  les  qadhas  de 
Kifri  et  de  Kirkuk  du  liwa  de 
Kirkuk,  oil  une  partie  considerable 
de  la  population  est  de  race  tur- 
comane,  la  langue  officielle  sera,  £ 
c6t6  de  1'arabe,  soit  le  kurde,  soit  le 
turc. 

2.  L'Irak  prend  1'engagernent  que 
dans   lesdits   qadhas,   les   fonction- 
naires  devront,  sauf  exception  justi- 
fi<§e,  poss^der  la  langue  kurde  ou,  le 
cas  £ch<£ant,  la  langue  turque. 

3.  Bien  que  dans  lesdits  qadhas, 
le  critdre  pour  le  choix  des  fonction- 
naires  soit,  comme  dans  le  reste  de 
1'Irak,  la  capacity  et  la  connaissance 
de  la  langue  plutdt  que  la  race,  1'Irak 
s 'engage  &  ce  que  les  fonctionnaires 
soient  choisis,  comme  jusqu'&  pr6- 
sent,  autant  que  possible  parmi  les 
ressortissants  irakiens  originaires  de 
ces  qadhas. 

Art.  10.  Dans  la  mesure  oil  les 
stipulations  des  articles  precedents 
de  la  presente  Declaration  affectent 
des  personnes  appar tenant  &  des 
minorit^s  de  race,  de  religion  ou  de 
langue,  ces  stipulations  constituent 
des  obligations  d'int6r£t  interna- 
tional et  seront  plac6es  sous  la 
garantie  de  la  Societe  des  Nations. 
Elles  ne  pourront  £tre  modifies  sans 
1'assentiment  de  la  majority  du  Con- 
seil  de  la  Societe  des  Nations. 

Tout  Membre  de  la  Societe  repr6- 
sente  au  Conseil  aura  le  droit  de 
signaler  &  Tattention  du  Conseil 
toute  infraction  ou  danger  d'infrac- 
tion  £  Tune  quelconque  de  ces  obliga- 
tions, et  le  Conseil  pourra  prendre 
telles  mesures  et  donner  telles  in- 
structions qui  paraltront  appropri6es 
et  efficaces  dans  la  circonstance. 

En  cas  de  divergence  d'opinions 
sur  des  questions  de  droit  ou  de  fait 
concernant  ces  articles,  entre  1'Irak 


44 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  308 


Member  of  the  League  represented 
on  the  Council  shall  be  held  to  be  a 
dispute  of  an  international  character 
under  Article  14  of  the  Covenant  of 
the  League  of  Nations.  Any  such  dis- 
pute shall,  if  the  other  party  thereto 
demands,  be  referred  to  the  Perma- 
nent Court  of  International  Justice. 
The  decision  of  the  Permanent  Court 
shall  be  final  and  shall  have  the 
same  force  and  effect  as  an  award 
under  Article  13  of  the  Covenant. 


CHAPTER  II 
Most-favoured^nation  Clause 

Art.  ii. — i.  Subject  to  reciproc- 
ity, Iraq  undertakes  to  grant  to 
Members  of  the  League  most-fav- 
oured-nation treatment  for  a  period 
of  ten  years  from  the  date  of  its  ad- 
mission to  membership  of  the  League 
of  Nations. 

Nevertheless,  should  measures 
taken  by  any  Member  of  the  League 
of  Nations,  whether  such  measures 
are  in  force  at  the  above-mentioned 
date  or  are  taken  during  the  period 
contemplated  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph, be  of  such  a  nature  as  to  dis- 
turb to  the  detriment  of  Iraq  the 
balance  of  trade  between  Iraq  and 
the  Member  of  the  League  of  Nations 
in  question,  by  seriously  affecting 
the  chief  exports  of  Iraq,  the  latter, 
in  view  of  its  special  situation,  re- 
serves to  itself  the  right  to  request 
the  Member  of  the  League  of  Na- 
tions concerned  to  open  negotiations 
immediately  for  the  purpose  of  re- 
storing the  balance. 

Should  an  agreement  not  be 
reached  by  negotiation  within  three 
months  from  its  request,  Iraq  de- 
clares that  it  will  consider  itself  as 
freed,  w-d-w  of  the  Member  of  the 
League  in  question,  from  the  obliga- 
tion laid  down  in  the  first  sub- 
paragraph  above. 


et  Fun  quelconque  des  Mernbres  de 
la  Soci6t6  repr6sent6s  au  Conseil, 
cette  divergence  sera  consid£r£e 
comme  un  diflfcrend  ay  ant  un  carae- 
tdre  international  selon  les  termes  de 
Particle  14  du  Pacte  de  la  Socifite  des 
Nations.  Tout  diff 6rend  de  ce  gen  re 
sera,  si  Tautre  partie  le  demande, 
d$f6r6  &  la  Cour  permanente  de 
Justice  Internationale.  La  decision 
de  la  Cour  permanente  sera  sans 
appel  et  aura  la  mOme  force  et  valeur 
qu'une  decision  rendue  en  vertu  de 
1'article  13  du  Pacte. 

CHAPITRE  II 
Clause  de  la  nation  la  plus  fcworisee 

Art.  ii.— i.  L'Irak  s'engage  i  ac- 
corder,  sous  reserve  de  reciprocity 
aux  Etats  membres  de  la  Soc&(t6,  le 
traitement  de  la  nation  la  plus 
favorisfie,  pendant  une  periods  de 
dix  ans  &  compter  de  la  date  de  son 
admission  comme  Membre  de  la 
Soci6t6  des  Nations. 

Toutefois,  si  des  mesures  prises  par 
Tun  quelconque  des  Membres  de  la 
Soci6t6  des  Nations,  qu'elles  soient 
en  vigueur  &  cette  date  susmention- 
n6e  ou  qu'ellea  soient  prises  au  cours 
de  la  p£riode  vis6e  4  Talin^a  ci- 
dessus,  ^taient  de  nature  &  com** 
promettre,  au  detriment  de  1'Irak, 
r^quilibre  des  ^changes  entre  ce 
dernier  et  le  Membre  de  la  Soci6t6 
des  Nations  en  question,  en  aflfectant 
s6rieusement  les  principales  exporta- 
tions  de  1'Irak,  ce  dernier,  en  con- 
sid^ration  de  sa  situation  $p6ciale, 
se  r6serve  la  facult6  de  demander  au 
Membre  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations 
dont  il  s'agit  1'ouverture  imm6diate 
de  n^gociations  en  vue  de  r^tablir 
T6quilibre  ainsi  rompu, 

Au  cas  oii,  dans  un  d61ai  de  trois 
mois  4  dater  de  la  demande  de  Flrak, 
ces  n^gociations  n'auraient  pas 
abouti  i  un  accord,  1'Irak  d6clare 
qu'il  pourra  se  consid^rer  comme 
Iib6r6,  vis-i-vis  du  Membre  de  la 
Soci6t4  en  question,  de  I'obligation 
stipu!6e  au  premier  alin^a  ci-dessus- 


May  30,  1932 


DECLARATION  BY  IRAQ 


45 


2,  The  undertaking  contained  in 
paragraph  i  above  shall  not  apply  to 
any  advantages  which  are,  or  may  in 
the  future  be,  accorded  by  Iraq  to 
any  adjacent  country  in  order  to 
facilitate  frontier  traffic,  or  to  those 
resulting  from  a  Customs  union  con- 
cluded by  Iraq.  Nor  shall  the  under- 
taking apply  to  any  special  advan- 
tages in  Customs  matters  which 
Iraq  may  grant  to  goods  the  produce 
or  manufacture  of  Turkey  or  of  any 
country  whose  territory  was  in  1914 
wholly  included  in  the  Ottoman 
Empire  in  Asia. 


Judicial  Organisation 

Art.  12.  A  uniform  system  of 
justice  shall  be  applicable  to  all, 
Iraqis  and  foreigners  alike.  It  shall 
be  such  as  effectively  to  ensure  the 
protection  and  full  exercise  of  their 
rights  both  to  foreigners  and  to 
nationals. 

The  judicial  system  at  present  in 
force,  and  based  on  Articles  2,  3  and 
4  of  the  Agreement  between  the 
Mandatory  Power  and  Iraq,1  signed 
on  March  4th,  1931,  shall  be  main- 
tained for  a  period  of  10  years  from 
the  date  of  the  admission  of  Iraq  to 
membership  of  the  League  of  Na- 
tions. 

Appointments  to  the  posts  re* 
served  for  foreign  jurists  by  Article 
2  of  the  said  Agreement  shall  be 
made  by  the  Iraqi  Government. 
Their  holders  shall  be  foreigners,  but 
selected  without  distinction  of  na- 
tionality; they  must  be  fully  quali- 
fied.2 

International  Conventions 

Art.  13.  Iraq  considers  itself 
bound  by  all  the  international  agree- 


2.  Sont  except^s  de  Tengagement 
formul^  au  premier  alinea  ci-dessus 
les  avantages  accord^s  ou  qui  pour- 
raient  6tre  accordes  ult^rieurement 
par  Tlrak  &  un  pays  limitrophe  pour 
faciliter  le  trafic-fronti^re,  ainsi  que 
ceux  resultant  d'une  union  douani&re 
qui  pourrait  8tre  conclue  par  1'Irak. 
II  en  sera  de  m£me  en  ce  qui  conceme 
les  avantages  sp6ciaux  qu'en  mature 
douani^re,  1'Irak  pourrait  consentir 
aux  produits  naturels  ou  fabriqutes, 
originaires  de  la  Turquie  ou  d'un 
pays  quelconque  dont  le  territoire, 
en  1914,  faisait  int&gralement  partie 
de  1'Empire  ottoman  en  Asie. 

Organisation  judiciaire 

Art.  12.  Un  syst&tne  de  justice 
uniforme  sera  applicable  6galement  & 
tous  les  ressortissants  de  1'Irak  et  £ 
tous  les  Strangers.  Ce  syst&me  sera 
de  nature  &  assurer  efficacement,  tant 
aux  Strangers  qu'aux  nationaux,  la 
sauvegarde  et  le  plein  exercice  de 
leurs  droits. 

Le  syst&me  judiciaire  en  vigueur  et 
resultant  des  articles  2,  3  et  4  de 
TAccord  entre  la  Puissance  manda- 
taire  et  1'Irak,1  sign&  Ie4mars  1931, 
sera  maintenu  pour  une  p6riode  de 
dix  ann^es,  ^  compter  de  Tadmission 
de  Tlrak  coinme  Membre  de  la 
Soci6t<§  des  Nations. 

Les  postes  r6serv6s  4  des  juristes 
Strangers  en  vertu  de  1'article  2  dudit 
Accord  sont  pourvus  par  les  soins  de 
1'Irak.  Les  titulaires,  bien  qu'toan- 
gers,  sont  choisis  sans  distinction  de 
nationality  ils  doivent  r6unir  les 
qualifications  utiles.2 

Conventions  international 

Art»  13,  L'Irak  se  considfere 
comme  H6  par  tous  les  accords  et 


1 123  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series,  p.  77. — ED. 

2  On  June  15,  19556,  the  Iraqi  Government,  acting  under  Article  16  of  this  declaration,  re- 
quested the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations  to  agree  to  a  modification  of  this  provision  so 
as  to  allow  the  appointment  of  eight  foreign  jurists,  instead  of  nine  as  required  by  the  Anglo- 
Iraq  Agreement.  The  Council  gave  its  consent,  September  25,  1936.  League  of  Nations 
Official  Journal,  1936,  pp.  1161,  13?!,-*- ED. 


46 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  308 


ments  and  conventions,  both  general 

and  special ,  to  which  it  has  become  a 
party,  whether  by  its  own  action  or 
by  that  of  the  Mandatory  Power 
acting  on  its  behalf.  Subject  to  any 
right  of  denunciation  provided  for 
therein,  such  agreements  and  con- 
ventions shall  be  respected  by  Iraq 
throughout  the  period  for  which  they 
were  concluded. 


Acquired  Rights  and  Financial 
Obligations 

Art*  14.  Iraq,  taking  note  of  the 
resolution  of  the  Council  of  the 
League  of  Nations  of  September 
15th,  1925 :l 

1 .  Declares  that  all  rights  of  what- 
ever   nature    acquired    before    the 
termination  of  the  mandatory  regime 
by  individuals,  associations  or  juri- 
dical persons  shall  be  respected. 

2.  Undertakes  to  respect  and  fulfil 
all  financial  obligations  of  whatever 
nature  assumed  on  Iraq's  behalf  by 
the  Mandatory  Power  during  the 
period  of  the  Mandate, 

Freedom  of  Conscience 

Art*  15.  Sub j  ect  to  such  measures 
as  may  be  essential  for  the  main- 
tenance of  public  order  and  morality, 
Iraq  undertakes  to  ensure  and  guar- 
antee throughout  its  territory  free- 
dom of  conscience  and  worship  and 
the  free  exercise  of  the  religious, 
educational  and  medical  activities  of 
religious  missions  of  all  denomina- 
tions, whatever  the  nationality  of 
those  missions  or  of  their  members. 


Final  Clause 

Art.  16.  The  provisions  of  the 
present  chapter  constitute  obliga- 
tions of  international  concern.  Any 
Member  of  the  League  of  Nations 
may  call  the  attention  of  the  Council 
to  any  infraction  of  these  provisions. 


conventions  internationaux,  tant  g6- 
ncraux  que  sp6ciaux,  auxquels  il  est 
devenu  partie,  soit  qu'il  ait  agi 
lui-meme  directement,  soit  quo  la 
Puissance  mandataire  ait  agi  pour 
son  compte.  Sous  r6serve  du  droit 
de  d6nonciation  qu'ils  pourraient 
prfivoir,  ces  accords  et  conventions 
seront  respectfis  par  1'Irak  pendant 
toute  la  dur6e  pour  laquelle  ils  ont 
6t<§  conclus, 

Drotts  acquis  et  obligations 
financiers 

Art  14.  En  prenant  acte  de  la 
r6solution  du  Conseil  de  la  Soci6t6 
des  Nations  du  15  septembre  1925,* 
rirak: 

1.  Declare  que  les  droits  de  toute 
nature  acquis  avant  I'extinction  du 
regime  mandataire  par  des  particu- 
liers,  des  soci6t6s  ou  des  personnes 
juridiques,  seront  respectfis; 

2.  S'engage  £  respecter  et  &  ex6- 
cuter  les  obligations  financifcres  de 
toute    nature    assum£es    pour    son 
compte  par  la  Puissance  mandataire 
pendant  la  dur<§e  du  rnandat. 

LibertS  de  conscience 

Art*  15,  Sous  reserve  des  mesures 
indispensables  au  maintien  des 
bonnes  mceurs  et  de  Tordre  public, 
Flrak  s'engage  &  assurer  et  4  garan- 
tir,  sur  toute  l'6tendue  de  son  terri- 
toire,  la  libert^  de  conscience  et  le 
libre  exercice  des  cultes,  ainsi  que  les 
activities  des  missions  religieuses  de 
toutes  les  confessions  en  mature 
religieuse  scolaire  et  d'assistance 
m6dicale,  quelle  que  soit  la  nationa- 
Ht6  de  ces  missions  ou  de  leurs 
membres. 

Clause  finale 

Art.  16*  Les  dispositions  con- 
tenues  dans  le  present  chapitre  con- 
stituent des  obligations  d'int^rSt 
international.  Tout  Membre  de  la 
Soci^tfi  des  Nations  pourra  signaler  & 
Tattention  du  Conseil  les  infractions 


1  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1925,  p.  1511.  —  ED. 


June  28,  1932 

They  may  not  be  modified  except  by 
agreement  between  Iraq  and  the 
Council  of  the  League  of  Nations 
acting  by  a  majority  vote, 

Any  difference  of  opinion  which 
may  arise  between  Iraq  and  any 
Member  of  the  League  of  Nations 
represented  on  the  Council,  with  re- 
gard to  the  interpretation  or  the 
execution  of  the  said  provisions, 
shall,  by  an  application  by  such 
Member,  be  submitted  for  decision 
to  the  Permanent  Court  of  Inter- 
national Justice. 

The  undersigned,  duly  authorised, 
accepts  on  behalf  of  Iraq,  subject  to 
ratification,  the  above  provisions, 
being  the  declaration  provided  for  by 
the  resolution  of  the  Council  of  the 
League  of  Nations  of  May  igth, 
1932. 

DONE  at  Baghdad  on  this  thirtieth 
day  of  May  1932  in  a  single  copy 
which  shall  be  deposited  in  the 
archives  of  the  Secretariat  of  the 
League  of  Nations. 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


47 


&  ces  dispositions.  Ces  derni&res  ne 
pourront  §tre  modifies  que  par 
1'accord  entre  1'Irak  et  le  Conseil  de 
la  Soci6t6  des  Nations  statuant  &  la 
majorit6  des  voix. 

Toute  divergence  d'opinions  qui 
viendrait  &  s'61ever  entre  1'Irak  et 
Tun  quelconque  des  Membres  de  la 
Soci£t&  des  Nations  repr6sent6s  au 
Conseil  au  sujet  de  Tinterpr6tation 
ou  de  Tex6cution  desdites  disposi- 
tions sera,  £  la  requite  de  ce  Membre, 
soumise  pour  decision  &  la  Cour 
permanente  de  Justice  internatio- 
nale. 

Le  soussign6,  dfiment  autoris^,  ac- 
cepte,  au  nom  de  1'Irak  et  sous  r6- 
serve  de  ratification,  les  dispositions 
ci-dessus,  qui  constituent  la  d£clara- 
tion  pr6vue  par  la  resolution  du 
Conseil  de  la  Soci6t<§  des  Nations  en 
date  du  19  mai  1932. 

FAIT  &  Bagdad,  le  30  mai  1932,  en 
un  seul  exemplaire  qui  sera  d6pos6 
aux  archives  du  Secretariat  de  la 
Soci6t6  des  Nations. 


NOURY  SA'ID,  Prime  Minister  of  Iraq 


No.  309 


AGREEMENT  concerning  the  Setting-Up  of  Special  Services  at  the 
Iron  Gates.     Signed  at  Semmering,  June  28,  1932. 

ACCORD  relatif  &  la  constitution  des  services  speciaux  aux  Fortes- 
de-Fer.     Signe  an  Semmering,  28  juin  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE,  This  agreement  was  drawn  up  pursuant  to  Article  32  of  the  convention 
instituting  the  definitive  statute  of  the  Danube  of  July  23,  1921  (No.  47,  ante).  Improve- 
ment of  navigation  at  the  Iron  Gates  has  long  been  a  matter  of  international  concern.  See, 
for  example,  Article  6  of  the  Treaty  of  London  of  March  13, 1871  (61  Br,  and  For.  St.  Papers, 
p.  7);  Article  57  of  the  Treaty  of  Berlin  of  July  13,  1878  (69  idem,  p.  749) ;  Article  3  of  the 
convention  between  Austria-Hungary  and  Serbia  of  June  26/July  8,  1878  (idem,  p.  612); 
Article  350  of  the  Treaty  of  Versailles;  Articles  288-9  of  the  Treaty  of  Trianon;  Article  305 
of  the  Treaty  of  St.  Germain;  Article  233  of  the  Treaty  of  Neuilly.  See  also  the  agreements 
between  Rumania  and  Yugoslavia  of  June  19, 1930,  and  June  24, 1930  (140  League  of  Nations 
Treaty  Series,  pp.  229,  235). 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


RATIFICATIONS*  Ratifications  of  this  agreement  were  deposited  at  Vienna  by  Yugoslavia 
and  Rumania,  June  6,  1933. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY*  L  Soubbotitcht  "  Le  nouvcau  regime  jurklique  du  sect  cur  du  Danube,"  2 
Annuaire  de  I* Association  yougoslave  de  Droit  international  (1934),  pp.  77-114, 


Entered  into  force  July  i,  1933.* 

Text  and  translation  from  140  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Scries,  p.  191. 


[Translation] 

In  execution  of  the  provisions  of 
the  Convention,  signed  at  Paris  on 
July  23,  1921,  establishing  the  defin- 
itive Statute  of  the  Danube  and  in 
order  to  set  up  by  joint  agreement 
the  special  technical  and  administra- 
tive Services  provided  for  in  Article 
32  of  the  said  Convention,  for  the 
purpose  of  maintaining  and  improv- 
ing conditions  of  navigation  on  the 
Section  of  the  Danube  between 
Turnu-Severin  and  Moldova- Veche, 
known  as  the  Iron  Gates  and 
Cataracts  Section, 

Have  decided  to  conclude  an 
agreement  for  that  purpose  and  have 
appointed  as  their  Plenipotentiaries:2 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Yugo- 
slavia: Douchan  Pantitch; 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Rou- 
mania:  Constantin  Contzesco; 

The  International  Commission  of 
the  Danube,  by  unanimous  decision 
of  June  27,  1932:  Dietrich  de  Sachs- 
enfels; 

Who,  having  exchanged  their  pow- 
ers, found  in  good  and  due  form, 
have  agreed  on  the  following  pro- 
visions: 

CHAPTER  I 

SERVICES  CONSTITUTING  THE  AD- 
MINISTRATION OF  THE  IRON  GATES 
AND  CATARACTS 

Article  I,  In  execution  of  the  pro- 
visions of  Article  32  of  the  Statute 
of  the  Danube,  the  technical  and 
administrative  Services  hereinafter 
mentioned  are  hereby  constituted  in 


En  execution  dcs  dispositions  de 
la  Convention  6tablissant  le  Statut 
d6finitif  du  Danube  sign^e  &  Paris  le 
23  juillet  1921  et  pour  constitutor,  dc 
commun  accord >  les  Services  tech- 
niques et  administratifs  sptViaux 
pr^vus  &  1' article  32  de  ladite^  con- 
vention aux  fins  de  maintenir  et 
d'am61iorer  les  conditions  de  la 
navigation  dans  le  secteur  compris 
entre  Turnu-Severin  et  Moldova- 
Veche  dit  des  Portes-de-Fcr  et  des 
Cataractes, 

Ont  dficid6  de  conclure  un  accord 

It  cet  effet  et  ont  dtfsignfi  pour  leurs 
pl&nipotentialres,  savoir:2 

Sa  Majesty  le  Rol  de  Yougo- 
slavie:  Douchan  Pantitch; 

Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  de  Roumanie: 
Constantin  Contzesco; 

La  Commission  Internationale  du 
Danube,  par  decision  unanime  du 
27  juin  1932:  Dietrich  de  Sachscn- 
fels; 

Lesquels,  apr&s  avoir  £chang6 
leurs  pouvoirs  trouvfis  en  bonne  et 
due  forme,  ont  arr&tfi  les  stipula- 
tions suivantes : 

CHAPITRE  I 

SERVICES  CONSTITUANT  L^ADMINIS- 
TRATION  DES  PORTES-DE-FKR  ET 
DES  CATARACTES 

Article  x.  En  ex6cution  des  dis- 
positions de  1'article  32  du  Statut 
du  Danube,  sont  constitute  les 
Services  sp^ciaux  techniques  et  ad- 
ministratifs ci-apr&s  dfisignis,  k  1'ef- 


3  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3237,  August  8,  1933. 
2  The  titles  of  oleniootentiaries  are  omitted. — ED. 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


49 


order  to  maintain  and  Improve  con- 
ditions of  navigation  on  the  Section 
of  the  Danube  between  Turnu- 
Severin  and  Moldova- Veche  known 
as  the  Iron  Gates  and  Cataracts 
Section  ; 

(1)  A  Public  Works  Service; 

(2)  A  Navigation  Service. 
These  Services  shall  be  completed 

by: 

An  Accountancy  Office; 
A  Treasury. 

Art.  2.  This  organisation  shall 
be  called  the  "Administration  of  the 
Iron  Gates  and  Cataracts".  It  shall 
have  its  headquarters  at  Orsova, 
without  prejudice  to  any  auxiliary 
services  which  if  necessary  may  be 
established  at  other  points  of  the 
Section. 

Art.  3,  A  chief  directly  respon* 
sible  for  the  affairs  of  his  department 
shall  be  placed  at  the  head  of  each  of 
the  above-mentioned  four  organs  of 
the  Administration. 

CHAPTER  II 

COMPETENCE  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  THE 
ADMINISTRATION 

Art  4,    The  Chief  of  the  Public 

Works  Service  shall  be  in  charge  of 
the  management  or  supervision  of 
conservancy  work  and  in  general, 
the  management  or  supervision  of 
all  work  for  maintaining  and  im- 
proving the  navigability  of  the 
Section,  in  so  far  as  the  execution  of 
new  public  works  is  not  provided  for 
by  special  measures  decided  on  by 
joint  agreement  between  the  riparian 
States  of  the  Section  and  the  Com- 
mission. 

The  Chief  of  the  Public  Works 
Service  shall  further  be  in  charge  of 
the  buoyage  service  and  the  techni- 
cal management  of  the  premises  and 
floating  or  other  material  placed  at 
the  disposal  of  the  Administration. 

Art.  5.  The  Chief  of  the  Naviga- 
tion Service  shall,  subject  to  the 
provisions  of  Chapter  VII  of  the 


fet  de  maintenir  et  cTam<§liorer  les 
conditions  de  la  navigation  dans  le 
secteur  compris  entre  Turnu-Severin 
et  Moldova- Veche,  dit  des  Portes- 
de-Fer  et  des  Cataractes : 

i°  Un  Service  des  Travaux; 
2°  Un  Service  de  la  Navigation. 

Ces  services  sent  compl6t6s  par: 

Un  bureau  de  la  comptabilit6; 
Une  caisse. 

Art.  2.  Cette  organisation  est 
d6nornm6e  "Administration  des 
Portes-de-Fer  et  des  Cataractes." 
Elle  a  son  si&ge  central  &  Orsova, 
sans  prejudice  des  services  auxiliaires 
qui  pourraient  6tre,  en  cas  de  besoin, 
instali6s  sur  d'autres  points  du 
secteur. 

Art.  3.  A  la  t6te  de  chacun  des 
quatre  organes  de  I7 administration 
6num6r6s  ci-dessus,  est  plac6  un 
chef  directement  responsable  des 
affaires  de  son  ressort. 

CHAPITRE  II 

COMPETENCE  DES  ORGANES  DE 
L*  ADMINISTRATION 

Art,  4,  Le  chef  du  Service  des 
Travaux  est  charg6  de  la  direction 
ou  du  contrdle  des  travaux  ayant 
pour  but  la  conservation  des  ou- 
vrages,  ainsi  qu'en  g<§n£ral  de  la 
direction  ou  du  contrdle  de  tous  les 
travaux  destines  &  1'entretien  et  k 
ramfelioration  de  la  navigabilit6  du 
secteur,  pour  autant  que  Tex6cution 
des  nouveaux  travaux  ne  fera  pas 
I'objet  de  dispositions  sp6ciales  ar- 
r§t6es  de  concert  entre  les  Etats 
riverains  du  secteur  et  la  commis- 
sion. 

II  est,  en  outre,  charg<§  du  service 
de  balisage,  ainsi  que  de  la  gestion 
technique  des  immeubles  et  du  mat6~ 
riel  flottant  ou  autre  mis  &  la  disposi- 
tion de  P  administration. 

Art.  5.  Le  chef  du  Service  de  la 
Navigation  est  charg£,  sous  reserve 
des  dispositions  du  chapitre  VII  du 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


present  Agreement  concerning;  nav- 
igation police  services,  be  In  charge 
of  the  supervision  of  navigation  and 
the  management  of  pilotage  and  all 
other  services  intended  to  ensure  or 
facilitate  the  technical  exercise  of 
navigation. 

Art,  6.  The  Chief  of  the  Ac- 
countancy Office  shall  be  In  charge 
of  the  accounts  of  the  Administra- 
tion and  the  movement  of  funds, 

Art.  7,  f  The  Chief  of  the  Treasury 
shall  be  in  charge  of  the  receipt  of 
navigation  dues  and  other  revenue 
of  the  Administration  and  all  other 
Treasury  transactions. 

Art.  8,  The  Working  Regulations 
shall  define  in  detail  the  competence 
of  the  organs  of  the  Administration 
as  above  defined,  and  any  additional 
functions  that  may  be  given  them. 


Art,  9.  The  competence  of  the 
organs  of  the  Administration  as 
above  defined  shall  not  cover,  in 
ports  and  on  the  banks  of  the  Sec- 
tion, any  measures  concerning  the 
policing,  In  the  strict  sense  of  the 
word,  of  the  ports  and  banks,  or 
measures  concerning  the  working  of 
ports,  or  any  public  "works  of  local 
interest  not  concerning  or  affecting 
the  general  interests  of  navigation  f 
or  works  necessary  for  the  economic 
development  of  the  riparian  States  of 
the ^  Section,  as  referred  to  In  the 
Article  14,  first  paragraph,  of  the 
Statute  of  the  Danube. 

CHAPTER  III 

RELATIONS  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  THE 
ADMINISTRATION  WITH  THE  COM- 
MISSION AND  WITH  EACH  OTHER 

Art.  10.  The  Commission  shall 
decide,  on  proposals  made  by  the 
Chiefs  of  the  competent  organs  of 
the  Administration,  what  measures 
may  be  desirable  for  the  mainte- 
nance and  improvement  of  the  nav- 
igability and  for  the  administration 
of  the  Section. 


present  accord  relatives  «\  la  police 
de  la  navigation,  do  la  surveillance 
de  la  navigation,  de  la  direction  du 
service  de  pilotage  et  de  tons  autres 
services  ayant  pour  but  d  'assurer  ou 
de  faciliter  I'exercice  technique  de  la 
navigation. 

Art.  6.  Le  chef  du  Bureau  de  la 
comptabllit6  est  charg£  de  la  comp- 
tabilit6  de  Fadministration  et  clu 
mouvement  des  fonds. 

Art,  7,  Le  chef  de  la  caisse  est 
chargfi  de  I'encaissement  des  taxes 
de  navigation  et  autres  recettes  de 
radministration,  ainsi  que  cle  toutes 
autres  op6rations  de  caisse. 
^  Art,  8.  Le  R&glement  de  fono 
tionnement  fixera  les  details  de  la 
competence  des  organes  de  radmin- 
istration telle  qu'elle  est  dffinie 
ci-dessus,  ainsi  que  les  attributions 
supplementaires  qui  pourraient  leur 
fitre  confines. 

Art,  9.  La  competence  des  or- 
ganes de  radministration  telle  qu'elle 
est  dfifinie  ci-dessus,  cesse  dans  les 
ports  et  sur  les  rives  du  secteur  dfrs 
qu'il  s'agit  de  mesures  concernant  la 
police  proprement  dite  des  ports  et 
rives  ou  de  mesures  relatives  it  Fex- 
plojtation  des  ports  et,  enfin,  lors- 
qu'il  s'agit,  solt  de  travaux  <Tint6rSt 
local  ne  concernant  pas  et  n'afiectant 
pas  les  int6rSts  g6niraux  de  la  navi- 
gation, solt  des  travaux  n6cessalres 
au  d6veloppement  ^conomlque  des 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur  tels  qu'ils 
sont  vis6s  par  le  premier  alinfia  de 
Farticle  14  du  Statut  du  Danube. 

CHAMTRB  III 

RAPPORT  DES  ORGANES  DE  L'AD- 
MINISTRATION  AVEC  LA  COMMIS- 
SION ET  ENTRK  EUX 

Art.  10.    La  commission  d6cider 

sur  les  propositions  des  chefs  des 
organes  comp&ents  de  radministra- 
tion, les  mesures  utiles  &  Tentretien 
et  4  I'amfilioration  de  la  navigability 
et  d.  radministration  du  secteur. 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


The  Commission  may  also  ask  the 
said  Chiefs  to  make  proposals. 

Art.  n.  The  proposals  mentioned 
in  Article  10  above  may  be  put  into 
force  only  if  previously  approved 
by  the  Commission.  Nevertheless, 
in  matters  in  which  immediate  ac- 
tion is  necessary,  such  action  may 
be  taken,  subject  to  the  subsequent 
approval  of  the  Commission. 

Art,  12.  The  execution  of  the 
Commission's  decisions  shall  devolve 
upon  the  competent  organs  of  the 
Administration,  the  chiefs  of  which 
shall  be  directly  responsible  to  the 
Commission  for  the  affairs  of  their 
respective  departments. 

The  Commission  shall  supervise 
the  carrying  out  of  its  decisions  and 
the  working  of  the  Administration 
in  general.  For  that  purpose  the 
Commission  shall  keep  a  representa- 
tive on  the  spot  whenever  and  for 
such  time  as  it  may  deem  necessary. 

Such  representative  shall  act  as 
the  agent  through  whom  all  com- 
munications between  the  Commis- 
sion and  the  Administration  must 
be  sent. 

Art.  13,  The  Special  Regulations 
provided  for  in  Article  33  of  the 
Statute  of  the  Danube  shall  govern 
the  working  of  the  organs  of  the 
Administration,  and  their  relations 
with  the  Commission,  so  that: 

Their  chiefs  shall  keep  each  other 
acquainted  with  the  affairs  of  their 
respective  departments; 

They  shall  communicate  their 
proposals  to  each  other  before  for- 
warding them  to  the  Commission ; 

They  shall  ask  for  the  competent 
opinion  of  the  other  chiefs  concerned 
on  the  proposals  which  they  submit 
to  the  Commission. 

CHAPTER  IV 

STAFF  OF  THE  ADMINISTRATION 

Art.  14.  Without  prejudice  to 
the  provisions  of  Article  18,  the  staff 
of  the  Administration,  including  the 


Elle  peut  aussi  provoquer  des 
propositions  de  leur  part. 

Art.  ii.  Les  propositions  vis6es 
&  1' article  10  ci-dessus,  ne  peuvent 
6tre  d'ex6cution  qu'apr^s  avoir  ob- 
tenu  Tapprobation  pr6alable  de  la 
commission.  Toutefois,  pour  les  af- 
faires r^clamant  une  intervention 
immediate,  il  peut  £tre  proc6d6  It 
celle-ci,  sous  reserve  d 'approbation 
ult6rieure  de  la  commission. 

Art.  12.  L 'execution  des  decisions 
de  la  commission  incombe  aux  or- 
ganes  comp^tents  de  1'administra- 
tion  dont  les  chefs  sont  directement 
responsables  devant  la  commission, 
chacun  pour  les  affaires  de  son 
ressort. 

La  commission  contrdle  Tex6cu- 
tion  de  ses  decisions,  ainsi  que,  en 
g6n6ral,  le  fonctionnement  de  I1  ad- 
ministration. A  cet  effet,  elle  main- 
tient  sur  place  quand  et  aussi 
longtemps  qu'elle  le  jugera  n6ces~ 
saire  un  repr£sentant. 

Ce  repr^sentant  sert  obligatoire- 
rnent  d'agent  de  transmission  entre 
la  commission  et  1' administration. 


Art.  13.  Le  r&glement  special 
pr6vu  par  Tarticle  33  du  Statut  du 
Danube  r£glera  le  fonctionnement 
des  organ es  de  Tadministration,  ainsi 
que  les  rapports  avec  la  commission, 
de  f agon : 

Que  leurs  chefs  se  tiennent  mutuel- 
lement  au  courant  des  affaires  de 
leurs  ressorts  respectif s ; 

Qu'ils  se  communiquent  leurs 
propositions  avant  de  les  adresser  & 
la  commission ; 

Qu'ils  provoquent  1'avis  comp<§- 
tent  des  autres  chefs  int6ress6s  pour 
les  propositions  qu'ils  soumettent  & 
la  commission. 

CHAPITRE  IV 

PERSONNEL  DE  L' ADMINISTRATION 

Art.  14.  Sans  prejudice  des  dis- 
positions de  1'article  18,  le  personnel 
de  Tadrninistration,  y  compris  le 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  309 


permanent  staff  of  workshops,  build- 
ing yards  and  other  similar  technical 
establishments,  shall  be  supplied 
and  appointed  by  the  two  riparian 
States  of  the  Section,  so  that  within 
these  services  the  officials  appointed 
by  each  of  them  are  equal  in  number 
and  equal  in  the  importance  of  the 
posts  which  they  hold. 

It  is  understood,  however,  that 
should  new  posts  be  created  or 
existing  posts  be  abolished  on  ac- 
count of  the  requirements  of  the 
service,  the  Commission  shall  see 
that  in  the  application  of  the  said 
measures  the  principle  of  equality  as 
between  the  two  riparian  States  of 
the  Section  shall  only  temporarily  be 
disregarded. 

The  chiefs  of  the  Works  and 
Navigation  Services  shall  be  placed 
on  a  footing  of  complete  equality  in 
respect  of  their  rank  and  financial 
position. 

The  same  shall  apply  to  the  Chief 
of  the  Accountancy  Office  and  the 
Chief  of  the  Treasury. 

Art.  15.  The  Commission  shall 
arrange  the  composition  of  the 
permanent  staff.  It  shall  fix  the 
salaries  of  the  said  staff  and  shall 
determine  either,  on  the  basis  of 
their  length  of  service  with  the  Iron 
Gates  Administration,  the  lump 
sums  to  be  given  to  employees  leav- 
ing the  service  of  that  Administra- 
tion at  the  end  of  a  minimum  number 
of  years  of  service  or  the  procedure 
by  which  certain  categories  of  the 
staff  could  be  insured  with  a  pensions 
fund, 

Art  1 6.  The  appointment  by 
each  of  the  two  riparian  States  of 
the  Section  of  the  chiefs  appointed 
by  it  as  enumerated  in  Article  14 
above  shall  be  subject  to  previous 
approval  by  the  Commission. 

Art.  17.  When  choosing  the  hold- 
ers of  the  various  posts  on  the  per- 
manent staff  of  the  Administration, 
the  Governments  of  the  two  States 
shall  take  account  solely  of  the  per- 


personnel  permanent  des  ateliers, 
chantiers  de  construction  ou  autres 
installations  techniques  semblables, 
est  fourni  et  nomm6  par  les  deux 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur,  de  fa^on 
que,  dans  les  cadres  de  ces  services, 
les  agents  nomm6s  par  chacun  d*eux 
soient  6gaux  en  nombre  et  quant  *\ 
1'importance  des  emplois  qu'ils  oc- 
cupent. 

II  est  toutefois  entendu  qu'en  cas 
de  cr6ation  ou  de  suppression  de 
postes  n6cessit6es  par  les  besoins  du 
service,  la  commission  veillera  k  ce 
que,  dans  son  application,  le  principe 
d'6galit6  entre  les  deux  Etats  rive- 
rains du  secteur  ne  souffre  que  des 
6carts  temporaires. 


Les  chefs  des  Services  des  Travatix 
et  de  la  Navigation  spnt  mis,  quant 
&  leur  grade  et  situation  budgStaire, 
sur  un  pied  de  parfaite  6galit6. 

II  en  est  de  m^me  en  ce  qui  con- 
cerne  le  chef  du  Bureau  de  la 
comptabilitd  et  le  chef  de  la  caisse. 

Art.  15.  La  commission  fitablit 
le  cadre  du  personnel  Bile  fixe  la 
retribution  dudit  personnel  et  d6ter- 
mine,  soit  en  raison  de  leur  temps  de 
service  prfes  de  F Administration  des 
Portes-de-Fer  les  sommes  forfaitaires 
&  allouer  aux  employes  quittant  le 
service  de  cette  administration  au 
bout  d'un  nornbre  minimum  d'an* 
n^es  de  service,  soit  les  modalit6s  par 
lesquelles  certaines  categories  de 
personnel  pourraient  6ventuellement 
6tre  assumes  aupr^s  d'une  caisse  de 
retraite. 

Art*  1 6.  La  nomination  par  cha- 
cun des  deux  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur  des  chefs  fournis  par  lui, 
<§num6r^s  &  1'article  14  ci-dessue,  est 
soumise  £  Tagr^ment  pr6alable  de  la 
commission. 

Art.  17*  En  proc6dant  au  choix 
des  titulaires  des  diff^rents  postes 
inscrits  au  cadre  du  personnel  de 
radministration,  les  gouvernements 
des  deux  Etats  se  guideront  unique- 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


53 


sonal  capacity  of  the  candidates,  en- 
suring them  at  the  same  time  ail 
possible  stability  in  their  duties  free 

from  any  influences  unconnected 
with  navigation* 

Once  appointed  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  either  of  the  riparian  States 
of  the  Section,  all  officials  without 
exception  belonging  to  the  Services 
are  placed  exclusively  at  the  disposal 
of  the  Administration,  and  shall  be 
free,  in  respect  of  the  exercise  of  their 
duties  under  the  Administration, 
from  any  interference,  either  direct 
or  indirect,  from  the  territorial 
authorities  of  the  riparian  States  of 
the  Section. 

The  right  to  dismiss  such  employ- 
ees shall  be  vested  in  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  riparian  State  of  the 
Section  which  has  appointed  them. 
Dismissal  shall  be  decided  upon  by 
the  Government,  either  on  its  own 
initiative  or  in  response  to  a  reasoned 
request  submitted  by  the  Commis- 
sion, if  necessary  after  enquiry.  In 
the  first  case  the  Commission  shall  be 
previously  notified  of  the  reason  for 
dismissal. 

Art.  1 8.  Pilots  on  probation,  and 
pilots  belonging  to  the  official  pilot- 
age service,  arid  the  chief  pilot,  shall 
form  part  of  the  staff  of  the  Ad- 
ministration. 

The  post  of  chief  pilot  shall  be 
awarded  by  the  Commission,  after 
having  examined  the  reasoned  pro- 
posals of  the  Administration,  without 
distinction  being  made  on  the  ground 
of  nationality,  to  the  best  qualified 
candidate,  who  shall  be  chosen  on  the 
result  of  a  competition  open  both  to 
official  and  private  pilots  and  to 
river  and  maritime  navigators,  pref- 
erence being  given  as  between  can- 
didates with  equal  qualifications,  to 
pilots  belonging  to  the  official  pilot- 
age service,  and  among  them  to  the 
senior  candidate. 

The  documents  appointing  such 
officials  shall  be  an  employment  con- 
tract for  pilots  on  probation,  a  pilot's 


merit  d'apr&s  la  capacite  personnelle 
des  candidats,  en  leur  assurant  en 
mgme  temps,  dans  toute  la  rnesure 
du  possible,  une  stability  de  fonc- 
tions  &  1'abri  de  toute  influence 
etrang&re  &  la  navigation. 

Une  fois  nommes  par  le  gouverne- 
ment  de  Tun  ou  de  Fautre  des  deux 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur,  tous  les 
agents  sans  exception,  composant 
les  services,  sont  exclusivement  mis 
&  la  disposition  de  radrninistration 
et  soustraits,  en  ce  qui  concerne 
Fexercice  de  leurs  fonctions  auprfes 
d'elle,  &  toute  inference,  soit  directe, 
soit  indirecte,  de  la  part  des  auto- 
rites  territoriales  des  Etats  riverains 
du  secteur. 

Le  droit  de  revocation  de  ces 
agents  appartient  au  gouvernement 
de  1'Etat  riverain  du  secteur  qui  les 
a  nommes.  La  revocation  est  pro- 
nonc6e  par  le  gouvernement,  soit  de 
sa  propre  initiative,  soit  sur  la  de- 
mande  motiv^e  de  la  commission, 
formulae,  en  cas  de  besoin,  apr£s 
enqugte.  Dans  le  premier  cas,  la 
commission  est  pr6alablement  in- 
formee  du  motif  de  la  revocation. 

Art,  18.  Les  ei&ves-pilotes  et  les 
pilotes,  pour  autant  qu'ils  appartien- 
nent  au  corps  officiel  de  pilotage, 
ainsi  que  le  chef-pilote,  font  partie 
du  personnel  de  1'administration. 

L'emploi  de  chef-pilote  est  at- 
tribue  par  la  commission,  apr£s 
examen  des  propositions  rnotiv6es 
formuiees  par  T administration,  sans 
distinction  de  nationality,  au  candi- 
dat  le  mieux  qualifie  choisi  par  voie 
de  concours,  ouvert  en  m£me  temps 
qu'aux  pilotes  officiels,  aux  pilotes 
particuliers  et  aux  navigateurs  flu- 
viaux  et  maritimes,  une  preference 
etant  accordee,  &  qualifications 
egales,  aux  pilotes  du  corps  officiel 
de  pilotage,  et,  parmi  ces  derniers, 
aux  plus  anciens. 

Les  certificats  d 'engagement  pour 
les  ei&ves-pilotes,  le  brevet  pour  les 
pilotes,  la  lettre  de  service  pour  le 


54 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  309 


certificate  for  pilots  and  a  letter  of 
appointment  for  the  chief  pilot,  such 
documents  being  issued  by  the  Ad- 
ministration under  the  conditions 
laid  down  by  the  Working  Regula- 
tions referred  to  in  Article  13  above* 
Art,  19.  The  Working  Regula- 
tions shall  lay  down  in  detail  the 
qualifications  to  be  required  from 
candidates  for  the  examination  for 
appointment  to  posts  of  pilots  on 
probation,  to  be  promoted  later  to 
posts  of  certificated  pilots. 

Persons  of  any  nationality  shall  be 
eligible  for  appointment  as  pilots  on 
probation  and  certified  pilots.  Never- 
theless the  recruiting  of  pilots  on  pro- 
bation shall  be  so  regulated  that  as 
far  as  possible  half  the  number  of 
posts  of  pilots,  account  being  taken 
of  the  post  of  chief  pilot,  shall  be  re- 
served equally  for  nationals  of  each 
of  the  two  riparian  States  of  the 
Section. 

Ignorance  of  the  official  languages 
of  the  Administration  shall  not  in- 
validate any  person  for  admission  to 
the  examination  either  for  the  post 
of  pilot  on  probation  or  to  test  his 
capacity  as  a  pilot.  No  candidate 
applying  for  admission  to  the  exam- 
ination for  pilot  on  probation  and 
complying  with  the  conditions  laid 
down  by  the  Working  Regulations 
may  be  debarred  from  taking  the 
said  examination  unless  a  decision  to 
the  contrary  be  taken  by  the 
Commission. 

The  Working  Regulations  shall  lay 
down  the  penalties  applicable  for 
neglect  of  the  duties  of  pilots  belong- 
ing to  the  official  pilotage  service  and 
shall  also  determine  in  what  circum- 
stances a  pilot's  certificate  may  be 
withdrawn. 

A  representative  of  the  Commis- 
sion shall  be  present  at  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  examining  committees* 

Art.  20*  Subject  to  the  conditions 
laid  down  below,  shipowners  shall  be 
allowed  the  option  of  having  their 
vessels  piloted  by  private  pilots  in 


chef-pilote,   d61ivr£s  par  radminis- 

tration  dans  les  conditions  pr&vues 
par  le  R&glement  de  fonctionnement 
dont  11  est  fait  mention  &  1'article 
13  ci-dessus,  constitueront  Tacte  de 
la  nomination  de  ces  agents. 

Art  19*  Le  R&glernent  de  fonc- 
tionnement fixera,  dans  leurs  d6- 
tails,  les  conditions  que  doivent 
remplir  les  candidats  pour  fitre  ad- 
mis,  par  voie  de  concours,  aux  postes 
d'616ves-pilotes  pour  6tre  promus 
ensuite  aux  postes  de  pilotes  bre- 
vet6s. 

Les  61&ves-pilotes  et  pilotes  seront 
choisis  parmi  toutes  les  nationality, 
Toutefois,  le  recrutement  des  616ves- 
pilot.es  devra  6tre  r£g!6  de  fagon  que, 
autant  que  possible,  la  moiti&  du 
nombre  des  postes  de  pilotes,  compte 
tenu  du  poste  de  chef-pilote,  soit 
r6serv6e  &  parts  figales  aux  ressortis- 
sants  des  deux  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur. 

L'  ignorance  des  langues  officielles 
de  1' administration  ne  saurait  con- 
stituer  une  raison  de  refus,  soit  au 
concours  au  poste  d'£16ve-pilote> 
soit  k  r admission  It  Texamen  de 
capacit6  de  pilote.  Aucun  candidat 
se  pr6sentant  au  concours  d'6I£ve- 
pilote  et  remplissant  les  conditions 
Stabiles  par  le  R&glement  de  fonc- 
tionnement ne  pcut  en  gtre  exclu, 
sauf  decision  contraire  de  la  com- 
mission. 


Ce  r&g!ement  d6terminera  les  sanc- 
tions auxquelles  donnera  lieu  rjnob- 
servation  des  obligations  des  pilotes 
appartenant  au  corps  officiel  de 
pilotage,  ainsi  que  les  conditions  du 
retrait  de  leur  brevet. 

Les  operations  des  comitfe 
d'examen  auront  lieu  en  presence 
d'un  repr6sentant  de  la  commission. 

Art*  20*  Dans  les  conditions  fix- 
6es  ci-dessous,  les  armateurs  auront 
la  facult6  de  faire  piloter  leurs 
bateaux  par  des  pilotes  particuliers 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


55 


their  pay.  Such  pilots  shall  be  al- 
lowed to  pilot  only  the  vessels  of  the 
undertaking  or  group  of  undertak- 
ings by  which  they  are  employed. 

Candidates  for  the  post  of  private 
pilot  must  show  that  they  have  the 
good  character  and  physical  fitness 
and  the  qualifications  required  of 
official  pilots. 

The  Working  Regulations  shall 
prescribe  by  what  procedure  the  Ad- 
ministration shall  issue  the  certificate 
for  a  private  pilot  to  persons  having 
the  necessary  qualifications. 

The  Regulations  shall  state  the 
duties  of  private  pilots  towards  the 
Administration  and  the  penalties  to 
which  they  are  liable  for  neglect  of 
such  duties,  and  also  the  circum- 
stances in  which  their  certificate  may 
be  withdrawn. 

Once  they  have  received  their  cer- 
tificate, private  pilots  shall  receive 
from  the  Administration  all  facilities 
and  all  information  necessary  for  the 
exercise  of  pilotage  in  the  Iron  Gates 
and  Cataracts  Section. 

Art.  21.  The  Chiefs  of  the  Navi- 
gation Service,  the  Public  Works 
Service,  the  Accountancy  Office  and 
the  Treasury  shall,  when  entering 
their  service,  give  in  writing,  in  the 
terms  of  Form  I  hereto  annexed,  an 
undertaking  on  their  honour  to  carry 
out  their  duties  in  accordance  with 
the  decisions  of  the  Commission  and 
in  a  spirit  of  strict  impartiality. 

The  Commission  hereby  entitles 
each  of  the  Delegates  of  the  riparian 
States  of  the  Section  to  receive  and 
transmit  to  the  Commission  the 
undertakings  of  such  of  its  officials  as 
his  Government  shall  appoint. 

The  same  undertaking  shall  be 
given  by  all  officials.  Each  of  the 
chiefs  mentioned  in  the  first  para- 
graph of  the  present  Article  shall  be 
empowered  to  receive,  in  the  terms 
laid  down  in  Form  II,  hereto  an- 
nexed, an  undertaking  from  the  offi- 
cials placed  under  his  orders  3-nd  to 
transmit  it  to  the  Commission. 


&  leurs  gages.  Ces  pilotes  ne  seront 
admis  qu'&  piloter  les  bateaux  de 
Tentreprise  ou  de  groupe  d'entre- 
prises  dont  ils  sont  les  employes. 

Les  candidats  &  1'emploi  de  pilotes 
particuliers  doivent  pr6senter  les 
garanties  morales  et  physiques  et 
ppss^der  les  capacitfe  exig6es  des 
pilotes  officiels. 

Le  R&glement  de  fonctionnement 
fixera  les  modalit6s  d'apr^s  lesquelles 
Tadministration  d<§livrera  le  brevet 
de  pilote  particulier  aux  personnes 
poss&Iant  les  qualifications  n6ces- 
saires. 

Ce  r&glement  d^terminera  les  ob- 
ligationg  auxquelles  sont  soumis  les 
pilotes  particuliers  &  regard  de 
P  administration  et  les  sanctions  aux- 
quelles donnera  lieu  Finobservation 
de  ces  obligations,  ainsi  que  les 
conditions  du  retrait  de  leur  brevet, 

Une  fois  brevet6s,  les  pilotes 
particuliers  obtiendront  de  1'admin- 
istration  toutes  facilit6s  et  tous 
renseignements  n^cessaires  £  1'exer- 
cice  du  pilotage  dans  le  secteur  des 
Portes-de-Fer  et  des  Cataractes. 

Art.  21.  Les  chefs  du  Service  de 
la  Navigation,  du  Service  des  Tra- 
vaux,  du  Bureau  de  la  comptabilit6  et 
de  la  caisse  prennent  par  6crit,  lors 
de  leur  entree  en  service  et  dans  les 
termes  du  formulaire  I  ci-annex6, 
1'engagement  d'honneur  d'accomplir 
leurs  fonctions  conform^ment  aux 
decisions  de  la  commission  et  dans 
un  esprit  de  stricte  impartiality 

La  commission  donne  mandat  £ 
chacun  des  d£16gu6s  des  pays  rive- 
rains du  secteur  de  recevoir  et  de  lui 
transmettre  1'engagement  de  ceux  de 
ses  agents  que  son  gouvernement 
aura  nomm£s. 

Le  mgme  engagement  d'honneur 
est  pris  par  tous  les  employes. 
Chacun  des  chefs  mentionn6s  au 
premier  alin6a  du  present  article  a 
pouvoir  pour  recevoir,  dans  les  termes 
du  formulaire  II  ci~annex6, 1'engage- 
ment des  employ6s  places  sous  ses 
ordres  et  pour  le  transmettre  &  la 
commission. 


56 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


Art.  12,  Order  and  discipline 
within  the  Administration  shall  be 
maintained  in  accordance  with  the 
Working  Regulations  provided  for  In 
Article  13, 

Art.  23*  During  his  service  no 
official  shall  by  reason  of  his  official 
duties  be  exempt  from  the  military 
obligations  Imposed  by  the  laws  of 
his  country. 

Art.  24.  In  so  far  as  its  duties 
permit,  the  staff  of  the  Administra- 
tion may  reside  on  either  bank  of  the 
Section. 

Nevertheless,  save  in  the  case  of 
service  requirements,  of  which  the 
Commission  shall  be  sole  judge,  this 
privilege  shall  not  be  granted  to 
officials  carrying  out  their  duties  in 
the  territory  of  the  State  of  which 
they  are  nationals. 

CHAPTER  V 

FLANS  AND  EXECUTION  OF  WORKS 

Art.  25.  The  study  of  the  hydro- 
logical  regime  of  the  Section  shall  be 
carried  out  by  the  Administration 
without  prejudice  to  the  functions  of 
the  national  hydraulic  services. 

Information  collected  from  both 
sides  shall  be  exchanged  between  the 
Administration  and  the  competent 
authorities  of  the  riparian  States  of 
the  Section. 

The  Working  Regulations  shall 
determine  by  what  procedure  this 
exchange  shall  take  place. 

Art.  26,  The  Administration 
shall  be  responsible  for  the  technical 
study  and  the  preparation  of  schemes 
of  work  for  maintenance  and  current 
work  for  the  improvement  of  the 
navigability  of  the  Section. 

The  technical  study  and  the  prep- 
aration of  schemes  of  large-scale 
improvement  work  for  the  purpose 
of  modifying  or  perfecting  the  pres- 
ent conservancy  system  of  the  Sec- 
tion, where  such  schemes  require  a 
fresh  capital  outlay,  may  be  under- 


Art  22.  L'ordre  et  la  discipline 
de  Fadministration  serpnt  mamtenus 
conform&nent  aux  dispositions  du 
Reglenient  de  fonctionnement  pr6vu 
&  Farticle  13. 

Art  23.  Pendant  la  dur6e  de  son 
service,  aucun  employ^  n'est,  du  fait 
de  ses  fonctions,  exempt^  des  obli- 
gations militaires  imposfies  par  les 
lois  de  son  pays. 

Art.  24,  Autant  que  ses  fonctions 
le  permettent,  le  personnel  de  Fad- 
ministration  a  la  faculty  de  rfisider 
sur  Fune  ou  sur  Fautre  des  deux  rives 
du  secteur. 

Sauf  le  cas  de  n6cessit6  de  service 
dont  la  commission  sera  seule  juge, 
ne  pourront  cependant  se  pr6valoir 
de  cette  facult6  les  employes  exer^ant 
leurs  fonctions  sur  le  tcrritoire  de 
FEtat  dont  ils  sont  ressortissants. 


CHAPITRE  V 

ETUDES— PROJETS— -EXECUTION 

DBS  TRAVAUX 

Art,  25,  L'6tude  du  regime  hy- 
drologique  du  secteur  incombe  & 
lfadministration,  sans  prejudice  des 
attributions  des  services  hydrau- 
liques  natlonaux. 

Les  donntes  recueillies  de  part  et 
d'autre  sont  mutuellement  6chang£es 
entre  Fadministration  et  les  autorit6s 
competences  des  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur. 

Le  R^glement  de  fonctionnement 
d^terminera  les  modalit£s  de  cet 
^change. 

Art  26*  L'^tude  technique  et 
F6tablissement  des  projets  de  tra* 
vaux  d'entretien  et  des  travaux 
courants  d 'amelioration  de  la  navi- 
gabilit^  du  secteur  incombent  & 
Fadministration. 

L'6tude  technique  et  l*6tablisse- 
ment  des  projets  de  grands  travaux 
d'am^lioration  ayant  pour  but  la 
modification  ou  le  perfectionnement 
du  syst&me  actuel  d'amfinagernent 
du  secteur  et  n6cessitant  un  apport 
de  nouveaux  capitaux  peuvent  6tre 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


57 


taken  either  by  the  two  riparian 
States  of  the  Section,  or  by  the  Ad- 
ministration, or  on  the  initiative  of 
the  Commission.  Studies  under- 
taken on  the  initiative  of  the  Com- 
mission or  by  persons  not  belonging 
to  the  Administration  may  be  carried 
out  on  the  spot,  subject  to  the  ob- 
servance of  the  general  police  regu- 
lations and  of  special  provisions 
affecting  the  security  of  the  countries 
concerned. 

Schemes  prepared  by  the  riparian 
States  of  the  Section  under  the  pre- 
vious paragraph,  including  plans, 
estimates  and  all  other  details  con- 
nected with  the  technical  and  finan- 
cial procedure  for  their  execution, 
shall  be  jointly  submitted  by  the 
two  riparian  States  of  the  Section  for 
approval  by  the  Commission. 

Should  an  agreement  between  the 
riparian  States  of  the  Section  for  the 
submission  of  joint  proposals  not  be 
reached,  each  State  may  submit  a 
separate  scheme.  In  such  cases  the 
Commission,  before  taking  a  deci- 
sion, should  ask  the  opinion  of  the 
other  riparian  State  of  the  Section. 

The  Commission  shall  ask  the 
opinion  of  the  two  riparian  States  of 
the  Section  in  the  case  of  public 
works  schemes  not  emanating  from 
those  States.  In  all  its  decisions 
concerning  public  works  the  Com- 
mission shall  take  into  account  the 
technical,  economic  and  financial 
interests  of  the  two  riparian  States 
of  the  Section. 

Art*  27.  In  cases  in  which,  for  the 
purpose  of  carrying  out  new  public 
works  intended  either  to  complete  or 
to  modify  the  present  system  of 
public  works,  it  is  necessary  to  make 
use  of  portions  of  the  territory  of 
either  or  both  of  the  riparian  States 
of  the  Section,  the  Commission  shall 
reach  agreement  with  the  State  con- 
cerned, or  with  both  States,  as  the 
case  may  be,  on  the  conditions  under 
which  this  territory  will  be  so  utilised. 

Art.  28,  The  execution  of  the 
maintenance  and  current  iniprove- 


entrepris,  soit  par  les  deux  Etats 
riverains  du  secteur,  soit  par  Fad- 
ministration,  solt  enfin  sur  Finitia- 
tive  de  la  commission.  Les  6tudes 
entreprises  sur  Finitiative  de  la 
commission  par  des  personnes  n'ap- 
partenant  pas  £  F  administration,  ne 
peuvent  6tre  poursurvies  sur  place 
que  sous  reserve  de  F  observation  des 
lois  de  police  g6n6rale  et  des  disposi- 
tions sp6ciales  int£ressant  la  s<§curit6 
des  pays. 

Les  pro  jets  6tablis  par  les  Etats 
riverains  du  secteur,  conform6ment 
&  Falin6a  pr6c6dant,  comprenant 
plans,  devis  et  tous  autres  details 
relatifs  aux  modalit6s  techniques  et 
financi&res  de  leur  execution,  sont 
soumis  en  commun  par  les  deux 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur  &  V ap- 
probation de  la  commission. 

Dans  le  cas  oft  un  accord  ne  s'6ta- 
blirait  pas  entre  les  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur  pour  presenter  des  proposi- 
tions communes,  chacun  d'eux  pour- 
rait  en  presenter  s6par6ment.  Dans 
ce  cas,  la  commission,  avant  de 
statuer,  provoquerait  Favis  de  Fautre 
Etat  riverain  du  secteur. 

La  commission  provoque  1'avis 
des  deux  Etats  riverains  du  secteur 
s'il  s'agit  de  projets  de  travaux 
n'&manant  pas  d'eux.  Dans  toutes 
ses  decisions  relatives  aux  travaux, 
la  commission  tiendra  compte  des 
int6r£ts  techniques,  6conomiques  et 
financiers  des  deux  Etats  riverains 
du  secteur. 

Art.  27.  Lorsque  pour  des  tra- 
vaux neufs  destines,  soit  £  computer 
soit  £  modifier  le  syst£me  technique 
actuel  des  travaux,  il  est  n^cessaire 
d'utiliser  des  portions  du  territoire 
de  Fun  ou  de  Fautre  des  deux  Etats 
riverains  du  secteur  ou  des  deux,  la 
commission  s'entend  avec  FEtat 
int£ress6  ou  avec  les  deux  sur  les 
conditions  dans  lesquelles  s'effec- 
tuera  cette  utilisation  de  territoire. 

Art.  28.  L 'execution  des  travaux 
d'entretien  et  des  travaux  courants 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


men!  works  referred  to  in  Article  26, 
paragraph  i»  above,  shall  devolve 
upon  the  Administration,  Should 
the  Administration  not  be  able  to 
carry  out  such  work,  the  Commis- 
sion may  make  other  arrangements. 
The  execution  shall  then  be  en- 
trusted to  the  riparian  States  of  the 
Section  >  jointly  or  separately  as  cir- 
cumstances may  require,  unless  the 
terms  they  offer  be  less  advantageous 
than  any  that  may  be  offered  from 
other  quarters, 

In  the  case  of  large-scale  improve- 
ment works,  as  provided  for  in 
Article  26,  paragraph  2,  the  Com- 
mission shall  decide  in  each  indi- 
vidual case  by  whom  and  how  such 
work  shall  be  carried  out.  Never- 
theless it  is  hereby  understood  that: 

(1)  The  two  riparian  States  of  the 
Section  shall  have  right  of  priority 
should  they  desire  to  undertake  such 
work; 

(2)  In  such  cases  a  special  agree- 
ment shall  be  concluded  between 
them  and  the  Commission  stipulat- 
ing the  material  and  financial  condi- 
tions for  the  execution  of  the  work, 
including  the  procedure  by  which 
exemption  from  Customs  duties  may 
be  granted; 

(3)  Neither  of  the  riparian  States 
of  the  Section,  nor  any  other  State, 
may  be  entrusted  with  the  execution 
of  such  work  without  the  assent  of 
the  State  in  whose  territory  the  work 
is  to  be  carried  out* 

Art.  29.  The  gangs  of  workmen 
employed  on  hydraulic  or  other  work 
shall,  unless  otherwise  specially 
agreed  between  the  Governments  of 
the  two  riparian  States  of  the  Sec- 
tion, be  recruited  In  accordance  with 
the  laws  in  force  in  the  State  in  whose 
territory  the  work  in  question  Is 
carried  out. 

Nevertheless,  if  such  work  is 
carried  out  on  the  river,  simultane- 
ously in  the  territory  of  the  two 
riparian  States  of  the  Section,  near 
the  frontier,  and  if  for  practical  and 
technical  reasons  the  work  cannot  be 


d 'amelioration  vis&s  4  l*aHn£a  pre- 
mier de  Particle  26,  incombe  &  Tad- 
ministration.  Si  celle-ci  n'est  pas 
4  m&me  d'exficuter  ces  travaux,  la 
commission  peut  prendre  d'autres 
dispositions.  L'ex&cution  sera  alors 
confine  aux  Etats  riverains  du  sec- 
teur  en  commun  ou  s^parement 
sulvant  le  cas,  &  moins  que  les  condi- 
tions qu'ils  prfisentent  ne  soient 
moms  avantageuses  que  d'autres 
off  res  ^ventuelles  d 'execution. 

En  ce  qul  concern e  les  grands 
travaux  d 'amelioration  pr£vus  £ 
l'alin£a  2  de  Tarticle  26,  la  commis- 
sion decide,  dans  chaque  cas  par- 
ticulier,  par  qui  et  comment  ils  seront 
executes.  N6anmoins,  il  est  d'ores 
et  d6j£  entendu  que: 

i°  Les  deux  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur  b£n£ficieront  d'un  droit  de 
priority  au  cas  oft  Ils  voudraiont  se 
charger  de  ces  travaux; 

2°  Dans  ce  cas,  un  accord  sp6dal 
£  inter  vexiir  entre  eux  et  la  com- 
mission stipulera  les  conditions  ma- 
t&rielles  et  fmanci&res  de  I'ex&m- 
tion,  y  comprls  les  modalit&s  par 
lesquelles  la  franchise  douani&re 
pourrait  Stre  accord£e; 

3°  Ni  Fun  des  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur,  ni  aucun  autre  Etat,  ne 
pourra,  le  cas  6ch£ant,  &tre  charg6 
de  cette  execution,  sans  Fassentl- 
ment  de  celui  sur  le  territoire  duquel 
les  travaux  doivent  Stre  ex6cut£s. 

Art  29,  Les  6quipes  ouvrldres 
employees  aux  travaux  hydrauliques 
ou  autres  sent,  sauf  accord  special 
entre  les  gouveraements  des  deux 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur,  recrut^es 
conform^ment  aux  lois  en  vlgueur 
dans  1'Etat  sur  le  territoire  duquel 
s'efiectuent  lesdlts  travaux, 

Toutefois,    dans    le   cas   oft    ces 

travaux  seraient  ex^cutte  sur  le 
fleuve,  ^  la  fois  sur  le  territoire  des 
deux  Etats  riverains  du  secteur,  au 
voisinage  de  la  fronti&re,  et  que  pour 
des  motifs  d'ordre  pratique  et  tech- 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


59 


divided  up  according  to  the  frontier, 
the  gangs  of  workmen  shall  be  re- 
cruited as  far  as  possible  equally 
from  both  riparian  States  of  the 
Section. 


CHAPTER  VI 

EXEMPTION  FROM  CUSTOMS  DUTIES — 
SUPPLIES 

Art  30.  The  two  riparian  States 
of  the  Section  shall  allow  entry  free 
of  duty  into  their  territory  in  respect 
of  materials  and  plant  which  are 
necessary  either  for  the  requirements 
of  the  Administration  or  for  the 
execution  of  public  works  or  parts  of 
public  works  which  are  paid  for 
solely  out  of  navigation  dues. 

Should  the  works  be  carried  out  by 
a  contractor,  an  agreement  shall  be 
concluded  between  the  Governments 
of  the  riparian  States  of  the  Section 
and  the  Commission  in  order  to 
determine  the  procedure  for  ^  the 
importation  free  of  duty  of  machines, 
tools,  materials  or  plant  which  the 
contractor  may  notify  to  the  Ad- 
ministration as  requiring  to  be  im- 
ported into  the  territory  of  either 
State. 

The  above  provisions  shall  not 
affect  those  of  Article  28. 

Art.  31*  Contracts  for  supplies  of 
all  kinds  necessary  for  the  purposes 
mentioned  in  Article  30,  first  para- 
graph above,  shall,  as  a  general  rule, 
be  placed  with  the  contractors  who 
make  the  most  advantageous  offers 
when  the  contract  is  put  up  to  public 
tender* 

Nevertheless,  a  right  of  preference 
shall  be  accorded  to  contractors  who 
are  nationals  of  either  of  the  riparian 
States  of  the  Section,  on  condition 
that  the  difference  between  their 
tenders  and  the  most  advantageous 
tenders  does  not  exceed  ip  per  cent 
for  work  of  the  same  quality. 

If  supplies  are  offered  on  the  same 
terms  by  contractors  nationals  of 


nique  le  partage  d'un  travail  suivant 
la  fronti&re  ne  saurait  intervenir, 
les  6quipes  ouvri&res  seront  recrutees 
autant  que  possible,  &  parts  6gales, 
dans  chacun  des  deux  Etats  riverains 
du  secteur. 

CHAPITRE  VI 

FRANCHISE  BE  DOUANE — 
FOURNITURES 

Art.  30.  Les  deux  Etats  riverains 
du  secteur  accordent  Tentr£e  en 
franchise  sur  leur  territoire  respectif 
aux  mat^riaux  et  au  materiel  n<§ces- 
saires,  soit  aux  besoms  de  F  adminis- 
tration, soit  &  I'ex6cution  de  travaux 
ou  parties  de  travaux  dont  les  frais 
seraient  converts  uniquement  par 
les  taxes  de  navigation. 

Au  cas  oft  les  travaux  seraient 
ex^cut^s  par  entreprise,  un  accord 
interviendra  entre  les  gouverne- 
ments  des  Etats  riverains  du  secteur 
et  la  commission  pour  fixer  les 
modalit6s  de  Fentr6e  en  franchise  des 
machines,  outils,  mat6riaux  ou  ma- 
t6riel  que  1'entreprise  indiquerait  & 
Fadmmistration  comme  devant  £tre 
imports  sur  le  territoire  de  Tun  ou 
de  Tautre  Etat. 

Les  dispositions  ci-dessus  ne  por- 
tent pas  prejudice  aux  dispositions 
de  1'article  28. 

Art.  31.  Les  fouraitures  de  tout 
genre  n&cessaires  aux  fins  indiqu6es 
au  premier  alin<§a  de  Tarticle  30  ci- 
dessus,  seront,  en  r&gle  g6n£rale,  at- 
tributes aux  fournisseurs  pr^sentant 
les  offres  les  plus  avantageuses  en 
adjudication  rlguli&re. 

Toutefois,  un  droit  de  pr6f6rence 
est  reconnu  aux  fournisseurs  ressor- 
tissants  des  deux  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur,  &  condition  que  Tdcart  eatre 
leurs  offres  et  les  offres  les  plus  avan- 
tageuses ne  d^passe  pas,  £  qualit<§ 
<§gale,  10%. 

En  ce  qui  concerne  les  fournitures 
offertes  &  conditions  6gales  par  les 


6o 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


either  of  the  riparian  States  of  the 
Section,  the  contracts  shall  as  far  as 
possible  he  divided  equally  between 

the  contractors  in  question* 

CHAPTER  VII 

SUPERVISION  AND  POLICING  OF 

NAVIGATION 

Art.  32.  The  special  provisions 
concerning  navigation  in  the  Iron 
Gates  and  Cataracts  Section  shall 
be  drawn  up  by  the  Commission  on 
the  proposal  of  the  Administration. 
They  shall  be  promulgated  by  the 
riparian  States  in  their  respective 
territories,  and  shall  form  part  of  the 
Annex  to  the  Regulations  for  the 
Policing  of  Navigation. 

Art,  33.  The  Administration 
which,  under  Article  5  of  the  present 
Agreement,  is  in  charge  of  the  super- 
vision of  navigation  shall  notify  to 
the  riparian  authorities  in  charge  of 
the  policing  of  navigation  any  con- 
traventions of  which  it  may  take 
cognisance  through  its  own  organs, 
placing  at  the  disposal  of  the  said 
authorities  any  information  which  it 
has  been  able  to  obtain. 

The  Administration  shall  further 
report  to  the  said  authorities  any 
irregularity  requiring  action  on  their 
part,  and  any  damage  caused  to  the 
equipment,  buildings  or  installations 
placed  at  its  disposal. 

The  competent  officials  of  the 
Administration  shall  be  solely  re- 
sponsible for  seeing  that  navigators 
carry  out  the  obligations  imposed  by 
the  Annex  to  the  Regulations  for 
Policing  of  Navigation  and  regulat- 
ing the  passage  of  vessels  through 
the  Section,  and  the  said  employees 
shall  for  that  purpose  have  the  right 
to  take  action  on  board  vessels. 

Art*  34,  The  riparian  authorities 
responsible  for  the  policing  of  naviga- 
tion shall  take  action  on  board  ves- 
sels only  when  they  themselves  find 
that  a  contravention  has  been  com- 
mitted, or  when  they  are  summoned 


fournisseurs  ressortissants  des  deux 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur,  une 
repartition,  autant  que  possible  & 
parts  6gales,  en  sera  faite  entre  eux* 

CUAPZTRB  VII 

SURVEILLANCE  EX  POLICE  BE  LA 

NAVIGATION 

Art.  32.  Les  dispositions  sp6ciales 
concernant  la  navigation  dans  le 
Secteur  des  Portes-de-Fer  et  des 
Cataractes  seront  6tablies  par  la 
commission  sur  la  proposition  de 
I'administration.  Biles  seront  pro- 
mulgutes  par  les  Etats  riverains  sur 
leurs  territoires  respectifs  et  feront 
partie  de  1'annexe  au  R&glement  de 
police  de  la  navigation. 

Art,  33,  L 'administration  charg6e 
comme  il  est  dit  &  1'article  5  du 
present  accord,  de  la  surveillance  de 
la  navigation,  signalera  aux  autorit^s 
riveraines  chargles  de  la  police  de  la 
navigation  les  contraventions  dont 
elle  pourrait  prendre  connaissance 
par  1'entremise  de  ses  propres  or- 
ganes,  en  mettant  &  la  disposition 
desdites  autorit&s  tous  les  616ments 
deformation  qu'elle  aura  pu  re- 
cueillir. 

L 'administration  leur  signalera,  en 
outre,  toute  irr6gularit6  r6clamant 
leur  intervention,  ainsi  que  tout 
dommage  caus&  aux  ^quipements, 
Edifices  et  installations  mis  4  sa 
disposition* 

Le  contrdle  de  Taccomplissement 
par  les  navigateurs  des  obligations 
impos6es  par  1'annexe  au  Rdglement 
de  police  de  la  navigation  et  rfiglant 
la  traversfe  du  secteur  sera  exclusive- 
ment  r6serv6  aux  agents  compfitents 
de  Padministration,  lesquels  auront  & 
cet  effet  le  droit  d'intervention  4 
bord  des  bUtiments. 

Art*  34.  Les  autorit^s  riveraines 
chargles  de  la  police  de  la  navigation 
n'interviendront  &  bord  des  bUti- 
ments  que  lorsqu'elles  constateront 
elles-mgmes  une  contravention  ou 
lorsqu'elles  seront  requises  par  les 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


61 


by  the  organs  of  the  Administration 
to  note  the  facts  and  report  them. 

The  official  instructed  to  do  so 
shall  confine  himself  to  making  out 
the  report,  which  he  shall  forward  to 
the  competent  riparian  authority  to 
be  used  for  the  opening  of  an  enquiry, 

In  the  report  he  shall,  before  any 
other  facts  which  may  have  come  to 
his  notice,  set  forth  the  facts  ascer- 
tained by  the  official  of  the  Adminis- 
tration. 

Should  no  report  have  been  made 
out,  the  riparian  authorities  shall 
open  the  enquiry  into  the  case  as 
soon  as  they  receive  the  information 
collected  by  the  official  of  the  Ad- 
ministration who  reported  the  con- 
travention. 

Such  official  shall  if  necessary  be 
heard  by  the  said  authorities. 

Art.  35.  The  enquiry  into  and 
prosecution  In  respect  of  contraven- 
tions reported  to  the  competent 
riparian  authorities,  whether  by  the 
Administration  or  by  the  river  police 
services  or  in  any  other  manner, 
direct  or  indirect,  and  the  settlement 
of  legal  cases,  whether  civil  or  crim- 
inal, arising  out  of  the  exercise  of 
navigation,  shall  devolve  exclusively 
upon  the  said  authorities  of  the 
riparian  States  of  the  Section. 

The  authorities  shall  communicate 
monthly  to  the  Administration  a 
table  showing  all  legal  decisions 
which  have  become  final  and  cases 
dismissed  by  them. 

Art.  36.  The  competent  ripa- 
rian authorities  shall  take  action  on 
their  own  initiative  or  render  assist- 
ance to  the  organs  of  the  Adminis- 
tration, at  their  request,  whenever  an 
irregularity  has  to  be  stopped. 

Within  the  limits  of  the  sovereignty 
of  the  respective  States,  the  compe- 
tent riparian  authorities  and  the 
vessels  commissioned  by  each  of  the 
riparian  States  of  the  Section  for  the 
policing  of  navigation  shall  take 
action  in  case  of  need,  either  at  the 


organes  de  Tadministration  pour 
constater  les  faits  par  un  proc&s- 
verbal. 

L 'agent  verbalisateur  se  bornera  £ 
dresser  proems-verbal  qu'il  trans- 
mettra  &  I'autorit6  riveraine  compd- 
tente  pour  servir  &  1'ouverture  de 
Tinstruction. 

Dans  ce  proems-verbal  il  consig- 
nera,  avant  tous  autres  faits  parvenus 
&  sa  connaissance,  les  constatations 
faites  par  Tagent  de  radministration, 

Au  cas  oft  aucun  proems-verbal  ne 
serait  intervenu,  les  autorit&s  rive- 
raines  ouvriront  Finstruction  de  1'af- 
faire  d&s  reception  des  616ments  d 'in- 
formation recueillis  par  1'agent  de 
Tadministration  qui  a  signal  6  la 
contravention. 

Get  agent  sera  entendu  par  lesdites 
autorit£s,  s'il  y  a  lieu. 

Art.  35.  L  'instruction  et  la  pour- 
suite  des  contraventions  dont  les 
autoritfe  riveraines  comp<§tentes  se- 
raient  saisies,  soit  par  radministra- 
tion, soit  par  les  organes  de  la  police 
fluviale,  soit  de  toute  autre  manure, 
directe  ou  indirecte,  ainsi  que  le 
rtglement  des  affaires  judiciaires 
civiles  ou  p&nales  issues  de  1'exercice 
de  la  navigation,  incombent  ex- 
clusivement  auxdites  autorit£s  des 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur. 

Les  autorit&s  communiqueront 
mensuellement  £  Tadministration  un 
tableau  indiquant  tous  les  jugements 
demeur^s  d^finitifs  et  les  ordonnances 
de  non-lieu  rendues  par  elles. 

Art.  36.  Les  autorit6s  riveraines 
comp^tentes  interviendront  de  leur 
propre  initiative  ou  prlteront  leur 
assistance  aux  organes  de  Tadminis- 
tration,  sur  leur  demande,  toutes  les 
fois  qu'il  s'agirait  de  faire  cesser  une 
irregular!  t6. 

Dans  la  limite  de  la  souverainet6 
de  chaque  Etat,  les  autorit6s  rive- 
raines comp^tentes  et  les  bateaux 
affect6s  par  chacun  des  Etats  rive- 
rains du  secteur  &  la  police  de  la 
navigation  interviendront,  en  cas  de 
besoin,  soit  £  la  demande  de  1'admi- 


62 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


request  of  the  Administration  or  on 
their  own  initiative,  should  the  cir- 
cumstances require  immediate  ac- 
tion. 

Art.  37.  The  officials  of  the  Sec- 
tion shall  not  be  vested  with  any  of 
the  powers  held  by  the  officers  of  the 
judicial  police. 

Pilots  may  act  only  in  their  ca- 
pacity as  officials  of  the  river  police. 

Art.  38.  The  two  riparian  States 
of  the  Section  shall  inform  the  Com- 
mission of  the  procedure  by  which, 
on  the  basis  of  the  Commission's 
views,  they  will  settle  the  allocation 
of  their  competence  to  prosecute  for 
contraventions  and  the  action  to  be 
taken  by  their  authorities. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

FINANCIAL  CLAUSES  (NAVIGATION 
DUES) 

Art.  39,  The  Commission  shall 
prepare  the  yearly  budget  of  the 
Administration. 

It  shall  take  decisions  as  to  any 
dues  or  other  sources  of  revenue  in- 
tended to  provide  for  measures  to 
promote  the  maintenance  or  im- 
provement of  navigability  or  the 
administration  of  the  Section,  with- 
out the  Governments  represented 
being  thereby  rendered  liable  to 
make  financial  contributions. 

Art.  40.  The  Commission  shall 
determine  the  method  of  levying  dues, 
the  proceeds  of  which  shall  be  utilised 
first  for  the  payment  of  the  expenses 
of  the  Administration  and  for  main- 
tenance and  improvement  work,  and 
secondly  for  meeting  such  financial 
obligations  as  have  been  or  may 
hereafter  be  contracted  by  the  Com- 
mission for  carrying  out  the  said 
work,  such  as  that  resulting  from  the 
Agreement  signed  by  the  Commission 
at  Paris  on  April  27,  1927. 

Art.  41.  The  funds  of  the  Ad- 
ministration shall  as  a  general  rule  be 
placed  in  the  financial  establishments 
of  the  two  riparian  States  of  the 


nistration,  soit  de  leur  propre  initia- 
tive au  ens  ou  les  divon stances  exi- 
geraient  urn*  intervention  immediate. 

Art.  37.  Les  agents  do  Fa  dm  in  is- 
tration  ne  sont  in  vest  is  d'aucune  at- 
tribution appartenant  aux  officiers  cle 
la  police  judiciaire. 

Les  pilotes  ne  peuvent  agir  en 
qualit6  d 'agents  cle  la  police  fluviale. 

Art,  38.  Les  deux  Etats  riverains 
du  secteur  fcront  connaftre  i\  la  com- 
mission les  moduli  tos  suivunt  les- 
quelles  ils  regleront,  en  s'inspirant 
des  points  de  vtie  do  la,  commission, 
la  repartition  cle  leur  competence  en 
ce  qui  concerne  la  poursuite  des  con- 
traventions et  les  interventions  de 
leurs  autoritfis, 

CHAPITRE  VIII 

DISPOSITIONS   FINANCIERS    (TAXES 
BE  NAVIGATION) 

Art.  39*  La  commission  6tablit  le 
budget  annual  de  ^administration. 

Bile  d6cide  les  taxes  et  6ventuellc- 
ment  toutes  autres  ressources  des- 
tin6es  k  faire  face  aux  mesures  utilos 

i  Tentretien  et  &  Pametioration  de  la 
navigability  et  &  F  administration  du 
secteur,  sans  qu'il  puisse  en  rfisulter 
1'obligation  d'un  concours  financier 
de  la  part  des  gouvernements  reprfi- 
sent^s. 

Art.  40.  La  commission  fixe  le 
mode  de  perception  des  taxes  dont  le 
revenu  est  affect^,  en  premier  lieu, 
au  paiement  des  frais  de  Tadminis- 
tration  et  des  travaux  d'entretien  et 
d 'amelioration,  et,  en  second  lieu, 
au  service  des  obligations  financi&res 
contract^es  ou  &  contracter  ^ven- 
tuellement  par  la  commission  en  vue 
de  faire  face  auxdits  travaux,  telles 
que  celle  rfisultant  de  1'accord  sign6 
^,  Paris  par  elle  le  27  avril  1927, 

Art.  41.    Le  placement  des  fonds 

de  1 'administration  est  fait,  en  r&gle 
g6n6rale,  dans  les  institute  financiers 
des  deux  Etats  riverains  du  secteur, 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


Section,  shall  be  controlled  by  the 

State,  and,  as  far  as  possible,  equally 
in  the  two  riparian  States  of  the 
Section. 

Deposits  shall  in  all  cases  be  re- 
ceived in  the  currency  fixed  by  the 
Commission,  and  interest  shall  be 
payable  in  the  currency  in  which  the 
deposit  is  made. 

CHAPTER  IX 

RECOURSE  TO  LAW 

Art.  42.  The  Administration  shall 
have  competence  to  be  a  party  to 
legal  proceedings  either  as  plaintiff 
or  as  defendant  in  all  suits  connected 
with  movable  or  immovable  prop- 
erty under  its  management. 

In  the  case  of  legal  proceedings  in 
connection  with  immovable  property, 
the  courts  of  law  within  whose  area 
the  immovable  property  is  situated 
shall  have  jurisdiction. 

Legal  proceedings  connected  with 
movable  property  brought  against 
the  Administration  shall,  in  the 
absence  of  contractual  provisions  to 
the  contrary,  be  brought,  when  the 
plaintiff  is  domiciled  in  Roumanian 
or  Yugoslav  territory,  before  the 
competent  authorities  of  the  State 
in  question,  and  when  the  plaintiff  is 
domiciled  in  another  State,  before 
the  competent  authorities  of  the 
headquarters  of  the  Administration. 

Art,  43.  The  Commission,  to 
which  the  Administration  shall  com- 
municate without  delay  legal  deci- 
sions concerning  it,  shall  make  pro- 
vision for  the  financial  consequences 
of  the  said  decisions  out  of  the 
normal  budgetary  resources  of  the 
Administration . 

Art.  44.  The  Administration's 
equipment,  buildings  and  installa- 
tions, material  and  supplies,  the 
debts  due  to  it  and  its  cash  in  hand 
or  at  the  bank,  shall  not  be  liable  to 
seizure. 

Art.  45.  No  legal  proceedings 
may  be  brought  against  the  Admin- 
istration in  respect  of  any  damage 


63 

contr616s  par  1'Etat,  et,  autant  que 
possible,  &  parts  figales,  dans  les  deux 

Etats  riverains  du  secteun 

Les  d6p6ts  seront,  en  tous  cas, 
re^us  dans  la  monnaie  fix6e  par  la 
Commission  et  les  int6r§ts  seront 
servis  dans  la  monnaie  du  d6p6t. 


CHAPITRE  IX 

RECOURS  EN"  JUSTICE 

Art.  42.  L 'administration  a  qua- 
Iit6  pour  ester  en  justice,  comme  de- 
manderesse  ou  comme  d6fenderesse, 
dans  toutes  les  actions  mobilifores  ou 
immobili&res  se  r6f6rant  aux  actes 
de  sa  gestion. 

Pour  les  actions  immobili&res,  la 
competence  appartient  aux  juridic- 
tipns  dans  le  ressort  desquelles 
rimmeuble  se  trouve  situ6. 

Quant  aux  actions  mobilises  di- 
rig6es  contre  1'administration,  elles 
sont  in  ten  ties,  sauf  stipulations  con- 
tractuelles  contraires:  lorsque  le 
demandeur  est  dornicilie  en  terri- 
toire  roumain  ou  yougoslave,  devant 
les  autoritfes  comp6tentes  de  I'Etat 
respectif;  lorsque  le  demandeur  est 
domicile  dans  un  autre  Etat,  devant 
les  autorit^s  comp6tentes  du  si&ge 
central  de  Tadministration, 

Art  43.  La  Commission  &  qui 
Tadministration  communique  sans 
retard  les  decisions  de  justice  la  con- 
cernant,  fait  face  aux  consequences 
financi&res  desdites  decisions  au 
moyen  des  ressources  budg^taires 
normales  de  1 'administration. 

Art.  44,  Les  ^quipements,  6di- 
fices  et  installations,  les  mat^riaux  et 
approvisionnements,  les  cr^ances, 
fonds  en  caisse  ou  en  banque  dont 
1'administration  dispose,  sont  in- 
saisissables. 

Art,  45.  Auqun  recours  ne  peut 
8tre  exerc^  contre  1 'administra- 
tion pour  un  dommage  quelconque 


64 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


suffered  by  vessels  while  passing 
through  the  Iron  Gates  and  Cata- 
racts Section. 

Art.  46.  Each  of  the  two  riparian 
States  of  the  Section  shall,  through 
its  authorities  and  in  accordance 
with  its  laws,  render  assistance  and 
protection  to  ensure  the  verification 
and  recovery  of  damage  caused  to 
equipment,  buildings  or  installa- 
tions, supplies,  material  or  funds  at 
the  disposal  of  the  Administration, 

The  Commission  shall,  if  neces- 
sary, take  action  to  obtain  for  this 
purpose  the  assistance  of  the  com- 
petent authorities  of  other  States. 

CHAPTER  X 

FACILITIES    GRANTED    BY    THE    RIPA- 
RIAN STATES  OF  THE  SECTION 

Art.  47.  Suitable  measures  de- 
termined by  agreement  between  the 
Commission  and  the  two  riparian 
States  of  the  Section  shall  be  taken 
by  each  of  the  two  riparian  States 
of  the  Section  in  its  own  territory  in 
order  that  both  in  the  case  of  resi- 
dence and  for  passage  and  free 
movement  on  the  river  banks  the 
necessary  facilities  shall  be  granted 
to  the  staff  of  the  Administration 
and  to  private  pilots  in  the  exercise 
of  their  duties. 

The  two  riparian  States  of  the 
Section  agree  to  grant  to  the  staff 
of  the  Administration  in  their  ter- 
ritories any  other  facilities  which 
may  be  desirable  for  the  exercise  of 
their  duties. 

These  facilities  shall  also  be  de- 
termined by  agreement  between  the 
two  riparian  States  of  the  Section 
and  the  Commission, 

Art.  48.  The  Governments  of 
the  two  riparian  States  of  the  Sec- 
tion shall  grant  all  possible  facilities 
to  the  Administration  for  the  use  of 
their  telegraph  and  telephone  serv- 
ices for  the  requirements  of  the 
Section,  each  retaining  control 
thereof  in  its  own  territory. 


6prouv6  par  la  navigation  au  passage 
par  la  Section  des  Portes-de-Fer  et 
des  Cataractes. 

Art  46.  Chacun  des  deux  Etats 
riverains  du  secteur  pr£te,  par  Pen- 
tremise  de  ses  autorit6s,  et  conformfi- 
ment  &  ses  lois,  aide  et  protection 
pour  assurer  la  constatation  et  le 
recouvrement  des  dommages  caus6s 
aux  6quipements,  Edifices  et  instal- 
lations, approvisionnements,  mat6- 
riaux  et  fonds  dont  Tadministration 
dispose. 

La  commission,  le  cas  6ch6ant, 
agit  pour  obtenir  aux  m6mes  fins  le 
concours  des  autorit^s  conip6tente$ 
d'autres  Etats. 

CHAPITRE  X 

FACILIT&S  ACCGRD&ES  PAR  LES  fiTATS 
RIVERAINS  DU  SECTEUR 

Art.  47.  Des  mesures  appropri6es, 
6tablies  de  concert  entre  la  commis- 
sion et  les  deux  Etats  riverains  du 
secteur,  sont  prises  par  chacun  des 
deux  Etats  riverains  du  secteur  sur 
son  territoire,  afin  que,  tant  pour  le 
s^jour  que  pour  le  passage  et  la  libre 
circulation  sur  la  rive,  les  facilit^s 
n6cessaires  soient  accordtes  au  per- 
sonnel de  Tadministration,  ainsi 
qu'aux  pilotes  particuliers,  pour 
1'exercice  de  leurs  fonctions. 

Les  deux  Etats  riverains  du  sec- 
teur conviennent  d  Recorder  au  per- 
sonnel de  Tadministration  sur  leurs 
territoires  respectifs,  toutes  autres 
facilit6s  utiles  pour  1'exercice  de  ses 
fonctions. 

Ces  faciiit6s  seront  6galement 
d£termin6es,  de  concert  entre  les 
deux  Etats  riverains  du  secteur  de 
la  commission. 

Art.  48.  Les  gouvernements  des 
deux  Etats  riverains  du  secteur  ac~ 
corderont  toutes  les  facilit^s  possibles 
&  Tadministration  pour  I'utilisation 
de  leurs  rfeeaux  t&lfegraphiques  et 
t616phoniques  en  vue  des  besoins  du 
secteur,  tout  en  gardant  le  contrdle 
chacun  sur  son  territoire  respectif , 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


65 


CHAPTER  XI 

FLAG  AND  OFFICIAL  LANGUAGES 

Art.  49.  The  Administration 
shall  display  on  its  buildings,  and 
on  the  vessels  constituting  the  fleet 
placed  at  its  disposal,  only  a  distinc- 
tive sign  consisting  of  a  rectangular 
or  triangular  pennant  composed  of 
the  colours  of  the  Commission  and 
of  the  two  riparian  States  of  the 
Section  and  bearing  in  the  centre 
the  letters  A  P  F,  in  accordance 
with  the  models  hereto  annexed. 

The  seal  of  the  Administration  shall 
bear  the  inscription  "Administration 
of  the  Iron  Gates  and  Cataracts". 

The  badge  to  be  worn  by  the  officials 
of  the  Administration  and  in  particu- 
lar by  the  official  pilots  shall  be  pre- 
scribed by  the  Working  Regulations. 

Art.  50.  The  official  languages  of 
the  Administration  shall  be  Rou- 
manian, Serb-Croat  and  French. 

The  use  of  other  languages  shall 
not  be  excluded. 

The  Working  Regulations  shall 
settle  details  connected  with  the  use 
of  languages. 

CHAPTER  XII 

MANAGEMENT  OF  MATTERS  CON- 
NECTED WITH  THE  IRON  GATES 
AND  CATARACTS  SECTION 

Art.  51.  In  order  to  ensure  the 
speedy  settlement  of  matters  falling 
within  the  competence  of  the  Ad- 
ministration, there  shall  be  set  up 
within  the  Commission  a  Special 
Committee  composed  of  three  or  at 
most  of  four  delegates,  among  whom 
the  representatives  of  the  riparian 
States  of  the  Section  must  be  in- 
cluded, the  other  member  or  mem- 
bers being  appointed  by  the  Com- 
mission under  the  conditions  laid 
down  by  its  Rules  of  Procedure. 

Art  52.  The  duties  of  the  Com- 
mittee provided  for  in  Article  51 
shall  be,  in  all  matters  relating  to 
the  management  of  the  Iron  Gates 
and  Cataracts  Section : 


CHAPITRE  XI 

PA  VILLON  ET  LANGUES   OFFICIELLES 

Art.  49.  L 'administration  arbore 
sur  les  Edifices  et  les  unites  consti- 
tuant  le  pare  flottant  mis  &  sa  disposi- 
tion, uniquement  un  signe  distinctif 
consistant  en  un  guidon  rectangu- 
laire  ou  triangulaire  compost  des 
couleurs  de  la  commission  et  des  deux 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur  et  portant 
au  centre  les  lettres  A.  P.  F.  (con- 
form^ment  aux  modules  ci-annex6s). 

Le  cachet  de  radministration  por- 
tera  1  'inscription :  '  *  Administration 
des  Portes-de-Fer  et  des  Cataractes". 

L'insigne  It  porter  par  ses  agents, 
et  notamment  par  les  pilotes  officiels, 
sera  d6termin6  par  le  R&glement  de 
fonctionnement. 

Art  50.  Les  langues  officielles  de 
l?administration  sont  le  roumain,  le 
serbe-croate  et  le  fran^ais. 

L'usage  d'autres  langues  n'est  pas 
exclu. 

Le  R^glement  de  fonctionnement 
r6glera  les  details  en  ce  qui  concerne 
Fusage  des  langues. 

CHAPITRE  XII 

GESTION  DES  AFFAIRES  RELATIVES  AU 
SECTEUR  DES  PORTES-DE-FER  ET 
DES  CATARACTES 

Art  51.  Pour  assurer  le  r&gle- 
ment  rapide  des  affaires  rentrant 
dans  la  competence  de  radministra- 
tion,  il  est  constitu6  au  sein  de  la 
commission,  un  Comit6  special  com- 
post de  trois  ou  au  maximum  de 
quatre  d&16gu6s,  dont  les  repr6sen- 
tants  des  Etats  riverains  du  secteur 
font  obligatoirement  partie,  le  ou 
les  autres  rnembres  6tant  d6sign6s 
par  la  commission  dans  les  condi- 
tions fix6es  par  son  R^glement 
int6rieur. 

Art  52.  Le  comit6  vis6  &  Tarticle 
51  est  charg6,  dans  toutes  les  affaires 
relatives  &  la  gestion  du  Secteur  des 
Portes-de-Fer  et  des  Cataractes : 


66 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


(1)  To  conduct  an  enquiry  Into 
the  said  affairs; 

(2)  To  take  a  decision : 

(a)  In  matters  relating  to  current 
administration ; 

(6)  In  cases  requiring  urgent  set- 
tlement. 

Art.  S3-  The  decisions  of  the 
Special  Committee  must  be  unani- 
mous. 

Should  it  be  impossible  to  obtain 
unanimity,  the  question  must  be 
brought  before  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee, which,  if  necessary,  will  be 
convened  for  an  urgent  meeting. 

Art.  54,  The  Rules  of  Procedure 
of  the  Commission  shall  govern  the 
working  of  the  Special  Committee 
and  its  relations  with  the  Executive 
Committee.  All  the  decisions  of 
the  Special  Committee  shall  be 
communicated  to  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee. 

Art.  55-  Before  a  decision  is  taken 
in  the  Executive  Committee  or  in 
plenary  session  with  regard  to  the 
administration  of  the  Section  and 
the  work  to  be  carried  out  on  the 
Section,  the  two  Delegates  of  the 
riparian  States  of  the  Section  shall 
be  given  an  opportunity  of  stating 
their  views. 

CHAPTER  XIII 

EMBARKATION    STATIONS    OF    PILOTS 

Art.  56,  The  stations  at  which 
pilots  embark  and  land  shall  be 
maintained,  established  or  abolished 
by  the  Commission  by  arrangement 
with  the  riparian  State  concerned 
and  in  accordance  with  the  require- 
ments of  traffic,  so  as  to  afford  possi- 
bilities of  embarkation  and  landing 
on  both  banks. 

CHAPTER  XIV 

EQUIPMENT,  BUILDINGS  AND 
INSTALLATIONS 

Art.  57,  As  soon  as  the  present 
Agreement  comes  into  force,  the 


i°  De  procMer  £  Instruction 
desdites  affaires; 

2°  De  prendre  une  decision : 

a)  Dans  les  affaires  d 'administra- 
tion courante ; 

6)  Dans  les  cas  qui  n^cessitent 
une  solution  urgente. 

Art  53.  Les  decisions  du  Comit6 
sp6cial  sont  prises  &  I'unanimit6. 

Si  Funanimit6  ne  peut  Stre  r6unie» 
Taffaire  doit  n6cessairement  fitre 
port6e  devant  le  Comit6  ex^cutif 
qui,  s'il  y  a  lieu,  est  convoqu6 
d'urgence. 

Art.  54.  Le  r&glement  int6rieur 
de  la  commission  determine  le  fonc- 
tionnement  du  Comit<§  special  et  ses 
rapports  avec  le  Coniit6  ex6cutif. 
Toutes  Iesd6cisions  du  Comit6  special 
seront  port6es  &  la  connaissance  du 
Comit6  ex6cutif. 

Art.  55.  Avant  qu'une  decision 
soit  prise  en  Comit€  ex6cutif  ou  en 
session  p!6nidre  au  sujet  de  Tadmi- 
nistration  du  secteur  et  des  travaux 
&  y  exficuter,  les  deux  d616gu6s  des 
Etats  riverains  du  secteur  sont  mis 
en  mesure  de  formuler  leur  avis. 


CHAPITRE  XIII 

POSTES  D'EMBARQUEMENT  DES 
PILOTES 

Art*  56.  Les  postes  d'embarque- 
ment  et  de  d6barquement  des  pilotes 
seront  maintenus,  ^tablis  ou  sup- 
primps  par  la  commission,  d  'accord 
avec  TEtat  riverain  int6ress6,  aelon 
les  besoins  du  trafic,  de  mani&re  i 
offrir  des  possibilMs  d'embarque- 
ment  et  de  d^barquement  sur  chaque 


ve. 


CHAPITRE  XIV 

EQUIPEMENTS,  ^DIFICES  ET 
INSTALLATIONS 


Art*  57*    D&s  la  mise  en  vlgueur 
du  present  accord,  il  est  mis  fin  au 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


67 


provisional  control  exercised  by  the 
International  Commission  of  the 
Danube  under  Article  288  of  the 
Treaty  of  Trianon  over  the  use  of 
equipment,  buildings  and  installa- 
tions provided  for  in  that  Article 
shall  come  to  an  end. 

The  equipment,  buildings  and  in- 
stallations shall  immediately  be 
placed  at  the  disposal  of  the  Adminis- 
tration in  accordance  with  Article  33 
of  the  Statute  of  the  Danube. 

An  official  record  of  this  operation 
shall  be  drawn  up  and  there  shall  be 
annexed  thereto  a  detailed  inventory 
made  out  on  the  spot  in  three  origi- 
nals in  the  presence  of  the  members 
of  the  Special  Committee  provided 
for  in  Article  51. 

The  inventory  shall  also  indicate 
the  amount  of  cash  in  hand  and  at 
the  bank,  the  vouchers  and  books  re- 
lating to  financial  management,  and 
the  archives  and  all  furniture  and 
material  in  the  offices,  workshops 
and  buildings. 

Art*  58.  The  equipment,  build- 
ings and  installations  placed  at  the 
disposal  of  the  Administration  shall 
continue  as  in  the  past  to  be  used 
exclusively  for  the  benefit  of  naviga- 
tion, and  may  not  be  diverted  from 
their  original  purpose  for  the  in- 
dividual use  of  either  of  the  riparian 
States  of  the  Section.  They  shall  be 
exempt  from  any  tax  on  real  prop- 
erty and  from  all  other  fiscal  taxes 
or  dues. 

Art.  59.  The  new  property,  mov- 
able and  immovable,  acquired  by  the 
Administration  from  the  proceeds  of 
dues  shall  be  entered  in  the  inven- 
tory and  shall  be  subject  to  the  same 
legal  regime  as  the  property  pre- 
viously acquired. 

Art.  60.  Should  any  property, 
movable  or  immovable,  placed  at  the 
disposal  of  the  Administration  be 
sold,  it  shall  be  struck  out  of  the 
inventory,  and  the  proceeds  of  the 
sale  of  such  property  shall  be  placed 
to  the  credit  of  the  Administration. 


contrSle  provisoire  qu'exerce  la  Corn- 
mission  internationale  du  Danube, 
en  vertu  de  Particle  288  du  Trait<§  de 
Trianon,  sur  Femploi  des  6quipe- 
menxs,  Edifices  et  installations  vis£s 
par  cet  article. 

Les  6quipements,  Minces  et  in- 
stallations sont  mis  imm&iiatement 
&  la  disposition  de  Fadministration, 
conform^ment  £  Farticle  33  du 
Statut  du  Danube. 

II  est  dress6  un  proems- verbal  de 
cette  operation  auquel  sera  annex£ 
un  inventaire  d6tail!6  dress6  sur  les 
lieux  en  trois  originaux,  en  presence 
des  membres  du  Cornit<§  special 
pr6vu  &  1'article  51. 

Devront  6galement  §tre  men- 
tionn6s  dans  Finventaire  le  nuni£- 
raire  en  caisse  et  en  banque,  les 
pieces  justificatives  et  les  livres 
concernant  la  gestion  financi&re, 
ainsi  que  les  archives  et  tout  le 
mobilier  et  le  materiel  se  trouvant 
dans  les  bureaux,  ateliers  et  Edifices. 

Art.  58.  Les  6quipements,  6difices 
et  installations  mis  4  la  disposition 
de  1 'administration,  continueront  & 
gtre  utilises,  comme  par  le  pass6,  ex- 
clusivement  au  b£n6fice  de  la  naviga- 
tion et  ne  pourront  6tre  d6tourn£s 
de  leur  destination  primitive  par  Tun 
ou  Fautre  des  deux  Etats  riverains 
du  secteur  &  son  b6n£fice  personnel. 
Us  seront  exempts  de  tout  irnpdt 
foncier  et  de  tous  autres  impdts  et 
taxes  de  caract&re  fiscal. 

Art  59*  Les  nouveaux  biens, 
meubles  ou  imrneubles,  acquis  par 
radministration  sur  le  produit  des 
taxes,  seront  passes  dans  Finventaire 
et  soumis  au  m&me  r6gime  juridique 
que  les  anciens. 

Art.  60.  Si  Fun  des  biens,  meubles 
ou  immeubles,  se  trouvant  &  la  dis- 
position de  Fadmimstration,  venait 
&  ®tre  vendu,  il  serait  ray6  de  Fin- 
ventaire et  le  montant  r6alis6  en 
serait  vers6  4  Factif  de  Fadministra- 
tion* 


68 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


CHAPTER  XV 

CONTROL  AND   SUPERVISION   BY   TUB: 
COMMISSION 

Art.  61.  In  addition  to  the  rights 
mentioned  in  the  present  Agreement 
and  acknowledged  as  appertaining  to 
the  Commission  under  Articles  32 
and  33  of  the  Statute  of  the  Danube, 
the  Commission  shall  exercise  in  the 
Iron  Gates  and  Cataracts  Section  to 
the  same  extent  as  at  all  other  points 
of  the  river  system  under  its  control 
all  rights  of  supervision  and  control 
conferred  upon  it  by  the  other 
provisions  of  the  Statute. 

CHAPTER  XVI 

TRANSITIONAL  CLAUSES 

Art.  62.  In  so  far  as  the  existing 
staff  is  replaced,  the  new  staff  shall 
succeed  the  former  staff  gradually  so 
as  not  to  impair  the  normal  working 
of  the  various  Services  of  the  Ad- 
ministration. This  gradual  replace- 
ment shall  be  spread  over  a  period  of 
eighteen  months  from  the  seventh 
month  following  the  coming  into 
force  of  the  present  Agreement. 
The  procedure  by  which  this  opera- 
tion is  to  be  carried  out  shall  be  de- 
termined as  soon  as  this  coming  into 
force  takes  place  by  the  Special 
Committee  provided  for  in  Article  51 
on  the  suggestions  of  the  Govern- 
ments of  the  riparian  States  of  the 
Section. 

Art.  63.  The  provisions  of  the 
previous  Article  shall  not  apply  to 
pilots,  who  need  not  be  replaced  un- 
less they  do  not  comply  with  the 
conditions  laid  down  in  the  Working 
Regulations  of  the  Administration, 

Art.  64.  Any  employee  of  the 
former  Iron  Gates  Navigation  Serv- 
ice having  to  resign  his  post  shall 
be  given  not  less  than  six  months' 
notice  to  that  effect  by  the  Special 
Committee  provided  for  in  Article  51. 

Any  official  of  the  former  Service 
whose  replacement  has  not  been  pro- 


CHAPITRE  XV 

CONTR&LB  ET  SURVEILLANCE  PAR  LA 
COMMISSION 

Art  61.  Outre  les  droits  men- 
tionnes  au  present  Accord  et  qui  lui 
sont  reconnus  en  vertu  des  articles 
32  et  33  du  Statut  du  Danube,  la 
commission  exerce  sur  le  Secteur  des 
Portes-de-Fer  et  des  Cataractes, 
dans  la  mgme  mesure  que  sur  tous 
les  autres  points  du  rfiseau  fluvial 
soumis  &  sa  competence,  tous  les 
droits  de  surveillance  ou  de  contr61e 
qui  lui  sont  conf6r6s  par  les  autres 
dispositions  du  Statut. 

CHAPITRE  XVI 

DISPOSITIONS  TRANSITOIRES 

Art.  62.  Dans  la  mesure  oil  le 
personnel  existant  sera  renouveI6,  la 
substitution  de  personnel  nouveau  4 
du  personnel  ancien  se  fera  par 
6chelonnement,  de  mani&re  &  ne  pas 
nuire  au  fonctionnement  normal  des 
diff&rents  services  de  Fadministra- 
tion,  Cet  6chelonnement  s'6tendra 
sur  une  p£riode  de  dix-huit  mois 
compt6s  depuis  le  septi&me  mois  qui 
suit  la  mise  en  vigueur  du  present 
accord,  Les  modalitfe  de  cette  op6- 
ration  seront  fix^es  d&s  cette  mise 
en  vigueur  par  le  Comit6  special 
prfivu  &  1 'article  51,  sur  les  sugges- 
tions des  gouvernements  des  Etats 
riverains  du  secteur. 

Art.  63,  Les  dispositions  de  Tarti- 
cle  pr6c6dent  ne  sont  pas  applicables 
aux  pilotes  au  remplacement  des- 
quels  il  n'y  aura  lieu  de  pouryoir  que 
dans  le  cas  oil  ils  ne  rernpliraient  pas 
les  conditions  fix£es  au  R&glement  de 
fonctionnement  de  Tadministration* 

Art.  64.  Tout  agent  de  Pancien 
service  de  la  navigation  aux  Portes- 
de-Fer  qui  devra  r&igner  ses  fonc- 
tions,  en  sera  pr6venu  par  le  comit6 
special  pr6vu  &  Particle  51,  au  moins 
six  mois  &  Favance* 

Tout  agent  de  Tancien  service 
dont  le  remplacement  ne  serait  pas 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


vided  for  and  who  does  not  resign  his 
post  on  the  entry  into  force  of  the 
present  Agreement  must  give  at  least 
two  months'  notice  should  he  later 
desire  to  resign. 

Art.  65.  The  pensions  system  of 
officials  of  the  former  Hungarian 
State  Service  shall  continue  under 
the  conditions  laid  down  in  the  Com- 
mission's resolution  dated  June  22, 
1929,  as  modified  on  June  28,  1932. 

CHAPTER  XVII 

SETTLEMENT  OF  DISPUTES 

Art.  66.  The  competent  juris- 
diction for  the  settlement  of  disputes 
as  to  the  interpretation  and  applica- 
tion of  the  present  Agreement  shall 
be  the  special  tribunal  set  up  for  that 
purpose  by  the  League  of  Nations 
and  mentioned  in  Article  38  of  the 
Statute  of  the  Danube. 

CHAPTER  XVIII 

REVISION 

Art.  67.  No  change  in  the  present 
Agreement  may  be  made  otherwise 
than  under  the  conditions  provided 
for  in  Article  32  of  the  Statute  of  the 
Danube  providing  for  the  conclusion 
of  the  present  Agreement. 

Any  request  for  a  modification 
made  by  one  of  the  Parties  must 
specify  what  clauses  it  considers 
require  revision  and  may  not  be 
examined  until  six  months  after  it 
has  been  communicated  to  the  other 
two  Parties. 

On  the  expiry  of  a  period  of  five 
years  from  the  coming  into  force  of 
the  present  Agreement  its  text  must 
be  reconsidered  with  a  view  to 
revision. 

CHAPTER  XIX 

RATIFICATION  AND  COMING  INTO 
FORCE 

Art.  68.  The  present  Agreement 
shall  be  ratified  by  the  two  riparian 


pr<§vu  et  qui  ne  r6signera  pas  ses 
fonctions  d&s  la  mise  en  vigueur  du 
present  accord  devra  donner  un 
preavis  d'au  moins  deux  mois  s'il 
voulait  le  faire  ulterieurement. 

Art  65.  Le  regime  des  pensions 
des  agents  de  Tancien  service  de 
1'Etat  hpngrois  sera  maintenu  dans 
les  conditions  fix&es  par  la  resolution 
de  la  commission  en  date  du  22  juin 
1929  et  modifiee  le  28  juin  1932. 

CHAPITRE  XVII 

R^GLEMENT  DES  DIFF&RENDS 

Art.  66.  La  juridiction  comp6- 
tente  pour  le  r&glement  des  diSi- 
rends  sur  Interpretation  et  1'applica- 
tion  du  present  accord  est  la  juridic- 
tion speciale  organis6e  par  la  Societe 
des  Nations,  mentionn^e  £  Tarticle 
38  du  Statut  du  Danube. 


CHAPITRE  XVIII 
REVISION 

Art.  67.  Toute  modification  au 
present  accord  ne  pourra  gtre  ap- 
portee  que  dans  les  conditions  pr6- 
vues  &  1'article  32  du  Statut  du 
Danube  pour  retablissement  de  cet 
accord. 

Toute  demande  de  modification 
introduite  par  une  des  parties  devra 
specifier  les  dispositions  qui  lui 
paraissent  susceptibles  de  revision 
et  ne  pourra  £tre  prise  en  considera- 
tion que  six  mois  apr&s  avoir  ete 
communiquee  aux  deux  autres  Par- 
ties. 

A  1'expiration  d'un  deiai  de  cinq 
ans,  &  dater  de  la  mise  en  vigueur 
du  present  accord,  son  texte  sera 
remis  obligatoirement  &  l'6tude  en 
vue  d'une  revision  eventuelle. 

CHAPITRE  XIX 

RATIFICATION— MISE   EN  VIGUEUR 

Art.  68.  Le  present  accord  sera 
ratifie  par  les  deux  Etats  riverains 


70 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  309 


States  of  the  Section  and  the  ratifi- 
cations shall  be  deposited  with  the 
Office  of  the  International  Commis- 
sion of  the  Danube  as  soon  as  possible 
and  not  later  than  February  I,  1933. 

The  official  record  of  the  deposit 
of  ratifications  shall  be  forwarded  to 
the  Government  of  the  French  Re- 
public to  be  deposited  in  its  archives. 

Art.  69,  The  present  Agreement 
and  the  regulations  and  agreements 
provided  for  In  Articles  8,  13,  38  and 
47  shall  come  into  force  as  from 
July  i,  1933. 

IN  FAITH  WHEREOF  the  under- 
mentioned Plenipotentiaries  have 
signed  the  present  Agreement,  made 
out  in  a  single  original  copy,  which 
shall  be  deposited  in  the  archives  of 
the  French  Republic;  a  certified 
copy  shall  be  given  to  each  of  the 
two  signatory  Powers  and  to  the 
International  Commission  of  the 
Danube. 

Done  at  Semmering,  June  28, 
1932. 


du  secteur  et  les  ratifications  seront 
d6pos£es  au  Bureau  de  la  Commis- 
sion Internationale  clu  Danube  dans 
le  plus  bref  el£lai  possible  et  au  plus 
tard  le  Ior  f6vrier  1933. 

Le  procfis- verbal  de  d6p6t  des 
ratifications  sera  transmis  au  Gou- 
vernementdela  R^publique  frangaise 
pour  gtre  conserv6  dans  ses  archives. 

Art.  69.  Le  present  accord,  ainsi 
que  les  r^glements  et  arrangements 
vis6s  aux  articles  8,  13,  38  et  47 
entreront  en  vigueur  &  la  date  du 
IOT  juillet  1933. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI  les  plfinipoten- 
tiaires  susnomm6s  ont  sign^  le  pr6- 
sent  accord  r6dig6  en  un  seul  exem- 
plaire  qui  sera  d6pos6  dans  les 
archives  de  la  R^publique  frangaise; 
une  expedition  authentique  sera 
remise  &  chacune  des  deux  Puissances 
signataires  et  &  la  Commission  Inter- 
nationale du  Danube. 

Fait  au  Semmering,  le  28  juin 
1932. 


D.  PANTITCH     CONST.  CONTZESCO     DE  DIETRICH 


ANNEX  I 

FORM  FOR  UNDERTAKING  ON  WORD 
OF  HONOUR 

FORM  I 
I,  the  undersigned 


ANNEXE  I 

PORMULAIRES  D'ENGAGEMENT 
D'HGNNBUR 

FORMULATE  1 

Je  soussign6. * 


undertake  on  my  honour,  In  the  presence 
of  M 


m'engage  sur  1'honneur  devant  M. 


Delegate  of 

on  the  International  Commission  of  the 
Danube,  authorised  for  that  purpose  by 
the  said  Commission,  to  carry  out  the 

duties  of .' 

in  accordance  with  the  decisions  of  the 
International  Commission  of  the  Danube 
and  in  a  spirit  of  strict  impartiality, 

FORM  II 
I,  the  undersigned 


de. 


a  la  Commission  Internationale  du  Da- 
nube, mandate  &  cet  effet  par  ellc,  d'ac- 
complir  les  fonctions  de  .....  .  .....  .... 


conformtoent  aux  decisions  de  la  Com- 
mission Internationale  du  Danube  et  dans 
un  esprit  de  stricte  impartiality 

FORMULAIRE  II 
Je  soussign6 ...» 


undertake  on  my  honour,  in  the  presence 

of  M 

Chief  of 


mf engage  sur  Thonneur  devant  M.. 


June  28,  1932 


SPECIAL  SERVICES  AT  IRON  GATES 


of  the  Iron  Gates  and  Cataracts  Adminis- 
tration, empowered  for  that  purpose,  to 
carry  out  the  duties  of 


de  FAdministration  des  Portes-de-Fer  et 
des  Cataractes,  ayant  pouvoir  a  cet  effet, 
cTaccomplir  les  fonctions  de 


in  accordance  with  the  decisions  of  the 
Internationa!  Commission  of  the  Danube 
and  In  a  spirit  of  strict  impartiality. 


conform6ment  aux  decisions  de  la  Com- 
mission Internationale  du  Danube  et  dans 
un  esprit  de  stricte  impartiality. 


ANNEX  II 

[This  annex,  which  sets  forth  two  distinctive  marks  (flags)  for  the  Iron  Gates  and  Cataracts 
Administration,  is  not  reproduced  here.] 


No.  309a 


Final  Protocol  to  the  Agreement  concerning  the  Setting-Up  of 
Special  Services  at  the  Iron  Gates.  Signed  at  Semmering,  June 
28,  1932. 

Protocole  final  &  P  Accord  relatif  a  la  constitution  des  services  spe- 
ciaux  aux  Portes-de-Fer.    Signe  au  Semmering,  28  juin  1932. 

Text  and  translation  from  140  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series,  p.  226. 

[Translation] 

When  proceeding  to  the  signature 
of  the  present  Agreement,  the  under- 
signed Plenipotentiaries  have  agreed 
on  the  following  provisions: 

Ad  Art  2.  The  headquarters  of 
the  Administration  shall  remain  at 
Orsova,  and  the  Public  Works  Serv- 
ice shall  be  established  at  Tekija 
in  a  building  which  the  Yugoslav 
Government  shall  cause  to  be  con- 
structed at  its  own  expense  and 
which  it  shall  place  at  the  disposal  of 
the  said  Service  free  of  charge. 

Such  building  shall  be  granted  the 
same  rights,  privileges,  and  fiscal 
exemptions  as  those  which  at  present 
apply  or  may  hereafter  apply  to  the 
Orsova  premises,  and  it  may  not  be 
used  for  any  other  purpose.  The 
new  building  shall  display  under  the 
same  conditions  as  the  Orsova  build- 
ing the  distinctive  insignia  of  the 
Administration,  which  shall  be  in 
charge  of  the  maintenance  thereof. 

The  Public  Works  Service  sihall 
be  established  in  the  new  building 


Au  moment  de  proc6der  &  la 
signature  du  pr&ent  accord,  les 
pl&nipotentiaires  soussign^s  sont  con- 
venus  de  ce  qui  suit: 

Ad  Art.  2,  Le  sifege  central  de 
Tadministration  restant  fix6  &  Or- 
sova, le  Service  des  Travaux  sera 
install^  <t  Tekija  dans  Timmeuble 
que  le  Gouvernement  yougoslave 
fera*  b&tir  &  ses  frais  et  mettra 
gratuitement  &  la  disposition  dudit 
service. 

Cet  immeuble  jouira  des  m&mes 
droits,  prerogatives  et  exemptions 
fiscales  dont  b&n&ficie  ou  b6n6ficiera 
&  Tavenir  le  local  d'Orsova  et  ne 
pourra  6tre  affect6  &  un  autre  emploi. 
II  arborera  dans  les  m^mes  condi- 
tions que  ce  dernier  les  insignes  dis- 
tinctifs  de  Tadministration,  qui  en 
aura  la  charge  de  Tentretien. 


L'installation  du  Service  des  Tra- 
vaux   sera    effectu6e    d&s    que    le 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  310 


as  soon  as  the  Yugoslav  Govern- 
ment has  notified  the  Administra- 
tion that  the  building,  which  shall 
be  constructed  as  soon  as  possible, 
is  ready  for  occupation. 

Ad  Art  12.  It  is  understood  that 
the  post  of  the  representative  pro- 
vided for  in  Article  12  shall  be  filled 
in  turn  by  the  Councillors  (r&fSren- 
daires)  of  the  General  Secretariat  of 
the  Commission  during  the  first 
five  years  after  the  coming  into  force 
of  the  present  Agreement.  The 
situation  shall  be  examined  afresh 
on  the  expiry  of  that  period  when 
the  text  of  the  Agreement  is  recon- 
sidered as  provided  in  Article  67. 

IN  FAITH  WHEREOF  the  Under- 
signed have  drawn  up  the  present 
Protocol,  which  shall  have  the  same 
force  and  duration  as  the  Agreement 
to  which  it  refers. 

Done  at  Semmering,  June  28, 
1932. 


Gouveraement  yougpslave  aura  fait 
connaitre  &,  Tadministration  que 
1'immeuble  dont  la  construction  aura 
lieu  aussitOt  que  possible,  est  pr€t 
&  6tre  habit6. 

Ad  Art  12.  II  est  entendu  que 
les  fonctions  du  repr6sentant  pr€vu 
&  Tarticle  12  seront  assumes  &.  tour 
de  r61e  par  les  r6f£rendaires  du 
secretariat  g&n6ral  de  la  commission 
pendant  les  cinq  premieres  ann6es 
qui  suivront  la  mise  en  vigueur  du 
present  accord.  La  situation  sera 
examinee  de  nouveau  £  1  'expiration  de 
cette  p6riode  &  Foccasion  de  la  remise 
&  F6tude  du  texte  de  Faccord  prescrite 
par  les  dispositions  de  Tarticle  67, 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI  les  soussignfe  ont 
dress6  !e  present  protocole  qui  aura 
la  m6me  force  et  durfee  que  Taccord 
auquel  il  se  rapporte. 

Fait  au  Semmering,  le  28  juin 
1932. 


D.  PANTITCH      CONST.  CONTZESCO      DE  DIETRICH 


No.  310 

AGREEMENT  concerning  Non-German  Reparations.    Signed  at 
Lausanne,  July  7,  1932. 

ACCORD  relatif  aux  r6parations  non-allemancles.    Sign$  i 
Lausanne,  7  juillet  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE*  The  Conference  at  Lausanne,  at  which  this  agreement  was  drawn  up, 
was  principally  concerned  with  German  reparations.  See  No,  311,  post.  This  agreement 
applied,  inter  alia,  to  Bulgarian  reparations  (see  No.  243,  ante)  and  to  Hungarian  reparation® 
(see  No.  254,  ante).  The  committee  envisaged  has  not  met. 

RATIFICATIONS.    This  agreement  was  not  subject  to  ratification, 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.    (See  the  bibliography  under  No.  311,  post.) 

Entered  into  force  July  7,  1933.* 

Text  from  publication  by  the  German  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs. 

The  undersigned  Governments,  Les  Gouveraements  soussign6s, 

Animated  by  the  same  spirit  as        Agissant  dans  Tesprit  qui  a  inspirfe 
inspired  the  Declaration  signed  on     la  dlclaration  signte  le  16  juin  par 
1  Not  registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations  (July  I,  1937). 


July  9,  1932 


GERMAN  REPARATIONS 


73 


the  1 6th  June  by  the  Five  Inviting 
Creditor  Powers,1 

Are  agreed  and  recommend  to  the 
Conference  that  a  Committee  con- 
sisting of  one  representative  of  each 
of  the  Governments  concerned  shall 
be  set  up  to  consider  the  group  of 
questions  known  as  "non -German 
Reparations"  and  cognate  ques- 
tions viewing  them  within  the  frame- 
work of  a  general  settlement, 


Are  of  opinion  that,  in  order  to 
permit  the  work  of  the  said  Commit- 
tee to  proceed  undisturbed,  without 
prejudice  to  any  question  of  principle 
or  to  the  solutions  which  may  ulti- 
mately be  reached,  the  execution  of 
the  payments  due  in  respect  of  the 
above-mentioned  questions  should 
be  reserved  until  the  15th  December 
next  failing  a  settlement  before  that 
date. 

SIGNED  at  Lausanne  the  yth  July, 
1932,  for  the  Governments  of 


les  cinq  Puissances  cr£anci£res  in- 
vitantes,1 

Sont  d 'accord  pour  recommander 
&  la  Conference  de  nomrner  un 
Comit6  qui  devrait  6tre  compost 
d'un  represent  tan  t  de  chacun  des 
Gouvernements  int&ress6s  et  qui 
serait  charg6  d'examiner  Tensernble 
des  questions  groupies  sous  le  terme 
de  1 *  Reparations  non-allemandes ' ' 
et  de  celles  qui  s'y  rattachent  en  les 
envisageant  dans  le  cadre  d'un 
r&glement  universel, 

Sont  d'avis,  afin  de  permettre  au 
Comit6  susmentionn&  de  mener  £ 
bien  sa  t&che,  que,  sans  pr^juger 
aucune  question  de  principe,  ni  les 
solutions  susceptibles  d'etre  atteintes 
ult6rieurement,  Tex6cution  des  paie- 
ments  aff6rents  aux  questions  sus- 
mentionn^es  soit  r&erv^e  jusqu'au 
15  d6cembre  &  d6faut  d'un  r^glernent 
ant^rieurement  obtenu. 

SIGN&  &  Lausanne,  le  7  juillet  1932, 
pour  les  Gouvernements  de 


Australia:  GRANVILLE  RYRIE;  Belgium:  PAUL  HYMANS;  Bulgaria:  N. 
MOUCHANOFF  ;  Canada :  THOMAS  A*  STONE  ;  Czechoslovakia :  STEFAN  OSUSKY  ; 
France:  CHARLES  RIST;  Hungary:  L,  GAJZAGO;  Italy:  ANTONIO  MOSCONI; 
Japan:  SHIGERU  YOSHIDA;  New  Zealand:  T.  M.  WILFORD; Portugal:  TOMAZ 
FERNANDES;  Roumania:  SAVEL  RADULESCO;  South  Africa:  C.  T.  TE  WATER; 
United  Kingdom:  N.  CHAMBERLAIN;  Yugoslavia:  CONSTANTIN  FOTITCH; 
India:  N.  CHAMBERLAIN. 


No.  311 

AGREEMENT  concerning  German  Reparations.     Opened  for  signa- 
ture at  Lausanne,  July  9,  1932. 

ACCORD  relatif  aux  reparations  allemandes.     Ouvert  a  la  signature 
a  Lausanne,  9  juillet  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  A  Special  Advisory  Committee  convoked  by  the  Bank  for  Interna- 
tional Settlements  in  accordance  with  a  request  of  the  German  Government  made  under  a 
provision  in  the  Experts'  Plan  of  June  7,  1929,  and  Annex  III,  V,  10,  of  the  Hague  Agree- 

1  This  declaration  related  to  the  suspension  of  payments  on  reparations  and  war  debts 
falling  due  during  the  period  of  the  Lausanne  Conference.  The  text  was  incorporated  m  the 
Final  Act  of  the  Conference.  Br.  ParL  Papers,  Cmd.  4126  (1932);  27  Martens,  N.R.G. 
(3d  sen),  p.  19,— ED. 


74 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  311 


ment  of  January  20,  1930  (No,  238,  ante),  met  at  Basle,  December  8-23,  1931;  Its  report  of 
December  23,  1931,  urged  immediate  decisions  as  to  the  general  problem  of  reparations. 
Br.  Parl.  Papers,  Cmd,  3995  (1932).  At  Geneva,  on  February  13, 1932,  a  decision  was  taken 
by  states  principally  interested  which  led  to  the  Lausanne  Conference,  June  i6-July  9,  1932, 
This  agreement  of  July  9,  1932,  was  designed  to  supersede  the  reparation  regime  provided 
for  in  the  agreement  of  January  20  >  1930. 

RATIFICATIONS,  While  no  ratification  has  been  deposited  at  Paris,  this  agreement  has 
had  the  result  that  German  reparations  have  ceased  to  be  the  subject  of  active  negotiations, 

BIBLIOGRAPHY,  The  text  of  this  agreement  is  also  published  in  Br.  Parl.  Papers,  Misc. 
Mo.  7  (1930),  Cmd.  4126;  Materialien  sur  Reparations/rage  (Lausanner  Konferenz  1932) 
(Berlin:  Foreign  Office,  1932);  27  Martens,  N.R.G.  (3d  ser.)»  P-  23. 

C  de  Armenteros,  "La  Conferencia  de  Lausanne  sobre  las  reparaciones  de  la  gran  guerra," 
22  Rev.  de  der.  int.  (1932),  pp.  291-326;  G.  W.  J.  Bruins,  "  De  overeenkomst  van  Lausanne/' 
7  Volk&nbond  (1931),  pp.  357-63;  M.  Liais,  "La  Conference  de  Lausanne,"  40  Rev.  gin.  d® 
dr*  int.  pub,  (1933)*  pp.  71-89;  Pereira  da  Silva,  A  Conferencia  de  Lausana  (Lisboa,  1933), 
pp.  19-132;  W.  Rftpke,  "  Vor  Lausanne/'  22  Zeitschriftf&rPotitife  (1933),  pp.  145-54;  R6pke» 
"Nach  Lausanne/'  identt  pp.  297-306;  K,  Strupp,  Der  Vertrag  von  Lausanne  (Berlin;  Roth, 
1932),  67  pp.;  H*  Wehberg,  "  Die  Lausanner  Konferenz/'  32  Fried&nswart®  (1932),  pp.  225-7; 
M.  S.  Wertheimer,  "The  Lausanne  Reparation  Settlement,"  8  Foreign  Policy  Association 
Reports  (1932),  pp.  220-30;  J.  W.  Wheeler-Bennett,  The  Wreck  of  Reparations  (New  York: 
Morrow,  1932),  pp.  210-54. 


Not  entered  into  force  (January  i,  1937). 
Text  from  publication  by  the  German  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs. 


The  Government  of  His  Majesty 
the  King  of  the  Belgians*  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  Kingdom  of 
Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland, 
the  Government  of  Canada,  the 
Government  of  the  Commonwealth 
of  Australia,  the  Government  of  New 
Zealand,  the  Government  of  the 
Union  of  South  Africa,  the  Govern- 
ment of  India,  the  Government  of 
the  French  Republic,  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Greek  Republic,  the 
Government  of  His  Majesty  the 
King  of  Italy,  the  Government  of 
His  Majesty  the  Emperor  of  Japan, 
the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
Poland,  the  Government  of  the  Re- 
public of  Portugal,  the  Government 
of  His  Majesty  the  King  of  Roumania, 
the  Government  of  the  Czecho- 
slovak Republic  and  the  Govern- 
ment of  His  Majesty  the  King  of 
Yugoslavia  (hereinafter  described  as 
the  creditor  Governments),  and  the 
Government  of  the  German  Reich, 

Recognising  that  the  legal  validity 
of  the  Agreements  signed  at  The 


Le  Gouvernement  de  Sa  Majest4  le 
Roi  des  Beiges,  le  Gouvernement  du 
Royaume-Uni  de  Grande-Bretagne 
et  de  rirlande  du  Nordr  le  Gouverne- 
ment du  Canada,  le  Gouveraement 
du  Commonwealth  d'Australie,  le 
Gouvernement  de  la  Nouvelle-Z6- 
lande,  le  Gouvernement  de  I1  Union 
Sud-Africaine,  le  Gouvernement  de 
1'Inde,  le  Gouvernement  de  la  R6- 
publique  frangaise,  le  Gouvernement 
de  la  R6publique  grecque,  le  Gou- 
vernement de  Sa  Majest6  le  Roi 
d'ltalie,  le  Gouvernement  de  Sa 
Majest6  TEmpereur  du  Japon,  le 
Gouvernement  de  la  R6publique  de 
Pologne,  le  Gouvernement  de  la 
R6publique  du  Portugal ,  le  Gouverne- 
ment de  Sa  Majestfe  le  Roi  de 
Roumanie,  le  Gouvernement  de  la 
R&publique  tch6coslovaque,  le  Gou- 
vernement de  Sa  Majest^  le  Roi  de 
Yougoslavie  (ci-apr&s  d6sign6s  comme 
les  Gouvernements  cr6anciers)»  et  le 
Gouvernement  du  Reich  allemand, 

Reconnaissant  que  la  validM 
juridique  des  accords  signfe  &  La 


July  9,  1932 


GERMAN  REPARATIONS 


75 


Hague  on  the  2Oth  January,  1930,*  is 
not  in  question , 

But  concerned  by  the  economic 
difficulties  resulting  from  the  present 
crisis, 

And  being  desirous  to  make,  so  far 
as  they  are  concerned,  the  necessary 
efforts  to  ensure  the  confidence  which 
is  indispensable  to  the  development 
of  normal  economic  and  financial  re- 
lations between  the  nations, 

The  undersigned,  duly  authorised 
to  that  effect  by  their  respective 
Governments, 

Have  agreed  as  follows: 

Declaration 

The  Powers  signatory  of  the  pres- 
ent Agreement  have  assembled  at 
Lausanne  to  deal  with  one  of  the 
problems  resulting  from  the  war, 
with  the  firm  intention  of  helping  to 
create  a  new  order,  permitting  the 
establishment  and  development  of 
confidence  between  the  nations  in  a 
mutual  spirit  of  reconciliation,  col- 
laboration and  justice. 

They  do  not  claim  that  the  task 
accomplished  at  Lausanne,  which  will 
completely  put  an  end  to  Repara- 
tions, can  alone  assure  that  peace 
which  all  the  nations  desire.  But 
they  hope  that  an  achievement  of 
such  significance  and  so  arduously 
attained  will  be  understood  and  ap- 
preciated by  all  the  pacific  elements 
in  Europe  and  the  world,  and  that  it 
will  be  followed  by  fresh  achieve- 
ments. 

These  further  successes  will  be 
more  readily  won  if  the  nations  will 
rally  to  this  new  effort  in  the  cause  of 
real  peace,  which  can  only  be  com- 
plete if  it  is  applied  both  in  the 
economic  and  in  the  political  sphere 
and  rejects  all  possibility  of  resort  to 
arms  or  to  violence. 

The  signatory  Powers  will  make 
every  effort  to  resolve  the  problems 
which  exist  at  the  present  moment 
or  may  arise  subsequently  ia  the 


Haye  le  20  Janvier  1930  *  n'est  pas 
en  cause, 

Mais,  6tant  pr6occup£s  des  diffi- 
cult£s  6conomiques  provoqu^es  par 
la  crise  actuelle, 

Et  d^sireux,  en  ce  qui  les  concerne, 
de  faire  les  efforts  n6cessaires  pour 
assurer  la  confiance  indispensable  au 
d6veloppement  de  relations  6co- 
nomiques  et  financiSres  normales 
entre  les  peuples, 

Les  soussign^s,  dfiment  autoris6s  & 
cet  effet  par  leurs  Gouvernements 
respectifs, 

Sont  convenus  de  ce  qui  suit: 

Declaration 

Les  Puissances  signataires  du  pr6- 
sent  accord  se  sont  r^unies  4  Lau- 
sanne pour  traiter  un  des  probl&mes 
issus  de  la  guerre  avec  le  plus  sincere 
d&sir  de  contribuer  4  la  formation 
d'un  ordre  nouveau  qui  permettrait 
l^tablissement  et  le  d<§veloppement 
de  la  confiance  entre  les  peuples  dans 
un  esprit  r6ciproque  de  rlconcilia- 
tion,  de  collaboration  et  de  justice. 

Elles  ne  consid^rent  pas  que 
Foeuvre  r&alis&e  &  Lausanne,  qui  doit 
mettre  fin  compl&tement  aux  r6para~ 
tions,  soit  suffisante  pour  obtenir 
cette  paix  que  souhaitent  tous  les 
peuples.  Mais  elles  esp&rent  que  ce 
r^sultat,  en  Iui-m6me  si  important  et 
qui  a  exig&  de  tous  un  rude  effort, 
sera  compris  et  appr£ci6  par  tous  les 
^Mments  pacifiques  de  TEurope  et 
du  monde  et  qu'il  sera  suivi  d'oeuvres 
nouvelles. 

Ces  oeuvres  seront  d'autant  plus 
faciles  It  r6aliser  que  les  peuples 
soutiendront  mieux  cette  nouvelle 
consecration  d'une  paix  r6elle  qui, 
pour  gtre  complete,  doit  s'appliquer 
4  la  fois  &  Tordre  6conomique  et  & 
Tordre  politique  comme  elle  doit 
r6pudier  tout  appel  aux  armes  et 
toute  violence. 

Les  Puissances  signataires  du  pr6- 
sent  accord  s'efforceront  de  r6soudre 
les  probl^mes  actuellement  pos6s  ou 
qui  se  poseront  ult£rieurement  dans 


1  Nos,  238-246, 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  311 


spirit  which  has  inspired  the  present 
Agreement. 

Article  i.  The  German  Govern- 
ment shall  deliver  to  the  Bank  for 
International  Settlements  German 
Government  5  per  cent  redeemable 
bonds,  to  the  amount  of  three  mil- 
Hard  reichsmarks  gold  of  the  present 
standard  of  weight  and  fineness,  to 
be  negotiated  under  the  following 
arrangements: 

(1)  The   Bank  for   International 
Settlements  shall  hold  the  bonds  as 
trustee. 

(2)  The  Bonds  shall  not  be  nego- 
tiated by  the  Bank  for  International 
Settlements   before    the    expiry   of 
three  years  from  the  signature  of  the 
present  Agreement.     Fifteen   years 
after  the  date  of  the  said  signature 
the  Bonds  which  the  Bank  for  Inter- 
national Settlements  has  not  been 
able  to  negotiate  shall  be  cancelled. 

(3)  After    the    above    period    of 
three  years  the  Bank  for  Interna- 
tional  Settlements   shall  negotiate 
the  Bonds  by  means  of  public  issues 
on  the  markets  as  and  when  possible, 
in  such  amounts  as  it  thinks  fit,  pro- 
vided that  no  issue  shall  be  made  at  a 
rate  below  90  per  cent. 


The  German  Government  shall 
have  the  right  at  any  time  to  redeem 
at  par,  in  whole  or  in  part,  the  Bonds 
not  yet  issued  by  the  Bank  for  Inter- 
national Settlements.  In  determin- 
ing the  terms  of  issue  of  the  Bonds, 
the  Bank  for  International  Settle- 
ments shall  take  into  account  the 
desirability  of  giving  to  the  German 
Government  the  right  to  redeem  the 
Bonds  after  a  reasonable  period. 

(4)  The  Bonds  shall  carry  interest 
at  5  per  cent  and  sinking  fund  at  I 
per  cent  as  from  the  date  on  which 
they  are  negotiated.    They  shall  be 
free  of  all  German  taxes,  present  and 
future. 

(5)  The  proceeds  of  the  Bonds,  as 


le  mSme  esprit  qui   a  inspir6  cet 
accord. 

Article  i.  Le  Gouvernement  alle- 
mand  d61ivrera  &  la  Banque  des 
Rdglements  Internationaux  des  bons 
du  Gouvernement  allemand  5  pour 
cent  rachetables,  pour  un  montant 
de  3  milliards  de  reichsmarks-or  de  la 
valeur,  du  poids  et  du  titre  actuelle- 
ment  en  vigueur,  &  n6gocier  dans  les 
conditions  qui  suivent: 

(1)  La   Banque   des   R&glements 
Inteniationaux  d6tiendra  les   bons 
comme  trustee. 

(2)  Les  bons  ne  seront  pas  n6- 
goci6s  par  la  Banque  des  Rdglements 
Internationaux    avant    i 'expiration 
d'une  pfiriode  de  trois  ans  &  dater  de 
la    signature    du    present    accord. 
Quinze  ans  apr&s  la  date  de  cette 
signature  les  bons  qui  n'auraient  pu 
etre    places    par    la    Banque    des 
R&glements    Internationaux   seront 
annu!6s. 

(3)  Apr&s  Texpiration  du  d61ai  de 
trois  ans  ci-dessus  vis6,  la  Banque 
des  R&glements  Internationaux  n6- 
gociera  les  bons  par  voie  demissions 
publiques  sur  les  marches  au  fur  et  &. 
rnesure  des  possibility,  en  tels  mon- 
tants  qu'elle  jugera  opportun,  sous 
reserve  qu'aucune  Emission   n'aura 
lieu  &  un  taux  inf6rieur  &  90  pour 
cent. 

Le  Gouvernement  allemand  aura, 
&  tout  moment,  le  droit  de  racheter  au 
pair  tout  ou  partie  des  bons  non  en- 
core 6mis  par  la  Banque  des  R&gle- 
ments  Internationaux.  En  fixantles 
conditions  demission  des  bons,  la 
Banque  des  R&glements  Internatio- 
naux devra  tenir  compte  du  fait  qu'il 
est  d6sirable  de  donner  au  Gouverne- 
ment allemand  le  droit  de  racheter 
les  bons  6mis  dans  un  d^lai  raison- 
nable. 

(4)  Les  bons  porteront  int6rHt  &  5 
pour  cent  avec  I  pour  cent  d'amor- 
tissement  &  partir  de  la  date  de  leur 
Emission.    Us    seront    exempts    de 
tous  impdts  allemands  presents  et 
futurs. 

(5)  Le  produit  des  bons,  au  fur  et 


July  9.  1932 

and  when  Issued,  shall  be  placed  to  a 
special  account,  the  allocation  of 
which  shall  be  settled  by  a  further 
agreement  in  due  course  between  the 
Governments,  other  than  Germany, 
signatory  to  the  present  Agreement. 

(6)  If  any  foreign  loan  is  issued  by 
the  German  Government,  or  with  its 
guarantee,  at  any  time  after   the 
coming  into   force  of   the  present 
Agreement,    the    German    Govern- 
ment shall  offer  to  apply  up  to  the 
equivalent  of  one-third  of  the  net 
cash  proceeds  of  the  loan  raised  to 
the  purchase  of  Bonds  held  by  the 
Bank  for  International  Settlements, 
The  purchase  price  shall  be  such  that 
the  net  yield  on  the  Bonds  so  pur- 
chased would  be  the  same  as  the  net 
yield  of  the  loan  so  raised.  This  para- 
graph does  not  refer  to  loans  for  a 
period   of  not    more    than    twelve 
months. 

(7)  If,  after  five  years  from  the 
signature  of  the  present  Agreement, 
the  Bank  for  International  Settle- 
ments considers  that  the  credit  of  the 
German  Government  is  restored,  but 
the  quotations  of  its  loans  remain 
none  the  less  below  the  minimum 
price  of  issue  fixed  under  paragraph 
(3)  above,  the  minimum  price  may 
be  varied  by  a  decision  of  the  Board 
of  the  Bank  for  International  Settle- 
ments, which  decision  shall  require  a 
two-thirds  majority. 

Further,  at  the  request  of  the 
German  Government,  the  rate  of 
interest  may  be  reduced  below  5  per 
cent  if  issues  can  be  made  at  par. 


(8)  The  Bank  for  International 
Settlements  shall  have  power  to 
settle  all  questions  as  to  the  currency 
and  denomination  of  bonds  issued, 
and  also  all  questions  as  to  charges 
and  costs  of  issue,  which  it  shall  have 
the  right  to  deduct  from  the  pro- 
ceeds of  the  issue.  In  considering 
any  questions  relating  to  the  issue  of 


GERMAN  REPARATIONS 


77 


&  mesure  de  leur  6mission,  sera  plac6 
&  un  compte  special,  dont  1'affecta- 
tion  sera  r6gl£e  par  un  accord  ul- 
t6rieur,  le  moment  venu,  entre  les 
Gouvernements,  autres  que  FAlle- 
magne,  signataires  du  present  Ac- 
cord. 

(6)  Au  cas  oil,  i  tout  moment 
apr6s  la  mise  en  vigueur  du  present 
accord,  des  emprunts  seraient  6mis  & 
l'6tranger  par  le  Gouvernernentalle- 
mand,  ou  avec  sa  garantie,   ledit 
Gouvernement  offrira  d'appliquer,  & 
concurrence  d'un  tiers,  le  produitnet 
effectif  en  esp&ces  des  emprunts  6mis 
au  rachat  de  bons  d6tenus  par  la 
Banque    des    R&glements    Interna- 
tionaux.    Le  prix  du  rachat  sera  tel 
que    le    rendement    net    des    bons 
rachet6s  soit  le  m6me  que  le  rende- 
ment net  de  Temprunt  6mis.    Ne 
sont  pas  vis<§es  par  le  present  para- 
graphe  les  avances  consenties  pour 
une  dur^e  6gale  ou  inf^rieure  &  un  an. 

(7)  Si,  cinq  ann6es  <§cou!6es  aprds 
la  signature  du  present  accord,  la 
Banque    des    R^glements    Interna- 
tionaux  consid^re  que  le  credit  du 
Gouvernement  allemand  est  restaur£, 
mais  si  les  cours  de  ses  emprunts 
demeurent  n6anmois  au-dessous  du 
prix   minimum   d  Emission   fix6   en 
vertu  du  paragraphs  3  ci-dessus,  le 
prix  minimum  pourra  6tre  modifi6 
par  une  decision  du  Conseil  de  la 
Banque    des    R^glements    Interna- 
tionaux  prise  &  une  majorit6  des 
deux  tiers. 

D'autre  part,  &  la  demande  du 
Gouvernement  allemand,  le  taux 
d'int£r€t  des  bons  pourra  litre  abaiss6 
au-dessous  de  5  pour  cent  si  des 
Emissions  &  un  nouveau  taux  peuvent 
gtre  faites  au  pair. 

(8)  La   Banque  des  R&glements 
Internationaux  aura  le  pouvoir  de 
r6gler  toutes  questions  relatives  &  la 
monnaie  et  aux  denominations  des 
bons  &mis,  ainsi  que  les  questions 
relatives  aux  charges  et  frais  d'<§mis- 
sion  qurelle  aura  le  droit  de  d6duire 
des   produits   de   remission.     Pour 
toutes  questions  relatives  4  remission 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  31 1 


Bonds,  the  Board  of  the  Bank  for 
International  Settlements  shall  take 
the  advice  of  the  President  of  the 
Reichsbank,  but  decisions  may  be 
made  by  a  majority  vote. 

Art*  2.  On  its  coming  into  force 
the  present  Agreement  will  put  to  an 
end  and  be  substituted  for  the 
reparation  regime  provided  for  in  the 
agreement  with  Germany,  signed  at 
The  Hague  on  the  2Oth  January, 
1930,  and  the  agreements  signed  at 
London  on  the  nth  August,  1931,* 
and  at  Berlin  on  the  6th  June,  1932 ; 2 
the  obligations  resulting  from  the 
present  Agreement  will  completely 
replace  the  former  obligations  of 
Germany  comprised  in  the  annuities 
of  the  "New  Plan." 

Art.  3*  Consequently,  Articles  I, 
2»  4»  5»  7»  &»  9  Md  12  and  Annexes  I, 
III,  IV,  V,  Va,  VI,  Via,  VII,  IX,  X 
and  Xa  of  the  said  agreement  with 
Germany  are  definitely  abrogated. 

Art.  4.  The  Protocol  signed  at 
London  on  the  nth  August,  1931, 
and  the  Protocol  supplementary 
thereto  signed  at  Berlin  on  the  6th 
June,  1932,  are  abrogated.  Conse- 
quently, the  provisional  receipts 
handed  to  the  Bank  for  International 
Settlements  by  the  German  Railway 
Company  under  the  said  Protocol  of 
the  nth  August,  1931,  will  be  re- 
turned to  it. 

Art,  5.  The  debt  certificate  of  the 
German  Government  and  the  certif- 
icate of  the  German  Railway  Com- 
pany referred  to  in  Article  7  and  in 
Annexes  III  and  IV  of  the  Hague 
Agreement  shall,  with  the  coupons 
attached,  be  returned  to  the  German 
Government  and  to  the  German 

Company  respectively, 
6.     Nothing  in   the  present 
ent  alters  or  affects  Article  3 
uidation  of  the  past),  Article  6 
far  as  concerns  the  corporate 
Ustence  of  the  Bank  for  Interna- 
jfonal  Settlements),  or  Article   10 
(Immunities  of  the  Bank  for  Inter- 

1  No.  238af  antes—Ev. 


des  bons,  le  Conseil  d*  Administration 
de  la  Banque  des  Rfcglements  Inter- 
nationaux  prendra  1'avis  du  Prisi- 
dent  de  la  Reichsbank,  mais  les 
d6cisions  seront  prises  &  la  majority. 
Art,  2-  D6s  sa  mise  en  vigueur  le 
pr6sent  accord  mettra  fin  et  se  sub- 
stituera  au  regime  des  reparations 
pr^vu  &  1 'accord  avec  TAllemagne 
sign&  &  La  Haye  le  20  Janvier  1930 
et  aux  accords  sign6s  £  Londres  le 
ii  aotit  1931  3  et  &  Berlin  le  6  juin 
*93^»2  les  obligations  du  present  ac- 
cord rempla^ant  complement  les 
obligations  ant^rieures  de  I'AUe- 
magne  comprises  dans  les  annuitte 
du  "Nouveau  Plan", 


Art.  3*  En  consequence,  les  Ar- 
ticles i«%  2,  4,  5,  7,  8,  9  et  12  ainsi 
que  les  Annexes  I,  II I ,  IV,  V,  V  bis, 
VI,  VI  Ms,  VII,  IX,  X  et  X  &w  de 
1'accord  de  La  Haye  avec  TAlle- 
magne  sont  dfifinitivement  abrogfis. 

Art.  4.  Le  Protocole  sign6  £ 
Londres  le  II  aoflt  1931  et  le  Proto- 
cole compl^mentaire  sign6  4  Berlin  le 
6  juin  1932  sont  abrogfe.  En  cons6-* 
quence,  lea  re^us  provisoires  d61ivr6s 
^L  la  Banque  des  R^glements  Inter- 
nationaux  par  la  Reichsbahngesell- 
schaft  en  execution  du  premier 
d*entre  eux  lui  seront  restituls. 


Art.  5*  Le  certificat  de  dette  du 
Gouvernement  allemand  et  le  cer- 
tificat de  la  Reichsbahngeseltechafty 
tous  deux  vis6s  It  1* Article  7  de 
1'accord  de  La  Haye  et  aux  Annexes 
III  et  IV,  ainsi  que  les  coupons 
attaches,  seront  restitu6s  respective- 
ment  au  Gouvernement  allemand  et 
&  la  Reichsbahngesellschaft. 

Art*  6»  Rien  dans  le  present  ac- 
cord ne  modifie  ou  n'affecte  I' Article 
3  (Liquidation  du  pass6)»  r Article  6, 
pour  autant  qull  vise  la  personnalit6 
juridique  de  la  Banque  des  R^gle- 
ments  Internationaux,  et  FArticle  10 
(Iramunit6a  de  la  Banque  des 

2  No. 


July  9,  1932 


GERMAN  REPARATIONS 


79 


national  Settlements)  of  the  Hague 
Agreement. 

Art.  7.  The  Signatory  Govern- 
ments declare  that  nothing  in  the 
present  Agreement  diminishes  or 
varies  or  shall  be  deemed  to  diminish 
or  vary  the  rights  of  the  bondholders 
of  the  German  External  Loan,  1924, 
or  of  the  German  Government  Inter- 
national 5^4  per  cent  Loan,  1930,* 

Any  necessary  adaptation  of  the 
machinery  relating  to  the  manner  in 
which  the  obligations  of  the  German 
Government  with  respect  to  the  Ger- 
man External  Loan,  1924,  and  with 
respect  to  the  German  Government 
International  s}4  per  cent  Loan, 
1930,  will  be  discharged  will  be  sub- 
ject to  mutual  arrangement  be- 
tween the  German  Government,  on 
the  one  hand,  and  the  Bank  for  Inter- 
national Settlements,  Fiscal  Agent 
of  the  Trustees  of  the  German  Ex- 
ternal Loan,  1924,  and  Trustee  of  the 
German  Government  International 
55^  per  cent  Loan,  1930,  on  the 
other  hand. 

Art.  8.  The  present  Agreement 
will,  on  Its  coming  into  force,  be 
notified  by  the  Government  of  the 
French  Republic  to  the  Bank  for 
International  Settlements  with  a 
view  to  the  application  by  the  Bank 
of  the  provisions  which  affect  it;  the 
said  Government  will  also  inform  the 
Bank,  for  the  purposes  of  its  Stat- 
utes, that  the  "New  Plan"  is  no 
longer  in  effect. 

Art,  9*  Any  disputes,  whether 
between  the  Governments  signatory 
of  the  present  Agreement,  or  between 
one  or  more  of  those  Governments 
and  the  Bank  for  International 
Settlements,  as  to  the  interpretation 
or  application  of  this  Agreement 
shall  be  referred  to  the  Arbitration 
Tribunal  set  up  under  Article  15  of 
the  Hague  Agreement  with  Germany. 
The  relevant  provisions  of  that  Arti- 
cle and  of  Annex  XII  of  the  said 


ments  Internationaux)  de  1 'accord  de 
La  Haye. 

Art*  7.  Les  Gouvernements  sig- 
nataires  declarent  que  rien  dans  le 
present  accord  ne  rMuit,  ou  ne  modi- 
fie,  ou  ne  pourra  Otre  consid6r6 
comma  rMuisant  ou  modifiant  les 
droits  des  porteurs  d 'obligations  de 
FEmprunt  ext6rieur  allemand  1924 
ou  de  FEmprunt  international  s}4 
1930  du  Gouvernement  allemand.1 

Toute  adaptation  n6cessaire  des 
modalit£s  d'ex6cution  des  obligations 
du  Gouvernement  allemand  con- 
cemant  FEmprunt  exttrieur  alle- 
mand 1924  et  FEmprunt  interna- 
tional 5)4  1930  du  Gouvernement 
allemand  fera  Fob  jet  d'un  arrange- 
ment entre  ce  Gouvernement,  d'une 
part,  et,  d'autre  part,  la  Banque  des 
R&glements  Internationaux,  agent 
financier  des  trustees  de  FEmprunt 
ext&rieur  allemand  1924  et  trustee  de 
FEmprunt  international  5}4  1930 
du  Gouvernement  allemand. 


Art.  8.  D&s  sa  mise  en  vigueur,  le 
present  accord  sera  notifi6  par  les 
soins  du  Gouvernement  de  la  R6- 
publique  fran^aise  &  la  Banque  des 
Rdglements  Internationaux  en  yue 
de  Fapplication  par  cette  derni&re 
des  dispositions  qui  la  concernent; 
ledit  Gouvernernent  signifiera  6gale- 
ment  &,  la  Banque  des  R&glements 
Internationaux,  aux  fins  de  ses 
statuts,  que  le  "Nouveau  Plan"  a 
cess6  d'etre  en  vigueur. 

Art  g.  Tout  diff6rend,  soit  entre 
les  Gouvernements  signataires  du 
present  accord,  soit  entre  un  ou 
plusieurs  d 'entre  eux  et  la  Banque 
des  R^glements  Internationaux,  au 
sujet  de  Interpretation  et  de  Fap- 
plication du  present  accord,  sera 
soumis  au  Tribunal  Arbitral  con- 
stitu6  en  vertu  de  V Article  15  de 
Faccord  de  La  Haye  avec  FAlle- 
magne,  Toutes  dispositions  appro- 
prides  de  cet  Article  et  de  F Annexe 


*  No.  261,  ante. — ED. 


So 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  311 


Agreement  will  for  this  purpose  be 
applicable, 

Art.  10.  The  present  Agreement, 
of  which  the  English  and  French 
texts  are  both  authentic,  shall  be 
ratified,  and  the  ratifications  shall 
be  deposited  at  Paris. 

The  Governments  whose  seat  is 
outside  Europe  will  be  entitled 
merely  to  notify  the  French  Govern- 
ment, through  their  diplomatic  rep- 
resentatives in  Paris,  that  their 
ratification  has  been  given;  in  that 
case  they  must  transmit  the  instru- 
ment of  ratification  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible. 

As  soon  as  the  present  Agreement 
has  been  ratified  by  the  Govern- 
ments of  Germany,  Belgium,  France, 
Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland, 
Italy  and  Japan,  it  shall  come  into 
force  between  those  Governments 
whose  ratifications  have  been  de- 
posited or  notified  at  that  date.  It 
shall  come  into  force  in  respect  of 
every  other  signatory  Government 
on  the  date  of  notification  or  deposit 
of  ratification. 

The  French  Government  will 
transmit  to  all  the  signatory  Govern- 
ments and  to  the  Bank  for  Inter- 
national Settlements  a  certified  copy 
of  the  Proems-verbal  of  the  deposit  of 
each  ratification,  and  a  certified  copy 
of  each  notification. 

Art.  ii.  The  present  Agreement 
may  be  signed  at  any  time  up  to  the 
date  on  which  it  first  comes  into 
force  in  accordance  with  Article  10, 
by  any  Government  signatory  to  the 
Agreement  signed  at  The  Hague  on 
the  20th  January,  1930. 

After  that  date  any  of  the  said 
Governments  may  accede  to  the 
present  Agreement  by  means  of  a 
notification  addressed  to  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  French  Republic, 
which  will  transmit  to  the  other 
Contracting  Governments  and  to  the 
Bank  for  International  Settlements  a 
certified  copy  of  such  notification. 
In  that  case  the  Agreement  will  come 


XII   de   1' accord   recevront   £  cet 
effet  application. 

Art.  10.  Le  prdsent  accord,  dont 
les  textes  frangais  et  anglais  feront 
6galement  foi,  sera  ratifi6,  et  le  d6pdt 
des  ratifications  sera  fait  &  Paris, 

Les  Gouvernernents  qui  ont  leur 
si&ge  hors  d'Europe  pourront  se 
contenter  de  notifier  au  Gouveme- 
ment  frangais  leur  ratification  par 
leurs  repr6sentants  diplomatiques  & 
Paris;  en  pareil  cas,  ils  transmettront 
le  plus  t6t  possible  rinstrument  de 
leur  ratification. 

D£s  que  le  present  accord  aura 
6t6  ratifi6  par  les  Gouvernements 
d'Allernagne,  de  Belgique,  de  France, 
de  Grande-Bretagne  et  de  Tlrlande 
du  Nord,  d'ltalie  et  du  Japon,  ii 
entrera  en  vigueur  entre  les  Gou- 
vernements dont  les  ratifications 
auront  6t6  d6pos6es  ou  notifies  & 
cette  date.  II  entrera  en  vigueur 
pour  chacun  des  autres  Gouverne- 
rnents signataires  &  la  date  de  la 
notification  ou  du  d6p6t  de  sa 
ratification. 

Le  Gouvernement  fran^ais  remet- 
tra  4  tous  les  Gouvernements  signa- 
taires et  &  la  Banque  des  Rfeglements 
Internatkmaux  une  copie  certififie 
con  forme  des  proc&s-verbaux  du 
d6p6t  de  chaque  ratification,  ainsi 
que  de  chaque  notification. 

Art.  ii.  A  tout  moment  avant  la 
date  de  sa  mise  en  vigueur  initiate, 
telle  qu'elle  est  pr^vue  &  F  Article  io» 
le  present  accord  pourra  gtre  sign! 
par  tel  des  Gouvernements  signa- 
taires de  Taccord  de  La  Haye  avec 
TAllemagne  du  20  Janvier  1930, 

Postincrement  &  cette  date,  cha* 
cun  desdits  Gouvernements  pourra 
adherer  au  present  accord  par  voie 
d'une  notification  faite  au  Gouverne- 
ment de  la  R^publique  franchise,  qui 
communiquera  aux  autres  Gouverne- 
ments contractants  et  &  la  Banque 
des  R^glements  Internationaux  copie 
certifi6e  conforme  de  cette  notifica- 
tion. En  ce  cas,  Taccord  entrera  en 


July  9,  1932  GERMAN  REPARATIONS  8 1 

into  force  for  the  Government  con-     vigueur,  pour  le  Gouvernement  in- 
cerned  on  the  date  of  such  acces-     t6ress6,  &  la  date  de  cette  adhesion, 
sion. 

DONE  at  Lausanne,  the  9th  day  of  FAIT  &  Lausanne,  le  9  julllet  1932, 
July,  1932,  In  a  single  copy  which  will  en  un  seul  exemplaire  qui  sera  d6- 
remain  deposited  in  the  archives  of  pos6  aux  archives  du  Gouvernement 
the  Government  of  the  French  Re*  de  la  R&publique  frangaise,  qui  en 
public,  which  will  transmit  certified  remettra  une  copie  certifi^e  con- 
copies  to  each  of  the  signatory  forme  &  chacun  des  autres  Gouverne- 
Governments.  ments  signataires. 

[Signed :]  For  the  Belgian  Government;  RENKIN,  PAUL  HYMANS,  E.  FRANC- 
QUI  ;  for  the  Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  North- 
ern Ireland:  J.  RAMSAY  MACDQNALD,  N.  CHAMBERLAIN,  JOHN  SIMON, 
WALTER  RUNCIMAN;  for  the  Government  of  Canada:  G.  H.  FERGUSON;  for 
the  Government  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Australia:  GRANVILLE  RYRIE;  for 
the  Government  of  New  Zealand:  THOMAS  M.  WILFORD;  for  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Union  of  South  Africa:  C.  T.  TE  WATER;  for  the  Government  of 
India:  JOHN  SIMON;  for  the  French  Government:  E.  HERRIOT,  GERMAIN 
MARTIN,  JULIEN  DURAND,  JOSEPH  PAGANON,  GEORGES  BONNET;  for  the 
Italian  Government:  ANTONIO  MOSCONI,  ALBERTO  BENEDUCE;  for  the 
Japanese  Government:  SHIGERU  YOSHIDA,  S.  KURIYAMA,  J.  TSUSHIMA;  for 
the  Polish  Government:  AUGUSTE  ZALESKI,  JAN  MROZOWSKI;  for  the  Ger- 
man Government:  F.  VON  PAPEN,  C.  VON  NEURATH,  Graf  SCHWERIN  VON 
KROSIGK,  WARMBOLD. 


No.  311a 

Transitional  Measures  concerning  German  Reparations.    Signed 
at  Lausanne,  July  9,  1932* 

Mesures  de  transition  relatives  aux  reparations  allemandes.    Signes 
3.  Lausanne,  9  juiilet  1932, 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  The  declaration  of  June  16, 1932,  which  is  referred  to  in  Article  i  of  this 
instrument,  provided  that  "  the  execution  of  the  payments  due  to  the  Powers  participating 
in  the  Conference  in  respect  of  reparations  and  war  debts  should  be  reserved  during  the 
period  of  the  [Lausanne)  Conference";  it  did  not  affect  the  service  of  market  loans  however. 
Br*  ParL  Papers,  Misc.  No.  7  (1932),  Cmd.  4126,  p,  3. 

RATIFICATIONS.    This  instrument  was  not  subject  to  ratification. 

Entered  into  force  July  9,  X932.1 

Text  from  publication  by  the  German  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs. 

The  duly  authorised  representa-  Les  repr^sentants  dflment  auto- 
tives  of  the  Governments  signatories  ris6s  des  Gouvernements  signataires 
of  the  Agreement  concluded  this  day  de  1'accord  conclu  ce  jour  avec  1'Alle- 

1  Not  registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations  (July  I,  1937). 


82 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  31  ia 


with  Germany  have  agreed  as  fol- 
lows: 

Article  I.  As  from  to-day's  date 
the  effects  of  the  Declaration  of  the 
i6th  June,  1932,  will  be  prolonged 
as  regards  the  payments  due  by 
Germany  under  the  Hague  Agree- 
ment of  the  2Oth  January,  1930,  the 
London  Protocol  of  the  nth  Au- 
gust, 1931,  and  the  Berlin  Protocol  of 
the  6th  June,  1932. 

This  prolongation  will  terminate 
on  the  coming  into  force  of  the 
Agreement  with  Germany  signed  to- 
day at  Lausanne,  or,  failing  this, 
on  any  one  of  the  Governments  of 
the  following  countries,  Germany, 
Belgium,  United  Kingdom,  France, 
Italy  and  Japan,  notifying  the  Gov- 
ernments concerned  that  it  has  de- 
cided not  to  ratify. 

Art,  2.  Negotiations  will  be  en- 
tered into  without  delay  between  the 
German  Government  and  the  Bank 
for  International  Settlements  in  or- 
der that  the  arrangements  contem- 
plated in  Article  7  (2)  of  the  Agree- 
ment with  Germany  signed  to-day 
may  be  prepared  before  its  coming 
into  force. 

Art*  3,  As  regards  the  execution, 
by  means  of  deliveries  In  kind,  of 
contracts  and  works  in  course  of 
execution,  a  Committee,  consisting 
of  representatives  of  the  German 
Government  and  the  Governments 
concerned,  shall  be  appointed  to 
draw  up  such  proposals  as  may  be 
desirable  in  regard  to  such  contracts 
and  works. 

SIGNED  at  Lausanne,  the  9th  day 
of  July,  1932. 

For  the  Belgian  Government:  RENKIN,  PAUL  HYMANS,  E.  FRANCQUI;  for 
the  Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ire- 
land; J.  RAMSAY  MACDONALD,  N.  CHAMBERLAIN,  JOHN  SIMON,  WALTER 
RUNCIMAN;  for  the  Government  of  Canada:  G.  H.  FERGUSON;  for  the  Gov~ 
ernment  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Australia:  GRANVILLE  RYRIE;  for  the 
Government  of  New  Zealand:  THOMAS  M.  WJLFOED;  for  the  Government  of 
the  Union  of  South  Africa:  C  T.  TE  WALTER;  for  the  Government  of  India: 
JOHN  SIMON;  for  the  French  Government:  E.  Herriot,  GERMAIN  MARTIN, 
JULIEN  DURAND,  JOSEPH  PAGANON,  GEORGES  BONNET;  for  the  Italian 
Government:  ANTONIO  MOSCONI,  ALBERTO  BENEDXJCE;  for  the  Japanese 


magne,   sont   convenus   de   ce    qui 
suit: 

Article  i,  A  dater  de  ce  jour,  les 
effets  de  la  declaration  du  16  juin 
1932  seront  prorog6s  en  ce  qui  con- 
cerne  les  paiements  dus  par  TAlle- 
magne  en  vertu  de  Faccord  de  La 
Haye  du  20  Janvier  1930,  du  proto- 
cole  de  Londres  du  II  aoflt  1931  et 
du  protocole  de  Berlin  du  6  juin 

1932. 

Cette  prorogation  prendra  fin  par 
la  mise  en  vigueur  de  Taccord  avec 
TAllemagne  conclu  £t  Lausanne  en 
date  de  ce  jour,  pu,  &  d6faut,  par  une 
declaration  notifi6e  aux  Puissances 
int6ress&es  par  Tun  quelconque  des 
six  Gouvernements  suivants:  Alle- 
magne,  Belgique,  Royaume-Uni, 
France,  Italie  et  Japon,  qu'il  a  d6- 
cid6  de  ne  pas  ratifier. 

Art.  2.  Des  negotiations  seront 
entam6es  sans  d^lai  entre  le  Gou- 
vernement  allemand  et  la  Banque 
des  R&glements  Internationaux  afin 
que  les  adaptations  pr6vues  4  TAr- 
ticle  7  (2)  de  Taccord  avec  FAile- 
magne,  sign 6  en  date  de  ce  jour, 
puissent  Stre  pr6par6es  avant  son 
entrfe  en  vigueur. 

Art.  3.  Concernant  rex6cution» 
au  moyen  des  prestations  en  nature, 
de  contrats  et  de  travaux  en  cours, 
il  sera  procM6  &  la  nomination  d'un 
Comlt6  comprenant  des  repr6sen- 
tants  du  Gouvernement  allemand  et 
des  Gouvernements  intferessfis,  Ce 
Comit6  pr6sentera  toutes  proposi- 
tions utiles  relatives  &  ces  contrats  et 
&  ces  travaux, 

SIGN&  It  Lausanne  le  9  juillet  1932. 


July  2,  1932  GERMAN  REPARATIONS  83 

Government:  SHIGERU  YOSHIDA,  S.  KURIYAMA  (ad  referendum),  J.  TSU- 
SHIMA; for  the  Polish  Government:  AUGUSTE  ZALESKI,  JAN  MROZOWSKI; 
for  the  German  Government:  F.  VON  PAPBN,  C,  VON  NEURATH,  Graf 

SCHWERIN  VON  KROSIGK,  WARMBOLD. 


No.  311b 

Proces-verbal  relating  to  the  Ratification  of  the  Agreement  concern- 
ing German  Reparations.     Initialled  at  Lausanne^  Jtdy  2,  1932. 

Proces-verbal  concemant  la  ratification  de  PAccord  relatif  atut  repara- 
tions aHemandes.     Paraph6  &  Lausanne,  2  juillet  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  This  prods-herbal  is  frequently  referred  to  as  a  "Gentlemen's  Agree- 
ment." 27  Martens,  N.R.G*  (sd  ser.)>  p.  41,  The  text  was  communicated  to  the  German 
Chancellor  at  Lausanne,  July  9,  1932.  On  the  previous  day,  the  President  of  the  Lausanne 
Conference  had  stated,  in  reply  to  a  question  by  the  German  representative,  that  "in  the 
event  of  any  inability  to  fulfil  this  [the  Lausanne]  Agreement  and  its  Annexes,  a  further 
Conference  will  be  held."  The  text  of  the  proems-verbal  is  in  English  only. 

Text  from  Br.  Parl.  Papers,  Misc.  No.  8  (1932),  Cmd.  4129. 

The  Lausanne  Agreement  will  not  Into    full    effect.     But   if   no    such 

come  into  final  effect  until  after  rati-  settlement    can    be    obtained,    the 

fication  as  provided  for  in  the  Agree-  agreement  with  Germany  will  not 

ment.     So  far  as  the  Creditor  Gov-  be    ratified;    a    new    situation    will 

ernments     on     whose     behalf     this  have  arisen  and  the   Governments 

Proces-  Verbal  is  initialled   are  con-  interested  will  have  to  consult  to- 

cerned,  ratification  will  not  be  ef-  gether  as  to  what  should  be  done, 

fected  until  a  satisfactory  settlement  In  that  event,  the  legal  position,  as 

has  been  reached  between  them  and  between  all  the  Governments,  would 

their  own  creditors.     It  will  be  open  revert  to  that  which  existed  before 

to  them  to  explain  the  position  to  the  Hoover  Moratorium, 

their  respective  Parliaments,  but  no  The  German  Government  will  be 

specific  reference  to  it  will  appear  in  notified  of  this  arrangement, 

the  text  of  the  agreement  with  Ger-  On  behalf  of  Belgium:  j.  R. 

many.     Subsequently,    if    a  .  satis-  Qn  behalf  of  Great  Britain .  N  c 

factory  settlement  about  their  own  Qn  behalf  of  France:  E,  H. 

debts  is  reached,  the  aforesaid  Cred-  Qn  behalf    f  Jtal     A  M 
itor  Governments  will  ratify  and  the 

agreement  with  Germany  will  come  July  2,  1932* 


84  INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION  No.  312 

No.  312 

AUSTRIAN  Protocol.    Opened  for  signature  at  Geneva,  Jtily  15, 

1932, 

PROTOCOLE  autrichien.     Ouvert  a  la  signature  a  Geneve,   15 

juillet  1932, 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  The  adoption  of  an  earlier  plan  for  the  financial  and  economic  recon- 
struction of  Austria  led  to  the  signature  of  three  protocols  at  Geneva,  October  4,  1922  (No. 
76,  ante).  This  protocol  was  approved  by  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations,  July  15, 
1932.  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1932,  p.  1280.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  preamble 
incorporates  by  reference  Protocol  No.  I  of  October  4,  1922,  which  was  interpreted  by  the 
Permanent  Court  of  International  Justice  in  an  opinion  given  on  September  5,  1931.  Publi- 
cations of  the  Court,  Series  A/B,  No.  41. 

RATIFICATIONS.  Ratifications  of  this  protocol  were  deposited  on  or  before  December  31, 
I932»  by  Austria,  France,  Great  Britain,  and  Italy;  ratifications  were  later  deposited  by 
Belgium  (September  23,  1933)  and  the  Netherlands  (February  20,  1934). 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  The  text  of  this  protocol  is  also  published  in  British  Treaty  Series,  No.  5 
(I933)i  Cmd.  4247;  Bundesgesetsblatt,  1933,  p.  29;  27  Martens,  N.R.G.  (3d  ser,)»  p.  643. 

A.  Antonucci,  La  liguidation  financiere  de  la  guerre  et  la  reconstruction  en  Europe  central® 
(Paris:  Giard,  1933),  463  pp.;  J.  Basdevant,  La  condition  international®  de  VAutriche  (Paris: 
Sirey,  1935),  299  pp.;  C.  Cosoiu,  Le  rdle  de  la  SociM  des  Nations  en  mature  d'emprunts  d'Etat 
(Paris:  Domat-Montchrestien,  1934)*  430  pp.;  A.  A.  Poortenaar,  L'muvre  de  la  restauration 
financier e  sous  les  auspices  de  la  SociU&  des  Nations  (Amsterdam,  1933),  pp.  118-27. 

Entered  into  force  December  31,  1932.* 

Text  from  135  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series,  p.  285. 

PREAMBLE  PR^AMBULE 

Considering  Consid^rant 

That  the  Government  of  the  Aus-  Que  le  Gouvernement  de  la  R6- 

trian  Federal  Republic  has  addressed  publique  £6d6rale  d'Autriche  a 

to  the  League  of  Nations  a  request  adress6  une  demande  de  secours  &.  la 

to  be  assisted  in  maintaining  the  Soci6t6  des  Nations,  &  Teffet  d'fitre 

work  of  economic  and  financial  re-  aid6&mamtenirlrGeuvrede  restaura- 

construction  undertaken  in  conse-  tion  6conomique  et  finanoi&re  entre- 

quence  of  the  decision  of  the  Council  prise  &  la  suite  de  la  decision  du  Con- 

of  the  League  of  Nations  of  October  seil  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations  du  4 

4th,  I922,2  and  of  the  signature  of  octobre  1922 2  et  de  la  signature  des 

the  three  Protocols  of  the  same  date;  trois  protocoles  de  la  mUnie  date; 

That  the  Austrian  Government  Que  le  Gouvernement  autrichien 

reaffirms  its  intention  of  meeting  affirme  4  nouveau  sa  volontfi  de  faire 

punctually  all  its  foreign  obligations;  face  ppnctuellement  &  toutes  ses 

obligations  ext^rieures; 

That  the  Governments  of  Belgium,  Que  les  Gouvernements  de  la 

the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Brit-  Belgique,  du  Royaume-Uni  de 

ain  and  Northern  Ireland,  France,  Grande-Bretagne  et  d'Irlande  du 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3118,  December  31,  1932. 
*  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1922,  p.  1455.-— ED. 


July  15*  1932 

Italy,  are  ready  to  grant  further  as- 
sistance to  Austria  for  this  purpose; 

That  the  above  Governments,  in- 
cluding the  Austrian  Government, 
declare  that  such  assistance  is  given 
on  the  basis  of  Protocol  No.  I  signed 
at  Geneva  on  October  4th,  1922,  a.nd 
of  all  the  undertakings  resulting 
therefrom;  the  provisions  of  which 
Protocol  are  to  be  considered  as  here 
reproduced; 

The  Governments  of  Belgium,  the 
United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain 
and  Northern  Ireland,  France,  Italy, 
the  Netherlands,  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  Government  of  the  Austrian 
Federal  Republic,  on  the  other, 

Have  by  common  consent  drawn 
up  the  following  provisions: 

Article  i»  In  order  to  assist  the 
Austrian  Government  to  borrow  a 
sum  in  foreign  currencies,  freely  and 
immediately  ^available,  the  net 
amount  of  which  shall  be  equivalent 
to  a  maximum  of  approximately 
three  hundred  million  Austrian  schill- 
ings, at  the  present  legal  gold  parity, 
the  Governments  of  Belgium,  the 
United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain 
and  Northern  Ireland,  France,  Italy, 
the  Netherlands,  undertake  to  apply 
without  delay  for  such  authority 
as  may  be  required  under  their 
municipal  law  to  enable  them  either 
to  guarantee,  as  hereinafter  pro- 
vided, the  principal  and  interest  of 
part  of  such  loan  or  to  furnish  the 
amount  to  the  Austrian  Government 
in  another  manner.  In  case  of  an 
issue  on  their  markets,  they  will 
grant  facilities  for  the  issue  of  the 
amount  which  they  have  guaranteed. 

Art.  2. — (i)  There  will  be  no 
joint  guarantee  as  between  the  Gov- 
ernments. Each  Government  shall 
be  responsible  solely  for  the  share  in 
the  total  operation  which  it  is  to 
guarantee  or  to  provide.  No  guar- 
antor Government  will  be  liable  for 
the  service  or  the  repayment  of  a 


AUSTRIAN  PROTOCOL 


Nord,  de  la  France,  de  1'Italie  sont 
prSts  &  apporter  une  nouvelle  aide 
&  TAutriche  k  cet  effet; 

Que  les  Gouvernements  susdits,  y 
compris  le  Gouvernement  autrichien, 
d&clarent  fonder  cette  aide  sur  le 
Protocole  N°  I,  sign  6  &  Geneve  le  4 
octobre  1922,  avec  tous  les  engage- 
ments qu'il  comporte;  Protocole 
dont  les  dispositions  sont  consid6- 
r6es  comme  6tant  reproduites  ici; 

Les  Gouvernements  de  la  Bel- 
gique,  du  Royaume-Uni  de  Grande- 
Bretagne  et  d'Irlande  du  Nord,  de  la 
France,  de  PItalie,  des  Pays-Bas, 
d'une  part,  et  le  Gouvernement  de 
la  R&publique  frkl^rale  d'Autriche, 
d'autre  part, 

Ont  arr8t6  d'un  commun  accord 
les  dispositions  suivantes: 

Article  i.  Afin  de  faciliter  au 
Gouvernement  autrichien  Fobten- 
tion  &  F6tranger  d'une  sonime  en 
monnaies  6trang6res  librement  et 
imm<§diatement  disponibles,  dont  le 
montant  net  pourra  atteindre  la 
contre-valeur  de  trois  cents  millions 
de  schillings  autrichiens,  calculus  £ 
la  parit6-or  16gale  actuelle,  les  Gou- 
vernements de  la  Belgique,  du 
Royaurne-Uni  de  Grande-Bretagne 
et  dlrlande  du  Nord,  de  la  France, 
de  Tltalie,  des  Pays-Bas,  s'engagent 
&  demander  sans  d61ai  les  autorisa- 
tions  exig6es  6ventuellement  par  leur 
droit  interne,  soit  pour  pouvoir 
garantir,  dans  les  conditions  ci-apr&s 
denies,  en  principal  ou  en  int6rgts, 
une  part  de  cet  emprunt,  soit  pour 
en  fournir  le  montant  au  Gouverne- 
ment autrichien  par  une  autre  m6- 
thode.  En  cas  demission  sur  leur 
marchfe,  ils  faciliteront  remission 
du  montant  qu'ils  auront  garanti. 

Art.  2. — i)  Aucune  solidarity  ne 
Hera  les  gouvernements  garants. 
L/engagement  de  chacun  d'eux  por- 
tera  exclusivement  sur  la  part  i 
garantir  ou  4  fournir  par  lui  sur  le 
total  de  Top6ration.  Aucun  gou- 
vernement  garant  ne  pourra  £tre 
actionn^  pour  le  service  ou  le  rem- 


86 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  312 


bond  of  the  loan  not  included  in  the 
portion  guaranteed  by  it. 

As  regards  the  public  issues,  the 
Austrian  Government  will  prepare 
separate  bonds  for  the  portions  of 
the  loan  issued  in  each  country, 
specifically  stating  which  Govern- 
ment is  the  guarantor. 

The  various  national  issues  shall, 
however,  form  parts  of  one  single 
loan.  No  discrimination  may  be 
made  by  the  Austrian  Government 
in  carrying  out  its  obligations  as  re- 
gards these  different  issues  of  the 
loan.  The  service  and  the  repay- 
ment of  the  whole  of  the  loan  shall  be 
carried  out  on  conditions  to  be  laid 
down  in  the  General  Bond,  under  the 
control  of  one  or  more  trustees  ap- 
pointed by  the  Council  of  the  League 
of  Nations,  acting  jointly.1 


(li)  The  participating  Govern- 
ments shall,  at  the  moment  of  sign- 
ing, state  the  amounts  which  they 
undertake  to  guarantee  or  to  provide, 

(m)  The  expenses  of  issue,  nego- 
tiation and  delivery  of  each  issue 
shall  be  added  to  the  capital  of  the 
issue, 

(iv)  The  loan  shall  be  for  a  term 
of  twenty  years.  The  Austrian  Gov* 
emment  reserves  the  right  to  repay 
the  loan  before  the  expiration  of  that 
period,  after  ten  years,  on  conditions 
which  will  be  fixed  by  the  Commit- 
tee of  Guarantor  States  at  the  time 
the  operation  is  concluded.  Subject 
to  the  priorities  attached  to  the  Loan 
of  1923-1943,  the  Relief  Credits  and 
the  1930  Loan,  the  system  of  pledged 
assets  by  which  the  1923-1943  Loan 
is  secured  shall  be  made  to  apply  to 
the  present  loan.  The  manner  in 
which  this  shall  be  done  shall  be  set- 
tled in  detail  in  the  General  Bond. 
The  service  of  the  interest  and  the 


boursement  d'un  titre  de  1'emprunt 
non  cornpris  dans  la  tranche  garantie 
par  lui. 

En  ce  qui  concerne  les  tranches 
6mises  dans  le  public,  le  Gouverne- 
ment  autrichien  sera  tenu  d'6tablir, 
en  representation  de  chaque  tranche 
nationale,  des  titres  distincts  por- 
tant  nomm^ment  la  mention  du 
gouvernement  garant. 

Toutefois,  les  diff&rentes  tranches 
nationales  ne  constituent  que  les 
parties  d'un  seul  et  m6me  emprunt, 
II  ne  saurait  y  avoir  aucune  dis- 
crimination de  la  part  du  Gouverne- 
ment autrichien  dans  1 'execution  de 
ses  obligations  au  titre  des  diverses 
tranches.  Le  service  et  le  rembourse- 
ment  de  Fensenible  de  Femprunt 
devront  &tre  effectu£s  dans  des  condi- 
tions &  d6terminer  par  Fobligation 
g&n6rale  entre  les  mains  dfun  ou 
plusieurs  mandataires  d6sign6s  par 
le  Conseil  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations, 
et  agissant  solidairement.1 

n)  Les  gouvernements  partici- 
pants ddclareront,  au  moment  de 
signer  le  present  protocole,  les  mon* 
tants  qu'ils  s'engagent  &  garantir  ou 
i  founiir. 

in)  Les  frais  aff£rents  &  F&nission, 
4  la  nfigociation  et  &  la  remise  de 
chaque  emprunt  seront  ajout6s  au 
capital  de  cet  emprunt. 

iv)  L'emprunt  sera  conclu  pour 
vingt  annles.  Le  Gouvernement 
autrichien  se  reserve  la  facult£  de 
rembourser  cet  emprunt  par  antici- 
pation, apr&s  dix  ans»  aux  conditions 
qui  seront  d^termin^es  par  le  Comit6 
des  Etats  garants  au  moment  de  la 
conclusion  de  Fop^ration.  Abstrac- 
tion faite  des  rangs  de  priority  at- 
tribu^s  &  remprunt  de  19^3-1943, 
aux  credits  de  rel&vement  et  &  Fem- 
prunt de  1930,  le  syst&me  de  gages 
affect^s  &  Femprunt  de  1923-1943 
est  6tendu  au  present  emprunt.  Les 
rnodalit^s  de  cette  extension  seront 
r£gl£es  dans  Fobligation  gfe^rale, 
Le  service  des  int6r€ts  du  present 


1  The  trustees  were  appointed  on  July  8r  1933.    League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1933, 
p.  looo.— ED. 


July  15,  1932 


AUSTRIAN  PROTOCOL 


87 


repayment  of  the  present  loan  shall 
be  free  of  all  taxes,  dues  or  charges, 
present  or  future,  for  the  benefit  of 
the  Austrian  State  or  of  any  other 
Austrian  authority. 

(v)  The  terms  of  issue  (rates  of 
interest,  expenses,  issue  prices,  the 
form  of  guarantee,  etc.)  shall  be 
submitted  for  approval  to  the  Com- 
mittee of  Guarantor  States  created 
by  the  Austrian  Protocol  No.  II  of 
October  4th,  1922,  or  to  persons  ap- 
pointed by  that  Committee;  and  any 
reference  to  the  League  of  Nations 
in  the  prospectus  of  issue  shall  simi- 
larly be  approved  by  the  Chairman 
of  the  Financial  Committee.  Those 
Governments  which  have  signed  the 
present  Protocol  without  being  par- 
ties to  the  Austrian  Protocol  No.  II 
of  October  4th,  1922,  shall  be  invited 
to  send  representatives  to  the  Com- 
mittee of  the  Guarantor  States. 

Art.  3.  The  proceeds  of  the  oper- 
ation shall  be  utilised  by  the  Aus- 
trian Government  for  the  objects  set 
out  in  Annex  I,  in  agreement,  as  the 
case  may  be,  with  the  representative 
of  the  League  of  Nations  or  the 
Adviser  to  the  National  Bank  re- 
ferred to  in  Article  7. 

Art.  4.  The  Austrian  Govern- 
ment undertakes  to  take  the  neces- 
sary steps  to  restore  without  delay 
and  to  maintain  complete  equilibrium 
between  the  revenue  and  expenditure 
of  the  State ;  it  similarly  undertakes 
to  take  all  steps  necessary  to  re- 
establish without  delay  the  financial 
equilibrium  of  the  Austrian  State 
Railways  and,  in  particular,  to  carry 
out  the  programme  of  budgetary  and 
financial  reforms  set  out  in  Annex  II. 

Art.  5*  Austrian  monetary  policy 
will  aim  at  the  abolition  as  soon  as 
possible,  subject  to  the  necessary 
safeguards,  of  the  difference  between 
the  internal  and  external  value  of 
the  schilling,  and,  in  consequence, 
at  the  progressive  removal  of  the 
existing  control  over  exchange  trans- 


emprunt  et  son  remboursement  en 
principal  seront  exempts  de  tous 
imp6ts,  droits  ou  charges,  presents 
ou  futurs,  institu6s  au  profit  de 
PEtat  autrichien  ou  de  toute  autre 
autorit6  autrichienne. 

v)  Les  conditions  de  remission 
(taux  d'intfirfit,  frais,  prix  d Emission, 
la  forme  que  rev^tira  la  garantie,  etc.) 
seront  soumises,  pour  approbation, 
au  Comit6  des  Etats  garants  institu6 
par  le  Protocole  autrichien  N°  II 
du  4  octobre  1922  ou  aux  personnes 
d£sign6es  par  ce  Cpmit6;  le  president 
du  Comit6  financier  approuvera  de 
m€me  les  termes  de  toute  r6f£rence 
&  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations  dans  les 
prospectus  demission.  Les  gouver- 
nements  qui  ont  sign 6  le  present 
protocole  sans  6tre  parties  au  Proto- 
cole autrichien  N°  II  du  4  octobre 
1922  seront  invites  &  envoyer  des 
repr<§sentants  au  Comit6  des  Etats 
garants. 

Art  3.  Le  produit  de  Pop6ration 
sera  utilis6  par  le  Gouvernement 
autrichien  aux  fins  d6finies  &  Pan- 
nexe  I,  d 'accord,  suivant  le  cas, 
avec  le  repr6sentant  de  la  Soci6t6 
des  Nations  ou  le  conseiller  aupr^s 
de  la  Banque  nationale  vis^s  & 
Particle  7. 

Art*  4.  Le  Gouvernement  au- 
trichien s'engage  £  prendre  les  me- 
sures  n6cessaires  pour  r^tablir  sans 
d<§lai  et  maintenir  un  coinplet  &qui- 
libre  entre  les  recettes  et  les  d6penses 
de  PEtat;  il  s'engage  de  m6me  & 
prendre  toutes  les  mesures  n6ces- 
saires  pour  r<§tablir  sans  d^lai  P6qui- 
libre  financier  des  Chemins  de  fer 
de  PEtat  autrichien  et,  notamment, 
&  ex^cuter  le  programme  de  reformes 
budg^taires  et  financi&res  arr§t6  & 
Pannexe  II. 

Art.  5.  La  politique  mon6taire 
de  PAutriche  se  proposera  d'abolir, 
dans  un  d61ai  aussi  bref  que  possible 
et  sous  les  sauvegardes  n^cessaires, 
P6cart  existaxit  entre  la  valeur  du 
schilling  &  Pint&ieur  et  &  P6tranger 
et  sera,  par  consequent,  orient£e  vers 
la  suppression  progressive  du  con- 


88 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  312 


actions  and   the  resulting  obstruc- 
tions to  international  trade. 


Art.  6.— (i)  It  is  agreed  that  the 
settlement  of  the  question  of  the 
Creditanstalt  must  form  part  of  the 
programme  of  financial  reforms  which 
are  the  object  of  the  present  Protocol. 

(n)  The  Austrian  Government 
will  take  all  possible  steps  without 
delay  to  conclude  an  agreement  with 
the  foreign  creditors  of  the  Credit- 
anstalt, This  agreement  will  take 
account  of  the  necessity  for  avoiding 
excessive  pressure  on  the  schilling. 

(in)  The  Austrian  Government 
undertakes  to  effect  a  settlement  of 
the  debt  of  the  Creditanstalt  to  the 
National  Bank  and  to  issue  as  soon 
as  possible  one  or  more  internal  loans 
of  a  total  amount  of  not  less  than  200 
million  schillings  for  the  partial 
reimbursement  of  the  debt  due  by 
the  State  to  the  National  Bank. 

Art.  7.  The  Austrian  Government 
will  request  the  Council  of  the  League 
of  Nations  to  appoint  a  representa- 
tive of  the  League  of  Nations,  and  to 
nominate  an  Adviser  to  the  National 
Bank  of  Austria,1  with  the  object  of 
continuing  the  collaboration  con- 
templated in  the  declarations  made 
in  September  1931  by  the  Austrian 
Federal  Chancellor  and  in  the  pro- 
visions of  the  present  Protocol  and 
its  Annexes. 

Art.  8.  The  Committee  of  Guar- 
antor States  shall  continue  to  per- 
form its  functions  until  the  loan 
provided  for  in  the  present  Protocol 
has  been  entirely  repaid. 

Art  9.— (i)  All  decisions  to  be 
taken  by  the  Council  of  the  League 
of  Nations  in  virtue  of  the  present 
Protocol  shall  be  taken  by  a  majority 
vote. 

(IT)  Any  dispute  as  to  the  interpre- 
tation of  the  present  Protocol  shall 


trOleactuellement  impose  aux  opera- 
tions de  change  et,  partunl,  des 
entraves  aux  ^changes  internatio- 
naux. 

Art.  6.— i)  II  est  convenu  quo  le 
r&glement  de  la  question  de  la  Credit- 
anstalt doit  faire  parlie  du  pro- 
gramme de  r6formes  rinancieres  qui 
font  Tobjet  du  present  protocole. 

li)  Le  Gouvernement  autrichien 
fera  sans  dfilai  tous  ses  efforts  pour 
conclure  un  accord  avec  les  crean- 
ciers  etrangers  de  la  Creditanstalt, 
accord  qui  devra  tenir  compte  de  la 
necessity  d'eviter  qu'une  pression 
excessive  ne  s'exerce  sur  le  schilling. 

nr)  Le  Gouvernement  autrichien 
s'engage  &  r6gler  la  dettc  de  la  Credit- 
anstalt envers  la  Banque  nationnle 
et  &  6mettre  dans  un  d&lai  aussi  bref 
que  possible  un  ou  plusicurs  em- 
prunts  int6rieurs  dont  le  procluit 
total  ne  sera  pas  inf6rieur  &  200  mil- 
lions de  schillings  et  sera  affect6 
au  remboursement  partiel  de  la  dette 
de  TEtat  &  la  Banque  nationale. 

Art.  7.  Le  Gouvernement  au- 
trichien demandera  au  Con  soil  cle  la 
Socitfte  des  Nations  de  nommer  un 
reprc'vsentant  de  la  Soci6te  des  Na- 
tions et  de  cosigner  un  conseiller 
auprtis  de  la  Banque  nationale  d'Au- 
triche,1  en  vue  de  continuer  la  collabo- 
ration envisagfie  par  les  declarations 
que  le  chancelier  fM6ral  d'Autriche 
a  faites  en  septernbre  1931,  ainsi 
que  par  les  dispositions  du  present 
protocole  et  de  ses  annexes, 

Art  8.  Le  Comitfi  des  Etats 
garants  continuera  4  exercer  ses 
fonctions  jusqu'au  remboursement 
integral  de  Pemprunt  pr6vu  par  le 
present  protocole. 

Art.  9.— i)  Toutes  les  decisions 
que  le  Conseil  de  la  Sociotfi  des 
Nations  pourrait  avoir  &  prendre  en 
vertu  du  prfisent  protocole  seront 
prises  &  la  majorit6  des  voix. 

11)  Tout  diff^rend  portant  sur  1'in- 
terpr^tation  du  present  protocole  sera 


1  On  the*  appointment  of  those  officials,  sec  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1932, 
p.  1280.  On  the  termination  of  these  posts  as  from  November  r,  1936,  see  idem,  1936, 
p.  1171.— Eo. 


July  15, 


AUSTRIAN  PROTOCOL 


be  settled  by  the  Council  by  a 
majority  vote. 

Art  io.— (i)  The  present  Protocol, 
of  which  the  English  and  French 
texts  are  equally  authentic,  shall 
remain  open  to  signature  by  all  Gov- 
ernments which  desire  to  accede 
thereto.  The  Protocol  shall  be  rati- 
fied, and  the  ratifications  shall  be 
deposited  with  the  Secretariat  of  the 
League  of  Nations. 

(n)  The  present  Protocol  shall  be 
approved  by  the  Council  of  the 
League  of  Nations.  It  shall  enter 
into  force  as  regards  the  Govern- 
ments which  have  ratified  it  as  soon 
as  the  ratifications  of  Austria,  the 
United  Kingdom,  France  and  Italy 
have  been  deposited.  In  order  to 
enable  the  Protocol  to  enter  into 
force,  the  ratifications  of  the  above- 
mentioned  States  must  be  deposited 
not  later  than  December  3ist,  1932. 
The  Protocol  shall  enter  into  force 
as  regards  each  of  the  other  signatory 
Governments  on  the  date  of  deposit 
of  that  Government's  ratification. 

IN  FAITH  WHEREOF,  the  under- 
signed, duly  authorised,  have  signed 
the  present  Protocol. 

Done  at  Geneva,  the  fifteenth  day 
of  July,  nineteen  hundred  and  thirty- 
two,  in  a  single  copy,  which  shall  be 
deposited  at  the  Secretariat  of  the 
League  of  Nations. 


r£g!6  par  le  Conseil  statuant  &  la 
majorit6  des  voix. 

Art.  10. — i)  Le  pr6sent  protocole, 
dont  le  texte  frangais  et  le  texte 
anglais  font  figalement  foi,  restera 
ouvert  A  la  signature  de  tous  les 
gouvernements  qui  voudront  y  ad- 
h6rer.  Le  protocole  sera  ratifi6, 
et  les  instruments  de  ratification 
seront  d6posfis  au  Secr6tariat  de  la 
Soci6t£  des  Nations. 

n)  Le  prisent  protocole  sera  ap- 
prouv6  par  le  Conseil  de  la  Soci6t6 
des  Nations.  II  entrera  en  vigueur 
pour  les  gouvernements  qui  1'auront 
ratifi6  d£s  que  les  instruments  de 
ratification  de  FAutriche,  du  Roy- 
aume-Uni,  de  la  France  et  de  Tltalie 
auront  6t6  d£pos£s.  Pour  que  le 
pr6sent  protocole  puisse  entrer  en 
vigueur,  les  ratifications  des  Etats 
ci-dessus  mentionn6s  devront  ^tre 
d6pos6es  au  plus  tard  le  31  d<§cembre 
1932.  II  entrera  en  vigueur  pour 
chacun  des  autres  gouvernements 
signataires  &  la  date  du  d6p6t  de  la 
ratification, 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI  les  soussign^s, 
dfiment  autoris^s  &  cet  effet,  ont 
sign6  le  present  protocole. 

Fait  &  Geneve,  le  quinze  juillet  mil 
neuf  cent  trente-deux,  en  un  seul 
exemplaire,  qui  sera  d6pos6  au 
Secretariat  de  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations. 


[Signed:]  Austria  (Pour  le  Gouvernement  autridbien:),  E.  PFLtteL;  Belgium 
(Pour  le  Gouvernement  beige:  Cinq  millons  de  schillings  autrichiens,),  JULES  LE 
JEUNE  DE  M  toss ACH;  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern 
Ireland  (For  the  Government  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland:  One  hundred 
million  [100,000,000]  schillings),  JOHN  SlMON;  France  (Pour  le  Gouvernement  de 
la  R^publique  fran^aise  et  en  me  r6f6rant  &  la  declaration  faite  par  moi  au  Conseil  le 
15  juillet  1932:  Cent  millions  [100,000.000]  de  schillings.  R.  M.)>  R*  MASSIGLT; 
Italy  (Pour  le  Gouvernement  d'ltalie:  Trente  millions  [30.000.000]  de  schillings), 
VlTTQWQ  SCIALOJA;  The  Netherlands  (Pour  le  Gouvernement  des  Pays-Bas: 
Trois  millions  de  schillings  autrichiens),  W.  DOUDE  VAN  TROOSTWIJK.  [The  pro- 
tocol was  signed  on  behalf  of  Czechoslovakia  on  January  20,  1934,  for  four  million 
Austrian  schillings.] 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  312 


ANNEX  I 

UTILISATION  OP  THE  PROCEEDS  OF  THE 

OPERATION  PROVIDED  FOR  BY  THE 

PROTOCOL 

1.  The  proceeds  in  foreign  exchange 
shall  be  credited  to  a  special  account  or 
accounts  as  directed   by   the  Austrian 
Government  in  agreement  with  the  repre- 
sentative of  the  League  of  Nations. 

2.  The  advance  of  100  million  schillings 
made  by  the  Bank  of  England  to  the 
Austrian  Government  shall  be  repaid  out 
of  the  proceeds  of  the  loan. 

3.  The  Austrian  Government  shall  sell 
the  remaining  foreign  exchange  to  the 
Austrian  National  Bank  on  conditions  to 
be  fixed  in  agreement  with  the  representa- 
tive of  the  League  of  Nations. 

4.  The  use  to  be  made  of  the  foreign 
exchange  thus  sold  by  the  Austrian  Gov- 
ernment to  the  Austrian  National  Bank 
shall  be  decided  in  agreement  with  the 
Adviser  to  the  Bank. 

5.  The  amount  in  schillings  resulting 
from  such  sales  shall  be  credited  to  a 
special  account  of  the  Austrian  Govern- 
ment at  the  National  Bank;  this  amount 
in  schillings—- with  the  exception,  if  neces- 
sary, of  a  sum  to  be  determined  in  agree- 
ment  with   the    representative   of   the 
League  of  Nations — shall  be  used  to  repay 
part  of  the  internal  floating  debt  of  the 
State  and  of  the  Railways,  on  condition 
that  the  creditors  who  thus  obtain  repay- 
ment shall  simultaneously  reduce  their 
indebtedness  to  the  Austrian  National 
Bank  by  corresponding  amounts.    The 
Government  may  only  draw  on  the  sums 
standing  to  the  credit  of  this  account  in 
agreement  with  the  representative  of  the 
League  of  Nations. 


ANNEXE  I 

UTILISATION  DU  PRODUIT  DBS  OPERATIONS 
PR&VTJBS  PAR  LE  PROTOCOLE 

1 .  Le  produit  en  devises  6trangeres  sera 
verse"  au  credit  d'un  ou  plusieurs  comptes 
sp6ciaux    suivant    les^  instructions    du 
Gouvernement  autrichien  donnfe?  avec 
1'accord  du  repr&sentant  de  la  Social  6 
des  Nations. 

2.  L'avance  de  100  millions  cle  schil- 
lings, consentie  par  la  Banque  d'Angle- 
terre  au  Gouvernement  autrichien,  sera 
remboursee  sur  le  produit  de  Top6ration, 

3.  Le  Gouvernement  autrichien  vcndra 
&  la  Banque  nationale  d'Autriche  le  re- 
liquat  des  devises  e'trangeres  dans  des 
conditions  qui  seront  fix6es  d'accord  avec 
le  repre"sentant  cle  la  Soci&te'  des  Nations. 

4.  L'utilisation  des  devises  6trangeres 
que  le  Gouvernement  autrichien  aura  ainsi 
vendues  a  la  Banque  nationale  d'Autriche 
sera  d£termin6e  en  accord  avec  le  con- 
seiller  aupr&s  de  la  Banque. 

5.  La  contre-valeur  en  schillings  sera 
port6e  au  credit  d'un  compte  special  ou- 
vert  par  la  Banque  nationale  au  Gouverne- 
ment autrichien;  sauf,  dventuellcmcnt,  un 
montant  a  determiner  d'accord  avec  le 
repr6sentant  cle  la  Soci6t6  des  Nations, 
ces  schillings  serviront  au  rembourcemcnt 
d'une  partie  de  la  dette  flottante  inte'rieure 
de  I'Etat  et  des  Chemins  de  fer,  et  ce, 
a  la  condition  que  les  cr6anciers,  ainsi 
rembourseX  r6duisent  en  m$me  temps  et 
pour  un  montant  Equivalent,  leur  dettc 
envers  la  Banque  nationale  d'Autriche. 
Le  Gouvernement  ne  pourra  disposer  des 
sommes  inscrites  a  ce  compte  qu'en  accord 
avec  le  reprfeentant  de  la  Soci£t£  des 
Nations. 


ANNEX  II 

PROGRAMME  OF  BUDGETARY  AND 
FINANCIAL  REFORMS 

i.  In  conformity  with  the  declaration 
made  before  the  Financial  Committee  by 
the  Austrian  Chancellor  in  September 
I93i>*  the  Austrian  Government  will  take 
every  step  necessary  to  restore  without 
delay  and  to  maintain  equilibrium  be- 
tween its  revenue  and  expenditure. 

In  order  to  ensure  the  application  of         Aim  d'assurer  Implication  cle  ce  prin- 
this  principle  from  1932  onwards,  further      cipe  dfcs   1932,   de  nou voiles  Economies 
*  See  League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1931,  p.  2408.— ED. 


ANNEXE  II 
PROGRAMME  BE  RJ-CFORMBS  BUDGET  AIRES 

ET  FlNANCI&RKS 

I.  Conformenient  a  la  declaration  que 
le  Chancelier  de  la  Confederation  au- 
trichienne  a  faite  en  septembre  1931  de- 
vant  le  comlte"  financier,3-  le  Gouvernement 
autrichien  prendra  toutes  mesures  n6ces- 
saires  pour  re"tablir  sans  d6Iai  et  pour 
niaintenir  r6quilibre  de  ses  recettcs  et  ses 


July  15,  1932 


AUSTRIAN  PROTOCOL 


permanent  economies  sufficient  to  secure 
the  balancing  of  the  budget  for  the  current 
financial  year,  estimated  on  the  basis  of 
present  figures  at:  45  million  schillings, 
must  be  made  during  the  second  half  of 
the  current  year,  in  addition  to  those 
provided  for  in  the  supplementary  budget 
which  has  been  submitted  to  the  Council 
of  Ministers. 

In  view  of  the  special  circumstances 
and  having  regard  to  the  arrangements 
contemplated  in  Annex  I  for  reducing  the 
short-term  debt  of  the  State,  the  roo- 
million-schilling  surplus  provided  in  the 
present  budget  for  the  repayment  of  short- 
term  obligations  may  be  applied  to  cur- 
rent needs  such  as  the  deficit  on  the 
Railways. 

2,  The  Austrian  Government  under- 
takes to  carry  out  without  delay  the 
general  programme  of  economies  and  re- 
organisation contained  in  the  report  of 
Dr.  Herold,  the  railway  expert  who  was 
entrusted  with  the  enquiry  into  the  ad- 
ministration and  policy  of  the  Railway 
system,  in  conformity  with  the  declara- 
tion made  by  the  Chancellor  last  Septem- 
ber. 

An  expert  appointed  by  the  Council  of 
the  League  of  Nations  shall  be  invited  by 
the  Austrian  Government  to  decide  to 
what  extent  the  capital  outlays  ("Investi- 
tionen")  of  the  Railways  are  really  indis- 
pensable and  to  what  extent  they  could ,  in 
view  of  the  present  financial  difficulties, 
be  postponed. 

3*  All  borrowing  operations  of  the 
Austrian  State,  whether  external  or  in- 
ternal (other  than  those  under  the  stand- 
ing authority  to  issue  Treasury  Bills  up  to 
75  million  schillings),  remain  subject  to 
the  approval  of  the  Committee  of  Guar- 
antor States.  The  Austrian  State  Rail- 
ways shall  for  this  purpose  be  regarded  as 
a  part  of  the  Austrian  State  and  shall  not 
be  authorised  to  contract  any  loan  unless 
the  Minister  of  Finance  certifies  that  the 
approval  of  the  Committee  of  Guarantor 
States  has  been  duly  obtained. 


As  regards  contracts  on  a  credit  basis 
for  supplies  or  works  which  involve  a 
substantial  charge  on  future  budgets,  in- 
cluding the  budget  of  the  Railways,  the 
representative  of  the  League  of  Nations 
shall  determine  whether  these  operations 
present  an  exceptional  character  warrant- 


durables,  suffisantes  pour  pbtenir  l'£qui- 
libre  du  budget  de  Fexercice  courant  et 
dont  le  montant  sur  la  base  des  chiffres 
actuels  est  6valu6  a.  45  millions  de  schil- 
lings, devront  £tre  realisees  pendant  le 
second  semestre  de  Fannee  cpurante,  in- 
dependamment  des  economies  preVues 
par  le  budget  supplementaire,  qui  a  6t6 
soumis  au  Conseil  des  ministres. 

Vu  les  circonstances  speaales  et  compte 
tenu  des  arrangements  envisages  &  1 'an- 
nexe I  pour  la  reduction  de  la  dette  4 
court  ternie  de  1'Etat,  la  marge  de  100 
millions  de  schillings  qui  avait  6t6 
rn6nag6e  dans  le  present  budget  en  vue  du 
remboursement  des  obligations  4  court 
terme,  pourra  8tre  aflectee  a  des  besoins 
courants  tels  que  la  couverture  du  deficit 
des  Chemins  de  fer. 

2.  Le  Gouvernement  autrichien  s'en- 
gage  a  mettre  a  execution  sans  delai  le 
programme   general   d 'economies   et   de 
reorganisation  contenu  dans  le  rapport  du 
Dr  Herold,  Fexpert  ferroviaire  qui  a  6t6 
charg6  de  proceder  a  une  enqueue  sur 
1 'administration     et    la     politique     des 
chemins  de  fer,  conformement  a  la  decla- 
ration faite  par  le  chancelier  en  septembre 
dernier. 

tin  expert  design^  par  le  Conseil  de  la 
Societ6  des  Nations  sera  invit&  par  le 
Gouvernement  autrichien  a  d6terminer 
dans  quelle  mesure  les  d6penses  d'eta- 
blissement  ("Investitionen")  des  chemins 
de  fer  sont  reellement  indispensables  et 
dans  quelle  mesure  elles  pourraient  @tre 
ajournees,  6tant  donn6  les  difficult6s 
fmancieres  du  moment. 

3.  Toutes  les  operations  d'emprunt  de 
1'Etat  autrichien,  tant  exterieures  qu'in- 
teiieures    (a  1'exception   des   op6rations 
visees    par    1'autorisation    permanente 
d'emettre  des  bons  du  Tresor  jusqu'&  con- 
currence  de   75    millions   de   schillings) 
demeurent  subordonnees  a  Fapprobation 
du  Comit6  des  Etats  garants,  Les  chemins 
de  fer  de  1'Etat  autrichien  seront  &  cet 
eflfet  consid&res  comme  faisant  partie  de 
1'Etat    autrichien    et    ne    devront    tee 
autorises  a  contracter  aucun  emprunt  que 
si  le  ministre  des  Finances  certifie  que 
I'op^ration  a  6t^  dument  approuvee  par 
le  Comit6  des  Etats  garants. 

En  ce  qui  concerne  les  marches  &  credit 
de  fournitures  ou  de  travaux  comportant 
une  charge  importante  pour  les  budgets 
futurs,  y  compris  les  budgets  des  chemins 
de  fer,  le  repr6sentant  de  la  Societ6  des 
Nations  jugera  si  ces  operations  pr6sen- 
tent  un  caractere  exceptionnel  justifiant 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  312 


ing  recourse  to  the  procedure  provided  for 
in  the  preceding  paragraph. 

Having  regard  to  the  provisions  of 
Annex  I,  no  issue  of  Treasury  Bills  or 
other  similar  short-term  operation  shall  be 
carried  out  by  the  Austrian  Government 
on  the  home  market  unless  the  prior  con- 
sent of  the  representative  of  the  League 
has  been  given, 

4.  In  conformity  with  the  declaration 
of  the  Chancellor  made  last  September, 
the  Austrian  Government  will  use  its  ex- 
isting powers  in  order  to  secure  that  the 
budgets  of  the  "Lander"  and  of  the  Com- 
munes are  balanced.     It  will  come  to  an 
agreement  with   these  local  authorities 
with  a  view  to  obtaining  such  extension  of 
its  powers  of  control  as  may  be  necessary, 
particularly  as  regards  borrowing;  all  such 
borrowing  operations  must  in  future  be 
approved  by  the  Austrian  Government, 
which  will  give  its  consent  on  the  motion 
of  the  Minister  of  Finance  after  previous 
consultation  with  the  National  Bank  and 
the    representative    of    the    League    of 
Nations. 

5.  Every   proposed   credit   operation, 
either  by  a  private  individual  or  by  a 
public  or  private  corporation,  which  in- 
volves foreign  indebtedness  of  more  than 
one  million  schillings,  must  be  brought  to 
the  knowledge  of  the  Austrian  National 
Bank  before  being  carried  out. 

6.  The  Austrian  Government  will  revise 
the  general  legislation  on  banks  in  con- 
formity with  the  September  declaration, 

7.  In  conformity  with  the  declaration 
made  in  September,  and  in  view  of  the 
responsibility  assumed  by  the  Austrian 
Government  in  regard  to  the  Creditan- 
stalt,  the  Government  will  take  the  neces- 
sary steps  to  secure  a  reduction  in  the 
administrative  expenses  of  that  bank  and 
of  the  other  banks  operating  in  Austria. 


le    recours    a    la    procedure    prevue    <\ 
1'alinea  pr6c6dent. 

Vu  les  dispositions  cle  {'annexe  I»  Io 
Gouvernement  autrichien  ne  procederu  <\ 
aucune  emission  de  bons  du  Trcsor  ni  ;\ 
d'autres  operations  analogues  a  court 
terme  sur  le  marche  mterieur  sans  s'etro 
assurd  au  prealable  Fassentiment  du  repre- 
sentant  de  la  Societ6  des  Nations. 

4.  Conforniement  a  la  declaration  faite 
en  septembre  dernier  par  le  chancelier,  le 
Gouvernement  autrichien  fera  usage  des 
pouvoirs    qu'il    possede    pour     assurer 
requilibre  ties  budgets  des  "Lander"  et 
des    communes.     II    conclura    avec    cos 
autorites  locales  un  arrangement  en  vue 
de  toute  extension  de  ses  pouvoirs  de 
contrCle  qui  pourra  8tre  nccessaire,  not  am- 
ment  en  ce  qui  concerne  les  emprunts; 
toutes  ces  operations  d'emprunt  devront 
&  1'avenir  toe  approuvees  par  le  Gouverne- 
ment autrichien,  qui  donnera  son  assenli- 
nient  sur  la  proposition  du  ministre  des 
Finances,  qui  aura  consult^  au  prealable 
la  Banque  nationale  et  le  reprfeentant  de 
la  Society  des  Nations. 

5.  Toute  opdration  de  credit  projetee, 
soit  par  un  particulier,  soit  par  une  per- 
sonne  morale  de  droit  public  ou  de  droit 
prive,  devra,  avant  d'etre  rcalisee,  etre 
portee  a  la  connaissance  de  la  Banque 
nationale  d'Autriche,   si   elle   comport e 
vis-tVvis  de  If6tranger  un  endettement 
sup6rieur  a  un  million  de  schillings. 

6.  Le  Gouvernement  revisera  la  legisla- 
tion generale  sur  les  banquesconform6ment 
a  la  declaration  faite  en  septembre  dernier. 

7.  Conform6ment  &  la  declaration  faite 
en  septembre  dernier,  le  gouvernement , 
6tant   donn6   la   responsabilit6   <iu*il   a 
assumee  pour  la  Creditanstalt,  prendra  les 
mesures    necessaires    pour    obtenir    une 
reduction  des   frais   g£n6raux   de   cette 
banque  et  des  autres  banquos  travaillant 
en  Autriche. 


ANNEX  III 

LEAGUE  OF  NATIONS  REPRESENTATIVE 
AND  BANK  ADVISER 


i.  The  representative  of  the  League  of 
Nations  and  the  Adviser  to  the  Austrian 
National  Bank  appointed  under  Article  7 
of  the  Protocol  shall  carry  out  the  func- 
tions assigned  to  them  in  the  present 
Protocol  and  its  Annexes,  They  shall  be 
responsible  to  the  Council  and  removable 
by  it 


ANNEXE  III 

REPRllSBNTANT  DE  LA  SocrtT§  DES  NA- 
TIONS ET  CONSEILLE&  AUPR&S  DE  LA 
BANQUE 

i.  Le  repr€sentant  de  la  Soci6t6  des 
Nations  et  le  conseiller  aupres  de  la 
Banque  nationale  d'Autriche,  nommes 
aux  termes  de  1 'article  7  du  ptotocole, 
s'acquitteront  des  fonctions  qui  leur  sont 
attributes  par  le  present  protocole  et  ses 
annexes.  Ils  seront  responsables  vis-a- 
vis du  Conseil  et  revocables  par  lui» 


July  15,  1932 


AUSTRIAN  PROTOCOL 


93 


2.  The   Austrian   Government    under- 
takes to  collaborate  with  the  representa- 
tive of  the  League  of  Nations  with  regard 
to   the  execution   of  the   programme  of 
reforms  contained  in  the  declaration  of 
September  1931  and  in  the  present  Proto- 
col, and  further  to  furnish  him  with  all 
the  information  which  he  may  require  for 
the  execution  of  his  mission, 

3.  The  representative  of  the  League  of 
Nations   will    report    to   the   League   of 
Nations  every  three  months  on  the  execu- 
tion of  the  programme  of  reforms*     He 
will  further  address  supplementary  reports 
to  the  League  of  Nations  whenever  he 
thinks  it  desirable  to  bring  any  fact  as  a 
matter  of  urgency  to  the  knowledge  of  the 
League. 

4.  The  provisions  concerning  the  func- 
tions of  the  Adviser,  which  formerly  con- 
stituted Articles  124  to  129  of  the  Statutes 
of  the  Austrian  National  Bank  as  enacted 
by  the  Federal  Law  of  November  I4th, 
1922     ("Bundesgcsetzblatt"    No.    823), 
shall  be  re-incorporated  in  the  Statutes, 
except  that  the  words  "Commissioner- 
General  of  the  League  of  Nations*'  shall 
be  replaced  by  the  words  **  Council  of  the 
League  of  Nations", 

5.  The  representative  of  the  League  of 
Nations  shall  provide  himself  with  the 
necessary  staff.     His  expenses  and  those 
of  his  office  shall  be  approved  by  the 
Council  and  defrayed  by  Austria.     The 
representative  of  the  League  of  Nations 
shall  enjoy  diplomatic  privileges;  he  and 
his  staff  shall  enjoy  fiscal  immunities. 

6.  The  Adviser  to  the  Austrian  Na- 
tional Bank  shall  enjoy  fiscal  immunities. 

7.  If  the  Austrian  Government  consid- 
ers that  the  representative  of  the  League 
of  Nations,  or  the  Adviser  to  the  National 
Bank,  has  abused  his  authority,  it  may 
appeal  to  the  Council  of  the  League  of 
Nations. 

8.  The   Council    shall    terminate    the 
appointment  of  the  representative  of  the 
League  of  Nations  and  of  the  Adviser  to 
the   Bank   when   it   decides   that   their 
services  are  no  longer  required.1 

9.  The  Council  shall  have  the  right,  if  it 
considers  it  necessary  having  regard  to  the 
financial  situation,  to  reappoint  the  repre- 
sentative of  the  League  of  Nations  or  the 
Bank  Adviser,  or  both;  but  such  a  measure 


2.  Le  Gouvernement  autrichien  s'en- 
gage  a  collaborer  avec  le  repr6sentant  de 
la  Societ6  des  Nations  en  ce  qui  concerne 
Pexecution   du   programme   de   reformes 
contenu    dans    la    declaration    faite    en 
septembre  1931  et  dans  le  present  proto- 
cole;  il  s'engage,  en  outre,  a  fournir  &  ce 
repr6sentant  toutes  les  informations  dont  il 
pourra  avoir  besom  pour  remplir  sa  mission. 

3.  Le  representant  de  la  Soclet£  des 
Nations  adressera  tous  les  trois  mois  un 
rapport  £  la  Societ6  des  Nations  sur  Tap- 
plication  du  programme  de  reformes,     II 
adressera,    en    outre,    &    la    Societe,   des 
Nations    des    rapports    supplementaires 
chaque  fois  qu'il  jugera  utile  de  porter 
d'urgence   un   fait  a  la  connaissance  de 
cette  derniere. 

4.  Les  dispositions  concernant  les  fonc- 
tions  du  conseiller  qui  constituaient  au- 
trefois  les  articles   124  jusqu'a   129  des 
Statuts  de  la   Banque   nationale  autri- 
chienne  tels  qu'ils  etaient  arr&tes  par  la  loi 
fed6rale  du  14  novembre  1922  ("Bundes- 
gesetzblatt"  n°  823),  seront  reincorporees 
a  ces  Statuts,  sauf  toutefois  qu'aux  mots 
"Commissaire  general  de  la  Society  des 
Nations"  il  faudra  substituer  les  mots 
"Conseil  de  la  Societ6  des  Nations". 

5%  Le  representant  de  la  Societ&  des 
Nations  s'adjoindra  le  personnel  neces- 
saire.  Ces  depenses,  ainsi  que  celles  de 
son  service,  seront  approuvees  par  le 
Conseil  et  seront  &  la  charge  de  FAutriche. 
Le  representant  de  la  Societ6  des  Nations 
jouira  des  privileges  diplomatiques ;  il 
jouira  en  outre  de  rimmunit6  fiscale, 
ainsi  que  son  personnel. 

6.  Le  conseiller  auprds  de  la  Banque 
nationale  d'Autriche  jouira  de  I'immunit6 
fiscale. 

7.  Si  le  Gouvernement  autrichien  es- 
time  que  le  repr6sentant  de  la  Societ6  des 
Nations   ou   le   conseiller  aupres   de   la 
Banque    nationale    ont    abuse,    de    leur 
autorit^,  il  pourra  adresser  un  recours  au 
Conseil  de  la  Spciet6  des  Nations. 

8.  Le  Conseil  mettra  fin  aux  fonctions 
du  representant  de  la  Societe.  des  Nations  et 
du  conseiller  aupres  de  la  Banque  lorsqu'il 
jugera  qu'il  n'est  plus  necessaire  de  con- 
server  les  services  de  ces  fonctionnaires,  * 

9.  Le  Conseil  aura  le  droit,  s'il  le  juge 
n6cessaire,  en  egard  a  la  situation  finan- 
ciere,  de  retablir  les  fonctions,  soit  du 
repr6sentant  de  la  Societe.  des  Nations, 
soit  du  conseiller  aupres  de  la  Banque,  soit 
de  ces  deux  fonctionnaires;  toutefois,  une 


may  only  be  taken  if  the  funds  borrowed 

i  By  a  resolution  of  the  Council  of  September  25,  1936,  these  posts  were  terminated  as  from 
November  i,  1936.     League  of  Nations  Official  Journal,  1936,  p.  1171. — ED. 


94  INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION  No.  313 

either  in  virtue  of  the  present  Protocol  or  telle  mesure  ne  pourra  £tre  prise  que  si  les 

through  the  Guaranteed  Loan  of  1923-  fonds  emprunte's,  soit  en  vertu  du  present 

1943  have  not  been  entirely  repaid.  protocole,  soit  au  moyen  de  1'emprunt 

garanti  1923-1943,  n'ont  pas  et6  int£grale- 

ment  rembourses. 

10.  After  the  termination  of  the  ap-  10.  Apres  la  cessation  des  fonctions  du 

pointment  of  the   representative  of  the  repr£sentant  de  la  Societe  des  Nations,  un 

League  of  Nations,  contact  shall  be  main-  contact  sera  maintenu  entre  le  Gouverne- 

tained  between  the  Austrian  Government  mentautrichienetrOrgamsationfinanci&re 

and   the  Financial   Organisation  of  the  de  la  Societe"  des  Nations,  en  ce  sens  que 

League  of  Nations  by  the  preparation  and  1'Organisation  financi&re  de  la  Soci6t6  des 

publication  of  periodical  statements  on  Nations    preparera    p£riodiquement    et 

Austrian  public  finances  by  the  Financial  publiera  des  releves  de  la  situation  des 

Organisation  of  the  League  of  Nations,  finances     publiques     autrichiennes.     Le 

The  Austrian  Government  agrees  to  send  Gouvernement  autrichien  convient  d'en- 

a  Treasury  representative  to  discuss  the  voyer  un  repre*sentant  du  Ministere  des 

statements  so  prepared  with  the  Financial  Finances  pour  discuter  les  relev6s  ainsi 

Organisation.  pr6par6s  avec  1'Organisation  financi£re. 


No.  313 

CONVENTION  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers.     Signed  at 

Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 

CONVENTION   pour   Fabaissement    des   barrieres    economiques. 
Signee  a  Geneve,  18  juillet  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  This  convention,  commonly  known  as  the  "Ouchy  Convention,"  was 
opened  for  the  accession  of  all  states.  It  is  in  line  with  recommendations  made  by  the  World 
Economic  Conference  of  1927.  League  of  Nations  Document,  C.356.M. 129.1927. II,  pp. 
39-43.  See  also  the  commercial  convention  of  March  24,  1930  (No.  248,  ante),  and  the  con- 
vention of  economic  rapprochement  of  December  22,  1930  (No.  279,  ante). 

RATIFICATIONS.  On  January  I,  1937,  no  ratification  of  this  convention  had  been  de- 
posited at  The  Hague. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  H.  Bech,  "Ouchy-konventionen,"  3  Nor  disk  Tidsskrift  for  international 
Ret  (1932),  pp.  212-15;  H.  V.  Hodson,  "The  Belgo-Dutch  Convention,"  Survey  of  Inter- 
national Affairs,  1932,  pp.  34-40;  J.  Hostie,  "Du  libre  echange  &  la  rationalisation  des 
echanges,"  25  Revue  iconomigue inter nationale  (1933),  II,  pp.  219-58;  S.  de  Meeus,  "La  clause 
de  la  nation  la  plus  favoris6e  et  la  crise  economique,"  25  idem  (1933),  IV,  pp.  61-80;  J.  A. 
Nederbragt,  "  Autour  de  la  Convention  d'Ouchy,"  Grotius  Annuaire  ipjj,  pp.  55-92;  Anon., 
"La  convention  belgo-hollandaise  d'Ouchy  et  la  clause  de  la  nation  la  plus  favorisee,"  3 
Affaires  etrangeres  (1933),  pp.  490-5. 

Not  entered  into  force  (January  i,  1937). 

Text  supplied  by  the  Netherlands  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs;  translation  from  U.  S. 
Treaty  Information  Bulletin,  No.  37. 

[Translation] 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Bel-  Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  des  Beiges,  Son 
gians,  Her  Royal  Highness  the  Altesse  Royale  la  Grande-Duchesse 


July  1 8,  1932         OUCHY  CONVENTION  ON  ECONOMIC  BARRIERS 


95 


Grand  Duchess  of  Luxembourg  and 
Her  Majesty  the  Queen  of  the 
Netherlands, 

Taking  their  inspiration  from  the 
resolutions  of  the  Assembly  of  the 
League  of  Nations  and  the  concor- 
dant recommendations  of  the  best 
qualified  economic  experts  as  to  the 
necessity  for  ameliorating  the  re- 
gime of  production  and  exchanges 
and  expanding  markets ; 

Convinced  that  economic  activity 
is  seriously  endangered  by  the  more 
and  more  numerous  obstacles  en- 
countered by  international  com- 
merce; 

Considering  that  it  is  urgent  that 
the  states  renounce  a  policy  which 
is  injurious  both  to  their  private  in- 
terest and  the  general  interest; 

Persuaded  that  the  progressive 
realization  of  a  greater  liberty  of  ex- 
changes is  one  of  the  essential  con- 
ditions for  the  restoration  of  world 
prosperity; 

Desirous  of  undertaking  in  this 
sense  a  concerted  action,  in  which  all 
states  will  have  the  privilege  of  par- 
ticipating, and  of  contributing,  by 
this  means,  to  the  correction  of  the 
general  economic  situation ; 

Have  resolved  to  conclude  a  con- 
vention for  the  lowering  of  economic 
barriers  and  to  this  end  have  desig- 
nated as  their  Plenipotentiaries  the 
following,  namely:1 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Bel- 
gians, Paul  Hymans ; 

Her  Royal  Highness  the  Grand 
Duchess  of  Luxembourg,  Joseph 
Bech; 

Her  Majesty  the  Queen  of  the 
Netherlands,  Frans  Beelaerts  van 
Blokland; 

Who,  after  having  communicated 
to  each  other  their  full  powers,  found 
in  good  and  due  form,  have  agreed 
upon  the  following  articles: 

Article  I.  The  High  Contracting 
Parties  undertake,  in  their  reciprocal 
relations,  not  to  make  any  increases 


de  Luxembourg  et  Sa  Majest6  la 
Reine  des  Pays-Bas, 

S'inspirant  des  resolutions  de  TAs- 
semblee  de  la  Societ<§  des  Nations  et 
des  recommandations  concordantes 
des  experts  6conomiques  les  plus 
qualifies  sur  la  n6cessit6  d'am£liorer 
le  regime  de  la  production  et  des 
^changes  et  d'elargir  les  marches; 

Convaincus  que  Tactivit6  6co- 
nomique  est  gravement  mise  en  peril 
par  les  obstacles  de  plus  en  plus 
nombreux  que  rencontre  le  com- 
merce international ; 

Consid6rant  qu'il  est  urgent  que 
les  Etats  renoncent  a  une  politique 
nuisible  aussi  bien  a  leur  int6rgt 
particulier  qu'a  rint<§r§t  g6n6ral; 

Persuades  que  la  realisation  pro- 
gressive d'une  plus  grande  Hbert6  des 
echanges  est  Tune  des  conditions  es- 
sentielles  du  r6tablissement  de  la 
prosp6rit6  mondiale; 

D6sireux  d'entreprendre  dans  ce 
sens  une  action  concertee,  a  laquelle 
tous  les  Etats  auront  la  facult£  de 
participer,  et  de  contribuer,  par  ce 
moyen,  au  redressement  de  la  situa- 
tion 6conomique  g£n6rale; 

Ont  r6solu  de  conclure  une  conven- 
tion pour  1'abaissement  des  barrieres 
6conomiques  et  ont  d6sign6  a  cette 
fin  pour  Leurs  P16nipotentiaires, 
savoir : l 

Sa  Majest6  le  Roi  des  Beiges, 
Paul  Hymans; 

Son  Altesse  Royale  la  Grande- 
Duchesse  de  Luxembourg,  Joseph 
Bech; 

Sa  Majest6  la  Reine  des  Pays-Bas, 
Frans  Beelaerts  van  Blokland ; 

lesquels,  apres  s'gtre  communiqu6 
leurs  pleins  pouvoirs,  trouv6s  en 
bonne  et  due  forme,  sont  convenus 
des  articles  suivants: 

Article  i.  Les  Hautes  Parties 
Contractantes  s'engagent  a  ne  pro- 
c6der,  dans  leurs  relations  r6ci- 


1  The  titles  of  plenipotentiaries  are  omitted. — ED. 


96 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  313 


in  customs  duties  above  the  level  of 
the  duties  existing  at  the  date  of  the 
signature  of  the  present  convention, 
nor  establish  any  duties  not  existing 
on  that  date. 

The  High  Contracting  Parties 
agree  not  to  make  any  increase  of  a 
protective  character  in  their  customs 
duties  nor  establish  any  new  pro- 
tective duties  with  respect  to  the 
merchandise  of  third  states  to  which 
they  are  bound  by  commercial  con- 
ventions, unless  in  the  case  that  the 
said  states,  by  a  new  increase  of  the 
customs  barriers  or  of  obstacles  to 
commerce,  should  cause  grave  prej- 
udice to  the  High  Contracting 
Parties. 

Art.  2.  The  High  Contracting 
Parties  undertake  to  reduce  pro- 
gressively, in  their  reciprocal  rela- 
tions, their  customs  duties  in  accord- 
ance with  the  following  provisions. 

The  customs  duties  shall  be  re- 
duced at  the  moment  of  the  putting 
into  effect  of  the  present  convention 
by  10  per  cent  of  the  rate  existing  on 
the  date  of  the  signature  of  the  pres- 
ent convention;  the  reduction  shall 
be  carried  one  year  afterward  to  20 
per  cent  of  such  rate,  two  years  after- 
ward to  30  per  cent,  three  years  after- 
ward to  40  per  cent,  and  four  years 
afterward  to  50  per  cent  of  such  rate. 

The  customs  duties  shall  not  be 
reduced  below  50  per  cent  of  the  rate 
existing  on  the  date  of  the  signature 
of  the  present  convention,  nor  below 
a  level  corresponding  to  4  per  cent 
ad  valorem  for  semimanufactures 
and  8  per  cent  ad  valorem  for  fin- 
ished manufactures. 

Art.  3.  The  High  Contracting 
Parties  undertake  not  to  apply 
among  themselves  any  new  prohi- 
bition or  restriction  on  importation 
or  exportation  or  any  new  regulatory 
measure  which  would  have  the  effect 
of  hindering  their  reciprocal  ex- 
changes. 


proques,  &  des  augmentations  des 
droits  de  douane  au-dessus  du  niveau 
des  droits  existants  £  la  date  de  la 
signature  de  la  pr£sente  Convention, 
ou  £  I'^tablissement  de  droits  non 
existants  &  la  date  de  ce  jour. 

Les  Hautes  Parties  Contractantes 
conviennent  de  ne  proc<§der  £  aucune 
augmentation  de  caract&re  protec- 
teur  de  leurs  droits  de  douane  ni  £ 
aucun  6tablissement  de  droits  pro- 
tecteurs  nouveaux  i  l'6gard  des 
marchandises  d'Etats  tiers  auxquels 
elles  sont  li£es  par  des  conventions 
commerciales,  si  ce  n'est  dans  le  cas 
ou  ces  Etats,  par  un  nouvel  accroisse- 
ment  des  barri^res  douani£res  ou 
d'entraves  au  commerce,  causeraient 
un  grave  prejudice  aux  Hautes  Par- 
ties Contractantes. 

Art.  2.  Les  Hautes  Parties  Con- 
tractantes s'engagent  £  r6duire  pro- 
gressivement,  dans  leurs  relations 
r6ciproques,  leurs  droits  de  douane 
conform^ment  aux  dispositions  sui- 
vantes. 

Les  droits  de  douane  seront  r£duits 
au  moment  de  la  mise  en  vigueur  de 
la  presente  Convention  de  10%  du 
taux  existant  4  la  date  de  la  signature 
de  la  pr6sente  Convention ;  la  r£duc- 
tion  sera  port£e  un  an  aprds  &  20% 
de  ce  taux,  deux  ans  apr^s  &  30%, 
trois  ans  apr£s  &  40%,  et  quatre  ans 
apr&s  £  50%  de  ce  taux. 


Les  droits  de  douane  ne  devront 
pas  £tre  r<§duits  au-dessous  de  50% 
du  taux  existant  &  la  date  de  la  signa- 
ture de  la  pr<§sente  Convention,  ni  au- 
dessous  d'un  niveau  correspondant 
£  4%  ad  valorem  pour  les  produits 
demi~ouvr<§s  et  8%  ad  valorem  pour 
les  produits  enti&rement  ouvr6s. 

Art.  3.  Les  Hautes  Parties  Con- 
tractantes s'engagent  £  n'appliquer 
entre  elles  aucune  nouvelle  prohibi- 
tion ou  restriction  &  Timportation  ou 
&  Texportation  ou  aucune  nouvelle 
mesure  de  r£glementation  qui  aurait 
pour  effet  d'entraver  leurs  ^changes 
r6ciproques. 


July  1 8,  1932         OUCHY  CONVENTION  ON  ECONOMIC  BARRIERS 


97 


They  reserve  the  right,  however, 
to  note  exceptions  to  this  principle, 
for  the  reasons  enumerated  below 
and  in  so  far  as  the  said  prohibitions 
or  restrictions  are  applicable  at  the 
same  time  to  all  other  countries 
which  are  in  the  same  conditions: 

1.  Prohibitions    or    restrictions 
relating  to  public  safety; 

2.  Prohibitions    or    restrictions 
enacted  for  moral  or  humanitarian 
reasons ; 

3.  Prohibitions    or    restrictions 
concerning   traffic  in   arms,   am- 
munition and  war  material,  or  un- 
der exceptional  circumstances,  in 
other  war  supplies; 

4.  Prohibitions   or    restrictions 
enacted  with  a  view  to  protecting 
the  public  health  or  providing  for 
the  food  supply  of  the  people,  as 
well  as  the  protection  of  animals  or 
plants  against  the  danger  of  com- 
plete destruction,  diseases,  injuri- 
ous insects  and  injurious  parasites; 

5.  Prohibitions   or    restrictions 
on  exportation  having  as  their  ob- 
ject the  protection  of  the  national 
artistic,  historical  or  archeological 
patrimony; 

6.  Prohibitions    or    restrictions 
applicable  to  gold,  silver,  specie, 
paper  money  and  securities,  with 
the  exception  of  measures  of  con- 
trol of  exchange; 

7.  Prohibitions   or    restrictions 
the  object  of  which  is  the  extension 
to  foreign  products  of  the  r6gime 
established    for    similar   national 
products,  with  reference  to  produc- 
tion,    commerce,     transportation 
and  commerce; 

8.  Prohibitions   or    restrictions 
applied  to  products  which  consti- 
tute or  shall  constitute,  as  far  as 
production  or  commerce  is  con- 
cerned, the  subject  of  state  monop- 
olies or  monopolies  exercised  under 
the  control  of  the  state; 

9.  Prohibitions   or   restrictions 
the  object  of  which  is  to  protect 


Elles  se  reservent  toutefois  le 
droit  d'apporter  des  exceptions  &  ce 
principe,  pour  les  raisons  ci-apres 
enumerees  et  pour  autant  que  ces 
prohibitions  ou  restrictions  soient 
en  m^me  temps  applicables  £  tous  les 
autres  pays  se  trouvant  dans  les 
m£mes  conditions : 

1.  prohibitions   pu    restrictions 
relatives  &  la  securit6  publique; 

2.  prohibitions   ou   restrictions 
6dict6es  pour  des  raisons  morales 
ou  humanitaires ; 

3.  prohibitions   ou    restrictions 
concernant  le  trafic  des  armes,  des 
munitions  et  du  materiel  de  guerre, 
ou,  dans  des  circonstances  excep- 
tionnelles,  de  tous  autres  appro vi- 
sionnernents  de  guerre; 

4.  prohibitions    ou   restrictions 
edictles   en   vue  de  proteger  la 
sant£  publique  ou  d 'assurer  Tali- 
mentation  populaire,  ainsi  que  la 
protection   des   animaux  ou   des 
plantes  contre  le  danger  d'une  de- 
struction complete,  les  maladies,  les 
insectes  et  les  parasites  nuisibles; 

5.  prohibitions   ou    restrictions 
&  Fexportation  ayant  pour  but  la 
protection  du  patrimoine  national 
artistique,   historique  ou  archeo- 
logique; 

6.  prohibitions   ou    restrictions 
applicables  £  1'or,  £  Targent,  aux 
especes,  au  papier-monnaie  et  aux 
titres,  &  Texception  des  mesures 
de  contrdle  des  devises; 

7.  prohibitions   ou    restrictions 
ayant    pour    but    d'6tendre    aux 
produits  6trangers  le  regime  6tabli 
pour  les  produits  nationaux  simi- 
laires,  en  ce  qui  concerae  la  pro- 
duction, le  commerce,  le  transport 
et  la  consommation ; 

8.  prohibitions   ou   restrictions 
appliqu6es  &  des  produits  qui  font 
ou  feront,  en  ce  qui  concerne  la 
production  ou  le  commerce,  Tobjet 
de  monopoles  d'Etat  ou  de  mono- 
poles  exerces  sous  le  contrdle  de 
1'Etat; 

9.  prohibitions   ou   restrictions 
ayant  pour  but  de  proteger  le  droit 


98 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  313 


the  property  right  on  the  results  of 
scientific  works. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  case  the  ex- 
changes between  the  High  Contract- 
ing Parties  should  be  gravely  dis- 
turbed by  abnormal  circumstances, 
each  of  the  parties  shall  have  the 
privilege  of  limiting  its  importations 
or  its  exportations,  on  the  condition, 
however,  of  determining  a  contin- 
gent which,  in  principle,  and  except 
in  exceptional  cases,  can  not  be  less 
than  100  per  cent  of  the  average  of 
the  quantities  imported  or  exported 
during  normal  years. 

The  High  Contracting  Parties  un- 
dertake to  eliminate  as  soon  as  cir- 
cumstances shall  permit,  in  their 
reciprocal  relations,  prohibitive,  re- 
strictive, or  regulatory  measures 
existing  at  the  date  of  the  signature 
of  the  present  convention,  with  reser- 
vation of  the  exceptions  indicated 
above. 

Art.  4.  In  order  to  facilitate  as 
much  as  possible  the  application  of 
the  present  convention,  the  High 
Contracting  Parties  reserve  the  right 
to  require  certificates  of  origin  or  of 
destination  upon  importation  or  ex- 
portation. They  will  come  to  an 
understanding  beforehand  on  the 
modalities  of  the  regime  which  they 
shall  institute  in  this  respect. 

With  the  same  object,  they  shall 
reach  an  agreement  with  a  view  to 
the  adoption  of  a  common  customs 
nomenclature. 

Art.  5.  The  High  Contracting 
Parties  undertake  to  apply  to  their 
reciprocal  exchanges  the  uncondi- 
tional and  unlimited  regime  of  the 
most  favored  nation. 

Art.  6.  If  a  difference  should  arise 
between  two  or  more  of  the  High 
Contracting  Parties  on  the  subject 
of  the  interpretation  or  application 
of  the  present  convention  and  if  the 
parties  involved  should  not  succeed 
in  settling  it  among  themselves  by 
diplomatic  means,  the  question  shall 


de  propri6t6  sur  les  resultats  de 
travaux  scientifiques. 

D'autre  part,  au  cas  oil  les 
^changes  entre  les  Hautes  Parties 
Contractantes  seraient  gravement 
troubles  par  des  circonstances  anor- 
males,  chacune  des  Parties  aura  la 
facult6  de  limiter  ses  importations 
ou  ses  exportations,  £  la  condition 
toutefois  de  fixer  un  contingent  qui, 
en  principe,  et  sauf  dans  des  cas 
exceptionnels,  ne  pourra  £tre  inf<§- 
rieur  £  100%  de  la  moyenne  des 
quantit^s  import£es  ou  export6es 
pendant  les  ann£es  nor  males. 

Les  Hautes  Parties  Contractantes 
s'engagent  &  faire  disparaitre,  aussi- 
t6t  que  les  circonstances  le  per- 
mettront,  dans  leurs  relations  r6~ 
ciproques,  les  mesures  de  prohibition, 
de  restriction  ou  de  r6glementation 
existant  £  la  date  de  la  signature 
de  la  pr6sente  Convention,  sous  r<§- 
serve  des  exceptions  indiqu<§es  ci- 
dessus. 

Art  4.  Pour  faciliter  autant  que 
possible  Tapplication  de  la  pr£sente 
Convention  les  Hautes  Parties  Con- 
tractantes se  r6servent  d'exiger  & 
Timportation  ou  £  Texportation  des 
certificats  d'origine  ou  de  destination. 
Elles  s'entendront  au  pr^alable  sur 
les  modalit6s  du  regime  quf  elles 
institueront  &  cet  6gard. 

Dans  le  m£me  but,  elles  se  mettront 
d 'accord  en  vue  de  Tadoption  d'une 
nomenclature  douani£re  commune. 

Art  5.  Les  Hautes  Parties  Con- 
tractantes s'engagent  £  appliquer  £ 
leurs  ^changes  r6ciproques  le  regime 
inconditionnel  et  illimit6  de  la  nation 
la  plus  favoris6e. 

Art  6.  Si  un  diff&rend  surgissait 
entre  deux  ou  plusieurs  des  Hautes 
Parties  Contractantes  au  sujet  de 
Interpretation  ou  de  Tapplication  de 
la  pr6sente  Convention  et  si  les 
Parties  en  cause  ne  r6ussissaient  pas 
4  le  r6gler  entre  elles  par  la  voie 
diplomatique,  la  question  sera  sou- 


July  18,  1932         OUCHY  CONVENTION  ON  ECONOMIC  BARRIERS 


99 


be  submitted  at  the  instance  of  one 
of  the  interested  parties  for  an  opin- 
ion by  a  permanent  committee  of 
experts  to  be  established  by  the 
High  Contracting  Parties. 

If  the  party  concerned  should  be 
unable  to  agree  to  this  opinion  or  if 
the  committee  should  be  unable  to 
render  a  unanimous  opinion,  the 
difference  shall  be  submitted  to  the 
Permanent  Court  of  International 
Justice. 

Art.  7.  The  present  convention  is 
concluded  for  a  period  of  five  years. 

Six  months  before  the  expiration 
of  the  said  period,  each  of  the  High 
Contracting  Parties  will  have  the 
right  to  notify  the  Government  of 
the  Netherlands  of  its  intention 
to  denounce  the  convention.  The 
Government  of  the  Netherlands  shall 
give  notice  thereof  to  the  other  High 
Contracting  Parties,  who  may  not 
have  denounced  it. 

For  the  High  Contracting  Parties 
who  have  not  denounced  the  con- 
vention, the  latter  shall  remain  in 
force  on  the  same  conditions  for  an- 
other period  of  one  year,  and  so  on 
from  year  to  year. 

In  case  of  denunciation  after  the 
first  period  of  five  years,  the  proce- 
dure contemplated  in  the  second 
paragraph  shall  likewise  be  followed. 

Art.  8.  Any  other  state  shall  have 
the  privilege  of  adhering  to  the  pres- 
ent convention  on  an  equal  footing 
with  the  signatory  states. 

The  state  which  desires  to  adhere 
thereto  shall  give  notice  of  its  inten- 
tion by  an  act  which  shall  be  depos- 
ited in  the  archives  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Netherlands.  The  latter 
shall  send  a  certified  true  copy 
thereof  by  diplomatic  channels  to 
each  of  the  High  Contracting  Parties. 

As  long  as  the  other  states,  with- 
out adhering  to  the  convention,  shall 
nevertheless  observe,  in  fact,  the  pro- 
visions, they  shall  be  admitted  to  the 
benefit  of  the  conventional  regime. 

Art.  9.    The  present  convention 


mise  pour  avis  a  la  diligence  d'une 
des  Parties  int6ress6es  a  un  Comit6 
permanent  d 'experts  a  cr6er  par  les 
Hautes  Parties  Contractantes. 

Si  la  Partie  interess6e  ne  pouvait  se 
conformer  a  cet  avis  ou  si  le  Comit6 
ne  pouvait  rendre  un  avis  unanime, 
le  diff6rend  sera  soumis  a  la  Cour 
permanente  de  Justice  Internationale. 


Art.  7.  La  presente  Convention 
est  conclue  pour  une  dur£e  de  cinq 
ann£es. 

Six  mois  avant  Pexpiration  de 
cette  p^riode,  chacune  des  Hautes 
Parties  Contractantes  aura  le  droit 
de  notifier  au  Gouvernement  des 
Pays-Bas  son  intention  de  d6noncer 
la  Convention.  Le  Gouvernement 
des  Pays-Bas  en  informera  les  autres 
Hautes  Parties  Contractantes,  qui 
n'auraient  pas  d6nonc£. 

Pour  les  Hautes  Parties  Contrac- 
tantes, qui  n'ont  pas  d6nonce  la  Con- 
vention, celle-ci  restera  en  vigueur, 
aux  mSmes  conditions,  pour  une 
nouvelle  periode  d'une  ann£e,  et 
ainsi  de  suite  d'ann6e  en  ann£e. 

Dans  le  cas  de  d6nonciation  apr£s 
la  fin  de  la  premiere  periode  de  cinq 
ann6es,  la  procedure  pr6vue  au  se- 
cond alin£a  sera  6galement  suivie. 

Art.  8.  Tout  Etat  tiers  aura  la 
facult^  d 'adherer  a  la  presente  Con- 
vention, sur  un  pied  d'<§galit£  avec 
les  Etats  signataires. 

L'Etat  qui  desire  y  adherer  noti- 
fiera  son  intention  par  un  acte 
qui  sera  d£pos6  dans  les  archives 
du  Gouvernement  des  Pays-Bas. 
Celui-ci  en  enverra  une  copie,  certi- 
fi£e  conforme,  par  la  voie  diplo- 
matique a  chacune  des  Hautes  Par- 
ties Contractantes. 

Aussi  longtemps  que  les  Etats 
tiers,  sans  adherer  a  la  Convention, 
en  observeraient  cependant,  en  fait, 
les  dispositions,  ils  seront  admis  au 
b6n6fice  du  regime  conventionnel. 

Art.  g.    La  presente  Convention 


IOO 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  313 


shall  be  ratified.  The  instruments 
of  ratification  shall  be  deposited  with 
the  Government  of  the  Netherlands. 
It  will  become  effective  15  days  after 
two  of  the  High  Contracting  Parties 
shall  have  deposited  their  instru- 
ments of  ratification. 

Art.  10.  At  the  time  of  the  signa- 
ture of  the  present  convention  or  of 
the  deposit  of  the  instruments  of 
ratification,  each  High  Contracting 
Party  may  declare  that  it  does  not 
bind  itself  except  for  its  territories  in 
Europe. 

The  High  Contracting  Party  which 
avails  itself  of  this  privilege,  has  the 
right  to  declare  subsequently  to  the 
Government  of  the  Netherlands  that 
it  desires  to  have  the  convention 
extended  to  its  overseas  territories, 
colonies  or  mandated  territories. 
The  latter  Government  shall  trans- 
mit such  declaration  immediately  to 
the  other  High  Contracting  Parties. 
The  convention  shall  become  effec- 
tive with  reference  to  the  overseas 
territories,  colonies  or  mandated  ter- 
ritories, 15  days  after  the  transmis- 
sion of  the  above  declaration  by  the 
Government  of  the  Netherlands. 

The  High  Contracting  Party 
which  has  made  this  declaration  has 
likewise  the  right  to  declare  subse- 
quently that  it  desires  to  have  the 
effects  of  the  convention  cease  for 
the  territories  in  question.  In  this 
case,  such  denunciation  shall  be  made 
six  months  before  the  expiration  of 
the  current  annual  period. 

IN      TESTIMONY      WHEREOF,       the 

above-named  plenipotentiaries  have 
signed  the  present  convention  and 
have  thereunto  affixed  their  seals. 

Done  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932,  in 
a  single  copy,  which  shall  be  de- 
posited in  the  archives  of  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Netherlands  and  of 
which  a  certified  true  copy  shall  be 
sent  by  diplomatic  channels  to  each 
of  the  High  Contracting  Parties. 


sera  ratifi£e.  Les  instruments  de 
ratification  seront  d£pos6s  aupr&s  du 
Gouvernement  des  Pays-Bas.  Elle 
entrera  en  vigueur  quinze  jours  apr£s 
que  deux  des  Hautes  Parties  Con- 
tractantes  auront  d6pos<§  leurs  in- 
struments de  ratification. 

Art.  10.  Lors  de  la  signature  de 
la  pr6sente  Convention  ou  du  d6p6t 
des  instruments  de  ratification, 
chaque  Haute  Partie  Contractante 
peut  d6clarer  qu'elle  ne  se  lie  que 
pour  ses  territoires  en  Europe. 

La  Haute  Partie  Contractante  qui 
fait  usage  de  cette  facult<§,  a  le  droit 
de  declarer  ult6rieurement  au  Gou- 
vernement des  Pays-Bas  qu'elle  d£- 
sire  voir  £tendre  la  Convention  &  ses 
territoires  d'outre-mer,  colonies  ou 
territoires  sous  mandat.  Ce  Gou- 
vernement transmettra  cette  d6cla- 
ration  imm^diatement  aux  autres 
Hautes  Parties  Contractantes.  La 
Convention  entrera  en  vigueur  pour 
ce  qui  concerne  les  territoires  d'outre- 
mer,  colonies  ou  territoires  sous 
mandat,  quinze  jours  aprds  la  trans- 
mission de  la  declaration  susvis£e  par 
le  Gouvernement  des  Pays-Bas. 

La  Haute  Partie  Contractante  qui 
a  fait  cette  declaration,  a  6galement 
le  droit  de  declarer  ult6rieurement 
qu'elle  desire  voir  cesser  les  effets  de 
la  Convention  pour  les  territoires  en 
cause.  Dans  ce  cas,  cette  d<§noncia- 
tion  devra  §tre  faite  six  mois  avant 
1'expiration  de  la  p£riode  annuelle  en 
cours. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI,  les  Pl£nipoten- 
tiaires  susnomm6s  ont  sign6  la  pr£- 
sente  Convention  et  y  ont  appos6 
leurs  cachets. 

Fait  &  Gen&ve,  le  18  juillet  1932, 
en  un  seul  exemplaire,  qui  sera 
d£pos6  dans  les  archives  du  Gou- 
vernement des  Pays-Bas  et  dont  une 
copie,  certifie'e  conforme,  sera  remise 
par  la  voie  diplomatique  &  chacune 
des  Hautes  Parties  Contractantes. 


[Signed :]  For  Belgium :  (In  signing  the  present  convention  I  declare  that  the 
Belgian  Government  binds  itself  only  for  the  Belgian  territory  in  Europe.),  PAUL 


July  1 8,  1932         OUCHY  CONVENTION  ON  ECONOMIC  BARRIERS 


101 


H YMANS  ;  for  Luxembourg :  BECH  ;  for  the  Netherlands :  (In  signing  the  pres- 
ent convention  I  declare  that  the  Government  of  the  Netherlands  binds  itself  only  for 
the  Kingdom  in  Europe.),  BEELAERTS  VAN  BLOKLAND. 


No.  313a 


Protocol  to  the  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic  Barriers. 
Signed  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 

Protocole  de  la  Convention  pour  Pabaissement  des  barrieres  econo- 
rniques.     Signe  a  Geneve,  18  juillet  1932. 

[Translation] 

Ad  Articles  i  and  2. — i.  Notwith- 
standing the  provisions  of  articles  I 
and  2,  each  High  Contracting  Party 
retains  the  right  to  increase,  for  fiscal 
reasons,  its  tariff  duties  applicable  to 
goods  not  produced  on  its  territory. 
Subject  to  the  favorable  opinion  of 
the  committee  of  experts  contem- 
plated in  article  6,  it  has,  moreover, 
the  option,  in  exceptional  circum- 
stances, of  taking  any  other  customs 
measure  of  a  fiscal  character  which 
may  appear  necessary  to  it.  In  case 
the  committee  should  not  render  a 
favorable  opinion  on  this  subject,  the 
party  in  question  could  denounce  the 
present  convention  upon  giving  pre- 
vious notice  of  three  months. 

2.  The  High  Contracting  Parties 
retain  the  option  of  adapting  their 
customs  tariff  to  any  changes  which 
may  take  place  in  industrial  tech- 
nique, it  being  understood  that  the 
new   duties   which   would    thus    be 
established  shall  follow  the  general 
regime  of  the  present  convention. 

3.  In  case  one  of  the  High  Con- 
tracting Parties  should  denounce  one 
of  its  commercial  treaties,  it  has  the 
option,  if  need  be,  of  restoring  the 
duty   to   the  rate  provided   in   the 
autonomous  tariff,  with  respect  to 
the  titles  of  its  customs   tariff  on 
which  it  has  agreed  to  reductions. 
However,  if  it  avails  itself  of  this 
option,  it  must  apply  to  this  rate  the 
reductions  which  should  have  been 


Ad  articles  i  et  2. — i.  Nonobstant 
les  dispositions  des  articles  i  et  2, 
chaque  Haute  Partie  Contractante 
garde  le  droit  de  majorer,  pour  des 
raisons  fiscales,  les  droits  de  son  tarif 
aff£rents  a  des  marchandises  non 
produites  sur  son  territoire.  Sous 
reserve  de  1'avis  favorable  du  Comit£ 
d 'experts  prevu  a  1'article  6,  elle  a,  en 
outre,  la  faculty,  dans  des  circon- 
stances  exceptionnelles,  de  prendre 
toute  autre  mesure  douaniere  de 
caractere  fiscal  qui  lui  paraitrait 
n£cessaire.  Au  cas  ou  le  Comit6  ne 
rendrait  pas  a  ce  sujet  un  avis  favo- 
rable, la  Partie  en  cause  pourrait 
d^noncer  la  pr<§sente  Convention, 
moyennant  un  preavis  de  trois  mois. 

2.  Les    Hautes    Parties    Contrac- 
tantes  garden t  la  facult6  d 'adapter 
leur  tarif  douanier  aux  modifications 
qui    pourraient   intervenir   dans    la 
technique  industrielle,  6tant  entendu 
que  les  nouveaux  droits  qui  seraient 
ainsi    institu<§s    suivront    le    regime 
g6n6ral  de  la  pr6sente  Convention. 

3.  Au    cas    ou    une    des    Hautes 
Parties    Contractantes    viendrait   a 
d6noncer  un  de  ses  trait6s  de  com- 
merce, elle  a  la  facult6,  le  cas  £che- 
ant,  de  ramener,  pour  les  rubriques 
de  son  tarif  douanier  sur  lesquelles 
elle    a   consent!    des   reductions,    le 
droit  au   taux  prevu  dans   le  tarif 
autonome.     Toutefois    si    elle    fait 
usage    de   cette   facult<§,   elle  devra 
apporter  a  ce  taux  les  reductions  qui 


IO2 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No. 


made  in  accordance  with  the  present 
convention  if,  at  the  moment  of  the 
signature  of  this  act,  the  duty  in 
force  had  been  that  of  the  autono- 
mous tariff. 

Ad  Art.  2. — i.  It  is  to  be  under- 
stood that  whenever  there  is  an 
internal  duty  in  force,  the  rates  of 
reduction  of  the  duty  shall  be  calcu- 
lated, as  a  rule,  on  the  difference 
existing  between  the  entry  duty  and 
the  internal  duty. 

2.  The  High  Contracting  Parties 
shall  determine,  as  rapidly  as  possible 
and  before  the  putting  into  effect  of 
the  present  convention,  the  products 
which,  in  the  meaning  of  the  said 
convention,  must  be  considered  as 
raw  materials,  semimanufactures  or 
manufactures. 

3.  When  the  tariff  listing  is  spe- 
cific,   the   ad   valorem   percentages 
treated  of  in  paragraph  3  of  article  2 
must  be  understood  as  of  the  inci- 
dence of  the  duties  applicable  to  the 
titles  such  as  they  exist  in  the  cus- 
toms tariff  of  the  party  concerned  at 
the  date  of  the  signature  of  the  pres- 
ent  convention.     As   soon    as    the 
High  Contracting  Parties  shall  have 
adopted  the  common  customs  no- 
menclature treated  of  in  article  4  the 
ad  valorem  percentages  just  spoken 
of  must  be  understood  as  of  the  inci- 
dence of  the  duties  applicable  to  the 
titles  such  as  they  shall  be  estab- 
lished in  this  common  nomenclature. 

4.  In  each  country  and  in  so  far  as 
specific  duties  are  involved,  the  an- 
nual rate  of  reduction  of  10  per  cent 
of  the  amount  of  the  basic  duties 
may  be  diminished  by  the  rate  of  the 
rise  in  the  wholesale  price  index  exist- 
ing in  the  said  country,  or  inversely 
should  be  increased  by  the  rate  of 
reduction  of  the  said  index.     More- 
over each  state,  in  case  of  variation 
in  values,   retains  the  privilege  of 
adjusting  the  specific  duties  of  its 
tariff  to  the  incidences  contemplated 
in  paragraph  3. 


auraient  dfi  £tre  faites  conform&tnent 
£  la  pr£sente  Convention  si,  au 
moment  de  la  signature  de  cet  acte, 
le  droit  en  vigueur  avait  6t£  celui  du 
tarif  autonome, 

Ad  art.  2. — I.  II  doit  £tre  entendu 
que  chaque  fois  qu'il  existe  un  droit 
int£rieur,  les  taux  de  reduction  du 
droit  se  calculeront  en  principe  sur 
la  difference  existant  entre  le  droit 
d'entr£e  et  le  droit  int6rieur. 

2.  Les  Hautes    Parties    Contrac- 
tantes  d£termineront,  le  plus  rapide- 
ment  possible  et  avant  la  mise  en 
vigueur  de  la  pr6sente  Convention, 
les  produits  qui,  au  sens  de  ladite 
Convention,  doivent  Stre  consid6r£s 
comme  mati&res  premieres,  produits 
demi-ouvr6s  ou  produits  enticement 
ouvr£s. 

3.  Lorsque  la  tarification  est  sp£- 
cifique,  les  pourcentages  ad  valorem 
dont  il  est  question  dans  le  para- 
graphe  3  de  Tart.  2,  doivent  s'en- 
tendre    de    Tincidence    des    droits 
aff brents  aux  rubriques  telles  qu'elles 
existent  dans  le  tarif  douanier  de  la 
Partie  int6ress£e  £  la  date  de  la  signa- 
ture   de    la    pr6sente    Convention. 
Aussit6t  que  les  Hautes  Parties  Con- 
tractantes  auront  adopt6  la  nomen- 
clature douani&re  commune,  dont  il 
est  question  &  Tart.  4,  les  pourcentages 
ad  valorem  dont  il  vient  d'dtre  par!6 
devront  s 'entendre  de  1'incidence  des 
droits  aff6rents  aux  rubriques  telles 
qu'elles   seront  6tablies  dans  cette 
nomenclature  commune. 

4.  Dans  chaque  pays  et  pour  au- 
tant  qu'il  s'agisse  de  droits  sp6ci- 
fiques,  le  taux  annuel  de  reduction 
de  10%  du  montant  des  droits  de  base 
pourra  £tre  diminu6  du  taux  d'£16va~ 
tion   de  1'indice  des   prix  de   gros 
existant  dans  ce  pays,  ou  inverse- 
ment  devra  6tre  augment^  du  taux 
de  diminution   de  cet  indice.     En 
outre,  chaque  Etat,  en  cas  de  varia- 
tion des  valeurs,  garde  la  facult£ 
d'ajuster   les   droits   sp6cifiques  de 
son  tarif  aux  incidences  pr6vues  & 
l'alin£a  3. 


July  1 8,  1932         OUCHY  CONVENTION  ON  ECONOMIC  BARRIERS 


103 


5.  The  High  Contracting  Parties 
shall  determine,  as  soon  as  possible 
and  before  the  putting  into  effect  of 
the   present  convention,   the   mini- 
mum rates  below  which  the  duties 
applicable  to  agricultural  products 
must  not  be  reduced. 

6.  The  High  Contracting  Parties 
shall    come    to    an    agreement,    as 
rapidly  as  possible  and  before  the 
putting  into  effect  of  the  present  con- 
vention, on  the  products  to  which,  by 
reason  of  exceptional  circumstances, 
the    said    convention    can    not    be 
applied  except  with  certain  delays 
and  with  certain  reservations. 

Ad  Art.  3. — i.  The  expression 
"  regulatory  measure "  which  ap- 
pears in  the  first  and  last  paragraphs 
of  article  3  contemplates  especially 
the  control  of  bills  of  exchange. 

2.  The  expression  "  abnormal  cir- 
cumstance" which  appears  in  the 
next  to  the  last  paragraph  of  article 
3  contemplates  especially: 

(a)  The  case  in  which  the  currency 
of  one  of  the  contracting  countries 
should  depreciate  without  the  level 
of  prices  existing  in  that  country 
adjusting  itself  to  the  new  currency 
rates; 

(&)  The  case  in  which  prohibitive 
or  restrictive  measures  should  have 
the  effect  of  turning  certain  com- 
mercial currents  toward  the  market 
of  one  of  the  High  Contracting  Par- 
ties and  thus  increase  the  importa- 
tions on  that  market  to  an  abnormal 
and  dangerous  degree. 

IN  TESTIMONY  WHEREOF,  the  pleni- 
potentiaries have  signed  the  present 
protocol. 

Done  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 


5.  Les  Hautes    Parties    Contrac- 
tantes  d6termineront,  le  plus  rapide- 
ment  possible  et  avant  la  mise  en 
vigueur  de  la  pr6sente  Convention, 
les  taux  minima  en-dessous  desquels 
ne  devront  pas  £tre  r6duits  les  droits 
afferents  aux  produits  agricoles. 

6.  Les   Hautes   Parties    Contrac- 
tantes  se  mettront  d'accord,  le  plus 
rapidement  possible  et  avant  la  mise 
en  vigueur  de  la  pr^sente  Conven- 
tion,  sur  les  produits  auxquels,   a 
raison   de  circonstances  exception- 
nelles,  ladite  Convention  ne  pourrait 
s'appliquer  qu'avec  certains  d£lais  et 
sous  certaines  reserves. 

Ad  art.  3. — i.  L'expression  "me- 
sure  de  r£glementation  "  qui  figure  au 
premier  et  au  dernier  paragraphes  de 
Tarticle  3  vise  notamment  le  con- 
trdle  des  devises. 

2 .  L  'expression ' ' circonstance  anor- 
male"  qui  figure  a  1'avant  dernier 
paragraphe  de  Tar  tide  3  vise  notam- 
ment: 

a.  le  cas  oft  la  monnaie  d'un  pays 
contractant  viendrait  a  se  d6pr6cier 
sans  que  le  niveau  des  prix  existant 
dans  ce  pays  s'ajuste  au  nouveau 
taux  de  la  monnaie; 

b.  le  cas  oil  des  mesures  de  prohibi- 
tion ou  de  restriction  auraient  pour 
effet  de  d6tourner  certains  courants 
commerciaux  vers  le  march6  d'une 
des  Hautes  Parties  Contractantes  et 
ainsi  d'augmenter  les  importations 
sur   ce    march.6    dans    une    mesure 
anormale  et  dangereuse. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI,  les  P16nipoten- 
tiaires  ont  sign6  le  present  Protocole. 

Fait  a  Gen&ve,  le  18  juillet  1932. 


[Signed:]  For  Belgium:  PAUL  HYMANS;  for  Luxembourg:  BECH;  for  the 
Netherlands:  BEELAERTS  VAN  BLOKXAND. 


In  signing  the  protocol  annexed  to  the 
international  convention  for  the  lowering 
of  economic  barriers,  we  declare  that,  in 
the  interval  between  the  signature  and 
the  putting  into  effect  of  the  said  conven- 
tion,— during  which  period  the  commit- 


En  signant  le  Protocole  annex6  i  la 
Convention  internationale  pour  1'abaisse- 
ment  des  barrieres  6conomiques,  nous 
declarons  que,  dans  rintervalle  entre  la 
signature  et  Tentr6e  en  vigueur  de  ladite 
Convention, — p&riode  pendant  laquelle  le 


104 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No. 


tee  contemplated  in  article  6  will  not 
yet  exist, — the  Belgian-Luxembourg  Eco- 
nomic Union  will  consider  itself  free  to 
take,  if  necessary,  any  customs  measures 
of  a  fiscal  character,  as  is  provided  for  in 
the  second  sentence  of  the  first  paragraph 
ad  articles  i  and  2. 
Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 

PAUL  HYMANS 
BECH 

In  signing  the  protocol  annexed  to  the 
international  convention  for  the  lowering 
of  economic  barriers,  signed  on  this  date  at 
Geneva,  I  declare  that,  between  the  signa- 
ture and  the  putting  into  effect  of  the  said 
convention,  during  which  period  the  com- 
mittee contemplated  in  article  6  will  not 
exist,  my  Government  will  consider  itself 
free  to  take,  if  necessary,  the  measures 
provided  for  in  the  second  sentence  ad 
articles  i  and  2  of  the  protocol. 

Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 

BEELAERTS  VAN  BLOKLAND 


Comit6  preVu  £  1'article  6  n'existera  pas 
encore, —  1'Union  e'conomique  belgo- 
luxembourgeoise  se  considerera  libre  de 
prendre  eVentuellement  toutes  mesures 
douanieres  de  caractere  fiscal,  ainsi  qu'il 
est  prevu  a  la  deuxieme  phrase  du  premier 
paragraphe  ad  articles  r  et  2. 
Geneve,  le  18  juillet  1932. 

PAUL  HYMANS 
BECH 

En  signant  le  protocole  annex6  £  la 
convention  internationale  pour  1'abaisse- 
ment  des  barri&res  economiques,  sign6e  & 
la  date  de  ce  jour  &  Geneve,  je  declare 
que,  entre  la  signature  et^  Tentr6e  en 
vigueur  de  ladite  convention,  p<§riode 
pendant  laquelle  le  comit<§  pr6vu  a  Tarticle 
6  n'existera  pas  encore,  mon  gouverne- 
ment  se  consid6rera  libre  de  prendre 
eVentuellement  les  mesures  pr£vues  a  la 
seconde  phrase  ad  art.  i  et  2  du  protocole. 

Geneve,  le  18  juillet  1932. 

BEELAERTS  VAN  BLOKLAND 


No.  313b 

Declaration  annexed  to  the  Convention  for  the  Lowering  of  Economic 
Barriers.     Signed  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 

Declaration  annexee  a  la  Convention  pour  Pabaissement  des  bar- 
rieres  economiques.     Signee  a  Geneve,  18  juillet  1932. 


[Translation] 

The  High  Contracting  Parties  re- 
serve the  privilege  of  reducing  among 
themselves  pursuant  to  private  ac- 
cords, open  to  all  states,  their  entry 
duties  on  certain  goods,  .in  accord- 
ance with  other  modalities  than  those 
provided  in  article  2  of  the  present 
convention.  Such  reductions  would 
be  extended  to  all  other  states  who 
have  adhered  to  the  private  accords 
in  question,  whether  or  not  they  are 
parties  to  the  present  convention. 

DONE  at  Geneva,  July  18,  1932. 


Les  Hautes  Parties  Contractantes 
se  r6servent  la  facult6  de  r<§duire 
entre  elles  &  la  suite  d 'accords  par- 
ticuliers,  ouverts  4  tous  les  Etats, 
leurs  droits  d'entr6e  sur  certaines 
marchandises,  suivant  d'autres 
modalit£s  que  celles  pr6vues  &  Parti- 
cle 2  de  la  pr6sente  Convention. 
Ces  reductions  seraient  6tendues  i 
tous  Etats  tiers  qui  ont  adh6r£  aux 
accords  particuliers  dont  il  s'agit, 
qu'ils  soient  ou  non  Parties  &  la 
pr6sente  Convention. 

FAIT  i  Geneve,  le  18  juillet  1932. 


[Signed:]  For  Belgium:  PAUL  HYMANS;  for  Luxembourg;  BECH;  for  the 
Netherlands:  BEELAERTS  VAN  BLOKLAND. 


Aug.  3,  1932  DECLARATION  BY  AMERICAN  STATES 

No.  314 


105 


DECLARATION    by    American    States.     Signed   at    Washington, 

August  3,  1932. 

DECLARACION  por  Estados  Americanos.    Firmada  en  Washington, 

3  de  agosto  de  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  This  declaration  was  signed  as  a  telegram  to  the  Governments  of  Bolivia 
and  Paraguay,  parties  to  the  Chaco  dispute,  on  the  suggestion  of  the  neutral  members  of  a 
commission  of  conciliation  created  under  a  protocol  of  January  3,  1929.  It  was  frequently 
referred  to  in  the  course  of  later  efforts  to  end  the  Chaco  War,  and  it  was  recognized  by 
Bolivia  and  Paraguay  in  the  protocol  signed  at  Buenos  Aires  on  June  12,  1935.  League  of 
Nations  Official  Journal,  1935,  p.  901.  The  basic  principle  of  the  declaration  had  been 
adopted  by  the  Assembly  of  the  League  of  Nations  in  its  resolution  of  March  n,  1932. 
Idem,  Special  Supplement  No.  101,  p.  87.  This  principle  was  also  incorporated  in  Article  3 
of  the  anti-war  treaty  of  October  10,  1933  (No.  346,  post)  and  in  Article  II  of  the  convention 
on  rights  and  duties  of  states,  of  December  26,  1933  (No.  361,  post),  and  the  declaration  was 
mentioned  in  the  League  of  Nations  Assembly  recommendation  of  July  4,  1936.  Records  of 
the  Sixteenth  Assembly,  Plenary  Meetings,  Part  II,  p.  65. 

RATIFICATIONS.    This  declaration  was  not  subject  to  ratification. 


Entered  into  force  August  3,  IQ32.1 

Text  and  translation  from  Press  Releases  of  the  United  States  Department 
of  State,  No.  149,  pp.  98,  100. 


[Translation] 

The  representatives  of  all  the 
American  Republics,  meeting  in 
Washington,  the  seat  of  the  Neutral 
Commission,  having  been  duly  au- 
thorized by  their  respective  Govern- 
ments, have  the  honor  to  make  the 
following  declaration  to  the  Govern- 
ments of  Bolivia  and  Paraguay: 

"Respect  for  law  is  a  tradition 
among  the  American  nations,  who 
are  opposed  to  force  and  renounce  it 
both  for  the  solution  of  their  con- 
troversies and  as  an  instrument  of 
national  policy  in  their  reciprocal 
relations.  They  have  long  been  the 
proponents  of  the  doctrine  that  the 
arrangement  of  all  disputes  and  con- 
flicts of  whatever  nature  or  origin 
that  may  arise  between  them  can 
only  be  sought  by  peaceful  means. 
The  history  of  the  American  nations 


Los  Representantes  de  todas  las 
Repiiblicas  Americanas,  reunidos  en 
Washington  en  donde  reside  la 
Comisi6n  de  Neutrales,  habiendo 
sido  debidamente  autorizados  por 
sus  respectivos  Gobiernos,  tienen  el 
honor  de  hacer  la  siguiente  declara- 
ci6n  a  los  Gobiernos  de  Bolivia  y 
Paraguay: 

"El  respeto  al  derecho  es  una 
tradici6n  entre  las  naciones  ameri- 
canas,  las  cuales  se  oponen  a  la 
fuerza  y  renuncian  a  ella  tanto  para 
la  soluci6n  de  sus  controversias 
cuanto  para  utilizarla  comp  un  in- 
strumento  de  politica  nacional  en 
sus  relaciones  recfprocas.  Ellas  ban 
sido  por  mucho  tiempo  los  lideres  de 
la  doctrina  de  que  el  arreglo  de  todas 
las  disputas  y  conflictos  de  cualquier 
naturaleza  u  origen  que  se  puedan 
suscitar  entre  ellas,  s61o  sera  pro- 


1  Not  registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations  (July  I,  1937)- 


106 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  314 


shows  that  all  their  boundary  and 
territorial  controversies  have  been 
arranged  by  such  means.  There- 
fore, the  nations  of  America  declare 
that  the  Chaco  dispute  is  susceptible 
of  a  peaceful  solution,  and  they 
earnestly  request  Bolivia  and  Para- 
guay to  submit  immediately  the 
solution  of  this  controversy  to  an 
arrangement  by  arbitration  or  by 
such  other  peaceful  means  as  may 
be  acceptable  to  both. 


"As  regards  the  responsibilities 
which  may  arise  from  the  various 
encounters  which  have  occurred 
from  June  15  to  date,  they  consider 
that  the  countries  in  conflict  should 
present  to  the  Neutral  Commission 
all  the  documentation  which  they 
may  consider  pertinent,  and  which 
will  be  examined  by  it.  They  do  not 
doubt  that  the  country  which  this 
investigation  shows  to  be  the  aggres- 
sor will  desire  to  give  satisfaction  to 
the  one  attacked,  thus  eliminating 
all  misunderstanding  between  them. 

"They  furthermore  invite  the 
Governments  of  Bolivia  and  Para- 
guay to  make  a  solemn  declaration  to 
the  effect  that  they  will  stop  the 
movement  of  troops  in  the  disputed 
territory,  which  should  clear  up  the 
atmosphere  and  make  easy  the  road 
to  the  solution  of  good  understanding 
which  America  hopes  for  in  the  name 
of  the  permanent  interests  of  all  the 
countries  of  this  hemisphere. 

"The  American  nations  further 
declare  that  they  will  not  recognize 
any  territorial  arrangement  of  this 
controversy  which  has  not  been  ob- 
tained by  peaceful  means  nor  the 
validity  of  territorial  acquisitions 
which  may  be  obtained  through  oc- 
cupation or  conquest  by  force  of 
arms." 


curado  por  medios  pacificos.  La 
historia  de  las  naciones  americanas 
demuestra  que  todas  sus  controver- 
sias  territoriales  y  de  limites  ban  sido 
arregladas  por  tales  medios.  Por 
esto,  las  naciones  de  America  de- 
claran  que  la  disputa  del  Chaco  es 
susceptible  de  una  soluci6n  pacifica 
y  piden  encarecidamente  a  Bolivia  y 
Paraguay  que  sometan  inmediata- 
mente  la  de  esta  controversia  a  un 
arreglo  por  arbitraje  u  otro  medio 
amistoso  que  fuere  aceptable  para 
ambos. 

"  En  cuanto  a  las  responsabilidades 
que  puedan  derivarse  de  los  diversos 
encuentros  ocurridos  desde  el  15  de 
Junio  hasta  la  fecha,  consideran  que 
los  paises  en  conflicto  deberian 
presentar  a  la  Comisi6n  de  Neutrales 
toda  la  documentation  que  con- 
cepttien  pertinente,  la  cual  seria 
examinada  por  ella.  No  dudan  de 
que,  el  pais  que  de  esa  investigation 
resulte  agresor,  habrd  de  querer  dar 
satisfacci6n  al  agredido,  elimin&n- 
dose  asi  toda  desavenencia  entre 
ellos. 

"Invitan,  ademds,  a  los  Gobiernos 
de  Bolivia  y  Paraguay  a  hacer  una 
declaration  solemne  en  el  sentido  de 
paralizar  movimientos  de  tropas  en 
el  territorio  disputado,  lo  cual  sere- 
narfa  el  ambiente  y  haria  fdcil  el 
camino  a  la  soluci6n  de  concordia 
que  America  espera  en  nombre  de  los 
intereses  permanentes  de  todos  los 
paises  de  este  hemisferio. 

"Las  naciones  de  America  de- 
claran  tambi<§n  que  no  reconocer&n 
arreglo  territorial  alguno  de  esta 
controversia  que  no  sea  obtenido  por 
medios  pacificos  ni  la  validez  de 
adquisiciones  territoriales  que  sean 
obtenidas  mediante  ocupacI6n  o 
conquista  por  la  fuerza  de  las  armas." 


[Signed:]  FRANCIS  WHITE,  for  the  Secretary  of  State  of  the  United 
States;  FABIO  LOZANO  T.,  Minister  of  Colombia;  Josfe  RICHLING,  Charg6 
d 'Affaires  of  Uruguay;  Josi  T.  BAR6N,  Charg£  d'Affaires  of  Cuba;  P. 
HERRERA  DE  HUERTA,  Charg6  d'Affaires  of  Mexico;  M.  DE  FREYRE  Y  S., 


Sept.  2,  1932          TRANSPORT  OF  GOODS  BY  RAIL  IO7 

Ambassador  of  Peru;  R.  DE  LIMA  E  SILVA,  Ambassador  of  Brazil;  FELIPE  A. 
ESPIL,  Ambassador  of  Argentina;  MIGUEL  CRUCHAGA,  Ambassador  of  Chile; 
ADRIAN  RECINOS,  Minister  of  Guatemala;  PEDRO  M.  ARCAYA,  Minister  of 
Venezuela;  DANTES  BELLEGARDE,  Minister  of  Haiti;  ROBERTO  DESPRADEL, 
Minister  of  the  Dominican  Republic;  C&LEO  DAviLA,  Minister  of  Honduras; 
GONZALO  ZALDUMBIDE,  Minister  of  Ecuador;  HORATIO  F.  ALFARO,  Minister 
of  Panama;  Luis  M.  DEBAYLE,  Charg£  d 'Affaires  of  Nicaragua;  MANUEL 
GONZALEZ-ZELEDON,  Charg&  d'Affaires  of  Costa  Rica;  ROBERTO  D.  MELEN- 
DEZ,  Special  Representative  of  the  Republic  of  El  Salvador  in  the  Board  of 
Directors  of  the  Pan  American  Union. 


No.  315 

ADDITIONAL  ACT  to  the  Convention  of  October  23,  1924,  on  the 
Transport  of  Goods  by  Rail.  Opened  for  signature  at  Berne, 
September  2,  1932. 

ACTE  ADDITIONNEL  a  la  Convention  du  23  octobre  1924  concer- 
nant  le  transport  des  marchandises  par  chemins  de  f er.  Ouvert 
a  la  signature  §.  Berne,  2  septembre  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  By  a  protocol  to  the  convention  on  the  transport  of  goods  by  rail, 
signed  at  Berne,  October  23, 1924  (No.  1290,  ante),  provision  was  made  for  exceptions,  during 
a  period  of  four  years,  to  certain  articles  of  the  convention  relating  to  charges.  The  period, 
which  was  to  expire  in  October,  1932,  is  extended  by  this  Additional  Act  until  the  coming 
into  force  of  a  new  convention.  The  new  convention  was  signed  at  Rome,  November  23, 
1933  (No.  353,  post). 

RATIFICATIONS.  Ratifications  of  this  act  were  deposited  at  Berne  by  Czechoslovakia, 
September  21,  1932,  and  by  Switzerland,  September  30,  1932.  On  October  30,  1934,  ratifi- 
cations had  been  deposited  by  all  of  the  signatories  except  Bulgaria  and  France;  and  acces- 
sions had  been  deposited  by  Finland,  Greece,  and  Spain. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  The  text  of  this  act  is  also  published  in  154  League  of  Nations  Treaty 
Series,  p.  123;  Reichsgesetzblatt,  1933,  II,  p.  703;  40  Bulletin  des  transports  international  par 
chemins  defer  (1932),  annexe,  p.  145. 

Anon.,  "  Prolongation  de  la  duree  de  validite  des  dispositions  transitoires  actuelles  du 
Protocole  de  signature  du  23  octobre  1924,"  40  Bulletin  des  transports  international  par 
chemins  defer  (1932),  pp.  451-2. 

Entered  into  force  October  10,  I932.1 
Text  supplied  by  the  Political  Department  of  the  Swiss  Government. 

L'Allemagne,  TAutriche,  la  Bel-  Pologne,  la  Roumanie,  la  Suede,  la 

gique,  la  Bulgarie,  le  Danemark,  la  Suisse,  la  Tch<§coslovaquie,  la  Tur- 

Ville  libre  de  Dantzig,  TEstonie,  la  quie  et  la  Yougpslavie,  consid6- 

France,  la  Hongrie,  1'Italie,  la  Let-  rant  que  la  situation  mon6taire  et 

tonie,  le  Liechtenstein,  le  Luxem-  £conomique  actuelle  est  de  nature  & 

bourg,  la  Norv£ge,  les  Pays-Bas,  la  rendre  necessaire  le  maintien  des 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3543,  November  14,  1934- 


io8 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  315 


Dispositions  transitoires,  objet  du 
chapitre  II  du  Protocole  de  signa- 
ture de  la  Convention  Internationale 
du  23  octobre  1924  concernant  le 
transport  des  marchandises  par 
chemins  de  fer  (C.  I.  M.), 

qu'en  vertu  dudit  Protocole,  ces 
Dispositions  transitoires  doivent 
prendre  fin  le  ier  octobre  1932, 

qu'il  est  par  consequent  n^cessaire 
de  maintenir  lesdites  Dispositions 
transitoires  jusqu'£  Tentr6e  en  vi- 
gueur  du  texte  qui  resultera  de  la 
prochaine  Conference  de  revision  de 
la  C.  L  M., 

ont  nomme  pour  leurs  Pienipo- 
tentiaires,  savoir:1 

L'Allemagne:  W.  Dankwort; 

L'Autriche:  M.  Hoffinger,  F.  Je- 
linek; 

La  Belgique:  E.  du  Bois; 

La  Bulgarie:  D.  Mikoff; 

Le  Danemark:  E.  H.  Schack; 

La  Ville  Libre  de  Dantzig:  J.  de 
Modzelewski ; 

L'Estonie:  A.  Schmidt; 

La  France:  H.  de  Marcilly; 

La  Hongrie ;  A.  N4n4ssy ; 

LltalierG.  Marchi; 

La  Lettonie:  J.  Klavin§-Ellansky; 

Le  Liechtenstein:  E.  Beck; 

Le  Luxembourg:  J.  Elter; 

La  Norv&ge:  H.  Birkeland; 

Les  Pays-Bas:  W.  L  Doude  van 
Troostwijk; 

La  Pologne:  J.  de  Modzelewski; 

La  Roumanie:  V.  Statesco; 

La  Suede:  K.  A.  Belfrage; 

La  Suisse:  H,  Hunziker; 

La  Tchecoslovaquie :  Z.Prochcizka ; 

La  Turquie:  Nedim  Veysel  Bey; 

La  Yougoslavie:  D.  Markovi6; 

lesquels,  en  presence  et  avec  la 
participation  du  D£16gu£  de  la  Com- 
mission de  Gouveraement  du  Terri- 
toire  du  Bassin  de  la  Sarre,  apr&s 
s'gtre  communique  leurs  pleins  pou- 


voirs,  trouv6s  en  bonne  et  due  forme, 
sont  convenus  de  ce  qui  suit: 

I 

Le  delai  de  quatre  ans  fixe  par  les 
Dispositions  transitoires  qui  font 
1'objet  du  chapitre  II  du  Protocole 
de  signature  de  la  Convention  inter- 
national du  23  octobre  1924  con- 
cernant le  transport  des  marchan- 
dises par  chemins  de  fer  (C.  I.  M.) 
est  prolong^,  &  partir  du  ier  octobre 
1932,  jusqu'k  la  date  de  Tentr6e  en 
vigueur  du  texte  qui  r6sultera  de  la 
prochaine  Conference  de  revision  de 
la  C.  I.  M. 

II 

Vu  Turgence  et  les  intents  im- 
portants  qui  sont  en  jeu,  le  present 
Acte  entrera  en  vigueur  entre  les 
Etats  qui  Tauront  ratifie,  dix  jours 
apr£s  la  date  &  laquelle  le  Gouverne- 
ment £6d6ral  suisse  aura  notifie  aux 
Gouvernements  interesses  le  dep6t 
des  ratifications. 

Le  present  Acte  demeure  ouvert 
jusqu'au  15  septembre  1932  4  la  sig- 
nature et,  apr&s  cette  date,  £  Tad- 
hesion  des  Etats  qui  participent  &  la 
Convention  Internationale  du  23 
octobre  1924.2 

Le  Gouvernement  suisse  se  charge 
de  recueillir  et  de  notifier  les  adhe- 
sions et  les  ratifications. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI,  les  Pienipotenti- 
aires  ci-dessus  et  le  Deiegue  de  la 
Commission  de  Gouvernement  du 
Territoire  du  Bassin  de  la  Sarre  ont 
signe  le  present  Acte. 

Fait  £  Berne,  le  deux  septembre 
mil  neuf  cent  trente-deux,  en  un  seul 
exemplaire,  qui  restera  depose  dans 
les  Archives  de  la  Confederation 
Suisse  et  dont  une  expedition  au- 
thentique  sera  remise  &  chacune  des 
Parties. 


[Signe:]  Pour  FAllemagne:  DANKWORT;  pour  PAutriche:  HOFFINGER; 
Dr.  F.  JELINEK ;  pour  la  Belgique :  E.  Du  Bois ;  pour  la  Bulgarie :  D.  MIKOFF  ; 
pour  le  Danemark :  E.  H.  SCHACK;  pour  la  Ville  Libre  de  Dantzig :  J.  DE  MOD- 

1  The  titles  of  plenipotentiaries  are  omitted. — ED.  2  No,  129,  ante. — ED. 


Dec.  9,  1932  TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION  IO9 

ZELEWSKI;  pour  PEstonie:  A.  SCHMIDT;  pour  la  France:  H.  DE  MARCILLY; 
pour  la  Hongrie:  Dr.  NANASSY;  pour  PItalie:  G.  MARCHI;  pour  la  Lettonie: 
J .  KLAVINS-ELLANSKY  ;  pour  le  Liechtenstein :  E.  BECK  ;  pour  le  Luxembourg : 
JULES  ELTER;  pour  la  Norvege:  HERSLEB  BIRKELAND;  pour  les  Pays-Bas: 
W.  DOUDE  VAN  TROOSTWIJK;  pour  la  Pologne:  J.  DE  MODZELEWSKI;  pour  la 
Roumanie :  VICTOR  STATESCO  ;  pour  la  Suede :  KURT  A.  BELFRAGE  ;  pour  la 
Suisse:  HUNZIKER;  pour  la  Tchecoslovaquie :  Dr.  PROCHAZKA;  pour  la 
Turquie:  NEDIM  VEYSEL;  pour  la  Yougoslavie:  Dr.  D.  MARKOVIC;  pour  la 
Commission  de  Gouvernement  du  Territoire  du  Bassin  de  la  Sarre:  T. 

COURTILET. 

No.  316 

TELECOMMUNICATION  Convention.     Signed  at  Madrid,  Decem- 
ber 9,  1932. 

CONVENTION    des    telecommunications.     Signee    a    Madrid,    9 

decembre  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  The  International  Telegraphic  Union  was  established  under  a  conven- 
tion signed  at  Paris,  May  17,  1865.  56  J3r.  and  For.  St.  Papers,  p.  295.  That  convention 
was  revised  at  Vienna,  July  21,  1868  (59  idem,  p.  322),  at  Rome,  January  14,  1872  (66  idem, 
P-  975) »  and  at  St.  Petersburg,  July  10/22,  1875  (idem,  p.  19).  Numerous  revisions  were 
made  of  the  regulations  attached  to  the  convention ;  for  the  Paris  revision  of  October  29, 
1925,  see  ante,  No.  146.  A  radiotelegraph  convention  signed  at  Berlin,  November  3,  1906 
(99  idem,  p.  321),  was  revised  at  London,  July  5, 1912  (105  idem,  p.  219),  and  at  Washington, 
November  25,  1927  (No.  185,  ante).  The  International  Telegraph  Conference  which  met  at 
Paris  in  1925  and  the  International  Radiotelegraph  Conference  which  met  at  Washington  in 
1927,  both  resolved  in  favor  of  combining  the  conventions  relating  to  the  two  subjects.  The 
Madrid  Convention  of  1932  effects  such  a  combination;  it  abrogates  the  previous  telegraphic 
and  radiotelegraphic  conventions,  and  it  replaces  the  International  Telegraphic  Union  with 
the  International  Telecommunication  Union.  Telegraphic  and  radiotelegraphic  relations 
have  been  regulated  by  numerous  other  conventions  which  were  less  general.  See  also  the 
convention  creating  the  Inter- American  Union  of  Electrical  Communications  (No.  116, 
ante),  and  the  European  Convention  on  Broadcasting  (No.  330,  post).  A  North  and  Central 
American  Regional  Radio  Conference,  held  at  Mexico  City,  July  lo-August  9, 1933,  adopted 
recommendations  on  allocation  of  frequencies.  U.  S.  Treaty  Information  Bulletin,  No.  47, 

P-  15- 

RATIFICATIONS.  On  July  i,  1937,  ratifications  of  or  accessions  to  this  convention  had 
been  deposited  at  Madrid  by  Afghanistan,  Albania,  Australia,  Austria,  Belgium  (and  de- 
pendencies), Bulgaria,  Canada,  China,  Colombia,  Czechoslovakia,  Denmark,  Dominican 
Republic,  Egypt,  Estonia,  Ethiopia,  Finland,  Germany,  Great  Britain  (and  various  British 
dependencies),  Haiti,  Hungary,  Iceland,  India,  Irish  Free  State,  Italy  (and  dependencies), 
Japan,  Luxemburg,  Mexico,  Morocco,  Netherlands  (and  dependencies),  New  Zealand, 
Panama,  Persia,  Poland,  South  Africa,  Spain,  Switzerland,  Syria  and  Lebanon,  Turkey, 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  United  States  of  America,  Uruguay,  Vatican  City 
State,  Venezuela,  Yemen,  and  Yugoslavia.  In  addition,  formal  accessions  were  made  by  or 
on  behalf  of  various  dependencies  and  twenty-seven  private  companies:  see  U.  S.  Treaty 
Information  Bulletin,  No.  76,  p.  12;  Registration  of  Treaties,  No.  165,  p.  u;  Journal  des 
telecommunications  (passim).  Nicaragua,  which  had  not  deposited  a  ratification,  denounced 
the  convention,  November  26,  1936. 


IIO  INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION  No.  316 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  Propositions  pour  la  Conference  radiotelegraphigue  international  de 
Madrid,  1932  (Berne:  Bureau  international  de  1'Union  telegraphique,  1931) ',  Documents  de  la 
Conference  radiot&Ugraphigue  internationale  de  Madrid,  1932  (Berne:  Bureau  Internationale 
de  TUnion  telegraphique,  1933),  2  vols.;  International  Radiotelegraph  Conference,  Madrid, 
1932,  U.  S.  Department  of  State,  Conference  Series,  No.  15,  Publication  No.  540.  See  also 
the  Journal  des  t&Ucommunciations  (formerly  the  Journal  t&Ugraphigue),  official  organ  of  the 
Bureau  de  I'  Union  internationale  des  Telecommunications.  The  text  of  this  convention  is  also 
published  in  151  League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series,  p.  4;  Reichsgesetzblatt,  1934,  p.  1063;  and  by 
H.  M.  Stationer's  Office  (London,  1933). 

J.  C.  de  Fabel,  "  Les  Conferences  diplomatiques  de  Madrid  et  de  Lucerne,"  10  Revue  inter- 
nationale de  la  radio£lectricit£  (1934),  pp.  5-20;  de  Fabel,  "Le  regime  international  de  la 
radioelectricite  et  les  conferences  diplomatiques  de  Madrid  et  de  Lucerne/'  12  Rev.  de  dr.  int. 
(J933)»  PP-  566-80;  P.  S.  Gerbrandy,  Het  vraagstuk  van  den  radio-omroep  (Te  Kampen: 
Kok,  1934),  pp.  17-34;  R.  Homburg,  "Next  World  Conference  at  Madrid  and  the  Interna- 
tional Regulation  of  Electric  and  Radio-Electric  Transmissions,"  I  Journal  of  Radio  Law 
(I93I)»  PP-  220-40;  O.  Kucera,  "Einige  Rechtsprobleme  der  Madrider  Weltfunktelegraph- 
enkonferenz,"  5  Archivfur  Funkrecht  (1932),  pp.  239-44;  P«  de  La  Pradelle,  "  Le  droit  de  vote 
aux  Conferences  des  telecommunications,"  9  Revue  jur idigue  internationale  de  la  radMlec- 
tricite'  (1933),  pp.  398-424;  G.  Montefinale,  "  I  problem!  tecnici,  marittimi  ed  aerei  alia  Con- 
ferenza  radio  di  Madrid,"  66  Rivista  marittima  (1933),  pp.  13-20;  Irvin  Stewart,  "The  Ma- 
drid International  Telecommunication  Convention,"  5  Air  Law  Review  (1934),  pp.  236-66. 

Entered  into  force  January  i,  1934.* 
Text  and  translation  from  U.  S.  Treaty  Seriest  No.  867. 

[Translation] 

Union  of  South  Africa;  Germany;  Union  de  FAfrique  du  Sud;  Al- 

Republic   of   Argentina;    Common-  lemagne;     R6publique     Argentine; 

wealth  of  Australia;  Austria;  Bel-  F£d6ration  Australienne ;  Autriche; 

gium;     Bolivia;     Brazil;     Canada;  Belgique;  Bolivie;  Bresil;  Canada; 

Chile;  China;  Vatican  City  State;  Chili;   Chine;   Etat  de  la   Cite*   du 

Republic  of  Colombia;  French  Colo-  Vatican;  Re"publique  de  Colombie; 

nies,    protectorates    and    territories  Colonies  franchises,  protectorats  et 

under  French  mandate;  Portuguese  territoires    sous    mandat    frangais; 

Colonies;  Swiss  Confederation;  Bel-  Colonies  portugaises;  Confederation 

gian    Congo;    Costa    Rica;    Cuba;  suisse;    Congo    beige;    Costa- Rica; 

Curagao   and   Surinam;    Cirenaica;  Cuba;  Curasao  et  Surinam;  Cyr6- 

Denmark;    Free    City    of    Danzig;  naique;   Danemark;   Ville   libre  de 

Dominican    Republic;    Egypt;    Re-  Dantzig;   R6publique   Dominicaine; 

public   of    El    Salvador;    Ecuador;  Egypte ;  R^publique  de  El  Salvador ; 

Eritrea ;   Spain ;    United   States   of  Equateur ;  Ery thr6e ;  Espagne ;  Etats- 

America;  Empire  of  Ethiopia;  Fin-  Unis  d'Am&rique;  Empire  d'Ethio- 

land;  France;  United  Kingdom  of  pie;    Finlande;    France;    Royaume- 

Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland ;  Uni  de  la  Grande-Bretagne  et  de 

Greece;    Guatemala;    Republic    of  1'Irlande  du  Nord;  Grece;  Guate- 

Honduras;  Hungary;  Italian  Islands  mala;    R£publique    de    Honduras; 

of  the  Aegean  Sea;  British  India;  Hongrie;  lies  italiennes  de  TEgee; 

Dutch  East  Indies;  Irish  Free  State;  Indes  britanniques ;  Indes  ne*erlan- 

Iceland;  Italy;  Japan,  Chosen,  Tai-  daises;  Etat  libre  dlrlande;  Islande; 

wan,   Karafuto,   Kwantung  Leased  Italie;  Japon,  Chosen,  Taiwan,  Kara- 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3479,  August  30,  1934. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


III 


Territory  and  the  South  Sea  Islands 
under  Japanese  mandate;  Latvia; 
Liberia;  Lithuania;  Luxemburg; 
Morocco;  Mexico;  Nicaragua;  Nor- 
way; New  Zealand;  Republic  of 
Panama;  Netherlands;  Peru;  Persia; 
Poland;  Portugal;  Rumania;  Italian 
Somaliland;  Sweden;  Syria  and  Leb- 
anon; Czechoslovakia;  Tripolitania; 
Tunisia;  Turkey;  Union  of  Soviet 
Socialist  Republics;  Uruguay;  Vene- 
zuela;  Yugoslavia. 

The  undersigned,  plenipotentiaries 
of  the  governments  listed  above, 
having  met  in  conference  at  Madrid, 
have,  in  common  agreement  and 
subject  to  ratification,  concluded  the 
following  Convention : 

CHAPTER  I 

ORGANIZATION  AND  FUNCTIONING  OF 
THE  UNION 


futo,  le  Territoire  &  bail  du  Kwan- 
tung  et  les  lies  des  Mers  du  Sud 
sous  mandat  japonais;  Lettonie; 
Liberia ;  Lithuanie ;  Luxembourg  ; 
Maroc;  Mexique;  Nicaragua;  Nor- 
v£ge;  Nouvelle-Z61ande;  Republique 
de  Panama;  Pays-Bas;  Perou;  Perse; 
Pologne;  Portugal;  Roumanie; 
Somalie  italienne;  Suede;  Syrie  et 
Liban ;  Tchecoslovaquie ;  Tripoli- 
taine;  Tunisie;  Turquie;  Union  des 
R<§publiques  Sovi6tistes  Socialistes; 
Uruguay;  V6nezu61a;  Yougoslavie. 

Les  soussign6s,  pl<§nipotentiaires 
des  gouvernements  ci-dessus  enu- 
m£r£s,  sJ6tant  reunis  en  conference  £ 
Madrid,  ont,  d'un  commun  accord 
et  sous  reserve  de  ratification,  arr8t6 
la  Convention  suivante: 

CHAPITRE  I 

ORGANISATION  ET  FONCTIONNEMENT 
DE  L'UNION 


ARTICLE  i. — Constitution  of  the  "Union     ARTICLE  i. — Constitution  de  V  Union 


§  i.  The  countries,  parties  to  the 
present  Convention,  form  the  Inter- 
national Telecommunication  Union 
which  shall  replace  the  Telegraph 
Union  and  which  shall  be  governed 
by  the  following  provisions. 

§  2.  The  terms  used  in  this  Con- 
vention are  defined  in  the  annex  to 
the  present  document. 

ARTICLE  2. — Regulations 

§  i.  The  provisions  of  the  present 
Convention  shall  be  completed  by 
the  following  Regulations: 

the  Telegraph  Regulations, 
the  Telephone  Regulations, 
the  Radio  Regulations  (General 
Regulations  and  Additional  Regu- 
lations), 

which  shall  bind  only  the  contracting 
governments  which  have  under- 
taken to  apply  them,  and  solely  as 
regards  governments  which  have 
taken  the  same  obligation. 

§  2.  Only  the  signatories  to  the 


§  i.  Les  pays,  Parties  £lapresente 
Convention,  forment  1'Union  inter- 
nation  ale  des  t61ecommunications, 
qui  remplace  I'Union  t61egraphique, 
et  qui  est  r6gie  par  les  dispositions 
suivantes. 

§  2.  Les  termes  employes  dans  la 
pr6sente  Convention  sont  d6finis 
dans  1'annexe  £  ce  document. 

ARTICLE  2. — Kbglements 

§  i.  Les  dispositions  de  la  pr6- 
sente  Convention  sont  completes 
par  les  Rdglements,  savoir: 

le  R&glement  t£16graphique, 
le  Reglement  t616phonique, 
les  R^glements  des  radiocom- 

munications  (R&glement  g6n6ral  et 

Reglement  additionnel), 

qui  ne  lient  que  les  gouvernements 
contractants  qui  se  sont  engag6s  £ 
les  appliquer,  et  seulement  vis-^L-vis 
des  gouvernements  qui  ont  pris  le 
mime  engagement. 

§  2.  Seuls    les    signataires   de   la 


112 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


Convention  or  the  adherents  to  this 
document  shall  be  permitted  to  sign 
the  Regulations  or  to  adhere  thereto. 
The  signing  of  at  least  one  of  the  sets 
of  Regulations  shall  be  obligatory 
upon  the  signatories  of  the  Conven- 
tion. Similarly,  adherence  to  at 
least  one  of  the  sets  of  Regulations 
shall  be  obligatory  upon  the  adher- 
ents to  the  Convention.  However, 
the  Additional  Radio  Regulations 
may  not  be  the  subject  of  signature 
or  adherence  except  when  the  Gen- 
eral Radio  Regulations  have  been 
signed  or  adhered  to. 

§  3.  The  provisions  of  the  present 
Convention  shall  bind  the  contract- 
ing governments  only  with  respect  to 
the  services  governed  by  the  Regula- 
tions to  which  these  governments  are 
parties. 

ARTICLE  3. — Adherence  of  Govern- 
ments to  the  Convention 

§  i.  The  government  of  a  country, 
in  the  name  of  which  the  present 
Convention  has  not  been  signed, 
may  adhere  to  it  at  any  time.  Such 
adherence  must  cover  at  least  one  of 
the  sets  of  annexed  Regulations,  sub- 
ject to  the  application  of  §  2  of  article 
2  above. 

§  2.  The  act  of  adherence  of  a 
government  shall  be  deposited  in  the 
archives  of  the  government  which 
received  the  conference  of  plenipo- 
tentiaries that  has  drawn  up  the 
present  Convention.  The  govern- 
ment with  which  the  act  of  adherence 
has  been  deposited  shall  communi- 
cate it  to  all  the  other  contracting 
governments  through  diplomatic  chan- 
nels. 

§  3.  Adherence  shall  carry  with  it 
as  a  matter  of  right,  all  the  obliga- 
tions and  all  the  advantages  stipu- 
lated by  the  present  Convention;  it 
shall,  in  addition,  entail  the  obliga- 
tions and  advantages  stipulated  by 
the  particular  Regulations  which  the 
adhering  governments  undertake  to 
apply. 


Convention  ou  les  adherents  £  cet 
acte  sont  admis  &  signer  les  R&gle- 
ments  ou  It  y  adherer.  La  signature 
de  Tun,  au  moins,  des  R£glernents 
est  obligatoire  pour  les  signataires 
de  la  Convention.  De  mgme,  Tad- 
hesion  £  Tun,  au  moins,  des  R&gle- 
ments  est  obligatoire  pour  les  adh£- 
rents  &  la  Convention.  Toutefois, 
le  R£glement  additionnel  des  ra- 
dipcommunications  ne  peut  pas 
faire  Tobjet  de  la  signature  ou  de 
Tadh6sion  sans  que  la  signature  ou 
I'adhdsion  ait  <§t6  donn6e  au  R&gle- 
ment  g6n6ral  des  radiocommunica- 
tions. 

§  3.  Les  prescriptions  de  la  pr<§- 
sente  Convention  n'engagent  les 
gouvernements  contractants  que 
pour  les  services  r£gis  par  les  R&gle- 
ments  auxquels  ces  gouvernements 
sont  Parties. 

ARTICLE  3. — AdMsion  des  gouverne- 
ments ci  la  Convention 

§  i.  Le  gouvernement  d'un  pays, 
au  nom  duquel  la  pr&sente  Conven- 
tion n'a  pas  6t6  sign6e,  peut  y  ad- 
h6rer  en  tout  temps.  Cette  adh.6- 
sion  doit  porter  sur  un  au  moins  des 
R£glements  annexes,  sous  reserve  de 
^application  du  §  2  de  Tarticle  2 
ci-dessus. 

§  2.  L'acte  d'adh6sion  d'un  gou- 
vernement sera  d£pos6  dans  les 
archives  du  gouvernement  qui  a  ac- 
cueilli  la  conference  de  pl&nipoten- 
tiaires  ayant  arr£t6  la  pr6sente  Con- 
vention. Le  gouvernement  qui  a 
re£u  en  d6p6t  Tacte  d 'adhesion  en 
donne  connaissance,  par  la  voie  di- 
plomatique, &  tous  les  autres  gou- 
vernements contractants. 

§  3.  L'adh6sion  emporte  de  plein 
droit  toutes  les  obligations  et  tous 
les  avantages  stipules  par  la  pr6sente 
Convention;  en  outre,  elle  entraine 
les  obligations  et  avantages  stipules 
par  les  seuls  R&glements  que  les 
gouvernements  adherents  s'engagent 
4  appliquer. 


Dec.  9,  I932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


113 


ARTICLE  4. — Adherence  of  Govern- 
ments to  the  Regulations 
The  government  of  a  country 
signatory  or  adherent  to  the  present 
Convention  may  at  any  time  adhere 
to  one  or  more  of  the  sets  of  Regula- 
tions which  it  has  not  undertaken  to 
observe,  taking  into  account  the  pro- 
visions of  article  2,  §  2.  Such  ad- 
herence shall  be  notified  to  the  Bu- 
reau of  the  Union  which  shall  inform 
the  other  governments  concerned 
thereof. 

ARTICLE  5. — Adherence  to  the  Con- 
vention and  to  the  Regulations 
by  Colonies,  Protectorates,  Overseas 
Territories,  or  Territories  under 
Sovereignty,  Authority,  or  Mandate 
of  the  Contracting  Governments 

§  i.  Any  contracting  government 
may,  at  the  time  of  its  signature,  its 
ratification,  its  adherence,  or  later, 
declare  that  its  acceptance  of  the 
present  Convention  is  valid  for  the 
whole  or  a  group  or  a  single  one  of  its 
colonies,  protectorates,  overseas  ter- 
ritories, or  territories  under  sover- 
eignty, authority,  or  mandate. 

§  2.  The  whole  or  a  group  or  a 
single  one  of  these  colonies,  protec- 
torates, overseas  territories,  or  terri- 
tories under  sovereignty,  authority, 
or  mandate  may,  respectively,  at  any 
time,  be  the  subject  of  a  separate 
adherence. 

§  3.  The  present  Convention  shall 
not  apply  to  colonies,  protectorates, 
overseas  territories,  or  territories 
under  sovereignty,  authority,  or 
mandate  of  a  contracting  govern- 
ment, unless  statement  to  this  effect 
is  made  by  virtue  of  §  I  of  the  present 
article,  or  a  separate  adherence  is 
made  by  virtue  of  §  2  above. 

§  4.  The  declarations  of  adher- 
ence, made  by  virtue  of  §  I  and  §  2 
of  this  article,  shall  be  communicated 
through  diplomatic  channels  to  the 
government  of  the  country  on  the 
territory  of  which  was  held  the  con- 


ARTICLE  4. — Adhesion  des  gouverne- 
ments  aux  Reglements 

Le  gouvernement  d'un  pays  signa- 
taire  ou  adherent  a  la  presente 
Convention  peut  adherer  en  tout 
temps  au  R&glement  ou  aux  Regle- 
ments auxquels  il  ne  s'est  pas  engag£, 
en  tenant  compte  des  dispositions  du 
§  2  de  I'artide  2.  Cette  adh6sion 
est  notifi&e  au  Bureau  de  1'Union, 
lequel  en  donne  connaissance  aux 
autres  gouvernements  int£ress6s. 

ARTICLE  5. — Adhesion  a  la  Conven- 
tion et  aux  Reglements  des  colonies, 
protectorats,  territoires  d'outre-mer 
ou  territoires  sous  souverainete, 
autorite  ou  mandat  des  gouverne- 
ments contractants 

§  i.  Tout  gouvernement  contrac- 
tant  peut  declarer,  soit  au  moment  de 
sa  signature,  de  sa  ratification  ou  de 
son  adhesion,  soit  apr&s,  que  son 
acceptation  de  la  pr&sente  Conven- 
tion est  valable  pour  1 'ensemble  ou 
un  groupe  ou  un  seul  de  ses  colonies, 
protectorats,  territoires  d'outre-mer 
ou  territoires  sous  souverainet£,  au- 
torit<§  ou  mandat. 

§  2.  L 'ensemble  ou  un  groupe  ou 
un  seul  de  ces  colonies,  protectorats, 
territoires  d'outre-mer  ou  territoires 
sous  souverainet6,  autorit£  ou  man- 
dat peut  respectivement  faire  Tobjet, 
a  toute  6poque,  d'une  adhesion 
distincte. 

§  3.  La  pr6sente  Convention  ne 
s'applique  pas  aux  colonies,  pro- 
tectorats, territoires  d'outre-mer  ou 
territoires  sous  souverainete,  autorit6 
ou  mandat  d'un  gouvernement  con- 
tractant,  a  moins  d'une  d6clara- 
tion  a  cet  effet  faite  en  vertu  du 
§  i  du  present  article  ou  d'une  ad- 
h£sion  distincte  faite  en  vertu  du 
§  2  ci-dessus. 

§  4.  Les  declarations  d'adh6sion 
faites  en  vertu  des  §§  i  et  2  du  pr6- 
sent  article  seront  communiquees, 
par  la  voie  diplomatique,  au  gou- 
vernement du  pays  sur  le  territoire 
duquel  aura  6t£  tenue  la  conference 


114 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


ference  of  plenipotentiaries,  at  which 
the  present  Convention  was  drawn 
up,  and  a  copy  thereof  shall  be 
transmitted  by  this  government  to 
each  of  the  other  contracting  govern- 
ments. 

§  5.  The  provisions  of  §§  I  and  3 
of  this  article  shall  also  apply  either 
to  the  acceptance  of  one  or  more  of 
the  sets  of  Regulations,  or  to  the  ad- 
herence to  one  or  more  of  the  sets  of 
Regulations,  within  the  terms  of  the 
provisions  contained  in  article  2,  §  2. 

Such  acceptance  or  adherence  shall 
be  notified  in  conformity  with  the 
provisions  of  article  4. 

§  6.  The  provisions  of  the  preced- 
ing paragraphs  shall  not  apply  to  the 
colonies,  protectorates,  overseas  ter- 
ritories, or  territories  under  sover- 
eignty, authority,  or  mandate  which 
appear  in  the  preamble  of  the  present 
Convention. 

ARTICLE  6. — Ratification  of  the 
Convention 

§  i.  The  present  Convention  must 
be  ratified  by  the  signatory  govern- 
ments and  the  ratifications  thereof 
must  be  deposited,  as  soon  as  possi- 
ble, through  diplomatic  channels,  in 
the  archives  of  the  government  of  the 
country  which  received  the  confer- 
ence of  plenipotentiaries  that  has 
drawn  up  the  present  Convention; 
this  same  government  shall,  through 
diplomatic  channels,  notify  the  other 
signatory  and  adhering  governments 
of  the  ratifications,  as  soon  as  they 
are  received. 

§  2.  In  case  one  or  more  of  the 
signatory  governments  would  not 
ratify  the  Convention,  the  latter 
shall  none  the  less  be  valid  for  the 

fovernments  which  shall  have  rati- 
ed  it. 

ARTICLE  7. — Approval  of  the 
Regulations 

§  I.  The  governments  must,  as 
soon  as  possible,  submit  their  deci- 
sion concerning  the  approval  of  the 
Regulations  drawn  up  by  the  Con- 


de  pl&iipotentiaires  &  laquelle  la 
pr<§seiite  Convention  a  et6  arr6t<§e,  et 
une  copie  en  sera  transmise  par  ce 
gouvernement  &  chacun  des  autres 
gouvernements  contractants. 

§  5.  Les  dispositions  des  §§  I  et 
3  du  present  article  s'appliquent 
aussi  soit  pour  1'acceptation  d'un  ou 
de  plusieurs  R^glements,  soit  pour 
Fadh6sion  &  un  ou  &  plusieurs  R£gle- 
ments,  en  tenant  compte  des  pre- 
scriptions du  §  2  de  Tar  tide  2. 
Cette  acceptation  ou  cette  adhesion 
est  notifi6e  en  conformite  des  dis- 
positions de  Tarticle  4. 

§  6.  Les  dispositions  des  para- 
graphes  pr6c6dents  ne  s'appliquent 
pas  aux  colonies,  protectorate,  terri- 
toires  d'outre-nier  ou  territoires  sous 
souverainet<§,  autorit6  ou  mandat 
qui  figurent  dans  le  pr6ambule  de  la 
pr<§sente  Convention. 

ARTICLE  6. — Ratification  de  la 
Convention 

§  I.  La  pr£sente  Convention  devra 
£tre  ratifiie  par  les  gouvernements 
signataires  et  les  ratifications  en 
seront  d6pos<§es,  par  la  voie  diplo- 
matique, dans  le  plus  bref  d61ai 
possible,  aux  archives  du  gouverne- 
ment du  pays  qui  a  accueilli  la  con- 
f^rence  de  pl6nipotentiaires  ayant 
arr6t6  la  pr6sente  Convention  et  qui 
notifiera  aux  autres  gouvernements 
signataires  et  adh6rents,  par  la  voie 
diplomatique,  les  ratifications  au  fur 
et  &  mesure  de  leur  reception. 

§  2.  Dans  le  cas  otl  un  ou  plusieurs 
des  gouvernements  signataires  ne 
ratifieraient  pas  la  Convention, 
celle-ci  n'en  sera  pas  moins  valable 
pour  les  gouvernements  qui  1'auront 
ratifi£e. 

ARTICLE  7. — Approbation  des 
Rbglements 

§  i.  Les  gouvernements  doivent  se 
prononcer  dans  le  plus  bref  d61ai 
possible  au  sujet  de  1'approbation  des 
R6glements  arr6t6s  en  conference. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


ference.  This  approval  shall  be  re- 
ported to  the  Bureau  of  the  Union 
which  shall  inform  the  members  of 
the  Union  accordingly. 

§  2.  In  case  one  or  several  of  the 
governments  concerned  would  not 
report  such  an  approval,  the  new 
regulatory  provisions  shall  none  the 
less  be  valid  for  the  governments 
which  shall  have  approved  them. 


ARTICLE  8. — Abrogation  of  Conven- 
tions and  of  Regulations  Prior  to 
the  Present  Convention 

The  present  Convention  and  the 
Regulations  annexed  thereto  shall 
abrogate  and  replace,  in  the  relations 
between  the  contracting  govern- 
ments, the  International  Telegraph 
Conventions  of  Paris  (1865),  Vienna 
(1868),  Rome  (1872),  and  St.  Peters- 
burg (1875),  and  the  Regulations 
annexed  thereto,  as  well  as  the  Inter- 
national Radiotelegraph  Conventions 
of  Berlin  (1906),  London  (1912),  and 
Washington  (1927),  and  the  Regula- 
tions annexed  thereto. 

ARTICLE  9. — Execution  of  the  Conven- 
tion and  of  the  Regulations 

§  i.  The  contracting  governments 
undertake  to  apply  the  provisions  of 
the  present  Convention  and  of  the 
Regulations  accepted  by  them,  in  all 
the  offices  and  in  all  the  telecom- 
munication stations  established  or 
operated  by  them,  and  which  are 
open  to  the  international  service  of 
public  correspondence,  to  the  broad- 
casting service,  or  to  the  special  serv- 
ices governed  by  the  Regulations. 

§  2.  Moreover,  they  agree  to  take 
the  steps  necessary  to  enforce  the 
provisions  of  the  present  Convention 
and  of  the  Regulations  which  they 
accept,  upon  the  private  operating 
agencies  recognized  by  them  and 
upon  the  other  operating  agencies 
duly  authorized  to  establish  and 
operate  telecommunications  of  the 


Cette  approbation  est  notifi6e  au 
Bureau  de  1' Union  qui  en  fait  part 
aux  membres  de  1'Union. 

§  2.  Dans  le  cas  oft  un  ou  plusieurs 
des  gouvernements  int<§resses  ne 
notifieraient  pas  cette  approbation, 
les  nouvelles  dispositions  reglemen- 
taires  n'en  seront  pas  moins  valable 
pour  les  gouvernements  qui  les 
auront  approuv^es. 

ARTICLE  8. — Abrogation  des  Conven- 
tions et  des  Reglements  anterieurs  a 
la  prfaente  Convention 

La  pr6sente  Convention  et  les 
R£glements  y  annexes  abrogent  et 
remplacent,  dans  les  relations  entre 
les  gouvernements  contractants,  les 
Conventions  t^legraphiques  interna- 
tionales  de  Paris  (1865),  de  Vienna 
(1868),  de  Rome  (1872)  et  de  St- 
P<§tersbourg  (1875)  et  les  Regie- 
men  ts  y  annexes,  ainsi  que  les  Con- 
ventions radiot61£graphiques  inter- 
nationales  de  Berlin  (1906),  de 
Londres  (1912)  et  de  Washington 
(1927)  et  les  R£glements  y  annexes. 

ARTICLE  9. — Execution  de  la  Conven- 
tion et  des  Reglements 

§  i.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants s'engagent  a  appliquer  les 
dispositions  de  la  pr6sente  Conven- 
tion et  des  Reglements  accept6s  par 
eux  dans  tous  les  bureaux  et  dans 
toutes  les  stations  de  t61<§communi- 
cations  £tablis  ou  exploites  par  leurs 
soins  et  qui  sont  ouverts  au  service 
international  de  la  correspondance 
publique,  au  service  de  la  radio- 
diffusion  ou  aux  services  sp6ciaux 
r6gis  par  les  Reglements. 

§2.  Us  s'engagent,  en  outre,  a 
prendre  les  mesures  n£cessaires  pour 
imposer  Tobservation  des  disposi- 
tions de  la  presente  Convention  et 
des  Reglements  qu'ils  acceptent, 
aux  exploitations  privies  reconnues 
par  eux  et  aux  autres  exploitations 
dtlment  autoris6es  a  I'etablissement 
et  a  1'exploitation  des  t£16communi- 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


international  service  whether  or  not 
open  to  public  correspondence. 

ARTICLE  10. — Denunciation  of  the 
Convention  by  the  Governments 

§  I*  Each  contracting  government 
shall  have  the  right  to  denounce  the 
present  Convention  by  a  notification, 
addressed,  through  diplomatic  chan- 
nels, to  the  government  of  the  coun- 
try in  which  was  held  the  conference 
of  plenipotentiaries  that  has  drawn 
up  the  present  Convention,  and  an- 
nounced by  these  governments  to  all 
the  other  contracting  governments, 
likewise  through  diplomatic  chan- 
nels. 

§  2.  This  denunciation  shall  take 
effect  at  the  expiration  of  the  period 
of  one  year,  beginning  with  the  day 
on  which  the  notification  was  re- 
ceived by  the  government  of  the 
country  in  which  the  last  conference 
of  plenipotentiaries  was  held.  This 
effect  shall  apply  only  to  the  author 
of  the  denunciation ;  the  Convention 
shall  remain  in  force  for  the  other 
contracting  governments. 

ARTICLE  n. — Denunciation  of  the 
Regulations  by  the  Governments 

§  I.  Each  government  shall  have 
the  right  to  terminate  the  obligation 
which  it  has  undertaken  to  apply  one 
of  the  sets  of  Regulations,  by  notify- 
ing its  decision  to  the  Bureau  of  the 
Union  which  shall  inform  thereof  the 
other  governments  concerned.  Such 
notification  shall  take  effect  at  the 
expiration  of  the  period  of  one  year, 
beginning  with  the  day  on  which  it 
was  received  by  the  Bureau  of  the 
Union.  This  effect  shall  apply  only 
to  the  author  of  the  denunciation; 
the  Regulations  in  question  shall  re- 
main in  force  for  the  other  govern- 
ments. 

§  2.  The  provision  of  §  I  above 
shall  not  annul  the  obligation  for  the 
contracting  governments  to  enforce 
at  least  one  of  the  sets  of  Regula- 
tions, covered  by  article  2  of  this 


cations  du  service  international  ou- 
vertes  ou  non  ouvertes  £  la  corre- 
spondance  publique. 

ARTICLE  10. — Denonciation  de  la 
Convention  par  les  gouvernements 
§  I.  Chaque  gouvernement  con- 
tractant  a  le  droit  de  denoncer^la 
presente  Convention  par  une  notifi- 
cation adressee,  par  la  voie  diplo- 
matique, au  gouvernement  du  pays 
dans  lequel  a  sieg6  la  conference  de 
pienipotentiaires  qui  a  arr£t<§  la 
presente  Convention  et  annonc6e 
ensuite  par  ce  gouvernement,  6gale- 
ment  par  la  voie  diplomatique,  £ 
tous  les  autres  gouvernements  con- 
tractants. 

§  2.  Cette  denonciation  produit 
son  effet  &  Fexpiration  du  deiai  d'une 
ann6e  &  partir  du  jour  de  la  reception 
de  sa  notification  par  le  gouverne- 
ment du  pays  oil  a  sieg<§  la  derniere 
conference  de  pienipotentiaires. 
Cet  effet  ne  vise  que  1'auteur  de  la 
d6nonciation;  pour  les  autres  gou- 
vernements contractants,  la  Conven- 
tion reste  en  vigueur. 

ARTICLE  1 1 . — DSnonciation  des  Kbgle- 
ments  par  les  gouvernements 

§  I.  Chaque  gouvernement  a  le 
droit  de  mettre  fin  £  Fengagement 
qu'il  a  pris  d'executer  un  R^glement, 
en  notifiant  sa  decision  au  Bureau  de 
TUnion,  lequel  en  donne  connais- 
sance  aux  autres  gouvernements 
interesses.  Cette  notfication  pro- 
duit son  effet  &  Fexpiration  du  deiai 
d'une  annee  £  partir  du  jour  de  sa 
reception  par  le  Bureau  de  1' Union. 
Cet  effet  ne  vise  que  Tauteur  de  la 
denonciation;  pour  les  autres  gou- 
vernements, le  R&glement  vis6  reste 
en  vigueur. 


§  2.  Les  dispositions  du  §  I  ci- 
dessus  ne  suppriment  pas  1'obliga- 
tion  pour  les  gouvernements  con- 
tractants d'executer  au  moins  Tun 
des  R£glements,  visee  par  1'article  2 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


117 


Convention,  taking  into  account  the  de  la  pr6sente  Convention,  et  compte 
reservation  contained  in  §  2  of  the  tenu  de  la  reserve  mentionn£e  au 
said  article.  §  2  dudit  article. 


ARTICLE  12. — Denunciation  of  the 
Convention  and  of  the  Regulations 
by  Colonies,  Protectorates,  Overseas 
Territories,  or  Territories  under 
Sovereignty,  Authority,  or  Mandate 
of  the  Contracting  Governments 

§  i.  The  application  of  the  present 
Convention  to  a  territory,  by  virtue 
of  the  provisions  of  §  I  or  of  §  2  of 
article  5,  may  terminate  at  any  time. 

§  2.  The  declarations  of  denuncia- 
tion provided  for  in  §  I  above  shall 
be  notified  and  announced  according 
to  the  conditions  stated  in  §  I  of 
article  10;  they  shall  take  effect  ac- 
cording to  the  provisions  of  §  2  of  the 
latter  article. 

§  3.  The  application  of  one  or 
more  of  the  sets  of  Regulations  to  a 
territory,  by  virtue  of  the  provisions 
of  §  5  of  article  5,  may  terminate  at 
any  time. 

§  4.  The  declarations  of  denuncia- 
tion provided  for  in  §  3  above  shall 
be  notified  and  announced  in  accord- 
ance with  the  provisions  of  §  I  of 
article  1 1  and  shall  take  effect  under 
the  conditions  set  forth  in  the  said 
paragraph. 

ARTICLE  13. — Special  Arrangements 

The  contracting  governments  re- 
serve the  right,  for  themselves,  for 
the  private  operating  agencies  rec- 
ognized by  them,  and  for  other  oper- 
ating agencies  duly  authorized  to 
that  effect,  to  conclude  special  ar- 
rangements on  service  matters  which 
do  not  concern  the  governments  in 
general.  However,  such  arrange- 
ments must  remain  within  the  terms 
of  the  Convention  and  of  the  Regula- 
tions annexed  thereto,  as  regards 
interference  which  their  application 
might  be  likely  to  cause  with  the 
services  of  other  countries. 


ARTICLE  12. — D&nonciation  de  la 
Convention  et  des  R^glements  par 
les  colonies,  protectorats,  territoires 
d'outre-m&r  ou  territoires  sous  souve- 
rainete,  autoritfr  ou  mandat  des 
gouvernements  contractants 

§  i.  L 'application  de  la  pr6sente 
Convention  &  un  territoire,  faite  en 
vertu  des  prescriptions  du  §  I  ou  du 
§  2  de  Particle  5,  peut  prendre  fin  & 
toute  &poque. 

§  2.  Les  declarations  de  denoncia- 
tion  prevues  au  §  I  ci-dessus  sont 
notifiees  et  annonc6es  dans  les  condi- 
tions fixees  au  §  i  de  1'article  10;  elles 
produisent  leur  effet  d'apr£s  les 
dispositions  du  §  2  du  m£me  article. 

§  3.  L'application  d'un  ou  de  plu- 
sieurs  R6glements  &  un  territoire, 
faite  en  vertu  des  dispositions  du 
§  5  de  1'article  5,  peut  prendre  fin  & 
toute  6poque. 

§  4.  Les  declarations  de  d&noncia- 
tion  pr6vues  au  §  3  ci-dessus  sont 
notifies  et  annoncees  selon  les  pre- 
scriptions du  §  i  de  Particle  II  et 
produisent  leur  effet  dans  les  condi- 
tions fix6es  audit  paragraphs. 

ARTICLE  13. — Arrangements 
particuliers 

Les  gouvernements  contractants 
se  r^servent,  pour  eux-m6mes,  pour 
les  exploitations  privies  reconnues 
par  eux  et  pour  d'autres  exploita- 
tions dfiment  autoris6es  £  cet  effet,  la 
facult6  de  conclure  des  arrangements 
particuliers  sur  les  points  du  service 
qui  n'interessent  pas  la  g6n6ralit6 
des  gouvernements.  Toutefois,  ces 
arrangements  devront  rester  dans 
les  limites  de  la  Convention  et  des 
R&glements  y  annexes,  pour  ce  qui 
concerne  les  brouillages  que  leur  mise 
£  execution  serait  susceptible  de 
produire  dans  les  services  des  autres 
pays. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


ARTICLE    14. — Relations  with  Non- 
contracting  Governments 

§  i.  Each  of  the  contracting  gov- 
ernments reserves  the  right,  for  itself 
and  for  the  private  operating  agen- 
cies which  it  recognizes,  to  determine 
the  conditions  under  which  it  will 
admit  telecommunications  exchanged 
with  a  country  which  has  not  ad- 
hered to  the  present  Convention  or 
to  the  Regulations  which  contain  the 
provisions  relative  to  the  telecom- 
munications involved. 

§  2.  If  a  telecommunication  origi- 
nating in  a  nonadhering  country  is 
accepted  by  an  adhering  country,  it 
must  be  transmitted  and,  so  far  as  it 
uses  the  channels  of  a  country  ad- 
hering to  the  Convention  and  to  the 
respective  Regulations,  the  man- 
datory provisions  of  the  Convention 
and  of  the  Regulations  in  question, 
as  well  as  the  normal  rates,  shall  be 
applicable  to  it. 

ARTICLE  15. — Arbitration 

§  i.  In  case  of  disagreement  be- 
tween two  or  more  contracting  gov- 
ernments concerning  the  execution 
of  either  the  present  Convention  or 
the  Regulations  contemplated  in  ar- 
ticle 2,  the  dispute,  if  it  is  not  settled 
through  diplomatic  channels,  shall 
be  submitted  to  arbitration  at  the 
request  of  any  one  of  the  govern- 
ments in  disagreement. 

§  2.  Unless  the  parties  in  disagree- 
ment agree  to  adopt  a  procedure 
already  established  by  treaties  con- 
cluded between  them  for  the  settle- 
ment of  international  disputes,  or  the 
procedure  provided  for  in  §  7  of  this 
article,  arbitrators  shall  be  ap- 
pointed in  the  following  manner: 

§  3.  (i)  The  parties  shall  decide, 
after  mutual  agreement,  whether  the 
arbitration  is  to  be  entrusted  to  in- 
dividuals or  to  governments  or  ad- 
ministrations; failing  an  agreement 
on  this  matter,  governments  shall  be 
resorted  to. 


ARTICLE  14. — Relations  avec  des  Etats 
non  contractants 

§  i.  Chacun  des  gouvernements 
contractants  se  reserve,  pour  lui  et 
pour  les  exploitations  privies  recon- 
nues  par  lui,  la  faculte  de  fixer  ies 
conditions  dans  lesquelles  il  admet 
les  telecommunications  6chang6es 
avec  un  pays  qui  n'a  pas  adhere  £  la 
presente  Convention  ou  au  R£gle- 
ment  dans  lequel  sont  comprises  les 
dispositions  relatives  aux  t616com- 
munications  en  cause. 

§  2.  Si  une  telecommunication 
originaire  d'un  pays  non  adherent 
est  acceptee  par  un  pays  adherent, 
elle  doit  £tre  transmise,  et,  pour 
autant  qu'elle  emprunte  les  voies 
d'un  pays  adherent  &  la  Convention 
et  aux  R£glements  respectifs,  les 
dispositions  obligatoires  de  la  Con- 
vention et  des  R&glements  en  ques- 
tion ainsi  que  les  taxes  normales  lui 
sont  appliqu6es. 

ARTICLE  15. — Arbitrage 

§  I.  En  cas  de  disaccord  entre 
deux  ou  plusieurs  gouvernements 
contractants  relativement  &  Tex6cu- 
tion  soit  d<e  la  pr<§sente  Convention, 
soit  des  R£glements  pr£vus  &  Tarticle 
2,  le  difKrend,  s'il  n'est  regie  par  la 
voie  diplomatique,  est  soumis  £  un 
jugement  arbitral  £  la  demande 
d'un  quelconque  des  gouvernements 
en  disaccord. 

§  2.  A  moins  que  les  Parties  en 
disaccord  ne  s'entendent  pour  faire 
usage  d'une  procedure  d6j&  etablie 
par  des  trails  conclus  entre  elles 
pour  le  r£glement  des  conflits  inter- 
nationaux,  ou  de  celle  pr^vue  au 
§  7  du  present  article,  il  sera  precede 
comme  il  suit  £  la  designation  des 
arbitres: 

§  3.  (i)  Les  Parties  deddent,  apr£s 
entente  redproque,  si  1'arbitrage 
doit  gtre  confie  £  des  personnes  ou  & 
des  gouvernements  ou  administra- 
tions; &  defaut  d 'entente,  il  est  re- 
couru  &  des  gouvernements. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


119 


(2)  In  case  the  arbitration  is  to  be 
entrusted  to  individuals,  the  arbitra- 
tors must  not  be  of  the  same  nation- 
ality as  any  one  of  the  parties  con- 
cerned in  the  dispute. 

(3)  In  case  the  arbitration  is  to  be 
entrusted    to    governments    or    ad- 
ministrations,   the   latter   must   be 
chosen  from  among  the  parties  ad- 
hering to  the  agreement,  the  applica- 
tion of  which  caused  the  dispute, 

§4.  The  party  appealing  to  ar- 
bitration shall  be  considered  as  the 
plaintiff.  This  party  shall  designate 
an  arbitrator  and  notify  the  opposing 
party  thereof.  The  defendant  must 
then  appoint  a  second  arbitrator, 
within  two  months  after  the  receipt 
of  plaintiff's  notification. 

§  5.  If  more  than  two  parties  are 
involved,  each  group  of  plaintiffs  or 
of  defendants  shall  appoint  an  arbi- 
trator, observing  the  same  procedure 
as  in  §  4. 

§  6.  The  two  arbitrators  thus  ap- 
pointed shall  agree  in  designating  an 
umpire  who,  if  the  arbitrators  are  in- 
dividuals and  not  governments  or 
administrations,  must  not  be  of  the 
same  nationality  as  either  of  them  or 
either  of  the  parties  involved.  Fail- 
ing an  agreement  of  the  arbitrators 
as  to  the  choice  of  the  umpire,  each 
arbitrator  shall  propose  an  umpire  in 
no  way  concerned  in  the  dispute. 
Lots  shall  then  be  drawn  between  the 
umpires  proposed.  The  drawing  of 
lots  shall  be  done  by  the  Bureau  of 
the  Union. 

§  7.  Finally,  the  parties  in  dispute 
shall  have  the  right  to  have  their 
disagreement  settled  by  a  single 
arbitrator.  In  this  case,  either  they 
shall  agree  on  the  choice  of  the  arbi- 
trator, or  the  latter  shall  be  desig- 
nated in  conformity  with  the  method 
indicated  in  §  6. 

§  8.  The  arbitrators  shall  be  free 
to  decide  on  the  procedure  to  be 
followed. 

§  9.  Each  party  shall  bear  the  ex- 
penses it  shall  have  incurred  in  the 


(2)  Dans  le  cas  ou  Tarbitrage  doit 
£tre    confi6    £    des    personnes,    les 
arbitres  ne  doivent  litre  de  la  natio- 
nalite    d'aucune    des     Parties    in- 
t6ressees  dans  le  diff£rend. 

(3)  Dans  le  cas  oti  1'arbitrage  doit 
§tre  confie  h.  des  gouvernements  ou 
administrations,  ceux-ci  doivent  £tre 
choisis  parmi  les  Parties  adh6rentes 
£  1'accord  dont  1'application  a  pro- 
voqu<§  le  differend. 

§  4.  La  Partie  qui  fait  appel  £ 
Tarbitrage  est  consid6r6e  comme 
Partie  demanderesse.  Elle  designe 
un  arbitre  et  le  notifie  4  la  partie  ad- 
verse. La  Partie  d<§fenderesse  doit 
alors  nommer  un  deuxieme  arbitre, 
dans  un  d6lai  de  deux  mois  &  partir 
de  la  reception  de  la  notification  de 
la  demanderesse. 

§  5.  S'il  s'agit  de  plus  de  deux 
Parties,  chaque  groupe  de  deman- 
deresses  ou  de  defenderesses  procede 
4  la  nomination  d'un  arbitre  en  ob- 
servant le  proc£d£  indique  au  §  4. 

§  6.  Les  deux  arbitres  ainsi  nom- 
m6s  s'entendent  pour  designer  un 
surarbitre  qui,  si  les  arbitres  sont 
des  personnes  et  non  pas  des  gou- 
vernements ou  administrations,  ne 
soit  de  la  nationality  d'aucun  d'eux 
et  d'aucune  des  Parties.  A  defaut 
pour  les  arbitres  de  s'entendre  sur  le 
choix  du  surarbitre,  chaque  arbitre 
propose  un  surarbitre  d6sint6resse 
dans  le  diff6rend.  II  est  ensuite  tire 
au  sort  entre  les  surarbitres  proposes. 
Ce  tirage  au  sort  est  effectu6  par  le 
Bureau  de  1'Union. 

§  7.  Enfin,  les  Parties  en  disac- 
cord ont  la  facult^  de  faire  juger  leur 
diff6rend  par  un  seul  arbitre.  Dans 
ce  cas,  ou  bien  elles  s'entendent  sur 
le  choix  de  Tarbitre,  ou  bien  celui-ci 
est  d6sign£  conform£ment  £  la  m£- 
thode  indiqu6e  au  §  6. 

§  8.  Les  arbitres  arrgtent  libre- 
ment  la  procedure  &  suivre. 

§  9.  Chaque  Partie  supporte  les 
d£penses  que  lui  occasionne  Tinstruc- 


I2O 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


investigation  of  the  dispute.  The 
cost  of  the  arbitration  shall  be  ap- 
portioned equally  among  the  parties 
involved. 

ARTICLE  16. — International  Consult- 
ing Committees 

§  i.  Consulting  committees  may 
be  formed  for  the  purpose  of  study- 
ing questions  relating  to  the  telecom- 
munication services. 

§  2.  The  number,  composition, 
duties,  and  functioning  of  these  com- 
mittees are  defined  in  the  Regulations 
annexed  to  the  present  Convention. 

ARTICLE  17. — Bureau  of  the  Union 

§  I.  A  central  office,  called  the 
Bureau  of  the  International  Tele- 
communication Union,  shall  function 
under  the  conditions  stated  herein- 
after: 

§  2.  (i)  In  addition  to  the  work 
and  operations  provided  for  by  the 
various  other  articles  of  the  Conven- 
tion and  of  the  Regulations,  the 
Bureau  of  the  Union  shall  be  charged 
with: 

(a)  work  preparatory  to  and  fol- 
lowing conferences,  in  which  it  shall 
be  represented  in  an  advisory  ca- 
pacity; 

(b)  providing,  in  cooperation  with 
the    organizing    administration    in- 
volved, the  secretariat  of  conferences 
of  the  Union,  as  well  as,  when  so  re- 
quested or  when  so  provided  for  by 
the    Regulations    annexed    to    the 
present  Convention,  the  secretariat 
of  meetings  of  committees  appointed 
by  the  Union  or  placed  under  the 
auspices  of  the  latter; 

(c)  issuing   such   publications   as 
will  be  found  generally  useful  be- 
tween two  conferences. 

(2)  On  the  basis  of  the  documents 
put  at  its  disposal  and  of  the  informa- 
tion which  it  may  gather,  it  shall 
publish    periodically    a   journal    of 
information  and  documentation  con- 
cerning telecommunications. 

(3)  It  must  also,  at  all  times,  hold 


tion  du  difKrend.  Les  frais  d 'arbi- 
trage sont  repartis  de  fagon  egale 
entre  les  Parties  en  cause. 

ARTICLE    16. — Comit&s    consultatifs 
international 

§  i.  Des  comites  consultatifs  peu- 
vent  £tre  institu6s  en  vue  d'etudier 
des  questions  relatives  aux  services 
des  telecommunications. 

§  2.  Lenombre,  la  composition,  les 
attributions  et  le  fonctionnement  de 
ces  comites  sont  definis  dans  les  R&gle- 
ments  annexes  a  la  pr6sente  Conven- 
tion. 

ARTICLE  17. — Bureau  de  V  Union 

§  i.  Un  office  central,  d6nomm6 
Bureau  de  1'Union  Internationale  des 
telecommunications,  fonctionne  dans 
les  conditions  fix6es  ci-apr£s : 

§  2.  (i)  Outre  les  travaux  et  ope- 
rations pr£vus  par  divers  autres 
articles  de  la  Convention  et  des 
R^glements,  le  Bureau  de  1'Union 
est  charg6 : 

a)  des  travaux  preparatoires  des 
conferences  et  des  travaux  consecu- 
tifs  a  ces  conferences,  auxquelles  il 
est  represente  avec  voix  consultative ; 

b)  d'assurer,  d'accord  avec  Tad- 
ministration  organisatrice  interessee, 
le    secretariat    des    conferences    de 
FUnion,  de  m§me  que,  lorsqu'il  en 
est  prie  ou  que  les  Rdglements  an- 
nexes a  la  presente  Convention  en 
disposent   ainsi,   le   secretariat  des 
reunions  des  comites  institues  par 
1'Union   ou  places  sous  1'egide   de 
celle-ci; 

c)  de  proceder  aux  publications 
dont  1'utilite  generale  viendrait  a  se 
reveler  entre  deux  conferences. 

(2)  II    publie   periodiquement,    a 
1'aide  des  documents  qui  sont  mis  a 
sa  disposition  et  des  renseignements 
qu'il    peut    recueillir,    un    journal 
d 'information  et  de  documentation 
concernant  les  telecommunications. 

(3)  II  doit,  d'ailleurs,  se  tenir  en 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


121 


itself  at  the  disposal  of  the  contract- 
ing governments  to  furnish  them 
with  such  opinions  and  information 
as  they  may  need  on  questions  con- 
cerning international  telecommuni- 
cations, and  which  it  is  in  a  better 
position  to  have  or  to  obtain  than 
these  governments. 

(4)  It  shall  prepare  an  annual  re- 
port on  its  activities,  which  shall  be 
communicated  to  all  members  of  the 
Union.  The  operating  account  shall 
be  submitted,  for  examination  and 
approval,  to  the  plenipotentiary  or 
administrative  conferences  provided 
for  in  article  1 8  of  the  present  Con- 
vention. 

§  3.  (i)  The  general  expenses  of 
the  Bureau  of  the  Union  must  not 
exceed,  per  year,  the  amounts  speci- 
fied in  the  Regulations  annexed  to 
the  present  Convention.  These  gen- 
eral expenses  shall  not  include: 

(a)  the  expenses  pertaining  to  the 
work  of  plenipotentiary  or  adminis- 
trative conferences, 

(&)  the  expenses  pertaining  to  the 
work  of  duly  created  committees. 

(2)  The  expenses  pertaining  to  the 
plenipotentiary  and  administrative 
conferences  shall  be  borne  by  all  the 
governments   participating   therein, 
in   proportion   to    the   contribution 
which  they  pay  for  the  operation  of 
the  Bureau  of  the  Union,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  provisions  of  the  fol- 
lowing subparagraph  (3) . 

The  expenses  pertaining  to  the 
meetings  of  the  committees  regu- 
larly created  shall  be  borne  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  provisions  of  the 
Regulations  annexed  to  the  present 
Convention. 

(3)  The  receipts  and  expenses  of 
the  Bureau  of  the  Union  must  be 
carried  in  two  separate  accounts,  one 
for  the  telegraph  and  telephone  serv- 
ices, the  other  for  the  radio  service. 
The  expenses  pertaining  to  each  of 
these  two  divisions  shall  be  borne  by 
the  governments  adhering  to  the  cor- 
responding   Regulations.     For    the 


tout  temps  £  la  disposition  des  gou- 
vernements  contractants  pour  leur 
fournir,  sur  les  questions  qui  int^res- 
sent  les  telecommunications  interna- 
tionales,  les  avis  et  les  renseigne- 
ments  dont  ils  ppurraient  avoir 
besoin,  et  qu'il  serait  mieux  en  me- 
sure  que  ces  gouvernements  de 
posseder  ou  de  se  procurer. 

(4)  II  fait,  sur  sa  gestion,  un  rap- 
port annuel  qui  est  communique  & 
tous  les  membres  de  1' Union.  Le 
compte  de  gestion  est  soumis  £ 
Texamen  et  £  1'appreciation  des  con- 
ferences de  pienipotentiaires  ou  ad- 
ministratives,  prevues  par  I'article 
1 8  de  la  presente  Convention, 

§  3.  (i)  Les  frais  communs  du 
Bureau  de  1' Union  ne  doivent  pas 
depasser,  par  annee,  les  sommes 
fixees  dans  les  R£glements  annexes 
£  la  presente  Convention.  Ces  frais 
comrnuns  ne  comprennent  pas: 

a)  les  frais  afferents  aux  travaux 
des  conferences  de  pienipotentiaires 
ou  administratives, 

5)  les  frais  afferents  aux  travaux 
de  comites  regulierement  crees. 

(2)  Les  frais  afferents  aux  confe- 
rences de  pienipotentiaires  et  admi- 
nistratives sont  supportes  par  tous  les 
gouvernements,  qui  y  prennent  part 
proportionnellement  &  la  contribu- 
tion qu'ils  payent  pour  le  fonctionne- 
ment  du  Bureau  de  1'Union,  suivant 
les  dispositions  de  1'alinea  (3)  ci-apr&s. 

Les  frais  afferents  aux  reunions 
des  comites  regulierement  crees  sont 
supportes  suivant  les  dispositions 
des  R&glements  annexes  i  la  presente 
Convention. 

(3)  Les  recettes  et  les  depenses  du 
Bureau    de    1'Union    doivent  ^faire 
1'objet  de  deux  comptes  distincts, 
1'un  pour  les  services  teiegraphique 
et    teiephonique,    1'autre    pour    le 
service    des     radio  communications. 
Les  frais  afferents  i  chacune  de  ces 
deux  divisions  sont  supportes  par  les 
gouvernements  adherents  aux  R£gle- 


122 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


apportioning  of  these  expenses,  the 
adhering  governments  shall  be  di- 
vided into  six  classes,  each  contribut- 
ing at  the  rate  of  a  certain  number  of 
units,  namely: 


ist  class:  25  units 
2d  class :  20  units 
3d  class 
4th  class 
5th  class 


6th  class : 


15  units 
10  units 
5  units 
3  units 


(4)  Each  government  shall  inform 
the  Bureau  of  the  Union,  directly  or 
through  its  administration,  of  the 
class  in  which  its  country  is  to  be 
placed.     This  classification  shall  be 
communicated  to  the  members  of  the 
Union. 

(5)  The  amounts  advanced  by  the 
government  supervising  the  Bureau 
of  the  Union  must  be  refunded  by 
the   debtor  governments  with   the 
briefest  possible  delay,  and,  at  the 
latest,  at  the  end  of  the  fourth  month 
following  the  month  during  which 
the   account   was   rendered.     After 
this  period,  the  amounts  due  shall 
bear  interest,  accruing  to  the  creditor 
government,  at  the  rate  of  six  per- 
cent (6%)  per  annum,  counting  from 
the  date  of  expiration  of  the  above- 
mentioned  period. 

§  4.  The  Bureau  of  the  Union  shall 
be  placed  under  the  high  supervision 
of  the  Government  of  the  Swiss  Con- 
federation which  shall  regulate  its 
organization,  supervise  its  finances, 
make  the  necessary  advances,  and 
audit  the  annual  accounts. 

CHAPTER  II 

CONFERENCES 

ARTICLE  18. — Conferences  of  Pleni- 
potentiaries and  Administrative 
Conferences 

§  i.  The  provisions  of  the  present 
Convention  shall  be  subject  to  revi- 
sion by  conferences  of  plenipoten- 
tiaries of  the  contracting  govern- 
ments. 


ments  correspondants.  Pour  la  r6- 
partition  de  ces  frais,  les  gouverne- 
ments  adherents  sont  divis6s  en  six 
classes,  contribuant -chacun  dans  la 
proportion  d'un  certain  nombre 
d 'unites,  savoir: 

ire  classe:  25  unites, 
2e  classe:  20  unites, 
3e  classe:  15  unites, 
4e  classe:  10  unites, 
5e  classe:  5  unites, 
6e  classe:  3  unites. 

(4)  Chaque     gouvernement     fait 
connaitre  au  Bureau  de  1'Union,  soit 
directement,  soit  par  rinterm^diaire 
de  son  administration,  dans  quelle 
classe    son    pays    doit   £tre    rang6. 
Cette  classification  est  communique 
aux  membres  de  TUnion. 

(5)  Les  sommes  avanc6es  par  le 
gouvernement  qui  contr61e  le  Bureau 
de  TUnion  doivent  £tre  rembours6es, 
par    les    gouvernements    d6biteurs, 
dans  le  plus  bref  d61ai  et,  au  plus  tard, 
&  Texpiration   du   quatri£me    mois 
qui   suit  le  mois  durant  lequel   le 
compte    a    6t6    envoy<§.     Pass6    ce 
d61ai,   les  sommes  dues   sont   pro- 
ductives    d'int£r6ts,    au    profit    du 
gouvernement  crMiteur,  £  raison  de 
six  pour  cent  (6%)  Tan,  &  compter 
du   jour   de   1'expiration    du   d61ai 
susmentionn6. 

§  4.  Le  Bureau  de  T  Union  est 
plac6  sous  la  haute  surveillance  du 
Gouvernement  de  la  Confederation 
suisse,  qui  en  r&gle  1'organisation,  en 
contrdle  les  finances,  fait  les  avances 
n6cessaires  et  v6rifie  le  compte 
annuel. 

CHAPITRE  II 

CONFERENCES 

ARTICLE  18. — Conferences  de  pleni- 
potentiaires  et  conferences  adminis- 
tfatives 

§  i.  Les  prescriptions  de  la  pr6- 
sente  Convention  sont  revisables  par 
des  conferences  de  pl£nipotentiaires 
des  gouvernements  contractants. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


123 


§  2.  Revision  of  the  Convention 
shall  be  undertaken  when  it  has  been 
so  decided  by  a  preceding  conference 
of  plenipotentiaries,  or  when  at  least 
twenty  contracting  governments  have 
so  stated  their  desire  to  the  govern- 
ment of  the  country  in  which  the 
Bureau  of  the  Union  is  located. 

§  3.  The  provisions  of  the  Regula- 
tions annexed  to  this  Convention 
shall  be  subject  to  revision  by  ad- 
ministrative conferences  of  delegates 
from  the  contracting  governments 
which  have  approved  the  Regula- 
tions to  be  revised,  each  conference 
itself  determining  the  place  and  time 
for  the  following  meeting. 

§  4.  Each  administrative  confer- 
ence may  permit  the  participation,  in 
an  advisory  capacity,  of  private 
operating  agencies  recognized  by 
the  respective  contracting  govern- 
ments. 

ARTICLE  19. — Change  of  Date  of  a 
Conference 

§  I.  The  time  set  for  the  meeting 
of  a  conference  of  plenipotentiaries 
or  of  an  administrative  conference 
may  be  advanced  or  postponed  if 
request  to  this  effect  is  made  by  at 
least  ten  of  the  contracting  govern- 
ments to  the  government  of  the 
country  in  which  the  Bureau  of  the 
Union  is  located,  and  if  such  proposal 
is  agreed  to  by  the  majority  of  the 
contracting  governments  which  shall 
have  forwarded  their  opinion  within 
the  time  indicated. 

§  2.  The  conference  shall  then  be 
held  in  the  country  originally  desig- 
nated, if  the  government  of  that 
country  consents.  Otherwise,  the 
contracting  governments  shall  be 
consulted  through  the  government 
of  the  country  in  which  the  Bureau 
of  the  Union  is  located. 

ARTICLE  20. — Internal  Regulations  of 
the  Conferences 

§  I.  Before  any  other  deliberation, 
each  conference  shall  establish  Inter- 
nal Regulations  containing  the  rules 


§  2.  II  est  procede"  £  la  revision  de 
la  Convention  lorsqu'il  en  a  6t£  ainsi 
decid6  par  une  precedente  conference 
de  plenipotentiaires,  ou  lorsque 
vingt  ^  gouvernements  contractants 
au  nioins  en  ont  manifeste  le  desir  au 
gouvernement  du  pays  oil  siege  le 
Bureau  de  T Union. 

§  3.  Les  prescriptions  des  R£gle- 
ments  annexes  &  la  presente  Conven- 
tion sont  revisables  par  des  confe"- 
rences  administratives  de  d61egu6s 
des  gouvernements  contractants  qui 
ont  approuv6  les  Rfeglements  soumis 
£  revision,  chaque  conference  fixant 
elle-m^me  le  lieu  et  1'epoque  de  la 
reunion  suivante. 

§  4.  Chaque  conference  adminis- 
trative peut  permettre  la  participa- 
tion, &  titre  consultatif,  des  ex- 
ploitations privies  reconnues  par  les 
gouvernements  contractants  re- 
spectifs. 

ARTICLE  19. — Changement  de  la  date 
d'une  conference 

§  I.  L'epoque  fix6e  pour  la  re- 
union d'une  conference,  soit  de 
plenipotentiaires,  soit  administra- 
tive, peut  £tre  avancee  ou  reculee  si 
la  demande  en  est  faite  par  dix,  au 
moins,  des  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants, au  gouvernement  du  pays  ou 
le  Bureau  de  1* Union  a  son  si&ge,  et  si 
cette  proposition  recoit  1'agrement 
de  la  majorit6  des  gouvernements 
contractants  qui  auront  fait  par- 
venir  leur  avis  dans  le  delai  fix6. 

§  2.  La  conference  a  alors  lieu 
dans  le  pays  primitivement  d6sign6, 
si  le  gouvernement  de  ce  pays  y  con- 
sent. Dans  le  cas  contraire,  il  est 
proc£d6  £  une  consultation  des  gou- 
vernements contractants,  par  les 
soins  du  gouvernement  du  pays  oil  le 
Bureau  de  TUnion  a  son  siege. 

ARTICLE  20. — Rbglement  interieur  des 
conferences 

§  i.  Avant  toute  autre  d<§lib6ra- 
tion,  chaque  conference  etablit  un 
reglement  int6rieur,  qui  contient  les 


124 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  316 


according  to  which  the  debates  and 
the  work  shall  be  organized  and 
conducted. 

§  2.  For  this  purpose,  the  confer- 
ence shall  take  as  a  basis  the  Internal 
Regulations  of  the  preceding  confer- 
ence, which  it  may  modify  if  deemed 
advisable. 

ARTICLE  21. — Language 

§  i.  The  language  used  in  drafting 
the  acts  of  the  conferences  and  for  all 
the  documents  of  the  Union,  shall  be 
French. 

§  2,  (i)  In  the  discussions  of  con- 
ferences, the  French  and  English 
languages  shall  be  permitted. 

(2)  Speeches  made  in  French  shall 
immediately  be  translated  into  Eng- 
lish, and  vice  versa,  by  official  inter- 
preters of  the  Bureau  of  the  Union. 

(3)  Other  languages  may  also  be 
used  in  the  discussions  of  the  confer- 
ences, on  condition  that  the  delegates 
using  them  provide  for  the  transla- 
tion   of    their    own    speeches    into 
French  or  into  English. 

(4)  Likewise  these  delegates  may, 
if  they  so  desire,  have  speeches  in 
French  or  in  English  translated  into 
their  own  language. 

CHAPTER  III 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS 

ARTICLE  22. — Telecommunication  as 
a  Public  Service 

The  contracting  governments  rec- 
ognize the  right  of  the  public  to 
correspond  by  means  of  the  interna- 
tional service  of  public  correspond- 
ence. The  service,  the  charges,  the 
guarantees  shall  be  the  same  for  all 
senders,  without  any  priority  or  pref- 
erence whatsoever  not  provided  for 
by  the  Convention  or  the  Regula- 
tions annexed  thereto. 

ARTICLE  23. — Responsibility 

The  contracting  governments  de- 
clare that  they  accept  no  respon- 


r&gles  suivant  lesquelles  sont  or- 
ganises et  conduits  les  debats  et  les 
travaux. 

§  2.  A  cet  effet,  la  conference 
prend  comme  base  le  r&glement  in- 
terieur  de  la  pr6c6dente  conference, 
qu'elle  modifie  si  elle  I'estime  utile. 

ARTICLE  21. — Langue 

§  i.  La  langue  employee  pour  la 
redaction  des  actes  des  conferences  et 
pour  tous  les  documents  de  1'Union 
est  le  frangais. 

§  2.  (i)  Dans  les  debats  des  con- 
ferences, les  langues  frangaise  et 
anglaise  sont  admises. 

(2)  Les    discours    prononc6s    en 
fran^ais   sont   imm6diatement    tra- 
duits  en  anglais,  et  r6ciproquement, 
par    des    traducteurs    officiels    du 
Bureau  de  TUnion. 

(3)  En    outre,    d'autres    langues 
peuvent  £tre  utilises  dans  les  debats 
des  conferences,  &  la  condition  que  les 
deiegues  qui  les  emploient  pourvoient 
eux~m6mes  &  la  traduction  de  leurs 
discours  en  frangais  ou  en  anglais. 

(4)  De  m§me,  ces  deiegues  peu- 
vent, s'ils  le  desirent,  faire  traduire 
dans  leur  propre  langue  les  discours 
prononces  en  frangais  ou  en  anglais. 

CHAPITRE  III 
DISPOSITIONS  D'ORDRE  G^N^RAL 

ARTICLE  22. — La  telecommunication 
service  public 

Les  gouvernements  contractants 
reconnaissent  au  public  le  droit  de 
correspondre  au  moyen  du  service 
international  de  la  correspondance 
publique.  Le  service,  les  taxes,  les 
garanties  seront  les  m£mes  pour  tous 
les  expediteurs,  sans  priorite  ni  pre- 
ference quelconques  non  prevues  par 
la  Convention  ou  les  R&glements  y 
annexes. 

ARTICLE  23. — Responsabilitg 

Les  gouvernements  contractants 
dedarent  n'accepter  aucune  respon- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


125 


sibility  in  regard  to  the  users  of 
the  international  telecommunication 
service. 


ARTICLE  24. 


Secrecy  of  Telecommu- 
nications 


§  i.  The  contracting  governments 
agree  to  take  all  the  measures  possi- 
ble, compatible  with  the  system  of 
telecommunication  used,  with  a  view 
to  insuring  the  secrecy  of  interna- 
tional correspondence. 

§  2.  However,  they  reserve  the 
right  to  communicate  international 
correspondence  to  the  proper  author- 
ities, in  order  to  insure  either  the  ap- 
plication of  their  internal  legislation, 
or  the  execution  of  international 
conventions,  to  which  the  govern- 
ments concerned  are  parties. 

ARTICLE  25.  —  Constitution,  Opera- 
tion, and  Protection  of  the  Telecom- 
munication Installations  and  Chan- 
nels 

§  I  .  The  contracting  governments, 
in  agreement  with  the  other  contract- 
ing governments  concerned,  shall 
establish,  under  the  best  technical 
conditions,  the  channels  and  installa- 
tions necessary  to  carry  on  the  rapid 
and  uninterrupted  exchange  of  tele- 
communications in  the  international 
service. 

§  2.  So  far  as  possible,  these  chan- 
nels and  installations  must  be  oper- 
ated by  the  best  methods  and  pro- 
cedures which  the  practice  of  the 
service  shall  have  made  known  ;  they 
must  be  maintained  constantly  in 
operating  condition  and  kept  abreast 
of  scientific  and  technical  progress. 

§  3.  The  contracting  governments 
shall  insure  the  protection  of  these 
channels  and  installations  within  the 
limits  of  their  respective  action. 

§  4.  Unless  other  conditions  are 
laid  down  by  special  arrangements, 
each  contracting  government  shall, 
at  its  own  expense,  establish  and 
maintain  the  sections  of  interna- 
tional conductors  included  within  the 
limits  of  the  territory  of  its  country. 


sabilite  &  regard  des  usagers  du 
service  international  de  telecom- 
munication. 

ARTICLE  24. — Secret  des  ^com- 
munications 

§  I.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants  s'engagent  &  prendre  toutes  les 
mesures  possibles,  compatibles  avec 
le  systeme  de  telecommunication 
employe,  en  vue  d 'assurer  le  secret 
des  correspondances  Internationales. 

§  2.  Toutefois,  ils  se  reservent  le 
droit  de  communiquer  les  correspon- 
dances internationales  aux  autorites 
competentes  pour  assurer,  soit  Tap- 
plication  de  leur  legislation  interieure, 
soit  Texecution  des  conventions  in- 
ternationales auxquelles  les  gouver- 
nements interesses  sont  Parties. 

ARTICLE  25. — Constitution,  exploita- 
tion et  sauvegarde  des  installations 
et  des  voies  de  telecommunication 

§  i.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants  etablissent,  en  accord  avec  les 
autres  gouvernements  contractants 
interesses  et  dans  les  meilleures  con- 
ditions techniques,  les  voies  et  in- 
stallations necessaires  pour  assurer 
Tediange  rapide  et  ininterrompu  des 
telecommunications  du  service  in- 
ternational. 

§  2.  Autant  que  possible,  ces  voies 
et  installations  doivent  £tre  exploi- 
tees  par  les  methodes  et  procedes  les 
meilleurs  que  la  pratique  du  service 
aura  fait  connaitre,  entretenues  en 
constant  etat  d'utilisation  et  main- 
tenues  au  niveau  des  progres  scien- 
tifiques  et  techniques. 

§  3.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants assurent  la  sauvegarde  de  ces 
voies  et  installations  dans  les  limites 
de  leur  action  respective. 

§  4.  Chaque  gouvernement  con- 
tractant  etablit  et  entretient  It  ses 
frais — £  rnoins  d 'arrangement  par- 
ticulier  fixant  d'autres  conditions — 
les  sections  des  conducteurs  inter- 
nationaux  comprises  dans  les  limites 
du  territoire  de  son  pays. 


126 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


§  5.  In  the  countries  where  certain 
telecommunication  services  are  oper- 
ated by  private  operating  agencies 
recognized  by  the  governments,  the 
above-mentioned  obligations  shall  be 
undertaken  by  the  private  operating 
agencies. 

ARTICLE  26. — Stoppage  of  Telecom- 
munications 

§  i.  The  contracting  governments 
reserve  the  right  to  stop  the  trans- 
mission of  any  private  telegram  or 
radiotelegram  which  might  appear 
dangerous  to  the  safety  of  the  state 
or  contrary  to  the  laws  of  the  coun- 
try, to  public  order,  or  to  decency, 
provided  that  they  immediately 
notify  the  office  of  origin  of  the  stop- 
page of  the  said  communication  or  of 
any  part  thereof,  except  when  it 
might  appear  dangerous  to  the  safety 
of  the  state  to  issue  such  notice. 

§  2.  The  contracting  governments 
likewise  reserve  the  right  to  interrupt 
any  private  telephone  communica- 
tion which  might  appear  dangerous 
to  the  safety  of  the  state  or  contrary 
to  the  laws  of  the  country,  to  public 
order,  or  to  decency. 

ARTICLE  27. — Suspension  of  Service 

Each  contracting  government  re- 
serves the  right  to  suspend  the  serv- 
ice of  international  telecommunica- 
tion for  an  indefinite  time  if  it  deems 
necessary,  either  generally  or  only  as 
regards  certain  connections  and/or 
certain  classes  of  communications, 
provided  that  it  immediately  so  ad- 
vise each  of  the  other  contracting 
governments,  through  the  intermedi- 
ary of  the  Bureau  of  the  Union. 


ARTICLE  28. — Investigation  of  Viola- 
tions 

The  contracting  governments  un- 
dertake to  inform  each  other  con- 
cerning violations  of  the  provisions 


§  5.  Dans  les  pays  oil  certains  ser- 
vices de  telecommunication  sont  as- 
sures par  des  exploitations  privees 
reconnues  par  les  gouvernements,  les 
engagements  ci-dessus  sont  pris  par 
les  exploitations  privies. 


ARTICLE  26. — ArrU  des  ^communi- 
cations 

§  i.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants  se  r<§servent  le  droit  d'arr^ter 
la  transmission  de  tout  te!6gramme 
ou  radiot616gramrne  priv6  qui  parai- 
trait  dangereux  pour  la  sfirete"  de 
1'Etat  ou  contraire  aux  lois  du  pays, 
£  Tordre  public  ou  aux  bonnes 
mceurs,  &  charge  d'avertir  imm6di- 
atement  le  bureau  d'origine  de  1'arrgt 
de  ladite  communication  ou  djune 
partie  quelconque  de  celle-ci,  sauf 
dans  le  cas  oti  remission  de  1'avis 
peut  paraitre  dangereuse  pour  la  sfir- 
et6  de  1'Etat. 

§  2.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants  se  reservent  aussi  le  droit  de 
couper  toute  communication  tele- 
phonique  privee  qui  peut  paraitre 
dangereuse  pour  la  sftret6  de  1'Etat  ou 
contraire  aux  lois  du  pays,  &  Tordre 
public  ou  aux  bonnes  mceurs. 

ARTICLE  27. — Suspension  du  service 

Chaque  gouvernement  contrac- 
tant  se  reserve  le  droit  de  suspendre 
le  service  des  telecommunications 
internationales  pour  un  temps  inde- 
termine,  s'il  le  juge  necessaire,  soit 
d'une  maniere  generate,  soit  seule- 
ment  pour  certaines  relations  et/ou 
pour  certaines  natures  de  corre- 
spondances,  &  charge  pour  lui  d'en 
aviser  imm6diatement  chacun  des 
autres  gouvernements  contractants, 
par  Pinterm6diaire  du  Bureau  de 
1'Union. 

ARTICLE   28. — Instruction   des    con- 
traventions 

Les  gouvernements  contractants 
s'engagent  &  se  renseigner  mutuelle- 
ment  au  sujet  des  infractions  aux 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


127 


of  the  present  Convention  and  of  the 
Regulations  which  they  accept,  in 
order  to  facilitate  the  action  to  be 
taken. 

ARTICLE  29. — Charges  and  Franking 
Privileges 

The  provisions  relating  to  the 
charges  for  telecommunications  and 
the  various  cases  in  which  the  latter 
enjoy  franking  privileges  are  laid 
down  in  the  Regulations  annexed  to 
the  present  Convention. 

ARTICLE  30. — Priority  of  Transmis- 
sion for  Government  Telegrams  and 
Radiotelegrams 

In  transmission,  government  tele- 
grams and  radio  telegrams  shall  enjoy 
priority  over  other  telegrams  and 
radio  telegrams,  except  in  the  case 
when  the  sender  expressly  waives 
such  right  of  priority. 

ARTICLE  31. — Secret  Language 

§  i.  Government  telegrams  and 
radiotelegrams  as  well  as  service 
telegrams  and  radiotelegrams,  in  all 
relations,  may  be  written  in  secret 
language. 

§  2.  Private  telegrams  and  radio- 
telegrams  may  be  sent  in  secret 
language  between  all  the  countries, 
except  those  which  previously,  through 
the  intermediary  of  the  Bureau  of  the 
Union,  have  announced  that  they  do 
not  permit  such  language  for  these 
categories  of  messages, 

§  3.  Contracting  governments  which 
do  not  permit  private  telegrams  and 
radiotelegrams  in  secret  language 
from  or  to  their  own  territory  must 
permit  them  to  pass  in  transit,  except 
in  the  case  of  suspension  of  service 
provided  for  in  article  27. 

ARTICLE  32. — Monetary  Unit 

The  monetary  unit  used  in  the 
composition  of  international  tele- 
communication rates  and  in  setting 


dispositions  de  la  presente  Conven- 
tion et  des  R£glements  qu'ils  accep- 
tent,  afin  de  faciliter  les  poursuites  £ 
exercer. 

ARTICLE  29.  —  Taxes  et  franchise 

Les  dispositions  relatives  aux 
taxes  des  telecommunications  et  les 
divers  cas  dans  lesquels  celles-ci 
b  efficient  de  la  franchise  sont  fixes 
dans  les  R&glements  annexes  &  la  pre- 
sente Convention. 

ARTICLE  30.  —  Priority  de  transmis- 
sion des  ttUgrammes  et  radiotele- 
grammes  d'Etat 

Dans  la  transmission,  les  tele- 
grammes  et  radioteiegrammes  d'Etat 
jouissent  de  la  priorite  sur  les  autres 
teiegrammes  et  radioteiegrammes, 
sauf  dans  le  cas  oti  Texpediteur  de- 
clare renoncer  £  ce  droit  de  priorite. 

ARTICLE  31.  —  Langage  secret 


§  I.  Les  teiegrammes  et  les 
teiegrammes  d'Etat  ainsi  que  les 
teiegrammes  et  les  radioteiegrammes 
de  service  peuvent  £tre  rediges  en 
langage  secret  dans  toutes  les  rela- 
tions. 

§  2.  Les  teiegrammes  et  les  radio- 
teiegrammes prives  peuvent  §tre 
emis  en  langage  secret  entre  tous  les 
pays,  &  Texception  de  ceux  qui  auront 
prlalablement  notifie,  par  Tinter- 
mediaire  du  Bureau  de  1'Union,  qu'ils 
n'admettent  pas  ce  langage  pour  ces 
categories  de  correspondences. 

§  3.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants  qui  n'admettent  pas  les  tele- 
grammes  et  les  radioteiegrammes 
prives  en  langage  secret  en  provenance 
ou  £  destination  de  leur  propre  ter- 
ritoire  doivent  les  laisser  circuler  en 
transit,  sauf  le  cas  de  suspension  de 
service  defini  &  1'article  27. 

ARTICLE  32.  —  Unite  mon&taire 

L'unite  monetaire  employee  £  la 
composition  des  tarifs  des  telecom- 
munications internationales  et  & 


128 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


up  the  international  accounts  shall 
be  the  gold  franc  of  loo  centimes, 
weighing  10/31  of  a  gram,  and  of  a 
fineness  of  0.900. 

ARTICLE  33. — Rendering  of  Accounts 

The  contracting  governments  must 
account  to  one  another  for  the 
charges  collected  by  their  respective 
services. 

CHAPTER  IV 

SPECIAL  PROVISIONS  FOR  RADIO 

ARTICLE  34. — Intercommunication 

§  I.  Stations  carrying  on  radio 
communications  in  the  mobile  serv- 
ice shall  be  bound,  within  the  scope 
of  their  normal  operation,  to  ex- 
change radio  communications  with 
one  another  irrespective  of  the  radio 
system  they  have  adopted. 

§2.  In  order  not  to  hinder  scien- 
tific progress,  however,  the  provi- 
sions of  the  preceding  paragraph 
shall  not  prevent  the  use  of  a  radio 
system  incapable  of  communicating 
with  other  systems  provided  that 
this  inability  is  due  to  the  specific 
nature  of  the  system  and  that  it  is 
not  the  result  of  devices  adopted 
solely  for  the  purpose  of  preventing 
intercommunication . 


ARTICLE  35. — Interference 

§  i.  All  stations,  regardless  of 
their  purpose,  must,  so  far  as  possi- 
ble, be  established  and  operated  in 
such  a  manner  as  not  to  interfere 
with  the  radio  services  or  communi- 
cations of  either  the  other  contract- 
ing governments,  or  the  private 
operating  agencies  recognized  by 
these  contracting  governments  and 
of  other  duly  authorized  operating 
agencies  which  carry  on  radio-com- 
munication service. 

§2.  Each  contracting  government 
which  does  not  operate  the  radio 
facilities  itself  undertakes  to  require 


T^tablissement  des  comptes  inter- 
nationaux  est  le  franc-or  4  100  cen- 
times, d'un  poids  de  10/31  de  gramme 
et  d'un  titre  de  0,900. 

ARTICLE  33. — Reddition  des  comptes 

Les  gouvernements  contractants 
se  doivent  r6ciproquement  compte 
des  taxes  percues  par  leurs  services 
respectifs. 

CHAPITRE  IV 

DISPOSITIONS  SPECIALES  AUX  RADIO- 
COMMUNICATIONS 

ARTICLE  34. — Intercommunication 

§  i.  Les  stations  assuran  ties  radio- 
communications  dans  le  service  mo- 
bile sont  tenues,  dans  les  limites  de 
leur  affectation  normale,  d'6changer 
r6ciproquement  les  radiocommuni- 
cations  sans  distinction  du  syst&me 
radio&ectrique  adopt6  par  elles. 

§  2.  Toutefois,  afin  de  ne  pas  en- 
traver  les  progr£s  scientifiques,  les 
dispositions  du  paragraphe  pr6c6dent 
n'empgchent  pas  Temploi  d'un  sys- 
t£me  radio&ectrique  incapable  de 
communiquer  avec  d'autres  sys- 
t£mes,  pourvu  que  cette  incapacity 
soit  due  £  la  nature  sp6cifique  de  ce 
syst&me  et  qu'elle  ne  soit  pas  Teffet 
de  dispositifs  adopt&s  uniquement 
en  vue  d'emp^cher  rintercommunir 
cation. 

ARTICLE  35. — Brouillages 

§  i.  Toutes  les  stations,  quel  que 
soit  leur  objet,  doivent,  autant  que 
possible,  £tre  6tablies  et  exploit6es 
de  manure  £  ne  pas  troubler  les 
communications  ou  services  radio- 
£l£ctriques,  soit  des  autres  gou- 
vernements contractants,  soit  des 
exploitations  privies  reconnues  par 
ces  gouvernementscontractantsetdes 
autres  exploitations  dfiment  autori- 
sees  qui  effectuent  un  service  de 
radiocommunication . 

§  2.  Chacun  des  gouvernements 
contractants  n'exploitant  pas  lui- 
m£me  les  moyens  de  radiocommuni- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION 


129 


the  private  operating  agencies  rec- 
ognized by  it  and  the  other  operating 
agencies  duly  authorized  for  this  pur- 
pose, to  observe  the  provisions  of  §  I 
above. 

ARTICLE  36. — Distress  Calls  and 
Messages 

Stations  participating  in  the  mo- 
bile service  shall  be  obliged  to  accept, 
with  absolute  priority,  distress  calls 
and  messages  regardless  of  their 
origin,  to  reply  in  the  same  manner 
to  such  messages,  and  immediately 
to  take  such  action  in  regard  thereto 
as  they  may  require. 

ARTICLE  37. — False  or  Deceptive  Dis- 
tress Signals — Irregular  Use  of  Call 
Signals 

The  contracting  governments  agree 
to  take  the  steps  required  to  prevent 
the  transmission  or  the  putting  into 
circulation  of  false  or  deceptive  dis- 
tress signals  or  distress  calls,  and  the 
use,  by  a  station,  of  call  signals  which 
have  not  been  regularly  assigned  to 
it. 


ARTICLE  38. — Limited  Service 

Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of 
§  I  of  article  34,  a  station  may  be  as- 
signed to  a  limited  international  tele- 
communication service,  determined 
by  the  purpose  of  such  telecommuni- 
cation or  by  other  circumstances 
independent  of  the  system. 


ARTICLE   39. — Installations   of  Na- 
tional Defense  Services 

§  i.  The  contracting  governments 
retain  their  full  freedom  in  regard  to 
radio  installations  not  covered  by 
article  9  and,  particularly,  the  mili- 
tary stations  of  land,  maritime,  or  air 
forces. 

§  2.  (i)  However,  these  installa- 
tions and  stations  must,  so  far  as  pos- 


cation  s 'engage  &  exiger  des  exploi- 
tations privies  reconnues  par  lui  et 
des  autres  exploitations  dtiment 
autoris£es  £  cet  effet  Tobservation  de 
la  prescription  du  §  i  ci-dessus. 

ARTICLE  36, — Appels  et  messages  de 
detresse 

Les  stations  participant  au  service 
mobile  sont  obligees  d'accepter  par 
priority  absolue  les  appels  et  mes- 
sages de  detresse,  quelle  qu'en  soit 
la  provenance,  de  repondre  de  m£me 
&  ces  messages  et  d'y  donner  imm£di- 
atement  la  suite  qu'ils  comportent. 


ARTICLE  37. — Signaux  de  d&tresse 
faux  ou  trompeurs — Usage  irregu- 
lier  d'indicatifs  d'appel 

Les  gouvernements  contractants 
s'engagent  &  prendre  les  mesures 
utiles  pour  r6primer  la  transmission 
ou  la  mise  en  circulation  de  signaux 
de  detresse  ou  d'appels  de  detresse 
faux  ou  trompeurs  et  1'usage,  par  une 
station,  d'indicatifs  d'appel  qui  ne 
lui  ont  pas  6t<§  reguli&rement  at- 
tribues. 

ARTICLE  38. — Service  restreint 

Nonobstant  les  dispositions  du 
§  ier  de  1'article  34,  une  station  peut 
6tre  affect£e  &  un  service  interna- 
tional restreint  de  t616communication 
d6termin6  par  le  but  de  ^cette  tele- 
communication ou  par  d'autres  cir- 
constances  independantes  du  sys- 
t£me  employ^. 

ARTICLE  39. — Installations  des  ser- 
vices de  defense  nationale 

§  i.  Les  gouvernements  contrac- 
tants conservent  leur  enti&re  libert£ 
relativement  aux  installations  radio- 
£lectriques  non  pr&vues  &  Tarticle  9 
et,  notamment,  aux  stations  mili- 
taires  des  forces  terrestres,  mari- 
times  ou  a6riennes. 

§2.  (i)  Toutefois,  ces  installa- 
tions et  stations  doivent,  autant  que 


130 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


sible,  comply  with  the  regulatory 
provisions  concerning  aid  to  be  ren- 
dered in  case  of  distress  and  measures 
to  be  taken  to  avoid  interference. 
They  must  also,  to  the  extent  possi- 
ble, comply  with  the  regulatory 
provisions  concerning  the  types  of 
waves  and  the  frequencies  to  be  used, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  service 
performed  by  the  said  services. 

(2)  Moreover,  when  these  installa- 
tions and  stations  exchange  public 
correspondence  or  engage  in  the  spe- 
cial services  governed  by  the  Regu- 
lations annexed  to  the  present  Con- 
vention, they  must,  in  general,  com- 
ply with  the  regulatory  provisions 
for  the  conduct  of  such  services. 


possible,  observer  les  dispositions 
r<§glementaires  relatives  aux  secours  £ 
prater  en  cas  de  d6tresse  et  aux 
mesures  &  prendre  pour  emp^cher  le 
brouillage.  Elles  doivent  aussi,  au- 
tant  que  possible,  observer  les  dis- 
positions r<§glementaires  en  ce  qui 
concerne  les  types  d'ondes  et  les  fr6- 
quences  &  utiliser,  selon  le  genre  de 
service  que  lesdites  stations  assurent. 

(2)  En  outre,  lorsque  ces  instal- 
lations et  stations  font  un  ^change  de 
correspondance  publique  ou  parti- 
cipent  aux  services  sp&iaux  r£gis  par 
les  R6glements  annexes  &  la  prfeente 
Convention,  elles  doivent  se  con- 
former,  en  g6n£ral,  aux  prescriptions 
r£glementaires  pour  Pex6cution  de 
ces  services. 


CHAPTER  V 

FINAL  PROVISIONS 

ARTICLE  40. — Effective  Date  of  the 
Convention 

The  present  Convention  shall  be- 
come effective  on  the  first  day  of 
January,  nineteen  hundred  and  thirty- 
four. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF  the  respec- 
tive plenipotentiaries  have  signed 
the  Convention  in  a  single  copy 
which  shall  remain  deposited  in  the 
archives  of  the  Government  of  Spain 
and  one  copy  of  which  shall  be  for- 
warded to  each  government. 

Done  at  Madrid,  December  9, 
1932. 


CHAPITRE  V 

DISPOSITION  FINALE 

ARTICLE  40. — Mise  en  vigueur  de  la 
Convention 

La  pr6sente  Convention  entrera  en 
vigueur  le  premier  Janvier  mil  neuf 
cent  trente-quatre. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI,  les  p!6nipoten- 
tiaires  respectifs  ont  sign  €  la  Con- 
vention en  un  exemplaire  qui  restera 
d<§pos£  aux  archives  du  Gouverne- 
ment  de  TEspagne  et  dont  une  copie 
sera  remise  &  chaque  gouvernement. 

Fait  i  Madrid,  le  9  d6cembre  1932. 


[Signed:]  For  the  Union  of  South  Africa:  H.  J.  LENTON,  A.  R.  McLACH- 
LAN;  for  Germany:  HERMANN  GIESS,  Dr.  ING.  HANS  CARL  STEIDLE,  Dr. 
PAUL  JAGER,  Dr.  HANS  HARBICH,  PAUL  MUNCH,  MARTIN  FEUERHAHN, 
SIEGFRIED  MEY,  Dr.  FRIEDRICH  HERATH,  RUDOLF  SALZMANN,  ERHARD 
MAERTENS,  CURT  WAGNER;  for  the  Argentine  Republic:  D.  GARCIA  MAN- 
SILLA,  R.  CORREA  LUNA,  Luis  S.  CASTiNEiRAS,  M.  SAENZ  BRIONES;  for  the 
Commonwealth  of  Australia:  J.  M.  CRAWFORD;  for  Austria:  RUDOLPH 
OESTREICHER,  ING.  H.  PFEUFFER;  for  Belgium:  B.  MAUS,  R.  CORTEIL,  Jos. 
LAMBERT,  H.  FOSSION;  for  Bolivia:  GEORGES  SAENZ;  for  Brazil:  Luis  Gui- 
MARAES;  for  Canada:  ALFRED  DURANLEAU,  W.  ARTHUR  STEEL,  JEAN  DESY; 
for  Chile:  E.  BERMUDEZ;  for  China:  LINGOH  WANG;  for  the  Vatican  City 


Dec.  9,  1932  TELECOMMUNICATION  CONVENTION  13! 

State:  GUISEPPE  GIANFRANCESCHI ;  for  the  Republic  of  Colombia:  Jos£ 
JOAQUIN  CASAS,  ALBERTO  SANCHEZ  DE  IRIARTE,  W.  MACLELLAN;  for  the 
French  Colonies,  Protectorates  and  Territories  under  French  Mandate:  G. 
CAROUR;  for  the  Portuguese  Colonies:  ERNESTO  JULIO  NAVARO,  ARNALDO 
DE  PAIVA  CARVALHO,  JOSE  M&NDES  DE  VASCONCELLOS  GUIMARAES,  MARIO 
CORREA  BARATA  DA  CRUZ;  for  the  Swiss  Confederation:  G.  KELLER,  E. 
METZLER;  for  Belgian  Congo:  G.  TONDEUR;  for  Costa  Rica:  A.  MARTIN 
LANUZA;  for  Cuba:  MANUEL  S.  PICHARDO;  for  Curasao  and  Surinam:  G. 
SCHOTEL,  HOOGEWOONING;  for  Cyrenaica:  G.  GNEME,  GIAN  FRANCO  DELLA 
PORTA;  for  Denmark:  KAY  CHRISTIANSEN,  C.  LERCHE,  GREDSTED;  for 
Danzig  Free  City:  ING.  HENRYK  KOWALSKI,  ZANDER;  for  the  Dominican 
Republic:  E.  BRACHE  (Junior),  JUAN  DE  OL6zAGA;  for  Egypt:  R.  MURRAY, 
MOHAMED  SAID;  for  the  Republic  of  El  Salvador:  RAOUL  CONTRERAS;  for 
Ecuador:  Hip6LiTo  DE  MOZONCILLO,  ABEL  ROMEO  CASTILLO;  for  Eritrea: 
G.  GNEME,  GIAN  FRANCO  DELLA  PORTA;  for  Spain:  MIGUEL  SASTRE,  RAMON 
MIGUEL  NIETO,  GABRIEL  HOMBRE,  FRANCISCO  VIDAL,  J.  DE  ENCIO,  ToMAs 
FERNANDEZ  QUINTANA,  LEOPOLDO  CAL,  TRINIDAD  MATRES,  CARLOS  DE 
BORDONS;  for  the  United  States  of  America:  EUGENE  O.  SYKES,  C.  B.  JOL- 
LIFFE,  WALTER  LICHTENSTEIN,  IRVIN  STEWART;  for  the  Empire  of  Ethiopia: 
TAGAGNE  ;  for  Finland :  NIILO  ORASMAA,  VILJO  YLOSTALO  ;  for  France :  JULES 
GAUTIER;  for  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland: 
F.  W.  PHILLIPS,  J.  LOUDEN,  F.  W.  HOME,  C.  H.  BOYD,  J.  P.  G.  WORLLEDGE; 
for  Greece:  Th.  PENTHEROUDAKIS,  STAM  NICOLIS;  for  Guatemala:  VIRGILIO 
RoDRfcuEz  BETATA,  ENRIQUE  TRAUMANN,  RICARDO  CASTANEDA  PAGANINI; 
for  the  Republic  of  Honduras:  ANT*  GRAINO;  for  Hungary:  Dr.  FRAN- 
gois  HAVAS,  Ing.  JULES  ERDOSS;  for  the  Italian  Islands  of  the  Aegean:  G. 
GNEME,  E.  MARIANI;  for  British  India:  M.  L.  PASRICHA,  P.  J.  EDMUNDS;  for 
the  Butch  East  Indies :  A.  J.  H.  VAN  LEEUWEN,  VAN  DOOREN,  G.  SCHOTEL, 
HOOGEWOONING;  for  the  Irish  Free  State:  P.  S.  6H-£iGEARTAiGH,  E.  Cui- 
SIN;  for  Iceland:  G.  HLIDDAL;  for  Italy:  G.  GNEME,  G.  MONTEFINALE;  for 
Japan,  for  Chosen,  Taiwan,  Karafuto,  the  Leased  Territory  of  Kwantung 
and  the  South  Seas  Islands  under  Japanese  Mandate:  SAICHIRO  KOSHIDA, 
ZENSHICHI  ISHII,  SATOSHI  FURIHATA,  Y.  YONEZAWA,  T.  NAKAGAMI,  TAKEO 
IINO;  for  Latvia:  B.  EINBERG;  for  Liberia:  Luis  MA.  SOLER;  for  Lithuania: 
Ing.  K.  GAIGALIS;  for  Luxemburg:  JAAQUES;  for  Morocco:  DUBEAUCLARD; 
for  Mexico:  G.  ESTRADA,  EMILIO  TORRES,  AUGUSTIN  FLORES,  JR.,  S.  TAYA- 
BAS;  for  Nicaragua:  Jos6  GARC!A  PLAZA;  for  Norway:  T.  ENGSET,  HERMOD 
PETERSEN,  ANDR.  HADLAND;  for  New  Zealand:  M.  B.  ESSON;  for  the  Re- 
public of  Panama:  M.  LASSO  DE  LA  VEGA;  for  the  Netherlands:  H.  J. 
BOETJE,  H.  C.  FELSER,  C.  H.  DE  Vos,  J.  A.  BLAND  VD  BERG,  W.  DOGTEROM; 
for  Peru:  JUAN  DE  OSMA;  for  Persia:  MOHSEN  KHAN  RAIS;  for  Poland:  Ing. 
HENRYK  KOWALSKI,  ST.  ZUCHMANTOWICZ,  KAZIMIERZ  GOEBEL,  K.  KRULISZ, 
KAZIMIERZ  SZYMANSKI;  for  Portugal:  MIGUEL  VAZ  DUARTE  BACELAR,  JOSE 
DE  Liz  FERREIRA,  Junior,  DAVID  DE  SOUSA  PIRES,  JOAQUIM  RODRIGUES 
GONCALVES;  for  Roumania:  Ing.  T.  TANASESCO;  for  Italian  Somaliland:  G. 
GNEME;  for  Sweden:  G.  WOLD;  for  Syria  and  Lebanon:  M.  MORILLON;  for 
Czechoslovakia:  Ing.  STRNAD,  Dr.  OTTO  KU&RA,  VACLAV  KU&RA,  Ing. 
JAROMIR  SVOBODA;  for  Tripolitania:  G.  GNEME,  D.  CRETY;  for  Tunis: 
CROUZET;  for  Turkey:  FAHRI,  L  CEMAL,  MAZHAR;  for  the  Union  of  Soviet 
Socialist  Republics:  EUGENE  HIRSCHFELD,  ALEXANDRE  KOKADEEV;  for 
Uruguay:  ad  referendum  du  Gouvernement  de  TUruguay,  DANIEL  CAS- 
TELLANOS;  for  Venezuela:  CfesAR  MARMOL  CUERVO,  ANTONIO  REYES;  for 
Jugoslavia:  D.  A.  ZLATANOVITCH. 


132 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  316 


ANNEX 
(See  article  i,  §  2) 

DEFINITION  OF  TERMS  USED  IN  THE 
INTERNATIONAL  TELECOMMUNICATION 
CONVENTION 

Telecommunication:  Any  telegraph  or 
telephone  communication  of  signs,  signals, 
writings,  images,  and  sounds  of  any 
nature,  by  wire,  radio,  or  other  systems 
or  processes  of  electric  or  visual  (sema- 
phore) signaling, 

Radio  communication:  Any  telecom- 
munication by  means  of  Hertzian  waves. 
Radiotelegram:  Telegram  originating  in 
or  intended  for  a  mobile  station,  trans- 
mitted on  all  or  part  of  its  route  over  the 
radio-communication  channels  of  the  mo- 
bile service. 

Government  telegrams  and  radiotele- 
grams:  Those  emanating  from: 

(a)  the  head  of  a  government; 
(&)  a  minister,  member  of  a  govern- 
ment; 

(c)  the  head  of  a  colony,  protector- 
ate, overseas  territory,  or  territory  un- 
der sovereignty,  authority,  or  mandate 
of  the  contracting  governments; 

(d)  commanders   in   chief   of   land, 
naval,  or  air  military  forces; 

(e)  diplomatic  or  consular  officers  of 
the  contracting  governments; 

(/)  the    secretary    general    of    the 
League  of  Nations, 
as  well  as  the  replies  to  such  messages. 

Service  telegrams  and  radiotelegrams: 
Those  emanating  from  the  telecommuni- 
cation administrations  of  the  contracting 
governments,  or  from  any  private  operat- 
ing agency  recognized  by  one  of  these  gov- 
ernments, and  which  refer  to  international 
telecommunications,  or  to  matters  of  pub- 
lic interest  determined  by  agreement 
among  the  said  administrations. 

Private  telegrams  and  radiotelegrams: 
Those  other  than  a  service  or  government 
telegram  and  radiotelegram. 

Public^  correspondence:  Any  telecom- 
munication which  the  offices  and  stations, 
by  reason  of  their  being  at  the  disposal  of 
the  public,  must  accept  for  transmission. 

Private  operating  agency:  Any  indi- 
vidual, company,  or  corporation,  other 


ANNEXE 
(voir  article  premier,  §  2) 

DEFINITION  DES  TERMES  EMPLOYES  DANS 
LA  CONVENTION  INTERNATIONALE  DES 
TELECOMMUNICATIONS 

Telecommunication:  Toute  communica- 
tion telegraphique  ou  telephonique  de 
signes,  de  signaux,  d'taits,  d'images  et  de 
sons  de  toute  nature,  par  fil,  radio  ou 
autres  systemes  ou  precedes  de  signalisa- 
tion  electriques  ou  visuels  (semaphores). 

Radiocommunication:  Toute  tele"  com- 
munication a  Paide  des  ondes  hertziennes. 

Radiot6legramme:  T61e"gramme  origi- 
naire  ou  a  destination  d'une  station  mobile 
transmis,  sur  tout  ou  partie  de  son  par- 
cours,  par  les  voies  de  radiocommunica- 
tion  du  service  mobile. 

Telegrammes  et  radiotelegrammes  d'Etat: 
Ceux  qui  6manent : 

a)  d'un  chef  d'Etat; 

b)  d'un  ministre  membre  d'un  gou- 
vernement; 

c)  d'un  chef  de  colonie,  protectorat, 
territoire  d'outre-mer  ou  territoire  sous 
souverainete,  autorite  ou  mandat  des 
gouvernements  contractants ; 

d)  des    commandants    en    chef   des 
forces  militaires  terrestres,  navales  ou 
aeriennes; 

e)  des  agents  diplomatiques  ou  con- 
sulaires   des    gouvernements    contrac- 
tants; 

/)   du  secretaire  g£n6ral  de  la  Soci6t6 
des  Nations, 

ainsi  que  les  reponses  a  ces  correspon- 
dances. 

Telegrammes  et  radiotelegrammes  de 
service:  Ceux  qui  6manent  des  administra- 
tions de  telecommunication  des  gouverne- 
ments contractants  ou  de  toute  exploita- 
tion privee  reconnue  par  un  de  ces 
gouvernements  et  qui  sont  relatifs  aux 
telecommunications  internationales,  soit 
a  des  objets  d'inter^t  public  determines  de 
concert  par  lesdites  administrations. 

Telegrammes  et  radiotelegrammes  prives: 
Les  teiegrammes  et  radiotelegrammes 
autres  que  les  teiegrammes  et  radiotele- 
grammes de  service  ou  d'Etat. 

Correspondence  publique:  Toute  tele- 
communication que  les  bureaux  et  sta- 
tions, par  le  fait  de  leur  mise  a  la  disposi- 
tion du  public,  doivent  accepter  pour 
transmission. 

Exploitation  privee:  Tout  particulier  ou 
toute  compagnie  ou  corporation  autre 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


133 


than  a  governmental  institution  or  agency, 
which  is  recognized  by  the  government 
concerned  and  operates  telecommunica- 
tion installations  for  the  purpose  of  ex- 
changing public  correspondence. 

Administration:  A  government  admin- 
istration. 

Public  service:  A  service  for  the  use  of 
the  public  in  general. 

International  service:  A  telecommunica- 
tion service  between  offices  or  stations 
subject  to  different  countries,  or  between 
stations  of  the  mobile  service  except  when 
the  latter  are  of  the  same  nationality  and 
are  within  the  limits  of  the  country  to 
which  they  belong.  An  internal  or  na- 
tional telecommunication  service  which  is 
likely  to  cause  interference  with  other 
services  beyond  the  limits  of  the  country 
in  which  it  operates,  shall  be  considered 
as  an  international  service  from  the  stand- 
point of  interference. 

Limited  service:  A  service  which  can  be 
used  only  by  specified  persons  or  for  spe- 
cial purposes. 

Mobile  service:  A  radio-communication 
service  carried  on  between  mobile  and  land 
stations  and  by  mobile  stations  communi- 
cating among  themselves,  special  services 
being  excluded. 


qu'une  institution  ou  agence  gouverne- 
mentale,  reconnue  par  le  gouvernement 
inte"ress£  et  qui  exploite  des  installations 
de  telecommunication  en  vue  de  1'e"  change 
de  la  correspondance  publique. 

Administration:  Une  administration 
gouvernementale. 

Service  public:  Un  service  a  1'usage  du 
public  en  general. 

Service  international:  Un  service  de 
telecommunication  entre  bureaux  ou 
stations  relevant  de  pays  differents  ou 
entre  stations  du  service  mobile,  sauf  si 
celles-ci  sont  de  m&ne  nationalit6  et  se 
trouvent  dans  les  limites  du  pays  auquel 
elles  appartiennent.  Un  service  de  tele- 
communication interieur  ou  national,  qui 
est  susceptible  de  causer  des  brouillages 
avec  d'autres  services  au  dela  des  limites 
du  pays  dans  lequel  il  opere,  est  consider 
comme  service  international  au  point  de 
vue  du  brouillage. 

Service  restreint:  Un  service  ne  pouvant 
£tre  utilise  que  par  des  personnes  specifies 
ou  dans  des  buts  particuliers. 

Service  mobile:  Un  service  de  radiocom- 
munication  execute  entre  stations  mobiles 
et  stations  terrestres  et  par  les  stations 
mobiles  communiquant  entre  elles,  a 
1 'exclusion  des  services  speciaux. 


No.  317 

GENERAL  Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication 
Convention.     Signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932. 

REGLEMENT  general  des  radiocommunications  annexe  a  la  Con- 
vention des  telecommunications.  Signe  &  Madrid,  9  decembre 
1932. 


EDITOR'S  NOTE.  These  regulations  supersede  the  regulations  annexed  to  the  radiotele- 
graph convention  of  November  25,  1927  (No.  i85a,  ante).  Several  agreements  relating  to 
radio  communications  have  been  concluded  between  two  or  more  states.  See,  for  example, 
the  convention  between  Peru  and  Brazil  of  December  31, 1928, 127  League  of  Nations  Treaty 
Series,  p.  455. 

ACCESSIONS.  On  July  I,  1937,  these  regulations  had  been  approved  or  acceded  to  by 
all  the  states  which  had  ratified  or  acceded  to  the  telecommunication  convention  (No.  316, 
ante),  except  Afghanistan,  Albania,  Luxemburg,  and  Yemen,  and  by  Bolivia,  Greece,  and 
Sweden.  Certain  states,  while  not  formally  approving  or  acceding,  had  given  notice  of  an 
intention  to  apply  the  provisions  of  the  regulations.  U.  S.  Treaty  Information  Bulletin,  No. 
66,  p.  15. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  The  text  of  these  regulations  is  also  published  in  151  League  of  Nations 
Treaty  Series,  p.  278.  (See  the  bibliography  under  No.  316,  ante.) 


134 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


Entered  into  force  January  i,  1934. 1 
Text  and  translation  from  U.  S.  Treaty  Series,  No.  867. 


[Translation] 
ARTICLE  i. — Definitions 

H  2  The  following  definitions  shall  sup- 
plement those  contained  in  the  Conven- 
tion: 

[2]  Fixed  station:  A  station  not  capable  of 
being  moved,  and  communicating  by 
radio  with  one  or  more  stations  estab- 
lished in  the  same  manner. 

[3]  Land  station:  A  station  not  capable  of 
being  moved,  carrying  on  a  mobile  service. 

[*]  Coast  station:  A  land  station  carrying 
on  a  service  with  ship  stations.  This  may 
be  a  fixed  station  assigned  also  to  com- 
munication with  ship  stations;  in  this  case, 
it  shall  be  considered  as  a  coast  station 
only  for  the  duration  of  its  service  with 
ship  stations. 

[5]  Aeronautical  station:  A  land  station 
carrying  on  a  service  with  aircraft  stations. 
This  may  be  a  fixed  station  assigned  also 
to  communication  with  aircraft  stations; 
in  this  case,  it  shall  be  considered  as  an 
aeronautical  station  only  for  the  duration 
of  its  service  with  aircraft  stations. 

[6]    Mobile  station:  A  station  capable  of 

being  moved  and  which  ordinarily  does 

move. 

[7]     On-board  station:  A  station  on  board 

either  a  ship  which  is  not  permanently 

moored,  or  an  aircraft. 

[8]    Skip  station:  A  station  on  board  a  ship 

which  is  not  permanently  moored, 

[9]  Aircraft  station:  A  station  on  board 
any  aerial  vehicle. 

[10]  Radiobeacon  station:  A  special  station 
the  emissions  of  which  are  intended  to 
enable  an  on-board  station  to  determine 
its  bearing  or  a  direction  with  reference 
to  the  radiobeacon  station,  and  in  some 
cases  also  the  distance  which  separates  it 
from  the  latter. 

[u]  Radio  direction-finding^  station:  A 
station  equipped  with  special  apparatus 
for  determining;  the  direction  of  the  emis- 
sions of  other  stations. 


ARTICLE  i. — Definitions 

f1]  Les  definitions  ci-apres  competent 
celles  qui  sont  mentionnees  dans  la  Con- 
vention: 

[2]  Station  fixe:  Station  non  susceptible 
de  se  d6placer  et  communiquant,  par  le 
moyen  de  radiocommunication,  avec  une 
ou  plusieurs  stations  etablies  de  la  m6me 
maniere. 

[3]  Station  terrestre:  Une  station  non 
susceptible  de  se  deplacer  et  effectuant  un 
service  mobile. 

[4]  Station  cdtilre:  Une  station  terrestre 
effectuant  un  service  avec  les  stations  de 
navire.  Ce  peut  Stre  une  station  fixe 
affectee  aussi  aux  communications  avec 
les  stations  de  navire;  elle  n'est  alors 
consideree  comme  station  c6tiere  que 
pendant  la  dur6e  de  son  service  avec  les 
stations  de  navire. 

[6]  Station  aeronautique:  Une  station 
terrestre  effectuant  un  service  avec  les 
stations  d'aeronef.  Ce  peut  £tre  une 
station  fixe  afFect6e  aussi  aux  communica- 
tions avec  les  stations  d'aeronef;  elle  n'est 
alors  considered  comme  station  aero- 
nautique que  pendant  la  duree  de  son 
service  avec  les  stations  d'aeronef. 
[6]  Station  mobile:  Une  station  susceptible 
de  se  deplacer  et  qui  habituellernent  se 
deplace. 

[7]  Station  de  lord:  Une  station  plac£e  a 
bord,  soit  d'un  navire  qui  n'est  pas  amarr6 
en  permanence,  soit  d'un  aeronef. 
[8]  Station  de  navire:  Une  station  placee  a 
bord  d'un  navire  qui  n'est  pas  amarr&  en 
permanence. 

[9]  Station  d'atronef:  Une  station  plac6e 
a  bord  de  tout  v6hicule  a£rien. 
[10]  Station  de  radiophare:  Une  station 
speciale  dont  les  Emissions  sont  destinies 
a  permettre  a  une  station  de  bord  de 
determiner  son  relevement  ou  une  direc- 
tion par  rapport  a  la  station  de  radio- 
phare, eVentuellement  aussi  la  distance 
qui  la  s6pare  de  cette  derni&re. 
[u]  Station  radiogoniometrique:  Une  sta- 
tion pourvue  d'appareils  sp£ciaux  destines 
a  determiner  la  direction  des  Emissions 
d'autres  stations. 


1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3479,  August  30,  1934. 

2  The  consecutive  numbering  of  the  paragraphs  by  figures  in  brackets  was  decided  upon  by  the 
Radiotelegraph  Conference  of  Madrid  (1932),  to  facilitate  reference. — ED. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


135 


[12]  Telephone  "broadcasting  station:  A 
station  carrying  on  a  telephone  broad- 
casting service. 

[is]  Visual  broadcasting  station:  A  station 
carrying  on  a  visual  broadcasting  service. 

[u]  Amateur  station:  A  station  used  by  an 
"amateur",  that  is,  by  a  duly  authorized 
person  interested  in  radio  technique  solely 
with  a  personal  aim  and  without  pecuniary 
interest. 

[is]  Private  experimental  station:  A  private 
station  intended  for  experiments  looking 
to  the  development  of  radio  technique  or 
science. 

[isa]  Private  radio  station:  A  private  sta- 
tion, not  open  to  public  correspondence, 
which  is  authorized  solely  to  exchange 
with  other  "private  radio  stations"  com- 
munications concerning  the  private  busi- 
ness of  the  license  holder  or  holders. 

[is]  Frequency  assigned  to  a  station:  The 
frequency  assigned  to  a  station  is  the  fre- 
quency occupying  the  center  of  the  fre- 
quency band  in  which  the  station  is 
authorized  to  work.  In  general,  this  fre- 
quency is  that  of  the  carrier  wave. 
[17]  Frequency  band  of  an  emission:  The 
frequency  band  of  an  emission  is  the  fre- 
quency band  actually  occupied  by  this 
emission  for  the  type  of  transmission  and 
for  the  signaling  speed  used. 

[18]  Frequency  tolerance:  The  frequency 
tolerance  is  the  maximum  permissible 
separation  between  the  frequency  as- 
signed to  a  station  and  the  actual  fre- 
quency of  emission. 

[19]  Power  of  a  radio  transmitter:  The 
power  of  a  radio  transmitter  shall  be  the 
power  supplied  to  the  antenna. 
[20]  In  the  case  of  a  modulated  wave 
transmitter,  the  power  in  the  antenna 
shall  be  represented  by  two  numbers,  one 
indicating  the  value  of  the  carrier-wave 
power  supplied  to  the  antenna  and  the 
other  indicating  the  actual  maximum  rate 
of  modulation  used. 

[21]  Telegraphy:  Telecommunication  by 
any  system  of  telegraph  signaling.  The 
word  "telegram"  also  covers  "radio- 
telegram",  except  when  the  text  expressly 
precludes  such  a  meaning. 

[22]  Telephony:  Telecommunication  by 
any  system  of  telephone  signaling. 


[12]  Station  de  radiodiffnsion  teUphonique: 
Une  station  effectuant  un  service  de  radio- 
diffusion  t616phonique. 
[l3]  Station  de  radiodiffusion  visuelle: 
Une  station  effectuant  un  service  de  radio- 
diffusion  visuelle. 

[w]  Station  d'amateur:  Une  station  utili- 
see  par  un  "amateur",  c'est-a-dire  par 
une  personne  dtiment  autoris6e,  s'inte"res- 
sant  a  la  technique  radioelectrique  dans 
un  but  uniquement  personnel  et  sans 
inte're't  pe"cuniaire. 

[15]  Station  experimental  privee:  Une 
station  privee  destined  a  des  experiences 
en  vue  du  d6veloppement  de  la  technique 
ou  de  la  science  radioelectrique. 
[1Sa]  Station  privee  de  radiocommunica- 
lion:  Une  station  priv6e,  non  ouverte  a  la 
correspondance  publique,  qui  est  autoris6e 
uniquement  i  6changer  avec  d'autres 
"stations  privies  de  radiocommunica- 
tion"  des  communications  concernant  les 
affaires  propres  du  ou  des  licencies. 
[i6]  Frequence  assignee  a  une  station: 
La  frequence  assignee  a  une  station  est  la 
frequence  qui  occupe  le  centre  de  la  bande 
de  frequences  dans  laquelle  la  station  est 
autorisee  &  travailler.  En  general,  cette 
frequence  est  celle  de  1'onde  porteuse. 
[l7]  Bande  de  frequences  d'une  emission: 
La  bande  de  frequences  d'une  Emission 
est  la  bande  de  frequences  effectivement 
occupee  par  cette  Emission,  pour  le  type 
de  transmission  et  pour  la  vitesse  de  sig- 
nalisation  utilises. 

[18]  Tolerance  de  frequence:  La  tolerance 
de  frequence  est  le  maximum  de  FScart 
admissible  entre  la  frequence  assign6e  a 
une  station  et  la  frequence  rdelle  d'emis- 
sion. 

[19]  Puissance  d*un  emetteur  radioelectri- 
que: La  puissance  d'un  ernetteur  radioelec- 
trique est  la  puissance  fournie  &  1'antenne. 
[20]  Dans  le  cas  d'un  6metteur  &  ondes 
modu!6es,  la  puissance  dans  1'antenne  est 
caract£ris6e  par  deux  nombres,  indiquant, 
Tun  la  valeur  de  la  puissance  de  1'onde 
porteuse  fournie  a  Tantenne  et  Fautre 
le  taux  maximum  r6el  de  modulation 
employed 

[21]  TeUgraphie:  T616communicatipn  par 
un  syst&me  quelconque  de  signalisation 
t61egraphique.  Le  mot  "t616gramme" 
vise  aussi  le  " radio tele^ramme",  sauf 
lorsque  le  texte  exclut  express6ment  une 
telle  signification. 

[22]  Telephonie:  Tel6communication  par 
un  syst&me  quelconque  de  signalisation 
t616phonique. 


136 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


ps]  General  network  of  telecommunication 
channels:  The  whole  of  the  existing  tele- 
communication channels  open  to  public 
service,  with  the  exception  of  the  radio 
channels  of  the  mobile  service. 
[24]  Aeronautical  service:  A  radio  service 
carried  on  between  aircraft  stations  and 
land  stations  and  by  aircraft  stations 
communicating  among  themselves.  This 
term  shall  also  apply  to  fixed  and  special 
radio  services  intended  to  insure  the  safety 
of  aerial  navigation. 

ps]  Fixed  service:  A  service  carrying  on 
radio  communication  of  any  kind  between 
fixed  points,  with  the  exception  of  the 
broadcasting  services  and  special  services. 
p6]  Special  service:  A  telecommunication 
service  carried  on  especially  for  the  needs 
of  a  specific  service  of  general  interest  and 
not  open  to  public  correspondence,  such 
as:  a  service  of  radiobeacons,  radio  direc- 
tion finding,  time  signals,  regular  me- 
teorological bulletins,  notices  to  navi- 
gators, press  messages  addressed  to  all, 
medical  notices  (medical  consultation  by 
radio),  standard  frequencies,  emissions  for 
scientific  purposes,  etc. 


P7]  Telephone  broadcasting  service:  A 
service  carrying  on  the  broadcasting  of 
radiotelephone  emissions  primarily  in- 
tended to  be  received  by  the  general 
public. 

p8]  Visual  broadcasting  service:  A  service 
carrying  on  the  broadcasting  of  visual 
images,  either  fixed  or  moving,  primarily 
intended  to  be  received  by  the  general 
public. 

ARTICLE  2. — Secrecy  of  Radio 
Communications 

P9]  The  administrations  agree  to  take 
the  necessary  measures  to  prohibit  and 
prevent: 

[30]  (a)  the  unauthorized  interception  of 
radio  communications  not  intended  for 
the  general  use  of  the  public; 
[3l]  (&)  the  divulging  of  the  contents  or 
of  the  mere  existence,  the  publication  or 
use,  without  authorization,  of  radio  com- 
munications which  may  have  been  inter- 
cepted intentionally  or  otherwise. 

ARTICLE  3. — License 

[32]  §  I.  (i)  No  transmitting  station 
may  be  established  or  operated  by  any 
person  or  by  any  enterprise  whatever 


p3]  Reseau  general  des  votes  de  tSlecom- 
munication:  L/ensemble  des  voies  de 
telecommunication  existantes  ouvertes  au 
service  public,  a  Fexclusion  des  voies  de 
radiocommunication  du  service  mobile. 
p4]  Service  aeronautique:  Un  service  de 
radiocommunication  ex6cut6  entre  sta- 
tions d'aeronef  et  stations  terrestres  et 
par  les  stations  d'a6ronef  communiquant 
entre  elles.  Ce  terme  s'applique  egale- 
ment  aux  services  fixes  et  splciaux  de 
radiocommunication  destines  a  assurer  la 
s£curit6  de  la  navigation  a£rienne. 
p5]  Service  fixe:  Un  service  assurant  des 
radiocommunications  de  toute  nature 
entre  points  fixes,  £  1'exclusion  des  services 
de  radiodiffusion  et  des  services  speciaux. 
p6]  Service  special:  Un  service  de  t616- 
communication  op&rant  sp6cialement 
pour  les  besoins  d'un  service  d'inte"r£t 
general  determine  et  non  ouvert  a  la  cpr- 
respondance  pubKque,  tel  que:  un  service 
de  radiophare,  de  radiogoniometrie,  de 
signaux  horaires,  de  bulletins  m6t£oro- 
logiques  r£guliers,  d'avis  aux  navigateurs, 
de  messages  de  presse  adress6s  a  tous, 
d'avis  medicaux  (consultations  radio- 
m6dicales),  de  frequences  6talonn6es, 
demissions  destin6es  a  des  buts  scienti- 
fiques,  etc. 

p7]  Service  de  radiodiffusion  tSlephonique: 
Un  service  effectuant  la  diffusion  d'6mis- 
sions  radiophoniques  essentiellement  des- 
tinies a  §tre  revues  par  le  public  en  g&ne'raL 

p8]  Service  de  radiodiffusion  visuelle: 
Un  service  effectuant  la  diffusion  d 'images 
visuelles,  fixes  ou  anim6es,  essentiellement 
destinies  a  8tre  recues  par  le  public  en 
g£ne"ral. 

ARTICLES  2. — Secret  des  radiocom- 
munications 

p9]  Les  administrations  s'engagent  & 
prendre  les  mesures  n6cessaires  pour  faire 
interdire  et  r6primer: 
[30]  a)  1'interception,  sans  autorisation, 
de  radiocommunications  qui  ne  sont  pas 
destinies  a  Tusage  general  du  public; 
[31]  b)  la  divulgation  du  contenu  ou 
simplement  de  1'existence,  la  publication 
ou  1'usage,  sans  autorisation,  de  radio- 
communications  qui  auraient  6t6  inter- 
cept£es  d61ib6r6ment  ou  non. 

ARTICLE  3. — Licence 

[32]  §  i.  (i)  Aucune  station  emet trice 
ne  ppurra  6tre  6tablie  ou  exploitee  par  un 
particulier,  ou  par  une  entreprise  quel- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


137 


without  a  special  license  issued  by  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  country  to  which  the  sta- 
tion in  question  is  subject. 
[«]  (2)  Mobile  stations  having  their  port 
of  registry  in  a  colony,  a  territory  under 
sovereignty  or  mandate,  an  overseas  ter- 
ritory, or  a  protectorate,  may  be  con- 
sidered as  being  subject  to  the  authority 
of  this  colony,  these  territories,  or  this 
protectorate,  so  far  as  concerns  the  grant- 
ing of  licenses. 

[34]  §  2.  The  holder  of  a  license  shall  be 
bound  to  preserve  the  secrecy  of  tele- 
communications, as  provided  for  in  article 
24  of  the  Convention.  In  addition,  the 
license  must  state  that  it  is  prohibited  to 
receive  radio  correspondence  other  than 
that  which  the  station  is  authorized  to 
receive,  and  that,  in  case  such  correspond- 
ence is  received  involuntarily,  it  must 
neither  be  reproduced  nor  communicated 
to  third  persons,  nor  used  for  any  purpose 
whatever,  and  that  the  very  existence 
thereof  must  not  be  revealed. 

[35]  §  3.  In  order  to  facilitate  the  verifi- 
cation of  licenses  issued  to  mobile  sta- 
tions, it  is  recommended  that  there  be 
added,  when  necessary,  to  the  text  drafted 
in^the  national  language,  a  translation  of 
this  text  into  a  language  in  general  use  in 
international  relations. 
[36]  §4.  The  government  issuing  the 
license  to  a  mobile  station  shall  mention 
therein  the  category  to  which  this  station 
belongs  from  the  standpoint  of  interna- 
tional public  correspondence. 

ARTICLE  4. — Choice  of  Apparat^ts 

[37]  §  I.  The  choice  of  radio  apparatus 
and  devices  to  be  used  in  a  station  shall 
be  unrestricted,  provided  that  the  waves 
emitted  satisfy  the  provisions  of  the  pres- 
sent  Regulations. 

[38]  ^  §  2.  However,  within  limits  com- 
patible with  economic  requirements,  the 
choice  of  transmitting,  receiving,  and 
measuring  apparatus  must  be  guided  by 
the  most  recent  technical  progress  as 
shown,  notably,  in  the  Opinions  of  the 
C.C.I.R. 

ARTICLE  5. — Classification  of  Emissions 

[39]  §  I.  Emissions  shall  be  divided  into 
two  classes: 

A.  Continuous  waves, 

B.  Damped  waves, 
defined  as  follows: 


conque,  sans  licence  sp6ciale  d61ivr6e  par 
le  gpuvernement  du  pays  dont  releve  la 
station  en  question. 

[33]  (2)  Les  stations  mobiles  qui  ont 
leur  port  d'attache  dans  une  colonie,  un 
territoire  sous  souverainet6  ou  mandat,  un 
territoire  d'outre-mer  ou  un  protectorat 
peuvent  £tre  cpnsid&rees  comme  d6pen- 
dant  de  Pautorit6  de  cette  colonie,  de  ces 
territoires  ou  de  ce  protectorat,  en  ce  qui 
concerne  1'octroi  des  licences. 
[34]  §2.  Le  titulaire  d'une  licence  est 
tenu  de  garder  le  secret  des  tetecommuni- 
cations,  comme  il  est  preVu  a  Tarticle  24 
de  la  Convention.  En  outre,  il  doit  r6- 
sulter  de  la  licence  qu'il  est  interdit  de 
capter  les  ^correspondances  de  radio- 
communication  autres  que  celles  que  la 
station  est  autorise"e  a  recevoir  et  que, 
dans  le  cas  oft  de  telles  correspondances 
sont  involontairement  recues,  elles  ne 
doivent  £tre  ni  reproduces,  ni  communi- 
qu6es  a  des  tiers,  ni  utilises  dans  un  but 
quelconque,  et  leur  existence  m£me  ne  doit 
pas  £tre  reV616e. 

M  §  3-  Ann  de  faciliter  la  verification 
des  licences  d61ivr6es  a  des  stations  mo- 
biles, il  est  recommande"  d'ajouter,  s'il  y  a 
lieu,  au  texte  redigd  dans  la  langue  na- 
tionale,  une  traduction  de  ce  texte  en  une 
langue  dont  1'usage  est  tres  repandu  dans 
les  relations  Internationales. 
[B6]  §  4.  Le  gouvernement  qui  deliyre  la 
licence  a  une  station  mobile  y  mentionne 
la  catSgorie  dans  laquelle  cette  station  est 
classee  au  point  de  vue  de  la  correspon- 
dance  publique  Internationale. 

ARTICLE  4. — Choix  des  appareils 

[37]  §  i.  Le  choix  des  appareils  et  des 
dispositifs  radioelectriques  a  employer 
dans  une  station  est  libre,  a  condition  que 
les  ondes  6mises  satisfassent  aux  stipula- 
tions du  present  Reglement. 
[88]  §  2.  Toutefois,  dans  les  limites  com- 
patibles avec  les  exigences  6conomiques, 
le  choix  des  appareils  d'6mission,  de  r£- 
ception  et  de  mesure  doit  s'inspirer  des 
plus  r6cents  progres  de  la  technique,  tels 
qu'ils  sont  indiqu6s  notamment  dans  les 
avis  du  C.C.I.R. 

ARTICLE  5. — Classification  des  emissions 

[39]     §  I.  Les  Emissions  sont  r6parties  en 
deux  classes: 

A.  Ondes  entretenues, 

B.  Ondes  amorties, 
d6finies  comme  suit: 


138 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


[40]  Class  A:  Waves  the  successive  oscil- 
lations of  which  are  identical  under  fixed 
conditions. 

[41]  Class  B:  Waves  composed  of  suc- 
cessive series  of  oscillations  the  amplitude 
of  which,  after  attaining  a  maximum,  de- 
creases gradually. 

[42]     §  2.  The  following  types  of  waves 
are  derived  from  Class  A  waves: 
[48]     Type   Ax.     Continuous  waves  the 
amplitude  or  frequency  of  which  varies 
under  the  effect  of  telegraph  keying. 
M     Type  A2.     Continuous   waves  the 
amplitude  or  frequency  of  which  varies 
according  to  a  periodic  audiofrequency 
law,  combined  with  telegraph  keying. 

[45]  Type  A$.  Continuous  waves  the 
amplitude  or  frequency  of  which  varies 
according  to  a  complex  and  variable 
audiofrequency  law.  An  example  of  this 
type  is  radiotelephony. 
[46]  Type  A4.  Continuous  waves  the 
amplitude  or  frequency  of  which  varies 
according  to  any  law  of  frequencies 
greater  than  audible  frequencies.  An 
example  of  this  type  is  television. 
[47]  §  3-  The  foregoing  classification  Into 
waves  of  types  Ai,  A2,  A3,  and  A4  shall 
not  prevent  the  use,  under  conditions 
fixed  by  the  administrations  concerned, 
of  waves  modulated  or  keyed  by  methods 
not  included  in  the  definitions  of  types 
Ai,  As,  A3,  and  A4. 

[4*]  §4.  These  definitions  shall  not  re- 
late to  systems  of  transmitting  apparatus. 

M  §  5-  Waves  shall  be  indicated  first 
by  their  frequency  in  kilocycles  per  second 
(kc).  Following  this  indication  there 
shall  be  indicated,  in  parentheses,  the  ap- 
proximate length  in  meters.  In  the 
present  Regulations,  the  approximate 
value  of  the  wave  length  in  meters  is  the 
quotient  of  the  number  300,000  divided 
by  the  frequency  expressed  in  kilocycles 
per  second. 

ARTICLE  6. — Quality  of  Emissions 

[60]  §  I.  The  waves  emitted  by  a  station 
must  be  kept  on  the  authorized  frequency 
as  exactly  as  the  state  of  the  art  permits, 
and  their  radiation  must  be  as  free  as 
practically  possible  from  all  emissions  not 
essential  to  the  type  of  communication 
carried  on. 

P1]  §  2.  (i)  The  administrations  shall, 
for  the  various  cases  of  operation,  deter- 


[40]  Classe  A:  Ondes  dont  les  oscillations 
successives  sont  identiques  en  regime 
permanent. 

[41]  Classe  B:  Ondes  composees  de  series 
successives  d'oscillations  dont  1 'amplitude, 
apres  avoir  atteint  un  maximum,  decroit 
graduellement. 

[42]  §  2.  Des  ondes  de  la  classe  A  derivent 
les  ondes  des  types  ci-apres: 
[«]  Type  Ai.  Ondes  entretenues  dont 
1'amplitude  ou  la  frequence  varie  sous 
I'effet  d'une  manipulation  t61£graphique. 
M  Type  A2.  Ondes  entretenues  dont 
1'amplitude  ou  la  frequence  varie  suivant 
une  Ipi  p6riodique  de  frequence  audible 
combinee  avec  une  manipulation  t616- 
graphique. 

t46]  Type  AS.  Ondes  entretenues  dont 
I'amplitude  ou  la  frequence  varie  suivant 
une  loi  complexe  et  variable  de  frequences 
audibles.  Un  exemple  de  ce  type  est  la 
radioteiephonie. 

[46]  Type  A4.  Ondes  entretenues  dont 
I'amplitude  ou  la  frequence  varie  suivant 
une  loi  quelconque  de  frequence  plus 
grande  que  les  frequences  audibles.  Un 
exemple  de  ce  type  est  la  television. 
[47]  §  3.  La  classification  qui  precede,  en 
ondes  Ai,  A2,  A3  et  A4,  n'emp^che  pas 
I'emplpi,  dans  des  conditions  fix£es  par  les 
administrations  int6ress6es,  d 'ondes  modu- 
les ou  manipulees,  par  des  proc6des  ne 
rentrant  pas  dans  les  definitions  des  types 
Ai,  A2,  A3  et  A4. 

[48]  §  4.  Ces  definitions  ne  sont  pas 
relatives  aux  systemes  des  appareils 
d'emission. 

[49]  §  5-  Les  ondes  seront  d£signees,  en 
premier  lieu,  par  leur  frequence  en  Jkilo- 
cycles  par  seconde  (kc/s).  A  la  suite  de 
cette  designation  sera  indiquee,  entre 
parentheses,  la  longueur  approximative  en 
metres.  Dans  le  present  R£glement,  la 
valeur  approximative  de  la  longueur 
d'onde  en  metres  est  le  quotient  de  la 
division  du  nombre  300  ooo  par  la  fre- 
quence exprimee  en  kilocycles  par  seconde. 

ARTICLE  6. — Qualiti  des  emissions 
[50]  §  i.  Les  ondes  emises  par  une  sta- 
tion doivent  8tre  maintenues  a  la  fre- 
quence autorisee,  aussi  exactement  que  le 
permet  1'etat  de  la  technique,  et  leur 
rayonnement  doit  Itre  aussi  exempt  qu'il 
est  pratiquement  possible,  de  toute  emis- 
sion qui  n'est  pas  essentielle  au  type  de  la 
communication  effectuee. 
[Sl]  §  2.  (i)  Les  administrations  fixent, 
pour  les  differents  cas  d'exploitation,  les 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


139 


mine  the  characteristics  relative  to  the 
quality  of  the  emissions,  notably  the  ac- 
curacy and  stability  of  frequency  of  the 
emitted  wave,  the  level  of  harmonics,  the 
width  of  the  total  frequency  band  occu- 
pied, etc.,  so  that  they  will  be  in  accord 
with  technical  progress. 
[™]  (2)  The  administrations  agree  to 
consider  the  tables  (appendix  I :  Table  of 
Frequency  Tolerances  and  of  Instabili- 
ties; appendix  2:  Table  of  Frequency 
Band  Widths  Occupied  by  the  Emissions) 
as  a  guide  indicating  for  the  various  cases, 
the  limits  to  be  observed  to  the  extent 
possible. 

["]  (3)  Concerning  the  widths  of  fre- 
quency bands  occupied  by  emissions,  in 
practice  the  following  conditions  must  be 
taken  into  account: 

1.  Width  of  the  band  as  shown  in 
appendix  2. 

2.  Variation  of  the  frequency  of  the 
carrier  wave, 

3.  Other  technical  conditions,  such 
as  the  technical  possibilities  with 
regard  to  the  form  of  filter  circuit 
characteristics,    both    for    trans- 
mitters and  for  receivers. 

M  §3-  (i)  The  administrations  shall 
frequently  check  the  waves  emitted  by  the 
stations  under  their  jurisdiction  to  de- 
termine whether  or  not  they  comply  with 
the  provisions  of  the  present  Regulations. 
[55]  (2)  Effort  shall  be  made  to  obtain 
international  cooperation  in  this  matter. 
[66]  §  4.  In  order  to  reduce  interference 
in  the  frequency  bands  above  6,000  kc 
(wavelengths  below  50  m),  the  use  of 
directive  antenna  systems  is  recommended 
when  such  use  is  compatible  with  the 
nature  of  the  service. 

ARTICLE  7. — Allocation  and  Use  of  Fre- 
quencies (Wavelengths)  and  of  Types  of 
Emission 

[57]  §  i.  Subject  to  the  provisions  of  sub- 
paragraph  (5)  of  §  5  below,  the  adminis- 
trations of  the  contracting  countries  may 
assign  any  frequency  and  any  type  of  wave 
to  any  radio  station  under  their  jurisdic- 
tion on  the  sole  condition  that  no  inter- 
ference with  any  service  of  another  coun- 
try will  result  therefrom. 

[68]  §  2,  The  administrations,  however, 
agree  to  assign  to  stations  which  by  their 


caracteristiques  relatives  a  la  qualit<§  des 
Emissions,  notamment  1'exactitude  et  la 
stability  de  la  frequence  de  1'onde  6mise,  le 
niveau  des  harmoniques,  la  largeur  de  la 
bande  to  tale  de  frequences  occup6e,  etc., 
de  maniere  qu'elles  repondent  aux  progres 
de  la  technique. 

[62]  (2)  Les  administrations  sont  d'ac- 
cord  pour  considerer  les  tableaux  (ap- 
pendice  i:  tableau  des  to!6rances  de 
frequence  et  des  instabilites,  appendice  2: 
tableau  des  largeurs  de  bande  de  fr£- 
quences  occupies  par  les  Emissions) 
comme  un  guide  indiquant,  pour  les 
difTerents  cas,  les  limites  a  observer  dans 
la  rnesure  du  possible. 
M  (3)  En  ce  qui  concerne  la  largeur  des 
bandes  de  frequences  occupees  par  les 
Emissions,  il  faut  tenir  compte,  dans  la 
pratique,  des  conditions  suivantes: 

i°  Largeur  de  la  bande  donnee  dans 

Pappendice  2. 
2°  Variation    de    la    frequence    de 

1'onde  porteuse. 

3°  Conditions  techniques  suppl£- 
mentaires,  telles  que  les  possibili- 
tes  techniques  relatives  a  la 
forme  des  caracteristiques  des 
circuits  filtrants,  tant  pour  les 
£metteurs  que  pour  les  r6cepteurs. 

[54]  §  3-  (i)  Les  administrations  v£rifie- 
ront  frequemment  si  les  ondes  6mises  par 
les  stations  relevant  de  leur  autorite  r£- 
pondent  aux  prescriptions  du  present 
R&glement. 

[55]  (2)  On  s'efforcera  d'obtenir  une  col- 
laboration Internationale  en  cette  matiere. 
[5<J]  §  4.  Afin  de  r6duire  les  brouillages 
dans  la  bande  de  frequences  au-dessus  de 
6000  kc/s  (longueurs  d'onde  infdirieures  a 
50  m),  il  est  recommande  d'employer, 
lorsque  la  nature  du  service  le  perrnet,  des 
syst&mes  d'antennes  directives. 

ARTICLE  7. — Repartition  et  emploi  des 
frequences  (longueurs  d'onde)  et  des  types 
d'&mission 

[67]  §  i.  Sous  reserve  des  dispositions  de 
1'alinea  (5)  du  §  5  ci-apres,  les  administra- 
tions des  pays  contractants  peuvent  at- 
tribuer  une  frequence  quelconque  et  un 
type  d'onde  quelconque  a  toute  station 
radioelectrique  sous  leur  autorite,  £  la 
seule  condition  qu'il  n'en  r6sulte  pas  de 
brouillages  avec  un  service  quelconque 
d'un  autre  pays. 

[B8]  §  2.  Toutefois,  les  administrations 
sont  d'accord  pour  attribuer  aux  stations 


140 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


very  nature  are  capable  of  causing  serious 
international  interference,  frequencies  and 
types  of  waves  in  conformity  with  the 
rules  for  allocation  and  use  of  waves,  as 
set  forth  below. 

[6a]  §  3»  The  administrations  also  agree 
to  assign  frequencies  to  these  stations, 
according  to  the  kind  of  service  they  per- 
form, in  conformity  with  the  table  of 
allocation  of  frequencies  (see  table  below). 
[80]  §  4.  In  the  case  where  bands  of  fre- 
quencies are  assigned  to  a  specific  service, 
the  stations  of  that  service  must  use  fre- 
quencies sufficiently  separated  from  the 
limits  of  these  bands  so  as  not  to  produce 
harmful  interference  with  the  operation 
of  stations  belonging  to  services  to  which 
the  frequency  bands  immediately  ad- 
joining have  been  assigned. 

[61]  §  5-  00  The  frequencies  assigned 
by  administrations  to  all  fixed,  land,  and 
broadcasting  stations,  as  well  as  the  upper 
limit  of  power  contemplated,  must  be 
notified  to  the  Bureau  of  the  Union  with 
a  view  to  their  publication,  when  the  sta- 
tions in  question  carry  on  a  regular  service 
and  are  capable  of  causing  international 
interference.  Frequencies  on  which  a 
coast  station  receives  in  carrying  on  a 
particular  service  with  ship  stations  using 
stabilized  transmitters  must  also  be  noti- 
fied to  the  Bureau  of  the  Union  with  a 
view  to  their  publication.  Frequencies 
must  be  selected  in  such  a  way  as  to  avoid, 
so  far  as  possible,  interfering  with  inter- 
national services  belonging  to  the  con- 
tracting countries  and  operated  by  exist- 
ing stations,  of  which  the  frequencies  have 
already  been  notified  to  the  Bureau  of  the 
Union.  The  aforesaid  notification  must 
be  made  in  accordance  with  the  provi- 
sions of  article  15,  §  I  (&)  and  appendix  6 
before  the  frequency  is  put  into  service 
and  sufficiently  in  advance  thereof  to 
allow  administrations  to  take  any  action 
which  they  may  deem  necessary  to  insure 
the  efficient  operation  of  their  services. 


[M]  (2)  (a)  However,  when  the  fre- 
quency which  an  administration  intends 
to  assign  to  a  station  is  outside  the  bands 
authorized  by  the  present  Regulations 
for  the  service  involved,  this  administra- 
tion shall,  in  a  special  report,  make  the 
notification  mentioned  in  the  preceding 
subparagraph  at  least  6  months  before 


qui,  en  raison  de  leur  nature  m^me,  sont 
susceptibles  de  causer  de  s6rieux  brouil- 
lages  internationaux,  des  frequences  et  des 
types  d'onde  en  conformity  avec  les  regies 
de  repartition  et  d'emploi  des  ondes,  telles 
qu'elles  sont  indique'es  ci~apr&s. 
[59]  §  3-  Les  administrations  s'engagent 
aussi  a  attribuer  des  frequences  &  ces  sta- 
tions, selon  le  genre  de  leur  service,  en  se 
conformant  au  tableau  de  repartition  des 
frequences  (voir  le  tableau  ci-apr&s). 
[60]  §4.  Dans  le  cas  oft  des  bandes  de 
frequences  sont  attribuees  a  un  service 
determine,  les  stations  de  ce  service 
doivent  employer  des  frequences  suffisam- 
ment  eloignees  des  limites  de  ces  bandes, 
pour  ne  pas  prpduire  de  brouillage  nuisible 
dans  le  travail  des  stations  appartenant 
aux  services  auxquels  sont  attribuees  les 
bandes  de  frequences  immediatement 
voisines. 

[61]  §5-  (*)  Les  frequences  assignees  par 
les  administrations  a  toutes  stations  fixes, 
terrestres  et  de  radiodiffusion,  ainsi  que  la 
limite  superieure  de  la  puissance  prevue 
doivent  £tre  notifies  au  Bureau  de 
TUnion,  en  vue  de  leur  publication, 
lorsque  les  stations  en  question  effectue- 
ront  un  service  regulier  et  qu'elles  seront 
susceptibles  de  causer  des  brouillages 
internationaux.  Doivent  egalement  6tre 
notifiees  au  Bureau  de  1 'Union,  en  vue  de 
leur  publication,  les  frequences  sur  les- 
quelles  regoit  une  station  c6tiere  pour 
effectuer  un  service  particulier  avec  les 
stations  de  navire  utilisant  des  emetteurs 
stabilises.  Les  frequences  doivent  £tre 
choisies  de  manure  a  eviter,  autant  que 
possible,  de  brouiller  les  services  interna- 
tionaux appartenant  aux  pays  contrac- 
tants  et  efTectuees  par  des  stations  exis- 
tantes,  dont  les  frequences  ont  deja  ete 
notifiees  au  Bureau  de  1 'Union.  La  noti- 
fication predtee  devra  £tre  faite  selon  les 
dispositions  de  1'article  15,  §  I,  &)  et  de 
1'appendice  3  avant  la  mise  en  service  de 
la  frequence  et  suffisamment  a  temps  pour 
permettre  aux  administrations  de  prendre 
toute  mesure  qui  leur  semblerait  neces- 
saire  en  vue  d 'assurer  une  bonne  execution 
de  leurs  services. 

[fl2]  (2)  a)  Toutefois,  lorsque  la  frequence 
qu'une  administration  a  1'intention  d'as- 
signer  a  une  station  est  une  frequence  en 
dehors  des  bandes  autorisees  par  le  present 
R&glement  pour  le  service  en  cause,  cette 
administration  fera,  par  avis  special,  la 
notification  prevue  a  l'alinea  precedent  au 
moins  six  mois  avant  la  mise  en  exploita- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


141 


this  frequency  is  put  into  service,  and  in 
urgent  cases,  at  least  3  months  before  that 
date. 

[6»]  (b)  The  notification  procedure  laid 
down  above  shall  also  be  observed  when 
an  administration  intends  to  increase  or  to 
authorize  the  increase  of  the  power  or  a 
change  in  the  conditions  of  radiation  of  a 
station  already  operating  outside  the  au- 
thorized bands,  even  if  the  frequency  used 
is  to  remain  the  same. 

[*4]  (c)  With  regard  to  stations  which, 
when  the  present  Regulations  go  into 
force,  are  already  operating  outside  the 
bands  authorized  therein,  the  frequency 
and  the  power  used  shall  be  notified  im- 
mediately to  the  Bureau  of  the  Union, 
with  a  view  to  their  publication,  if  such  a 
notification  has  not  been  made  previously. 

[8S]  (3)  W  The  administrations  con- 
cerned shall  conclude  agreements,  when 
needed,  for  determining  the  waves  to  be 
assigned  to  the  stations  in  question,  as 
well  as  for  laying  down  the  conditions  of 
use  of  the  waves  thus  assigned. 
[M]  (b)  The  administrations  of  any  re- 
gion may,  in  accordance  with  article  13  of 
the  Convention,  conclude  regional  ar- 
rangements regarding  the  allocation 
either  of  frequency  bands  to  the  services 
of  the  participating  countries,  or  of  fre- 
quencies to  stations  of  these  countries,  and 
concerning  the  conditions  for  the  use  of 
the  waves  so  assigned.  The  provisions  of 
§  i  and  those  of  §  5  (i)  and  (2)  shall  also 
apply  to  any  arrangement  of  this  nature. 

[67]  (4)  The  administrations  concerned 
shall  conclude  the  necessary  agreements 
to  avoid  interference  and,  when  needed, 
shall,  for  this  purpose,  in  conformity  with 
the  procedure  which  will  be  agreed  among 
them  in  bilateral  or  regional  agreements, 
call  upon  organs  of  expert  investigation  or 
of  expert  investigation  and  conciliation. 
If  no  agreement  can  be  reached  with  re- 
gard to  avoiding  interference,  the  pro- 
visions of  article  15  of  the  Convention  can 
be  applied. 

[M]  (5)  (?)  With  regard  to  European 
broadcasting  and  subject  to  any  right  to 
which  the  extra-European  administrations 
might  be  entitled  by  virtue  of  the  present 
Regulations,  the  detailed  provisions  be- 
low, which  can  be  abrogated  or  changed 
by  agreement  among  the  European  ad- 
ministrations and  which  in  no  way  change 


tion  de  cette  frequence  et,  dans  les  cas 
d'urgence,  au  moins  trois  mois  avant  cette 
date. 

['*]  b)  La  procedure  de  notification  in- 
dique"e  ci-avant  sera  egalement  observed 
lorsqu'une  administration  aura  1'intention 
d'augmenter  ou  d'autoriser  Taugmenta- 
tion  de  la  puissance  ou  un  changement 
dans  les  conditions  de  rayonnement  d'une 
station  travaillant  dej&  en  dehors  des 
bandes  autorisees,  mime  si  la  frequence 
utilis6e  doit  rester  la  m6me. 
[M]  c)  Pour  ce  qui  est  des  stations  qui, 
lors  de  I'entr6e  en  vigueur  du  present 
R&glement,  travaillent  deja  en  dehors  des 
bandes  y  autorisees,  la  frequence  utilis6e 
et  la  puissance  employee  seront  imm6di- 
atement  notifies  au  Bureau  de  I'Union  en 
vue  de  leur  publication,  pour  autant  que 
pareille  notification  n'aura  pas  6t6  faite 
auparavant. 

t66]  (3)  #)  Les  administrations  int6res- 
sees  s'entendent,  en  cas  de  besoin,  pour  la 
fixation  des  ondes  £  attribuer  aux  stations 
dont  il  s'agit,  ainsi  que  pour  la  determina- 
tion  des  conditions  d'emploi  des  ondes 
ainsi  attributes. 

[6ft]  &)  Les  administrations  d'une  region 
quelconque  peuvent  conclure,  conform6- 
ment  £  1'article  13  de  la  Convention,  des 
arrangements  r£gionaux  concernant  Tat- 
tribution  soit  de  bandes  de  frequences  aux 
services  des  pays  participants,  soit  de 
frequences  aux  stations  de  ces  pays,  et 
concernant  les  conditions  d'emploi  des 
ondes  ainsi  attributes.  Les  dispositions 
du  §  I  et  celles  du  §  5  (i)  et  (2)  s'appli- 
quent  egalement  £  tout  arrangement  de 
cette  nature. 

[8r]  (4)  Les  administrations  int6ress6es 
prennent  les  accords  n6cessaires  pour 
eviter  les  brouillages  et,  en  cas  de  besoin, 
feront  appel,  a  cet  effet,  conformement  ^, 
la  procedure  qui  sera  convenue  entre  elles 
par  des  accords  bilateraux  ou  regionaux,  £ 
des  organes  soit  d'expertise,  soit  d'exper- 
tise  et  de  conciliation.  Si  aucun  arrange- 
ment en  vue  d'eviter  les  brouillages  ne 
peut  6tre  realise,  les  prescriptions  de 
1'article  15  de  la  Convention  peuvent  toe 
appliquees. 

[68]  (5)  a)  En  ce  qui  concerne  la  radio- 
diffusion  europeenne  et  sous  reserve  de 
tout  droit  qui  reviendrait  aux  adminis- 
trations extra-europeennes  en  vertu  du 
present  R^glement,  les  modalites  ci-apres, 
qui  pourront  Itre  abrogees  ou  modifiees 
par  accord  entre  les  administrations 
europeennes  et  qui  ne  modifient  en  rien 


142 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


the  provisions  of  subparagraph  (2)  above, 
shall  be  brought  to  bear  in  applying  the 
principle  laid  down  in  §  I. 
[69]  (6)  Failing  a  preliminary  agreement 
between  the  administrations  of  the  Euro- 
pean contracting  countries,  the  right  con- 
templated in  §  I  cannot,  within  the  limits 
of  the  European  region,  be  used  for  the 
purpose  of  carrying  on  a  broadcasting  serv- 
ice outside  the  bands  authorized  by  the 
present  Regulations  on  frequencies  be- 
low 1,500  kc  (wavelengths  above  200  m). 

[70]  (c)  An  administration  wishing  to  es- 
tablish such  a  service  or  to  obtain  a  change 
in  the  conditions  laid  down  by  a  previous 
agreement  with  regard  to  such  a  service 
(frequency,  power,  geographic  position, 
etc.)  shall  submit  the  request  to  the  Euro- 
pean administrations  through  the  Bureau 
of  the  Union.  Any  administration  which 
does  not  answer  within  6  weeks  after  the 
receipt  of  the  said  communication  shall  be 
considered  as  having  given  its  assent. 

[7l]  (d)  It  is  fully  understood  that  such  a 
preliminary  agreement  shall  also  be  neces- 
sary whenever,  in  a  European  broadcast- 
ing station,  operating  outside  the  author- 
ized frequency  bands,  a  change  is  made  in 
the  characteristics  previously  reported  to 
the  Bureau  of  the  Union,  and  when  such 
change  is  capable  of  affecting  the  con- 
dition of  international  interference. 

[72]  §  6.  (i)  In  principle,  the  power  of 
broadcasting  stations  must  not  exceed  the 
value  necessary  to  insure  economically  an 
effective  high-quality  national  service 
within  the  limits  of  the  country  consid- 
ered. 

[73]  (2)  In  principle,  the  location  of 
powerful  broadcasting  stations,  and  espe- 
cially of  those  which  operate  near  the 
limits  of  the  frequency  bands  reserved  to 
broadcasting,  must  be  chosen  in  such  a 
way  as  to  avoid,  so  far  as  possible,  inter- 
ference caused  to^the  broadcasting  services 
of  other  countries  or  to  other  services 
operating  on  neighboring  frequencies. 

[T*]  §  jt  The  following  table  shows  the 
allocation  of  frequencies  (approximate 
wavelengths)  to  the  various  services. 

[Table  omitted. — Allocation  of  frequency 
bands  between  10  and  60,000  kc  (30,000  and 
5m).} 
[9S]     §8.  (i)  The  use  of  type-B  waves 


les  dispositions  de  1'alinea  (2)  ci-avant, 
sont  apportees  a  1'application  du  principe 
<§noncl  au  §  I. 

[69]  V)  A  defaut  d'accord  pr6alable  entre 
les  administrations  des  pays  europeens 
contractants,  la  facult6  pr6vue  au  §  I  ne 
pourra,  dans  les  limites  de  la  region  euro- 
peenne,  6tre  utilis6e  en  vue  d'effectuer  un 
service  de  radiodiffusion  en  dehors  des 
bandes  autorisees  par  le  present  Regle- 
ment  sur  des  frequences  au-dessous  de 
i  500  kc/s  (longueurs  d'onde  au-dessus 
de  200  m). 

[70]  c)  L 'administration  qui  desire  etablir 
un  tel  service  ou  obtenir  une  modification 
des  conditions  fixees  par  un  accord  an- 
terieur  relatif  £  un  tel  service  (frequence, 
puissance,  position  g6ographique,  etc.)  en 
saisit  les  administrations  europeennes  par 
rinterm6diaire  du  Bureau  de  TUnion. 
Toute  administration  qui  n'aura  pas 
r6pondu  dans  un  d61ai  de  6  semaines  apres 
reception  de  ladite  communication  sera 
consid£r6e  comme  ayant  donn£  son 
assentiment. 

[71]  d)  II  est  bien  entendu  quTun  tel 
accord  prealable  sera  £galement  n£ces- 
saire  toutes  les  fois  que,  dans  une  station 
de  radiodiffusion  europeenne,  travaillant 
hors  des  bandes  de  frequences  autoris6es, 
un  changement  sera  apport6  aux  carac- 
t6ristiques  precedemment  notifi6es  au 
Bureau  de  1' Union,  et  que  ce  changement 
sera  susceptible  d'affecter  les  conditions 
de  brouillages  internationaux. 
[7Z]  §  6.  (i)  En  principe,  la  puissance 
des  stations  de  radiodiffusion  ne  doit  pas 
depasser  la  valeur  permettant  d 'assurer 
economiquement  un  service  national 
efficace  et  de  bonne  quality  dans  les  limites 
du  pays  consid6r6. 

[73]  (2)  En  principe,  remplacement  des 
stations  de  radiodiffusion  puissantes,  et 
plus  particulierement  de  celles  qui  travail- 
lent  pres  des  limites  des  bandes  de  fr^- 
quences  r6servees  a  la  radiodiffusion,  doit 
§tre  choisi  de  maniere  &  eviter,  autant  que 
possible,  la  g§ne  causee  aux  services  de 
radiodiffusion  des  autres  pays  ou  aux 
autres  services  travaillant  avec  des  fre- 
quences voisines. 

[74]  §  7.  Le  tableau  ci-apres  donne  la 
repartition  des  frequences  (longueurs 
d'onde  approximatives)  entre  les  divers 
services. 

[Tableau  omis, — Repartition  des  bandes 
di >,  frequences  entre  10  et  60  ooo  kc/s  (30  ooo 
et5m).} 
[93]     §  8.  (i)  L'usage  des  ondes  du  type 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS, 


143 


shall  be  forbidden  on  all  frequencies,  ex- 
cept the  following: 

375  kc  (800  m) 
410  kc  (730  m) 
425  kc  (705  m) 
454  kc  (660  m) 
500  kc  (600  m) 
1,364  kc  (220  m)* 

[94]  (2)  No  new  installation  of  trans- 
mitters of  type-B  waves  may  be  made  on 
ships  or  aircraft,  except  when  these  trans- 
mitters, working  at  full  power,  use  less 
than  300  watts  measured  at  the  input  of 
the  audiofrequency  supply  transformer. 


[9&]  (3)  The  use  of  type-B  waves  on  all 
frequencies  shall  be  forbidden,  beginning 
January  I,  1940,  except  for  transmitters 
meeting  the  power  requirements  stated  in 
subparagraph  (2)  above. 
[9S]  (4)  No  new  installation  of  type-B- 
wave  transmitters  may  be  made  in  a  land 
or  fixed  station.  The  waves  of  this  type 
shall  be  forbidden  in  all  land  stations  be- 
ginning January  I,  1935. 

[97]  (5)  The  administrations  shall  en- 
deavor to  abandon  type-B  waves,  other 
than  the  500-kc  (6oo-m)  wave,  as  soon  as 
possible. 

[98]  §  9.  The  use  of  type-Ai  waves  only 
shall  be  authorized  between  100  and  160 
kc  (3,000  and  1,875  m) ;  the  only  exception 
to  this  rule  shall  be  for  type-A2  waves 
which  may  be  used  in  the  band  100  to  125 
kc  (3,000  to  2,400  m)  for  time  signals  ex- 
clusively. 

["]  §  10.  In  the  band  460  to  550  kc  (652 
to  545  m)  no  type  of  emission  capable  of 
rendering  inoperative  the  distress,  alarm, 
safety,  or  urgent  signals  sent  on  500  kc 
(600  m)  shall  be  authorized, 

[10°]  §11.  (i)  In  the  band  325  to  345  kc 
(923  to  870  m),  no  type  of  emission  capa- 
ble of  rendering  inoperative  distress, 
safety,  or  urgent  signals  shall  be  author- 
ized. 

[x°l]  (2)  This  rule  shall  not  apply  to 
regions  in  which  special  agreements  pro- 
vide otherwise. 

[l02]  §  12.  (i)  In  principle,  any  station 
carrying  on  a  service  between  fixed  points 
on  a  wave  with  a  frequency  below  no  kc 


B  est  interdit  pour  toutes  les  frequences  a 
Fexception  des  frequences  suivantes: 

375  kc/s  (800  m) 
410  kc/s  (730  m) 
425  kc/s  (705  m) 
454  kc/s  (660  rn) 
500  kc/s  (600  m) 
1364  kc/s  (220  m)* 

[u]  (2)  Aucune  nouvelle  installation 
d'emetteurs  d'ondes  du  type  B  ne  peut 
£tre  faite  sur  des  navires  ou  des  aeronefs, 
sauf  quand  ces  emetteurs,  travaillant  a 
pleine  puissance,  depenseront  moins  de 
300  watts  mesures  a  1'entree  du  trans- 
formateur  d 'alimentation  a  frequence 
audible. 

[96J  (3)  L'usage  des  ondes  du  type  B  de 
toutes  frequences  sera  interdit  a  partir  du 
ier  Janvier  1940,  sauf  pour  les  emetteurs 
remplissant  les  conditions  de  puissance 
indiquees  a  1'alinea  (2)  ci-avant. 
[96]  (4)  Aucune  nouvelle  installation 
d'emetteurs  d 'ondes  du  type  B  ne  peut 
etre  faite  dans  une  station  terrestre  ou 
fixe.  Les  ondes  de  ce  type  seront  inter- 
dites  dans  toutes  les  stations  terrestres  a 
partir  du  ier  Janvier  1935. 
[97]  (5)  Les  administrations  s'efforceront 
d'abandonner  le  plus  t6t  possible  les 
ondes  du  type  B,  autres  que  1'onde  de 
500  kc/s  (600  m). 

[98]  §  9.  L'emploi  des  ondes  du  type  Ai 
seulement  est  autoris£  entre  100  et  160 
kc/s  (3  ooo  et  i  875  m) ;  la  seule  exception 
a  cette  regie  est  relative  aux  ondes  du 
type  A2  qui  peuvent  £tre  utilisees  dans  la 
bande  de  100  &  125  kc/s  (3  ooo  a  2  400 
m)  pour  les  signaux  horaires  exclusive- 
ment. 

["]  §  10.  Dans  la  bande  de  460  £  550 
kc/s  (652  a  545  m),  aucun  type  d'emission 
susceptible  de  rendre  inoperant  les  signaux 
de  detresse,  d'alarme,  de  security  ou 
d'urgence,  emis  sur  500  kc/s  (600  m), 
n'est  autoris6. 

[10°]  §  II.  (i)  Dans  la  bande  de  325  a 
345  kc/s  (923  a  870  m)  aucun  type  d'emis- 
sion susceptible  de  rendre  inoperants  les 
signaux  de  detresse,  de  security  ou  d'ur- 
gence, n'est  autorise. 
[lw]  (2)  Cette  regie  ne  s 'applique  pas 
aux  regions  oh  des  accords  particuliers  en 
disposent  autrement. 
[m]  §  12.  (i)  En  principe,  toute  station 
qui  assure  un  service  entre  points  fixes  sur 
une  onde  de  frequence  inferieure  a  no 


*See  footnote  10  to  the  allocation  table  [omitted  here]. 

*  Voir  la  note  10  du  tableau  du  repartition  des  frequences  [pas  inclus  ici]. 


144 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


(wavelengths  above  2,727  m)  must  use 
only  one  frequency,  chosen  from  the 
bands  allocated  to  the  said  service  (§7 
above),  for  each  of  its  transmitters  capa- 
ble of  simultaneous  operation. 

[103]  (2)  A  station  shall  not  be  permitted 
to  use  a  frequency  other  than  that  allo- 
cated as  stated  above,  for  a  service  be- 
tween fixed  points. 

[l04]  §  13.  In  principle,  the  stations  shall 
use  the  same  frequencies  and  the  same 
types  of  emission  for  the  transmission  of 
messages  by  the  unilateral  method  as  for 
their  normal  service.  Regional  arrange- 
ments may,  however,  be  made  for  the 
purpose  of  exempting  the  stations  con- 
cerned from  complying  with  this  rule. 
[106]  §  14.  A  fixed  station  may,  as  sec- 
ondary service,  on  its  normal  working 
frequency,  make  transmissions  intended 
for  mobile  stations  on  the  following  condi- 
tions: 

[106]     (a)  that  the  administrations  ^  con- 
cerned deem  it  necessary  to  use  this  ex- 
ceptional working  method; 
[m]     (ty  that  no  increase  in  interference 
results  therefrom. 

[108]  §  15.  In  order  to  facilitate  the  ex- 
change of  synoptic  meteorological  mes- 
sages in  the  European  regions,  the  fre- 
quencies of  41.6  kc  and  89.5  kc  (7,210  m 
and  3,352  m)  shall  be  allocated  to  this 
service. 

[109]  §  1 6.  To  facilitate  rapid  transmis- 
sion and  distribution  of  information  of 
value  in  the  detection  of  crime  and  pur- 
suit of  criminals,  a  frequency  between 
37.5  and  100  kc  (between  8, poo  and  3,000 
m)  shall  be  reserved  for  this  purpose  by 
regional  arrangements. 
[uo]  §  17.  Each  administration  may  al- 
locate to  amateur  stations  frequency 
bands  in  accordance  with  the  allocation 
table  (§7  above). 

[m]  §  1 8.  In  order  to  decrease  interfer- 
ence in  the  frequency  bands  above  4,000 
kc  (wavelengths  below  75  m),  used  by  the 
mobile  service,  and  particularly  in  order 
to  avoid  interfering  with  the  long-distance 
telephone  communications  of  this  service, 
the  administrations  agree  to  adopt  the 
following  rules,  wherever  possible,  taking 
into  account  current  engineering  de- 
velopment: 

[1U]  00  W  In  "the  frequency  bands 
above  5,500  kc  (wavelengths  below  54.55 


kc/s  (longueur  d'onde  supeVieure  a  2  727 
m)  doit  employer  une  seule  frequence, 
choisie  parmi  les  bandes  attributes  audit 
service  (§7  ci-avant),  pour  chactm  des 
6metteurs  qu'elle  comporte,  susceptibles 
de  fonctionner  simul  tankmen  t. 
[l08]  (2)  II  n'est  pas  permis  &  une  station 
de  faire  usage,  pour  un  service  entre 
points  fixes,  d'une  frequence  autre  que 
celle  attribute  comme  il  est  dit  ci- 
avant. 

[l04]  §  13.  En  principe,  les  stations  em- 
ploient  les  m6mes  frequences  et  les  m^mes 
types  demission  pour  les  transmissions  de 
messages  par  la  meihode  unilat&rale  que 
pour  leur  service  normal.  Toutefois,  des 
arrangements  re"gionaux  peuvent  £tre 
realises  en  vue  de  dispenser  les  stations 
int&resse'es  de  se  soumettre  a  cette  regie. 
[l05]  §  14.  Une  station  fixe  peut  effec- 
tuer,  sur  sa  frequence  normale  de  travail, 
comme  service  secondaire,  des  Emissions 
destinies  aux  stations  mobiles,  a  condi- 
tion: 

[loe]    a)  que    les    administrations    inte"- 
resse"es  jugent  n£cessaire  d'utiliser  cette 
m£thode  exceptionnelle  de  travail; 
[IOT]    &)  qu'il  n'en  resulte  aucune  aug- 
mentation des  brouillages. 
[l08]     §  15.  Afin  de  faciliter  l'£change  des 
messages    me'te'orologiques    synoptiques 
dans   les   regions   europ£ennes,   les   fr£- 
quences  41,6  kc/s  et  89,5  kc/s  (7210  m 
et  3  352  m)  sont  attributes  a  ce  service. 

[los]  §  1 6.  Pour  faciliter  la  transmission 
et  la  distribution  rapides  des  renseigne- 
ments  utiles  &  la  d6couverte  des  crimes  et 
a  la  poursuite  des  criminels,  une  frequence 
entre  37,5  et  100  kc/s  (entre  8  ooo  et 
3  ooo  m)  sera  re'serv^e  pour  cet  objet,  par 
des  arrangements  regionaux. 
[ll°]  §  17.  Chaque  administration  peut 
attribuer  aux  stations  d'amateur  des 
bandes  de  frequences  conformes  au 
tableau  de  repartition  (§7  ci-avant). 
[lu]  §  1 8.  En  vue  de  reduire  les  brouil- 
lages  dans  les  bandes  de  frequences  su- 
p6rieures  a  4  ooo  kc/s  (longueurs  d'onde 
inferieures  a  75  m),  utilises  par  le  service 
mobile,  et  en  particulier  pour  eViter  de 
g£ner  les  communications  telephoniques  £ 
grande  distance  de  ce  service,  les  admin- 
istrations sont  d'accord  pour  adopter, 
autant  que  possible,  les  regies  suivantes, 
en  tenant  compte  du  deVeloppement  de 
la  technique  courante: 
[112]  (i)  a)  Dans  les  bandes  de  fre- 
quences superieures  a  5  500  kc/s  (Ion- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


m)  allocated  exclusively  to  the  mobile 
service,  the  frequencies  (wavelengths) 
which  must  be  used  by  ship  stations 
carrying  on  commercial  service  shall  be  on 
the  low-frequency  (longwave)  side  of  the 
band,  and  especially  in  the  limits  of  the 
harmonic  bands  enumerated  below: 


5,500  to    5,550  kc 

6,170  to    6,250  kc 

8,230  to    8,330  kc 

11,000  to  11,100  kc 

12,340  to  12,600  kc 

16,460  to  16,660  kc 

22,000  tO  22,200  kc 


(54-55  to  54.05  m) 
(48.62  to  48.00  m) 
(36.45  to  36.01  m) 
(27.27  to  27.03  m) 
(24.31  to  24.00  m) 
(18.23  to  l8-01  m) 
(13.64  to  13.51  m) 


[ii3]  NOTE. — The  frequency  bands  4,115 
to  4,165  kc  (72.90  to  72.03  m)  may  also  be 
used  by  the  stations  mentioned  above 
[see  also  (2)  (c)  below]. 

["*]  (&)  However,  any  commercial  ship 
station  the  emissions  of  which  comply 
with  the  frequency  tolerances  required  of 
land  stations  under  §  2  (2)  of  article  6, 
may  transmit  on  the  same  frequency  as 
the  coast  station  with  which  it  communi- 
cates. 

[ll8]  (c)  When  a  communication  for  which 
no  special  arrangement  has  been  made 
must  be  established  between  a  ship  sta- 
tion, on  one  hand,  and  another  ship  sta- 
tion or  a  coast  station,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  mobile  station  shall  use  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing frequencies  situated  approximately 
in  the  middle  of  the  bands : 

4,140  kc  (72.46  m 

5,520  kc  (54.35 

6,210  kc  (48.31 

8,280  kc  (36.23  m 
11,040  kc  (27.17  m 
12,420  kc  (24.15  nri 
16,560  kc  (18.12  m) 
22,080  kc  (13.59  m) 

pie]  NOTE. — The  administrations  agree, 
in  reporting  the  frequency  of  a  coast  sta- 
tion, to  indicate  on  which  one  of  the  waves 
specified  in  subparagraph  (i)  (c)  listening 
will  be  carried  on. 

[U7]  (2)  (a)  Ship  stations  carrying  on 
commercial  service  shall  use  the  shared 
bands  above  4,000  kc  (wavelengths  below 
75  m)  only  when  their  emissions  comply 
with  the  frequency  tolerances  specified  for 
land  stations  in  §  2  (2)  of  article  6.  In 
this  case,  the  frequencies  used  must  be 
chosen  on  the  higher-frequency  (shorter- 
wave)  side  of  the  shared  band  and,  more 


gueurs  d'onde  inferieures  a  54,55  m)  at- 
tribuees  exclusivement  au  service  mobile, 
les  frequences  (longueurs  d'onde)  qui 
devront  £tre  utilisees  par  les  stations  de 
navire  affectees  au  service  commercial 
seront  du  c6te  des  basses  frequences 
(ondes  plus  longues)  et  spedalement  dans 
les  limites  des  bandes  harmoniques 
enumerees  ci-apres: 

5  500  &    5  550  kc/s  (54,55  &  54,05  m) 

6  170  £    6  250  kc/s  (48,62  4  48,00  m) 
8  230  &    8  330  kc/s  (36,45  &  36,01  m) 

11  ooo  an  100  kc/s  (27,27  &  27,03  m) 

12  340  &  12  500  kc/s  (24,31  &  24,00  m) 
1 6  460  &  1 6  660  kc/s  (18,23  &  1 8,01  m) 
22  ooo  &  22  200  kc/s  (13,64  &  13,51  m) 

[U3]  NOTE. — Les  bandes  de  frequences  de 
4115  a  4165  kc/s  (72,90  &  72,03  m) 
peuvent  egalement  £tre  utilisees  par  les 
stations  susdites  [voir  aussi  (2),  c) 
ci-apres]. 

[U4]  b)  Cependant,  toute  station  com- 
merciale  de  navire  dont  remission  satis- 
fait  aux  tolerances  de  frequence  exigees 
des  stations  terrestres  au  §  2,  (2)  de  1'ar- 
ticle  6,  peut  emettre  sur  la  m£me  fre- 
quence que  la  station  c6tiere  avec  laquelle 
elle  communique. 

lll&]  c)  Quand  une  communication,  pour 
laquelle  aucun  arrangement  special  n'a 
ete  fait,  doit  £tre  etablid  entre  une  station 
de  navire,  d'une  part,  et  une  autre  station 
de  navire  ou  une  station  cdtiere,  d'autre 
part,  la  station  mobile  utilisera  une  des 
frequences  suiyantes  situees  approxima- 
tivement  au  milieu  des  bandes: 

4  140  kc/s  (72,46  m) 

5  520  kc/s  (54,35  m; 

6  210  kc/s  (48,31  m. 
8  280  kc/s  (36,23  m. 

11  040  kc/s  (27,17  m) 

12  420  kc/s  (24,15  m) 
1 6  560  kc/s  (18,12  m) 
22  080  kc/s  (13,59  m) 

[1W]  NOTE. — Les  administrations  sont 
d'accord  pour  indiquer,  en  notifiant  la 
frequence  d'une  station  c6tiere,  sur 
laquelle  des  ondes  spedfiees  &  1'alinea  (l), 
litt.  c)  1'ecoute  sera  faite. 
[117]  (2)  a)  Les  stations  de  navire  affec- 
tees au  service  commercial  n'utiliseront 
les  bandes  communes  superieures  a  4  ooo 
kc/s  (longueurs  d'onde  inferieures  £  75  m) 
qu'autant  que  leurs  emissions  satisferont 
aux  tolerances  de  frequence  specifics  pour 
les  stations  terrestres  au  §  2,  (2)  de  1'ar- 
ticle  6.  Dans  ces  cas,  les  frequences 
employees  doivent  £tre  choisies  du  c6te 


146 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


especially,  in  the  limits  of  the  harmonic 
bands  enumerated  below: 


4,400  to    4,450  kc  (68.18  to  67,42  m) 

8,800  to    8,900  kc  (34.09  to  33.71  m) 

13,200  to  13,350  kc  (22.73  to  22.47  m) 

17,600  to  17,750  kc  (17.05  to  16.90  m) 

22,900  to  23,000  kc  (13.10  to  13.04  m) 

[U8]  (&)  Frequencies  chosen  in  the  por- 
tion of  the  band  reserved  to  mobile  services 
from  6,600  to  6,675  kc  (45.45  to  44.94  m), 
in  harmonic  relation  with  the  preceding 
bands,  may  also  be  used. 

[ll9]  (c)  The  provisions  of  subparagraph 
(2)  (a)  shall  not  apply  to  the  portion  of  the 
shared  band  between  4,115  and  4,165  kc 
(72.90  and  72.03  m)  which  may  be  used  by 
any  ship  station  carrying  on  a  commer- 
cial service. 

[m]  (3)  In  selecting  frequencies  for  new 
fixed  and  coast  stations,  the  administra- 
tions shall  avoid  using  the  frequencies  in 
the  bands  specified  in  subparagraphs  (i) 
(a),  (2)  (a),  (2)  (&),  and  (2)  (c). 

[m]  §  19-  (i)  It  is  recognized  that  the 
frequencies  between  6,000  and  30,000  kc 
(50  and  10  m)  are  very  efficient  for  long- 
distance communications. 
[m]  (2)  The  administrations  shall  make 
the  greatest  possible  effort  to  reserve  the 
frequencies  of  this  band  for  this  purpose, 
except  when  their  use  for  short-  or  medi- 
um-distance communication  is  not  likely 
to  interfere  with  long-distance  communi- 
cations. 

t123]  §20.  In  Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia, 
low-power  directional  radiobeacons  the 
range  of  which  does  not  exceed  about  50 
km  may  use  any  frequency  in  the  band 
1,500  to  3,500  kc  (200  to  85.71  m)  except 
the  guard  band  of  1,630  to  1,670  kc  (184 
to  1 80  m)  subject  to  agreements  with  the 
countries  whose  services  are  likely  to  be 
interfered  with. 


ARTICLE  8. — Amateur  Stations  and  Private 
Experimental  Stations 

P24]  §  I.  The  exchange  of  communica- 
tions between  amateur  stations  and  be- 
tween private  experimental  stations  of 
different  countries  shall  be  forbidden  if 
the  administration  of  one  of  the  interested 
countries  has  given  notice  of  its  opposition 
to  this  exchange. 


des  frequences  les  plus  hautes  (ondes  plus 
courtes)  de  la  bande  commune  et,  plus 
sp6cialement,  dans  les  limites  des  bandes 
harmoniques  6num6rees  ci-apres: 

4  400  &    4  450  kc/s  (68, 1 8  &  67,42  m) 

8  800  £    8  900  kc/s  (34,09  a  33,71  m) 

13  200  i  13  350  kc/s  (22,73  &  22,47  m) 

17  600  a  17  750  kc/s  (17,05  a  16,90  m) 

22  900  &  23  ooo  kc/s  (13,10  a  13,04  m) 

[us]  &)  On  peut  egalement  utiliser  des 
frequences  choisies  dans  la  portion  de  la 
bande  r6serv6e  aux  services  mobiles  de 
6  600  a  6  675  kc/s  (4545  &  4-4,94  m),  en 
relation  harmonique  avec  les  bandes 
pr6c6dentes. 

[119]  c)  Les  prescriptions  de  Talinea  (2), 
a)  ne  s'appliquent  pas  a  la  portion  de  la 
bande  commune  entre  4 115  et  4  165 
kc/s  (72,90  et  72,03  m)  qui  peut  £tre 
utilisee  par  toute  station  de  navire  affec- 
t6e  au  service  commercial. 
[12°]  (3)  En  choisissant  les  frequences 
des  nouvelles  stations  fixes  et  c6tieres,  les 
administrations  eviteront  d 'employer  les 
frequences  des  bandes  sp6cifiees  dans  les 
alineas  (i),  litt.  a),  (2),  litt.  a),  (2),  litt.  6) 
et  (2),  litt.  c). 

[121]  §  19.  (i)  U  est  reconnu  que  les  fr6- 
quences  entre  6  ooo  et  30  ooo  kc/s  (50  et 
10  m)  sont  tres  efficaces  pour  les  com- 
munications a  longue  distance. 
p2]  (2)  Les  administrations  s'efforce- 
ront,  dans  toute  la  mesure  du  possible,  de 
r6server  les  frequences  de  cette  bande  dans 
ce  but,  except6  quand  leur  emploi  pour  des 
communications  a  courte  ou  a  moyenne 
distance  n'est  pas  susceptible  de  brouiller 
les  communications  a  grande  distance. 
[123]  §  20.  En  Europe,  Afrique,  Asie,  les 
radiophares  directionnels  de  faible  puis- 
sance et  dont  la  portee  ne  depasse  pas  50 
km  environ  peuvent  faire  usage  de  toute 
frequence  dans  la  bande  de  i  500  a  3  500 
kc/s  (200  a  85,71  m),  a  1'exception  de  la 
bande  de  protection  de  i  630  &  i  670  kc/s 
(184  a  180  m),  sous  reserve  d'accord  des 
pays  dont  les  services  soht  susceptibles 
d^tre  brouilles. 

ARTICLE  8. — Stations  d' amateur  et  stations 
experimental  privees 

[124]  §  i.  L'6change  de  communications 
entre  stations  d 'amateur  et  entre  stations 
exp6rimentales  privies  de  pays  differents 
est  interdit  si  1'administration  de  Fun  des 
pays  interesses  a  notifi6  son  opposition  a 
cet  echange. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


147 


[12S]  §2.  (i)  When  this  exchange  is  per- 
mitted, the  communications  must  be  car- 
ried on  in  plain  language  and  be  limited  to 
messages  relating  to  experiments  and  to 
remarks  of  a  private  nature  for  which,  by 
reason  of  their  lack  of  importance,  the  use 
of  the  telegraph  service  could  not  enter 
into  consideration.  It  shall  be  strictly 
forbidden  for  owners  of  amateur  stations 
to  transmit  international  communications 
emanating  from  third  persons. 

[126]  (2)  The  foregoing  provisions  may  be 
modified  by  special  arrangements  between 
the  interested  countries. 
[m]  §  3-  In  amateur  stations  or  in  pri- 
vate experimental  stations,  authorized  to 
conduct  transmissions,  any  person  operat- 
ing the  apparatus  on  his  own  account  or 
for  third  persons  must  have  proved  that  he 
is  able  to  transmit  texts  in  Morse  code 
signals  and  to  read,  by  aural  radiotele- 
graph reception,  texts  so  transmitted. 
He  can  be  replaced  only  by  authorized 
persons  possessing  the  same  qualifications. 


[12S]  §  4.  Administrations  shall  take  such 
measures  as  they  judge  necessary  to 
verify,  from  a  technical  standpoint,  the 
qualifications  of  any  person  operating  the 
apparatus. 

[129]  §  5-  (i)  The  maximum  power  which 
amateur  stations  and  private  experimental 
stations  may  use  shall  be  fixed  by  the  inter- 
ested administrations,  taking  account  of 
the  technical  qualifications  of  the  opera- 
tors and  of  the  conditions  under  which  the 
said  stations  must  work. 
[13°]  (2)  All  the  general  rules  laid  down 
in  the  Convention  and  in  the  present 
Regulations  shall  apply  to  amateur  stations 
and  to  private  experimental  stations.  In 
particular,  the  frequency  of  the  wave 
emitted  must  be  as  constant  and  as  free 
from  harmonics  as  the  state  of  the  art 
permits. 

lm]  (3)  In  the  course  of  their  emissions, 
these  stations  must,  at  short  intervals, 
transmit  their  call  signals  or,  in  the  case  of 
experimental  stations  not  yet  provided 
with  call  signals,  their  names. 

ARTICLE  9. — Conditions  to  be  Observed  by 
Mobile  Stations 

A. — General 

[m]  1 1.  (i)  Mobile  stations  must  be 
established  in  such  a  way  as  to  conform,  as 


[m]  §  2.  (i)  Lorsque  cet  ^change  est 
permis,  les  communications  doivent  s'ef- 
fectuer  en  langage  clair  et  se  limiter  aux 
messages  ayant  trait  aux  experiences  et  a 
des  remarques  d'un  caract&re  personnel 
pour  lesquelles,  en  raison  de  leur  manque 
d'importance,  le  recours  au  service 
teiegraphique  public  ne  saurait  entrer  en 
consideration.  II  est  absolument  interdit 
aux  titulaires  des  stations  d 'amateur  de 
transmettre  des  communications  interna- 
tionales  6manant  de  tierces  personnes. 
[m]  (2)  Les  dispositions  ci-avant  peu- 
vent  £tre  modifie'es  par  des  arrangements 
particuliers  entre  les  pays  int6resses. 
[X27]  §  £  Dans  les  stations  d'amateur  ou 
dans  les  stations  experimentales  privies, 
autoris6es  £  effectuer  des  emissions,  toute 
personne  manceuvrant  les  appareils,  pour 
son  propre  compte  ou  pour  celui  de  tiers, 
doit  avoir  prouv6  qu'elle  est  apte  a  trans- 
mettre les  textes  en  signaux  du  code 
Morse  et  a  lire,  a  la  reception  radio- 
teiegraphique  auditive,  les  textes  ainsi 
transmis.  Elle  ne  peut  se  faire  remplacer 
que  par  des  personnes  autorise'es  poss6- 
dant  les  mSmes  aptitudes. 
[m]  §  4.  Les  administrations  prennent 
telles  mesures  qu'elles  jugent  n6cessaires 
pour  verifier  les  capacitis,  au  point  de  vue 
technique,  de  toute  personne  manceuvrant 
les  appareils. 

[m]  §  5-  (i)  La  puissance  maximum  que 
les  stations  d'amateur  et  les  stations  ex- 
perimentales privies  peuvent  utiliser  est 
fix6e  par  les  administrations  interess^es, 
en  tenant  compte  des  qualit£s  techniques 
des  operateurs  et  des  conditions  dans  les- 
quelles lesdites  stations  doivent  travailler. 
[18°]  (2)  Toutes  les  regies  g6nerales  fixees 
dans  la  Convention  et  dans  le  present 
R£glement  s'appliquent  aux  stations 
d'amateur  et  aux  stations  experimentales 
privees.  En  particulier,  la  frequence  des 
ondes  6mises  doit  £tre  aussi  constante  et 
aussi  exempte  d'harmoniques  que  l'6tat 
de  la  technique  le  permet. 
[m]  (3)  Au  cours  de  leurs  emissions,  ces 
stations  doivent  transmettre,  a  de  courts 
intervalles,  leur  indicatif  d'appel,  ou  leur 
nom  dans  le  cas  de  stations  experimentales 
non  encore  pourvues  d'indicatif  d'appel. 

ARTICLE  9. — Conditions  £  remplir  par  les 
stations  mobiles 

A. — Genemlitis 

[132]     §  i.  (i)  Les  stations  mobiles  doi- 
vent §tre  etablies  de  maniere  a  se  con- 


148 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


regards  frequencies  and  types  of  waves,  to 
the  general  provisions  forming  the  subject 
of  article  7. 

[133]  (2)  In  addition,  no  new  type-B- 
wave  transmitter  installation  shall  be 
made  in  mobile  stations,  except  when  these 
transmitters,  working  at  full  power,  use 
less  than  300  watts  measured  at  the  input 
of  the  audiofrequency  supply  transformer. 


[m]  (3)  Finally,  the  use  of  type-B  waves 
on  all  frequencies  shall  be  forbidden,  be- 
ginning with  January  I,  1940,  except  for 
transmitters  fulfilling  the  same  conditions 
as  above  regarding  power. 
[135]  §  2.  The  frequency  of  emission  of 
mobile  stations  shall  be  verified  as  often  as 
possible  by  the  inspection  service  to  which 
they  are  subject. 

[l36]  §  3-  Receiving  apparatus  must  be 
such  that  the  current  which  they  induce 
into  the  antenna  shall  be  as  low  as  possible 
and  shall  not  disturb  neighboring  stations. 

[l87]  §  4.  Transmitting  and  receiving  sets 
of  any  mobile  station  must  permit  of  mak- 
ing frequency  changes  as  rapidly  as  possi- 
ble. All  installations  must  be  such  that, 
after  the  communication  is  established, 
the  time  necessary  to  change  from  trans- 
mission to  reception  and  vice  versa  shall 
be  as  short  as  possible. 


B.—Ship  Stations 

[138j  §  5.  (i)  The  transmitting  appara- 
tus used  in  ship  stations  working  on  type- 
A2  or  -B  waves  in  the  authorized  band  be- 
tween 365  and  515  kc  (822  and  583  m) 
must  be  provided  with  devices  making  it 
possible  conveniently  and  appreciably  to 
reduce  the  power  thereof. 

[139]  (2)  This  provision  shall  not  apply  to 
transmitters  in  which  the  power,  as  meas- 
ured at  full  load,  does  not  exceed  300  watts 
on  the  transmitting-tube  plates  (type-A2 
emission)  or  at  the  input  of  the  audio- 
frequency supply  transformers  (type-B 
emission). 

[14°]  (3)  All  ship  stations  transmitting  on 
frequencies  in  the  band  100  to  160  kc 
(3,000  to  1,875  m)  and  on  frequencies 
above  4,000  kc  (wavelengths  below  75  m) 
must  be  equipped  with  a  wave  meter  hav- 
ing a  precision  at  least  equal  to  5/1000,  or 
with  an  equivalent  device. 


former,  en  ce  qui  concerne  les  frequences 
et  les  types  d'onde,  aux  dispositions 
generates  faisant  1'objet  de  Tarticle  7. 
pas]  (2)  En  outre,  aucune  nouvelle  in- 
stallation d'emetteurs  d'ondes  du  type  B 
ne  peut  §tre  faite,  dans  les  stations 
mobiles,  sauf  quand  ces  emetteurs,  tra- 
vaillant  a  pleine  puissance,  d6penseront 
moins  de  300  watts  mesur6s  a  1'entree  du 
transformateur  d 'alimentation  a  fr6quence 
audible. 

f134]  (3)  Enfin,  1'emploi  des  ondes  du 
type  B  de  toutes  frequences  sera  interdit  a 
partir  du  ier  Janvier  1940,  sauf  pour  les 
Emetteurs  remplissant  les  mSmes  condi- 
tions de  puissance  que  ci-avant. 
[l35]  §  2.  La  frequence  demission  des 
stations  mobiles  sera  verified  le  plus 
sou  vent  possible  par  le  service  d 'inspec- 
tion dont  elles  relevent. 
[13G]  §3.  Les  appareils  r6cepteurs  dpi- 
vent  6tre  tels  que  le  courant  qu'ils  in- 
duisent  dans  1'antenne  soit  aussi  r6duit 
que  possible  et  n'incommode  pas  les  sta- 
tions du  voisinage. 

[137]  §  4.  Les  changements  de  frequence 
dans  les  appareils  emetteurs  et  recepteurs 
de  toute  station  mobile  doivent  pouvoir 
Itre  effectu6s  aussi  rapidernent  que  possi- 
ble. Toutes  les  installations  doivent  Stre 
telles,  que  la  communication  £tant 
6tablie,  le  temps  necessaire  au  passage  de 
remission  &  la  r6ception  et  vice-versa  soit 
aussi  recluit  que  possible. 

B. — Stations  de  navire 

[138]  §5.  (i)  Les  appareils  d'emission 
utilises  dans  les  stations  de  navire  travail- 
lant  sur  des  ondes  du  type  A2  ou  B  dans 
les  bandes  autorise'es  entre  365  et  515 
kc/s  (822  et  583  m)  doivent  £tre  pourvus 
de  dispositifs  permettant,  d'une  maniere 
facile,  d'en  r&iuire  sensiblement  la 
puissance. 

[139]  (2)  Cette  disposition  ne  s'applique 
pas  aux  emetteurs  dont  la  puissance, 
mesur6e  a  pleine  charge,  ne  depasse  pas 
300  watts  a  la  plaque  des  lampes  £met- 
trices  (emission  du  type  A.2)  ou  £  1'entree 
des  transformateurs  d 'alimentation  a  fr6- 
quence  audible  (Emission  du  type  B). 
[14°]  (3)  Toutes  les  stations  de  navire 
6mettant  sur  des  frequences  dans  les 
bandes  de  100  a  160  kc/s  (3  ooo  a  i  875 
m)  et  sur  des  frequences  supeYieures  a 
4  ooo  kc/s  (longueurs  d'onde  inf6rieures  & 
75  m)  doivent  6tre  munies  d'un  onde- 
metre  ayant  une  precision  au  moins  6gale 
a  5/1  ooo  ou  d'un  dispositif  equivalent. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


149 


[i«]  §6.  Any  station  installed  on 
board  a  ship,  compulsorily  provided  with 
radio  apparatus  as  a  result  of  an  inter- 
national agreement,  must  be  able  to  trans- 
mit and  to  receive  on  the  wave  of  500  kc 
(600  m),  type-A2  or  -B  and,  in  addition, 
on  at  least  one  other  type-As  or  -B  wave, 
in  the  authorized  band  between  365  and 
485  kc  (822  and  619  m). 
[142]  §  7-  (i)  In  addition  to  the  waves 
mentioned  above,  ship  stations  equipped 
to  transmit  type-Ai,  -A2,  or  -A3  waves 
may  use  the  waves  authorized  in  article  7. 

[*43]  (2)  The  use  of  type-B  waves  shall  be 
prohibited  on  all  frequencies,  except  the 
following  ones; 

375  kc  (800  m) 
410  kc  (730  m) 
425  kc  (705  m) 
454  kc  (660  m) 
500  kc  (600  m) 
1,364  kc  (220  m)* 

[144]  §  8.  All  the  ship  station  apparatus 
installed  for  the  transmission  of  type-Ai 
waves  in  the  authorized  band  between  100 
and  160  kc  (3,000  and  1,875  m)  must  per- 
mit of  using  at  least  two  frequencies, 
selected  in  this  band,  in  addition  to  the 
frequency  of  143  kc  (2,100  m). 

[14B]  §  9-  00  All  stations  on  board  ships 
compulsorily  provided  with  radiotele- 
graph apparatus  must  be  capable  of  re- 
ceiving the  wave  of  500  kc  (600  m)  and,  in 
addition,  all  the  waves  necessary  to  the 
operation  of  the  service  which  they  carry 
on. 

[«•]  (2)  These  stations  must  be  capable 
of  receiving  types  Ai  and  A2  waves  on  the 
same  frequencies  easily  and  efficiently. 


C. — Aircraft  Stations 
[147]     §  jo.  (i)  (a)  Any  station  installed 
on  board  an  aircraft  flying  over  a  mari- 
time route,   and   compulsorily  provided 
with  radio  apparatus  as  the  result  of  an 
international  agreement,  must  be  capable 
of  transmitting  and  receiving  on  the  wave 
of  500  kc  (600  m),  type  A2  or  B. 
[148]     (&)  As  regards  the  restriction  in  the 
use  of  type-B  waves,  see  B,  §  7  (2)  above. 

[i*9]     (2)   (a)  Any  aircraft  station  must 


[Ml]  §  6.  Toute  station  installee  &  bord 
d'un  navire  obligatoirement  pourvu  d'ap- 
pareils  radioelectriques  par  suite  d'un  ac- 
cord international  doit  pouvoir  emettre  et 
recevoir  sur  1 'oxide  de  500  kc/s  (600  m),  du 
type  A2  ou  B  et,  en  outre,  au  moins  sur 
une  autre  onde,  du  type  A2  ou  B,  dans  les 
bandes  autorisees  entre  365  et  485  kc/s 
(822  et  619  m). 

I142]  §7-  W  En  plus  des  ondes  visees  ci- 
avant,  les  stations  de  navire  £quip£es  pour 
emettre  des  ondes  des  types  Ai,  A2  ou  A3 
peuvent  employer  les  ondes  autorisees  £ 
1'article  7. 

[143]  (2)  L'usage  des  ondes  du  type  B  est 
interdit  pour  toutes  les  frequences  4  Tex- 
ception  des  frequences  suivantes: 

375  kc/s  (800  m) 
410  kc/s  (730  m) 
425  kc/s  (705  m) 
454  kc/s  (660  m) 
500  kc/s  (600  m) 
I  364  kc/s  (220  m)* 

[144]  §  8.  Tous  les  appareils  de  stations 
de  navire  etablis  pour  la  transmission 
d'ondes  du  type  Ai  des  bandes  autorisees 
entre  100  et  160  kc/s  (3  opo  et  I  875  m) 
doivent  permettre  1'emploi,  en  plus  dela 
frequence  de  143  kc/s  (2  100  m),  dedeux 
frequences  au  minimum,  choisies  dans  ces 
bandes. 

[145]  §  9.  (i)  Toutes  les  stations  &  bord 
des  navires  obligatoirement  pourvus  d 'ap- 
pareils radiotelegraphiques  doivent  £tre  £ 
m6me  de  recevoir  1'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600 
m)  et,  en  outre,  toutes  les  ondes  n£ces- 
saires  &  raccomplissement  du  service 
qu'elles  effectuent. 

[*48]  (2)  Ces  stations  doivent  toe  & 
m£me  de  recevoir  facilement  et  efficace- 
rnent,  sur  les  mSmes  frequences,  les  ondes 
des  types  Ai  et  A2. 

C. — Stations  d'aSronef 

[147]     §  10.  (i)  a)  Toute  station  installee 

£  bord  d'un  a6ronef  effectuant  un  par- 

cours  maritime,  obligatoirement  ^pourvu 

d 'appareils  radio61ectriques  par  suite  d'un 

accord  international,  doit  pouvoir  emettre 

et  recevoir  sur  1'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600  m)f 

du  type  A2  ou  B. 

[148]    b)  En  ce  qui  concerne  la  restriction 

dans  Tusage  des  ondes  du  type  B,  voir 

sous  B,  §  7  (2)  ci-avant. 

[*49]     (2)  a)  Toute  station  d'aeronef  doit 


*  See  note  10  to  the  frequency  allocation  table  [omitted  here]. 

*  Voir  la  note  10  du  tableau  de  repartition  des  frequences  [pas  inclus  ici]. 


ISO 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


be  capable  of  transmitting  and  receiving 
the  wave  of  333  kc  (900  m),  type  A2  or 

A3- 

[X5°]  (&)  This  rule  shall  not  apply  to  air- 
craft stations  flying  over  regions  ^  where 
local  agreements  providing  otherwise  are 
in  force. 

[Articles     10-11     omitted. — Operators' 
Certificates.    Authority  of  the  Master.] 

ARTICLE  12* — Inspection  of  Stations 
[m]  §  i.  (i)  The  competent  govern- 
ments or  administrations  of  countries 
where  a  mobile  station  calls,  may  demand 
the  production  of  the  license.  The  opera- 
tor of  the  mobile  station  or  the  person 
responsible  for  the  station  must  submit  to 
this  verification.  The  license  must  be 
kept  in  such  a  way  that  it  may  be  fur- 
nished without  delay.  However,  the 
production  of  the  license  may  be  replaced 
by  a  permanent  posting  in  the  station,  of 
a  copy  of  the  license  certified  by  the 
authority  which  has  granted  it. 
[IDS]  (2)  When  the  license  cannot  be 
produced  or  when  manifest  irregularities 
are  detected,  the  governments  or  ad- 
ministrations may  proceed  to  the  inspec- 
tion of  radio  installations  in  order  to  be 
assured  that  they  satisfy  the  require- 
ments of  the  present  Regulations. 

[194]  (3)  Moreover,  the  inspectors  shall 
have  the  right  to  demand  the  production 
of  the  operators'  certificates  although  no 
proof  of  professional  qualifications  may  be 
demanded. 

[19S]  §  2.  (i)  When  a  government  or  an 
administration  has  found  it  necessary  to 
resort  to  the  measures  provided  for  in  §  I 
above,  or  when  it  has  not  been  possible  to 
produce  the  operators'  certificates,  it  shall 
be  necessary  immediately  to  inform 
thereof  the  government  or  the  administra- 
tion to  which  the  mobile  station  in  ques- 
tion is  subject.  In  addition,  the  pro- 
cedure specified  in  article  13  shall  be 
followed  should  necessity  arise. 
[196]  (2)  The  official  of  the  government  or 
of  the  administration  which  has  inspected 
the  station  must,  before  leaving  the  latter, 
communicate  his  findings  to  the  com- 
mander or  to  the  responsible  person  (art. 
n)  or  to  their  substitute. 
[i97]  §3.  As  regards  the  technical  and 
operating  conditions  which  mobile  sta- 
tions holding  a  license  must  satisfy  in  the 


pouvoir  dmettre  et  recevoir  1'onde  de  333 
kc/s  (900  m),  du  type  A2  ou  A3. 

[16°]  b)  Cette  regie  ne  s'applique  pas  aux 
stations  d'a&ronef  survolant  les  regions  ou 
des  accords  locaux,  qui  en  disposent  autre- 
ment,  sont  en  vigueur. 

[Articles    10-11    omis. — Certificats   des 
operateurs.    Autorite  du  commandant.} 

ARTICLE  12. — Inspection  des  stations 
[192]  §  it  (!)  Les  gouvernements  ou  ad- 
ministrations comp6tents  des  pays  ou  une 
station  mobile  fait  escale  peuvent  exiger 
la  production  de  la  licence.  L'  op<§rateur 
de  la  station  mobile,  ou  la  personne  respon- 
sable  de  la  station,  doit  se  prater  a  cette 
constatation.  La  licence  doit  6tre  con- 
serv6e  de  facon  qu'elle  puisse  £tre  fournie 
sans  d61ai.  Toutefois,  la  production  de  la 
licence  peut  £tre  remplace*e  par  1'affichage 
a  demeure,  dans  la  station,  d'une  copie  de 
la  licence,  certifiee  conforme  par  I'autorit6 
qui  1'a  d61ivr6e. 

[193]  (2)  Lorsque  la  licence  ne  peut  8tre 
produite,  ou  que  des  anomalies  manifestes 
sont  constat6es,  les  gouvernements  ou  ad- 
ministrations peuvent  faire  proc£der  a 
1'inspection  des  installations  radio61ec- 
triques,  en  vue  de  s'assurer  qu'elles  re"- 
pondent  aux  stipulations  du  present 
R£glement. 

[194]  (3)  En  outre,  les  inspecteurs  sont  en 
droit  d'exiger  la  production  des  certificats 
des  op&rateurs,  sans  qu'aucune  justifica- 
tion de  connaissances  professionnelles 
puisse  6tre  demande'e. 
[19B]  §2  (i)  Lorsqu'ungouvernementou 
une  administration  s'est  trouv6  dans  1'ob- 
ligation  de  recourir  a  la  mesure  pr6vue  au 
§  i  ci-avant  ou  lorsque  les  certificats 
d'op6rateur  n'ont  pu  toe  produits,  il  y  a 
lieu  d'en  informer  imm^diatement  le  gou- 
vernement  pu  Tadministration  dont  de*- 
pend  la  station  mobile  en  cause.  Pour  le 
surplus,  il  est  proce"d6,  le  cas  ech6ant, 
ainsi  que  le  present  1'article  13. 

[196]  (2)  Le  d616gu6  du  gouvernement  ou 
de  1' administration  qui  a  inspect^  la  sta- 
tion doit,  avant  de  quitter  celle-ci,  faire 
part  de  ses  constatations  au  commandant 
ou  a  la  personne  responsable  (article  il) 
ou  a  leur  remplagant. 
[l97]  §  3.  En  ce  qui  concerne  les  condi- 
tions techniques  et  d'exploitation  aux- 
quelles  doivent  satisfaire,  pour  le  service 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


international  radio-communication  serv- 
ice, the  contracting  governments  shall 
bind  themselves  not  to  impose  upon  for- 
eign stations  which  are  temporarily 
located  in  their  territorial  waters,  or 
which  may  stop  temporarily  in  their  terri- 
tory, conditions  more  stringent  than  those 
which  are  provided  for  in  the  present 
Regulations.  These  provisions  shall  in 
no  way  affect  the  provisions  which,  com- 
ing within  the  scope  of  international 
agreements  relative  to  maritime  or  air 
navigation,  are  not  determined  in  the 
present  Regulations. 


ARTICLE  13. — Reporting  of  Violations 

[lfl8]  §  i.  Violations  of  the  Convention  or 
the  Radio  Regulations  shall  be  reported 
by  the  stations  detecting  them  to  their 
administration  by  means  of  statements 
conforming  to  the  model  shown  in  ap- 
pendix 3. 

[l99]  §  2.  In  case  of  serious  violations 
committed  by  a  station,  representations 
must  be  made  to  the  administration  of  the 
country  to  which  this  station  is  subject. 

[20°]  §  3.  If  an  administration  has  knowl- 
edge of  a  violation  of  the  Convention  or  of 
the  Regulations,  by  a  station  which  it  has 
authorized,  it  shall  ascertain  the  facts, 
determine  the  responsibility,  and  take 
the  necessary  action. 

ARTICLE  14. — Call  Signals 

poi]  §  i.  (i)  All^  stations  open  to  the 
international  service  of  public  correspond- 
ence, as  well  as  private  experimental 
stations,  amateur  stations,  and  private 
radio-communication  stations,  must  have 
call  signals  from  the  international  series 
assigned  to  each  country  in  the  following 
table.1  In  this  table,  the  first  letter  or 
the  first  two  letters  of  the  call  signals  show 
the  nationality  of  the  stations. 


[202]  (2)  When  a  fixed  station  in  the 
international  service  uses  more  than  one 
frequency,  each  frequency  shall  be 
designated  by  a  separate  call  signal  used 
for  that  frequency  only. 


de  radiocommunication  international,  les 
stations  mobiles  titulaires  d'une  licence, 
les  gouvernements  contractants  s'en- 
gagent  a  ne  pas  imposer  aux  stations 
mobiles  £trang£res  qui  se  trouvent  tern- 
porairement  dans  leurs  eaux  territoriales, 
ou  s'arr£tent  temporairement  sur  leur  ter- 
ritoire,  des  conditions  plus  rigoureuses  que 
celles  qui  sont  pr£vues  dans  le  present 
R&glement.  Ces  prescriptions  n'affectent 
en  rien  les  dispositions  qui,  6tant  du  res- 
sort  d 'accords  internationaux  relatifs  a  la 
navigation  maritime  ou  aerienne,  ne  sont 
pas  determiners  dans  le  present  R&gle- 
ment. 

ARTICLE  13. — Rapport  sur  les  infractions 

[198]  §  I.  Les  infractions  £  la  Convention 
ou  aux  R&glements  des  radiocommunica- 
tions  sont  signa!6es  a  leur  administration 
par  les  stations  qui  les  constatent  et  ce, 
au  moyen  d'etats  cpnformes  au  module 
reproduit  a  1'appendice  3. 
[199]  §  2.  Dans  le  cas  d 'infractions  im- 
portantes,  commises  par  une  station,  des 
representations  doivent  8tre  faites  a  1'ad- 
ministration  du  pays  dont  depend  cette 
station. 

[20°]  §  3-  Si  une  administration  a  con- 
naissance  d'une  infraction  a  la  Conven- 
tion ou  aux  R£glements,  commise  dans 
une  des  stations  qu'elle  a  autoris6es,  elle 
constate  les  faits,  fixe  les  responsabilite's 
et  prend  les  mesures  n6cessaires. 

ARTICLE  14. — Indicatifs  d'appel 

[201]  §  i.  (i)  Toutes  les  stations  ouvertes 
au  service  international  de  la  correspon- 
dance  publique,  ainsi  que  les  stations 
experimental  privies,  les  stations  d'ama- 
teur  et  les  stations  privies  de  radiocom- 
munication, doivent  poss£der  des  indicatifs 
d'appel  de  la  s6rie  Internationale  attri- 
bute a  chaque  pays  dans  le  tableau  de 
repartition  ci-apr6s.  Dans  ce  tableau,  la 
premiere  lettre  ou  les  deux  premieres  let- 
tres  prevues  pour  les  indicatifs  d'appel 
distinguent  la  nationality  des  stations. 
[202]  (2)  Lorsqu'une  station  fixe  em- 
ploie,  dans  le  service  international,  plus 
d'une  frequence,  chaque  frequence  est 
d6sign6e  par  un  indicatif  d'appel  dis- 
tinct, utilise  uniquement  pour  cette  fre"- 
quence. 


i  The  English  translation  of  the  table  is  not  here  reproduced. — ED. 


152 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 
P03]  TABLEAU  DE  REPARTITION  DBS  INDICATIFS  D?APPEL 


No.  317 


Pays 

Indicatifs 

Chili                          .             .    . 

CAA-CEZ 

Canada  

CFA-CKZ 

Cuba                  

CLA-CMZ 

Maroc  

CNA-CNZ 

Cuba  

COA-COZ 

Bolivie  

CPA-CPZ 

Colonies  portugaises  

CQA-CRZ 

Portugal  

CSA-CUZ 

Uruguay  

CVA-CXZ 

Canada 

CYA-CZZ 

Allemagne  

D 

Espagne       

EAA-EHZ 

Etat  libre  d'Irlande 

EIA-EIZ 

Republique  de  Liberia   .... 

ELA-ELZ 

Perse. 

EPA-EQZ 

Estonie  

ESA-ESZ 

Ethiopie     

ETA-ETZ 

Territoire  de  la  Sarre 

EZA-EZZ 

France  et  colonies  et  pro-, 
tectorats  

F 

Grande-Bretagne  

G 

Hongrie        

HAA-HAZ 

Confederation  suisse 

HBA-HBZ 

Equateur  

HCA-HCZ 

Republique  d'Ha'itL 

HHA-HHZ 

Republique  Dominicaine  .  .  . 
Republique  de  Colombie  .  .  . 
Republique  de  Panama  .... 
R6publique  de  Honduras  ,  .  . 
Siam  

HIA-HIZ 
HJA-HKZ 
HPA-HPZ 
HRA-HRZ 
HSA-HSZ 

Etat  de  la  Cite  du  Vatican.  . 
Hedjaz  ,  

HVA-HVZ 
HZA-HZZ 

Italic  et  colonies   

I 

Japon  

J 

Etats-Unis  d'Amerique  .... 
Norvege  .        ... 

K 
LAA-LNZ 

Republique  Argentine  

LOA-LWZ 

Luxembourg  .  .  ,  

LXA-LXZ 

Lithuanie     

LYA-LYZ 

Bulgarie  

LZA-LZZ 

Grande-Bretagne  

M 

Etats-Unis  d'Amerique  .... 
Perou  

N 
OAA-OCZ 

Autriche.  ..,.,,,,  f 

OEA-OEZ 

Finlande.  .    . 

OFA-OHZ 

Tchecoslovaquie  

OKA-OKZ 

Belgique  et  colonies  

ONA-OTZ 

Danemark  

OUA-OZZ 

[204]     j  2.  Call  signals  shall  consist  of: 

[205]    (a)  three  letters,  in  the  case  of  land 
stations; 

p06]    (6)  three  letters,  or  three  letters  fol- 
lowed by  a  single  figure  (other  than  o  or 
i),  in  the  case  of  fixed  stations; 
[207]     (c)  four  letters,  in  the  case  of  ship 
stations; 


Pays 

Indicatifs 

Pays-Bas                     

PAA-PIZ 

Curasao              

PJA-PJZ 

PKA-POZ 

Bresil  

PPA-PYZ 

PZA-PZZ 

(Abr6viations)  

Q 

Union      des      Republiques 
Sovietistes  Socialistes.  .  .  . 
Suede            

R 

SAA-SMZ 

Pologne  

SOA-SRZ 

Eervote       

STA-SUZ 

Grece  

SVA-SZZ 

Turquie  

TAA-TCZ 

Islande                       .  -      ... 

TFA-TFZ 

Guatemala  

TGA-TGZ 

Costa-  Rica       

TIA-TIZ 

France  et  colonies  et  pro-, 
tectorats  

TKA-TZZ 

Union      des      Republiques 
Sovietistes  Socialistes.  .  .  . 
Canada.           .          

U 
VAA-VGZ 

Federation  Australienne.  .  .  . 
Terre-Neuve  . 

VHA-VMZ 
VOA-VOZ 

Colonies     et     protectorats 
britanniques  

VPA-VSZ 

Indes  britanniques        

VTA-VWZ 

Canada  

VXA-VYZ 

Etats-Unis  d'Am6rique  .... 
Mexique  

W 
XAA-XFZ 

Chine  

XGA-XUZ 

Indes  britanniques   .          .  . 

XYA-XZZ 

Afghanistan  ,  

YAA-YAZ 

Indes  n^erlandaises. 

YBA-YHZ 

Iraq  

YIA-YIZ 

Nouvelles-Hebrides  

YTA-YTZ 

Lettonie  

YLA—YLZ 

Ville  libre  de  IDantzig  

YMA-YMZ 

Nicaragua  

YNA-YNZ 

Roumanie  

YOA-YRZ 

Republique  de  El  Salvador.  . 
Yougoslavie  

YSA-YSZ 
YTA-YUZ 

Venezuela  

YVA-YWZ 

Albanie  

ZAA-ZAZ 

Colonies  _  et      protectorats 
britanniques. 

ZBA-ZJZ 

Nouvelle-Zeiande  

ZKA-ZMZ 

Paraguay  

ZPA-ZPZ 

Union  de  TAfrique  du  Sud.  . 

ZSA-ZUZ 

[204]     §2.  Les    indicatifs    d'appel    sont 
formes  de: 

[206]    a)  trois  lettres,  dans  le  cas  de  sta- 
tions terrestres ; 

p06]    6)  trois  lettres,  ou  trois  lettres  sui- 
vies  d'un  seul  chifTre  (autre  que  o  ou  i), 
dans  le  cas  de  stations  fixes; 
[207]    c)  quatre  lettres,   dans  le  cas  de 
stations  de  navire; 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


153 


PCS]  (^)  five  letters,  in  the  case  of  air- 
craft stations; 

p09]  (e)  five  letters  preceded  and  fol- 
lowed by  the  Morse  code  signal  cor- 
responding to  "  underlined  "  (•••—  —  •—) , 
in  the  case  of  stations  or  aircraft  carrying 
matter  having  to  do  with  the  functioning 
of  the  League  of  Nations; 
pio]  (j)  four  letters  followed  by  a  single 
figure  (other  than  o  or  i),  in  the  case  of 
other  mobile  stations; 
[211]  (g)  one  or  two  letters  and  a  single 
figure  (other  than  o  or  i)  followed  by  a 
group  of  not  more  than  three  letters,  in 
the  case  of  private  experimental  stations, 
amateur  stations,  and  private  radio- 
communication  stations;  however,  the 
prohibition  against  the  use  of  the  figures 
o  and  I  shall  not  apply  to  amateur  stations. 
I212]  §3-  W  In  the  aeronautical  radio 
service,  after  communication  has  been 
established  by  means  of  the  complete  call 
signal  [see  §  2,  (d)  and  (e)],  the  aircraft 
station  may  use  an  abbreviated  call  signal 
composed : 

[21S]  (a)  in  radiotelegraphy,  of  the  first 
and  last  letters  of  the  complete  5-letter 
call  signal; 

[214]  (b)  in  radiotelephony,  of  all  or  part 
of  the  name  of  the  owner  of  the  aircraft 
(company  or  individual)  followed  by  the 
last  two  letters  of  the  registration  mark. 

[215]  (2)  In  the  case  of  an  aircraft  per- 
forming a  service  which  concerns  the 
functioning  of  the  League  of  Nations,  the 
words  "Soci6t6  des  Nations"  shall  replace 
the  name  of  the  owner  of  the  aircraft. 
[*«]  §4.  (i)  The  26  letters  of  the  alpha- 
bet, as  well  as  the  figures,  in  the  cases  pro- 
vided for  in  §  2,  may  be  used  to  form  call 
signals;  accented  letters  shall  be  excluded. 

[217]  (2)  However,  the  following  letter 
combinations  may  not  be  used  for  call 
signals: 

P18]  (a.)  combinations  beginning  with  A 
or  B,  these  two  letters  being  reserved  for 
the  geographical  part  of  the  International 
Code  of  Signals; 

pis]  (b)  combinations  used  in  the  Inter- 
national Code  of  Signals,  second  part; 

[22°]  (c)  combinations  which  might  be 
confused  with  distress  signals  or  with 
other  signals  of  a  similar  character; 
[221]  (d)  combinations  reserved  for  the 
abbreviations  to  be  used  in  the  radio 
service. 


[208]    d)  cinq  lettres,  dans  le  cas  de  sta- 
tions d'aeronef ; 

P09]  ^  e)  cinq  lettres,  prec6d6es  et  suivies 
du  signal  du  code  Morse  correspondant  au 
"soulign6"  (••— — ••— ),  dans  le  cas  de 
stations  &  bord  d'aeYonef s  effectuant  un 
transport  int6ressant  le  fonctionnement  de 
la  Societ6  des  Nations; 
[210]  jf)  quatre  lettres,  suivies  d'un  seul 
chiflre  (autre  que  o  ou  i),  dans  le  cas 
d'autres  stations  mobiles; 
P"]  g)  une  ou  deux  lettres  et  un  seul 
chiffre  (autre  que  o  ou  i),  suivi  d'un 
groupe  de  trois  lettres  au  plus  dans  le  cas 
de  stations  exp6rimentales  privies,  de 
stations  d'amateur  et  de  stations  privies 
de  radiocommunication ;  toutefois,  1 'in- 
terdiction d'employer  les  chiffres  o  et  I 
ne  s'applique  pas  aux  stations  d'amateur. 
P12]  §  3-  (i)  Dans  le  service  radioa6rien, 
apr&s  que  la  communication  a  6t6  6tablie 
au  moyen  de  Tindicatif  d'appel  complet 
[voir  §  2,  d)  et  e)],  la  station  d'aeronef 
peut  employer  un  indicatif  abr6g6  con- 
stitue": 

pis]  a)  en  radiotele"graphie,  par  les  pre- 
miere et  derniere  lettres  de  1'indicatif 
d'appel  complet  de  cinq  lettres; 
[214]  b)  en  radiot616phonie,  par  tout  ou 
partie  du  nom  du  propri6taire  de  I'a6ronef 
(compagnie  ou  particulier)  suivi  des 
deux  dernieres  lettres  de  la  marque  d'im- 
matriculation. 

pis]  (2)  Pour  un  aeronef  effectuant  un 
service  int6ressant  le  fonctionnement  de 
la  Soci6t6  des  Nations,  les  mots  "Soci6t6 
des  Nations"  remplacent  le  nom  du 
propne"taire  de  1'aeronef. 
H  §  4-  (i)  Les  26  lettres  de  1'alphabet, 
ainsi  que  les  chiffres  dans  les  cas  prevus  au 
§  2,  peuvent  £tre  employes  pour  former 
les  indicatif  s  d'appel ;  les  lettres  accentu6es 
sont  exclues. 

[217]     (2)  Toutefois,  les  combinaisons  de 
lettres  indiqu6es  ci-apres  ne  peuvent  £tre 
employees  comme  indicatif  s  d'appel: 
[218]    a)  combinaisons   commencant  par 
A  ou  par  B,  ces  deux  lettres  6tant  r£- 
serv6es  pour  la  partie  g6ographique  du 
Code  International  de  Signaux; 
p19]    b)  combinaisons  employ6es  dans  le 
Code  International  de  Signaux,  deuxieme 


0]  c)  combinaisons  qui  pourraient  toe 
confondues  avec  les  signaux  de  d6tresse 
ou  avec  d'autres  signaux  de  mime  nature; 
p21]  d)  combinaisons  r&servees  pour^les 
abr^viations  a  employer  dans  les  services 
de  radiocommunication. 


154 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


[222]  §  5-  (*)  Each  country  shall  choose 
call  signals  for  its  stations  from  the  inter- 
national series  which  is  allocated  to  it  and 
shall  notify  the  Bureau  of  the  Union  of  the 
call  signals  which  it  has  assigned  to  its 
stations. 

p23]  (2)  The  Bureau  of  the  Union  shall 
see  that  the  same  call  signal  is  not  al- 
located more  than  once  and  that  those 
call  signals  which  might  be  confused  with 
distress  signals,  or  with  other  signals  of  a 
similar  character,  are  not  allocated. 


ARTICLE  15. — Service  Documents 

[224]  §  I.  The  Bureau  of  the  Union  shall 
prepare  and  publish  the  following  service 
documents: 

[225j  (#)  The  nomenclatures  of  all  the 
land,  mobile,  and  fixed  stations  having  a 
call  signal  from  the  international  series, 
whether  or  not  open  to  public  correspond- 
ence; the  nomenclatures  of  the  stations 
operating  special  services,  broadcasting, 
and  radio  communications  between  fixed 
points. 

[226]  (I)  The  frequency  list.  This  list 
shall  give  all  the  frequencies  assigned  to 
stations  intended  to  carry  on  a  regular  serv- 
ice and  which  are  capable  of  causing 
international  interference. 
p27]  (c)  A  nomenclature  of  the  telegraph 
offices  and  land  stations  open  to  inter- 
national service. 

[228]  (d)  A  chart  of  coast  stations  open 
to  public  correspondence. 
p29]  (e)  A  table  and  a  chart  to  be  an- 
nexed to  the  nomenclature  of  coast  and 
ship  stations  indicating  the  zones  and 
hours  of  service  of  shrps  of  which  the  sta- 
tions belong  to  the  second  category  (see 
appendices  4  and  5). 

[23°]  (/)  An  alphabetical  list  of  the  call 
signals  of  the  stations  mentioned  under 
(a)  and  provided  with  a  call  signal  of  the 
international  series.  This  list  shall  be 
arranged  without  considering  nationality. 
It  shall  be  preceded  by  the  call-signal- 
allocation  table  appearing  in  article  14. 

[231J     (g)  General  radio  statistics. 

P32]  §  2.  (i)  The  nomenclatures  of  sta- 
tions [§  I  (a)]  shall  be  published  in  sepa- 
rate volumes  as  follows: 

I.  Nomenclature  of  Coast  and  Ship 
Stations. 


[2221  §  5-  C1)  Chaque  pays  choisit  les 
indicatifs  d'appel  de  ses  stations  dans  la 
serie  Internationale  qui  lui  est  allouee  et 
notifie  au  Bureau  de  1'Umon  les  indicatifs 
d'appel  qu'il  a  attribues  &  ses  stations. 

[223]  (2)  Le  Bureau  de  1'Union  veille  cL 
ce  qu'un  m£me  indicatif  d'appel  ne  soit 
pas  attribu6  plus  d'une  fois  et  &  ce  que 
les  indicatifs  d'appel  qui  pourraient  £tre 
confondus  avec  les  signaux  de  d6tresse,  ou 
avec  d'autres  signaux  de  mSme  nature,  ne 
soient  pas  attribues. 

ARTICLE  15. — Documents  de  service 

p24]  §  i.  Le  Bureau  de  1'Union  dresse  et 
public  les  documents  de  service  suivants: 

[22S]  a)  les  nomenclatures  de  toutes  les 
stations  terrestres,  mobiles,  fixes  ayant 
un  indicatif  d'appel  de  la  serie  interna- 
tionale  et  ouvertes  ou  non  a  la  corres- 
pondance  publique;  les  nomenclatures  des 
stations  effectuant  des  services  speciaux, 
de  la  radiodiffusion,  des  radiocommunica- 
tions  entre  points  fixes; 
p26]  6)  la  liste  des  frequences.  Cette 
liste  indique  toutes  les  frequences  at- 
tribu6es  aux  stations  destinees  &  effectuer 
un  service  regulier  et  qui  sont  susceptibles 
de  causer  des  brouillages  internationaux; 
p27]  c)  une  nomenclature  des  bureaux 
t<§16graphiques  et  des  stations  terrestres 
ouverts  au  service  international ; 
p28]  d)  une  carte  des  stations  c6tieres 
ouvertes  &  la  correspondance  publique; 
p29]  e)  un  tableau  et  une  carte  destines 
a  £tre  annexes  &  la  nomenclature  des  sta- 
tions c6tieres  et  de  navire,  et  indiquant  les 
zones  et  les  heures  de  service  &  bord  des 
navires  dont  les  stations  sont  classics  dans 
la  deuxieme  cat6gorie  (voir  appendices  4 

et5); 

[230]  y)  une  iiste  alphabetique  des  indi- 
catifs d'appel  des  stations  mentionn6es 
sous  d)  et  pourvues  d'un  indicatif  d'appel 
de  la  serie  Internationale.  Cette  liste  est 
dressee  sans  consideration  de  nationality. 
Elle  est  prec6dee  du  tableau  de  repartition 
des  indicatifs  d'appel  figurant  a  I'article 

H; 

P31]  g)  une  statistique  generate  des  radio- 
communications. 

p32]  §  2.  (i)  Les  nomenclatures  des  sta- 
tions [§  i,^  a]  sont  publics  en  fascicules 
s6par£s,  ainsi  qu'il  suit: 

I.  Nomenclature  des  stations   c6ti- 
eres  et  de  navire. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


155 


II.  Nomenclature  of  Aeronautical  and 
Aircraft  Stations. 

III.  Nomenclature  of  Stations  Operat- 

ing Special  Services. 

IV.  Nomenclature  of  Fixed  Stations 

(Index  to  the  List  of  Frequencies 
for  Fixed  Stations  in  Service). 
V.  Nomenclature  of  Broadcasting  Sta- 
tions. 

p33]  (2)  In  the  nomenclatures  I,  II,  and 
III,  each  class  of  stations  shall  occupy  a 
special  section. 

[234]  §3-  The  form  for  the  different 
nomenclatures  and  for  the  frequency  list 
is  given  in  appendix  6.  Detailed  informa- 
tion concerning  the  preparation  of  these 
documents  shall  be  given  in  the  prefaces, 
in  the  headings  of  columns,  and  in  the 
notes  of  the  said  documents. 
[235]  §  4.  Once  a  month,  by  means  of 
forms  similar  to  those  given  in  appendix  6, 
the  administrations  shall  notify  the  Bu- 
reau of  the  Union  of  the  additions, 
changes,  and  deletions  to  be  made  in  the 
above-mentioned  documents. 
[236]  §  5«  (i)  The  nomenclature  of  coast 
and  ship  stations  as  well  as  the  nomencla- 
ture of  aeronautical  and  aircraft  stations 
shall  be  reedited  every  6  months  without 
supplements  between  the  two  reeditipns. 
As  regards  the  nomenclature  of  stations 
operating  special  services  and  the  nomen- 
clature of  broadcasting  stations,  the  Bu- 
reau of  the  Union  shall  decide  upon  the 
intervals  at  which  they  must  be  reedited. 

p87]  (2)  A  recapitulative  supplement 
shall  be  published  every  3  months  for  the 
nomenclature  of  stations  operating  special 
services,  and  every  6  months  for  the  no- 
menclature of  broadcasting  stations, 
pas]  (3)  xhe  frequency  list  and  the  no- 
menclature of  fixed  stations  constituting 
an  index  to  the  frequency  list,  for  fixed 
stations  in  service,  shall  be  reedited  sepa- 
rately each  year.  They  shall  be  kept  up 
to  date  by  means  of  monthly  supplements 
also  edited  separately. 

P39]     §  6.  (i)  The  names  of  coast  and 

aeronautical   stations   shall   be   followed 

respectively  by  the  words  RADIO  and 

AERADIO. 

p40]     (2)  The  names  of  radio  direction 

finding    and    of    radio-beacon    stations 

shall   be   followed   respectively   by   the 

words  GONIO  and  PHARE. 

P41]     §  7.  Appendix  7  contains  the  sym- 


II.  Nomenclature  des  stations  aero- 
nautiques  et  d'a&ronef. 

III.  Nomenclature  des  stations  effectu- 

ant  des  services  sp6ciaux. 

IV.  Nomenclature   des   stations   fixes 

(Index  a  la  liste  des  frequences 
pour  les  stations  fixes  en  service). 
V.  Nomenclature    des    stations    de 
radiodiffusion. 

pas]  (2)  £>ans  jes  nomenclatures  I,  II  et 
III,  chaque  categoric  de  stations  est 
rang6e  dans  une  section  speciale. 
p34]  §  3.  La  forme  a  donner  aux  diffe- 
rentes  nomenclatures  et  &  la  liste  des  fr6- 
quences  est  indiquee  a  1'appendice  6. 
Les  renseignements  d6taill6s  sur  1'etablisse- 
ment  de  ces  documents  sont  donnes  dans 
les  prefaces,  dans  I'en-t6te  des  colonnes  et 
dans  les  annotations  desdits  documents. 
P35]  §4.  Les  administrations  notifient 
une  fois  par  mois  au  Bureau  de  1'Union,  au 
moyen  de  formules  identiques  a  celles 
donnees  par  1'appendice  6,  les  additions, 
modifications  et  suppressions  a  apporter 
aux  documents  susvises. 
P36]  §  5.  (i)  La  nomenclature  des  sta- 
tions cdtieres  et  de  navire  ainsi  que  la 
nomenclature  des  stations  adronautiques 
et  d'a6ronef  sont  r6editees  tous  les  six 
mois  sans  supplement  entre  deux  r66di- 
tions.  En  ce  qui  concerne  la  nomencla- 
ture des  stations  effectuant  des  services 
spedaux  et  la  nomenclature  des  stations 
de  radiodiffusion,  le  Bureau  de  1'Union 
decide  a  quels  intervalles  elles  doivent 
£tre  reeditees. 

p37]  (2)  Un  supplement  recapitulatif  est 
public  tous  les  3  mois  pour  la  nomencla- 
ture des  stations  effectuant  des  services 
speciaux  et  tous  les  6  mois  pour  la  nomen- 
clature des  stations  de  radiodiffusion. 
P38]  (3)  La  liste  des  frequences  et  la 
nomenclature  des  stations  fixes  qui  con- 
stitue  un  index  a  la  liste  des  frequences, 
pour  les  stations  fixes  mises  en  service, 
sont  reeditees  s£par6ment  chaque  annee. 
Elles  sont  tenues  &  jour  au  moyen  de 
supplements  mensuels  6dit6s  6galement 
separement. 

p39]  §  6.  (i)  Les  noms  des  stations 
c6tieres  et  aeronautiques  sont  suivis 
respectivement  des  mots  RADIO  et 
AERADIO. 

p40]     (2)  Les  noms  des  stations  radio- 
goniometriques  et  des  radiophares  sont 
suivis  respectivement  des  mots  GONIO  et 
PHARE. 
p41]     §  7.  L'appendice  7  contient  les  no- 


156 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


tations  employees  dans  les  documents 
pour  indiquer  la  nature  et  P6tendue  du 
service  des  stations. 

[242]  §  8.  Les  documents  de  service  dont 
les  stations  mobiles  doivent  £tre  pourvues 
sont  enumeres  dans  Fappendice  8. 

ARTICLE  16. — Procedure  generale  radio- 
telegraphique  dans  le  service  mobile l,2 
p43]  §  i  (l)  Dans  le  service  mobile,  la 
procedure  d6taille"e  ci-apres  est  obliga- 
toire,  sauf  dans  le  cas  d'appel  ou  de  trafic 
de  dtoesse  auquel  sont  applicables  les 
dispositions  de  1'article  22. 
[244]  (2)  Pour  l'£change  des  radiocom- 
munications,  les  stations  du  service  mobile 
utilisent  les  abr&viations  vis6es  £  1'ap- 
pendice  9. 

[245]  §  2.  (i)  Avant  d'emettre,  toute  sta- 
tion doit  s'assurer  qu'elle  ne  produira  pas 
un  brouillage  nuisible  aux  transmissions 
s'effectuant  dans  son  rayon  d 'action;  si  un 
tel  brouillage  est  probable,  la  station  at- 
tend le  premier  arrest  de  la  transmission 
qu'elle  pourrait  troubler. 
[246]  (2)  Toutefois,  m£me  si,  en  opeYant 
ainsi,  1'^mission  de  cette  station  vient  & 
brouiller  une  transmission  radio61ectrique 
d6j£  en  cours,  on  appliquera  les  regies 
suivantes: 

[247]  a)  Dans  la  zone  de  communication 
(Tune  station  terrestre  ouverte  au  service 
de  la  correspondance  publique  ou  d'une 
station  a6ronautique  quelconque,  la  sta- 
tion dont  remission  produit  le  brouillage 
doit  cesser  d'6mettre  4  la  premiere  de- 
mande de  la  station  terrestre  ou  a6ro- 
nautique  pr6cit6e. 

p48]  6)  Dans  le  cas  ou  une  transmission 
radioelectrique  d£j£  en  cours  entre  deux 
navires  vient  &  £tre  brouill£e  par  une 
Emission  d'un  autre  navire,  ce  dernier  doit 
cesser  d'&nettre  &  la  premiere  demande  de 
1'un  quelconque  des  deux  autres. 
p49]  c)  La  station  qui  demande  cette 
cessation  doit  indiquer  la  dur£e  approx- 
imative de  1'attente  impos6e  &  la  station 
dont  elle  suspend  1'emission. 
[2SO]  §  3-  Les  radiotelegrammes  de  toute 
nature  transmis  par  les  stations  de  navire 
sont  numerates  par  s6ries  quotidiennes  en 
donnant  le  numero  I  au  premier  radio- 
telegramme  transmis  chaque  jour  £  chaque 
station  terrestre  diffeYente. 

*  This  procedure  shall  be  applicable  to  short  waves  so  far  as  possible. 

*  The  provisions  of  §§  2  and  8  shall  be  applicable  to  radiotelephone  transmissions  of  the  mobile 
service. 

1  Cette  procedure  est  applicable  aux  ondes  courtes,  dans  la  mesure  du  possible, 
a  Les  dispositions  des  §§  2  et  8  sont  applicables  aux  transmissions  radiotelephoniques  du  service . 
mobile. 


bols  used  in  the  documents  to  indicate  the 

nature  and  the  scope  of  the  service  of 

stations. 

[242]     §  8.  The    service   documents   with 

which  mobile  stations  must  be  provided 

are  listed  in  appendix  8. 

ARTICLE  16. — General  Radiotelegraph  Pro- 

cedure  in  the  Mobile  Service  V 
P43]     §  I-  (i)  In  the  mobile  service,  the 
following    detailed    procedure    shall    be 
obligatory  except  in  the  case  of  distress 
call  or  traffic  to  which  the  provisions  of 
article  22  shall  apply. 
[244]     (2)  For  the  exchange  of  radio  com- 
munications, stations  of  the  mobile  service 
shall  use  the  abbreviations  given  in  ap- 
pendix 9. 

p46]  §  2.  (i)  Before  transmitting,  any 
station  must  make  sure  that  it  will  not 
produce  harmful  interference  with  the 
transmissions  being  made  within  its 
range;  if  such  interference  is  likely,  the 
station  shall  await  the  first  stop  in  the 
transmission  which  it  may  disturb. 
p46]  (2)  If  however,  even  after  taking 
these  precautions,  the  emissions  of  this 
station  should  cause  interference  with  a 
radio  transmission  already  in  progress,  the 
following  rules  shall  be  applied: 
[247]  (o)  in  the  communication  zone  of  a 
land  station  open  to  the  public  corre- 
spondence service  or  of  any  aeronautical 
station,  the  station  whose  emission  pro- 
duces the  interference  must  cease  trans- 
mitting at  the  first  request  of  the  above- 
mentioned  land  or  aeronautical  station. 

p48]  .  (6)  In  the  case  where  a  radio  trans- 
mission already  in  progress  between  two 
ships  happens  to  be  interfered  with  by  an 
emission  from  another  ship,  the  latter 
must  cease  transmitting  at  the  first  re- 
quest of  either  of  the  other  two. 
P49]  (c)  The  station  requesting  this  ces- 
sation must  indicate  the  approximate 
length  of  the  wait  imposed  upon  the  sta- 
tion whose  emission  it  is  suspending. 
P50]  §3-  Radiotelegrams  of  all  kinds 
transmitted  by  ship  stations  shall  be  num- 
bered in  daily  series,  assigning  number  I 
to  the  first  radiotelegram  transmitted  each 
day  to  each  land  station  separately. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


157 


[2S1]      §  4.   CALLING  A  STATION  AND  SIGNALS 
PREPARATORY  TO  TRAFFIC 

[252]  (i)  Method  of  calling 

The  call  shall  consist  of  the  following: 

not  more  than  three  times  the  call 
signal  of  the  station  called;  the 
word  DE; 

not  more  than  three  times  the  call 
signal  of  the  calling  station. 

pas]  (2)  Wave  to  be  used  for  the  call  and 
for  preparatory  signals 

To  make  the  call  as  well  as  to  transmit 
preparatory  signals  the  calling  station 
shall  use  the  wave  on  which  the  station 
called  is  listening. 

[254]  (.j)  Indication  of  the  wave  to  be  used 
for  the  traffic 

[2B5]  The  call,  as  indicated  in  subpara- 
graph  (i)  above,  must  be  followed  by  the 
regulatory  abbreviation  indicating  the 
frequency  and/or  the  type  of  wave  which 
the  calling  station  proposes  to  use  to 
transmit  its  traffic. 

[256]  When,  as  an  exception  to  this  rule, 
the  call  is  not  followed  by  the  indica- 
tion of  the  wave  to  be  used  for  the 
traffic: 

[257]  (a)  if  the  calling  station  is  a  land 
station: 

it  shall  mean  that  this  station  proposes 
to  use  its  normal  working-wave,  as  in- 
dicated in  the  nomenclature,  for  the 
traffic. 

[268]  (b)  if  the  calling  station  is  a 
mobile  station: 

it  shall  mean  that  the  wave  to  be  used 
for  the  traffic  is  to  be  chosen  by  the  sta- 
tion called. 

P69]  (4)  Indication,  when  required,  of  the 
number  of  telegrams  or  of 
transmission  by  series 

peo]  When  the  calling  station  has  more 
than  one  telegram  to  transmit  to  the  sta- 
tion called,  the  preceding  preparatory 
signals  shall  be  followed  by  the  regulatory 
abbreviation  and  by  the  figure  specifying 
the  number  of  these  telegrams, 
pei]  Furthermore,  when  the  calling  sta- 
tion wishes  to  transmit  these  telegrams  in 
series,  it  shall  so  indicate  by  adding  the 
regulatory  abbreviation  requesting  the 
consent  of  the  station  called. 


P51]      §4.  APPEL   D'UNE    STATION   ET   SIG- 
NAUX PREPARATOIRES  AU  TRAFIC 

P62]  (i)  Formule  d'appel 

L'appel  est  constitud  comme  suit: 

trois  fois,  au  plus,  1'mdicatif  d'appel 
de  la  station  appelee;  le  mot  DE; 

trois  fois,  au  plus,  1'indicatif  d'appel 
de  la  station  appelante. 

p53]  (2)  Ond e  d,  utiliser  pour  I'appel  et  les 
signaux  preparatoires 

Pour  faire  I'appel  ainsi  que  pour  trans- 
mettre les  signaux  preparatoires,  la  station 
appelante  utilise  I'onde  sur  laquelle  veille 
la  station  appelee. 

P54]  (3)  Indication  de  I'onde  a  utiliser 
pour  le  trafic 

P55]  L'appel,  tel  qu'il  est  indique  & 
1'alinea  (i)  ci-avant,  doit  £tre  suivi  de 
Fabreviation  reglementaire  indiquant  la 
frequence  et/ou  le  type  d'onde  que  la 
station  appelante  se  propose  d 'utiliser 
pour  transmettre  son  trafic. 
P56]  Lorsque,  par  exception  a  cette 
regie,  Tappel  n'est  pas  suivi  de  1'indication 
de  I'onde  £  utiliser  pour  le  trafic: 

p57]        a)  si  la  station  appelante  est  une 

station  terrestre: 

c'est  que  cette  station  se  propose  d'utili- 
ser  pour  le  trafic  son  onde  normale  de 
travail,  indique"e  dans  la  nomenclature; 

pss]        ft)  ^  la  station  appelante  est  une 

station  mobile: 

c'est  que  Tonde  &  utiliser  pour  le  trafic 
est  £  choisir  par  la  station  appelee. 

P59]  (4)  Indication  iventuelle  du  nombre 
de  radiotelegrammes  ou  de  la 
transmission  par  serie 

p60]  Lorsque  la  station  appelante  a  plus 
d'un  radioteiegramme  &  transmettre  & 
la  station  appelee,  les  signaux  prepara- 
tpires  precedents  sont  suivis  de  1'abr Avia- 
tion reglementaire  et  du  chiffre  spedfiant 
le  nombre  de  ces  radiotelegrammes. 
p61]  En  outre,  lorsque  la  station  ap- 
pelante desire  transmettre  ces  radio- 
teiegrammes  par  serie,  elle  1'indique  en 
ajoutant  1'abreviation  reglementaire  pour 
emander  le  consentement  de  la  stationd 
appelee. 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


P62]      §  5-  REPLY   TO   CALLS   AND   SIGNALS 
PREPARATORY  TO  TRAFFIC 

[2»]        (i)  Method  of  reply  to  calls 

The  reply  to  calls  shall  consist  of  the 
following: 

not  more  than  three  times  the  call 

signal  of  the  calling  station; 
the  word  DE; 
the  call  signal  of  the  station  called. 

[»M]  (2)  Wave  for  reply 

[285]  Xo  transmit  the  reply  to  calls  and  to 
preparatory  signals,  the  station  called 
shall  use  the  wave  on  which  the  calling 
station  must  listen. 

[2M]  As  an  exception  to  this  rule,  when  a 
mobile  station  calls  a  coast  station  on  the 
wave  143  kc  (2,100  m),  the  coast  station 
shall  transmit  the  reply  to  the  calls  on  its 
normal  working-wave  of  the  bands  be- 
tween 100  and  160  kc  (3,000  and  1,875 
m),  as  indicated  in  the  nomenclature. 

per]     (3)   Understanding  as  to  the  wave  to 
be  used  for  the  traffic 

[268]  A.  If  the  station  called  has  an  un- 
derstanding with  the  calling  station,  it 
shall  transmit: 

(a)  the  reply  to  the  call ; 

(&)  the  regulatory  abbreviation  indi- 
cating that  from  that  time  on  it  is  listen- 
ing on  the  frequency  and/or  the  type  of 
wave  announced  by  the  calling  station; 

(c)  in  some  cases,  the  indications  men- 
tioned in  subparagraph  (4) ; 

(d)  the  letter  K,  if  the  station  called 
is  ready  to  receive  the  traffic  of  the  calling 
station; 

(e)  in  certain  cases,  if  it  is  useful,  the 
regulatory  abbreviation  and  the  figure 
indicating   the   strength   of   the  signals 
received.     (See  appendix  10.) 

269]  B.  If  the  station  has  no  preliminary 
understanding,  or  if  it  must  choose  the 
wave  to  be  used  for  the  traffic,  it  shall 
transmit: 

(a)  the  reply  to  the  call; 

(b)  the  regulatory  abbreviation  indi- 
cating the  frequency  and/or  the  type  of 
wave  requested;* 


[282]      §  5-  R&PONSE   AUX   APPELS   ET   SIG- 
NAUX  PR&PARATOIRES  AU  TRAFIC 

[26S]  (i)  Formule  de  reponse  aux  appels 

La  reponse  aux  appels  est  constitute 
comme  suit: 

trois  fois,  au  plus,  1'indicatif  d'appel 

de  la  station  appelante ; 
le  mot  DE; 

Tindicatif    d'appel    de    la    station 
appe!6e. 

ps*]  (2)  Qnde  de  reponse 

[265]  Pour  transrnettre  la  r£ponse  aux 
appels  et  aux  signaux  preparatoires,  la 
station  appelee  emploie  1'onde  sur  laquelle 
doit  veiller  la  station  appelante. 
[266]  Par  exception  &  cette  regie,  quand 
une  station  mobile  appelle  une  station 
c6ti&re  sur  1'onde  de  143  kc/s  (2  100  m),  la 
station  cdtiere  transmet  la  reponse  aux 
appels  sur  son  onde  normale  de  travail  des 
bandes  de  100  &  160  kc/s  (3  ooo  a  I  875 
m),  telle  qu'elle  est  indiqu6e  dans  la 
nomenclature. 

per]     (3)  Accord  sur  Vonde  a  utilizer  pour 
le  trafic 

[268]  A.  Si  la  station  appelee  est  d'accord 
avec  la  station  appelante,  elle  transmet: 

a)  la  reponse  a  Tappel ; 

6)  1'abreviation  reglementaire  indiquant 
qu'a  partir  de  ce  moment  elle  ecoute  sur 
la  frequence  et/ou  le  type  d'onde  an- 
nonces  par  la  station  appelante; 

c)  eventuellement  les  indications  pr6- 
vues  a  Talinea  (4) ; 

d)  la  lettre  K  si  la  station  appelee  est 
pr6te  a  recevoir  le  trafic  de  la  station 
appelante; 

e)  eventuellement,  si  c'est  utile,  I'abr6- 
viation  reglementaire  et  le  chiifre  indi- 
quant la  force  des  signaux  regus  (voir 
1'appendice  10). 

[26£>]  B.  Si  la  station  n'est  pas  d'accord, 
ou  si  elle  doit  choisir  1'onde  £  utiliser  pour 
le  trafic,  elle  transmet: 

a)  la  reponse  a  1'appel ; 

b)  Fabreviation     reglementaire     indi- 
quant la  frequence  et/ou  le  type  d'onde 
demandes;* 


*  In  the  case  where  the  choice  of  the  wave  to  be  used  for  the  traffic  falls  to  the  station  called,  and 
if,  in  exceptional  cases,  the  latter  station  does  not  give  the  corresponding  indication,  the  traffic 
shall  take  place  on  the  wave  used  for  the  call. 

*  Dans  le  cas  ou  le  choix  de  1'onde  a  utiliser  pour  le  trafic  revient  a  la  station  appelee,  et  sif  ex- 
ceptionnellement,  cette  dernidre  station  ne  donne  pas  1'indication  correspondante,  le  trafic  a  lieu 
sur  1'onde  utilisee  pour  1'appel. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


159 


(c)  in  some  cases,  the  indications  men- 
tioned in  subparagraph  (4), 
[270]  When  an  agreement  is  reached  on 
the  wave  which  the  calling  station  must 
use  for  its  traffic,  the  station  called  shall 
transmit  the  letter  K  after  the  indications 
contained  in  its  reply. 

p71]     (4)  Reply  to  the  request  for  transmis- 
sion by  series 

p72]  The  station  called,  replying  to  a 
calling  station  which  has  asked  to  trans- 
mit its  telegrams  in  series  [§  4  (4)],  shall 
indicate,  by  means  of  the  regulatory  ab- 
breviation, whether  it  refuses  or  accepts 
and,  in  the  latter  case,  if  need  be,  shall 
specify  the  number  of  radiotelegrams 
which  it  is  ready  to  receive  in  one  series. 


P73]        (5)  Difficulties  in  reception 

p74]  (a)  If  the  station  called  is  prevented 
from  receiving,  it  shall  reply  to  the  call  as 
indicated  in  subparagraph  (3)  above,  but 
it  shall  replace  the  letter  K  by  the  signal 
•«—••*  (wait),  followed  by  a  number 
indicating  in  minutes  the  probable  dura- 
tion of  the  wait.  If  this  probable  dura- 
tion exceeds  10  minutes,  (5  minutes  in  the 
aeronautical  mobile  service),  a  reason 
must  be  given  therefor. 
[275]  (j)  When  a  station  receives  a  call 
without  being  certain  that  this  call  is  in- 
tended for  it,  it  must  not  reply  before  the 
call  has  been  repeated  and  understood. 
When,  on  the  other  hand,  a  station  re- 
ceives a  call  which  is  intended  for  it,  but  is 
doubtful  about  the  call  signal  of  the  calling 
station,  it  must  reply  immediately,  using 
the  regulatory  abbreviation  instead  of  the 
call  signal  of  the  latter  station. 


P78]  §  6.   ROUTING  OF  TRAFFIC 

[277]  (j)  Traffic  wave 

[m]  (0)  Each  station  of  the  mobile  serv- 
ice shall  transmit  its  traffic  by  using,  in 
principle,  one  of  its  working-waves,  as 
they  are  indicated  in  the  nomenclature  for 
the  band  in  which  the  call  was  made. 

P79]  (b)  Outside  of  its  normal  working- 
wave  which  is  printed  in  boldface  type  in 
the  nomenclature,  each  station  may  use 
additional  waves  of  the  same  band,  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  provisions  of  article  19 
§  i  do). 


c)  6ventuellement  les  indications  pre- 
vues  a  Talin6a  (4). 

P70]  Lorsque  1'accord  est  realise  sur 
1'onde  que  devra  employer  la  station 
appelante  pour  son  trafic,  la  station 
appe!6e  transmet  la  lettre  K  a  la  suite  des 
indications  contenues  dans  sa  r£ponse. 

p71]     (4)  Reponse  a  la  demande  de  trans- 
mission par  serie 

[272]  ^  La  station  appelee,  r£pondant  a  une 
station  appelante  qui  a  demande  a  trans- 
mettre  ses  radiot61£grammes  par  s6rie 
[§  4,  (4)],  indique,  au  moyen  de  1'abrevia- 
tion  r6glementaire,  son  refus  ou  son  ac- 
ceptation et,  dans  ce  dernier  cas,  s'il  y  a 
lieu,  elle  specific  le  nombre  des  radioteld- 
gramrnes  qu'elle  est  pr6te  a  recevoir  en 
une  s6rie. 

P73]          (5)  Difficult^  de  reception 

p74]  a)  Si  la  station  appelee  est  emp£ch6e 
de  recevoir,  elle  repond  a  1'appel  comme  il 
est  indique  a  1'alinea  (3)  ci-avant,  mais 
elle  remplace  la  lettre  K  par  le  signal 
.—»«•.  (attente),  suivi  d'un  nombre 
indiquant  en  minutes  la  duree  probable  de 
1'attente.  Si  cette  duree  probable  excede 
10  minutes  (5  minutes  dans  le  service 
mobile  de  I'a&ronautique),  1'attente  doit 
£tre  motivee. 

P7fi]  &)  Lorsqu'une  station  recoit  un 
appel  sans  £tre  certaine  que  cet  appel  lui 
est  destin£,  elle  ne  doit  pas  r6pondre  avant 
que  1'appel  n'ait  6te  r6pete  et  compris. 
Lorsque,  par  ailleurs,  une  station  recpit 
un  appel  qui  lui  est  destin£,  mais  a  des 
doutes  sur  1'indicatif  d 'appel  de  la  station 
appelante,  elle  doit  repondre  imm£diate- 
ment  en  utilisant  1'abreviation  regle- 
mentaire  en  lieu  et  place  de  1'indicatif 
d'appel  de  cette  derniere  station. 

P76]      §6.  ACHEMINEMENT  DU  TRAFIC 

P77]  (i)  Ondedetrafic 

p78]  a)  Chaque  station  du  service  mobile 
transmet  son  trafic  en  employant,  en 
principe,  une  de  ses  ondes  de  travail, 
telles  qu'elles  sont  indiquees  dans  la 
nomenclature,  pour  la  bande  dans  laquelle 
a  eu  lieu  1'appel. 

p79]  b)  En  dehors  de  son  onde  normale  de 
travail,  imprimee  en  caracteres  gras  dans 
la  nomenclature,  chaque  station  peut 
employer  des  ondes  supplementaires  de  la 
m£me  bande,  conform6ment  aux  disposi- 
tions de  1'article  19,  §  I,  (10). 


i6o 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


PSD]  (c)  Tne  use  of  calling  waves  for 
traffic  shall  be  governed  by  article  19. 

[28X]          (2)  Long  radiotelegrams 

p82]  (a)  In  principle,  any  radio  telegram 
containing  more  than  100  words  shall  be 
considered  as  forming  a  series  or  shall  end 
a  series  in  progress. 

[283]  (b)  As  a  general  rule,  long  radio- 
telegrams,  both  in  plain  language  and  in 
code  or  cipher  language,  shall  be  trans- 
mitted in  sections,  each  section  containing 
50  words  in  the  case  of  plain  language,  and 
20  words  or  groups  in  the  case  of  code  or 
cipher. 

p84]  (c)  At  the  end  of  each  section  the 
signal  ••——*•  (?)  meaning  "have  you 
received  the  radiotelegram  correctly  up  to 
this  point?"  shall  be  transmitted.  If  the 
section  has  been  correctly  received,  the 
receiving  station  shall  reply  by  the  letter 
K  and  the  transmission  of  the  radiotele- 
gram shall  be  continued. 

[285]          (3)  Suspension  of  traffic 

When  a  station  of  the  mobile  service 
transmits  on  a  working-wave  of  a  land 
station  and  thus  causes  interference  with 
the  said  land  station,  it  must  suspend  its 
work  at  the  request  of  the  latter. 


[286]    §  ^  END  OF  TRAFFIC  AND  OF  WORK 

t287]        (i)  Signal  for  the  end  of  trans- 
mission 

pas]  (a)  The  transmission  of  a  radio* 
telegram  shall  be  ended  by  the  signal 
••"••  ••"""•  (end  of  transmission),  followed 
by  the  call  signal  of  the  transmitting 
station  and  the  letter  K. 
p89]  (b)  In  the  case  of  transmission  by 
series,  the  end  of  each  radiotelegram  shall 
be  indicated  by  the  signal  •«—•—-•  and 
the  end  of  the  series  by  the  call  signal  of 
the  transmitting  station  and  the  letter  K. 

[290]     (2)  Acknowledgment  of  receipt 

p91]  (a)  The  acknowledgment  of  receipt 
of  a  radiotelegram  shall  be  given  by  trans- 
mitting the  letter  R,  followed  by  the 
number  of  the  radiotelegram;  this  ac- 
knowledgment of  receipt  shall  be  preceded 
by  the  following  formula:  call  signal  of  the 
station  which  has  transmitted,  word  DE, 
call  signal  of  the  station  which  has  re- 
ceived. 


pso]  c)  L'emploi  des  ondes  d'appel  pour 
le  trafic  est  reglement6  par  1'article  19. 

p81]        (2)  Longs  radiotelegrammes 

p82]  a)  En  principe,  tout  radiotele- 
gramme  contenant  plus  de  100  mots  est 
consider^  comme  formant  une  serie,  ou 
met  fin  a  la  serie  en  cours. 
p83]  b)  En  regie  g6n6rale,  les  longs  radio- 
telegrammes, tant  ceux  en  langage  clair 
que  ceux  en  langage  convenu  ou  chififr6, 
sont  transmis  par  tranches,  chaque 
tranche  contenant  50  mots  dans  le  cas  du 
langage  clair  et  20  mots  ou  groupes 
lorsqu'il  s'agit  du  langage  convenu  ou 
chiffre. 

p84]  c)  A  la  fin  de  chaque  tranche,  le 
signal  ••—•—••  (?)  signifiant  "avez- 
vous  bien  regu  le  radiotelegrarnme  jusqu' 
ici?"  est  transmis.  Si  la  tranche  a  6t6 
correctment  recue,  la  station  receptrice 
repond  par  la  lettre  K  et  la  transmission 
du  radiotelegramme  est  poursuivie. 


P863          (3)  Suspension  du  trafic 

Quand  une  station  du  service  mobile 
transmet  sur  une  onde  de  travail  d'une 
station  terrestre  et  cause  ainsi  du  brouil- 
lage  a  ladite  station  terrestre,  elle  doit 
suspendre  son  travail  a  la  demande  de 
cette  derniere. 

[286]      §  7.  FIN  DU  TRAFIC  ET  DXJ  TRAVAIL 

P87]   (l)  Signal  defin  de  transmission 

P8S]  a)  La  transmission  d'un  radiotele- 
gramme  se  termine  par  le  signal  •—••—* 
(fin  de  transmission),  suivi  de  1'indicatif 
d'appel  de  la  station  transmettrice  et  de 
la  lettre  K. 

P89]  b)  Dans  le  cas  de  transmission  par 
serie,  la  fin  de  chaque  radiotelegramme 
est  indiqu^e  par  le  signal  •-«••—•*  et  la 
fin  de  la  serie  par  1'indicatif  d'appel  de  la 
station  transmettrice  et  la  lettre  K. 

p90]  (2)  Accuse  de  reception 

P91]^  a)  L'accus6  de  reception  d'un 
radiot61egramme  est  donn6  en  transmet- 
tant  la  lettre  R,  suivie  du  num6ro  du 
radiotelegramme;  cet  accus6  de  reception 
est  pr6c6d6  de  la  formule  ci-apr^s:  indi- 
catif  d'appel  de  la  station  qui  a  transmis, 
mot  DE,  indicatif  d'appel  de  la  station 
qui  a  recu. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


[292]  (&)  The  acknowledgment  of  receipt 
of  a  series  of  radiotelegrams  shall  be  given 
by  transmitting  the  letter  R  followed  by 
the  number  of  the  last  radiotelegram  re- 
ceived. This  acknowledgment  of  receipt 
shall  be  preceded  by  the  above  formula. 
p93]  (c)  The  acknowledgment  of  receipt 
shall  be  made  by  the  receiving  station  on 
the  same  wave  as  for  the  reply  to  the  call 
[see  §  5  (2)  above]. 


[294] 


(3)  End  of  work 


[295]  (0)  xhe  end  of  work  between  two 
stations  shall  be  indicated  by  each  of 
them  by  means  of  the  signal  *••—••— 
(end  of  work),  followed  by  its  own  call 
signal. 

p96]  (&)  For  these  signals,  the  sending 
station  shall  continue  to  use  the  traffic 
wave  and  the  receiving  station  the  wave 
for  the  reply  to  the  call. 
p97]  (c)  The  signal  •••• —  —  (end  of 
work)  shall  also  be  used  when  the  trans- 
mission of  radiotelegrams  of  general  in- 
formation, meteorological  information, 
and  general  safety  warnings  is  ended  and 
the  transmission  ends  in  the  long-distance 
radio-communication  service  with  de- 
ferred acknowledgment  of  receipt  or 
without  acknowledgment  of  receipt. 


[298]  §  8.   DURATION  OF  WORK 

[299]     (x)  (0,)  in  no  case,  in  the  maritime 

mobile  service,  must  the  work  on  500  kc 

(600  m)  exceed  10  minutes. 

[80°]     (&)  In  no  case,  in  the  aerial  mobile 

service,  must  the  work  on  333  kc  (900  m) 

exceed  5  minutes. 

[*°l]     (2)  On  frequencies  other  than  those 

of  500  kc  (600  m)  and  333  kc  (900  m)  the 

duration  of  the  periods  of  work  shall  be 

determined : 

[302]     (a)  between  a  land  station  and  a 

mobile  station,  by  the  land  station, 

[303]     (&)  between  mobile  stations,  by  the 

receiving  station. 

[304]  §9.  TESTS 

When  it  is  necessary  to  make  test  sig- 
nals, either  for  the  adjustment  of  a  trans- 
mitter before  transmitting  the  call,  or  for 
the  adjustment  of  a  receiver,  these  signals 
must  not  last  more  than  10  seconds,  and 
they  must  be  composed  of  a  series  of  V's 
followed  by  the  call  signal  of  the  station 
transmitting  for  the  tests. 


P92]  b)  L'accus6  de  reception  d'une 
seVie  de  radiote"legrammes  est  donn6  en 
transmettant  la  lettre  R  suivie  du  num6ro 
du  dernier  radiotelegramme  recu.  Get 
accus6  de  reception  est  pr£c6d6  de  la 
formule  ci-avant. 

p93]  c)  L'accus6  de  reception  est  fait 
par  la  station  receptrice  sur  la  m£me 
onde  que  pour  la  response  a  Tappel  [voir 
§  5,  (2)  ci-avant]. 

P94]  (3)  Fin  du  travail 

p96]  a)  La  fin  du  travail  entre  deux 
stations  est  indiquee  par  chacune  d'elles 
au  moyen  du  signal  •••—••—  (fin  du  tra- 
vail), suivi  de  son  propre  indicatif  d'appel. 

P96]  5)  Pour  ces  signaux,  la  station 
knettrice  continue  i  utiliser  Tonde  de 
trafic  et  la  station  receptrice  1'onde  de 
r£ponse  a  1'appel. 

p97]  c)  Le  signal  •••— —  (fin  du 
travail)  est  aussi  utilis6  lorsque  la  trans- 
mission des  radio t616grammes  d 'informa- 
tion g6ne"rale,  des  informations  m6teoro- 
logiques  et  des  avis  g6n&raux  de  s6curit6 
se  termine  et  que  la  transmission  se 
termine  dans  le  service  de  radiocommu- 
nication  £  grande  distance  avec  accus6 
de  reception  diff6r6  ou  sans  accus6  de 
reception. 

P98]  §  8.  DUR&E  DU  TRAVAIL 

p99]     (i)  a)  En  aucun  cas,  dans  le  service 
mobile  maritime,  le  travail  sur  500  kc/s 
(600  m)  ne  doit  d6passer  dix  minutes.  ^ 
[300]    5)  En  aucun  cas,  dans  le  service 
mobile  aerien,  le  travail  sur  333  kc/s 
(900  m)  ne  doit  depasser  cinq  minutes. 
[301]     (2)  Sur  les  frequences  autres  que 
celles  de  500  kc/s  (600  m)  et  333  kc/s 
(900  m),  la  dur6e  des  p£riodes  de  travail 
est  d6terminee: 

[302]    a)  entre  station  terrestre  et  station 
mobile,  par  la  station  terrestre, 
[808]    6)  entre  stations  mobiles,   par  la 
station  receptrice. 

[804]  §9.  ESSAIS 

Lorsqu'il  est  necessaire  de  faire  des 
signaux  d'essais,  soit  pour  le  r6glage  d'un 
dmetteur  avant  de  transmettre  1'appel, 
spit  pour  le  r6glage  d'un  r6cepteur,  ces 
signaux  ne  doivent  pas  durer  plus  de  10 
secondes  et  ils  doivent  §tre  constitu6s 
par  une  s£rie  de  WV  suivie  de  Findicatif 
d'appel  de  la  station  qui  6met  pour 
essais. 


162 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


ARTICLE  17. — General  Call  "to  all11 

[30B]  §  i.  Two  types  of  call  signals  "to 
all"  shall  be  recognized: 

1.  the  CQ  call  followed  by  the 
letter  K  (see  §§2  and  3); 

2.  the  CQ  call  not  followed  by 
the  letter  K  (see  §  4). 

[306]  §  2.  Stations  desiring  to  enter  into 
communication  with  stations  of  the  mobile 
service,  without  however,  knowing  the 
names  of  the  mobile  stations  within  their 
range,  can  use  the  inquiry  signal  CQ,  in 
place  of  the  call  signal  of  the  station  called, 
in  the  calling  formula,  this  formula  being 
followed  by  the  letter  K  (general  call  to  all 
mobile  stations,  with  request  for  reply). 


[m]  §  3-  In  regions  where  traffic  is 
heavy,  the  use  of  the  CQ  call  followed  by 
the  letter  K  shall  be  forbidden,  except  in 
combination  with  urgent  signals. 
[308]  §  4.  The  CQ  call  not  followed^  by 
the  letter  K  (general  call  to  all  stations 
without  request  for  reply)  shall  be  used 
before  transmission  of  information  of  all 
kinds  intended  to  be  read  or  used  by  any- 
one who  can  receive  it. 


ARTICLE  18. — Catting 
[joj]  §  Im  (x)  AS  a  general  rule,  it  shall 
devolve  upon  the  mobile  station  to  estab- 
lish communication  with  the  land  station. 
It  may  call  the  land  station  for  this  pur- 
pose only  after  having  arrived  within  the 
range  of  the  latter. 

[3io]  (2)  However,  a  land  station  having 
traffic  for  a  mobile  station  which  has  not 
indicated  its  presence  may  call  the  latter  if 
it  has  reason  to  assume  that  the  said  mo- 
bile station  is  within  its  range  and  is 
listening. 

[8U]  §  2.  (i)  Furthermore,  land  stations 
may  transmit  their  calls  in  the  form  of 
"lists  of  calls"  consisting  of  the  call  sig- 
nals of  all  mobile  stations  for  which  they 
have  traffic  on  hand,  at  definite  intervals, 
at  least  2  hours  apart,  which  have  been 
established  by  agreements  between  the 
governments  concerned.  Land  stations 
which  transmit  their  calls  on  the  wave  of 
500  kc  (600  m)  shall  transmit  them  in  the 
form  of  "lists  of  calls'1,  in  alphabetical 
order,  to  include  only  the  call  signals  of 
mobile  stations  for  which  they  have  traffic 
on  hand  and  which  are  within  their  range. 


ARTICLE  17. — Appel  general  "d  tons" 

[305]     §  i.  Deux  types  de  signaux  d'appels 
"a  tous"  sont  reconnus: 

i°  appel  CQ  suivi  de  la  lettre  K 

(voir  §§2et3); 
2°  appel  CQ  non  suivi  de  la 

lettre  K  (voir  §4). 

[306]  §  2.  Les  stations  qui  d6sirent  entrer 
en  communication  avec  des  stations  du 
service  mobile,  sans  toutefpis  connaitre 
le  nom  de  celles  de  ces  stations  qui  sont 
dans  leur  rayon  d'action,  peuvent  em- 
ployer le  signal  de  recherche  CQ,  rem- 
placant  1'indicatif  de  la  station  appele*e 
dans  la  fprmule  d'appel,  cette  formule 
<§tant  suivie  de  la  lettre  K  (appel  g<§ne>al  & 
toutes  les  stations  du  service  mobile,  avec 
demande  de  r6ponse). 
t307]  §  3-  Dans  les  regions  ou  le  trafic 
est  intense,  1'emploi  de  1 'appel  CQ  suivi  de 
la  lettre  K  est  interdit,  sauf  en  combi- 
naison  avec  des  signaux  d'urgence. 
[308]  §4.  L'appel  CQ  non  suivi  de  la 
lettre  K  (appel  general  £  toutes  les  sta- 
tions sans  demande  de  response)  est  em- 
ploye* avant  la  transmission  des  informa- 
tions de  tpute  nature  destinies  a  6tre 
lues  ou  utilises  par  quiconque  peut  les 
capter. 

ARTICLE  18. — Appels 

[809]  §i.  (i)  En  regie  g£n6rale,  il  in- 
combe  a  la  station  mobile  d'6tablir  la 
communication  avec  la  station  terrestre. 
Elle  ne  peut  appeler  la  station  terrestre 
dans  ce  but  qu'apres  §tre  arrivee  dans  le 
rayon  d'action  de  celle-ci. 
[aio]  (2)  Toutefois,  une  station  terrestre 
ayant  du  trafic  pour  une  station  mobile 
qui  ne  lui  a  pas  signale  sa  presence,  peut 
appeler  cette  station  si  elle  est  en  droit  de 
supposer  que  ladite  station  mobile  est  a 
sa  port£e  et  assure  1'ecoute. 
[3l1]  §  2.  (i)  En  outre,  les  stations  ter- 
restres  peuvent  transmettre  leurs  appels 
sous  forme  de  "listes  d'appels"  forme'es 
des  indicatifs  d'appel  de  toutes  les  stations 
mobiles  pour  lesquelles  elles  ont  du  trafic 
en  instance,  £  des  intervalles  determines, 
espace"s  d'au  moins  deux  heures,  ayant 
fait  Tobjet  d'accords  conclus  entre  les 
gouvernements  int£ress£s.  Les  stations 
terrestres  qui  £mettent  leurs  appels  sur 
1'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600  m)  les  trans- 
mettent  sous  forme  de  "listes  d'appels", 
par  ordre  alphab£tique,  en  y  insurant 
seulement  les  indicatifs  d'appel  de  ces 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


I63 


To  their  own  call  signal  they  shall  add  the 
abbreviations  to  indicate  the  working- 
wave  they  wish  to  use  in  the  transmission. 
Land  stations  which  use  continuous  waves 
outside  of  the  band  olf  365  to  515  kc  (822  to 
583  rn)  shall  transmit  the  call  signals  in 
the  order  which  is  most  convenient  for 
them. 


[3l2]  (2)  The  time  at  which  land  stations 
transmit  their  lists  of  calls,  as  well  as  the 
frequencies  and  types  of  waves  which  they 
use  for  this  purpose  must  be  indicated  in 
the  nomenclature. 

[313]  (3)  Mobile  stations  which,  during 
this  transmission,  hear  their  call  signal, 
must  answer  as  soon  as  they  can,  follow- 
ing, so  far  as  possible,  the  order  in  which 
they  were  called. 

[3H]  (4)  When  the  traffic  cannot  be  dis- 
posed of  immediately,  the  land  station 
shall  inform  each  mobile  station  concerned 
of  the  probable  time  at  which  the  work 
can  begin,  as  well  as  the  frequency  and  the 
type  of  wave  which  will  be  used  in  the 
work  with  it,  if  this  is  necessary. 

[315]  §  3-  When  a  land  station  receives 
calls  from  several  mobile  stations  at  prac- 
tically the  same  time,  it  shall  decide  as  to 
the  order  in  which  these  stations  may 
transmit  their  traffic  to  it,  its  decision 
being  based  only  on  the  necessity  for  per- 
mitting each  calling  station  to  exchange 
with  it  the  greatest  possible  number  of 
radiotelegrams. 

[816]  §  4-  (i)  When  communication  is 
first  established  with  a  land  station,  every 
mobile  station,  if  it  deems  it  advisable  on 
account  of  possible  confusion,  can  trans- 
mit its  name  spelled  out  as  it  appears  in 
the  nomenclature. 

[an]  (2)  The  land  station  can,  by  means 
of  the  abbreviation  PTR,  request  the 
mobile  station  to  give  it  the  following 
information: 

(a)  approximate  distance  in  nautical 
miles  and  bearing  with  reference  to  the 
land  station,  or  else  the  position  indicated 
by  latitude  and  longitude; 

(6)  next  port  of  call, 

[si8j  (3)  The  information  covered  by 
subparagraph  (2)  shall  be  furnished  by 
authorization  of  the  commander  or  the 
person  responsible  for  the  vehicle  carrying 


stations  mobiles  pour  lesquelles  elles  ont 
du  tranc  en  instance  et  qui  se  trouvent 
dans  leur  rayon  d'action.  Elles  ajoutent 
&  leur  propre  indicatif  d'appel  les  abrevia- 
tions  pour  1'indication  de  1'onde  de  travail 
dont  elles  veulent  faire  usage  pour  la 
transmission.  Les  stations  terrestres  qui 
utilisent  des  ondes  entretenues  en  dehors 
de  la  bande  de  365  £  515  kc/s  (822  &  583 
m)  transrnettent  les  indicatifs  d'appel  dans 
1'ordre  qui  leur  convient  le  mieux. 
[812]  (2)  L'heure  &  laquelle  les  stations 
terrestres  transrnettent  leur  liste  d'appels, 
ainsi  que  les  frequences  et  les  types  d'onde 
qu 'elles  utilisent  &  cette  fin  doivent  6tre 
mentionn£s  dans  la  nomenclature. 
[3l3]  (3)  Les  stations  mobiles  qui,  dans 
cette  transmission,  pergoivent  leur  indi- 
catif d'appel,  doivent  r6pondre,  aussit6t 
qu'elles  le  peuvent,  en  observant  entre 
elles,  autant  que  possible,  1'ordre  dans 
lequel  elles  ont  iti  appe!6es. 
[3H]  (4)  Lorsque  le  trafic  ne  peut  £tre 
6coul6  immediatement,  la  station  ter- 
restre  fait  connaitre  a  chaque  station 
mobile  int£ressee  1'heure  probable  a 
laquelle  le  travail  pourra  commencer 
ainsi  que,  si  cela  est  n6cessaire,  la  fr6- 
quence  et  le  type  d'onde  qui  seront  utilis6s 
pour  le  travail  avec  elle. 
t315]  §  3'  Quand  une  station  terrestre 
recoit,  pratiquement  en  m£me  temps,  des 
appels  de  plusieurs  stations  mobiles,  elle 
decide  de  1'ordre  dans  lequel  ces  stations 
pourront  lui  transmettre  leur  trafic,  sa 
decision  s'inspirant  uniquement  de  la 
n6cessite  de  permettre  £  chacune  des 
stations  appelantes  d'6changer  avec  elle  le 
plus  grand  nombre  possible  de  radio- 
tel6grammes. 

lm]  §  4-  (i)  Lors  du  premier  6tablisse- 
ment  de  communication  avec  une  station 
terrestre,  toute  station  mobile  peut,  si  elle 
le  juge  utile  parce  que  des  confusions  sont  & 
craindre,  transmettre  en  toutes  lettres  son 
nom  tel  qu'il  figure  dans  la  nomenclature. 
[M]  (2)  La  station  terrestre  peut,  au 
moyen  de  1'abr Aviation  PTR,  demander  £ 
la  station  mobile  de  lui  fournir  les  indica- 
tions ci-apres: 

a)  distance  approximative  en  milles  ma- 
rins  et  relevement  par  rapport  &  la  station 
terrestre  ou  bien  position  indiqu6e  par  la 
latitude  et  la  longitude; 

b)  prochain  lieu  d'escale. 

[318]  (3)  Les  indications  vis6es  £  Talinea 
(2)  sont  fournies  apr&s  autorisation  du 
commandant  ou  de  la  personne  jrespon- 
sable  du  v£hicule  portant  la  station  mo- 


1 64 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


the  mobile  station  and  only  in  case  it  is 
requested  by  the  land  station. 
[8l9]  §  5-  In.  communications  between 
land  stations  and  mobile  stations,  the 
mobile  station  shall  comply  with  the  in- 
structions given  by  the  land  station,  in  all 
questions  relative  to  the  order  and  the 
time  of  transmission,  to  the  choice  of  fre- 
quency (wavelength)  and/or  of  the  type 
of  wave  and  to  the  suspension  of  work. 
This  provision  shall  not  apply  to  cases  of 
distress. 

[82°]  §  6.  In  communications  between 
mobile  stations,  and  except  for  cases  of 
distress,  the  station  called  shall  control 
the  work  as  indicated  in  §  5  above. 
[35Sl]  §  7.  (i)  When  a  station  called  does 
not  answer  a  call  sent  three  times,  at 
intervals  of  2  minutes,  the  call  must  cease 
and  it  may  be  resumed  only  15  minutes 
later  (5  minutes  for  aeronautical  mobile 
service).  The  calling  station,  before  re- 
suming the  call,  must  make  certain  that 
the  station  called  is  not  in  communication 
with  another  station  at  that  time. 

[322]  (2)  The  call  may  be  repeated  at 
shorter  intervals  if  there  is  no  danger  that 
it  will  interfere  with  communications  in 
progress. 

[323]  §g.  When  the  name  and  the  ad- 
dress of  the  operating  agency  of  a  mobile 
station  are  not  shown  in  the  nomencla- 
ture or  are  no  longer  in  accord  with  the 
data  given  therein,  it  shall  devolve  upon 
the  mobile  station,  as  a  matter  of  routine, 
to  furnish  the  land  station  to  which  it 
sends  traffic  with  all  the  necessary  infor- 
mation in  this  connection,  using  for  this 
purpose  the  appropriate  abbreviations. 

ARTICLE  19. — Use  of  Waves  in  the  Mobile 
Service 

[8JU]  §  i.  (i)  In  the  bands  included  be- 
tween 365  and  515  kc  (822  and  583  in),  the 
only  type-B  waves  permissible  shall  be 
the  following: 

375, 410,  425, 454,  and  500  kc  (800,  730, 
705,  660,  and  600  m). 
[325I  (2)  The  general  calling-wave  which 
must  be  used  by  all  ship  stations  and  by 
all  coast  stations  working  in  radioteleg- 
raphy  in  the  authorized  bands  between 
365  and  515  kc  (822  and  583  m),  as  well  as 
by  aircraft  wishing  to  enter  into  communi- 
cation with  a  coast  station  or  a  ship  sta- 
tion, shall  be  the  wave  500  kc  (600  m) 
(Ai,  A2,  or  B). 


bile  et  seulement  dans  le  cas  oft  elles  sont 
demandees  par  la  station  terrestre. 
[8l9]  §  5-  Dans  les  communications  entre 
stations  terrestres  et  stations  mobiles,  la 
station  mobile  se  conforme  aux  instruc- 
tions donn£es  par  la  station  terrestre,  dans 
toutes  les  questions  relatives  &  1'ordre  et  & 
1'heure  de  transmission,  au  choix  de  la 
frequence  (longueur  d'onde)  et/ou  du 
type  d'onde,  et  &  la  suspension  du  travail. 
Cette  prescription  ne  s 'applique  pas  aux 
cas  de  d6tresse. 

[32°]  §  6.  Dans  les  ^changes  entre  stations 
mobiles,  et  sauf  dans  le  cas  de  d£tresse, 
la  station  appel<§e  a  le  contr61e  du  travail, 
comme  il  est  indiqu6  au  §  5  ci-avant. 
[321J  §7-  (*)  Lorsqu'une  station  ap- 
pe!6e  ne  r6pond  pas  &  1'appel  6rnis  trois 
fois,  4  des  intervalles  de  deux  minutes, 
1'appel  doit  cesser  et  il  ne  peut  §tre  repris 
que  15  minutes  plus  tard  (5  minutes  pour 
le  service  mobile  de  Pa6ronautique).  La 
station  appelante,  avant  de  recommencer 
1'appel,  doit  s'assurer  que  la  station  ap- 
pe!6e  n'est  pas,  £  ce  moment,  en  com- 
munication avec  une  autre  station. 
[322]  (2)  L'appel  peut  Stre  r6p6te  a  des 
intervalles  moms  longs,  s'il  n'est  pas  a 
craindre  qu'il  vienne  brouiller  des  com- 
munications en  cours. 
[323]  §  8.  Lorsque  le  nom  et  Fadresse  de 
1'exploitant  d'une  station  mobile  ne  sont 
pas  mentionne's  dans  la  nomenclature  ou 
ne  sont  plus  en  concordance  avec  les  in- 
dications de  celle-ci,  il  appartient  &  la  sta- 
tion mobile  de  donner  d'office  &  la  station 
terrestre  £  laquelle  elle  transmet  du  trafic, 
tous  les  renseignements  n6cessaires,  sous 
ce  rapport,  en  utilisant,  £  cette,  fin,  les 
abr6viations  appropriees, 

ARTICLE  19. — Emploi  des  ondes  dans  le 

service  mobile 

[324]  §  If  (r)  Dans  les  bandes  comprises 
entre  365  et  515  kc/s  (822  et  583  m),  les 
seules  ondes  admises  en  type  B  sont  les 
suivantes: 

375,  410,  425,  454  et  500  kc/s  (800,  730, 
705,  660  et  600  m). 

[325]  (2)  L'onde  generate  d'appel  qui 
doit  £tre  employee  par  toute  station  de 
navire  et  toute  station  cdti&re  travaillant 
en  radiot616graphie  dans  les  bandes 
autorisees  entre  365  et  515  kc/s  (822  et 
583  m),  ainsi  que  par  les  a6ronefs  qui 
d^sirent  entrer  en  communication  avec 
une  station  cdtiere  ou  une  station  de 
navire,  est  1'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600  m) 
(Ai,  A2  ou  B). 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


165 


[m]  (3)  L'onde  de  333  kc/s  (900  m)  est 
1'onde  Internationale  d'appel  pour  les 
services  a6riens,  sauf  comme  il  est  indiqu6 
dans  Tarticle  9,  §  10  (2). 
[327]  (4)  L'onde  de  143  kc/s  (2  100  m) 
(du  type  A I  settlement)  est  1'onde  Inter- 
nationale d'appel  employee  dans  les  com- 
munications du  service  mobile  a  grande 
distance  dans  les  bandes  de  100  a  160  kc/s 
(3  ooo  a  I  875  m). 

[328]  (5)  L'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600  m)  est 
1'onde  internationale  de  detresse;  elle  est 
utilisee  dans  ce  but  par  les  stations  de 
navire  et  par  les  stations  d'aeronef  qui 
demandent  1'assistance  des  services  mari- 
times.  Elle  ne  peut  6tre  utilisee  d'une 
maniere  gen6rale  que  pour  1'appel  et  la 
reponse  ainsi  que  pour  le  trafic  de  de- 
tresse, les  signaux  et  messages  d'urgence 
et  de  s6curite. 

[329]  (6)  Toutefois,  a  condition  de  ne  pas 
troubler  les  signaux  de  detresse,  d'ur- 
gence, de  s6curit&,  d'appel  et  de  reponse, 
1'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600  m)  peut  Itre 
utilisee: 

[33°]  a)  dans  les  regions  de  trafic  intense 
pour  la  transmission  d'un  radiotele- 
gramme  unique  et  court;1 
[331]  &)  dans  les  autres  regions,  pour 
d'autres  buts,  mais  avec  discretion. 
[332]  (7)  En  dehors  de  1'onde  de  500 
kc/s  (600  m),  1'usage  des  ondes  de  tous 
types  comprises  entre  485  et  515  kc/s 
(620  et  583  m)  est  interdit. 
[338]  (8)  En  dehors  de  1'onde  de  143  kc/s 
(2  100  m),  1'usage  de  toutes  ondes  com- 
prises entre  140  et  146  kc/s  (2  143  et 
2  055  m)  est  interdit. 
[334]  (9)  Les  stations  cdtieres  et  de 
navire  travaillant  dans  les  bandes  au- 
toris6es  entre  365  et  515  kc/s  (822  et  583 
m)  doivent  6tre  en  mesure  de  faire  usage 
au  moins  d'une  onde  en  plus  de  celle  de 
500  kc/s  (600  m) ;  quand  une  onde  addi- 
tionnelle  est  imprim6e  en  caracteres  gras 
dans  la  nomenclature,  elle  est  1'onde  nor- 
male  de  travail  de  la  station.  Les  ondes 
additionnelles  ainsi  choisies  pour  les  sta- 
tions c6ti£res  peuvent  £tre  les  m^mes  que 
celles  des  stations  de  bord  ou  peuvent 
£tre  differentes.  En  tout  cas,  les  ondes 
de  travail  des  stations  c6tieres  doivent 
£tre  choisies  de  maniere  £  eviter  les 
brouillages  avec  les  stations  voisines. 

1  The  regions  of  heavy  traffic  are  indicated  in  the  nomenclature  of  coast  stations.  These  regions 
consist  of  the  service  areas  of  the  coast  stations  indicated  as  not  accepting  traffic  on  500  kc  (600  m) . 

i  Les  regions  de  trafic  intense  sont  indiquees  par  la  nomenclature  des  stations  cdtieres;  ces  regions 
sont  constitutes  par  les  zones  d 'action  des  stations  cdtieres  indiquees  comme  n'acceptant  pas  le 
trafic  sur  500  kc/s  (600  m)  (voir  1'appendice  ?)• 


[328]  (3)  The  wave  of  333  kc  (900  m) 
shall  be  the  international  calling- wave  for 
aerial  services,  except  as  indicated  in 
article  9,  §  10  (2). 

[3*7]  (4)  The  wave  of  143  kc  (2,100  m) 
(Type-Ai  only),  shall  be  the  interna- 
tional calling-wave  for  use  in  long-dis- 
tance communications  of  the  mobile  serv- 
ice in  the  band  100  to  160  kc  (3,000  to 
1,875  m). 

t328]  (5)  The  wave  of  500  kc  (600  m) 
shall  be  the  international  distress  wave;  it 
shall  be  used  for  that  purpose  by  ship  sta- 
tions and  aircraft  stations  in  requesting 
help  from  the  maritime  services.  It  may 
be  used  in  a  general  way  only  for  calls  and 
replies  as  well  as  for  distress  traffic,  urgent 
and  safety  messages,  and  signals. 


[329]  (6)  However,  on  condition  that  the 
distress,  urgent,  safety,  calling,  and  reply 
signals  are  not  interfered  with,  the  wave 
of  500  kc  (600  m)  may  be  used : 

[33°]  (a)  in  the  regions  of  heavy  traffic 
for  the  transmission  of  a  single  short 
radiotelegram  ;x 

[331]  (£)  in  other  regions,  for  other  pur- 
poses, but  with  discretion. 
[332j  (7)  Besides  the  wave  of  500  kc  (600 
m),  the  use  of  waves  of  all  types  between 
485  and  515  kc  (620  and  583  m)  shall  be 
forbidden. 

[383]  (8)  Except  for  the  wave  of  143  kc 
(2,100  m)  the  use  of  any  wave  between 
140  and  146  kc  (2,143  and  2,055  m)  shall 
be  forbidden. 

[334]  (Q)  Coast  and  ship  stations  working 
within  the  authorized  band  between  365 
and  515  kc  (822  and  583  m)  must  be  able 
to  use  at  least  one  wave  besides  that  of 
500  kc  (600  m);  when  an  additional 
wave  is  printed  in  heavy  type  in  the 
nomenclature,  this  is  the  normal  working- 
wave  of  the  station.  The  additional 
waves  thus  chosen  for  coast  stations  may 
or  may  not  be  the  same  as  those  of  ship 
stations.  In  any  case,  the  working-waves 
of  coast  stations  must  be  chosen  in  such  a 
way  as  to  avoid  interference  with  neigh- 
boring stations. 


166 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


[ass]  (I0)  Besides  their  normal  working- 
waves,  printed  in  heavy  type  in  the 
nomenclature,  land  and  on-board  sta- 
tions may  use,  in  the  authorized  bands, 
supplementary  waves  which  shall  be  men- 
tioned in  the  nomenclature  in  ordinary 
print.  However,  the  band  of  frequencies 
from  365  to  385  kc  (822  to  779  m)  shall  be 
reserved  to  the  radio  direction-finding 
service;  it  can  be  used  by  the  mobile  serv- 
ice, for  radiotelegraph  correspondence, 
only  subject  to  the  conditions  set  forth 
in  article  7. 

[3381  (n)  (a)  The  wave  for  the  reply  to 
a  call  transmitted  on  the  general  calling- 
wave  [see  §  i  (2)]  shall  be  the  wave  of  500 
kc  (600  m),  the  same  as  that  for  calling. 
[m]  (&)  The  wave  for  the  reply  to  a  call, 
for  aircraft  stations  and  aeronautical  sta- 
tions working  in  the  band  315  to  365  kc 
(952  to  822  m)  shall  be  the  wave  of  333  kc 
(900  m),  the  same  as  that  for  calling, 

[338]  (c)  The  wave  for  the  reply  to  a  call 
transmitted  on  the  international  calling- 
wave  of  143  kc  (2,100  m)  [see  §  i  (4)] 
shall  be: 

the  wave  of  143  kc  (2,100  m)  for  a 

mobile  station; 
the  normal  working-wave,  for  a  coast 

station. 

[339]^  §  2.  (i)  In  order  to  increase  safety 
of ^  life  at  sea  (ships),  and  over  the  sea 
(aircraft),  all  the  stations  of  the  maritime 
mobile  service  which  normally  listen  on 
the  waves  of  the  authorized  bands  be- 
tween 365  and  515  kc  (822  and  583  m) 
must,  during  their  working  hours,  make 
the  necessary  provisions  to  insure  the 
watch  on  the  distress  wave  [500  kc  (600 
m)]  twice  per  hour,  for  3  minutes,  be- 
ginning at  x:i5  and  at  x.*45  o'clock,  Green- 
wich mean  time. 

[34°]    (2)  During  the  intervals  indicated 
above,   outside  the    transmissions    men- 
tioned in  article  22  (§§  22  to  28) : 
[341]    A.  Transmissions  must  cease  in  the 
bands  of  460  to  550  kc  (652  to  545  m) ; 

[342]    B.  Outside  these  bands: 

(a)  transmissions  of  type  B  waves  shall 
be  forbidden; 

(b)  other  transmissions  of  the  mobile 
service  stations  may  continue;  stations  of 
the  maritime  mobile  service  may  listen  to 
these  transmissions  on  the  express  condi- 


[338]  (I0)  En  dehors  de  leur  onde  nor- 
male  de  travail  imprim£e  en  caracteres 
gras  dans  la  nomenclature,  les  stations 
terrestres  et  de  bord  peuvent  employer, 
dans  les  bandes  autorisees,  des  ondes  sup- 
p!6mentaires  qui  sont  mentionne'es  en 
caracteres  ordinaires  dans  la  nomencla- 
ture. Toutefois,  la  bande  de  frequences 
de  365  £  385  kc/s  (822  &  779  m)  est  reservd 
au  service  de  la  radiogoniometrie ;  elle  ne 
peut  £tre  utilisee  par  le  service  mobile, 
pour  la  correspondance  radio telegraphi- 
que,  que  sous  les  reserves  indiqu6es  a 
1'article  7. 

[83a]  (n)  a)  L'onde  de  reponse  a  un  ap- 
pel  6mis  sur  1'onde  gen6rale  d'appel  [voir 
§  i,  (2)]  est  1'onde  de  500  kc/s  (600  m),  la 
m£me  que  celle  d'appel. 
[337]  b)  L'onde  de  reponse  &  un  appel, 
pour  les  stations  d'aeronef  et  les  stations 
aeronautiques  travaillant  dans  la  bande 
de  315  a  365  kc/s  (952  &  822  m),  est 
1'onde  de  333  kc/s  (900  m),  la  ra£me  que 
celle  d'appel. 

[33S]  c)  L'onde  de  reponse  &  un  appel 
6mis  sur  1'onde  Internationale  d'appel  de 
143  kc/s  (2  100  m)  [voir  §  i,  (4)]  est: 

pour  une  station  mobile,  1'onde  de  143 

kc/s  (2  loo  m) ; 
pour  une  station  c6tiere,  son  onde 

normale  de  travail. 

[339]  ^§2.  (i)  En  vue  d'augmenter  la 
s£curit6  de  la  vie  humaine  sur  mer  (na- 
vires)  et  au-dessus  de  la  rner  (aeronefs), 
toutes  les  stations  du  service  mobile 
maritime  qui  ecoutent  normalement  les 
ondes  des  bandes  autorisees  entre  365  et 
515  kc/s  (822  et  583  m)  doivent,  pendant 
la  duree  de  leurs  vacations,  prendre  les 
mesures  u tiles  pour  assurer  1'ecoute  sur 
1'onde  de  detresse  [500  kc/s  (600  m)]  deux 
fois  par  heure,  pendant  trois  minutes, 
commencant  a  x  h  15  et  &  x  h  45,  temps 
moyen  de  Greenwich. 
[340]  (2)  Pendant  les  intervalles  indiques 
ci-avant,  en  dehors  des  emissions  en- 
visagees  &  1'article  22  (§§  22  a  28): 
[341]  A.  Les  6missions  doivent  cesser 
dans  les  bandes  de  460  a  550  kc/s  (652  i 
545m); 
[342]  B.  Hors  de  ces  bandes: 

a)  les  emissions  des  ondes  du  type  B 
sont  interdites; 

b)^  les  autres  Emissions  des  stations  du 
service  mobile  peuvent  continuer;  les  sta- 
tions du  service  mobile  maritime  peuvent 
6couter  ces  emissions  sous  reserve  ex- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


I67 


tion  that  these  stations  shall  first  insure 
the  watch  on  the  distress  wave,  as  pro- 
vided for  in  subparagraph  (i)  of  this 
paragraph. 

[343]  §  3-  Since  calls  in  the  authorized 
bands  between  365  and  515  kc  (822  and 
583  m)  and  from  315  to  365  kc  (952  to 
822  m)  are  normally  made  on  the  inter- 
national calling- waves  [§  I  (2)  and  (3) 
above],  mobile  service  stations  open  to 
the  service  of  public  correspondence  and 
using  waves  from  these  bands  for  their 
work  must,  during  their  hours  of  watch, 
remain  on  watch  on  the  calling-wave  of 
their  service.  These  stations,  while  ob- 
serving the  provisions  of  article  19,  §  2  (i) 
and  (2)  and  §  4  D,  are  authorized  to 
abandon  this  watch  only  when  they  are 
engaged  in  a  communication  on  other 
waves. 

[34*]  §  4.  The  following  rules  must  be 
followed  in  the  operation  of  stations  of  the 
mobile  service  using  type-Ai  waves  in  the 
band  100  to  160  kc  (3,000  to  1,875  m): 

[345]  A.  (a)  Any  coast  station  carrying 
on  a  communication  on  one  of  these 
waves  must  listen  on  the  wave  of  143  kc 
(2,100  m),  unless  otherwise  indicated  in 
the  nomenclature. 

[S46]  (j)  The  coast  station  shall  transmit 
all  its  traffic  on  the  wave  or  on  the  waves 
which  are  specifically  assigned  to  it. 
[347]  (c)  A  coast  station  to  which  one  or 
more  waves  within  the  band  125  to  150  kc 
(2,400  to  2,000  m)  have  been  allocated, 
shall  have  a  prior  right  to  this  or  these 
waves. 

[348]  (f)  Any  other  mobile  service  sta- 
tion transmitting  public  traffic  on  this  or 
these  waves  and  thereby  causing  inter- 
ference with  the  said  coast  station  must 
discontinue  its  work  at  the  request  of 
the  latter. 

[849]  B.  (a)  When  a  mobile  station 
wishes  to  establish  communication  on  one 
of  these  waves  with  another  station  of  the 
mobile  service,  it  must  use  the  wave  of 
143  kc  (2,100  m),  unless  otherwise  in- 
dicated in  the  nomenclature. 
[350]  (&)  This  wave,  designated  as  a 
general  calling-wave,  must  be  used  ex- 
clusively in  the  North  Atlantic: 

1.  for  making  individual  calls  and 
answering  these  calls; 

2.  for   transmitting   signals   prelim- 
inary to  the  transmission  of  traffic. 


presse  que  ces  stations  assurent  d'abord  la 
veille  sur  1'onde  de  detresse,  comme  il  est 
prevu  £  Falinea  (i)  de  ce  paragraphe. 

[343I  §  3'  Les  appels  dans  les  bandes  au- 
toris6es  entre  365  et  515  kc/s  (822  et  583 
m)  et  entre  315  et  365  kc/s  (952  et  822  m) 
etant  faits  normalement  sur  les  ondes  in- 
ternationales  d'appel  [§  I,  (2)  et  (3)  ci~ 
avant],  les  stations  du  service  mobile 
ouvertes  au  service  de  la  correspondance 
publique  et  utilisant  pour  leur  travail  des 
ondes  de  ces  bandes  doivent,  pendant 
leurs  heures  de  veille,  rester  &  1'ecoute  sur 
Ponde  d'appel  de  leur  service.  Ces  sta- 
tions, tout  en  observant  les  prescriptions 
de  1'article  19,  §  2,  (i)  et  (2),  et  §  4,  D,  ne 
sont  autorisees  a  abandonner  cette  ecoute 
que  lorsqu'elles  sont  engagees  dans  une 
communication  sur  d'autres  ondes. 
[344]  §  4.  Les  regies  ci-apres  doivent  toe 
suivies  dans  1'exploitation  des  stations  du 
service  mobile  employant  des  ondes  du 
type  Ai  des  bandes  de  100  a  160  kc/s 
(3  ooo  &  i  875  m) : 

[345]  A.  a)  Toute  station  c6tiere  assu- 
rant  une  communication  sur  une  de  ces 
ondes  doit  faire  l'6coute  sur  1'onde  de  143 
kc/s  (2  100  m),  a  moins  qu'il  n'en  soit 
dispos6  autrement  dans  la  nomenclature. 
[34<$]  &)  La  station  c6tiere  transmet  tout 
son  trafic  sur  1'onde  ou  sur  les  ondes  qui 
lui  sont  specialement  attributes. 
[347]  c)  Une  station  c6tiere,  a  laquelle 
une  ou  plusieurs  ondes  comprises  dans  la 
bande  de  125  a  150  kc/s  (2  400  a  2  ooo 
m)  sont  allouees,  possede  sur  cette  ou  sur 
ces  ondes  un  droit  de  preference. 
f348]  d)  Toute  autre  station  du  service 
mobile  transmettant  un  trafic  public  sur 
cette  ou  sur  ces  ondes,  et  causant  ainsi  du 
brouillage  a  ladite  station  cdtiere,  doit 
suspendre  son  travail  a  la  demande  de 
cette  derniere. 

[349]  B.  a)  Lorsqu 'une  station  mobile  d6- 
sire  etablir  la  communication  sur  une  de 
ces  ondes  avec  une  autre  station  du  ser- 
vice mobile,  elle  doit  employer  1'onde  de 
143  kc/s  (2  100  m),  £  moins  qu'il  n'en  soit 
dispos6  autrement  dans  la  nomenclature. 
[35°]  6)  Cette  onde,  designee  comme  onde 
g6n6rale  d'appel,  doit  toe  employee  ex- 
clusivement,  dans  1'Atlantique  Nord: 

i°  pour  la  production  des  appels  in- 

dividuels   et  des  reponses  £  ces 

appels ; 
2°  pour  la  transmission  des  signaux 

prealables   &   la   transmission   du 

trafic. 


r  68 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


[851]  C.  A  mobile  station,  after  having 
established  communication  with  another 
station  of  the  mobile  service  on  the  gen- 
eral calling-wave  of  143  kc  (2,100  m)  must, 
so  far  as  possible,  transmit  its  traffic  on 
some  other  wave  of  the  authorized  bands, 
provided  it  does  not  interfere  with  the 
work  in  progress  of  another  station. 


[352]  D.  As  a  general  rule,  any  mobile 
station  equipped  for  service  on  type-Ai 
waves  in  the  band  100  to  160  kc  (3,000  to 
1,875  m)  and  which  is  not  engaged  in  a 
communication  on  another  wave,  must,  in 
order  to  permit  the  exchange  of  traffic 
with  other  stations  of  the  mobile  service, 
return  each  hour  to  the  wave  of  143  kc 
(2,100  m)  for  5  minutes  beginning  at 
x:$5  o'clock  Greenwich  mean  time,  during 
the  specified  hours,  according  to  the  cate- 
gory to  which  the  station  in  question 
belongs. 

[353]  E.  (a)  Land  stations  must,  so  far 
as  possible,  transmit  calls  in  the  form  of 
call  lists;  in  this  case,  the  stations  shall 
transmit  their  call  lists  at  specified  hours 
published  in  the  nomenclature,  on  the 
wave  or  waves  allocated  to  them,  in  the 
band  100  to  160  kc  (3,000  to  1,875  m)> 
but  not  on  the  wave  of  143  kc  (2,100  m). 


[354]  (b)  Land  stations  may,  however, 
call  mobile  stations  individually  at  any 
other  time,  outside  the  hours  fixed  for  the 
transmission  of  call  lists,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances or  according  to  the  work 
which  they  have  to  perform. 
[m]  (c)  The  wave  of  143  kc  (2,100  m) 
may  be  used  for  individual  calls  and  shall 
preferably  be  used  for  this  purpose  during 
the  period  indicated  in  §  4,  D. 

[8M]     §  5-  Radio    communications    from 

aeronautical  and  aircraft  stations  shall,  in 

principle,  be  exchanged  in  the  following 

manner: 

[867]     i.  For  aircraft  stations: 

(a)  In    radiotelephony    (calling    and 
working)  for  aircraft  of  which  the  crew 
does  not  include  a  radiotelegraph  opera- 
tor. 

(b)  In  radiotelegraphy  on  continuous 
waves  for  aircraft  of  which  the  crew  in- 
cludes a  radiotelegraph  operator. 

Calling:  type-A2  waves. 

Working:   type-Ar   waves   (type-A2 

shall  be  permitted  in  the  case  of 

work  on  short  waves). 


[361]  C.  Une  station  mobile,  apres  avoir 
£tabli  la  communication  avec  une  autre 
station  du  service  mobile  sur  1'onde  g£ne- 
rale  d'appel  de  143  kc/s  (2  100  m),  doit, 
autant  que  possible,  transmettre  son 
trafic  sur  une  autre  onde  quelconque  des 
bandes  autorisees,  a  condition  de  ne  pas 
troubler  le  travail  en  cours  d'une  autre 
station. 

[85a]  D.  En  regie  g<§nerale,  toute  station 
mobile  6quipee  pour  le  service  sur  les 
ondes  du  type  Ai  des  bandes  de  100  a  160 
kc/s  (3  ooo  a  i  875  m)  et  qui  n'est  pas 
engaged  dans  une  communication  sur  une 
autre  onde  doit,  en  vue  de  permettre 
i'6change  du  trafic  avec  d'autres  stations 
du  service  mobile,  revenir  chaque  heure 
sur  1'onde  de  143  kc/s  (2  100  m)  pendant 
5  minutes  &  partir  de  x  h  35,  temps  moyen 
de  Greenwich,  durant  les  heures  pr£vues, 
suivant  la  cat6gorie  a  laquelle  appartient 
la  station  envisagee. 

[863]  E.  a)  Les  stations  terrestres  doi- 
vent,  autant  que  possible,  transmettre  les 
appels  sous  forme  de  listes  d'appels ;  dans 
ce  cas,  les  stations  transmettent  leurs 
listes  d'appels  a  des  heures  d6termin6es, 
publi6es  dans  la  nomenclature,  sur  1'onde 
ou  sur  les  ondes  qui  leur  sont  attributes, 
dans  les  bandes  de  100  a  160  kc/s  (3  ooo  £ 
i  875  m),  mais  non  sur  1'onde  de  143 
kc/s  (2  100  m). 

[364]  b)  Les  stations  terrestres  peuvent, 
toutefois,  appeler  individuellement  les 
stations  mobiles  &  toute  autre  heure,  en 
dehors  des  heures  fixees  pour  remission 
des  listes  d'appels,  selon  les  circonstances 
ou  le  travail  qu'elles  ont  a  effectuer. 
[86B]  c)  L'onde  de  143  kc/s  (2  100  m) 
peut  £tre  employee  pour  les  appels  in- 
dividuels  et  sera,  de  pr6f6rence,  utilisee 
dans  ce  but  pendant  la  p£riode  indiqu6e 
au  §  4,  D. 

[856]     §  5-  Les  radiocommunications   des 
stations   aeronautiques   et   des   stations 
d'a£ronef  spnt  6changees,  en  principe,  de 
la  facon  suivante: 
t357]     i.  Pour  les  stations  d'a6ronef: 

a)  En  radiot616phonie  (appel  et  travail) 
pour  les  a&ronefs  dont  l'£quipage  ne  com- 
porte  pas  d'op6rateur  radiote!6graphiste. 

b)  En  radiot616graphie  sur  ondes  entre- 
tenues  pour  les  a6ronefs  dont  l'£quipage 
comporte  un  op&rateur  racliot616graphiste. 

Appel:  ondes  du  type  A2. 

Travail:  ondes  du  type  Ai  (le  type 

A2  est  admis  dans  le  cas  du  travail 

sur  ondes  courtes). 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


169 


pas]     2.  For  aeronautical  stations: 

(a)  In  radiotelephony  (calling  and 
working)  when  the  station  must  com- 
municate with  an  aircraft  of  which  the 
crew  does  not  include  a  radiotelegraph 
operator. 

(6)  In  radiotelegraphy,  when  the  sta- 
tion must  communicate  with  an  aircraft 
of  which  the  crew  includes  a  radiotele- 
graph operator. 

Type- A I  waves  (calling  and  work- 
ing). 

Type-A2  waves  shall  be  permitted 
(calling  and  working)  in  the  case 
of  short  waves. 

ARTICLE  20. — Interference 

[359]  §  i.  (i)  The  exchange  of  unneces- 
sary signals  or  messages  shall  be  forbidden 
to  all  stations. 

[sec]  (2)  Tests  and  experiments  shall  be 
permitted  in  mobile  stations  if  they  do  not 
interfere  with  the  service  of  other  stations. 
As  for  stations  other  than  mobile  stations, 
each  administration  shall  judge,  before 
authorizing  them,  whether  or  not  the  pro- 
posed tests  or  experiments  are  likely  to 
interfere  with  the  service  of  other  stations. 

[361]  §  2.  It  is  recommended  that  traffic 
relating  to  public  correspondence  be  trans- 
mitted on  type-Ai  waves  rather  than  on 
type-A2  waves,  and  on  type-A2  waves 
rather  than  on  type-B  waves. 

[362]  §  3-  All  stations  of  the  mobile  serv- 
ice shall  be  required  to  exchange  traffic 
with  the  minimum  of  radiated  power 
necessary  to  insure  good  communication. 

[363]  §  4«  Except  in  cases  of  distress, 
communications  between  on-board  sta- 
tions must  not  interfere  with  the  work  of 
land  stations.  When  this  work  is  thus 
interfered  with,  the  on-board  stations 
which  cause  it  must  stop  transmitting  or 
change  wave,  upon  the  first  request  of  the 
land  station  concerned, 
[ae*]  §  cj.  Test  and  adjustment  signals 
must  be  selected  in  such  a  way  that  there 
will  result  no  confusion  with  a  signal,  an 
abbreviation,  etc.,  having  a  particular 
meaning  defined  by  these  Regulations  or 
by  the  International  Code  of  Signals. 

[m]  §  6.  (i)  When  it  is  necessary  to 
transmit  test  or  adjustment  signals,  and 
there  is  danger  of  interfering  with  the 


[*68]  2.  Pour  les  stations  aeYonautiques: 
a)  En  radiotelephonie  (appel  et  tra- 
vail) lorsque  la  station  doit  communiquer 
avec  un  aeronef  dont  T£quipage  ne  com- 
porte  pas  d'op6rateur  radiotelegraphiste, 

6)  En  radiotelegraphie  lorsque  la  sta- 
tion doit  communiquer  avec  un  aeronef 
dont  1' equipage  comporte  un  operateur 
radioteldgraphiste. 

Ondes  du  type  Ai  (appel  et  travail) . 

Les  ondes  du  type  A2  sont  admises 
(appel  et  travail)  dans  le  cas  des 
ondes  courtes. 

ARTICLE  20. — Brouillages 
[35»]     §  If  (j)  L'6change   de   signaux   ou 
correspondances  superflus  est  interdit  a 
toutes  les  stations. 

[sec]  (2)  Des  essais  et  des  experiences 
sont  toleres  dans  les  stations  mobiles,  s'ils 
ne  troublent  point  le  service  d'autres  sta- 
tions. Quant  aux  stations  autres  que  les 
stations  mobiles,  chaque  administration 
apprecie,  avant  de  les  autoriser,  si  les 
essais  ou  experiences  proposes  sont  suscep- 
tibles  ou  non  de  troubler  le  service  d'au- 
tres stations. 

[36i]  §  2.  II  est  recommand6  de  transmet- 
tre  le  trafic  se  rapportant  a,  la  correspon- 
dance  publique  sur  des  ondes  du  type  Ai , 
plut6t  que  sur  des  ondes  du  type  A2,  et  sur 
des  ondes  du  type  A2,  plut6t  que  sur  des 
ondes  du  type  B. 

lm]  §3-  Toutes  les  stations  du  service 
mobile  sont  tenues  d'e"changer  le  trafic 
avec  le  minimum  d'6nergie  rayonn£e 
n£cessaire  pour  assurer  une  bonne  com- 
munication. 

[363]  §  4.  Sauf  dans  les  cas  de  detresse, 
les  communications  entre  stations  de  bord 
ne  doivent  pas  troubler  le  travail  des  sta- 
tions terrestres.  Lorsque  ce  travail  est 
ainsi  trouble,  les  stations  de  bord  qui  en 
sont  la  cause  doivent  cesser  leurs  trans- 
missions ou  changer  d'onde  &  la  premiere 
demande  de  la  station  terrestre  interess6e. 
[3<u]  §  5.  Les  signaux  d'essais  et  de 
r£glage  doivent  6tre  choisis  de  telle  ma- 
nilre  qu'aucune  confusion  ne  puisse  se  pro- 
duire  avec  un  signal,  une  abr&viation,  etc., 
d'une  signification  particuli&re  d6fime  par 
le  present  R£glement  ou  par  le  Code  In- 
ternational de  Signaux. 
[36B]  §  6.  (i)  Quand  il  est  n£cessaire 
d'6mettre  des  signaux  d'essais  ou  de  r6- 
glage,  et  qu'il  y  a  risque  de  troubler  le 


170 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


service  of  the  adjoining  land  station,  per- 
mission must  be  obtained  from  that  land 
station  before  such  transmissions  are 
made. 

[366]  (2)  Any  station  making  transmis- 
sions for  purposes  of  testing,  adjusting,  or 
experimenting,  must  transmit  its  call 
signal  or,  if  need  be,  its  name  at  frequent 
intervals  in  the  course  of  these  transmis- 
sions. 

[sex]  §  7,  xhe  administration  or  enter- 
prise which  makes  a  complaint  regarding 
interference  must,  to  support  and  justify 
the  complaint: 

(a)  specify  the  characteristics  of  the 
interference  noted  (frequency,  variations 
in  adjustment,  call  signal  of  the  interfering 
station,  etc.) ; 

(&)  state  that  the  station  interfered 
with  actually  uses  the  frequency  assigned 
to  it; 

(c)  state  that  it  regularly  uses  receiving 
instruments  of  a  type  equivalent  to  the 
best  used  in  the  current  practice  of  the 
service  concerned. 

[368]  §  8.  The  administrations  shall  take 
the  steps  which  they  deem  advisable  and 
which  are  in  keeping  with  their  domestic 
legislation  so  that  electrical  apparatus 
capable  of  serious  interference  with  an 
authorized  radio  service,  will  be  used  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  avoid  such  inter- 
ference. 

ARTICLE  21. — Emergency  Installations 
[389]  §  r.  xhe  Convention  for  the  Safety 
of  Life  at  Sea  shall  determine  which  ships 
must  be  provided  with  emergency  installa- 
tions and  shall  define  the  conditions  to  be 
fulfilled  by  installations  of  this  category. 

[37°]  §  2.  In  the  use  of  emergency  instal- 
lations, all  the  provisions  of  the  present 
Regulations  must  be  observed. 


ARTICLE  22. — Distress  Traffic  and  Distress 
Signals — Alarm f  Emergency,  and  Safety 
Signals 

A. — General 

p71]  §  i.  No  provision  of  these  Regula- 
tions shall  prevent  a  mobile  station  in 
distress  from  using  any  means  available  to 
it  for  drawing  attention,  signaling  its 
position,  and  obtaining  help. 

[m]     §  2.  (i)  When  distress,  emergency, 


service  de  la  station  terrestre  voisine,  le 
consentement  de  cette  station  terrestre 
doit  6tre  obtenu  avant  d'effectuer  de  telles 
Emissions. 

[3«6]  (2)  Une  station  quelconque  effec- 
tuant  des  Emissions  pour  des  essais,  des 
r£glages  ou  des  experiences  doit  trans- 
mettre  son  indicatif  d'appel  ou,^  en  cas  de 
besoin,  son  nom,  a  de  frequents  intervalles 
au  cours  de  ces  Emissions. 
[*87]  §  7.  L'administration  ou  Tentre- 
prise  qui  formule  une  plainte  en  mati&re 
de  brouillage  doit,  pour  6tayer  et  justifier 
celle-ci  : 

a)  pr£ciser  les  caract&ristiques  du  brou- 
illage constat6  (frequence,  variations  de 
r6glage,    indicatif    du    poste    brouilleur, 

etc.); 

b)  declarer  que  le  poste  brouill<§  utilise 
bien  la  frequence  qui  lui  est  attribute; 

c)  faire  connattre  qu'elle  emploie  r6gu- 
li£rement  des  appareils  de  reception  <Tun 
type  6quivalent  au  type  le  meilleur  utilis6 
dans  la  pratique  courante  du  service  dont 
il  s'agit. 

t368]  §  8-  Les  administrations  prennent 
les  mesures  qu'elles  jugent  utiles  et  qui 
sont  compatibles  avec  leur  legislation  in- 
terieure,  pour  que  les  appareils  electriques 
susceptibles  de  troubler  serieusement  un 
service  autoris6  de  radipcommunication 
soient  employes  de  maniere  a  6viter  de 
telles  perturbations. 

ARTICLE  21. — Installations  de  secours 

[369]  §  i.  La  Convention  pour  la  sauye- 
garde  de  la  vie  humaine  en  rner  determine 
quels  sont  les  navires  qui  doivent  6tre 
pouryus  d'une  installation  de  secours  et 
d£finitjes  conditions  a  remplir  par  les  in- 
stallations de  cette  cat£gorie. 
[37°]  §2.  Pour  1'utilisation  des  installa- 
tions de  secours,  toutes  les  prescriptions 
du  present  R£glement  doivent  £tre 
observers. 

ARTICLE  22. — Signal  et  traftc  de  detresse. 
Signaux  d'alarme,  d'urgence  et  de  securite 

A. — Generalites 

[m]  §  I.  Aucune  disposition  du  present 
R&glement  ne  peut  faire  obstacle  a  1  em- 
ploi,  par  une  station  mobile  en  detresse, 
de  tous  les  moyens  dont  elle  dispose  pour 
attirer  1'attention,  signaler  sa  situation  et 
obtenir  du  secours. 
[372]  §  2.  (i)  La  vitesse  de  transmission 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


171 


or  safety  is  involved,  the  telegraph  trans- 
mission speed  in  general,  must  not  exceed 
1 6  words  per  minute. 
[373]     (2)  The  transmission  speed  for  the 
alarm  signal  is  indicated  in  §  21  (i). 


te!6graphique  dans  les  cas  de  detresse, 
d'urgence  ou  de  securite  ne  doit  pas,  en 
general,  d6passer  16  mots  a  la  minute. 
[87S]     (2)  La  vitesse  de  transmission  du 
signal  d'alarme  est  indiquee  au  §  21,  (i). 


$m — Waves  to  be  used  in  case  of  distress        B. — Ondes  d  employer  en  cas  de  detresse 


[374]  §  3-  (*)  Ships. — In  case  of  distress, 
the  wave  to  be  used  shall  be  the  inter- 
national distress  wave,  that  is,  500  kc  (600 
m)  (see  art.  19) ;  it  must  preferably  be  used 
in  type  A2  or  B.  Vessels  which  cannot 
transmit  on  the  international  distress 
wave  shall  use  their  normal  calling-wave. 

[375]  (2)  Aircraft. — Any  aircraft  in  dis- 
tress must  transmit  the  distress  call  on  the 
watching-wave  of  the  fixed  or  mobile 
stations  likely  to  help  it:  500  kc  (600  m) 
for  stations  of  the  maritime  service,  333  kc 
(900  m)  for  stations  of  the  aeronautical 
service  [except  as  indicated  in  art.  9,  §  10 
(2)].  The  waves  to  be  used  are  type  A2 
or  A3. 


C. — Distress  signal 

[376]  §  4-  (i)  In  radiotelegraphy,  the  dis- 
tress signal  shall  consist  of  the  group 
..«__«»-••.;  in  radiotelephony,  the 
distress  signal  shall  consist  of  the  spoken 
expression  MAYDAY  (corresponding  to 
the  French  pronunciation  of  the  expres- 
sion "m'aider"). 

[377]  (2)  These  distress  signals  shall  an- 
nounce that  the  ship,  aircraft,  or  any 
other  vehicle  which  sends  the  distress  sig- 
nal is  threatened  by  serious  and  imminent 
danger  and  requests  immediate  assistance. 


D. — Distress  call 

I378]  §5-  W  The  distress  call,  when  sent 
in  radiotelegraphy  on  500  kc  (600  m)  shall, 
as  a  general  rule,  be  immediately  preceded 
by  the  alarm  signal  as  the  latter  is  denned 
in  §  21  (i), 

[379]     (2)  When    circumstances    permit, 
the  transmission  of  the  call  shall  be  sepa- 
rated from  the  end  of  the  alarm  signal  by  a 
2 -minute  silence. 
[38°]     (3)  The  distress  call  shall  include; 

the  distress  signal  transmitted  three 

times, 

the  word  DE,  and 
the  call  signal  of  the  mobile  station  in 

distress  transmitted  three  times. 


[374]  §  3-  (i)  Navires. — En  cas  de  d6- 
tresse,  1'onde  a  employer  est  1'onde  inter- 
nationale  de  d6tresse,  c'est-£-dire  500 
kc/s  (600  m)  (voir  article  19);  elle  doit 
£tre,  de  pref6rence,  utilisee  en  type  A2  ou 
B.  Les  Mtiments  qui  ne  peuvent  £met- 
tre  sur  1'onde  internationale  de  detresse 
utilisent  leur  onde  normale  d'appel. 
[37S]  (2)  Aeronefs.— Tout  a&ronef  en  de- 
tresse doit  transmettre  1'appel  de  d6tresse 
sur  1'onde  de  veille  des  stations  fixes  ou 
mobiles  susceptibles  de  lui  porter  secours: 
500  kc/s  (600  m)  pour  les  stations  du 
service  maritime,  333  kc/s  (900  m)  pour 
les  stations  du  service  a6ronautique  [sauf 
comme  il  est  indiqu6  a  1'article  9,  §  10, 
(2)].  Les  ondes  a  employer  sont  du  type 
A2  ou  A3. 

C. — Signal  de  detresse 

[376]  §  4.  (i)  En  radiote!6graphie,  le  sig- 
nal de  d6tresse  consiste  dans  le  groupe 
..*_—_...;  en  radiot616phonie,  le 
signal  de  d6tresse  consiste  dans  1 'ex- 
pression parlee  MAYDAY  (correspondant 
It  la  prononcjation  franchise  de  1'expres- 
sion  "m'aider"). 

[377]  (2)  Ces  signaux  de  detresse  an- 
noncent  que  le  navire,  l'a£ronef,  ou  tout 
autre  vehicule  qui  6met  le  signal  de  de- 
tresse est  sous  la  menace  d'un  danger 
grave  et  imminent  et  demande  une  as- 
sistance immediate. 

D. — Appel  de  detresse 
[378]     §  5.  (j)  L'appel  de  detresse,  lors- 
qu'il  est  6mis  par  radiot616graphie  sur  500 
kc/s  (600  m),  est,  en  r^gle  g£n<§rale,  im- 
m6diatement  pr6ced6  du  signal  d'alarme 
tel  que  ce  dernier  est  d6fini  au  §  21,  (i). 
[87fl]     (2)  Lorsque  les  circonstances  le  per- 
mettent,  remission  de  1'appel  est  s6par6e 
de  la  fin  du  signal  d'alarme  par  un  silence 
de  deux  minutes. 
[380]     (3)  L'appel  de  detresse  comprend: 

le  signal  de  d£tresse  transmis  trois 
fois, 

le  mot  DE,  et 

1'indicatif  d'appel  de  la  station  mo- 
bile en  detresse,  transmis  trois  fois. 


172 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


[3SIJ  (4)  This  call  shall  have  absolute 
priority  over  other  transmissions.  All 
stations  hearing  it  must  immediately  cease 
all  transmission  capable  of  interfering 
with  the  distress  traffic,  and  must  listen  on 
the  wave  used  for  the  distress  call.  This 
call  must  not  be  sent  to  any  particular 
station  and  does  not  require  an  acknowl- 
edgment of  receipt. 

E.  —  Distress  message 

[382]  §6.  (l)  The  distress  call  must  be 
followed  as  soon  as  possible  by  the  distress 
message.  This  message  shall  include  the 
distress  call  followed  by  the  name  of  the 
ship,  aircraft,  or  the  vehicle  in  distress,  in- 
formation regarding  the  position  of  the 
latter,  the  nature  of  the  distress  and  the 
nature  of  the  help  requested,  and  any 
other  further  information  which  might 
facilitate  this  assistance. 
[ass]  (2)  When,  after  having  sent  its 
distress  message,  an  aircraft  is  unable  to 
signal  its  position,  it  shall  endeavor  to 
send  its  call  signal  long  enough  so  that  the 
radio  direction-finding  stations  may  de- 
termine its  position. 


[884]  §  7,  (r)  AS  a  general  rule,  a  ship  or 
aircraft  at  sea  shall  signal  its  position  in 
latitude  and  longitude  (Greenwich),  using 
figures,  for  the  degrees  and  minutes,  ac- 
companied by  one  of  the  words  NORTH 
or  SOUTH  and  one  of  the  words  EAST  or 
WEST.  A  period  shall  separate  the  de- 
grees from  the  minutes.  In  some  cases, 
the  true  bearings  and  the  distance  in 
nautical  miles  from  some  known  geo- 
graphical point  may  be  given. 
[88B]  (2)  As  a  general  rule,  an  aircraft 
flying  over  land  shall  signal  its  position  by 
the  name  of  the  nearest  locality,  its  ap- 
proximate distance  from  this  point,  ac- 
companied according  to  the  case,  by  one 
of  the  words  NORTH,  SOUTH,  EAST,  or 
WEST,  or,  in  some  cases,  words  indicating 
intermediate  directions. 
[sse]  §  3.  The  distress  call  and  message 
shall  be  sent  only  by  order  of  the  master 
or  person  responsible  for  the  ship,  aircraft, 
or  other  vehicle  carrying  the  mobile  sta- 
tion. 

t387]  §  9-  00  The  distress  message  must 
be  repeated  at  intervals  until  an  answer 
has  been  received,  and  especially  during 
the  periods  of  silence  provided  for  in 
article  19,  §2. 

[ass]  (2)  The  alarm  signal  may  also  be 
repeated,  if  necessary. 


[asi]  (4)  Cet  appel  a  priority  absolue  sur 
les  autres  transmissions.  Toutes  les  sta- 
tions qui  Tentendent  doivent  cesser  im~ 
m£diatement  toute  transmission  suscep- 
tible de  troubler  le  trafic  de  d6tresse  et 
£couter  sur  Tonde  d'&nission  de  1'appel  de 
d6tresse.  Get  appel  ne  doit  pas  £tre 
adress6  a  une  station  d6terminee  et  ne 
donne  pas  lieu  a  l'accus£  de  reception. 

E. — Message  de  detresse 
[382]  §  5.  (r)  L'appel  de  detresse  doit 
6tre  suivi  aussitdt  que  possible  du  message 
de  detresse.  Ce  message  comprend  1'ap- 
pel de  detresse,  suivi  du  nom  du  navire,  de 
I'a6ronef  ou  du  v£hicule  en  detresse,  des 
indications  relatives  a  la  position  de 
celui-ci,  &  la  nature  de  la  d£tresse  et  a  la 
nature  du  secours  demand^  et,  6ventuelle- 
ment,  de  tout  autre  renseignement  qui 
pourrait  faciliter  ce  secours. 
[388]  (2)  Lorsque,  apres  avoir  transmis 
son  message  de  d6tresse,  un  a&ronef  ne 
peut  signaler  sa  position,  il  s'efforce 
d'&mettre  son  indicatif  d'appel  suffisam- 
ment  longtemps  pour  permettre  aux  sta- 
tions radiogoniom&triques  de  determiner 
sa  position. 

[384]  §  7.  (x)  En  r&gle  g6n£rale,  un  na- 
vire ou  un  a6ronef  a  la  mer  signale  sa  posi- 
tion en  latitude  et  longitude  (Greenwich), 
en  employant  des  chiffres  pour  les  degres 
et  les  minutes,  accompagnes  de  Tun  des 
mots  NORTH  ou  SOUTH  et  de  Tun  des 
mots  EAST  ou  WEST;  un  point  s&pare 
les  degres  des  minutes.  Eventuellement, 
le  relevement  vrai  et  la  distance  en  milles 
marins  par  rapport  &  un  point  g6ogra- 

Phique  connu  peuvent  toe  donnes. 
186]  (2)  En  regie  gen6rale,  un  a£ronef  en 
vpl  au-dessus  de  la  terre  signale  sa  posi- 
tion par  le  nom  de  la  locality  la  plus  proche, 
sa  distance  approximative  par  rapport 
a  celle-ci,  accompagn6e,  selon  le  cas,  de 
Tun  des  mots  NORTH,  SOUTH,  EAST 
ou  WEST  ou,  6ventuellernent,  des  mots 
indiquant  les  directions  intermediaires. 
[38<J]  §  8.  L'appel  et  le  message  de  de- 
tresse ne  sont  emis  que  sur  ordre  du  com- 
mandant ou  de  la  personne  responsable 
du  navire,  de  l'a£ronef  ou  de  tout  autre 
v6hicule  portant  la  station  mobile. 
[387J  §  9»  (i)  Le  message  de  d£tresse 
doit  £tre  r6pet6,  par  intervalles,  jusqu'a  ce 
qu'une  reponse  soit  rec.ue  et,  notamment, 
pendant  les  periodes  de  silence  pr£vues  i 
Tarticle  19,  §  2. 

[388]  (2)  Le  signal  d'alarme  peut  £gale- 
ment  §tre  rSpete,  si  nScessaire. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


173 


[389]  (3)  Xhe  intervals  must,  however,  be 
sufficiently  long  so  that  stations  preparing 
to  reply  may  have  time  to  put  their  trans- 
mitters in  operation. 

[39°]  (4)  In  case  the  on-board  station  in 
distress  receives  no  answer  to  a  distress 
message  sent  on  the  5OO-kc  (6oo-m)  wave, 
the  message  may  be  repeated  on  any  other 
available  wave  by  means  of  which  atten- 
tion might  be  attracted. 

[391]  §  jo.  Furthermore,  a  mobile  station 
which  becomes  aware  that  another  mobile 
station  is  in  distress,  may  transmit  the 
distress  message  in  either  of  the  following 
cases: 

[392]  (a)  when  the  station  in  distress  is 
not  itself  in  a  position  to  transmit  it; 
[393]  (&)  when  the  master  (or  his  relief) 
of  the  vessel,  aircraft,  or  other  vehicle 
carrying  the  station  which  intervenes,  be- 
lieve that  further  help  is  necessary. 
[394]  §  ii.  (i)  Stations  which  receive  a 
distress  message  from  a  mobile  station 
which  is  unquestionably  in  their  vicinity, 
must  acknowledge  receipt  thereof  at  once 
(see  §§  1 8  and  19  below),  taking  care  not 
to  interfere  with  the  transmission  of  the 
acknowledgment  of  receipt  of  the  said 
message  by  other  stations. 

[395]  (2)  Stations  which  receive  a  distress 
message  from  a  mobile  station  which  un- 
questionably is  not  in  their  vicinity,  must 
wait  a  short  period  of  time  before  ac- 
knowledging receipt  thereof,  in  order  to 
make  it  possible  for  stations  nearer  to  the 
mobile  station  in  distress  to  answer  and 
acknowledge  receipt  without  interference. 

F. — Distress  traffic 

[396]  §12.  Distress  traffic  shall  include  all 
messages  relative  to  immediate  assistance 
needed  by  the  mobile  station  in  distress. 

[m]  §  13.  Every  distress  traffic  radio- 
telegram  must  include  the  distress  signal 
transmitted  at  the  beginning  of  the  pre- 
amble. 

[398]  §  14.  The  control  of  distress  traffic 
shall  devolve  upon  the  mobile  station  in 
distress  or  upon  the  mobile  station  which, 
by  application  of  the  provisions  of  §  10 
(a),  has  sent  the  distress  call.  These  sta- 
tions may  delegate  the  control  of  the  dis- 
tress traffic  to  another  station. 
[8M]  §  15.  (l)  When  it  considers  it  in- 


[389]  (3)  Les  intervalles  doivent,  toute- 
fois,  £tre  suffisamment  longs  pour  que  les 
stations  qui  se  pr6parent  a  repondre  aient 
le  temps  de  mettre  leurs  appareils  emet- 
teurs  en  rnarche. 

[39°]  (4)  Dans  le  cas  ou  la  station  de  bord 
en  detresse  ne  rec,oit  pas  de  reponse  a  un 
message  de  detresse  transmis  sur  1'onde  de 
500  kc/s  (600  m),  le  message  peut  £tre 
repete  sur  toute  autre  onde  disponible,  £ 
1'aide  de  laquelle  1'attention  pourrait  £tre 
attiree. 

[39i]  §  10.  De  plus,  une  station  mobile  qui 
apprend  qu'une  autre  station  mobile  est 
en  detresse  peut  transmettre  le  message  de 
detresse  dans  Tun  des  cas  suivants: 

[392]  a)  la  station  en  detresse  n'est  pas  & 
m&me  de  le  transmettre  elle-m^me; 
[393]  b)  le  commandant  (ou  son  rempla- 
gant)  du  navire,  aeronef  ou  autre  vehicule 
portant  la  station  intervenante  juge  que 
d'autres  secours  sont  n£cessaires. 
[394]  §11.  (i)  Les  stations  qui  regoivent 
un  message  de  detresse  d'une  station  ^mo- 
bile se  trouvant,  sans  doute  possible, 
dans  leur  voisinage  doivent  en  accuser 
reception  imrnediatement  (voir  §§  18  et 
19  ci-apres),  en  prenant  soin  de  ne  pas 
troubler  la  transmission  de  1 'accuse  de 
reception  dudit  message  effectuee  par 
d'autres  stations. 

[395]  (2)  Les  stations  qui  regoivent  un 
message  de  detresse  d'une  station  mobile 
qui,  sans  doute  possible,  n'est  pas  dans 
leur  voisinage  doivent  laisser  s'6couler  un 
court  laps  de  temps  avant  d'en  accuser 
reception,  afin  de  permettre  &  des  stations 
plus  proches  de  la  station  mobile  en  de- 
tresse de  repondre  et  d'accuser  reception 
sans  brouillage. 

F. — Trafic  de  detresse 
[3»6]     §  I2.  Le  trafic  de  detresse  comprend 
tous  les  messages  relatifs  au  secours  im- 
m&iiat  n6cessaire  &  la  station  mobile  en 
detresse. 

[m]  §  13.  Tout  radiote!6gramme  d'un 
trafic  de  d&tresse  doit  comprendre  le  sig- 
nal de  detresse  transmis  au  debut  du 
preambule. 

[398]  §  14.  La  direction  du  trafic  de  de- 
tresse appartient  £  la  station  mobile  en 
detresse  ou  &  la  station  mobile  qui,  par 
application  des  dispositions  du  §  10,  lit- 
tera  a),  a  £mis  Fappel  de  detresse.  Ces 
stations  peuvent  c^der  la  direction  du 
trafic  de  d6tresse  4  une  autre  station. 
[399]  §  I5.  (!)  Lorsqu'elle  le  juge  indis- 


174 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


dispensable,  any  station  of  the  mobile 
service  in  the  proximity  of  the  ship,  air- 
craft, or  ^  vehicle  in  distress,  may  impose 
silence  either  to  all  the  stations  of  the 
mobile  service  in  the  zone,  or  to  any  one 
station  which  may  be  causing  interference 
with  the  distress  traffic.  In  both  cases, 
the  regulatory  abbreviation  (QRT)  shall 
be  used,  followed  by  the  word  DISTRESS ; 
these  indications  shall  be  addressed  "to 
all "  stations  or  to  one  station  only,  as  the 
case  may  be. 

[40°]  (2)  When  the  station  in  distress 
wishes  to  impose  silence,  it  shall  use  the 
above-mentioned  procedure,  substituting 
the  distress  signal  •  ••—•«••—«••  for  the 
word  DISTRESS. 

[401]  §  16.  (i)  Any  station  hearing  a  dis- 
tress call  must  conform  to  the  provisions 
of  §  5  (4). 

[402]     (2)  Any  station  of  the  mobile  serv- 
ice   which    becomes    aware   of    distress 
traffic  must  listen  to  this  traffic  even  if  it 
is  not  taking  part  in  it. 
[403]     (3)  por  the  entire  duration  of  dis- 
tress traffic,  it  shall  be  prohibited  for  all 
stations  which  are  aware  of  this  traffic  and 
which  are  not  taking  part  in  it: 
[4<H]     (a)  to  use  the  distress  wave  [500  kc 
(600  m)]  or  the  wave  on  which  the  distress 
traffic  is  taking  place; 
[406]     (b)  to  use  type-B  waves. 

[m]  (4)  A  station  of  the  mobile  service 
which,  while  following  distress  traffic  of 
which  it  is  aware,  is  able  to  continue  its 
normal  service,  may  do  so,  when  the  dis- 
tress traffic  is  well  established,  under  the 
following  conditions: 

[m]  (#)  the  use  of  the  waves  specified  in 
(3)  shall  be  forbidden; 
[408]  (&)  the  use  of  type-Ai  waves,  with 
the  exception  of  those  which  might  inter- 
fere with  the  distress  traffic,  shall  be  per- 
mitted; 

[409]  (c)  £t  ^^1  j-)e  allowed  to  use  type- 
A2  or  -A3  waves  only  in  the  band  or  bands 
allocated  to  the  mobile  service  and  which 
do  not  include  frequencies  used  for  distress 
traffic  [the  band  around  500  kc  (600  m) 
extends  from  385  to  550  kc  (779  to  545 
m)]. 

[41°]  §  17.  When  it  is  no  longer  necessary 
to  observe  silence,  or  when  the  distress 
traffic  is  ended,  the  station  which  has  con- 
trolled this  traffic  shall  send  on  the  distress 
wave,  and,  where  necessary,  on  the  wave 
used  for  this  distress  traffic,  a  message  ad- 
dressed "to  all",  indicating  that  the  dis- 


pensable, toute  station  du  service  mobile  a 
proximite  du  navire,  de  1'aeronef  ou  du 
v6hicule  en  d£tresse  peut  imposer  silence 
soit  a  toutes  les  stations  du  service  mobile 
dans  la  zone,  soit  &  une  station  qui  trou- 
blerait  le  trafic  de  dtoesse.  Dans  les 
deux  cas  il  est  fait  usage  de  Fabreviation 
r6glementaire  (QRT)  suivie  du  mot  DE- 
TRESSE;  suivant  le  cas,  les  indications 
sont  adress£es  "a  tous"  ou  seulement  & 
une  station. 

[40°]     (2)  Lorsque  la  station  en  d6tresse 

veut  imposer  silence,    elle    emploie    la 

procedure    qui    vient    d'etre    indiqu£e, 

en    substituant    le    signal    de    d<§tresse 

•  •——•••  au  mot  DETRESSE. 

[4°l]     §  16.  (i)  Toute  station  qui  entend 

un  appel  de  detresse  doit  se  conformer  aux 

prescriptions  du  §  5,  (4). 

[4°2]     (2)  Toute  station  du  service  mobile 

qui  a  connaissance  d'un  trafic  de  detresse 

doit  suivre  ce  trafic,  m£me  si  elle  n'y 

participe  pas. 

[403]     (3)  Pendant  toute  la  duree  d'un 

trafic  de  detresse,  il  est  interdit  &  toutes 

les  stations  qui  ont  connaissance  de  ce 

trafic  et  qui  n'y  participent  pas: 

[404]    a)   d'employer  1'onde  de  detresse 

[500  kc/s  (600  m)]  ou  Fonde  sur  laquelle 

a  lieu  le  trafic  de  ddtresse; 

[405]    j)  d'employer  des  ondes  du  type 

[406]     (4)  Une  station  du  service  mobile 

qui,  tout  en  suivant  un  trafic  de  detresse 

dont  elle  a  connaissance,  est  capable  de 

continuer  son  service  normal,  peut  le  faire, 

lorsque  le  trafic  de  d6tresse  est  bien  £tabli, 

dans  les  conditions  suivantes: 

[407]    a)  Femploi  des  ondes  indique"es  en 

(3)  est  interdit; 

[408]    Zrn'emploi  des  ondes  du  type  Ai,  & 

1'exception  de  celles  qui  pourraient  trou- 

bler  le  trafic  de  ddtresse,  ltd  est  permis ; 

[409]  c)  1'emploi  des  ondes  des  types  A2 
ou  A3  ne  lui  est  permis  que  dans  la  ou  les 
bandes  affect6es  au  service  mobile  et  qui 
ne  comprennent  pas  de  frequence  utilised 
pour  le  trafic  de  detresse  [la  bande  autour 
de  500  kc/s  (600  m)  s'6tend  de  385  a  550 
kc/s  (779  a  545  m)]. 

r10]  §  !/•  Lorsque  Tobservation  du  si- 
lence n'est  plus  n6cessaire  ou  que  le  trafic 
de  detresse  est  termin6,  la  station  qui  a  eu 
la  direction  de  ce  trafic  transmet  sur 
Fonde  de  detresse  et,  s'il  y  a  lieu,  sur 
1'onde  utilisee  pour  ce  trafic  de  d£tresse, 
un  message  adresse  ua  tous"  indiquant 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


175 


tress  traffic  is  ended.  This  message  shall 
take  the  following  form: 

CQ  call  "to  all"  (three  times), 

the  word  DE, 

call  signal  of  the  station  transmitting 
the  message, 

distress  signal, 

time  of  filing  of  the  message, 

name  and  call  signal  of  the  mobile 
station  which  was  in  distress, 

words  "distress  traffic  ended". 

G. — Acknowledgment  of  receipt  of  a  distress 
message 

[4U]  §  1 8.  The  acknowledgment  of  re- 
ceipt of  a  distress  message  shall  be  given 
in  the  following  form; 

call  signal  of  the  mobile  station  in 
distress  (three  times), 

the  word  DE, 

call  signal  of  the  station  acknowledg- 
ing receipt  (three  times), 

group  RRR, 

distress  signal. 

[4l2]  §  *9'  (0  Any  mobile  station  ac- 
knowledging receipt  of  a  distress  message 
must,  on  the  order  of  the  master  or  his 
relief,  give  the  following  information  as 
soon  as  possible,  in  the  order  indicated : 

its  name, 

its  position,  in  the  form  specified  in 

§7, 

the  maximum  speed  at  which  it  is  pro- 
ceeding towards  the  ship  (aircraft 
or  other  vehicle)  in  distress. 

[413]  (2)  Before  transmitting  this  mes- 
sage the  station  must  make  sure  that  it  is 
not  interfering  with  the  emissions  of  other 
stations  in  a  better  position  to  render  im- 
mediate assistance  to  the  station  in  dis- 
tress. 

H. — Repetition  of  a  distress  call  or  message 

[414]  §  20.  (i)  Any  station  of  the  mobile 
service  which  is  not  in  a  position  to  render 
assistance  and  which  has  heard  a  distress 
message  for  which  acknowledgment  of 
receipt  has  not  immediately  been  given, 
must  take  all  possible  steps  to  attract  the 
attention  of  stations  of  the  mobile  service 
which  are  in  a  position  to  furnish  help. 

[4i5]  (2)  For  this  purpose,  with  the  per- 
mission of  the  authority  responsible  for 
the  station,  the  distress  call  or  distress 


que  le  trafic  de  detresse  est  terming.  Ce 
message  affecte  la  forme  suivante : 

1'appel  £  tous  CQ  (trois  fois), 

le  mot  DE, 

1'indicatif  d'appel  de  la  station  qui 
transmet  le  message, 

le  signal  de  detresse, 

1'heure  de  depdt  du  message, 

le  nom  et  1'indicatif  d'appel  de  la 
station  mobile  qui  etait  en  d6tresse, 

les  mots  "trafic  detresse  terming". 

G. — Accuse  de  reception  d'un  message  de 
detresse 

[4u]  §  Ig.  L'accus6  de  reception  d'un 
message  de  detresse  est  donn£  sous  la 
forme  suivante : 

1'indicatif  d'appel  de  la  station  mobile 

en  detresse  (trois  fois), 
le  mot  DE, 
1'indicatif  d'appel  de  la  station  qui 

accuse  reception  (trois  fois), 
le  groupe  RRR, 
le  signal  de  detresse. 

[4i2]     |  j<^  (j;)  Toute  station  mobile  qui 
donne  I'accus6  de  r6ception  £  un  message 
de  d&tresse  doit,  sur  ordre  du  commandant 
ou  de  son  remplacant,   faire  connaitre, 
aussitdt  que  possible,  les  renseignements 
ci-apres  dans  1'ordre  indiqu6: 
son  nom, 
sa  position  dans  la  forme  indiqu6e 

au  §7, 

la  vitesse  maximum  avec  laquelle  elle 
se  dirige  vers  le  navire  (aeVonef  ou 
autre  vehicule)  en  detresse. 

[4ls]  (2)  Avant  d'6mettre  ce  message,  la 
station  devra  s'assurer  qu'elle  ne  brouille 
pas  les  6missions  d'autres  stations  mieux 
placets  pour  apporter  un  secours  imme- 
diat  a  la  station  en  d6tresse. 


H. — Repetition  d'un  appel  ou  d'un  message 
de  detresse 

[414]  §  20.  (i)  Toute  station  du  service 
mobile,  qui  n'est  pas  &  m&ne  de  fournir  du 
secours  et  qui  a  entendu  un  message  de 
detresse  auquel  il  n'a  pas  6t6  donne  im- 
mediatement  d'accuse  de  reception,  doit 
prendre  toutes  les  dispositions  possibles 
pour  attirer  1'attention  des  stations  du 
service  mobile  qui  sont  en  situation  de 
fournir  du  secours. 

[4*8]  (2)  Dans  ce  but,  avec  Tautorisa- 
tion  de  l'autorit£  responsable  de  la  sta- 
tion, 1'appel  de  detresse  ou  le  message  de 


176 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  317 


message  may  be  repeated;  this  repetition 
shall  be  made  at  full  power,  either  on  the 
distress  wave  or  on  one  of  the  waves  which 
may  be  used  in  case  of  distress  ( §  3  of  this 
article);  at  the  same  time  all  necessary 
steps  shall  be  taken  to  inform  the  author- 
ities whose  assistance  may  be  advanta- 
geous. 

[m]     (3)  A  station  which  repeats  a  dis- 
tress call  or  a  distress  message  shall  trans- 
mit after  it  the  word  DE  followed  by  its 
own  call  signal  three  times. 
[§§  21-28  omitted.] 

[Articles  23-30  omitted. — Working 
hours  of  stations  of  the  mobile  service. 
Order  of  priority  of  communications  in  the 
mobile  service.  Indication  of  the  station  of 
origin  of  radiotelegrams.  Routing  of  radio- 
telegrams.  Accounting  for  radiotelegrams. 
Aeronautical  radio  service  of  public  corre- 
spondence. Service  of  low-power  mobile 
radiotekphone  stations.  Special  services.] 

ARTICLE  31. — International  Radio   Con- 
sulting Committee  (C.C.I.R.) 

[B54]  §  I.  An  International  Radio  Con- 
sulting Committee  (C.C.I.R.)  shall  be 
charged  with  the  study  of  technical  radio 
questions  and  those  of  which  the  solution 
depends  principally  upon  considerations 
of  a  technical  character,  which  shall  be 
submitted  to  it  by  the  administrations 
and  radio  operating  companies. 
[«»]  §2.  (i)  It  shall  be_  formed  of  ex- 
perts of  the  administrations  and  radio 
operating  companies  or  groups  of  radio 
operating  companies  recognized  by  their 
respective  governments,  which  state  their 
desire  to  participate  in  its  work  and  under- 
take to  contribute,  in  equal  shares,  to  the 
common  expenses  of  its  meetings.  The 
statement  shall  be  addressed  to  the  ad- 
ministration of  the  country  in  which  the 
last  administrative  conference  was  held. 
[5M]  (2)  International  organizations  in- 
terested in  radio  studies,  who  shall  have 
been  designated  by  the  last  plenipoten- 
tiary or  administrative  conference,  and 
who  undertake  to  contribute  to  the  ex- 
penses of  the  meetings,  as  indicated  in  the 
preceding  subparagraph,  shall  also  be 
admitted. 

[5sr]  (3)  Each  administration,  company, 
group  of  companies,  or  international  or- 
ganization, shall  defray  the  personal  ex- 
penses of  its  own  experts. 


d&tresse  peut  6tre  r6pet6;  cette  r6p6tition 
est  faite  &  toute  puissance  soit  sur  Tonde 
de  detresse,  soit  sur  une  des  ondes  qui  peu- 
vent  £tre  employees  en  cas  de  detresse 
(§  3  du  present  article);  en  m£me  temps, 
toutes  les  dispositions  n6cessaires  seront 
prises  pour  aviser  les  autorites  qui  peu- 
vent  intervenir  utilernent 
[416]  (3)  Une  station  qui  r£pete  un  appel 
de  detresse  ou  un  message  de  d6tresse  le 
fait  suivre  du  mot  DE  et  de  son  propre 
indicatif  d'appel  transmis  3  fois. 
[§§  21-28  omis.] 

[Articles  23-30  omis. — Vacations  des 
stations  du  service  mobile.  Ordre  de  pri- 
orite  des  communications  dans  le  service 
mobile.  Indication  de  la  station  d'origine 
des  radiot&Ugrammes,  Direction  d  donner 
aux  radiotelegrammes.  Comptabilite  des 
radiotelegrammes.  Service  radioaerien  de 
correspondance  publigue.  Service  des  sta- 
tions radiotelephoniques  mobiles  de  faible 
puissance.  Services  spedaux.] 

ARTICLE  31. — Comiti  consultatif  interna- 
tional des  radiocommunications  (C.  C.I.R.*) 

[564]  §  i.  Un  comit6  consultatif  interna- 
tional des  radiocommunications  (C.C.I.R.) 
est  charg6  d'6tudier  les  questions  radio- 
61ectriques  techniques  et  celles  dont  la 
solution  depend  principalernent  de  con- 
sid6rations  d'ordre  technique  et  qui  lui 
sont  soumises  par  les  administrations  et  les 
compagnies  d 'exploitation  radioelectrique. 
[5S5]  §  2.  (i)  II  est  form6  d'experts  des 
administrations  et  des  compagnies  ou 
groupes  de  compagnies  d 'exploitation 
radioelectrique  reconnues  par  leurs  gou- 
vernements  respectifs,  qui  d6clarent  vou- 
loir  participer  a  ses  travaux  et  qui  s'en- 
gagent  a  contribuer,  par  parts  egales,  aux 
frais  communs  de  ses  reunions.  La  de- 
claration est  adress6e  a  radministration 
du  pays  ou  a  et6  tenue  la  derniere  con- 
f6rence  administrative, 
pee]  (2)  Sont  aussi  admis  des  organismes 
internationaux  s'int£ressant  aux  6tudes 
radioelectriques  qui  sont  designes  par  la 
derniere  conference  de  pl£nipotentiaires  ou 
administrative,  et  qui  s'engagent  a  con- 
tribuer  aux  frais  des  reunions  comme  il 
est  indiqu6  £  Talinea  pr6c6dent. 

[SB?]  (3)  Les  d6penses  personnelles  des 
experts  de  chaque  administration,  com- 
pagnie,  groupe  de  compagnies  ou  or- 
ganisme  international  sont  supportees  par 
ceux-ci. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


177 


[558]  §  3-  In  principle,  the  meetings  of  the 
C.C.I.R.  shall  take  place  every  5  years. 
However,  a  meeting  which  has  been 
scheduled  may  be  advanced  or  postponed 
by  the  administration  calling  it  at  the 
request  of  10  participating  administra- 
tions, if  the  number  and  nature  of  the 
questions  to  be  studied  warrant  it. 
[559]  §  4-  (*)  The  languages  and  method 
of  voting  used  in  the  plenary  assemblies, 
committees,  and  subcommittees,  shall  be 
those  adopted  by  the  last  plenipotentiary 
or  administrative  conference. 

peo]  (2)  However,  when  a  country  is  not 
represented  by  an  administration,  the  ex- 
perts of  the  recognized  operating  com- 
panies of  that  country,  in  one  body,  and 
regardless  of  their  number  shall  be  entitled 
to  one  deliberative  vote  only. 
[B«i]  §  5.  The  Director  of  the  Bureau  of 
the  Union,  or  his  representative,  and  the 
representatives  of  the  other  International 
Consulting  Committees,  C.C.LF.  and 
C.C.I.T.,  shall  have  the  right  to  take  part 
in  the  meetings  of  the  C.C.I.R.  in  an 
advisory  capacity. 

[5SZ]  §  6.  The  internal  organization  of  the 
C.C.I.R.  shall  be  governed  by  the  pro- 
visions of  appendix  14  to  the  present 
Regulations. 

ARTICLE  32. — Expenses  of  the  Bureau  of 

the  Union 

[6fl3]  §  I.  The  ordinary  expenses  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Union  for  the  radio  service 
must  not  exceed  the  amount  of  200,000 

Pold  francs  annually. 
84]  §  2.  However,  if  an  extraordinary 
expense  is  incurred  for  printed  matter  or 
for  various  documents  during  a  year,  and 
the  corresponding  revenue  is  not  col- 
lected during  the  same  year,  the  Bureau 
shall  be  authorized,  in  this  case  only,  to 
exceed  the  maximum  credit  provided  for, 
with  the  understanding  that  the  maxi- 
mum credit  for  the  following  year  shall  be 
reduced  by  an  amount  equal  to  the  abover 
mentioned  excess. 

[666]  §  3.  The  sum  of  200,000  gold  francs 
may  be  modified  later,  with  the  consent 
of  all  the  contracting  parties. 

ARTICLE  33. — Effective  Date  of  the  General 

Regulations 

[5«8]  The  present  General  Regulations  shall 
go  into  effect  on  the  first  day  of  January, 
one  thousand  nine  hundred  and  thirty-four. 


[55S]  §  3*  En  principe,  les  reunions  du 
C.C.LR.  ont  lieu  de  cinq  en  cinq  ans. 
Cependant,  une  reunion  fixee  peut  £tre 
avancee  ou  ajournee  par  1'administration 
qui  1'a  convoquee,  sur  demande  de  dix  ad- 
ministrations participantes,  si  le  nombre 
et  la  nature  des  questions  a  examiner  le 
justifient. 

[669]  §  4-  (i)  Les  langues  et  le  mode  de 
votation  employes  dans  les  assemblies 
plenieres,  commissions  et  sous-commis- 
sions, sont  ceux  adoptes  par  la  derniere 
conference  de  plenipotentiaries  ou  ad- 
ministrative. 

[56°]  (2)  Toutefois,  lorsqu'un  pays  n'est 
pas  represent^  par  une  administration,  les 
experts  des  compagnies  d'exploitation 
reconnues  de  ce  pays  disposent,  pour  leur 
ensemble  et  quel  que  soit  leur  nombre, 
d'une  seule  voix  deliberative. 
[6W]  §  5.  Le  directeur  du  Bureau  de 
1'Union  ou  son  representant  et  les  repre- 
sentants  des  autres  comites  consultatifs 
internationaux,  C.C.LF.  et  C.C.I.T.,  ont 
le  droit  de  participer,  avec  voix  consulta- 
tive, aux  reunions  du  C.C.I.R. 

[B62]  §  6.  L'organisation  interieure  du 
C.C.LR.  est  regie  par  les  dispositions  de 
1'appendice  14  au  present  Reglement. 

ARTICLE  32. — Frais  du  Bureau  de  V  Union 

[563]  §  i.  Les  frais  communs  du  Bureau 
de  1'Union  pour  le  service  des  radio  com- 
munications ne  doivent  pas  depasser,  par 
ann£e,  la  somme  de  200  ooo  francs-or. 
[564]  §  2.  Toutefois,  si  une  depense  ex~ 
ceptionnellement  elevee  en  imprimes  ou 
documents  divers  se  presente  au  cours 
d'une  annee,  sans  que  les  recettes  cor- 
respondantes  soient  encaiss&es  pendant  la 
m&ne  annee,  le  Bureau  est  autorise,  ex- 
clusivement  dans  ce  cas,  a  depasser  le 
credit  maximum  prevu,  sous  la  reserve 
que  le  maximum  du  credit  pour  1'annee 
suivante  sera  reduit  d'un  montant  egal  a 
1'excedent  susvise. 

[S6B]  §  3.  La  somme  de  200  ooo  francs-or 
pourra  §tre  modifiee  ulterieurement  du 
consentement  de  toutes  les  parties  con- 
tractantes. 

ARTICLE  33. — Mise  en  vigueur  du  Rlgle- 

ment  general 

[56«]  Le  present  Reglement  general  en- 
trera  en  vigueur  le  premier  Janvier  mil 
neuf  cent  trente-quatre. 


I78 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No. 


[567]  IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF  the  respective 
plenipotentiaries  have  signed  the  present 
General  Regulations  in  a  single  copy 
which  shall  remain  deposited  in  the 
archives  of  the  Spanish  Government  and  a 
copy  of  which  shall  be  forwarded  to  each 
government. 

Done  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932. 


pe^]  EN  FOI  DE  QUOI,  les  p!6nipotentiaires 
respectifs  ont  sign6  ce  Reglement  general 
en  un  exemplaire  qui  restera  d6pos6  aux 
archives  du  Gouyernement  de  1'Espagne 
et  dont  une  copie  sera  remise  &  chaque 
gouvernement. 

Fait  &  Madrid,  le  9  decembre  1932. 


[Signatures  and  Appendices  1-13  omitted;  the  regulations  were  signed  on  behalf  of  each  of 
the  signatories  of  the  convention  (No.  316,  ante),  with  exceptions  of  Ethiopia,  Luxemburg, 
Mexico,  and  Persia.] 


No.  317a 


Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  International  Consultative  Committee  for 
Radiocommunications  (C.C.LR.)-  Appendix  14  to  the  General 
Radio  Regulations  signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932. 

Reglement  interieur  du  Comite  Consultatif  International  des  Radio- 
communications  (C.C.I.R.).  Appendice  14  au  Reglement  gene- 
ral des  radiocommunications  signe  &  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932. 

Text  and  translation  from  U.  S.  Treaty  Series,  No.  867. 


[Translation] 

Article  i.  By  "managing  administra- 
tion" shall  be  meant  the  administration 
in  charge  of  organizing  a  meeting  of  the 
C.C.I. R.  The  managing  administration 
shall  start  taking  care  of  the  work  of  the 
C.C.LR.  five  months  after  the  closing  of 
the  preceding  meeting;  its  duties  shall  end 
five  months  after  the  closing  of  the  meet- 
ing it  has  organized. 

Art.  2.  The  managing  administration 
shall  set  the  place  and  definite  date  of  the 
meeting  which  it  has  charge  of  organizing. 
At  least  6  months  before  the  aforesaid 
date,  the  managing  administration  shall 
address  the  invitation  to  this  meeting  to 
all  the  administrations  of  the  Interna- 
tional Telecommunication  Union,  and, 
through  the  latter,  to  the  companies, 
groups  of  companies,  and  international 
radio  organizations  covered  in  article  31 
of  the  General  Radio  Regulations. 

Art.  3.— §  I.  The  first  meeting  of  the 
plenary  assembly  shall  be  opened  by  the 
managing  administration.  This  assembly 
shall  appoint  the  necessary  committees 
and  shall  distribute  to  them  the  questions 
to  be  dealt  with,  in  classes.  It  shall  also 
appoint  the  president  and  the  vice  presi- 


Article  x*  On  entend  par  "  administra- 
tion g£rante",  Tadministration  qui  est 
chargee  d 'organiser  une  reunion  du 
C.C.LR.  L'administration  g&rante  com- 
mence a  s'occuper  des  travaux  du  C.C.LR. 
cinq  mois  apr£s  la  cldture  de  la  reunion 
pr6c<§dente;  son  r61e  expire  cinq  mois  apr&s 
la  cldture  de  la  reunion  qu'elle  a  organised. 

Art.  2.  L'administration  g£rante  fixe 
le  lieu  et  la  date  definitive  de  la  r6union 
qu'elle  est  charged  d'organiser.  Au  moins 
six  mois  avant  la  date  susdite,  1'adminis- 
tration  g£rante  adresse  1'invitation  pour 
cette  reunion  a  toutes  les  administrations 
de  rilnion  internationale  des  tel&com- 
munications  et,  par  1'entremise  de  celles- 
ci,  aux  conipagnies,  aux  groupes  des  com- 
pagnies  et  aux  organismes  internationaux 
radio&ectriques  vis6s  &  Tarticle  31  du 
Reglement  g6n£ral  des  radiocommunica- 
tions. 

Art.  3.  §  r.  La  premiere  stance  de 
I'assembl6e  p!6niere  est  ouverte  par  Tad- 
ministration  g£rante.  Cette  assemble 
constitue  les  commissions  necessaires  et 
r£partit  entre  elles,  par  categories,  les 
questions  a  traiter.  Elle  d6signe  aussi  le 
president  et  le  vice-president  du  C.C.LR., 


Dec.  9,  1932 

dent  of  the  C.C.I.R.  and  the  chairman 
and  the  vice  chairman  or  vice  chairmen  of 
each  committee. 

§  2.  The  president  of  the  C.C.I.R. 
shall  conduct  the  plenary  assemblies;  in 
addition,  he  shall  have  the  general  super- 
vision of  the  work  of  the  meeting.  ^  The 
vice  chairmen  shall  assist  the  chairmen 
and  replace  them  in  case  of  absence. 

Art.  4.  The  secretariat  for  the  meeting 
of  the  C.C.I.R.  shall  be  provided  by  the 
managing  administration,  with  the  col- 
laboration of  the  Bureau  of  the  Union. 

Art.  5.  In  principle,  the  minutes  and 
reports  shall  give  only  the  main  points  of 
the  statements  of  the  delegates.  How- 
ever, each  delegate  shall  have  the  right  to 
require  the  insertion  into  the  minutes  or 
report,  of  any  statement  he  has  made, 
either  in  summary  or  verbatim,  on  condi- 
tion that  he  furnish  the  text  thereof  not 
later  than  the  morning  following  the  end 
of  the  meeting. 

Art.  6. — §i.  Any  delegation  which 
might,  for  serious  reasons,  be  prevented 
from  attending  meetings,  shall  have  the 
right  to  entrust  its  vote  or  votes  to  an- 
other delegation.  However,  a  single  dele- 
gation may  not,  under  these  circumstan- 
ces, combine  and  use  the  votes  of  more 
than  two  delegations,  including  its  own 
vote  or  votes. 

§  2.  A  proposal  shall  be  adopted  only  if 
supported  by  an  absolute  majority  of  the 
votes  cast;  in  case  of  a  tie  it  shall  fall. 
The  minutes  shall  show  the  number  of 
delegations  which  voted  in  favor  of  and  of 
those  who  voted  against  the  proposal. 

§  3.  Voting  shall  be  conducted  either 
by  raising  the  hands,  or,  at  the  request  of 
a  delegation,  by  roll  call  in  the  alpha- 
betical order  of  the  French  names  of  the 
participating  countries.  In  the  latter 
case,  the  minutes  shall  indicate  the  dele- 
gations who  voted  in  favor  of  and  those 
who  voted  against  the  proposal. 

Art.  7. — §  I.  The  committees  created 
by  the  plenary  assembly  may  be  divided 
into  subcommittees  and  the  subcom- 
mittees into  sub-subcommittees. 

§  2.  The  chairmen  of  the  committees 
shall  propose  the  selection  of  the  chairman 
of  each  subcommittee  and  sub-subcom- 
mittee for  the  ratification  of  the  respective 
committee.  The  committees,  subcom- 
mittees, and  sub-subcommittees  shall 
appoint  their  own  reporters. 

§3.  The   opinions   expressed   by   the 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


179 


le  president  et  le  ou  les  vice-presidents  de 
chaque  commission. 

§2.  Le  president  du  C.C.I.R.  dirige 
les  assemblies  plenieres;  il  a,  en  outre,  la 
direction  generale  des  travaux  de  la  re- 
union. Les  vice-presidents  present  assis- 
tance aux  presidents  et  les  remplacent  en 
cas  d 'absence. 

Art.  4.  Le  secretariat  de  la  r6union 
du  C.C.I.R.  est  assur^  par  radministra- 
tion  g6rante,  avec  la  collaboration  du 
Bureau  de  1' Union. 

Art.  5.  En  principe,  les  proces-verbaux 
et  les  rapports  ne  reproduisent  les  expos6s 
des  delegu6s  que  dans  leurs  points  princi- 
paux.  Cependant,  chaque  delegu6  a  le 
droit  de  demander  1'insertion  analytique 
ou  in  extenso  au  proces-verbal  ou  au 
rapport  de  toute  declaration  qu'il  a  faite, 
&  condition  qu'il  en  fournisse  le  texte  au 
plus  tard  le  matin  qui  suit  la  fin  de  la 
seance. 

Art.  6. — §  i.  Une  delegation  qui  serai  t 
emp6ch6e,  pour  une  cause  grave,  d'assister 
a  des  seances,  a  la  facult6  de  charger  de  sa 
ou  de  ses  voix  une  autre  delegation. 
Toutefois,  une  m£me  delegation  ne  peut 
reunir  et  disposer  dans  ces  conditions  des 
voix  de  plus  de  deux  delegations,  y  com- 
pris  la  sienne  ou  les  siennes. 

§  2.  Une  proposition  n'est  adopted  que 
si  elle  reunit  la  majorit6  absolue  des 
suffrages  exprimes;  en  cas  d'egalite  de 
voix,  elle  est  ecartee.  Les  proces-verbaux 
indiqueront  le  nombre  des  delegations  qui 
ont  vot6  pour  et  le  nombre  de  celles  qui 
ont  vot6  contre  la  proposition. 

§  3.  Les  votations  ont  lieu  soit  £  mains 
levees,  soit,  sur  demande  d'une  delega- 
tion, par  appel  nominal,  dans  1'ordre 
alphabetique  du  nom  frangais  des  pays 
participants.  Dans  ce  dernier  cas,  les 
proces-verbaux  indiqueront  les  deJ6ga- 
tions  qui  ont  vote  pour  et  celles  qui  ont 
vot6  contre  la  proposition. 

Art.  7. — §  i.  Les  commissions  institutes 
par  Tassemblee  pleniere  peuvent  se  sub- 
diviser  en  sous-commissions,  etles  sous- 
commissions  en  sous-sous-commissions. 

§  2.  Les  pr6sidents  des  commissions 
proposent  a  la  ratification  de  la  commis- 
sion respective  le  choix  du  president  de 
chaque  sous-commission  et  sous-sous- 
commission.  Les  commissions,  sous-com- 
missions et  sous-sous-commissions  nom- 
ment  elles-m£mes  leurs  rapporteurs. 

§  3.  Les  avis  emis  par  les  commissions 


i8o 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No. 


committees  must  be  marked:  "unani- 
mously" if  the  opinion  has  been  expressed 
by  the  voters  unanimously,  or:  "by  a 
majority"  if  the  opinion  was  adopted  by  a 
majority. 

Art.  8.  The  Bureau  of  the  Union  shall 
take  part  in  the  various  tasks  of  the 
C.C.I.R.  for  the  purpose  of  centralizing 
and  publishing  general  documents  for  the 
use  of  the  administrations. 

Art.  9. — §  i.  At  the  closing  session  of 
the  plenary  assembly,  the  president  shall 
communicate  the  list  of  opinions  and  that 
of  the  questions  left  to  be  solved  and  of 
the  new  questions  submitted  by  the  com- 
mittees. 

§  2,  The  president  shall  place  on  record 
the  final  adoption,  of  the  opinions  ex- 
pressed, if  any.  If  there  is  occasion  for 
voting  at  the  plenary  assembly,  the 
formulas  "unanimously"  or  "by  a  ma- 
jority" shall  apply  to  this  vote. 

§3.  Unsolved  and  new  questions  shall 
be  recorded  by  the  president  if  the  as- 
sembly is  in  favor  of  continuing  their 
study.  The  latter  shall  then  inquire  as  to 
what  administrations  wish  to  take  charge 
of  preparing  proposals  relating  to  these 
questions  and  what  other  administrations 
or  radio  operating  enterprises  are  willing 
to  collaborate  in  the  work.  On  the  basis 
of  the  replies,  he  shall  prepare  an  official 
list  of  the  questions  to  be  included  in  the 
agenda  of  the  following  meeting,  with  the 
indication  of  the  centralizing  administra- 
tions and  of  the  collaborating  administra- 
tions and  private  radio  operating  enter- 
prises. This  list  shall  be  included  in  the 
minutes  of  the  meeting. 

§  4.  In  the  same  session  of  the  plenary 
assembly,  the  C.C.I.R.,  upon  the  offer 
or  with  the  consent  of  the  interested 
delegation,  shall  designate  the  adminis- 
tration which  is  to  call  the  following  meet- 
ing and  the  approximate  date  of  that 
meeting, 

Art.  10. — §  i.  After  the  meeting  is 
closed,  the  preparation  of  questions  sub- 
mitted for  study  shall  be  entrusted  to  the 
administration  designated  to  organize  the 
next  meeting  (new  managing  administra- 
tion). The  unfinished  business  shall,  on 
the  contrary,  be  entrusted  to  the  former 
managing  administration,  which  shall  be 
in  charge  of  completing  it,  in  collaboration 
with  the  Bureau  of  the  Union. 

§  2.  The  former  managing  administra- 
tion shall  forward  the  documents  to  the 


doivent  porter  la  fprmule : "  &  Vunanimite  " 
si  1'avis  a  e"t£  e"mis  a  1'unanimite  des  vo- 
tants,  ou  la  formule:  "d  fa  majorite"  si 
1'avis  a  6t6  adopte  a  la  majorite. 

Art.  8.  Le  Bureau  de  T Union  prend 
part  aux  divers  travaux  du  C.C.I.R.  en 
vue  de  la  centralisation  et  de  la  publica- 
tion d'une  documentation  g6ne>ale  a 
1' usage  des  administrations. 

Art,  9. — §  i.  A  la  stance  de  c!6ture  de 
Fassembiee  pieniere,  le  president  com- 
munique la  liste  des  avis  et  celle  des 
questions  qui  restent  a  r6soudre  et  des 
questions  nouvelles  soumises  par  les 
commissions. 

§  2.  Le  president  constate,  le  cas  e'che'- 
ant,  Tadoption  definitive  des  avis  ex- 
prime's.  S'il  y  a  lieu  a  votation  a  1'as- 
sembiee  p!6ni£re,  les  fprmules  "&  Funa- 
nimite"  ou  "a la  majorite"  s'appliquent  a 
cette  votation. 

§  3.  Les  questions  non  r6solues  et  les 
questions  nouvelles  sont  enregistr6es  par 
le  president,  si  Fassemble'e  est  d'accord 
pour  en  faire  poursuivre  l'6tude.  Celui- 
ci  demande  ensuite  quelles  administra- 
tions desirent  se  charger  de  la  preparation 
des  propositions  se  rapportant  a  ces  ques- 
tions et  quelles  autres  administrations 
ou  entreprises  d'exploitation  radioelec- 
trique  sont  prates  a  collaborer  aux 
travaux.  D'apr&s  les  r&ponses,  il  dresse 
une  liste  officielle  des  questions  a  inscrire 
a  1'ordre  du  jour  de  la  reunion  suivante, 
avec  ^'indication  des  administrations 
centralisatrices  et  des  administrations  et 
entreprises  privies  d'exploitation  radio- 
eiectrique  collaboratrices.  Cette  liste  est 
inse're'e  au  proems- verbal  de  1'assemblee. 

§4.  A  la  m£me  stance  de  Tassemble'e 
pieniere,  le  C.C.I.R.,  sur  1'offre  ou  le 
consenternent  de  la  delegation  int&ress6e, 
designe  ^'administration  qui  convoquera 
la  reunion  suivante  et  la  date  approxi- 
mative de  cette  reunion. 

Art.  ro. — §  i.  Apres  la  c!6ture  de  la 
reunion,  la  preparation  des  questions 
mises  a  1' etude  est  confiee  a  radministra- 
tion  designed  pour  organiser  la  prochaine 
reunion  (administration  gerante  nou- 
velle).  Les  affaires  en  instance  sont, 
au  contraire,  confines  a  ^administration 
gerante  ancienne,  laquelle  est  chargee  de 
les  terminer,  en  collaboration  avec  le 
Bureau  de  1' Union. 

§  2.  L'ancienne  administration  gerante 
transmet  les  documents  a  la  nouvelle 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


new  managing  administration  not  later 
than  five  months  after  the  closing  of  this 
meeting. 

Art.  ii.  After  the  end  of  a  meeting,  all 
other  questions  which  the  administrations 
and  radio  operating  companies  wish  to 
submit  to  the  committee  shall  be  ad- 
dressed to  the  new  managing  administra- 
tion. This  administration  shall  include 
these  questions  in  the  agenda  of  the  next 
meeting.  However,  no  question  may  be 
included  in  this  agenda  if  it  has  not  been 
forwarded  to  the  managing  administra- 
tion at  least  six  months  before  the  date  of 
the  meeting. 

Art.  12. — §  I.  All  documents  pertaining 
to  a  meeting,  having  been  sent  to  the 
managing  administration  before  this 
meeting,  or  submitted  during  the  meeting, 
shall  be  printed  and  distributed  by  the 
Bureau  of  the  Union  in  collaboration  with 
the  managing  administration. 

§  2.  When  the  study  of  a  question  has 
been  entrusted  to  a  centralizing  adminis- 
tration, it  shall  devolve  upon  this  admin- 
istration to  take  the  necessary  steps 
toward  undertaking  the  study  of  the 
question.  The  collaborating  adminis- 
trations and  radio  operating  companies 
must  send  their  report  on  this  question 
directly  to  the  centralizing  administration, 
6  months  before  the  date  of  the  C.C.I.R. 
meeting,  in  order  that  the  said  adminis- 
tration may  consider  same  in  its  general 
report  and  in  its  proposals. 

§  3.  However,  the  administrations  and 
radio  operating  companies  shall  be  free  to 
send  another  copy  of  their  report  to  the 
Bureau  of  the  Union,  if  they  wish  these 
reports  to  be  communicated  immediately 
and  separately  to  all  the  administrations 
and  companies  concerned,  by  the  said 
Bureau. 

Art.  13.  The  managing  administration 
may  correspond  directly  with  the  admin- 
istrations and  radio  operating  companies 
recognized  as  being  capable  of  collaborat- 
ing in  the  work  of  the  committee.  It 
shall  send  at  least  one  copy  of  the  docu- 
ments to  the  Bureau  of  the  Union. 


administration  g6rante,  au  plus  tard  cinq 
mois  apres  la  cldture  de  cette  reunion. 

Art.  ii.  Apr&s  la  fin  d'une  reunion, 
toutes  les  autres  questions  que  les  ad- 
ministrations et  compagnies  d 'exploitation 
radioelectrique  desirent  soumettre  au 
comit£  sont  adress6es  &  la  nouvelle  ad- 
ministration gdrante.  Cette  administra- 
tion inscrit  ces  questions  &  1'ordre  du  jour 
de  la  prochaine  reunion.  Toutefois, 
aucune  question  ne  peut  y  £tre  comprise, 
si  elle  n'a  ete  communique^  a  1 'adminis- 
tration g6rante  au  moins  six  mois  avant 
la  date  de  la  reunion. 

Art.  12. — §  i.  Tous  les  documents  affe- 
rents  a  une  reunion,  envpyes  avant  cette 
r6union  a  1 'administration  gerante,  ou 
presentes  pendant  la  r6union,  sont  im~ 
primes  et  distribues  par  le  Bureau  de 
I1  Union  en  collaboration  avec  1'adminis- 
tration  gerante. 

§  2.  Lorsque  l'£tude  d'une  question  a 
et6  confiee  £  une  administration  centra- 
lisatrice,  il  appartient  &  cette  administra- 
tion de  faire  le  n6cessaire  pour  proc6der  a 
1' etude  de  la  question.  Les  administra- 
tions et  les  compagnies  d'exploitation 
radioelectrique  collaboratrices  doivent 
envoyer  directement  a  radministration 
centralisatrice  leur  rapport  sur  cette 
question,  six  mois  avant  la  date  de  la  r£- 
union  du  C.C.I.R.,  afin  que  ladite  ad- 
ministration en  puisse  tenir  compte  dans 
son  rapport  general  et  dans  ses  proposi- 
tions. 

§  3.  Toutefois,  les  administrations  et 
les  compagnies  d'exploitation  radioelec- 
trique sont  libres  d'envoyer  aussi  copie  de 
leur  rapport  au  Bureau  de  P  Union,  si  elles 
desirent  que  ces  rapports  soient  communi- 
ques imm6diatement  et  separement,  par 
les  soins  dudit  Bureau,  £  toutes  les  ad- 
ministrations et  compagnies  interess6es. 

Art.  13.  L 'administration  gerante  peut 
correspondre  directement  avec  les  ad- 
ministrations et  les  compagnies  d'exploita- 
tion radioelectrique  reconnues  susceptibles 
de  collaborer  aux  travaux  du  comit6. 
Elle  remet  au  moins  un  exemplaire  des 
documents  au  Bureau  de  FUnion. 


1 82 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 

No.  317b 


No. 


Final  Protocol  to  the  General  Radio  Regulations. 

December  9,  1932. 


Signed  at  Madrid, 


Protocole   final   au   Rdglement  general   des  radiocommunications. 
Signe  £  Madrid,  9  decembre  1932. 

Entered  into  force  January  r,  1934.* 
Text  and  translation  from  U.  S.  Treaty  Series,  No.  867. 


[Translation] 

At  the  time  of  signing  the  General 
Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Inter- 
national Telecommunication  Convention, 
the  undersigned  plenipotentiaries  take 
note  of  the  following  statements: 


Au  moment  de  proceder  &  la  signature 
du  Reglement  general  des  radio  com- 
munications annexe  &  la  Convention  in- 
ternationale  des  telecommunications,  les 
plenipotentiaires  soussignes  prennent  acte 
des  declarations  suivantes: 


The  plenipotentiaries  of  Germany  state 
formally  that  their  Government  reserves 
the  right  to  continue  using  the  waves  of 
105  kc  (2,857  m)  and  117.5  kc  (2,553  m) 
for  some  special  press  services  carried  on 
by  radiotelephony. 


II 

The  plenipotentiaries  of  the  Dutch  East 
Indies  state  formally  that  their  Govern- 
ment reserves  the  right  of  not  permitting 
the  mobile  stations  of  its  country  to  apply 
the  provisions  of  the  last  two  sentences  of 
article  26,  §  I  (i)  of  the  General  Regula- 
tions concerning  the  retransmission  of 
radiotelegrams  through  a  mobile  station 
for  the  sole  purpose  of  hastening  or 
facilitating  transmission,  instead  of  trans- 
mitting them  to  the  nearest  land  station. 


III 

The  plenipotentiaries  of  the  Union  of 
Soviet  Socialist  Republics  state  formally 
that  their  Government  reserves  the  right 
to  use  the  following  frequency  bands  for 
the  services  listed  below: 


150  to 

285  to 
315  to 
340  to 


285  kc  (2,000  to  1,053 
315  kc  (1,053  to     952  m 
340  kc  (    952  to     882  m 
420  kc  (    882  to     714  m 


Les  plenipotentiaires  de  TAllernagne 
declarent  formellement  que  leur  gouverne- 
ment  se  reserve  le  droit  de  rnaintenir 
V  usage  des  ondes  de  105  kc/s  (2  857  m)  et 
117,5  kc/s  (2  553  m)  pour  quelques  ser- 
vices de  presse  sp6ciaux  faits  par  radio- 
telephonie. 

II 

Les  plenipotentiaires  des  Indes  neerlan- 
daises  declarent  formellement  que  leur 
gouvernement  se  reserve  le  droit  de  ne 
pas  perrnettre  aux  stations  mobiles  de  son 
pays  d'appliquer  les  dispositions  des  deux 
dernieres  phrases  de  1'article  26,  §  I,  (i) 
du  Reglement  general  concernant  la  re- 
transmission des  radio tejegrammes  par 
I'lntermediaire  d'une  station  mobile  dans 
le  seul  but  d'acc£16rer  ou  de  faciliter  la 
transmission  au  lieu  de  les  transmettre  & 
la  station  terrestre  la  plus  proche, 

III 

Les  plenipotentiaires  de  1' Union  des 
Republiques  Sovietistes  Socialistes  de- 
clarent formellement  que  leur  gouverne- 
ment se  r6serve  le  droit  d'utiliser  les 
bandes  de  frequences  suivantes  pour  les 
services  ci-apres  enumeres: 

broadcasting 

radiobeacons 

aeronautical  services  and  radio  direction  finding 

broadcasting 


1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations  under  No.  3479,  August  30, 
1934. 


Dec.  9,  1932 


GENERAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


183 


515  to 

9,600  to 

11,700  to 

I2,IOO  tO 

15,350  to 
17,800  to 
21,550  to 

150  a 
285  a 
315  & 
340  & 
51531 

9  600  a 

1 1  700  & 

12  ioo  a 
15  350  a 
17800  a 
21  550  & 


550  kc  (  583  to  545  m)  aeronautical  services 
9,700  kc  (31.25  to  30.93  m)  broadcasting 
11,900  kc  (25.64  to  25,21  m)  fixed  services 
12,300  kc  (24.79  to  24.39  m)  broadcasting 
15,450  kc  (19.54  to  19.42  m)  broadcasting 
17,850  kc  (16.85  to  1 6. 8 1  m)  broadcasting 
21,750  kc  (13.92  to  13.79  m)  broadcasting 


285 
315 
340 
420 

550 

9700 

ii  900 

12300 

15450 
17850 
21750 


kc/s  (2000  ct  1053  m)  radiodiffusion 

kc/s  (1053  a    952  m)  radiophares 

kc/s  (  952  &    882  m)  services  aeronautiques  et  radiogoniometrie 

kc/s  (  882  a    714  m)  radiodiffusion 

kc/s  (  583  a    545  m)  services  aeronautiques 

kc/s  (31,25  a  30,93  in)  radiodiffusion 

kc/s  (25,64  a  25,21  m)  services  fixes 

kc/s  (24,79  &  24,39  m)  radiodiffusion 

kc/s  (19,54  a  19,42  m)  radiodiffusion 

kc/s  (16,85  a  16,81  m)  radiodiffusion 

kc/s  (13,92  a  13,79  m)  radiodiffusion. 


IV 


With  reference  to  the  statement  made 
in  this  protocol  by  the  plenipotentiaries  of 
the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics 
concerning  the  use  of  certain  frequency 
bands,  the  plenipotentiaries  of  China  state 
formally  that  their  Government  reserves 
the  right  to  take  any  steps  which  might 
become  necessary  with  a  view  to  protect- 
ing their  radio  communications  against 
any  interference  which  might  be  caused 
by  the  putting  into  execution  of  the  said 
reservations  of  the  Government  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics, 


IV 

Se  referant  a  la  declaration  faite  dans 
le  present  Protocole  par  les  pienipoten- 
tiaires  de  TUnion  des  Republiques  Sovie- 
tistes  Socialistes  relativement  a  rutilisa- 
tion  de  certaines  bandes  de  frequences,  les 
plenipotentiaires  de  la  Chine  dedarent 
formellement  que  leur  gouvernement  se 
reserve  le  droit  de  prendre  toutes  les 
mesures  qui  seraient  6ventuellement  n6- 
cessaires  en  vue  de  prot6ger  leurs  radio- 
communications  centre  tout  brouillage 
qui  pourrait  6tre  occasionne  par  la  mise  en 
execution  desdites  reserves  du  Gouverne- 
ment de  1'Union  des  Republiques  Sovie- 
tistes  Socialistes. 


The  plenipotentiary  of  Hungary  states 
formally  that  owing  to  the  reservations  of 
the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics 
concerning  article  7  of  the  General  Radio 
Regulations  (allocations  and  use  of  fre- 
quencies), his  Government  reserves  the 
right  of  not  enforcing  the  provisions  of  §  5 
(2)  of  the  said  article  in  the  case  where  the 
emissions  from  the  stations  installed  by 
the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  in 
application  of  its  reservation,  would  inter- 
fere seriously  with  the  emissions  of  the 
Hungarian  stations. 


VI 

Referring  to  the  statement  made  in  this 
protocol  by  the  plenipotentiaries  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  con- 
cerning the  use  of  certain  frequency  bands, 
the  plenipotentiaries  of  Japan  state  for- 
mally that  their  Government  reserves  the 


Le  pienipotentiaire  de  la  Hongrie  deV 
clare  formellement  qu'en  raison  de  la  re- 
serve de  1'Union  des  Republiques  Sovie- 
tistes  Socialistes  relative  &  Tarticle  7  du 
R&glement  g6n6ral  des  radiocommunica- 
tions  (repartition  et  emploi  des  fre- 
quences), son  gouvernement  se  reserve  le 
droit  de  ne  pas  appliquer  les  dispositions 
du  §  5,  (2)  dudit  article  dans  les  cas  ou  les 
emissions  des  postes  instalies  par  1' Union 
des  Republiques  Sovietistes  Socialistes, 
en  execution  de  ses  reserves,  brouilleraient 
d'une  maniere  grave  les  emissions  de 
stations  hongroises. 

VI 

Se  referant  £  la  declaration  faite  dans 
le  present  Protocole  par  les  plenipotenti- 
aires de  1'Union  des  Republiques  Sovie- 
tistes Socialistes  relativement  a  Futilisa- 
tion  de  certaines  bandes  de  frequences,  les 
plenipotentiaires  du  Japon  dedarent 


1 84 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No. 


right,  for  Japan,  Chosen,  Taiwan,  Kara- 
futo,  the  Kwantung  Leased  Territory  and 
the  South  Sea  Islands  under  Japanese 
mandate,  to  take  any  steps  which  might 
become  necessary  with  a  view  to  protect- 
ing their  radio  communications  against 
any  interference  which  might  be  caused 
by  the  putting  into  execution  of  the  said 
reservations  of  the  Government  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics. 


VII 

The  plenipotentiaries  of  Poland  and  of 
Rumania,  in  view  of  the  reservations  al- 
ready made  in  connection  with  the  use  of 
certain  frequency  bands,  state  formally 
that  in  the  case  where  no  satisfactory 
regional  (European  conference)  or  special 
arrangement  would  be  brought  about, 
each  of  their  Governments  reserves  the 
right  to  make  any  necessary  derogations 
in  regard  to  the  use,  for  the  aeronautical 
services,  of  certain  frequencies  outside  the 
bands  assigned  by  article  7  of  the  General 
Radio  Regulations,  in  agreement  with  the 
adjoining  countries  interested,  and  par- 
ticularly not  to  await  the  period  of  time 
provided  for  in  §  5  (2)  of  this  article,  for 
the  protection'  of  the  fundamental  needs 
of  these  services  against  any  interference 
which  might  be  caused  by  the  putting  into 
execution  of  the  above-mentioned  reser- 
vations. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF  the  plenipoten- 
tiaries listed  below  have  drawn  up  this 
protocol  and  have  signed  it  in  one  copy 
which  shall  remain  in  the  archives  of  the 
Government  of  Spain  and  of  which  one 
copy  shall  be  forwarded  to  each  govern- 
ment signatory  of  the  said  protocol. 

Done  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932. 


formellement  que  leur  gouvernement  se  re- 
serve pour  le  Japon,  Chosen,  Taiwan, 
Karafuto,  le  Territoire  £  bail  du  Kwan- 
tung et  les  lies  des  Mers  du  Sud  sous 
mandat  japonais,  le  droit  de  prendre 
toutes  les  mesures  qui  seraient  eventuel- 
lement  n6cessaires  en  vue  de  proteger  leurs 
radiocommunications  centre  tout  brouil- 
lage  qui  pourrait  6tre  occasionn6  par  la 
mise  en  execution  desdites  reserves  du 
Gouvernement  de  T  Union  des  Republi- 
ques  Sovietistes  Socialistes. 

VII 

Les  plenipotentiaires  de  la  Pologne  et 
de  la  Roumanie,  vu  les  reserves  dej£ 
formulas  au  sujet  de  Tutilisation  de 
certaines  bandes  de  frequences,  declarent 
formellement  que,  dans  le  cas  oti  un  ar- 
rangement regional  (Conference  europe- 
enne)  ou  particulier  satisfaisant  n'abou- 
tirait  pas,  chacun  de  leurs  gouvernements 
se  reserve  le  droit  de  faire  eventuellement 
des  derogations  en  ce  qui  concerne  Tutili- 
sation  pour  les  services  a6ronautiques  de 
certaines  frequences  en  dehors  des  bandes 
attributes  par  1'article  7  du  Reglement 
general  des  radiocommunications,  en 
accord  avec  les  pays  voisins  interesses,  et 
specialement  de  ne  pas  attendre  le  delai 
prevu  au  §  5,  (2)  de  cet  article,  pour 
sauvegarder  les  besoins  fondamentaux 
de  ces  services  centre  tout  brouillage  qui 
pourrait  £tre  occasion^  par  la  mise  en 
execution  des  reserves  ci-avant  mention- 
nees. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI  les  plenipotentiaires  ci- 
apres  ont  dress6  le  present  Protocole  et  ils 
1'ont  sign6  en  un  exemplaire  qui  restera 
dans  les  archives  du  Gouvernement  de 
1'Espagne  et  dont  une  copie  sera  remise 
&  chaque  gouvernement  signataire  dudit 
Protocole. 

Fait  £  Madrid,  le  9  decembre  1932. 


[Signatures  omitted;  the  final  protocol  was  signed  on  behalf  of  each  of  the  signatories  of 
the  general  radio  regulations.] 


Dec.  9,  1932  ADDITIONAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 

No.  318 


185 


Additional  Radio  Regulations  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication 
Convention.     Signed  at  Madrid,  December  9,  1932. 

Reglement  additionnel  des  radiocommunications  annexe  &  la  Con- 
vention des  telecommunications.  Signe  a  Madrid,  9  decembre 
1932- 

ACCESSIONS.  On  July  I,  1937,  these  regulations  had  been  approved  or  acceded  to  by  all 
the  states  which  had  ratified  or  acceded  to  the  telecommunication  convention  (No.  316, 
ante),  except  Afghanistan,  Albania,  Canada,  Dominican  Republic,  Ethiopia,  Luxemburg, 
United  States  of  America,  and  Yemen,  and  by  Bolivia,  Greece,  and  Sweden. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  The  text  of  these  regulations  is  also  published  in  151  League  of  Nations 
Treaty  Series,  p.  448.  (See  the  bibliography  under  No.  316,  ante.) 

Entered  into  force  January  i,  1934. x 

Text  and  translation  from  U.  S.  Treaty  Series,  No.  867. 

[Translation] 

ARTICLE  I. — Application  of  the  Telegraph 
and  Telephone  Regulations  to  Radio 
Communication 

[«8]  §  i.  The  provisions  of  the  Tele- 
graph and  Telephone  Regulations  shall  be 
applicable  to  radio  wherever  the  Radio 
Regulations  do  not  provide  otherwise. 

[m]  §2.  (i)  Radiotelegrams  shall  be 
drafted  and  dealt  with  in  conformity  with 
the  provisions  set  forth  in  the  Telegraph 
Regulations  for  telegrams,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  cases  provided  for  in  the 
following  articles. 

[87°]  (2)  The  use  of  letter  groups  taken 
from  the  International  Code  of  Signals 
shall  be  allowed  in  radiotelegrams  ex- 
changed with  ships. 

[m]  §3-  Since  the  word  RADIO  or 
AERADIO,  respectively,  is  always  added, 
in  the  nomenclature,  to  the  name  of  the 
land  station  mentioned  in  the  address  of 
a  radiptelegram,  this  word  must  not  be 
given  in  the  transmission  of  a  radiotele- 
gram,  as  a  service  instruction  before  the 
preamble. 

ARTICLE  2. — Charges 

[l72]  §  i.  The  charge  for  a  radio  telegram 
originating  in  or  intended  for  a  mobile 
station,  or  exchanged  between  mobile  sta- 
tions shall  include,  as  the  case  may  be: 


ARTICLE  i. — Application  des  Rlglements 
telegraphique  et  telephonigue  aux  radio- 
communications 

[568]  §  I.  Les  dispositions  des  Regie* 
ments  te!6graphique  et  telephonique  sont 
applicables  aux  radiocommunications  en 
tant  que  les  Reglements  des  radiocom- 
munications n'en  disposent  pas  autrement. 
[669]  §  2.  (i)  Les  radiot61egrammes  sont 
rediges  et  trait6s  conformement  aux  dis- 
positions fixees  dans  le  Reglement  telegra- 
phique^ pour  les  telegrammes,  sauf^  les 
exceptions  prevues  dans  les  articles 
suivants. 

[67°]  (2)  L'emploi  de  groupes  de  lettres 
du  Code  International  de  Signaux  est  per- 
mis  dans  les  radiotelegrammes  ^changes 
avec  les  navires. 

[5n]  §  3.  Le  mot  RADIO  ou  AERA- 
DIO, respectivement,  etant  toujours 
ajoute,  dans  la  nomenclature,  au  nom  de 
la  station  terrestre  mentionnee  dans  Fad- 
resse  des  radiot616grammes,  ce  mot  ne 
doit  pas  toe  donne,  comme  indication  de 
service,  en  t£te  du  pr£ambule,  dans  la 
transmission  d'un  radiot616gramme. 

ARTICLE  2. — Taxes 

[872]  §  i.  La  taxe  d'un  radiot&£gramme 
originaire  ou  a  destination  d'une  station 
mobile  ou  6chang6  entre  stations  mobiles 
comprend,  selon  le  cas: 


1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3479,  August  30,  1934. 


186 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  318 


[m]  (a)  the  on-board  charge  accruing  to 
the  mobile  station  of  origin  or  destination, 
or  to  both  these  stations; 
[m]  (b)  the  land  charge  or  charges  [see 
§  3  (2)]j  accruing  to  the  land  station  or 
stations  which  participate  in  the  trans- 
mission ; 

[five]  (<;)  the  charge  for  transmission  over 
the  general  system  of  telecommunication 
channels,  computed  in  accordance  with 
the  usual  rules; 

[576]  (d)  the  charge  pertaining  to  supple- 
mentary services  requested  by  the  sender. 
[B77]  §2.  (l)  The  land  and  on-board 
charges  shall  be  determined  in  accordance 
with  the  rate  per  word  pure  and  simple, 
with  no  minimum  charge. 
[678]  (2)  The  maximum  land  charge  shall 
be  sixty  centimes  (o  fr.  60)  per  word ;  the 
maximum  on-board  charge  shall  be  forty 
centimes  (o  fr.  40)  per  word. 
[579]  (3)  The  land  and  on-board  charges 
pertaining  to  radiotelegrams  which  con- 
cern stations  not  yet  listed  in  the  nomen- 
clature may  be  fixed  by  the  charging 
office,  as  part  of  its  duties,  at  the  maxi- 
mum rates  provided  above. 
[58°]  (4)  However,  each  administration 
reserves  the  right  to  fix  and  authorize  land 
or  on-board  charges  higher  than  the  max- 
ima indicated  above,  in  the  case  of  land  or 
aircraft  stations  where  the  cost  of  installa- 
tion or  operation  is  exceptionally  high. 


[68i]  (5)  The  radiotelegraph  charge  for 
CDE  radiotelegrams  shall  be  reduced  in 
the  same  proportion  as  the  telegraph 
charge  for  these  same  radiotelegrams. 
[***]  (6)  In  the  traffic  between  on-board 
stations,  whether  it  be  direct  or  through 
the  medium  of  a  single  coast  station,  the 
charge  applicable  to  CDE  telegrams  shall 
always  equal  six  tenths  (£f o)  of  the  full 
charge. 

[ess]  (7)  The  reduction  granted  shall  al- 
ways be  applicable  to  the  radiotelegraph 
retransmission  charge,  if  any. 
[S84]  (g)  i^  minimum  charge  equal  to 
the  charge  for  five  words,  as  provided  for 
in  article  26,  §  3  (a)  of  the  Telegraph  Regu- 
lations, shall  not  be  applicable  to  the 
radiotelegraph  portions  of  the  route  of 
radiotelegrams. 

I586]  §3-  GO  When  ^  a  land  station  is 
used  as  an  intermediary  between  mobile 
stations,  only  one  land  charge  shall  be 
collected.  If  the  land  charge  applicable 
to  communications  with  the  sending  mo- 


[m]  a)  la  taxe  de  bord,  revenant  a  la 
station  mobile  d'origine  ou  de  destina- 
tion, ou  a  ces  deux  stations; 
[B74]  6)  la  ou  les  taxes  terrestres  [voir  §  3, 
(2)]  revenant  a  la  station  terrestre  ou  aux 
stations  terrestres  qui  participent  a  la 
transmission ; 

[578]  c)  la  taxe  pour  la  transmission  sur 
le  r6seau  g6n£ral  des  voies  de  tel£com- 
munication,  calculee  d'apres  les  regies 
ordinaires ; 

[576]  d)  la  taxe  aff&rente  aux  operations 
accessoires  demandees  par  I'exp&diteur. 
[677]  §2.  (i)  La  taxe  terrestre  et  celle  de 
bord  sont  fix6es  suivant  le  tarif  par  mot 
pur  et  simple,  sans  perception  d'un 
minimum. 

[678]  (2)  La  taxe  maximum  terrestre  est 
de  soixante  centimes  (o  fr.  60)  par  mot;  la 
taxe  maximum  de  bord  est  de  quarante 
centimes  (o  fr.  40)  par  mot. 
t579]  (3)  Les  taxes  terrestres  ou  de  bord 
aff&rentes  aux  radio  1 61  ^grammes  mt6res- 
sant  des  stations  non  encore  inscrites  a  la 
nomenclature  peuvent  tee  fixees  d'office 
par  le  bureau  taxateur  aux  maxima  vis6s 
ci-avant. 

[58°]  (4)  Toutefois,  chaque  administra- 
tion se  reserve  la  facult6  de  fixer  et 
d'autoriser  des  taxes  terrestres  ou  de  bord 
superieures  aux  maxima  indiqu6s  ci- 
avant,  dans  le  cas  de  stations  terrestres 
ou  d'a&ronef  exceptionnellement  on6- 
reuses,  du  fait  de  Installation  ou  de 
Texploitation. 

[681]  (5)  La  taxe  radiot616graphique  des 
radiotel£grammes  CDE  est  reduite  dans 
les  mSmes  proportions  que  la  taxe  tel£- 
graphique  de  ces  m£mes  radiote!6grammes. 
[582]  (6)  Dans  le  trafic  entre  postes  de 
bord,  direct  ou  par  Tinterm^diaire  d'une 
seule  station  c6tiere,  la  taxe  &  appliquer 
aux  radiot£l6grammes  CDE  est  toujours 
6gale  aux  six  dixi&mes  (%o)  de  la  taxe 
pleine. 

[B83J]  (7)  La  reduction  accorded  est  tou- 
jours applicable  aux  taxes  Sventuelles  de 
retransmission  radiote!6graphique. 
[584]  (8)  Le  minimum  de  perception  £gal 
a  la  taxe  de  cinq  mots,  preVu  a  Tarticle 
26,  §3,  a)  du  R&glement  t616graphique, 
n'est  pas^  applicable  au  parcours  radio- 
te!6graphique  des  radiotel6grammes« 

[885]  §3'  (i)  Lorsqu'une  station  terrestre 
est  utilisee  comme  intermMiaire  entre  des 
stations  mobiles,  il  n'est  perc.u  qu'une 
seule  taxe  terrestre.  Si  la  taxe  terrestre 
applicable  aux  ^changes  avec  la  station 


Dec.  9,  1932 


ADDITIONAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


I87 


bile  station  differs  from  that  applicable 
to  communications  with  the  receiving 
mobile  station,  the  higher  of  these  two 
charges  shall  be  collected.  There  may  be 
collected,  in  addition,  a  territorial  tele- 
graph charge  equal  to  that  referred  to  in 
§  5  below,  as  being  applicable  to  trans- 
mission over  the  telecommunication 
channels. 

[586]  (2)  When,  upon  request  of  the 
sender,  two  land  stations  are  used  as  in- 
termediaries between  two  mobile  sta- 
tions, the  land  charge  of  each  station  as 
well  as  the  telegraph  charge  covering  the 
route  between  the  two  stations  shall  be 
collected. 

[68r]  §  4.  Retransmission  service  and 
charges  shall  be  regulated  by  article  7  of 
these  Regulations. 

[588]  §5-  (i)  Where  radiotelegrams  origi- 
nating in  or  addressed  to  a  country 
are  exchanged  directly  by  or  with  land 
stations  of  that  country,  the  telegraph 
charge  applicable  to  the  transmission  over 
the  internal  telecommunication  channels 
of  that  country  shall,  in  principle,  be 
computed  according  to  the  rate  per  word, 
pure  and  simple,  without  a  minimum 
charge.  This  charge  shall  be  reported  in 
gold  francs  to  the  Bureau  of  the  Union  by 
the  administration  having  jurisdiction 
over  the  land  stations. 
[889]  (2)  When  a  country  finds  itself 
obliged  to  apply  a  minimum  charge  by 
reason  of  the  fact  that  its  internal  tele- 
communication system  is  not  operated  by 
the  government,  it  shall  so  inform  the 
Bureau  of  the  Union  which  shall  mention 
in  the  nomenclature  the  amount  of  this 
minimum  charge  following  the  indication 
of  the  charge  per  word.  In  the  absence  of 
such  notice  the  charge  to  be  applied  shall 
be  the  charge  per  word,  pure  and  simple, 
without  a  minimum  charge. 
[59°]  §6.  The  country  on  whose  terri- 
tory there  is  established  a  land  station 
serving  as  an  intermediary  for  the  ex- 
change of  radiotelegrams  between  a 
mobile  station  and  another  country  shall 
be  considered,  for  the  purpose  of  applying 
telegraph  charges,  as  the  country  of  origin 
or  of  destination  of  these  radiotelegrams, 
and  not  as  the  transit  country. 
[fi91]  §  7.  The  total  charge  for  radiotele- 
grams shall  be  collected  from  the  sender, 
with  the  exception: 

[692]  jg-t^  Of  those  special  delivery  charges 
which  are  to  be  collected  on  delivery  [art. 
62 >  §  5  (2)  of  the  Telegraph  Regulations]; 


mobile  qui  transmet  est  diff £rente  de  celle 
applicable  aux  ^changes  avec  la  station 
mobile  qui  regoit,  c'est  la  plus  elevee  de 
ces  deux  taxes  qui  est  perdue.  II  peut 
8tre  pergu,  en  outre,  une  taxe  territoriale 
teiegraphique,  6gale  &  celle  qui,  au  §  5 
ci-apres,  est  indiqu6e  comme  etant  ap- 
plicable a  la  transmission  sur  les  voies  de 
telecommunication. 

[586]  (2)  Lorsque,  sur  la  demande  de 
I'expediteur,  deux  stations  terrestres  sont 
utilises  comme  intermediates  entre  deux 
stations  mobiles,  la  taxe  terrestre  de 
chaque  station  est  pergue  ainsi  que  la 
taxe  teiegraphique  aff&rente  au  parcours 
entre  les  deux  stations. 
[fi87]  §  4.  Le  service  et  les  taxes  des  re- 
transmissions sont  regies  par  Tarticle  7 
du  present  R&glement. 
[588]  §  5-  (i)  Dans  le  cas  oft  des  radio- 
teiegrammes  originaires  ou  &  destination 
d'un  pays  sont  6chang6s  directement  par 
ou  avec  les  stations  terrestres  de  ce  pays, 
la  taxe  teiegraphique  applicable  a  la  trans- 
mission sur  les  voies  interieures  de  tele"- 
communication  de  ce  pays  est,  en  prin- 
cipe,  calculee  suivant  le  tarif  par  mot  pur 
et  simple,  sans  perception  d'un  minimum. 
Cette  taxe  est  notified,  en  francs-or,  au 
Bureau  de  1' Union  par  Tadministration 
dont  reinvent  les  stations  terrestres. 

[gas]  (2)  Lorsqu'un  pays  se  trouve  dans 
1'obligation  d'imposer  un  minimum  de  per- 
ception, en  raison  du  fait  que  son  syst&me 
de  telecommunications  interieures  n'est 
pas  exploite  par  le  gouvernement,  il  doit 
en  informer  le  Bureau  de  1'Union,  qui 
mentionne  dans  la  nomenclature  le  mon- 
tant  de  ce  minimum  de  perception  a  la 
suite  de  Pindication  de  la  taxe  par  mot. 
A  defaut  d'une  pareille  mention,  la  taxe  & 
appliquer  est  celle  par  mot  pur  et  simple, 
sans  perception  d'un  minimum. 
[59°]  §  6.  Le  pays  sur  le  territoire  duquel 
est  etablie  une  station  terrestre  servant 
d 'intermediate  pour  1'echange  de  radio- 
teiegrammes  entre  une  station  mobile  et 
un  autre  pays  est  consider^,  en  ce  qui  con- 
cerne  1'application  des  taxes  t£l£gra- 
phiques,  comme  pays  de  provenance  ou  de 
destination  de  ces  radioteiegrammes  et 
non  comme  pays  de  transit. 
[69*]  §  7.  La  taxe  totale  des  radioteie- 
grammes est  pergue  sur  1'expediteur,  £ 
Texception: 

[592]  i°  c[es  fj-ais  d'expres  &  percevoir  & 
1'arrivee  [article  62,  §  5  (2)  du  R&glement 
teiegraphique] ; 


188 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  318 


[5W]  2d.  of  the  charges  applicable  to 
combinations  or  alterations  of  words 
which  are  not  accepted  and  which  are 
found  by  the  office  or  mobile  station  of 
destination  (art.  23,  §  I  of  the  Telegraph 
Regulations);  such  charges  shall  be  col- 
lected from  the  addressee. 
[B9*]  §  8.  The  word  count  by  the  office  of 
origin  shall  be  decisive  in  the  case  of  radio- 
telegrams  addressed  to  mobile  stations 
and  the  word  count  by  the  mobile  station 
of  origin  shall  be  decisive  in  the  case  of 
radio  telegrams  originating  with  mobile 
stations,  both  for  transmission  and  for 
international  accounts.  However,  when 
the  radiotelegram  is  expressed  wholly  or 
partly  either  in  one  of  the  languages  of 
the  country  of  destination,  in  the  case  of 
radiptelegrams  originating  with  mobile 
stations,  or  in  one  of  the  languages  of  the 
country  to  which  the  mobile  station  is 
subject,  in  the  case  of  radiotelegrams  ad- 
dressed to  mobile  stations,  and  when  the 
radiotelegram  contains  combinations  or 
alterations  of  words  contrary  to  the  usage 
of  that  language,  the  office  or  mobile 
station  of  destination,  as  the  case  may  be, 
shall  have  the  right  to  recover  from  the 
addressee  the  amount  of  the  charge  not 
collected.  In  the  event  of  refusal  to  pay, 
the  radiotelegram  may  be  withheld. 
[69B]  §  9.  No  charge  accruing  from  radio 
transmission  in  the  mobile  service  shall  be 
collected  for  radiotekgrams  of  immediate 
general  interest  falling  within  the  follow- 
ing classes: 

[59B]  (a)  distress  messages  and  replies 
thereto ; 

[69*]  (&)  notices  originating  in  mobile 
stations  regarding  the  presence  of  icebergs, 
derelicts  and  mines,  or  reporting  cyclones 
and  storms; 

[B98]  (c)  notices  reporting  sudden  phe- 
nomena threatening  aerial  navigation  or 
the  sudden  appearance  of  obstacles  at 
airdromes; 

[fi99]  W  notices  originating  in  mobile 
stations  advising  of  sudden  changes  in  the 
location  of  buoys,  functioning  of  light- 
houses, route-indicating  apparatus,  etc. ; 

[«°°]  (e)  service  notices  relating  to  mo- 
bile services. 

[6fll]  §  10.  (i)  The  land  and  on-board 
charges  shall  be  reduced  by  50  percent  for 
press  radiotelegrams  originating  in  an  on- 
board station  and  addressed  to  land. 
These  radiotelegrams  shall  be  subject  to 
the  conditions  of  acceptance  provided  for 


[693]  2°  des  taxes  applicables  aux  reunions 
ou  alterations  de  mots  non  admises,  con- 
statees  par  le  bureau  ou  la  station  mobile 
de  destination  (article  23,  §  I,  du  Regie- 
ment  te!6graphique) ;  ces  taxes  sont  per- 
gues  sur  le  destinataire. 

[694]  §  8.  Le  compte  des  mots  par  le 
bureau  d'origine  est  d£cisif  au  sujet  des 
radiotel6grammes  £  destination  de  sta- 
tions mobiles,  et  celui  de  la  station  mobile 
d'origine  est  d6cisif  au  sujet  des  radiotele"- 
grammes  originaires  des  stations  mo- 
biles, tant  pour  la  transmission  que  pour 
les  comptes  internationaux.  Toutefois, 
quand  le  radiotel^gramme  est  r<§dig6  to- 
talement  ou  partiellement  soit  dans  une 
des  langues  du  pays  de  destination,  en 
cas  de  radiot616grammes  originaires  de 
stations  mobiles,  soit  dans  une  des  langues 
du  pays  dont  depend  la  station  mobile, 
s'il  s'agit  de  radiotel ^grammes  &  destina- 
tion de  stations  mobiles,  et  que  le  radio- 
tel6gramme  contient  des  reunions  ou  des 
alterations  de  mots  contraires  £ 1'usage  de 
cette  langue,  le  bureau  ou  la  station  mo- 
bile de  destination,  suivant  le  cas,  a  la 
facult6  de  recouvrer  sur  le  destinataire  le 
montant  de  la  taxe  non  perdue.  En  cas 
de  refus  de  paiement,  le  radiote!6gramme 
peut  §tre  arr§t£. 

[595]  §  9-  Aucune  taxe  aff6rente  au  par- 
cours  radio&ectrique,  dans  le  service  mo- 
bile, n'est  perdue  pour  les  radiot616- 
grammes  d'un  intent  general  immediat, 
rentrant  dans  les  categories  suivantes: 
[69B]  a)  messages  de  d£tresse  et  r£ponses 
&  ces  messages; 

[597]  b)  avis  originaires  des  stations  mo- 
biles sur  la  presence  de  glaces,  £paves  et 
mines,  ou  annongant  des  cyclones  et 
temp^tes; 

[508]  c)  avis  annongant  des  ph£nomenes 
brusques  menac.ant  la  navigation  a6rienne 
ou  la  survenue  soudaine  d'obstacles  dans 
les  aerodromes ; 

I599]  d)  avis  originaires  des  stations  mo- 
biles, notifiant  des  changements  soudains 
dans  la  position  des  bou6es,  le  fonctionne- 
ment  des  phares,  appareils  de  balisage, 
etc.; 

[60°]  e)  avis  de  service  relatifs  aux  ser- 
vices mobiles. 

[6°l]  §  10.  (i)  Les  taxes  terrestres  et  de 
bord  sont  reduites  de  50%  pour  les  radio- 
teiegrammes  de  presse  originaires  d'une 
station  de  bord  et  destin6s  £  la  terre  ferme. 
Ces  radiotelegrammes  sont  soumis  aux 
conditions  d'admission  preVues  par  le 


Dec.  9,  1932 


ADDITIONAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


189 


by  the  International  Telegraph  Regula- 
tions for  press  telegrams.  For  those 
which  are  addressed  to  a  destination  in  the 
country  of  the  land  station,  the  telegraph 
charge  to  be  collected  shall  be  one  half  of 
the  telegraph  charge  applicable  to  an 
ordinary  radiotelegram. 
[602]  (2)  Press  radiotelegrams  addressed 
to  a  country  other  than  that  of  the  land 
station  shall  be  subject  to  the  press  rates 
in  force  between  the  country  of  the  land 
station  and  the  country  of  destination. 
[603]  §11.  (i)  (a)  The  land  and  on- 
board charges  applicable  to  meteorolog- 
ical radiotelegrams  shall  be  reduced  by  at 
least  50  percent  in  all  relations. 
[604j  (&)  For  land  stations,  the  date  upon 
which  this  provision  will  be  put  into  effect 
shall  be  fixed  by  agreement  between  the 
administrations  and  operating  companies 
on  the  one  hand,  and  the  interested  official 
meteorological  services  on  the  other  hand. 
[605]  (2)  (a)  The  term  "  meteorological 
radiotelegram"  shall  denote  a  radiotele- 
gram sent  by  an  official  meteorological 
service  or  by  a  station  officially  connected 
with  such  a  service,  and  addressed  to  such 
a  service  or  to  such  a  station,  and  which 
contains  exclusively  meteorological  ob- 
servations or  meteorological  forecasts. 

[60e]  (b)  These  radiotelegrams  must  in- 
clude before  the  address,  the  paid  service 
instruction  =OBS  =  . 
[eor]  (3)  Upon  request,  the  sender  must 
state  that  the  text  of  his  radiotelegram 
complies  with  the  conditions  set  forth 
above. 

[GOB]  §  12.  Mobile  stations  must  have 
knowledge  of  the  rates  necessary  for  de- 
termining the  charges  for  radiotelegrams. 
They  are,  however,  authorized  when  nec- 
essary, to  obtain  such  information  from 
land  stations;  the  amounts  of  the  rates 
which  the  latter  give  shall  be  expressed 
in  gold  francs. 

[609]  §  13  (i)  Any  new  rate,  and  any 
change  in  whole  or  in  part  relating  to 
rates,  shall  become  effective  only  15  days 
after  their  notification  by  the  Bureau  of 
the  Union  (excluding  the  day  of  filing)  and 
shall  be  applied  only  on  the  first  or  six- 
teenth following  the  last  day  of  this  period, 

[51°]  (2)  For  radiotelegrams  originating 
in  mobile  stations,  however,  the  changes 
in  the  rates  shall  become  effective  only  I 
month  after  the  periods  fixed  in  sub- 
paragraph  (i). 


R£glement    t£l£graphique    international 
pour  les  t£Iegrammes  de  presse.     Pour 
ceux  qui  sont  adress6s  a  une  destination 
dans  le  pays  de  la  station  terrestre,  la  taxe 
t6l6graphique  &  percevoir  est  la  moiti£  de 
la  taxe   tel£graphique  applicable  a   un 
radioteldgramme  ordinaire. 
[602]     (2)  Les  radiotele'grammes  de  presse 
a  destination  d'un  pays  autre  que  celui 
de  la  station  terrestre  jouissent  du  tarif  de 
presse  en  vigueur  entre  le  pays  de  la  sta- 
tion terrestre  et  le  pays  de  destination. 
[603]     §  II.  (i)  a)  Les  taxes  terrestres  et 
de  bord  applicables  aux  radiot616grammes 
m6t£orologiques  sont  r&iuites  d'au  moins 
50%  dans  toutes  les  relations. 
[604]    £)  Pour  les  stations  terrestres,  la 
date  &  laquelle  cette  disposition  sera  mise 
en  vigueur  sera  fixde  par  accord  entre  les 
administrations    et    compagnies    exploi- 
tantes,  d'une  part,  et  les  services  mlteo- 
rologiques  officiels  int6ress6s  d'autre  part. 
[605]     (2)  a)  Le  terme  "  radiote!6gramme 
mete'orologique"    d6signe    un   radiotel6- 
gramme  envoy£  par  un  service  *  rndte"- 
orologique  officiel  ou  par  une  station  en 
relation  officielle  avec  un  tel  service,  et 
adress6  &  un  tel  service  ou  i  une  telle  sta- 
tion, et  qui  contient  exclusivement  des 
observations  m£t£orologiques  ou  des  pre"- 
visions  m6t6orologiques. 
[606]    b)  Ces   radiotel£grammes   compor- 
tent,  obligatoirement,  en  t6te  de  Padresse, 
1'indication  de  service  tax£e  ^OBS^. 
f607]     (3)  Sur  demande,  I'exp6diteur  doit 
declarer  que  le  texte  de  son  radiotel£- 
gramme  correspond  aux  conditions  fix6es 
ci-avant. 

[608]  §  12.  Les  stations  mobiles  doivent 
connattre  les  tarifs  n^cessaires  pour  la 
taxation  des  radiotelegrammes.  Toute- 
fois,  elles  sont  autoris£es,  le  cas  e"ch6ant, 
&  se  renseigner  aupr&s  des  stations  terres- 
tres; les  montants  des  tarifs  que  celles-ci 
indiquent  sont  donnes  en  francs-or. 

[609]  §13-  (i)  Tpute  taxe  nouvelle, 
toutes  modifications  d'ensemble  ou  de 
detail  concernant  les  tarifs  ne  sont  ex£cu- 
toires  que  15  jours  aprjbs  leur  notification 
par  le  Bureau  de  1' Union  (jour  de  d6p6t 
non  compris)  et  ne  sont  mises  en  applica- 
tion qu'&  partir  du  ier  ou  du  16  qui  suit  le 
i'our  d 'expiration  de  ce  delai. 
61°]  (2)  Toutefois,  pour  les  radiotele- 
grammes originates  des  stations  mobiles, 
les  modifications  aux  tarifs  ne  sont  ex6- 
cutoires  qu'un  mois  apres  les  delais  fixe"s 
a  1'alinea  (i). 


19° 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


[en]  (3)  The  provisions  of  the  above  sub- 
paragraphs  shall  admit  of  no  exception. 

ARTICLE  3. — Order  of  Priority  of  Com- 
munications  in   the   Mobile   Service 

[612]  The  order  of  priority  for  the  radio 
communications  referred  to  in  item  6  of 
article  24  of  the  General  Regulations  shall, 
in  principle,  be  the  following: 

1 .  government  radiotelegrams ; 

2.  radiotelegrams  relating  to  naviga- 
tion, to  the  sailings  and  the  needs  of  ships, 
to  the  safety  and  regularity  of  the  aerial 
service,    and   weather-observation   mes- 
sages intended  for  an  official  meteorolog- 
ical service; 

3.  service   radiotelegrams   relating   to 
the  operation  of  the  radiocommunication 
service,  or  to  radiotelegrams  previously 
exchanged ; 

4.  public     correspondence     radiotele- 
grams. 

ARTICLE  4. — Time  of  Filing  of  Radio- 
telegrams 

[61S]  §  I.  In  the  transmission  of  radio- 
telegrams  originating  in  a  mobile  station, 
the  date  and  the  time  of  filing  in  this  sta- 
tion shall  be  indicated  in  the  preamble. 
[6U]  §  2,  To  indicate  the  time  of  filing  of 
radiotelegrams  accepted  in  mobile  sta- 
tions, the  clerk  shall  use  Greenwich  mean 
time,  and  shall  use  the  24-hour  system. 
This  time  shall  always  be  expressed  and 
sent  by  means  of  4  figures  (oooi  to  2400). 


[61B]  §  3.  However,  the  administrations 
of  the  countries  situated  outside  zone 
"  A"  (appendix  5),  may  authorize  stations 
on  ships  sailing  along  the  coasts  of  their 
countries  to  use  zone  time  to  indicate,  by 
a  group  of  4  figures,  the  time  of  filing,  and 
in  this  case,  the  group  must  be  followed 
by  the  letter  F. 

ARTICLE  5. — Address  of  Radiotelegrams 
[«16]     §i.  (i)  The  address  of  a  radio- 
telegram  destined  to  a  mobile  station 
must  be  as  complete  as  possible;  it  must 
contain  the  following: 

[617]  (a)  name  or  designation  of  the  ad- 
dressee, with  supplementary  particulars, 
if  necessary; 

[eis]  (p)  name  of  the  ship  station  or,  in 
the  case  of  another  mobile  station,  the  call 
signal  as  shown  in  the  appropriate  nomen- 
clature ; 


No.  318 

[81ll  (3)  Les  dispositions  des  alin£as  ci~ 
avant  n'admettent  aucune  exception. 

ARTICLE  3. — Ordre  de  priorite  des  com- 
munications dans  le  service  mobile 

[612]  L'ordre  de  priori  t6  des  radiocom- 
munications  vis£es  au  chiffre  6°  de  1 'article 
24  du  Reglement  general  est,  en  principe, 
le  suivant: 

i°  radiotelegrammes  d'Etat; 

2°  radiotelegrammes  relatifs  a  la  navi- 
gation, aux  mouvements  et  aux  besoins 
des  navires,  a  la  securit6  et  &  la  regularity 
des  services  aeiiens,  et  messages  d'obser- 
vation  du  temps  destines  a  un  service 
m6t6orologique  ofEciel ; 

3°  radiotelegrammes  de  service  rela- 
tifs au  fonctionnement  du  service  des 
radiocommunications  ou  a  des  radiot&e"- 
grammes  pr6c6demment  ^changes; 

4°  radiotelegrarnmes  de  la  correspon- 
dance  publique. 

ARTICLE  4. — Heure  de  depdt  des  radio- 
telegrammes 

[618]  §  i.  Dans  la  transmission  des  radio- 
telegrammes originaires  d'une  station 
mobile,  la  date  et  1'heure  du  depdt  &  cette 
station  sont  indiqu^es  dans  le  pr6arnbule. 
[6U]  §  2.  Pour  indiquer  1'heure  de  d6p6t 
des  radiotelegrammes  acceptes  dans  les 
stations  mobiles,  le  pr6pos6  se  base  sur  le 
temps  moyen  de  Greenwich  et  utilise  la 
notation  suivant  le  cadran  de  24  heures. 
Cette  heure  est  toujours  exprime'e  et 
transmise  a  1'aide  de  quatre  chiffres 
(oooi  a  2400). 

t615]  §  3-  Toutefois,  les  administrations 
des  pays  situ^s  en  dehors  de  la  zone  "A" 
(appendice  5)  peuvent  autoriser  les  sta- 
tions des  navires  longeant  les  cdtes  de  leur 
pays  a  utiliser  le  temps  du  fuseau  pour 
1'indication,  en  un  groupe  de  quatre 
chiffres,  de  T  heure  de  dep6t,  et,  dans  ce 
cas,  le  groupe  doit  6tre  suivi  de  la  lettre  F. 

ARTICLE  5. — Adresse  des  radiotelegrammes 

[616]  §  i,  (i)  L'adresse  des  radiotele- 
grammes a  destination  des  stations  mo- 
biles doit  §tre  aussi  complete  que  possible ; 
elle  est  obligatoirement  Iibell6e  comme 
suit: 

[617]  a)  nom  ou  qualit6  du  destinataire 
avec  indication  complementaire,  s'il  y  a 
lieu; 

[sis]  &)  nom  de  la  station  de  navire  ou, 
dans  le  cas  d'une  autre  station  mobile,  in- 
dicatif  d'appel,  tels  qu'iis  figurent  dans 
la  nomenclature  appropri6e; 


Dec.  9,  1932 


ADDITIONAL  RADIO  REGULATIONS 


191 


[6i9]  (c)  name  of  the  land  station  charged 
with  the  transmission,  as  it  appears  in  the 
nomenclature. 

[62°]  (2)  The  name  and  call  signal  re- 
quired under  §  I  (i)  (&)  may,  however,  be 
replaced,  at  the  sender's  risk,  by  the  indi- 
cation of  the  route  followed  by  the  mobile 
station,  such  route  being  indicated  by 
means  of  the  names  of  the  ports  of  de- 
parture and  of  destination,  or  by  any 
other  equivalent  indication. 
I621]  (3)  In  tne  address,  the  name  of  the 
mobile  station  and  that  of  the  land  sta- 
tion, written  as  they  appear  in  the  ap- 
propriate nomenclature  shall,  in  all  cases 
and  irrespective  of  their  length,  be 
counted  as  one  word  each. 

[622]  §  2.  (i)  Mobile  stations  not  pro- 
vided with  the  official  nomenclature  of 
telegraph  offices  may  add  after  the  name 
of  the  telegraph  office  of  destination  the 
name  of  the  territorial  subdivision  and,  in 
some  cases,  the  name  of  the  country  of 
destination,  if  they  fear  that,  without  this 
addition,  the  routing  might  not  be  made 
without  delay. 

[623]  (2)  In  that  case,  the  name  of  the 
telegraph  office  and  the  supplementary 
particulars  shall  be  counted  and  charged 
for  only  as  a  single  word.  The  land  sta- 
tion agent  receiving  the  radiotelegram 
shall  either  retain  or  delete  this  informa- 
tion, or  else  modify  the  name  of  the  office 
of  destination,  according  as  it  may  be 
necessary  or  sufficient  to  route  the  radio- 
telegram  to  its  proper  destination. 

[Articles  6-13  omitted. — Doubtful  re- 
ception— Transmission  by  "Ampliation" 
— Long-distance  Radio  Communication. 
Retransmission  by  stations  of  the  mobile 
service.  Notice  of  nondelivery.  Period  of 
retention  of  radiotelegrams  at  land  stations. 
Radiotelegrams  to  be  forwarded  by  ordinary 
mail  or  by  air  mail.  Special  rddiotele- 
grams.  Radio  communications  for  multi- 
ple destinations.  Effective  date  of  the  addi- 
tional regulations.] 


[61°]  c)  nom  de  la  station  terrestre 
charg6  de  la  transmission,  tel  qu'il  figure 
dans  la  nomenclature. 
[620]  (2)  Toutefois,  le  nom  et  1'indicatif 
d'appel  pr6vus  au  §  i,  (i)  b)  peuvent  6tre 
remplac£s,  aux  risques  et  perils  de  Tex™ 
p£diteur,  par  Indication  du  parcours 
effectu6  par  la  station  mobile,  ce  parcours 
6tant  d6termin6  par  le  nom  des  ports  de 
depart  et  d'arriv£e  ou  par  toute  autre- 
mention  6quivalente. 
[621]  (3)  Dans  Tadresse,  le  nom  de  la 
station  mobile  et  celui  de  la  station 
terrestre,  Merits  tels  qu'ils  figurant  dans 
les  nomenclatures  appropriates,  sont,  dans 
tous  les  cas  et  indlpendamment  de  leur 
longueur,  compt&s  individuellement  pour 
un  mot, 

[622]  §2.  (i)  Les  stations  mobiles  non 
pourvues  de  la  nomenclature  officielle  des 
bureaux  t616graphiques  peuvent  faire 
suivre  le  nom  du  bureau  t£l£graphique  de 
destination  du  nom  de  la  subdivision  terri- 
toriale  et,  6yentuellement,  du  nom  du 
pays  de  destination,  si  elles  doutent  que, 
sans  cette  adjonction,  ljacheminement 
puisse  6tre  assur&  sans  hesitation. 
[623]  (2)  Le  nom  du  bureau  t£16graphique 
et  les  indications  compl&nentaires  ne  sont, 
dans  ce  cas,  comptds  et  tax£s  que  pour  un 
seul  mot.  L'agent  de  la  station  terrestre 
qui  regoit  le  radiot£16gramme  maintient 
ou  supprime  ces  indications,  ou  encore 
modifie  le  nom  du  bureau  de  destination, 
selon  qu'il  est  n£cessaire  ou  suffisant  pour 
diriger  le  radiot616gramme  sur  sa  veritable 
destination. 

[Articles  6-13  omis. — Reception  dou- 
teuse — Transmission  par  "ampliation" — 
Radio-communications  d  grande  distance. 
Retransmission  par  les  stations  du  service 
mobile.  Avis  de  non  remise.  Delai  de 
sejour  des  radiotelegrammes  dans  les  sta- 
tions terrestres.  RadiottUgrammes  d  re- 
expedier  par  voie  postale  ordinaire  ou 
afrienne.  Radiotelegrammes  speciaux. 
Radiocommunications  &  multiples  destina- 
tions. Mise  en  vigueur  du  Reglement  ad- 
ditionnel.] 


[Signatures  omitted;  the  additional  regulations  were  signed  on  behalf  of  each  of  the  signa- 
tories of  the  convention  (No.  316,  ante)f  with  exceptions  of  Canada,  Ethiopia,  Luxemburg, 
Mexico,  Nicaragua,  Persia,  and  United  States  of  America.] 


192 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 

No.  319 


No.  319 


ADDITIONAL  PROTOCOL  (European)  to  the  Acts  of  the  Inter- 
national Radiotelegraph  Conference  of  Madrid.  Signed  at 
Madrid,  December  9,  1932. 

PROTOCOLE  ADDITIONNEL  (Europeen)  aux  Actes  de  la  Confe- 
rence radiotelegraphique  Internationale  de  Madrid.  Signe  £ 
Madrid,  9  decembre  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  The  conference  envisaged  by  this  protocol  met  at  Lucerne,  May  15- 
June  19,  1933,  and  drew  up  the  European  Broadcasting  Convention  of  June  19,  1933  (No. 
330,  post). 

RATIFICATIONS.    This  protocol  was  not  subject  to  ratification. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.     (See  the  bibliographies  under  No,  316,  ante,  and  No.  330,  post.) 


Entered  into  force  December  9,  i932.x 

Text  and  translation  from  publication  by  the  General  Post  Office,  London. 


[Translation] 

The  undersigned  plenipotentiaries 
of  the  Governments  of:  Germany; 
Austria;  Belgium;  Vatican  City 
State;  Swiss  Confederation ;  Den- 
mark; Free  City  of  Danzig;  Egypt; 
Spain  and  the  Spanish  zone  of  Mo- 
rocco; Finland;  France  and  Algeria, 
Morocco,  Tunis;  the  United  King- 
dom of  Great  Britain  and  Northern 
Ireland ;  Greece ;  Hungary ;  Irish  Free 
State;  Iceland;  Italy;  Cyrenaica  and 
Tripolitania ;  Latvia;  Lithuania ;  Nor- 
way; the  Netherlands;  Poland;  Por- 
tugal; Roumania;  Sweden;  Czecho- 
slovakia; Turkey;  the  Union  of 
Soviet  Socialist  Republics;  and  Jugo- 
slavia, in  virtue  of  the  provisions  of 
Article  14  of  the  International  Radio- 
telegraph Convention  of  Washing- 
ton,2 have,  by  common  accord, 
drawn  up  the  following  Additional 
Protocol: 


Les  soussign^s,  p!6nipotentiaires 
des  Gouvernements  de  I'Allemagne; 
de  1'Autriche;  de  la  Belgique;  de 
1'Etat  de  la  Qt<§  du  Vatican;  de  la 
Confederation  suisse;  du  Danemark; 
de  la  Ville  libre  de  Dantzig;  de 
TEgypte;  de  TEspagne  et  de  la  zone 
espagnole  du  Maroc ;  de  la  Finlande ; 
de  la  France  et  de  TAlg^rie,  du  Ma- 
roc,  de  la  Tunisie ;  du  Royaume-Uni 
de  la  Grande-Bretagne  et  de  Tlr- 
lande  du  Nord;  de  la  Gr&ce;  de  la 
Hongrie;  de  1'Etat  libre  d'Irlande;  de 
Tlslande;  de  1'Italie;  de  la  Cyr<§- 
nai'que  et  de  la  Tripolitaine ;  de  la 
Lettonie;  de  la  Lithuanie;  de  la 
Norv&ge;  des  Pays-Bas;  de  la  Po- 
logne ;  du  Portugal ;  de  la  Roumanie ; 
de  la  SuMe;  de  la  Tch<§coslovaquie ; 
de  la  Turquie;  de  1'Union  des  R<§- 
publiques  Sovi£tistes  Socialistes;  de 
la  Yougoslavie,  se  basant  sur  les 
dispositions  de  Farticle  14  de  la 
Convention  radiot616graphique  in- 
ternationale  de  Washington,2  ont, 
d'un  commun  accord,  arr£t6  le 
Protocole  additionnel  suivant: 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations  under  No.  3479,  August  30. 
1934- 

2  No.  185,  ante. — ED. 


Dec.  9,  1932  ADDITIONAL  PROTOCOL  (EUROPEAN)  193 

CHAPTER  I  CHAPITRE  I 


COMPOSITION  AND  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE 
EUROPEAN  CONFERENCE 

§  I.  A  Conference  of  the  Govern- 
ments of  the  European  region  will  be 
held  before  the  entry  into  force  of  the 
General  Radiocommunication  Regu- 
lations of  Madrid  with  the  object  of 
concluding  an  agreement  concerning 
the  allocation  of  frequencies  to  the 
various  broadcasting  stations  of  this 
region  and  the  fixing  of  the  methods 
of  using  the  frequencies  thus  as- 
signed. This  Conference  will  be 
composed  of  representatives  of  all 
the  countries  comprised  in  the  region 
in  question,  which  have  acceded  to 
the  Radiotelegraph  Conventions  of 
Berlin  (1906),  London  (1912),  or 
Washington  (1927). 

Any  Government  of  an  extra- 
European  country  shall  have  the 
right  to  be  represented  at  the  Euro- 
pean Conference  by  observers  who 
shall  be  permitted  to  assist  at  all 
meetings  of  this  Conference  and  of  its 
committees  and  sub-committees,  and 
to  take  part  in  the  discussions  on  all 
questions  which  they  consider  affect 
the  rights  of  the  radioelectric  serv- 
ices of  their  countries. 

The  following  international  organ- 
isations may  be  admitted  to  the  Euro- 
pean Conference,  if  they  so  request: 

U.I.R.  (International  Broadcast- 
ing Union) ; 

C.I.N.A.  (International  Commis- 
sion for  Air  Navigation) ; 

C.I.R.  (International  Radio-Mari- 
time Committee) ; 

U.R.S.I.  (International  Scientific 
Radioelectric  Union) ; 

International  Shipping  Confer- 
ence. 

These  organisations  are  consulta- 
tive only. 

§  2.  The  Conference,  complying 
with  the  relative  provisions  of  Article 
7  of  the  General  Radiocommunica- 
tion Regulations  of  Madrid,1  will 


COMPOSITION  ET  ATTRIBUTIONS  DE  LA 
CONFERENCE  EUROPEENNE 

§  I.  Une  conference  des  gouverne- 
ments  de  la  region  europeenne, 
destinee  &  conclure  un  arrangement 
concernant  I'attribution  des  fre- 
quences aux  diverses  stations  de 
radiodiffusion  de  cette  region  et  la 
fixation  des  modalit<§s  de  Temploi 
des  frequences  ainsi  attributes,  sera 
tenue  avant  Tentr6e  en  vigueur  du 
Reglement  general  des  radiocom- 
munications  de  Madrid.  Cette  con- 
ference sera  compos6e  de  represen- 
tants  de  tous  les  pays  compris  dans  la 
region  int<§ress<§e,  adherents  aux  Con- 
ventions radioteiegraphiques  de  Ber- 
lin (1906),  Londres  (1912)  ou  Wash- 
ington (1927). 

Tout  gouvernement  d'un  pays 
extra-europeen  aura  la  faculte  de  se 
faire  repr£senter  &  la  Conference 
europeenne  par  des  observateurs  qui 
seront  admis  £  assister  &  toute  re- 
union de  cette  conference  et  de  ses 
commissions  et  sous-commissions  et 
&  y  prendre  la  parole  sur  toute 
question  qu'ils  estiment  toucher  aux 
droits  des  services  radio61ectriques 
de  leurs  pays. 

A  la  Conference  europeenne  peu- 
vent  §tre  admis,  sur  leur  demande,  les 
organismes  internationaux  suivants: 

U.I.R.  (Union  Internationale  de 
Radiodiff  usion) ; 

C.I.N.A.  (Commission  Interna- 
tionale de  Navigation  A6rienne) ; 

C.I.R.  (Comite  International 
Radio-Maritime) ; 

U.R.S.I.  (Union  Radio-Scienti- 
fique  Internationale) ; 

International  Shipping  Confer- 
ence. 

Ces  organismes  ont  voix  consulta- 
tive. 

§  2.  La  conference,  se  conformant 
aux  dispositions  respectives  de  Par- 
ticle 7  du  Rfeglement  general  des 
radiocommunications  de  Madrid,1 


1  No.  317,  ante. — ED. 


194 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  319 


allocate  the  frequencies  referred  to  in 
the  preceding  paragraph,  either  in 
the  bands  authorised  for  broadcast- 
ing services  or,  by  exception,  outside 
these  bands. 

It  will  deal  with  any  connected 
questions. 

§  3.  In  taking  its  decisions,  this 
Conference  shall  have  regard  to  the 
needs  of  all  the  countries  in  the 
European  region. 

The  Conference  will  do  its  utmost 
to  assign  to  each  country  in  the 
European  region  waves  permitting  it 
to  ensure  a  national  service  of  reason- 
ably satisfactory  quality,  regard 
being  had,  so  far  as  possible,  to  the 
existing  situation. 

Where  it  is  not  possible  to  assign  a 
frequency  below  550  kc/s  (wave- 
length above  545  m),  either  in  the 
bands  authorised  for  broadcasting 
services,  or  by  exception,  outside 
these  bands,  to  certain  countries  of 
which  the  size  and  orographical 
structure  may  warrant  such  an  allo- 
cation, these  countries  shall,  so  far  as 
possible,  receive  a  frequency  from 
amongst  the  lowest  in  the  band  from 
550  to  1,500  kc/s  (a  wavelength 
amongst  the  longest  in  the  band 
from  545  to  200  m). 


The  undersigned  Governments 
recognise  that  in  order  to  attain  this 
result,  it  may  be  necessary  for  them 
to  consent  to  sacrifices  in  the 
common  interest. 

CHAPTER  II 

PREPARATION  FOR  THE  EUROPEAN 
CONFERENCE 

§  4.  The  Government  of  the  Swiss 
Confederation  is  charged  with  con- 
voking and  preparing  the  European 
Conference. 

A  plan  of  allocation  of  frequencies 
to  broadcasting  stations  will  be  pre- 
sented by  the  International  Broad- 
casting Union  (U.I.R.)  to  the  Man- 
aging Government  (Government  of 


attribuera  les  frequences  vis6es  au 
paragraphe  precedent  soit  dans  les 
bandes  autoris<§es  pour  les  services 
de  radiodiffusion,  soit,  en  derogation, 
en  dehors  de  ces  bandes. 

Elle  traitera  toutes  questions  con- 
nexes. 

§  3.  Cette  conference  prendra  ses 
decisions  en  tenant  compte  des  be- 
soins  de  tous  les  pays  de  la  region 
europeenne. 

Elle  s'efforcera  d'attribuer  £  chaque 
pays  de  la  region  europeenne  les 
ondes  lui  permettant  d'assurer  un 
service  national  d'une  qualite  raison- 
nablement  satisfaisante,  en  tenant 
compte,  dans  la  mesure  du  possible, 
de  la  situation  existante. 

Lorsqu'il  ne  lui  sera  pas  possible 
d'attribuer  soit  dans  les  bandes 
autorisees  pour  les  services  de  radio- 
diffusion,  soit,  en  derogation,  en 
dehors  de  ces  bandes,  &  certains  pays 
dont  les  dimensions  et  la  structure 
orographique  justifieraient  une  telle 
allocation,  une  frequence  inferieure 
&  550  kc/s  (longueur  d'onde  supe~ 
rieure  &  545  m),  ces  pays  devront, 
autant  que  possible,  recevoir  une 
frequence  parmi  les  plus  basses 
de  la  bande  de  550  &  I  500  kc/s 
(une  longueur  d'onde  parmi  les 
plus  longues  de  la  bande  de  545  & 
200  m), 

Les  gouvernements  soussignes  re- 
connaissent  que,  pour  arriver  £  ce 
resultat,  il  pourra  leur  §tre  necessaire 
de  consentir  des  sacrifices  dans 
Tinter^t  commun. 

CHAPITRE  II 

PREPARATION    DE    LA     CONFERENCE 
EUROPEENNE 

§  4.  Le  Gouvernement  de  la  Con- 
federation suisse  est  charge  de  con- 
voquer  et  de  preparer  la  Conference 
europeenne. 

Un  projet  d'attribution  des  fre- 
quences aux  stations  de  radiodiffu- 
sion sera  presente  par  1' Union  Inter- 
nationale de  Radiodiffusion  (U.I.R.) 
au  gouvernement  gerant  (Gouverne- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


ADDITIONAL  PROTOCOL  (EUROPEAN) 


195 


the  Swiss  Confederation)  by  the  I5th 
of  March,  1933,  at  the  latest,  and 
will  be  communicated  by  the  latter  to 
all  the  Governments  of  the  European 
region  through  the  medium  of  the 
International  Bureau  of  the  Tele- 
graph Union. 

After  the  distribution  of  the  report 
of  the  U.I.R.,  each  Government 
concerned  shall  .have  the  right  to 
present  its  observations,  amend- 
ments and  counter-proposals  to  the 
Managing  Government,  with  a  view 
to  their  communication  to  the  other 
Governments  of  the  European  re- 
gion, and  also  to  the  U.I.R. 

The  Managing  Government  shall 
present  to  the  Conference  a  report  on 
the  question  as  a  whole. 

§  5.  The  Conference  shall  meet  as 
soon  as  possible  and  by  the  1st  of 
June,  1933,  at  the  latest. 

§  6.  The  undersigned  Govern- 
ments shall  furnish  to  the  Managing 
Government,  either  at  the  request  of 
the  latter  or  of  their  own  initiative, 
during  the  whole  period  of  the  pre- 
paratory work,  all  information  ca- 
pable of  assisting  in  the  preparation 
of  the  European  Conference. 

CHAPTER  III 

SPECIAL  PROVISIONS 

§  7.  In  its  decisions  relative  to  the 
allocation  of  frequencies  to  the  vari- 
ous broadcasting  stations,  the  Euro- 
pean Conference  shall  apply  the  rules 
of  the  General  Radiocommunication 
Regulations  of  Madrid  destined  to 
regulate  and  to  ensure  the  better 
working  of  broadcasting  services. 
The  Conference  shall  fix  the  upper 
limit  of  unmodulated  power  meas- 
ured in  the  aerial,  capable  of  being 
used  by  each  station  for  the  fre- 
quency in  question,  and  the  upper 
limit  of  the  field-strength  of  the 
carrier  wave  during  daylight  at  the 
most  remote  frontier  and  also  at  the 
nearest  frontier.  In  its  decisions  on 
this  point,  it  shall  take  as  a  guide  the 
particulars  contained  in  the  docu- 


ment de  la  Confederation  suisse) 
au  plus  tard  le  15  mars  1933  et  com- 
munique par  celui-ci  &  tous  les 
gouvernements  de  la  region  euro- 
peenne par  Tintermediaire  du  Bureau 
international  de  1'Union  t<§16gra- 
phique. 

Apr6s  la  distribution  du  rapport 
de  ril.I.R.,  chaque  gouvernement 
interesse  aura  la  faculte  de  presenter 
ses  observations,  amendements  et 
contre-propositions  au  gouvernement 
gerant,  en  vue  de  leur  communica- 
tion aux  autres  gouvernements  de  la 
region  europeenne  ainsi  qu'a  1'U.I.R. 

Le  gouvernement  g6rant  pr£sen- 
tera  a  la  conference  un  rapport  sur 
Tensemble  de  la  question. 

§  5.  La  conference  se  r6unira  le 
plus  t6t  possible  et,  au  plus  tard,  le 
ier  juin  1933. 

§  6.  Les  gouvernements  soussign6s 
donneront  au  gouvernement  g6rant 
soit  sur  la  demande  de  celui-ci,  soit 
de  leur  propre  initiative,  pendant 
toute  la  dur6e  des  travaux  pr6para- 
toires,  tout  renseignement  suscepti- 
ble d'aider  a  la  preparation  de  la 
Conference  europeenne. 

CHAPITRE  III 

DISPOSITIONS  PARTICULIERES 

§  7.  Dans  ses  decisions  relatives  a 
Pattribution  des  frequences  aux  di- 
verses  stations  de  radiodiffusion,  la 
Conference  europeenne  appliquera 
les  regies  du  R&glement  general  des 
radiocommunications  de  Madrid  des- 
tinees  a  reglementer  et  a  tnieux 
assurer  les  services  de  la  radio- 
diffusion.  Elle  fixera  la  limite  su- 
perieure  de  la  puissance  non  moduiee 
mesuree  dans  Tantenne,  susceptible 
d'etre  utilisee  par  chaque  station 
pour  la  frequence  en  question,  et  la 
limite  superieure  de  la  valeur  du 
champ  efficace  de  Tonde  porteuse 
produit  de  jour  a  la  fronti£re  la  plus 
eloignee  ainsi  qu'a  la  fronti&re  la  plus 
proche.  Dans  ses  decisions  y  rela- 
tives elle  prendra  pour  guide  les  indi- 


196 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  319 


ment  annexed  to  the  present  Proto- 
col. 

The  arrangement  adopted  at  the 
Conference  shall  include,  amongst 
the  general  rules  to  be  observed  in 
future,  provisions  similar  to  those 
mentioned  above,  and  also  a  clause 
corresponding  to  sub -paragraph  (5) 
of  §  5  of  Article  7  of  the  General 
Radiocommunication  Regulations  of 
Madrid. 

Subject  to  plans  in  course  of  exe- 
cution, the  undersigned  Govern- 
ments undertake  not  to  make,  be- 
tween now  and  the  end  of  the  work 
of  the  European  Conference,  any 
change  in  their  broadcasting  service 
which  might  appreciably  affect  the 
general  situation  of  the  radioelectric 
services  of  the  European  region. 

§  8.  If  the  European  Conference 
is  led  to  contemplate  the  use  by  a 
broadcasting  station  of  a  frequency 
in  one  of  the  bands  reserved  for  other 
European  regional  services,  the  ar- 
rangement adopted  shall  stipulate 
that  if  this  use  causes  interference 
which  was  not  foreseen  at  the  time 
of  the  admission  of  the  broadcasting 
station,  the  Administrations  con- 
cerned shall  do  their  utmost  to  ob- 
tain agreements  capable  of  eliminat- 
ing this  interference  and,  in  this  case, 
the  authorised  services  shall  have  the 
preference  in  relation  to  the  broad- 
casting services. 

§  9.  If  the  European  Conference  is 
led  to  contemplate  the  use  by  a 
broadcasting  station  of  a  frequency 
in  one  of  the  bands  reserved  inter- 
nationally, in  the  general  table  of 
allocation  of  frequencies,  for  the 
mobile  services,  it  shall,  before 
issuing  its  recommendation,  make  an 
exhaustive  study  of  the  technical 
conditions  under  .which  this  service 
could  be  carried  out  without  preju- 
dice to  the  authorised  international 
mobile  services  and  shall  do  its  ut- 
most to  obtain  the  agreements  neces- 
sary to  such  use.  It  is  recognised  that 


cations  contenues  dans  le  document 
annex<§  au  present  Protocole. 

L'arrangement  conclu  &  cette  con- 
ference comprendra,  parmi  les  regies 
g6n£rales  a  observer  a  1'avemr,  des 
dispositions  analogues  a  celles  ci- 
avant  vis6es,  ainsi  qu'une  clause 
correspondant  &  1'alinla  (5)  du  §  5 
de  1'article  7  du  R&glement  g6n6ral 
des  radiocommunications  de  Madrid. 

Sous  reserve  des  pro  jets  en  vole 
d'ex£cution,  les  gouvernernents  sous- 
sign6s  s'engagent,  d'ici  a  la  con- 
clusion des  travaux  de  la  Confe- 
rence europ£enne,  &  n'appprter  dans 
leur  service  de  radiodiffusion  aucun 
changement  de  nature  a  affecter 
sensiblement  la  situation  d'ensemble 
des  services  radio£lectriques  de  la 
r6gion  europ£enne. 

§8.  Si  la  Conference  europ£enne 
est  amende  a  envisager  1'utilisation, 
par  une  station  de  radiodiffusion, 
d'une  frequence  appartenant  a  une 
des  bandes  r6servles  £  d'autres  ser- 
vices r£gionaux  europ6ens,  1'arrange- 
ment  conclu  stipulera  qu'au  cas  oft 
cette  utilisation  provoquerait  des 
interferences  qui  n'avaient  pas  £t6 
pr6vues  lors  de  I'admission  de  ladite 
station  de  radiodiffusion,  les  admin- 
istrations int6ress6es  s'efforceront 
d'obtenir  des  accords  susceptibles 
d'61iminer  ces  interferences  et  que, 
dans  ces  cas,  les  services  autoris6s 
seront  privil£gi£s  par  rapport  au 
service  de  radiodiffusion. 

§  9.  Si  la  Conference  europ£enne 
est  amende  &  envisager  1'utilisation, 
par  une  station  de  radiodiffusion, 
d'une  frequence  appartenant  a  une 
des  bandes  r<§serv£es  internationale- 
ment,  dans  le  tableau  g6n6ral  d'at- 
tribution  des  frequences,  aux  services 
mobiles,  elle  devra,  avant  d'6mettre 
son  avis,  proc6der,  &.  une  6tude  tech- 
nique approfondie  des  conditions 
dans  lesquelles  ce  service  pourrait 
6tre  effectu6  sans  g&ne  pour  les  ser- 
vices mobiles  internationalement  au- 
toris6s  et  s'efforcera  d'obtenir  les 
accords  n6cessaires  &  une  telle  utilisa- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


ADDITIONAL  PROTOCOL  (EUROPEAN) 


197 


these  exceptions  do  not  prejudice  in 
any  way  the  provisions  of  §  I  of 
Article  7  of  the  General  Radiocom- 
munication  Regulations  of  Madrid 
which  remain  entirely  applicable. 


CHAPTER  IV 

PROVISIONS  RELATING  TO  THE  SPECIAL 
POSITION  OF  THE  UNION  OF  SOVIET 
SOCIALIST  REPUBLICS  (U.S.S.R.) 

§  10.  The  undersigned  Govern- 
ments recognise  the  following  reser- 
vations of  the  U.S.S.R.  so  far  as  con- 
cerns the  special  use,  by  its  services, 
of  the  following  frequencies : 

150  to  285  kc/s  (2,000  to  1,053  m)  broadcast- 
ing 

285  to  315  kc/s  (1,053  to  952  m)  radiobea- 
cons 

315  to  340  kc/s  (952  to  882  m)  aeronautical 
services  and  direction-finding 

340  to  420  kc/s  (882  to  714  m)  broadcasting 

515  to  550  kc/s  (583  to  545  m)  aeronautical 
services 

These  same  Governments  declare 
that  the  above-mentioned  recogni- 
tion has  its  origin  in  considerations 
of  a  special  character,  and  cannot 
serve  as  a  precedent  in  any  other 
case. 

During  the  preparation  for  the 
European  Conference  and  during  the 
work  of  that  Conference,  the  under- 
signed Governments,  including  the 
U.S.S.R.,  undertake  to  collaborate 
fully  with  the  object  of  bringing 
about  a  unified  organisation  of  the 
European  radioelectric  services  hav- 
ing for  its  special  aim  the  elimination 
of  interference  between  stations. 


CHAPTER  V 

FINAL  PROVISIONS 

§  ii.  The  European  Conference 
shall  fix  the  date  of  the  entry  into 
force  of  the  agreement  concluded. 

§  12.  The  expenses  of  the  Confer- 
ence are  borne  by  the  Governments 


tion.  II  est  bien  entendu  que,  par 
ces  derogations,  il  ne  peut  £tre  porte 
atteinte  aux  dispositions  du  §  I  de 
Tarticle  7  du  R&glement  g<§n6ral  des 
radiocommunications  de  Madrid,  qui 
restent  entierement  applicables. 

CHAPITRE  IV 

DISPOSITIONS  RELATIVES  AUX  CONDI- 
TIONS SP&CIALES  DE  L'UNION  DES 
R&PUBLIQUES  SOVIETISTES  SOCIA- 
LISTES  (U.R.S.S.) 

§  10.  Les  gouvernements  sous- 
sign6s  reconnaissent  les  reserves 
suivantes  de  FU.R.S.S.  en  ce  qui  re- 
garde  Tutilisation  sp<§ciale,  par  ses 
services,  des  frequences  suivantes : 

150^  a  285  kc/s  (2  ooo  a  I  053  m)  radiodiffu- 

sion 
285  a  315  kc/s  d  053  &  952  m)  radiophares 

315  &  340  kc/s  (952  a  882  m)  services  aero- 

nautiques  et  radiogoniometrie 
340  a  420  kc/s  (882  &  714  m)  radiodiffusion 
515  a  550  kc/s  (583  &  545  m)  services  aero- 

nautiques 

Ces  m£mes  gouvernements  d£- 
clarent  que  la  reconnaissance  sus- 
mentionnee,  tirant  son  origine  de 
considerations  d'un  caract&re  parti- 
culier,  ne  pourra  servir  de  pr£c£dent 
dans  aucun  autre  cas. 

Dans  la  preparation  de  la  Confe- 
rence  europeenne  et  pendant  les 
travaux  de  cette  conference,  les 
gouvernements  soussignes,  y  com- 
pris  I'U.R.S.S.,  s'engagent  4  prlter 
toute  leur  collaboration  en  vue 
d'aboutir  £  une  organisation  unifi6e 
des  services  radio^lectriques  euro- 
p6ens  ayant  tout  sp6cialement  pour 
but  d'eiiminer  les  interferences  entre 
les  stations. 

CHAPITRE  V 

DISPOSITIONS  FINALES 

§  ii.  La  Conference  europ6enne 
fixera  la  date  de  Tentr6e  en  vigueur 
de  rarrangement  conclu. 

§  12.  Les  d£penses  de  la  confe- 
rence sont  &  la  charge  des  gouverne- 


198 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No,  319 


and  the  international  organisations 
which  take  part  in  it. 

§  13.  The  present  Protocol  enters 
into  force  immediately ;  it  shall  cease 
to  have  effect  at  the  date  of  the  clos- 
ing of  the  European  Conference. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  the  respec- 
tive plenipotentiaries  have  signed 
the  present  Additional  Protocol  in  a 
single  copy  which  will  remain  depos- 
ited in  the  archives  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  Spain  and  of  which  a  copy 
will  be  delivered  to  each  party. 

Done  at  Madrid  the  9th  of  Decem- 
ber 1932. 


ments   et   des   organismes   interna- 
tionaux  qui  y  prennent  part. 

§  13.  Le  present  Protocole  entre 
en  vigueur  imm£diatement ;  il  cessera 
son  effet  £  la  date  de  cldture  de  la 
Conference  europ6enne. 

EN  FOI  DE  QUOI,  les  ptenipotenti- 
aires  respectifs  ont  sign6  le  present 
Protocole  additionnel  en  un  exem- 
plaire  qui  restera  d6pos6  aux  archives 
du  Gouvernement  de  TEspagne  et 
dont  une  copie  sera  remise  &  chaque 
Partie. 

Fait  &  Madrid,  le  9  d<§cembre  1932. 


[Signed:]  For  Germany:  HERMANN  GIESS,  Dr.  Ing.  HANS  CARL  STEIDLE, 
Dr.  PAtrL  JAGER,  Dr.  HANS  HARBICH,  PAUL  MUNCH,  MARTIN  FEUERHAHN, 
SIEGFRIED  MEY,  ERHARD  MAERTENS;  for  Austria:  RUDOLPH  OESTREICHER, 
Ing.  H.  PFEUFFER;  for  Belgium:  R.  CORTEIL;  for  the  Vatican  City  State: 
GUISEPPE  GIANFRANCESCHI;  for  the  Swiss  Confederation:  G.  KELLER, 
E.  METZLER;  for  Denmark:  KAY  CHRISTIANSEN,  C.  LERCHE,  GREDSTED;  for 
Danzig  Free  City:  Ing.  HENRYK  KOWALSKI,  ZANDER;  for  Egypt:  R.  MURRAY, 
MOHAMED  SAID;  for  Spain  and  the  Spanish  Zone  of  Morocco:  MIGUEL 
SASTRE,  RAM6N  MIGUEL  NIETO,  GABRIEL  HOMBRE,  FRANCISCO  VIDAL, 
J.  DE  ENCIO,  TonAs  FERNANDEZ  QUINTANA,  LEOPOLDO  CAL,  TRINIDAD 
MATRES  ;  for  Finland :  NIILO  ORASMAA,  VILJO  YL$STALO  ;  for  France,  Algeria, 
Morocco  and  Tunis:  JULES  GAUTIER;  for  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great 
Britain  and  Northern  Ireland:  F.  W.  PHILLIPS,  J.  LOUDEN,  F.  W.  HOME, 
C.  H.  BOYD,  J.  P.  G.  WORLLEDGE;  for  Greece:  TH.  PENTHEROUDAKIS,  STAM 
INTicoLis;  for  Hungary:  Ing.  JULES  ERDOSS;  for  the  Irish  Free  State:  P.  S. 
OH-£IGEARTAIGH,  E.  CUISIN;  for  Iceland:  G.  HLIDDAL;  for  Italy,  Cyrenaica 
and  Tripolitania:  G.  GNEME,  D.  CRETY;  for  Latvia:  B.  EINBERG;  for  Lithu- 
ania: Ing.  K.  GAIGALIS;  for  Norway:  T.  ENGSET,  HERMOD  PETERSEN, 
ANDR.  HADLAND ;  for  the  Netherlands :  H.  J.  BOETJE,  J.  A.  BLAND  VD  BERG; 
for  Poland:  K.  KRULISZ;  for  Portugal:  MIGUEL  VAZ  DUARTE  BACELAR, 
Josfe  DE  Liz  FERREIRA,  JUNIOR,  DAVID  DE  SOUSA  PIRES,  JOAQUIM  RODRIGUES 
GONCALVES;  for  Roumania:  Ing.  T.  TANASESCO;  for  Sweden:  G.  WOLD; 
for  Czechoslovakia:  Ing.  JAROMIR  SVOBODA;  for  Turkey:  FAHRI,  I.  CEMAL, 
MAZHAR;  for  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics:  EUGENE  HIRSCHFELD, 
ALEXANDRE  KOKADEEV;  for  Jugoslavia:  D.  A.  ZLATANOVITCH. 


DOCUMENT 
annexed  to  the  Additional  Protocol 

DIRECTIVES  FOR  THE  EUROPEAN  CONFER- 
ENCE ON  THE  QUESTION  OF  LIMITATION 
OF  POWER 

(See  §7.) 

(i)  In  principle,  the  power  of  broad- 
casting stations  must  not  exceed  the  value 


DOCUMENT 
annexe  au  Protocole  additionnel 

DIRECTIVES  POUR  LA  CONFERENCE  EURO- 
P&ENNE  EN  MATI&RE  DE  LIMITATION 
DE  PUISSANCE 

(Voir  le  §  7.) 

t  (i)  En  principe,  la  puissance  des  sta- 
tions de  radiodiffusion  ne  doit  pas  d6- 


Dec.  9,  1932 


ADDITIONAL  PROTOCOL  (EUROPEAN) 


199 


permitting  the  economical  provision  of  an 
efficient  national  service  of  good  quality 
within  the  limits  of  the  country  in  question. 

(2)  The  unmodulated  power,  measured 
in  the  aerial,  of  broadcasting  stations 
shall  not  exceed  the  following  values : 

1.  for  frequencies  below  300 

kc/s  (waves  above  1,000  m)  150  kW; 

2.  for  frequencies  above  300 

kc/s  (waves  below  i  ,000  m)  100  kW l. 


Nevertheless,  the  power  may,  excep- 
tionally, exceed  the  figures  given  above 
when:  1st.  the  geographical  situation,  the 
area  of  the  territory  to  be  served,  the  con- 
ditions of  propagation  of  waves  in  the 
zone  to  be  served  or  exceptional  national 
requirements  warrant  it;  2nd.  the  techni- 
cal devices  used  permit  it  without  causing 
an  increase  in  interference  with  other 
services. 

(3)  The    power   of   any    broadcasting 
station  must  not  exceed  that  necessary  to 
provide  an  effective  national  service  with 
a  field-strength  not  exceeding  2  mV/m 
(carrier  wave)  by  day  at  the  most  remote 
frontier. 

(4)  As  a  general  rule,  the  value  of  the 
effective  field-strength  produced  by  day 
by  broadcasting  stations  working  on  fre- 
quencies below  300  kc/s   (wave-lengths 
above  1,000  m)  must  not  exceed  10  mV/m 
(carrier  wave)  beyond  the  frontiers  of  the 
countries  to  which  these  stations  belong. 
Nevertheless,  other  provisions  permitting 
this  figure  to  be  exceeded  may  be  adopted 
exceptionally. 


passer  la  valeur  permettant  d'assurer 
e'conomiquement  un  service  national 
efficace  et  de  bonne  qualite  dans  les  limites 
du  pays  consid£re. 

(2)  La  puissance  non  modu!6e  mesuree 
dans   Fantenne    des    stations    de    radio- 
diffusion   ne   depassera   pas   les   valeurs 
suivantes : 

1.  pour    les    frequences    in- 
f^rieures  a  300  kc/s  (ondes 
superieures  a  I  ooo  m) 150  kW; 

2.  pour    les    frequences    su- 
perieures    a      300     kc/s 
(ondes        inferieures        a 

1000  m) 100  kW  *, 

Toutefois,  la  puissance  pourra  depasser 
exceptionnellement  les  chiffres  donnes 
ci-avant  lorsque:  i°  la  situation  g&> 
graphique,  l*6tendue  du  territoire  & 
desservir,  les  conditions  de  propagation 
des  ondes  dans  la  zone  a  desservir  pu  des 
besoins  nationaux  exceptionnels  le  justifi- 
ent;  2°  les  dispositifs  techniques  utilises 
le  permettent  sans  causer  une  augmenta- 
tion de  g§ne  aux  autres  services. 

(3)  La  puissance  de  toute  station  de 
radiodiffusion  ne  doit  pas  depasser  celle 
qui  est  n6cessaire  pour  assurer  un  service 
national  effectif  avec  un  champ  ne  d6- 
passant  pas   2   mV/m    (onde  porteuse) 
pendant  le  jour  &  la  frontiere  la  plus 
eloign£e. 

(4)  En    regie   gen&rale,   la  valeur  du 
champ  efficace  produit  pendant  le  jour  par 
les  stations  de  radipdiffusion  travaillant 
avec  des  frequences  inf^rieures  a  300  kc/s 
(longueurs  d'onde  superieures  a  I  ooo  m) 
ne  devra  pas  depasser  10  mV/m  (onde 
porteuse)  en  dehors  des  fronti&res  des  pays 
auxquels     appartiennent     ces     stations. 
Toutefois,    des    dispositions    differentes 
permettant  de  d6passer  ce  chiffre  pourront 
§tre  preVues,  exceptionnellement. 


*  For  the  following  stations:  Prague,  Vienna,  Budapest,  Paris,  Toulouse,  Rennes  and  Leipzig  at 
present  in  use  or  in  course  of  construction,  the  power  permitted  is 120  kW. 

i  Pour  les  stations  suivantes:  Prague,  Vienne,  Budapest,  Paris,  Toulouse,  Rennes,  Leipzig,  actu- 
ellement  en  service  ou  en  cours  de  construction,  la  puissance  admise  est  de 120  kW. 


2OO 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 

No.  320 


No.  320 


TELEGRAPH  REGULATIONS  annexed  to  the  Telecommunication 
Convention.     Signed  at  Madrid,  December  10,  1932. 

BJ2GLEMENT  TfiLfiGRAPHIQUE  annexe  £  let  Convention  des 
telecommunications.     Signe  &  Madrid,  10  decembre  1932. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE.  These  regulations  supersede  the  regulations  annexed  to  the  Telegraph 
Convention  of  St.  Petersburg  as  revised  at  Paris  in  1925  (No.  146,  ante),  and  modified  at 
Brussels  in  1928  (No.  I46ar  ante).  Several  bipartite  agreements  regulating  telegraphic 
service  have  been  concluded. 

ACCESSIONS.  On  July  i,  1937,  these  regulations  had  been  approved  or  acceded  to  by  all 
the  states  which  had  ratified  or  acceded  to  the  telecommunication  convention  (No.  316, 
ante),  except  Afghanistan,  Canada,  Panama,  and  United  States  of  America,  and  by  Bolivia, 
Greece,  and  Sweden. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.  The  text  of  these  regulations  is  also  published  in  151  League  of  Nations 
Treaty  Series,  p.  50.  (See  the  bibliography  under  No.  316,  ante.) 

Entered  into  force  January  i,  I934-3 
Text  and  translation  from  publication  issued  by  the  General  Post  Office,  London. 

[Translation] 
CHAPTER  I 

RELATION  TO  THE  WORKING  OF 
RADIOCOMMUNICATION 

ARTICLE  i. — Application  of  the  Telegraph 
Regulations  to  radio  communication 

I1] 2  So  far  as  the  present  Regulations  do 
not  provide  otherwise,  provisions  appli- 
cable to  wire  communication  are  also  ap- 
plicable to  wireless  communication. 

CHAPTER  II 

INTERNATIONAL  SYSTEM 

ARTICLE  2. — Composition  of  the  system 

[2]  §  i.  Offices  between  which  the  ex- 
change of  telegrams  is  continuous  or  very 
active,  are,  so  far  as  practicable,  connected 
by  direct  communication  channels,  pro- 
vided in  sufficient  number  to  fulfil  all  the 
requirements  of  the  service.  These  chan- 
nels must  reach  the  necessary  mechani- 
cal, electrical  and  technical  standards, 
regard  being  had,  so  far  as  practicable,  to 
the  recommendations  of  the  Interna- 
tional Telegraph  Consultative  Committee 
(C.C.I.T.). 

1  Registered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  League  of  Nations,  No.  3479,  August  30,  1934. 

2  The  consecutive  numbering  of  the  paragraphs  by  figures  in  brackets  was  decided  upon  by  the 
International  Telegraph  Conference  of  Madrid  (1932),  to  facilitate  reference, — ED. 


CHAPITRE  I 

REPERCUSSION    SUR   L'EXPLOITATION    DES 
RAMOCOMMUNICATIONS 

ARTICLE    i. — Application   du  K&glement 
tttegraphique  aux  radiocommunications 

[l] 2  En  tant  que  le  present  Reglement  n'en 
dispose  pas  autrement,  les  prescriptions 
applicables  aux  communications  par  fil  le 
sont  aussi  aux  communications  par  sans  fil. 

CHAPITRE  II 

ROSEAU  INTERNATIONAL 

ARTICLE  2. — Constitution  du  reseau 

[*]  §  i.  Les  bureaux  entre  lesquels  re- 
change  des  telegrammes  est  cpntinu  pu 
tres  actif  spnt,  autant  que  possible,  relies 
par  des  voies  de  communication  directes, 
etablies  en  nombre  suffisant  pour  satisfaire 
a  tous  les  besoins  du  service.  Celles-ci 
doivent,  en  outre,  presenter  les  garanties 
mecaniques,  electriques  et  techniques 
suffisantes,  en  tenant  compte,  autant  que 
possible,  des  avis  du  Comit6  consultatif 
international  telegraphique  (C.C.I.T.) 


Dec.  10,  1932 


TELEGRAPH  REGULATIONS 


2O I 


[3]  §  2.  If  on  the  whole  of  the  route,  or 
on  certain  sections  only,  trunk  cables  are 
available,  these  should,  so  far  as  prac- 
ticable, be  used  also  for  the  provision  of 
international  channels  of  telegraph  com- 
munication. For  this  purpose  the  Ad- 
ministrations agree  together  on  the  pro- 
cedure. As  regards  technical  details,  the 
joint  recommendations  of  the  Interna- 
tional Telegraph  Consultative  Committee 
(C.C.I.T.)  and  of  the  International  Tele- 
phone Consultative  Committee  (C.C.I.F.) 
are,  so  far  as  practicable,  taken  as  a  guide. 


ARTICLE  3. —  Use  of  communication 
channels 

[4]  §  i.  The  operation  of  international 
communication  channels  is  the  subject  of 
agreement  between  the  Administrations 
concerned. 

[5]  §2.  Transmissions  by  international 
communication  channels  are  only  effected, 
as  a  general  rule,  by  terminal  offices. 
Each  Administration,  so  far  as  it  is  con- 
cerned, arranges,  on  every  important  in- 
ternational communication  channel,  for 
one  or  more  intermediate  offices  to  take 
the  place  of  the  terminal  office,  when  di- 
rect working  between  the  two  terminal 
offices  becomes  impossible. 


[6]  §  3.  International  communication 
channels,  which  are  interrupted  or  are  not 
in  use,  may,  on  national  sections,  be 
wholly  or  partly  diverted  from  their 
normal  purpose,  on  condition  that  the 
Administrations  concerned  restore  them 
to  their  normal  purpose  as  soon  as  the  in- 
terruption ceases  or  as  soon  as  they  are 
asked  to  do  so. 

ARTICLE  4. — Maintenance  of 
communication  channels 

[7]  §  I.  Administrations  make,  for  each 
of  the  international  communication  chan- 
nels, arrangements  adapted  to  secure  the 
greatest  benefit  from  it, 
[8]  §  2.  (i)  The  terminal  offices  on  busy 
international  wires  measure  the  electrical 
conditions  (insulation,  resistance,  etc.), 
of  these  wires  as  often  as  they  think 
necessary.  They  agree  together  as  to  the 
day  and  time  of  the  measurements,  com- 
municate the  results  to  one  another  and 
proceed  as  quickly  as  possible  to  remove 
faults  ascertained. 


[3]  §  2.  Si,  sur  la  totality  du  parcours  ou 
sur  certaines  sections  seulement,  des 
cables  interurbains  sont  disponibles, 
ceux-ci  sont,  autant  que  possible,  6gale- 
ment  &  utiliser  pour  retablissement  de 
voies  de  communication  telegraphiques 
internationales.  A  cet  effet,  les  adminis- 
trations interess6es  s'entendent  sur  la 
maniere  de  proceder.  En  ce  qui  concerne 
les  details  techniques,  font  regie,  autant 
que  possible,  les  recommandations  com- 
munes du  Comitd  consul  tatif  international 
telegraphique  (C.C.I.T.)  et  du  Comit6 
consultatif  international  telephonique 
(C.C.I.F.). 

ARTICLE  3. — Utilisation  des  voies  de 

communication 

[4]  §  i.  L'exploitation  des  voies  de  com- 
munication internationales  fait  1'objet 
d'un  accord  entre  les  administrations 
int6ressees. 

[5]  §  2.  Les  transmissions  par  les  voies 
de  communication  internationales  ne  sont 
effectu6es,  en  regie  generate,  que  par  les 
bureaux  t£te  de  ligne.  Les  administra- 
tions prennent,  chacune  en  ce  qui  la  con- 
cerne, des  dispositions  pour  que,  sur 
chaque  voie  de  communication  interna- 
tionale  importante,  un  ou  plusieurs 
bureaux  du  parcours  puissent  se  substituer 
au  bureau  design^  comme  point  extreme, 
lorsque  le  travail  direct  entre  les  deux 
bureaux  t§te  de  ligne  devient  impossible. 
[6]  §  3.  En  cas  de  derangement  ou^  de 
non  utilisation,  les  voies  de  communica- 
tion internationales  peuvent,  sur  les  sec- 
tions nationales,  toe  d£tournees  en  tout 
ou  partie  de  leur  affectation  normale,  & 
la  condition  que  les  administrations  in- 
t6ress6es  les  ramenent  &  cette  affectation 
des  que  le  derangement  a  cess6  ou  que  la 
demande  en  a  6t6  faite. 

ARTICLE  4. — Entretien  des  voies  de 
communication 

[7]  §  i.  Les  administrations  prennent, 
pour  chacune  des  voies  de  communication 
internationales,  les  dispositions  qui  per- 
mettent  d'en  tirer  le  meilleur  parti. 
[*]  §2.  (i)  Les  bureaux  tlte  de  ligne  des 
fils  internationaux  a  grand  trafic  mesurent 
l'£tat  £lectrique  (isolement,  resistance, 
etc.)  de  ces  fils  chaque  fois  qu'ils  le  jugent 
utile.  Us  sfentendent  sur  le  jour  et 
1'heure  de  ces  mesures,  se  communiquent 
les  r6sultats  de  celles-ci  et  font  prpc6der 
le  plus  promptement  possible 
tion  des  d6fauts  constates. 


2O2 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  320 


[9]  (2)  When  trunk  cables  are  used  for 
the  provision  of  busy  international  tele- 
graph communication  channels,  the  meas- 
urements are  taken  in  accordance  with 
the  special  -provisions  of  the  Telephone 
Regulations. 

[10]  §  3-  I*1  cases  of  interruption  of  inter- 
national communication  channels,  the 
offices  concerned  inform  one  another  of 
the  result  of  their  enquiries  with  a  view  to 
fixing  the  place  and  nature  of  the  inter- 
ruption; the  Administrations  concerned 
undertake  to  repair  or,  so  far  as  prac- 
ticable, to  replace  the  defective  section  in 
the  shortest  possible  time. 


CHAPTER  III 

NATURE  AND  HOURS  OF  SERVICE  OF 
OFFICES 

ARTICLE  5. — Opening,  duration  and  closing 
of  service.    Legal  time 

[n]  §  I .  Each  Administration  fixes  the 
hours  during  which  offices  shall  remain 
open  to  the  public. 

[12]  §  2,  Important  offices,  working  di- 
rect one  with  another,  remain  open,  so  far 
as  practicable,  day  and  night  without 
interruption. 

[l8]  §  3.  In  offices  open  permanently,  the 
closing  of  daily  sessions  takes  place  at  a 
time  fixed  by  agreement  between  the 
offices  in  correspondence. 
[l4]  §4.  Offices  which  are  not  perma- 
nently open  may  not  close  before  transmit- 
ting all  their  international  telegrams  to  an 
office  which  is  open  longer,  or  before  re- 
ceiving from  the  office  in  correspondence 
any  international  telegrams  on  hand  at  the 
time  of  closing. 

[16]  §  5.  Between  two  offices  in  different 
countries  which  communicate  directly, 
close  of  work  is  requested  by  the  office 
closing  to  the  one  which  remains  open, 
and  is  given  by  the  latter  office.  When 
the  two  offices  close  at  the  same  time, 
close  of  work  is  requested  by  the  office 
belonging  to  the  country  whose  capital  is 
more  to  die  east,  and  is  given  by  the  other 
office, 

["]  ^  §  6.  With  the  exception  of  countries 
having  two  or  more  time  zones,  the  same 
time  is  used  in  all  offices  in  the  same  coun- 
try. The  legal  time  or  times  adopted  by 
an  Administration  are  notified  to  the 
other  Administrations  through  the  me- 
dium of  the  Bureau  of  the  Union. 


[9]  (2)  Lorsque  des  cables  interurbains 
sont  utilises  pour  l'£tablissement  des  voies 
de  communication  t£16graphiques  interna- 
tionales  &  grand  trafic,  il  est  proc6d6  aux 
mesures  conform6ment  aux  dispositions 
sp6ciales  du  R&glement  t61£phonique. 
[10]  §  3.  En  cas  de  derangement  des 
voies  de  communication  international, 
les  bureaux  int£ress6s  se  communiquent 
mutuellement  les  r£sultats  de  leurs  re- 
cherches,  dans  le  but  de  determiner  Fen- 
droit  et  la  nature  de  Interruption;  les 
administrations  int6ress£es  s'engagent  a 
r6parer  ou  a  remplacer,  dans  la  mesure 
du  possible,  et  dans  le  plus  bref  d61ai,  la 
section  d6fectueuse. 

CHAPITRE  III 

NATURE  ET  &TENDUE  DU  SERVICE  DES 
BUREAUX 

ARTICLE  5. — Ouverture,  duree  et  cldture  du 
service,    Heure  legate 

["]  §  i.  Chaque  administration  fixe  les 
heures  pendant  lesquelles  les  bureaux 
doivent  rester  ouverts  au  public. 
[1Z]  §  2.  Les  bureaux  importants,  tra- 
vaillant  directement  Tun  avec  1'autre, 
restent  ouverts,  autant  que  possible,  le 
jour  et  la  nuit,  sans  interruption. 
t18]  §  3*  Dans  les  bureaux  a  service 
permanent,  la  cldture  des  stances  jour- 
nalieres  est  donn£e  &  une  heure  6tablie 
d'accord  entre  les  bureaux  correspondants. 
[14]  §  4.  Les  bureaux  dont  le  service  n'est 
point  permanent  ne  peuvent  prendre 
cldture  avant  d'avoir  transmis  tous  leurs 
t616grammes  internationaux  &  un  bureau 
dont  le  service  est  plus  prolong6  et  avant 
d'avoir  recju  du  bureau  correspondant  les 
t616grammes  internationaux  qui  sont  en 
instance  au  moment  de  la  cldture. 
[16]  §  5.  Entre  deux  bureaux  de  pays 
diff£rents  communiquant  directement, 
la  cldture  est  demand6e  par  celui  qui  se 
ferme  a  celui  qui  derneure  ouvert,  et 
donnee  par  ce  dernier.  Lorsque  les  deux 
bureaux  en  relation  se  ferment  au  m§me 
moment,  la  cldture  est  demanded  par  celui 
qui  appartient  au  pays  dont  la  capitale  a 
la  position  la  plus  orientale,  et  donnde  par 
1'autre  bureau. 

[16]  §  6.  A  1'exception  des  pays  ayant 
deux  ou  plusieurs  zones  horaires,  la  m6me 
heure  est  adoptee  par  tous  les  bureaux  du 
me^me  pays.  L'heure  16gale  ou  les  heures 
16gales  adopt6es  par  une  administration 
sont  notifies  aux  autres  administrations 
par  rinterm6diaire  du  Bureau  de  1'Union. 


Dec.  10,  1932 


TELEGRAPH  REGULATIONS 


203 


ARTICLE  6. — Symbols  describing  the  kind 
and  duration  of  the  service  of  offices 

[17]  (i)  The  following  symbols  are  used 
to  describe  the  kind  of  service  and  the 
working  hours  of  offices: 

N      office  permanently  open  (day  and 

night) ; 
R      land     station     (radiocommunica- 

tion); 

S  semaphore  office; 
K  office  at  which  all  kinds  of  tele- 
grams may  be  handed  in  and  which 
delivers  only  to  callers  (telegraph 
restant)  and  to  persons  within  the 
limits  of  a  railway  station ; 

VK  office  at  which  either  all  kinds  of 
telegrams  or  only  those  of  railway 
passengers  or  station  officials  may 
be  handed  in  but  no  telegrams  are 
delivered ; 

E      office  open  only  during  the  stay  of 
the  Head  of  the  State  or  of  the 
Court; 
B      office  open  only  during  the  bathing 

season ; 
H      office  open  only  during  the  winter 

season ; 

*       office  temporarily  closed. 
[18]     (2)  The  foregoing  symbols  may  be 
used  in  combination  with  one  another. 
[19]     (3)  The  symbols  B  and  H  are  com- 
pleted, so  far  as  practicable,  by  the  dates 
of  opening  and  closing  of  the  temporary 
office  in  question. 

CHAPTER  IV 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS  RELATING  TO 
CORRESPONDENCE 

ARTICLE  7. — Establishing  the  identity  of 
the  sender  or  addressee 

[20]  The  sender  or  the  addressee  of  a 
private  telegram  must  prove  his  identity 
when  requested  to  do  so  by  the  office  of 
origin  or  the  office  of  destination  respec- 
tively. 

CHAPTER  V 

PREPARATION  AND  HANDING-IN  OF 
TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE  8. — Plain  and  secret  language. 
Acceptance  of  these  languages 

[ai]  §  I.  The  text  of  telegrams  may  be 
expressed  in  plain  language  or  in  secret 


ARTICLE  6. — Notations  indignant  la  nature 
et  Vetendue  du  service  des  bureaux 

[17]  (i)  Les     notations     suivantes     sont 
adopters  pour  indiquer  la  nature  du  service 
et  les  heures  d'ouverture  des  bureaux: 
N      bureau  a  service  permanent   (de 

jour  et  de  nuit) ; 
R      station    terrestre    (de    radiocom- 

munication) ; 

S  bureau  s£maphorique; 
K  bureau  qui  admet  au  d6part  les 
tel^grammes  de  toute  cat£gorie  et 
qui  n'accepte  a  1'arrivee  que  ceux 
a  remettre  "telegraphe  restant" 
ou  a  distribuer  dans  Tenceinte 
d'une  gare; 

VK  bureau  qui  admet  au  d6part  les 
t61egramm.es  de  toute  categoric  ou 
seulement  ceux  des  voyageurs  ou 
du  personnel  r6sidant  dans  la  gare, 
et  qui  n'accepte  aucun  tele"gramme 
a  Tarrivde; 

E      bureau  ouvert  seulement  pendant 
le  sejour  du  chef  de  TEtat  ou  de  la 
cour; 
B      bureau  ouvert  seulement  pendant 

la  saison  des  bains; 
H      bureau  ouvert  seulement  pendant 

la  saison  d'hiver; 

*       bureau  temporairement  ferm6. 
[18]     (2)  Les    notations     qui     precedent 
peuvent  se  combiner  entre  elles. 
t19]     (3)  Les  notations  B  et  H  sont  com- 
pletes, autant  que  possible,  par  Pindica- 
tion  des  dates  d'ouverture  et  de  fermeture 
des  bureaux  temporaires  dont  il  s'agit. 

CHAPITRE  IV 

DISPOSITIONS  GENERALES  RELATIVES  A  LA 
CORRESPOND  ANCE 

ARTICLE  7. — Constatation  de  Videntite  de 
Vexpediteur  ou  du  destinataire 

[20]  L'expediteur  ou  le  destinataire  d'un 
telegramme  priv6  est  tenu  d'etablir  son 
identity  lorsqu'il  y  est  invit£  par  le  bureau 
d'origine  ou  celui  de  destination,  re- 
spectivement. 

CHAPITRE  V 

REDACTION  ET  DEPOT  DES  TELEGRAMMES 


ARTICLE     8. — Langage    clair    et  langage 
secret.    Acceptation  de  ces  langages 

[al]     §  i.  Le  texte  des  t616grammes  peut 
£tre  r6dig£  en  langage  clair  ou  en  langage 


204 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  320 


language,  the  latter  being  divided  into 
code  language  and  cypher  language. 
Each  of  these  languages  may  be  used 
alone  or  together  with  the  others  in  the 
same  telegram. 

[22]  §2.  All  Administrations  accept,  in 
all  their  relations,  telegrams  in  plain  lan- 
guage. They  may  refuse  to  admit  both 
in  acceptance  and  in  delivery  private  tele- 
grams wholly  or  partly  in  secret  language, 
but  they  must  allow  these  telegrams  to 
pass  in  transit,  except  in  the  case  of  sus- 
pension defined  in  Article  27  of  the  Con- 
vention. 

ARTICLE  9. — Plain  language 

[28]  §  i.  Plain  language  is  that  which 
presents  an  intelligible  meaning  in  one  or 
more  of  the  languages  authorised  for  in- 
ternational telegraph  correspondence, 
each  word  and  each  expression  having  the 
meaning  normally  assigned  to  it  in  the 
language  to  which  it  belongs. 

[24]  §  2.  By  telegrams  in  plain  language 
those  are  meant  of  which  the  text  is  wholly 
in  plain  language.  The  character  of  a 
telegram  in  plain  language  is  not,  how- 
ever, changed  by  the  presence  of  numbers 
expressed  either  in  letters  or  in  figures, 
which  have  not  a  secret  meaning,  arbi- 
trary addresses,  commercial  marks,  ex- 
change quotations,  letters  representing  the 
signals  of  the  International  Code  of  Sig- 
nals used  in  semaphore  telegrams  and 
radiotelegrams,  abbreviations  in  current 
use  in  ordinary  or  commercial  correspond- 
ence, such  as  fob,  cif,  caf,  svp  or  any  simi- 
lar expression,  the  admissibility  of  which 
is  decided  by  the  country  despatching  the 
telegram,  or  a  check  word  or  check  num- 
ber placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  text  in 
bank  and  similar  telegrams. 


P5]  §3-  Each  Administration  designates, 
from  among  the  languages  used  on  the  ter- 
ritory of  the  country  to  which  it  belongs, 
those  which  it  authorises  for  use  in  inter- 
national telegraph  correspondence  in 
plain  language.  The  use  of  Latin  and 
Esperanto  is  also  authorised. 

ARTICLE  10. — Code  language 

[*8]  §  i.  Code  language  is  composed 
either  of  artificial  words,  or  of  real  words 
not  used  with  the  meaning  normally  as- 
signed to  them  in  the  language  to  which 


secret,  ce  dernier  se  distinguant  en  Ian- 
gage  convenu  et  en  langage  chiffr6. 
Chacun  de  ces  langages  peut  £tre  employe 
seul  ou  conjointement  avec  les  autres  dans 
un  m&ne  telegramme. 
[22]  §  2.  Toutes  les  administrations  ac- 
ceptent,  dans  toutes  leurs  relations,  les 
t616grammes  en  langage  clair.  Elles 
peuvent  n'admettre  ni  au  depart  ni  a 
1' arrived  les  telegrammes  priv6s  r6dig6s 
totalement  ou  partiellement  en  langage 
secret,  mais  elles  doivent  laisser  ces  t£16- 
grammes  circuler  en  transit,  sauf  le  cas 
de  suspension  de"fini  a  1'article  27  de  la 
Convention. 

ARTICLE  9. — Langage  clair 

[23]  §  i.  Le  langage  clair  est  celui  qui 
off  re  un  sens  comprehensible  dans  une  ou 
plusieurs  des  langues  autoris6es  pour  la 
correspondance  telegraphique  interna- 
nationale,  chaque  mot  et  chaque  expres- 
sion ayant  la  signification  qui  leur  est 
normalernent  attribu6e  dans  la  langue  a 
laquelle  ils  appartiennent. 
[24]  §  2.  On  en  tend  par  tele"  grammes  en 
langage  clair,  ceux  dont  le  texte  est  en- 
ti&rernent  r£dig6  en  langage  clair.  Toute- 
fois,  la  presence  de  nombres  Merits,  soit 
en  lettres  soit  en  chiffres,  qui  n'ont  aucune 
signification  secr&te,  d'adresses  conven- 
tionnelles,  de  marques  de  commerce,  de 
cours  de  bourse,  de  lettres  repr6sentant 
les  signaux  du  code  international  de  sig- 
naux,  employees  dans  les  t616grammes 
se"maphoriques  et  dans  les  radiotel£- 
grammes,  d' expressions  abr6g£es  d'un 
usage  courant  dans  la  correspondance 
usuelle  ou  commerciale,  comme  fob,  cif, 
caf,  svp  ou  toute  autre  analogue,  dont 
F appreciation  appartient  au  pays  qui 
exp6die  le  tele" gramme,  d'un  mot  ou  d'un 
nombre  de  contrdle  plac£  en  t£te  du  texte 
dans  les  t£16grammes  de  banque  et  ceux 
analogues,  ne  change  pas  le  caract&re 
d'un  t£l<§gramme  en  langage  clair. 
[25]  §  3-  Chaque  administration  designe, 
parmi  les  langues  usit6es  sur  le  territoire 
du  pays  auquel  elle  appartient,  celles  dont 
elle  autorise  1'emploi  dans  la  correspon- 
dance teldgraphique  internationale  en 
langage  clair.  L'  usage  du  latin  et  de 
Tespeianto  est  e"galement  autoris6. 

ARTICLE  10. — Langage  convenu 

p6]^  §  i.  Le  langage  convenu  est  celui 
qui  se  compose  soit  de  mots  artificiels,  soit 
de  mots  r£els  n' ayant  pas  la  signification 
qui  leur  est  normalernent  attribute  dans 


Dec.  10,  1932 


TELEGRAPH  REGULATIONS 


205 


they  belong  and  consequently  not  forming 
intelligible  phrases  in  one  or  more  of  the 
languages  authorised  for  telegraph  cor- 
respondence in  plain  language,  or  lastly  of 
a  mixture  of  real  words  as  defined  and 
artificial  words. 

[Z7]  §  2.  (i)  By  telegrams  in  code  lan- 
guage those  are  meant  of  which  the  text 
contains  words  belonging  to  this  language. 
[28]  (2)  The  code  words,  whether  real  or 
artificial,  must  not  contain  more  than  five 
letters;  they  may  be  formed  in  any  way. 
They  must  not  contain  the  accented 
letter  6. 

[Z9]  §3-  The  officer  who  accepts  a  tele- 
gram in  code  language  enters  on  the  form 
the  service  instruction  =CDE  =  ,  which 
is  transmitted  to  destination  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  preamble  of  the  telegram. 
[30]  §  4.  CDE  telegrams  are  charged  at 
6/ioths  of  the  full  rate  in  the  case  of  the 
extra-European  system,  and  at  7/ioths 
of  the  full  rate  in  the  case  of  the  European 
system. 

t31]  §  5-  (*)  Telegrams  of  which  the  text 
contains  words  in  code  language  and 
words  in  plain  language  and/or  figures 
and  groups  of  figures,  are  considered,  for 
the  purpose  of  charging,  as  belonging  to 
code  language.  Nevertheless: 

[32]  (#)  the  number  of  figures  or  groups 
of  figures  must  not  exceed  one-half  of  the 
number  of  chargeable  words  in  the  text 
and  signature; 

[3JJ]  (6)  for  the  purpose  of  charging,  bank 
and  similar  telegrams  expressed  in  plain 
language  which  contain  a  check  word  or 
check  number  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
the  text  (Art.  9,  §  2)  are  not  considered  as 
code  telegrams. 

["]  (2)  Telegrams  of  which  the  text 
contains  words  in  code  language  and 
groups  of  figures  in  excess  of  one-half  of 
the  chargeable  words  in  the  text  and  sig- 
nature, are  considered  for  the  purpose  of 
charging,  as  telegrams  in  cypher  language. 
[35]  §  6.  The  sender  of  a  telegram  in  code 
language  or  code  language  mixed  with 
another  language  must  produce  the  code 
from  which  the  text  or  part  of  the  text  of 
the  telegram  has  been  compiled,  if  the 
office  of  origin  or  the  Administration  to 
which  this  office  is  subject  requests  it. 

ARTICLE  n. — Cypher  language 
[38]     §  i.  Cypher  language  is  formed: 


la  langue  £  laquelle  ils  appartiennent  et, 
de  ce  fait,  ne  forment  pas  des  phrases 
compr6hensibles  dans  une  ou  plusieurs 
des  langues  autoris6es  pour  la  correspond- 
ance  telegraphique  en  langage  clair,  soit 
enfin^  d'un  melange  de  mots  r6els  ainsi 
d6finis  et  de  mots  artificiels. 
[27]  §  2.  (i)  On  en  tend  par  t61egrammes 
en  langage  convenu  ceux  dont  le  texte  con- 
tient  des  mots  appartenant  a  ce  langage. 
[28]  (2)  Les  mots  convenus,  qu'ils  soient 
reels  ou  artificiels,  ne  doivent  pas  com- 
prendre  plus  de  cinq  lettres;  ils  peuvent 
£tre  construits  librement.  Ces  mots  ne 
peuvent  contenir  la  lettre  accentuee  e. 
[29]  §3.  L'agent  qui  accepte  un  tele- 
gramme  en  langage  convenu  inscrit  sur 
la  minute  la  mention  de  service  "CDE" 
qui  est  transmise  en  t£te  du  pr<§ambule  du 
t£16gramme  jusqu'a  destination. 
[30]  §4.  Les  taegrammes  CDE  sont 
taxes  aux  6/10  du  tarif  plein  s'il  s'agit 
du  regime  extra-europ6en,  et  aux  7/10  du 
tarif  plein  s'il  s'agit  du  regime  europ6en. 

[31]  §5-  (i)  Les  tel6gramm.es  dont  le 
texte  contient  des  mots  en  langage 
convenu  et  des  mots  en  langage  clair 
et/ou  des  chiffres  et  des  groupes  de  chif- 
fres,  sont  considers,  pour  la  taxation, 
comme  appartenant  au  langage  convenu. 
Toutefois: 

[32]  (a)  le  nombre  des  chiffres  ou  groupes 
de  chiffres  ne  doit  pas  d6passer  la  moitid 
du  nombre  des  mots  taxes  du  texte  et  de  la 
signature ; 

I33]  (&)  pour  la  taxation,  ne  sont  pas  con- 
sideres  comme  telegrammes  convenus  les 
telegrammes  de  banque  et  ceux  analogues 
r6diges  en  langage  clair  contenant  un  mot 
ou  un  nombre  de  contrdle  plac6  en  t£te 
du  texte  (art.  9,  §  2). 
[34]  (2)  Les  telegrammes  dont  le  texte 
contient  des  mots  en  langage  convenu  et  des 
groupes  de  chiffres  en  nombre  sup6rieur  & 
la  moitie  des  mots  tax6s  du  texte  et  de  la 
signature  sont  consid6res,  pour  la  taxation, 
comme  des  telegrammes  en  langage  chiff re. 
[35]  §  6.  L'exp6diteur  d'un  t&egramme 
en  langage  convenu  ou  mixte  convenu  est 
tenu  de  pr6senter  le  code  d'apr£s  lequel  le 
texte  ou  par  tie  du  texte  du  t616gramme  a 
et6  redigi,  si  le  bureau  d'origine  ou  1'ad- 
ministration  dont  ce  bureau  releve  lui 
en  font  la  demande. 

ARTICLE  11. — Langage  cUffre 

[38]  §  I.  Le  langage  chiffre  est  celui  qui 
est  forme: 


206 


INTERNATIONAL  LEGISLATION 


No.  320 


[8T]  1st.  of  Arabic  figures,  groups  or 
series  of  Arabic  figures  with  a  secret 
meaning; 

[88]  2nd.  of  words,  names,  expressions 
or  combinations  of  letters,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  letter  £,  not  fulfilling  the 
conditions  of  plain  language  (Art.  9)  or 
code  language  (Art.  10). 
[3£l]  §  2.  The  combination,  in  one  group, 
of  figures  and  letters  with  a  secret  mean- 
ing is  not  allowed. 

[40]  §  3«  The  groups  indicated  in  Article 
9,  §2  are  not  considered  as  having  a 
secret  meaning. 

ARTICLE   12. — Preparation  of  telegrams. 
Characters  which  may  be  used 

[41]     §  I.  The  original  telegram  must  be 

legibly  written  in  characters  which  have 

an  equivalent  in  the  table  of  telegraph 

signals  given  below  and  which  are  used  in 

the  country  in  which  the  telegram  is 

presented. 

[42]     §  2.  These  characters  are  as  follows: 

Letters:  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  G,  H,  I,  J,  K, 
L,  M,  N,  0,  P,  Q,  R,  S,  T,  U,  V,  W,  X,  Y, 
Z,fi. 

Figures:  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  o. 

Signs  of  punctuation:  Full  stop  (.)> 
comma  (,),  colon  (:),  note  of  interrogation 
(?),  apostrophe  ('),  hyphen  or  dash  ( — ). 

Other  signs  used  in  writing:  Brackets  ( ), 

fraction  bar  (/),  underline  ( ). 

M  §  3-  Every  footnote,  insertion,  era- 
sure, elimination  or  correction  must  be 
approved  by  the  sender  or  his  representa- 
tive. 

M  §4.  (i)  Roman  figures  are  ad- 
mitted as  written,  but  are  transmitted  as 
Arabic  figures. 

[45]  (2)  If,  however,  the  sender  of  a 
telegram  desires  the  addressee  to  be  in- 
formed that  Roman  figures  are  intended, 
he  writes  the  Arabic  figure  or  figures,  and 
inserts  the  word  "  Roman"  in  front  of  the 
figure  or  figures. 

[46]  §5-  The  multiplication  sign  (X)  is 
admitted,  although  it  has  no  equivalent 
in  the  table  in  these  Regulations.  It  is 
replaced  in  transmission  by  the  letter  X, 
which  is  counted  as  a  separate  word. 
[*7]  §6.  (i)  Expressions  such  as  30%  30m% 
30™,  i°,  2°,  <^,  i'  (minute),  i"  (second), 
etc.,  cannot  be  reproduced  by  the  instru- 
ments ;  senders  must  substitute  an  equiva- 
lent which  can  be  telegraphed,  thus  for 
example,  for  the  expressions  quoted  above: 
30  power  a  (or  30  a),  trentieme,  trentaine, 


[37]  i°  de  chiffres  arabes,  de  groupes  pu 
de  series  de  chiffres  arabes  ayant  une  sig- 
nification secrete; 

[8S]  2°  de  mots,  noms,  expressions  ou 
reunions  de  lettres,  &  Texclusion  de  la  let- 
tre  i,  ne  remplissant  pas  les  conditions  du 
langage  clair  (art.  9)  ou  du  langage  con- 
venu  (art.  10